44 files changed, 12119 insertions, 11972 deletions

diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/bmaptool.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/bmaptool.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f6f0e6afaf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/bmaptool.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Flashing Images Using ``bmaptool``
+**********************************
+
+A fast and easy way to flash an image to a bootable device is to use
+bmaptool, which is integrated into the OpenEmbedded build system.
+bmaptool is a generic tool that creates a file's block map (bmap) and
+then uses that map to copy the file. As compared to traditional tools
+such as dd or cp, bmaptool can copy (or flash) large files like raw
+system image files much faster.
+
+.. note::
+
+   -  If you are using Ubuntu or Debian distributions, you can install
+      the ``bmap-tools`` package using the following command and then
+      use the tool without specifying ``PATH`` even from the root
+      account::
+
+         $ sudo apt install bmap-tools
+
+   -  If you are unable to install the ``bmap-tools`` package, you will
+      need to build bmaptool before using it. Use the following command::
+
+         $ bitbake bmaptool-native
+
+Following, is an example that shows how to flash a Wic image. Realize
+that while this example uses a Wic image, you can use bmaptool to flash
+any type of image. Use these steps to flash an image using bmaptool:
+
+#. *Update your local.conf File:* You need to have the following set
+   in your ``local.conf`` file before building your image::
+
+      IMAGE_FSTYPES += "wic wic.bmap"
+
+#. *Get Your Image:* Either have your image ready (pre-built with the
+   :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`
+   setting previously mentioned) or take the step to build the image::
+
+      $ bitbake image
+
+#. *Flash the Device:* Flash the device with the image by using bmaptool
+   depending on your particular setup. The following commands assume the
+   image resides in the :term:`Build Directory`'s ``deploy/images/`` area:
+
+   -  If you have write access to the media, use this command form::
+
+         $ oe-run-native bmaptool-native bmaptool copy build-directory/tmp/deploy/images/machine/image.wic /dev/sdX
+
+   -  If you do not have write access to the media, set your permissions
+      first and then use the same command form::
+
+         $ sudo chmod 666 /dev/sdX
+         $ oe-run-native bmaptool-native bmaptool copy build-directory/tmp/deploy/images/machine/image.wic /dev/sdX
+
+For help on the ``bmaptool`` command, use the following command::
+
+   $ bmaptool --help
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/build-quality.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/build-quality.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..713ea3a48e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/build-quality.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,409 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Maintaining Build Output Quality
+********************************
+
+Many factors can influence the quality of a build. For example, if you
+upgrade a recipe to use a new version of an upstream software package or
+you experiment with some new configuration options, subtle changes can
+occur that you might not detect until later. Consider the case where
+your recipe is using a newer version of an upstream package. In this
+case, a new version of a piece of software might introduce an optional
+dependency on another library, which is auto-detected. If that library
+has already been built when the software is building, the software will
+link to the built library and that library will be pulled into your
+image along with the new software even if you did not want the library.
+
+The :ref:`ref-classes-buildhistory` class helps you maintain the quality of
+your build output. You can use the class to highlight unexpected and possibly
+unwanted changes in the build output. When you enable build history, it records
+information about the contents of each package and image and then commits that
+information to a local Git repository where you can examine the information.
+
+The remainder of this section describes the following:
+
+-  :ref:`How you can enable and disable build history <dev-manual/build-quality:enabling and disabling build history>`
+
+-  :ref:`How to understand what the build history contains <dev-manual/build-quality:understanding what the build history contains>`
+
+-  :ref:`How to limit the information used for build history <dev-manual/build-quality:using build history to gather image information only>`
+
+-  :ref:`How to examine the build history from both a command-line and web interface <dev-manual/build-quality:examining build history information>`
+
+Enabling and Disabling Build History
+====================================
+
+Build history is disabled by default. To enable it, add the following
+:term:`INHERIT` statement and set the :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` variable to
+"1" at the end of your ``conf/local.conf`` file found in the
+:term:`Build Directory`::
+
+   INHERIT += "buildhistory"
+   BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT = "1"
+
+Enabling build history as
+previously described causes the OpenEmbedded build system to collect
+build output information and commit it as a single commit to a local
+:ref:`overview-manual/development-environment:git` repository.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Enabling build history increases your build times slightly,
+   particularly for images, and increases the amount of disk space used
+   during the build.
+
+You can disable build history by removing the previous statements from
+your ``conf/local.conf`` file.
+
+Understanding What the Build History Contains
+=============================================
+
+Build history information is kept in ``${``\ :term:`TOPDIR`\ ``}/buildhistory``
+in the :term:`Build Directory` as defined by the :term:`BUILDHISTORY_DIR`
+variable. Here is an example abbreviated listing:
+
+.. image:: figures/buildhistory.png
+   :align: center
+   :width: 50%
+
+At the top level, there is a ``metadata-revs`` file that lists the
+revisions of the repositories for the enabled layers when the build was
+produced. The rest of the data splits into separate ``packages``,
+``images`` and ``sdk`` directories, the contents of which are described
+as follows.
+
+Build History Package Information
+---------------------------------
+
+The history for each package contains a text file that has name-value
+pairs with information about the package. For example,
+``buildhistory/packages/i586-poky-linux/busybox/busybox/latest``
+contains the following:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+   PV = 1.22.1
+   PR = r32
+   RPROVIDES =
+   RDEPENDS = glibc (>= 2.20) update-alternatives-opkg
+   RRECOMMENDS = busybox-syslog busybox-udhcpc update-rc.d
+   PKGSIZE = 540168
+   FILES = /usr/bin/* /usr/sbin/* /usr/lib/busybox/* /usr/lib/lib*.so.* \
+      /etc /com /var /bin/* /sbin/* /lib/*.so.* /lib/udev/rules.d \
+      /usr/lib/udev/rules.d /usr/share/busybox /usr/lib/busybox/* \
+      /usr/share/pixmaps /usr/share/applications /usr/share/idl \
+      /usr/share/omf /usr/share/sounds /usr/lib/bonobo/servers
+   FILELIST = /bin/busybox /bin/busybox.nosuid /bin/busybox.suid /bin/sh \
+      /etc/busybox.links.nosuid /etc/busybox.links.suid
+
+Most of these
+name-value pairs correspond to variables used to produce the package.
+The exceptions are ``FILELIST``, which is the actual list of files in
+the package, and ``PKGSIZE``, which is the total size of files in the
+package in bytes.
+
+There is also a file that corresponds to the recipe from which the package
+came (e.g. ``buildhistory/packages/i586-poky-linux/busybox/latest``):
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+   PV = 1.22.1
+   PR = r32
+   DEPENDS = initscripts kern-tools-native update-rc.d-native \
+      virtual/i586-poky-linux-compilerlibs virtual/i586-poky-linux-gcc \
+      virtual/libc virtual/update-alternatives
+   PACKAGES = busybox-ptest busybox-httpd busybox-udhcpd busybox-udhcpc \
+      busybox-syslog busybox-mdev busybox-hwclock busybox-dbg \
+      busybox-staticdev busybox-dev busybox-doc busybox-locale busybox
+
+Finally, for those recipes fetched from a version control system (e.g.,
+Git), there is a file that lists source revisions that are specified in
+the recipe and the actual revisions used during the build. Listed
+and actual revisions might differ when
+:term:`SRCREV` is set to
+${:term:`AUTOREV`}. Here is an
+example assuming
+``buildhistory/packages/qemux86-poky-linux/linux-yocto/latest_srcrev``)::
+
+   # SRCREV_machine = "38cd560d5022ed2dbd1ab0dca9642e47c98a0aa1"
+   SRCREV_machine = "38cd560d5022ed2dbd1ab0dca9642e47c98a0aa1"
+   # SRCREV_meta = "a227f20eff056e511d504b2e490f3774ab260d6f"
+   SRCREV_meta ="a227f20eff056e511d504b2e490f3774ab260d6f"
+
+You can use the
+``buildhistory-collect-srcrevs`` command with the ``-a`` option to
+collect the stored :term:`SRCREV` values from build history and report them
+in a format suitable for use in global configuration (e.g.,
+``local.conf`` or a distro include file) to override floating
+:term:`AUTOREV` values to a fixed set of revisions. Here is some example
+output from this command::
+
+   $ buildhistory-collect-srcrevs -a
+   # all-poky-linux
+   SRCREV:pn-ca-certificates = "07de54fdcc5806bde549e1edf60738c6bccf50e8"
+   SRCREV:pn-update-rc.d = "8636cf478d426b568c1be11dbd9346f67e03adac"
+   # core2-64-poky-linux
+   SRCREV:pn-binutils = "87d4632d36323091e731eb07b8aa65f90293da66"
+   SRCREV:pn-btrfs-tools = "8ad326b2f28c044cb6ed9016d7c3285e23b673c8"
+   SRCREV_bzip2-tests:pn-bzip2 = "f9061c030a25de5b6829e1abf373057309c734c0"
+   SRCREV:pn-e2fsprogs = "02540dedd3ddc52c6ae8aaa8a95ce75c3f8be1c0"
+   SRCREV:pn-file = "504206e53a89fd6eed71aeaf878aa3512418eab1"
+   SRCREV_glibc:pn-glibc = "24962427071fa532c3c48c918e9d64d719cc8a6c"
+   SRCREV:pn-gnome-desktop-testing = "e346cd4ed2e2102c9b195b614f3c642d23f5f6e7"
+   SRCREV:pn-init-system-helpers = "dbd9197569c0935029acd5c9b02b84c68fd937ee"
+   SRCREV:pn-kmod = "b6ecfc916a17eab8f93be5b09f4e4f845aabd3d1"
+   SRCREV:pn-libnsl2 = "82245c0c58add79a8e34ab0917358217a70e5100"
+   SRCREV:pn-libseccomp = "57357d2741a3b3d3e8425889a6b79a130e0fa2f3"
+   SRCREV:pn-libxcrypt = "50cf2b6dd4fdf04309445f2eec8de7051d953abf"
+   SRCREV:pn-ncurses = "51d0fd9cc3edb975f04224f29f777f8f448e8ced"
+   SRCREV:pn-procps = "19a508ea121c0c4ac6d0224575a036de745eaaf8"
+   SRCREV:pn-psmisc = "5fab6b7ab385080f1db725d6803136ec1841a15f"
+   SRCREV:pn-ptest-runner = "bcb82804daa8f725b6add259dcef2067e61a75aa"
+   SRCREV:pn-shared-mime-info = "18e558fa1c8b90b86757ade09a4ba4d6a6cf8f70"
+   SRCREV:pn-zstd = "e47e674cd09583ff0503f0f6defd6d23d8b718d3"
+   # qemux86_64-poky-linux
+   SRCREV_machine:pn-linux-yocto = "20301aeb1a64164b72bc72af58802b315e025c9c"
+   SRCREV_meta:pn-linux-yocto = "2d38a472b21ae343707c8bd64ac68a9eaca066a0"
+   # x86_64-linux
+   SRCREV:pn-binutils-cross-x86_64 = "87d4632d36323091e731eb07b8aa65f90293da66"
+   SRCREV_glibc:pn-cross-localedef-native = "24962427071fa532c3c48c918e9d64d719cc8a6c"
+   SRCREV_localedef:pn-cross-localedef-native = "794da69788cbf9bf57b59a852f9f11307663fa87"
+   SRCREV:pn-debianutils-native = "de14223e5bffe15e374a441302c528ffc1cbed57"
+   SRCREV:pn-libmodulemd-native = "ee80309bc766d781a144e6879419b29f444d94eb"
+   SRCREV:pn-virglrenderer-native = "363915595e05fb252e70d6514be2f0c0b5ca312b"
+   SRCREV:pn-zstd-native = "e47e674cd09583ff0503f0f6defd6d23d8b718d3"
+
+.. note::
+
+   Here are some notes on using the ``buildhistory-collect-srcrevs`` command:
+
+   -  By default, only values where the :term:`SRCREV` was not hardcoded
+      (usually when :term:`AUTOREV` is used) are reported. Use the ``-a``
+      option to see all :term:`SRCREV` values.
+
+   -  The output statements might not have any effect if overrides are
+      applied elsewhere in the build system configuration. Use the
+      ``-f`` option to add the ``forcevariable`` override to each output
+      line if you need to work around this restriction.
+
+   -  The script does apply special handling when building for multiple
+      machines. However, the script does place a comment before each set
+      of values that specifies which triplet to which they belong as
+      previously shown (e.g., ``i586-poky-linux``).
+
+Build History Image Information
+-------------------------------
+
+The files produced for each image are as follows:
+
+-  ``image-files:`` A directory containing selected files from the root
+   filesystem. The files are defined by
+   :term:`BUILDHISTORY_IMAGE_FILES`.
+
+-  ``build-id.txt:`` Human-readable information about the build
+   configuration and metadata source revisions. This file contains the
+   full build header as printed by BitBake.
+
+-  ``*.dot:`` Dependency graphs for the image that are compatible with
+   ``graphviz``.
+
+-  ``files-in-image.txt:`` A list of files in the image with
+   permissions, owner, group, size, and symlink information.
+
+-  ``image-info.txt:`` A text file containing name-value pairs with
+   information about the image. See the following listing example for
+   more information.
+
+-  ``installed-package-names.txt:`` A list of installed packages by name
+   only.
+
+-  ``installed-package-sizes.txt:`` A list of installed packages ordered
+   by size.
+
+-  ``installed-packages.txt:`` A list of installed packages with full
+   package filenames.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Installed package information is able to be gathered and produced
+   even if package management is disabled for the final image.
+
+Here is an example of ``image-info.txt``:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+   DISTRO = poky
+   DISTRO_VERSION = 3.4+snapshot-a0245d7be08f3d24ea1875e9f8872aa6bbff93be
+   USER_CLASSES = buildstats
+   IMAGE_CLASSES = qemuboot qemuboot license_image
+   IMAGE_FEATURES = debug-tweaks
+   IMAGE_LINGUAS =
+   IMAGE_INSTALL = packagegroup-core-boot speex speexdsp
+   BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS =
+   NO_RECOMMENDATIONS =
+   PACKAGE_EXCLUDE =
+   ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND = write_package_manifest; license_create_manifest; cve_check_write_rootfs_manifest;   ssh_allow_empty_password;  ssh_allow_root_login;  postinst_enable_logging;  rootfs_update_timestamp;   write_image_test_data;   empty_var_volatile;   sort_passwd; rootfs_reproducible;
+   IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND =  buildhistory_get_imageinfo ;
+   IMAGESIZE = 9265
+
+Other than ``IMAGESIZE``,
+which is the total size of the files in the image in Kbytes, the
+name-value pairs are variables that may have influenced the content of
+the image. This information is often useful when you are trying to
+determine why a change in the package or file listings has occurred.
+
+Using Build History to Gather Image Information Only
+----------------------------------------------------
+
+As you can see, build history produces image information, including
+dependency graphs, so you can see why something was pulled into the
+image. If you are just interested in this information and not interested
+in collecting specific package or SDK information, you can enable
+writing only image information without any history by adding the
+following to your ``conf/local.conf`` file found in the
+:term:`Build Directory`::
+
+   INHERIT += "buildhistory"
+   BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT = "0"
+   BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES = "image"
+
+Here, you set the
+:term:`BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES`
+variable to use the image feature only.
+
+Build History SDK Information
+-----------------------------
+
+Build history collects similar information on the contents of SDKs (e.g.
+``bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename``) as compared to information it
+collects for images. Furthermore, this information differs depending on
+whether an extensible or standard SDK is being produced.
+
+The following list shows the files produced for SDKs:
+
+-  ``files-in-sdk.txt:`` A list of files in the SDK with permissions,
+   owner, group, size, and symlink information. This list includes both
+   the host and target parts of the SDK.
+
+-  ``sdk-info.txt:`` A text file containing name-value pairs with
+   information about the SDK. See the following listing example for more
+   information.
+
+-  ``sstate-task-sizes.txt:`` A text file containing name-value pairs
+   with information about task group sizes (e.g. :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot`
+   tasks have a total size). The ``sstate-task-sizes.txt`` file exists
+   only when an extensible SDK is created.
+
+-  ``sstate-package-sizes.txt:`` A text file containing name-value pairs
+   with information for the shared-state packages and sizes in the SDK.
+   The ``sstate-package-sizes.txt`` file exists only when an extensible
+   SDK is created.
+
+-  ``sdk-files:`` A folder that contains copies of the files mentioned
+   in ``BUILDHISTORY_SDK_FILES`` if the files are present in the output.
+   Additionally, the default value of ``BUILDHISTORY_SDK_FILES`` is
+   specific to the extensible SDK although you can set it differently if
+   you would like to pull in specific files from the standard SDK.
+
+   The default files are ``conf/local.conf``, ``conf/bblayers.conf``,
+   ``conf/auto.conf``, ``conf/locked-sigs.inc``, and
+   ``conf/devtool.conf``. Thus, for an extensible SDK, these files get
+   copied into the ``sdk-files`` directory.
+
+-  The following information appears under each of the ``host`` and
+   ``target`` directories for the portions of the SDK that run on the
+   host and on the target, respectively:
+
+   .. note::
+
+      The following files for the most part are empty when producing an
+      extensible SDK because this type of SDK is not constructed from
+      packages as is the standard SDK.
+
+   -  ``depends.dot:`` Dependency graph for the SDK that is compatible
+      with ``graphviz``.
+
+   -  ``installed-package-names.txt:`` A list of installed packages by
+      name only.
+
+   -  ``installed-package-sizes.txt:`` A list of installed packages
+      ordered by size.
+
+   -  ``installed-packages.txt:`` A list of installed packages with full
+      package filenames.
+
+Here is an example of ``sdk-info.txt``:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+   DISTRO = poky
+   DISTRO_VERSION = 1.3+snapshot-20130327
+   SDK_NAME = poky-glibc-i686-arm
+   SDK_VERSION = 1.3+snapshot
+   SDKMACHINE =
+   SDKIMAGE_FEATURES = dev-pkgs dbg-pkgs
+   BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS =
+   SDKSIZE = 352712
+
+Other than ``SDKSIZE``, which is
+the total size of the files in the SDK in Kbytes, the name-value pairs
+are variables that might have influenced the content of the SDK. This
+information is often useful when you are trying to determine why a
+change in the package or file listings has occurred.
+
+Examining Build History Information
+-----------------------------------
+
+You can examine build history output from the command line or from a web
+interface.
+
+To see any changes that have occurred (assuming you have
+:term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` = "1"),
+you can simply use any Git command that allows you to view the history
+of a repository. Here is one method::
+
+   $ git log -p
+
+You need to realize,
+however, that this method does show changes that are not significant
+(e.g. a package's size changing by a few bytes).
+
+There is a command-line tool called ``buildhistory-diff``, though,
+that queries the Git repository and prints just the differences that
+might be significant in human-readable form. Here is an example::
+
+   $ poky/poky/scripts/buildhistory-diff . HEAD^
+   Changes to images/qemux86_64/glibc/core-image-minimal (files-in-image.txt):
+      /etc/anotherpkg.conf was added
+      /sbin/anotherpkg was added
+      * (installed-package-names.txt):
+      *   anotherpkg was added
+   Changes to images/qemux86_64/glibc/core-image-minimal (installed-package-names.txt):
+      anotherpkg was added
+   packages/qemux86_64-poky-linux/v86d: PACKAGES: added "v86d-extras"
+      * PR changed from "r0" to "r1"
+      * PV changed from "0.1.10" to "0.1.12"
+   packages/qemux86_64-poky-linux/v86d/v86d: PKGSIZE changed from 110579 to 144381 (+30%)
+      * PR changed from "r0" to "r1"
+      * PV changed from "0.1.10" to "0.1.12"
+
+.. note::
+
+   The ``buildhistory-diff`` tool requires the ``GitPython``
+   package. Be sure to install it using Pip3 as follows::
+
+         $ pip3 install GitPython --user
+
+
+   Alternatively, you can install ``python3-git`` using the appropriate
+   distribution package manager (e.g. ``apt``, ``dnf``, or ``zipper``).
+
+To see changes to the build history using a web interface, follow the
+instruction in the ``README`` file
+:yocto_git:`here </buildhistory-web/>`.
+
+Here is a sample screenshot of the interface:
+
+.. image:: figures/buildhistory-web.png
+   :width: 100%
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/building.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/building.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fe502690dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/building.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,942 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Building
+********
+
+This section describes various build procedures, such as the steps
+needed for a simple build, building a target for multiple configurations,
+generating an image for more than one machine, and so forth.
+
+Building a Simple Image
+=======================
+
+In the development environment, you need to build an image whenever you
+change hardware support, add or change system libraries, or add or
+change services that have dependencies. There are several methods that allow
+you to build an image within the Yocto Project. This section presents
+the basic steps you need to build a simple image using BitBake from a
+build host running Linux.
+
+.. note::
+
+   -  For information on how to build an image using
+      :term:`Toaster`, see the
+      :doc:`/toaster-manual/index`.
+
+   -  For information on how to use ``devtool`` to build images, see the
+      ":ref:`sdk-manual/extensible:using \`\`devtool\`\` in your sdk workflow`"
+      section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the
+      Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual.
+
+   -  For a quick example on how to build an image using the
+      OpenEmbedded build system, see the
+      :doc:`/brief-yoctoprojectqs/index` document.
+
+   -  You can also use the `Yocto Project BitBake
+      <https://marketplace.visualstudio.com/items?itemName=yocto-project.yocto-bitbake>`__
+      extension for Visual Studio Code to build images.
+
+The build process creates an entire Linux distribution from source and
+places it in your :term:`Build Directory` under ``tmp/deploy/images``. For
+detailed information on the build process using BitBake, see the
+":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:images`" section in the Yocto Project Overview
+and Concepts Manual.
+
+The following figure and list overviews the build process:
+
+.. image:: figures/bitbake-build-flow.png
+   :width: 100%
+
+#. *Set up Your Host Development System to Support Development Using the
+   Yocto Project*: See the ":doc:`start`" section for options on how to get a
+   build host ready to use the Yocto Project.
+
+#. *Initialize the Build Environment:* Initialize the build environment
+   by sourcing the build environment script (i.e.
+   :ref:`structure-core-script`)::
+
+      $ source oe-init-build-env [build_dir]
+
+   When you use the initialization script, the OpenEmbedded build system
+   uses ``build`` as the default :term:`Build Directory` in your current work
+   directory. You can use a `build_dir` argument with the script to
+   specify a different :term:`Build Directory`.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      A common practice is to use a different :term:`Build Directory` for
+      different targets; for example, ``~/build/x86`` for a ``qemux86``
+      target, and ``~/build/arm`` for a ``qemuarm`` target. In any
+      event, it's typically cleaner to locate the :term:`Build Directory`
+      somewhere outside of your source directory.
+
+#. *Make Sure Your* ``local.conf`` *File is Correct*: Ensure the
+   ``conf/local.conf`` configuration file, which is found in the
+   :term:`Build Directory`, is set up how you want it. This file defines many
+   aspects of the build environment including the target machine architecture
+   through the :term:`MACHINE` variable, the packaging format used during
+   the build (:term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES`), and a centralized tarball download
+   directory through the :term:`DL_DIR` variable.
+
+#. *Build the Image:* Build the image using the ``bitbake`` command::
+
+      $ bitbake target
+
+   .. note::
+
+      For information on BitBake, see the :doc:`bitbake:index`.
+
+   The target is the name of the recipe you want to build. Common
+   targets are the images in ``meta/recipes-core/images``,
+   ``meta/recipes-sato/images``, and so forth all found in the
+   :term:`Source Directory`. Alternatively, the target
+   can be the name of a recipe for a specific piece of software such as
+   BusyBox. For more details about the images the OpenEmbedded build
+   system supports, see the
+   ":ref:`ref-manual/images:Images`" chapter in the Yocto
+   Project Reference Manual.
+
+   As an example, the following command builds the
+   ``core-image-minimal`` image::
+
+      $ bitbake core-image-minimal
+
+   Once an
+   image has been built, it often needs to be installed. The images and
+   kernels built by the OpenEmbedded build system are placed in the
+   :term:`Build Directory` in ``tmp/deploy/images``. For information on how to
+   run pre-built images such as ``qemux86`` and ``qemuarm``, see the
+   :doc:`/sdk-manual/index` manual. For
+   information about how to install these images, see the documentation
+   for your particular board or machine.
+
+Building Images for Multiple Targets Using Multiple Configurations
+==================================================================
+
+You can use a single ``bitbake`` command to build multiple images or
+packages for different targets where each image or package requires a
+different configuration (multiple configuration builds). The builds, in
+this scenario, are sometimes referred to as "multiconfigs", and this
+section uses that term throughout.
+
+This section describes how to set up for multiple configuration builds
+and how to account for cross-build dependencies between the
+multiconfigs.
+
+Setting Up and Running a Multiple Configuration Build
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+To accomplish a multiple configuration build, you must define each
+target's configuration separately using a parallel configuration file in
+the :term:`Build Directory` or configuration directory within a layer, and you
+must follow a required file hierarchy. Additionally, you must enable the
+multiple configuration builds in your ``local.conf`` file.
+
+Follow these steps to set up and execute multiple configuration builds:
+
+-  *Create Separate Configuration Files*: You need to create a single
+   configuration file for each build target (each multiconfig).
+   The configuration definitions are implementation dependent but often
+   each configuration file will define the machine and the
+   temporary directory BitBake uses for the build. Whether the same
+   temporary directory (:term:`TMPDIR`) can be shared will depend on what is
+   similar and what is different between the configurations. Multiple MACHINE
+   targets can share the same (:term:`TMPDIR`) as long as the rest of the
+   configuration is the same, multiple :term:`DISTRO` settings would need separate
+   (:term:`TMPDIR`) directories.
+
+   For example, consider a scenario with two different multiconfigs for the same
+   :term:`MACHINE`: "qemux86" built
+   for two distributions such as "poky" and "poky-lsb". In this case,
+   you would need to use the different :term:`TMPDIR`.
+
+   Here is an example showing the minimal statements needed in a
+   configuration file for a "qemux86" target whose temporary build
+   directory is ``tmpmultix86``::
+
+      MACHINE = "qemux86"
+      TMPDIR = "${TOPDIR}/tmpmultix86"
+
+   The location for these multiconfig configuration files is specific.
+   They must reside in the current :term:`Build Directory` in a sub-directory of
+   ``conf`` named ``multiconfig`` or within a layer's ``conf`` directory
+   under a directory named ``multiconfig``. Here is an example that defines
+   two configuration files for the "x86" and "arm" multiconfigs:
+
+   .. image:: figures/multiconfig_files.png
+      :align: center
+      :width: 50%
+
+   The usual :term:`BBPATH` search path is used to locate multiconfig files in
+   a similar way to other conf files.
+
+-  *Add the BitBake Multi-configuration Variable to the Local
+   Configuration File*: Use the
+   :term:`BBMULTICONFIG`
+   variable in your ``conf/local.conf`` configuration file to specify
+   each multiconfig. Continuing with the example from the previous
+   figure, the :term:`BBMULTICONFIG` variable needs to enable two
+   multiconfigs: "x86" and "arm" by specifying each configuration file::
+
+      BBMULTICONFIG = "x86 arm"
+
+   .. note::
+
+      A "default" configuration already exists by definition. This
+      configuration is named: "" (i.e. empty string) and is defined by
+      the variables coming from your ``local.conf``
+      file. Consequently, the previous example actually adds two
+      additional configurations to your build: "arm" and "x86" along
+      with "".
+
+-  *Launch BitBake*: Use the following BitBake command form to launch
+   the multiple configuration build::
+
+      $ bitbake [mc:multiconfigname:]target [[[mc:multiconfigname:]target] ... ]
+
+   For the example in this section, the following command applies::
+
+      $ bitbake mc:x86:core-image-minimal mc:arm:core-image-sato mc::core-image-base
+
+   The previous BitBake command builds a ``core-image-minimal`` image
+   that is configured through the ``x86.conf`` configuration file, a
+   ``core-image-sato`` image that is configured through the ``arm.conf``
+   configuration file and a ``core-image-base`` that is configured
+   through your ``local.conf`` configuration file.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Support for multiple configuration builds in the Yocto Project &DISTRO;
+   (&DISTRO_NAME;) Release does not include Shared State (sstate)
+   optimizations. Consequently, if a build uses the same object twice
+   in, for example, two different :term:`TMPDIR`
+   directories, the build either loads from an existing sstate cache for
+   that build at the start or builds the object fresh.
+
+Enabling Multiple Configuration Build Dependencies
+--------------------------------------------------
+
+Sometimes dependencies can exist between targets (multiconfigs) in a
+multiple configuration build. For example, suppose that in order to
+build a ``core-image-sato`` image for an "x86" multiconfig, the root
+filesystem of an "arm" multiconfig must exist. This dependency is
+essentially that the
+:ref:`ref-tasks-image` task in the
+``core-image-sato`` recipe depends on the completion of the
+:ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task of the
+``core-image-minimal`` recipe.
+
+To enable dependencies in a multiple configuration build, you must
+declare the dependencies in the recipe using the following statement
+form::
+
+   task_or_package[mcdepends] = "mc:from_multiconfig:to_multiconfig:recipe_name:task_on_which_to_depend"
+
+To better show how to use this statement, consider the example scenario
+from the first paragraph of this section. The following statement needs
+to be added to the recipe that builds the ``core-image-sato`` image::
+
+   do_image[mcdepends] = "mc:x86:arm:core-image-minimal:do_rootfs"
+
+In this example, the `from_multiconfig` is "x86". The `to_multiconfig` is "arm". The
+task on which the :ref:`ref-tasks-image` task in the recipe depends is the
+:ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task from the ``core-image-minimal`` recipe associated
+with the "arm" multiconfig.
+
+Once you set up this dependency, you can build the "x86" multiconfig
+using a BitBake command as follows::
+
+   $ bitbake mc:x86:core-image-sato
+
+This command executes all the tasks needed to create the
+``core-image-sato`` image for the "x86" multiconfig. Because of the
+dependency, BitBake also executes through the :ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task for the
+"arm" multiconfig build.
+
+Having a recipe depend on the root filesystem of another build might not
+seem that useful. Consider this change to the statement in the
+``core-image-sato`` recipe::
+
+   do_image[mcdepends] = "mc:x86:arm:core-image-minimal:do_image"
+
+In this case, BitBake must
+create the ``core-image-minimal`` image for the "arm" build since the
+"x86" build depends on it.
+
+Because "x86" and "arm" are enabled for multiple configuration builds
+and have separate configuration files, BitBake places the artifacts for
+each build in the respective temporary build directories (i.e.
+:term:`TMPDIR`).
+
+Building an Initial RAM Filesystem (Initramfs) Image
+====================================================
+
+An initial RAM filesystem (:term:`Initramfs`) image provides a temporary root
+filesystem used for early system initialization, typically providing tools and
+loading modules needed to locate and mount the final root filesystem.
+
+Follow these steps to create an :term:`Initramfs` image:
+
+#. *Create the Initramfs Image Recipe:* You can reference the
+   ``core-image-minimal-initramfs.bb`` recipe found in the
+   ``meta/recipes-core`` directory of the :term:`Source Directory`
+   as an example from which to work.
+
+#. *Decide if You Need to Bundle the Initramfs Image Into the Kernel
+   Image:* If you want the :term:`Initramfs` image that is built to be bundled
+   in with the kernel image, set the :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE`
+   variable to ``"1"`` in your ``local.conf`` configuration file and set the
+   :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE` variable in the recipe that builds the kernel image.
+
+   Setting the :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE` flag causes the :term:`Initramfs`
+   image to be unpacked into the ``${B}/usr/`` directory. The unpacked
+   :term:`Initramfs` image is then passed to the kernel's ``Makefile`` using the
+   :term:`CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE` variable, allowing the :term:`Initramfs`
+   image to be built into the kernel normally.
+
+#. *Optionally Add Items to the Initramfs Image Through the Initramfs
+   Image Recipe:* If you add items to the :term:`Initramfs` image by way of its
+   recipe, you should use :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL` rather than
+   :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL`. :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL` gives more direct control of
+   what is added to the image as compared to the defaults you might not
+   necessarily want that are set by the :ref:`ref-classes-image`
+   or :ref:`ref-classes-core-image` classes.
+
+#. *Build the Kernel Image and the Initramfs Image:* Build your kernel
+   image using BitBake. Because the :term:`Initramfs` image recipe is a
+   dependency of the kernel image, the :term:`Initramfs` image is built as well
+   and bundled with the kernel image if you used the
+   :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE` variable described earlier.
+
+Bundling an Initramfs Image From a Separate Multiconfig
+-------------------------------------------------------
+
+There may be a case where we want to build an :term:`Initramfs` image which does not
+inherit the same distro policy as our main image, for example, we may want
+our main image to use ``TCLIBC="glibc"``, but to use ``TCLIBC="musl"`` in our :term:`Initramfs`
+image to keep a smaller footprint. However, by performing the steps mentioned
+above the :term:`Initramfs` image will inherit ``TCLIBC="glibc"`` without allowing us
+to override it.
+
+To achieve this, you need to perform some additional steps:
+
+#. *Create a multiconfig for your Initramfs image:* You can perform the steps
+   on ":ref:`dev-manual/building:building images for multiple targets using multiple configurations`" to create a separate multiconfig.
+   For the sake of simplicity let's assume such multiconfig is called: ``initramfscfg.conf`` and
+   contains the variables::
+
+      TMPDIR="${TOPDIR}/tmp-initramfscfg"
+      TCLIBC="musl"
+
+#. *Set additional Initramfs variables on your main configuration:*
+   Additionally, on your main configuration (``local.conf``) you need to set the
+   variables::
+
+     INITRAMFS_MULTICONFIG = "initramfscfg"
+     INITRAMFS_DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE = "${TOPDIR}/tmp-initramfscfg/deploy/images/${MACHINE}"
+
+   The variables :term:`INITRAMFS_MULTICONFIG` and :term:`INITRAMFS_DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`
+   are used to create a multiconfig dependency from the kernel to the :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE`
+   to be built coming from the ``initramfscfg`` multiconfig, and to let the
+   buildsystem know where the :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE` will be located.
+
+   Building a system with such configuration will build the kernel using the
+   main configuration but the :ref:`ref-tasks-bundle_initramfs` task will grab the
+   selected :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE` from :term:`INITRAMFS_DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`
+   instead, resulting in a musl based :term:`Initramfs` image bundled in the kernel
+   but a glibc based main image.
+
+   The same is applicable to avoid inheriting :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` on :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE`
+   or to build a different :term:`DISTRO` for it such as ``poky-tiny``.
+
+
+Building a Tiny System
+======================
+
+Very small distributions have some significant advantages such as
+requiring less on-die or in-package memory (cheaper), better performance
+through efficient cache usage, lower power requirements due to less
+memory, faster boot times, and reduced development overhead. Some
+real-world examples where a very small distribution gives you distinct
+advantages are digital cameras, medical devices, and small headless
+systems.
+
+This section presents information that shows you how you can trim your
+distribution to even smaller sizes than the ``poky-tiny`` distribution,
+which is around 5 Mbytes, that can be built out-of-the-box using the
+Yocto Project.
+
+Tiny System Overview
+--------------------
+
+The following list presents the overall steps you need to consider and
+perform to create distributions with smaller root filesystems, achieve
+faster boot times, maintain your critical functionality, and avoid
+initial RAM disks:
+
+-  :ref:`Determine your goals and guiding principles
+   <dev-manual/building:goals and guiding principles>`
+
+-  :ref:`dev-manual/building:understand what contributes to your image size`
+
+-  :ref:`Reduce the size of the root filesystem
+   <dev-manual/building:trim the root filesystem>`
+
+-  :ref:`Reduce the size of the kernel <dev-manual/building:trim the kernel>`
+
+-  :ref:`dev-manual/building:remove package management requirements`
+
+-  :ref:`dev-manual/building:look for other ways to minimize size`
+
+-  :ref:`dev-manual/building:iterate on the process`
+
+Goals and Guiding Principles
+----------------------------
+
+Before you can reach your destination, you need to know where you are
+going. Here is an example list that you can use as a guide when creating
+very small distributions:
+
+-  Determine how much space you need (e.g. a kernel that is 1 Mbyte or
+   less and a root filesystem that is 3 Mbytes or less).
+
+-  Find the areas that are currently taking 90% of the space and
+   concentrate on reducing those areas.
+
+-  Do not create any difficult "hacks" to achieve your goals.
+
+-  Leverage the device-specific options.
+
+-  Work in a separate layer so that you keep changes isolated. For
+   information on how to create layers, see the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/layers:understanding and creating layers`" section.
+
+Understand What Contributes to Your Image Size
+----------------------------------------------
+
+It is easiest to have something to start with when creating your own
+distribution. You can use the Yocto Project out-of-the-box to create the
+``poky-tiny`` distribution. Ultimately, you will want to make changes in
+your own distribution that are likely modeled after ``poky-tiny``.
+
+.. note::
+
+   To use ``poky-tiny`` in your build, set the :term:`DISTRO` variable in your
+   ``local.conf`` file to "poky-tiny" as described in the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/custom-distribution:creating your own distribution`"
+   section.
+
+Understanding some memory concepts will help you reduce the system size.
+Memory consists of static, dynamic, and temporary memory. Static memory
+is the TEXT (code), DATA (initialized data in the code), and BSS
+(uninitialized data) sections. Dynamic memory represents memory that is
+allocated at runtime: stacks, hash tables, and so forth. Temporary
+memory is recovered after the boot process. This memory consists of
+memory used for decompressing the kernel and for the ``__init__``
+functions.
+
+To help you see where you currently are with kernel and root filesystem
+sizes, you can use two tools found in the :term:`Source Directory`
+in the
+``scripts/tiny/`` directory:
+
+-  ``ksize.py``: Reports component sizes for the kernel build objects.
+
+-  ``dirsize.py``: Reports component sizes for the root filesystem.
+
+This next tool and command help you organize configuration fragments and
+view file dependencies in a human-readable form:
+
+-  ``merge_config.sh``: Helps you manage configuration files and
+   fragments within the kernel. With this tool, you can merge individual
+   configuration fragments together. The tool allows you to make
+   overrides and warns you of any missing configuration options. The
+   tool is ideal for allowing you to iterate on configurations, create
+   minimal configurations, and create configuration files for different
+   machines without having to duplicate your process.
+
+   The ``merge_config.sh`` script is part of the Linux Yocto kernel Git
+   repositories (i.e. ``linux-yocto-3.14``, ``linux-yocto-3.10``,
+   ``linux-yocto-3.8``, and so forth) in the ``scripts/kconfig``
+   directory.
+
+   For more information on configuration fragments, see the
+   ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:creating configuration fragments`"
+   section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual.
+
+-  ``bitbake -u taskexp -g bitbake_target``: Using the BitBake command
+   with these options brings up a Dependency Explorer from which you can
+   view file dependencies. Understanding these dependencies allows you
+   to make informed decisions when cutting out various pieces of the
+   kernel and root filesystem.
+
+Trim the Root Filesystem
+------------------------
+
+The root filesystem is made up of packages for booting, libraries, and
+applications. To change things, you can configure how the packaging
+happens, which changes the way you build them. You can also modify the
+filesystem itself or select a different filesystem.
+
+First, find out what is hogging your root filesystem by running the
+``dirsize.py`` script from your root directory::
+
+   $ cd root-directory-of-image
+   $ dirsize.py 100000 > dirsize-100k.log
+   $ cat dirsize-100k.log
+
+You can apply a filter to the script to ignore files
+under a certain size. The previous example filters out any files below
+100 Kbytes. The sizes reported by the tool are uncompressed, and thus
+will be smaller by a relatively constant factor in a compressed root
+filesystem. When you examine your log file, you can focus on areas of
+the root filesystem that take up large amounts of memory.
+
+You need to be sure that what you eliminate does not cripple the
+functionality you need. One way to see how packages relate to each other
+is by using the Dependency Explorer UI with the BitBake command::
+
+   $ cd image-directory
+   $ bitbake -u taskexp -g image
+
+Use the interface to
+select potential packages you wish to eliminate and see their dependency
+relationships.
+
+When deciding how to reduce the size, get rid of packages that result in
+minimal impact on the feature set. For example, you might not need a VGA
+display. Or, you might be able to get by with ``devtmpfs`` and ``mdev``
+instead of ``udev``.
+
+Use your ``local.conf`` file to make changes. For example, to eliminate
+``udev`` and ``glib``, set the following in the local configuration
+file::
+
+   VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = ""
+
+Finally, you should consider exactly the type of root filesystem you
+need to meet your needs while also reducing its size. For example,
+consider ``cramfs``, ``squashfs``, ``ubifs``, ``ext2``, or an
+:term:`Initramfs` using ``initramfs``. Be aware that ``ext3`` requires a 1
+Mbyte journal. If you are okay with running read-only, you do not need
+this journal.
+
+.. note::
+
+   After each round of elimination, you need to rebuild your system and
+   then use the tools to see the effects of your reductions.
+
+Trim the Kernel
+---------------
+
+The kernel is built by including policies for hardware-independent
+aspects. What subsystems do you enable? For what architecture are you
+building? Which drivers do you build by default?
+
+.. note::
+
+   You can modify the kernel source if you want to help with boot time.
+
+Run the ``ksize.py`` script from the top-level Linux build directory to
+get an idea of what is making up the kernel::
+
+   $ cd top-level-linux-build-directory
+   $ ksize.py > ksize.log
+   $ cat ksize.log
+
+When you examine the log, you will see how much space is taken up with
+the built-in ``.o`` files for drivers, networking, core kernel files,
+filesystem, sound, and so forth. The sizes reported by the tool are
+uncompressed, and thus will be smaller by a relatively constant factor
+in a compressed kernel image. Look to reduce the areas that are large
+and taking up around the "90% rule."
+
+To examine, or drill down, into any particular area, use the ``-d``
+option with the script::
+
+   $ ksize.py -d > ksize.log
+
+Using this option
+breaks out the individual file information for each area of the kernel
+(e.g. drivers, networking, and so forth).
+
+Use your log file to see what you can eliminate from the kernel based on
+features you can let go. For example, if you are not going to need
+sound, you do not need any drivers that support sound.
+
+After figuring out what to eliminate, you need to reconfigure the kernel
+to reflect those changes during the next build. You could run
+``menuconfig`` and make all your changes at once. However, that makes it
+difficult to see the effects of your individual eliminations and also
+makes it difficult to replicate the changes for perhaps another target
+device. A better method is to start with no configurations using
+``allnoconfig``, create configuration fragments for individual changes,
+and then manage the fragments into a single configuration file using
+``merge_config.sh``. The tool makes it easy for you to iterate using the
+configuration change and build cycle.
+
+Each time you make configuration changes, you need to rebuild the kernel
+and check to see what impact your changes had on the overall size.
+
+Remove Package Management Requirements
+--------------------------------------
+
+Packaging requirements add size to the image. One way to reduce the size
+of the image is to remove all the packaging requirements from the image.
+This reduction includes both removing the package manager and its unique
+dependencies as well as removing the package management data itself.
+
+To eliminate all the packaging requirements for an image, be sure that
+"package-management" is not part of your
+:term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`
+statement for the image. When you remove this feature, you are removing
+the package manager as well as its dependencies from the root
+filesystem.
+
+Look for Other Ways to Minimize Size
+------------------------------------
+
+Depending on your particular circumstances, other areas that you can
+trim likely exist. The key to finding these areas is through tools and
+methods described here combined with experimentation and iteration. Here
+are a couple of areas to experiment with:
+
+-  ``glibc``: In general, follow this process:
+
+   #. Remove ``glibc`` features from
+      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`
+      that you think you do not need.
+
+   #. Build your distribution.
+
+   #. If the build fails due to missing symbols in a package, determine
+      if you can reconfigure the package to not need those features. For
+      example, change the configuration to not support wide character
+      support as is done for ``ncurses``. Or, if support for those
+      characters is needed, determine what ``glibc`` features provide
+      the support and restore the configuration.
+
+   4. Rebuild and repeat the process.
+
+-  ``busybox``: For BusyBox, use a process similar as described for
+   ``glibc``. A difference is you will need to boot the resulting system
+   to see if you are able to do everything you expect from the running
+   system. You need to be sure to integrate configuration fragments into
+   Busybox because BusyBox handles its own core features and then allows
+   you to add configuration fragments on top.
+
+Iterate on the Process
+----------------------
+
+If you have not reached your goals on system size, you need to iterate
+on the process. The process is the same. Use the tools and see just what
+is taking up 90% of the root filesystem and the kernel. Decide what you
+can eliminate without limiting your device beyond what you need.
+
+Depending on your system, a good place to look might be Busybox, which
+provides a stripped down version of Unix tools in a single, executable
+file. You might be able to drop virtual terminal services or perhaps
+ipv6.
+
+Building Images for More than One Machine
+=========================================
+
+A common scenario developers face is creating images for several
+different machines that use the same software environment. In this
+situation, it is tempting to set the tunings and optimization flags for
+each build specifically for the targeted hardware (i.e. "maxing out" the
+tunings). Doing so can considerably add to build times and package feed
+maintenance collectively for the machines. For example, selecting tunes
+that are extremely specific to a CPU core used in a system might enable
+some micro optimizations in GCC for that particular system but would
+otherwise not gain you much of a performance difference across the other
+systems as compared to using a more general tuning across all the builds
+(e.g. setting :term:`DEFAULTTUNE`
+specifically for each machine's build). Rather than "max out" each
+build's tunings, you can take steps that cause the OpenEmbedded build
+system to reuse software across the various machines where it makes
+sense.
+
+If build speed and package feed maintenance are considerations, you
+should consider the points in this section that can help you optimize
+your tunings to best consider build times and package feed maintenance.
+
+-  *Share the :term:`Build Directory`:* If at all possible, share the
+   :term:`TMPDIR` across builds. The Yocto Project supports switching between
+   different :term:`MACHINE` values in the same :term:`TMPDIR`. This practice
+   is well supported and regularly used by developers when building for
+   multiple machines. When you use the same :term:`TMPDIR` for multiple
+   machine builds, the OpenEmbedded build system can reuse the existing native
+   and often cross-recipes for multiple machines. Thus, build time decreases.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      If :term:`DISTRO` settings change or fundamental configuration settings
+      such as the filesystem layout, you need to work with a clean :term:`TMPDIR`.
+      Sharing :term:`TMPDIR` under these circumstances might work but since it is
+      not guaranteed, you should use a clean :term:`TMPDIR`.
+
+-  *Enable the Appropriate Package Architecture:* By default, the
+   OpenEmbedded build system enables three levels of package
+   architectures: "all", "tune" or "package", and "machine". Any given
+   recipe usually selects one of these package architectures (types) for
+   its output. Depending for what a given recipe creates packages,
+   making sure you enable the appropriate package architecture can
+   directly impact the build time.
+
+   A recipe that just generates scripts can enable "all" architecture
+   because there are no binaries to build. To specifically enable "all"
+   architecture, be sure your recipe inherits the
+   :ref:`ref-classes-allarch` class.
+   This class is useful for "all" architectures because it configures
+   many variables so packages can be used across multiple architectures.
+
+   If your recipe needs to generate packages that are machine-specific
+   or when one of the build or runtime dependencies is already
+   machine-architecture dependent, which makes your recipe also
+   machine-architecture dependent, make sure your recipe enables the
+   "machine" package architecture through the
+   :term:`MACHINE_ARCH`
+   variable::
+
+      PACKAGE_ARCH = "${MACHINE_ARCH}"
+
+   When you do not
+   specifically enable a package architecture through the
+   :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH`, The
+   OpenEmbedded build system defaults to the
+   :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` setting::
+
+      PACKAGE_ARCH = "${TUNE_PKGARCH}"
+
+-  *Choose a Generic Tuning File if Possible:* Some tunes are more
+   generic and can run on multiple targets (e.g. an ``armv5`` set of
+   packages could run on ``armv6`` and ``armv7`` processors in most
+   cases). Similarly, ``i486`` binaries could work on ``i586`` and
+   higher processors. You should realize, however, that advances on
+   newer processor versions would not be used.
+
+   If you select the same tune for several different machines, the
+   OpenEmbedded build system reuses software previously built, thus
+   speeding up the overall build time. Realize that even though a new
+   sysroot for each machine is generated, the software is not recompiled
+   and only one package feed exists.
+
+-  *Manage Granular Level Packaging:* Sometimes there are cases where
+   injecting another level of package architecture beyond the three
+   higher levels noted earlier can be useful. For example, consider how
+   NXP (formerly Freescale) allows for the easy reuse of binary packages
+   in their layer
+   :yocto_git:`meta-freescale </meta-freescale/>`.
+   In this example, the
+   :yocto_git:`fsl-dynamic-packagearch </meta-freescale/tree/classes/fsl-dynamic-packagearch.bbclass>`
+   class shares GPU packages for i.MX53 boards because all boards share
+   the AMD GPU. The i.MX6-based boards can do the same because all
+   boards share the Vivante GPU. This class inspects the BitBake
+   datastore to identify if the package provides or depends on one of
+   the sub-architecture values. If so, the class sets the
+   :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH` value
+   based on the ``MACHINE_SUBARCH`` value. If the package does not
+   provide or depend on one of the sub-architecture values but it
+   matches a value in the machine-specific filter, it sets
+   :term:`MACHINE_ARCH`. This
+   behavior reduces the number of packages built and saves build time by
+   reusing binaries.
+
+-  *Use Tools to Debug Issues:* Sometimes you can run into situations
+   where software is being rebuilt when you think it should not be. For
+   example, the OpenEmbedded build system might not be using shared
+   state between machines when you think it should be. These types of
+   situations are usually due to references to machine-specific
+   variables such as :term:`MACHINE`,
+   :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES`,
+   :term:`XSERVER`,
+   :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES`,
+   and so forth in code that is supposed to only be tune-specific or
+   when the recipe depends
+   (:term:`DEPENDS`,
+   :term:`RDEPENDS`,
+   :term:`RRECOMMENDS`,
+   :term:`RSUGGESTS`, and so forth)
+   on some other recipe that already has
+   :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH` defined
+   as "${MACHINE_ARCH}".
+
+   .. note::
+
+      Patches to fix any issues identified are most welcome as these
+      issues occasionally do occur.
+
+   For such cases, you can use some tools to help you sort out the
+   situation:
+
+   -  ``state-diff-machines.sh``*:* You can find this tool in the
+      ``scripts`` directory of the Source Repositories. See the comments
+      in the script for information on how to use the tool.
+
+   -  *BitBake's "-S printdiff" Option:* Using this option causes
+      BitBake to try to establish the most recent signature match
+      (e.g. in the shared state cache) and then compare matched signatures
+      to determine the stamps and delta where these two stamp trees diverge.
+
+Building Software from an External Source
+=========================================
+
+By default, the OpenEmbedded build system uses the :term:`Build Directory`
+when building source code. The build process involves fetching the source
+files, unpacking them, and then patching them if necessary before the build
+takes place.
+
+There are situations where you might want to build software from source
+files that are external to and thus outside of the OpenEmbedded build
+system. For example, suppose you have a project that includes a new BSP
+with a heavily customized kernel. And, you want to minimize exposing the
+build system to the development team so that they can focus on their
+project and maintain everyone's workflow as much as possible. In this
+case, you want a kernel source directory on the development machine
+where the development occurs. You want the recipe's
+:term:`SRC_URI` variable to point to
+the external directory and use it as is, not copy it.
+
+To build from software that comes from an external source, all you need to do
+is inherit the :ref:`ref-classes-externalsrc` class and then set
+the :term:`EXTERNALSRC` variable to point to your external source code. Here
+are the statements to put in your ``local.conf`` file::
+
+   INHERIT += "externalsrc"
+   EXTERNALSRC:pn-myrecipe = "path-to-your-source-tree"
+
+This next example shows how to accomplish the same thing by setting
+:term:`EXTERNALSRC` in the recipe itself or in the recipe's append file::
+
+   EXTERNALSRC = "path"
+   EXTERNALSRC_BUILD = "path"
+
+.. note::
+
+   In order for these settings to take effect, you must globally or
+   locally inherit the :ref:`ref-classes-externalsrc` class.
+
+By default, :ref:`ref-classes-externalsrc` builds the source code in a
+directory separate from the external source directory as specified by
+:term:`EXTERNALSRC`. If you need
+to have the source built in the same directory in which it resides, or
+some other nominated directory, you can set
+:term:`EXTERNALSRC_BUILD`
+to point to that directory::
+
+   EXTERNALSRC_BUILD:pn-myrecipe = "path-to-your-source-tree"
+
+Replicating a Build Offline
+===========================
+
+It can be useful to take a "snapshot" of upstream sources used in a
+build and then use that "snapshot" later to replicate the build offline.
+To do so, you need to first prepare and populate your downloads
+directory your "snapshot" of files. Once your downloads directory is
+ready, you can use it at any time and from any machine to replicate your
+build.
+
+Follow these steps to populate your Downloads directory:
+
+#. *Create a Clean Downloads Directory:* Start with an empty downloads
+   directory (:term:`DL_DIR`). You
+   start with an empty downloads directory by either removing the files
+   in the existing directory or by setting :term:`DL_DIR` to point to either
+   an empty location or one that does not yet exist.
+
+#. *Generate Tarballs of the Source Git Repositories:* Edit your
+   ``local.conf`` configuration file as follows::
+
+      DL_DIR = "/home/your-download-dir/"
+      BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS = "1"
+
+   During
+   the fetch process in the next step, BitBake gathers the source files
+   and creates tarballs in the directory pointed to by :term:`DL_DIR`. See
+   the
+   :term:`BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS`
+   variable for more information.
+
+#. *Populate Your Downloads Directory Without Building:* Use BitBake to
+   fetch your sources but inhibit the build::
+
+      $ bitbake target --runonly=fetch
+
+   The downloads directory (i.e. ``${DL_DIR}``) now has
+   a "snapshot" of the source files in the form of tarballs, which can
+   be used for the build.
+
+#. *Optionally Remove Any Git or other SCM Subdirectories From the
+   Downloads Directory:* If you want, you can clean up your downloads
+   directory by removing any Git or other Source Control Management
+   (SCM) subdirectories such as ``${DL_DIR}/git2/*``. The tarballs
+   already contain these subdirectories.
+
+Once your downloads directory has everything it needs regarding source
+files, you can create your "own-mirror" and build your target.
+Understand that you can use the files to build the target offline from
+any machine and at any time.
+
+Follow these steps to build your target using the files in the downloads
+directory:
+
+#. *Using Local Files Only:* Inside your ``local.conf`` file, add the
+   :term:`SOURCE_MIRROR_URL` variable, inherit the
+   :ref:`ref-classes-own-mirrors` class, and use the
+   :term:`BB_NO_NETWORK` variable to your ``local.conf``::
+
+      SOURCE_MIRROR_URL ?= "file:///home/your-download-dir/"
+      INHERIT += "own-mirrors"
+      BB_NO_NETWORK = "1"
+
+   The :term:`SOURCE_MIRROR_URL` and :ref:`ref-classes-own-mirrors`
+   class set up the system to use the downloads directory as your "own
+   mirror". Using the :term:`BB_NO_NETWORK` variable makes sure that
+   BitBake's fetching process in step 3 stays local, which means files
+   from your "own-mirror" are used.
+
+#. *Start With a Clean Build:* You can start with a clean build by
+   removing the ``${``\ :term:`TMPDIR`\ ``}`` directory or using a new
+   :term:`Build Directory`.
+
+#. *Build Your Target:* Use BitBake to build your target::
+
+      $ bitbake target
+
+   The build completes using the known local "snapshot" of source
+   files from your mirror. The resulting tarballs for your "snapshot" of
+   source files are in the downloads directory.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      The offline build does not work if recipes attempt to find the
+      latest version of software by setting
+      :term:`SRCREV` to
+      ``${``\ :term:`AUTOREV`\ ``}``::
+
+         SRCREV = "${AUTOREV}"
+
+      When a recipe sets :term:`SRCREV` to
+      ``${``\ :term:`AUTOREV`\ ``}``, the build system accesses the network in an
+      attempt to determine the latest version of software from the SCM.
+      Typically, recipes that use :term:`AUTOREV` are custom or modified
+      recipes. Recipes that reside in public repositories usually do not
+      use :term:`AUTOREV`.
+
+      If you do have recipes that use :term:`AUTOREV`, you can take steps to
+      still use the recipes in an offline build. Do the following:
+
+      #. Use a configuration generated by enabling :ref:`build
+         history <dev-manual/build-quality:maintaining build output quality>`.
+
+      #. Use the ``buildhistory-collect-srcrevs`` command to collect the
+         stored :term:`SRCREV` values from the build's history. For more
+         information on collecting these values, see the
+         ":ref:`dev-manual/build-quality:build history package information`"
+         section.
+
+      #. Once you have the correct source revisions, you can modify
+         those recipes to set :term:`SRCREV` to specific versions of the
+         software.
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/common-tasks.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/common-tasks.rst
deleted file mode 100644
index 65db4aed33..0000000000
--- a/documentation/dev-manual/common-tasks.rst
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11587 +0,0 @@
-.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
-
-************
-Common Tasks
-************
-
-This chapter describes fundamental procedures such as creating layers,
-adding new software packages, extending or customizing images, porting
-work to new hardware (adding a new machine), and so forth. You will find
-that the procedures documented here occur often in the development cycle
-using the Yocto Project.
-
-Understanding and Creating Layers
-=================================
-
-The OpenEmbedded build system supports organizing
-:term:`Metadata` into multiple layers.
-Layers allow you to isolate different types of customizations from each
-other. For introductory information on the Yocto Project Layer Model,
-see the
-":ref:`overview-manual/yp-intro:the yocto project layer model`"
-section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
-
-Creating Your Own Layer
------------------------
-
-It is very easy to create your own layers to use with the OpenEmbedded
-build system. The Yocto Project ships with tools that speed up creating
-layers. This section describes the steps you perform by hand to create
-layers so that you can better understand them. For information about the
-layer-creation tools, see the
-":ref:`bsp-guide/bsp:creating a new bsp layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script`"
-section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's
-Guide and the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating a general layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script`"
-section further down in this manual.
-
-Follow these general steps to create your layer without using tools:
-
-1. *Check Existing Layers:* Before creating a new layer, you should be
-   sure someone has not already created a layer containing the Metadata
-   you need. You can see the :oe_layerindex:`OpenEmbedded Metadata Index <>`
-   for a list of layers from the OpenEmbedded community that can be used in
-   the Yocto Project. You could find a layer that is identical or close
-   to what you need.
-
-2. *Create a Directory:* Create the directory for your layer. When you
-   create the layer, be sure to create the directory in an area not
-   associated with the Yocto Project :term:`Source Directory`
-   (e.g. the cloned ``poky`` repository).
-
-   While not strictly required, prepend the name of the directory with
-   the string "meta-". For example:
-   ::
-
-      meta-mylayer
-      meta-GUI_xyz
-      meta-mymachine
-
-   With rare exceptions, a layer's name follows this form:
-   ::
-
-      meta-root_name
-
-   Following this layer naming convention can save
-   you trouble later when tools, components, or variables "assume" your
-   layer name begins with "meta-". A notable example is in configuration
-   files as shown in the following step where layer names without the
-   "meta-" string are appended to several variables used in the
-   configuration.
-
-3. *Create a Layer Configuration File:* Inside your new layer folder,
-   you need to create a ``conf/layer.conf`` file. It is easiest to take
-   an existing layer configuration file and copy that to your layer's
-   ``conf`` directory and then modify the file as needed.
-
-   The ``meta-yocto-bsp/conf/layer.conf`` file in the Yocto Project
-   :yocto_git:`Source Repositories </poky/tree/meta-yocto-bsp/conf>`
-   demonstrates the required syntax. For your layer, you need to replace
-   "yoctobsp" with a unique identifier for your layer (e.g. "machinexyz"
-   for a layer named "meta-machinexyz"):
-   ::
-
-      # We have a conf and classes directory, add to BBPATH
-      BBPATH .= ":${LAYERDIR}"
-
-      # We have recipes-* directories, add to BBFILES
-      BBFILES += "${LAYERDIR}/recipes-*/*/*.bb \
-                  ${LAYERDIR}/recipes-*/*/*.bbappend"
-
-      BBFILE_COLLECTIONS += "yoctobsp"
-      BBFILE_PATTERN_yoctobsp = "^${LAYERDIR}/"
-      BBFILE_PRIORITY_yoctobsp = "5"
-      LAYERVERSION_yoctobsp = "4"
-      LAYERSERIES_COMPAT_yoctobsp = "dunfell"
-
-   Following is an explanation of the layer configuration file:
-
-   -  :term:`BBPATH`: Adds the layer's
-      root directory to BitBake's search path. Through the use of the
-      ``BBPATH`` variable, BitBake locates class files (``.bbclass``),
-      configuration files, and files that are included with ``include``
-      and ``require`` statements. For these cases, BitBake uses the
-      first file that matches the name found in ``BBPATH``. This is
-      similar to the way the ``PATH`` variable is used for binaries. It
-      is recommended, therefore, that you use unique class and
-      configuration filenames in your custom layer.
-
-   -  :term:`BBFILES`: Defines the
-      location for all recipes in the layer.
-
-   -  :term:`BBFILE_COLLECTIONS`:
-      Establishes the current layer through a unique identifier that is
-      used throughout the OpenEmbedded build system to refer to the
-      layer. In this example, the identifier "yoctobsp" is the
-      representation for the container layer named "meta-yocto-bsp".
-
-   -  :term:`BBFILE_PATTERN`:
-      Expands immediately during parsing to provide the directory of the
-      layer.
-
-   -  :term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY`:
-      Establishes a priority to use for recipes in the layer when the
-      OpenEmbedded build finds recipes of the same name in different
-      layers.
-
-   -  :term:`LAYERVERSION`:
-      Establishes a version number for the layer. You can use this
-      version number to specify this exact version of the layer as a
-      dependency when using the
-      :term:`LAYERDEPENDS`
-      variable.
-
-   -  :term:`LAYERDEPENDS`:
-      Lists all layers on which this layer depends (if any).
-
-   -  :term:`LAYERSERIES_COMPAT`:
-      Lists the :yocto_wiki:`Yocto Project </Releases>`
-      releases for which the current version is compatible. This
-      variable is a good way to indicate if your particular layer is
-      current.
-
-4. *Add Content:* Depending on the type of layer, add the content. If
-   the layer adds support for a machine, add the machine configuration
-   in a ``conf/machine/`` file within the layer. If the layer adds
-   distro policy, add the distro configuration in a ``conf/distro/``
-   file within the layer. If the layer introduces new recipes, put the
-   recipes you need in ``recipes-*`` subdirectories within the layer.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      For an explanation of layer hierarchy that is compliant with the
-      Yocto Project, see the ":ref:`bsp-guide/bsp:example filesystem layout`"
-      section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's Guide.
-
-5. *Optionally Test for Compatibility:* If you want permission to use
-   the Yocto Project Compatibility logo with your layer or application
-   that uses your layer, perform the steps to apply for compatibility.
-   See the "`Making Sure Your Layer is Compatible With Yocto
-   Project <#making-sure-your-layer-is-compatible-with-yocto-project>`__"
-   section for more information.
-
-Following Best Practices When Creating Layers
----------------------------------------------
-
-To create layers that are easier to maintain and that will not impact
-builds for other machines, you should consider the information in the
-following list:
-
--  *Avoid "Overlaying" Entire Recipes from Other Layers in Your
-   Configuration:* In other words, do not copy an entire recipe into
-   your layer and then modify it. Rather, use an append file
-   (``.bbappend``) to override only those parts of the original recipe
-   you need to modify.
-
--  *Avoid Duplicating Include Files:* Use append files (``.bbappend``)
-   for each recipe that uses an include file. Or, if you are introducing
-   a new recipe that requires the included file, use the path relative
-   to the original layer directory to refer to the file. For example,
-   use ``require recipes-core/``\ `package`\ ``/``\ `file`\ ``.inc`` instead
-   of ``require`` `file`\ ``.inc``. If you're finding you have to overlay
-   the include file, it could indicate a deficiency in the include file
-   in the layer to which it originally belongs. If this is the case, you
-   should try to address that deficiency instead of overlaying the
-   include file. For example, you could address this by getting the
-   maintainer of the include file to add a variable or variables to make
-   it easy to override the parts needing to be overridden.
-
--  *Structure Your Layers:* Proper use of overrides within append files
-   and placement of machine-specific files within your layer can ensure
-   that a build is not using the wrong Metadata and negatively impacting
-   a build for a different machine. Following are some examples:
-
-   -  *Modify Variables to Support a Different Machine:* Suppose you
-      have a layer named ``meta-one`` that adds support for building
-      machine "one". To do so, you use an append file named
-      ``base-files.bbappend`` and create a dependency on "foo" by
-      altering the :term:`DEPENDS`
-      variable:
-      ::
-
-         DEPENDS = "foo"
-
-      The dependency is created during any
-      build that includes the layer ``meta-one``. However, you might not
-      want this dependency for all machines. For example, suppose you
-      are building for machine "two" but your ``bblayers.conf`` file has
-      the ``meta-one`` layer included. During the build, the
-      ``base-files`` for machine "two" will also have the dependency on
-      ``foo``.
-
-      To make sure your changes apply only when building machine "one",
-      use a machine override with the ``DEPENDS`` statement:
-      ::
-
-         DEPENDS_one = "foo"
-
-      You should follow the same strategy when using ``_append``
-      and ``_prepend`` operations:
-      ::
-
-         DEPENDS_append_one = " foo"
-         DEPENDS_prepend_one = "foo "
-
-      As an actual example, here's a
-      snippet from the generic kernel include file ``linux-yocto.inc``,
-      wherein the kernel compile and link options are adjusted in the
-      case of a subset of the supported architectures:
-      ::
-
-         DEPENDS_append_aarch64 = " libgcc"
-         KERNEL_CC_append_aarch64 = " ${TOOLCHAIN_OPTIONS}"
-         KERNEL_LD_append_aarch64 = " ${TOOLCHAIN_OPTIONS}"
-
-         DEPENDS_append_nios2 = " libgcc"
-         KERNEL_CC_append_nios2 = " ${TOOLCHAIN_OPTIONS}"
-         KERNEL_LD_append_nios2 = " ${TOOLCHAIN_OPTIONS}"
-
-         DEPENDS_append_arc = " libgcc"
-         KERNEL_CC_append_arc = " ${TOOLCHAIN_OPTIONS}"
-         KERNEL_LD_append_arc = " ${TOOLCHAIN_OPTIONS}"
-
-         KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemuall=" features/debug/printk.scc"
-
-      .. note::
-
-         Avoiding "+=" and "=+" and using machine-specific ``_append``
-         and ``_prepend`` operations is recommended as well.
-
-   -  *Place Machine-Specific Files in Machine-Specific Locations:* When
-      you have a base recipe, such as ``base-files.bb``, that contains a
-      :term:`SRC_URI` statement to a
-      file, you can use an append file to cause the build to use your
-      own version of the file. For example, an append file in your layer
-      at ``meta-one/recipes-core/base-files/base-files.bbappend`` could
-      extend :term:`FILESPATH` using :term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS` as follows:
-      ::
-
-         FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/${BPN}:"
-
-      The build for machine "one" will pick up your machine-specific file as
-      long as you have the file in
-      ``meta-one/recipes-core/base-files/base-files/``. However, if you
-      are building for a different machine and the ``bblayers.conf``
-      file includes the ``meta-one`` layer and the location of your
-      machine-specific file is the first location where that file is
-      found according to ``FILESPATH``, builds for all machines will
-      also use that machine-specific file.
-
-      You can make sure that a machine-specific file is used for a
-      particular machine by putting the file in a subdirectory specific
-      to the machine. For example, rather than placing the file in
-      ``meta-one/recipes-core/base-files/base-files/`` as shown above,
-      put it in ``meta-one/recipes-core/base-files/base-files/one/``.
-      Not only does this make sure the file is used only when building
-      for machine "one", but the build process locates the file more
-      quickly.
-
-      In summary, you need to place all files referenced from
-      ``SRC_URI`` in a machine-specific subdirectory within the layer in
-      order to restrict those files to machine-specific builds.
-
--  *Perform Steps to Apply for Yocto Project Compatibility:* If you want
-   permission to use the Yocto Project Compatibility logo with your
-   layer or application that uses your layer, perform the steps to apply
-   for compatibility. See the "`Making Sure Your Layer is Compatible
-   With Yocto
-   Project <#making-sure-your-layer-is-compatible-with-yocto-project>`__"
-   section for more information.
-
--  *Follow the Layer Naming Convention:* Store custom layers in a Git
-   repository that use the ``meta-layer_name`` format.
-
--  *Group Your Layers Locally:* Clone your repository alongside other
-   cloned ``meta`` directories from the :term:`Source Directory`.
-
-Making Sure Your Layer is Compatible With Yocto Project
--------------------------------------------------------
-
-When you create a layer used with the Yocto Project, it is advantageous
-to make sure that the layer interacts well with existing Yocto Project
-layers (i.e. the layer is compatible with the Yocto Project). Ensuring
-compatibility makes the layer easy to be consumed by others in the Yocto
-Project community and could allow you permission to use the Yocto
-Project Compatible Logo.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Only Yocto Project member organizations are permitted to use the
-   Yocto Project Compatible Logo. The logo is not available for general
-   use. For information on how to become a Yocto Project member
-   organization, see the :yocto_home:`Yocto Project Website <>`.
-
-The Yocto Project Compatibility Program consists of a layer application
-process that requests permission to use the Yocto Project Compatibility
-Logo for your layer and application. The process consists of two parts:
-
-1. Successfully passing a script (``yocto-check-layer``) that when run
-   against your layer, tests it against constraints based on experiences
-   of how layers have worked in the real world and where pitfalls have
-   been found. Getting a "PASS" result from the script is required for
-   successful compatibility registration.
-
-2. Completion of an application acceptance form, which you can find at
-   :yocto_home:`/webform/yocto-project-compatible-registration`.
-
-To be granted permission to use the logo, you need to satisfy the
-following:
-
--  Be able to check the box indicating that you got a "PASS" when
-   running the script against your layer.
-
--  Answer "Yes" to the questions on the form or have an acceptable
-   explanation for any questions answered "No".
-
--  Be a Yocto Project Member Organization.
-
-The remainder of this section presents information on the registration
-form and on the ``yocto-check-layer`` script.
-
-Yocto Project Compatible Program Application
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Use the form to apply for your layer's approval. Upon successful
-application, you can use the Yocto Project Compatibility Logo with your
-layer and the application that uses your layer.
-
-To access the form, use this link:
-:yocto_home:`/webform/yocto-project-compatible-registration`.
-Follow the instructions on the form to complete your application.
-
-The application consists of the following sections:
-
--  *Contact Information:* Provide your contact information as the fields
-   require. Along with your information, provide the released versions
-   of the Yocto Project for which your layer is compatible.
-
--  *Acceptance Criteria:* Provide "Yes" or "No" answers for each of the
-   items in the checklist. Space exists at the bottom of the form for
-   any explanations for items for which you answered "No".
-
--  *Recommendations:* Provide answers for the questions regarding Linux
-   kernel use and build success.
-
-``yocto-check-layer`` Script
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The ``yocto-check-layer`` script provides you a way to assess how
-compatible your layer is with the Yocto Project. You should run this
-script prior to using the form to apply for compatibility as described
-in the previous section. You need to achieve a "PASS" result in order to
-have your application form successfully processed.
-
-The script divides tests into three areas: COMMON, BSP, and DISTRO. For
-example, given a distribution layer (DISTRO), the layer must pass both
-the COMMON and DISTRO related tests. Furthermore, if your layer is a BSP
-layer, the layer must pass the COMMON and BSP set of tests.
-
-To execute the script, enter the following commands from your build
-directory:
-::
-
-   $ source oe-init-build-env
-   $ yocto-check-layer your_layer_directory
-
-Be sure to provide the actual directory for your
-layer as part of the command.
-
-Entering the command causes the script to determine the type of layer
-and then to execute a set of specific tests against the layer. The
-following list overviews the test:
-
--  ``common.test_readme``: Tests if a ``README`` file exists in the
-   layer and the file is not empty.
-
--  ``common.test_parse``: Tests to make sure that BitBake can parse the
-   files without error (i.e. ``bitbake -p``).
-
--  ``common.test_show_environment``: Tests that the global or per-recipe
-   environment is in order without errors (i.e. ``bitbake -e``).
-
--  ``common.test_world``: Verifies that ``bitbake world`` works.
-
--  ``common.test_signatures``: Tests to be sure that BSP and DISTRO
-   layers do not come with recipes that change signatures.
-
--  ``common.test_layerseries_compat``: Verifies layer compatibility is
-   set properly.
-
--  ``bsp.test_bsp_defines_machines``: Tests if a BSP layer has machine
-   configurations.
-
--  ``bsp.test_bsp_no_set_machine``: Tests to ensure a BSP layer does not
-   set the machine when the layer is added.
-
--  ``bsp.test_machine_world``: Verifies that ``bitbake world`` works
-   regardless of which machine is selected.
-
--  ``bsp.test_machine_signatures``: Verifies that building for a
-   particular machine affects only the signature of tasks specific to
-   that machine.
-
--  ``distro.test_distro_defines_distros``: Tests if a DISTRO layer has
-   distro configurations.
-
--  ``distro.test_distro_no_set_distros``: Tests to ensure a DISTRO layer
-   does not set the distribution when the layer is added.
-
-Enabling Your Layer
--------------------
-
-Before the OpenEmbedded build system can use your new layer, you need to
-enable it. To enable your layer, simply add your layer's path to the
-``BBLAYERS`` variable in your ``conf/bblayers.conf`` file, which is
-found in the :term:`Build Directory`.
-The following example shows how to enable a layer named
-``meta-mylayer``:
-::
-
-   # POKY_BBLAYERS_CONF_VERSION is increased each time build/conf/bblayers.conf
-   # changes incompatibly
-   POKY_BBLAYERS_CONF_VERSION = "2"
-   BBPATH = "${TOPDIR}"
-   BBFILES ?= ""
-   BBLAYERS ?= " \
-       /home/user/poky/meta \
-       /home/user/poky/meta-poky \
-       /home/user/poky/meta-yocto-bsp \
-       /home/user/poky/meta-mylayer \
-       "
-
-BitBake parses each ``conf/layer.conf`` file from the top down as
-specified in the ``BBLAYERS`` variable within the ``conf/bblayers.conf``
-file. During the processing of each ``conf/layer.conf`` file, BitBake
-adds the recipes, classes and configurations contained within the
-particular layer to the source directory.
-
-Using .bbappend Files in Your Layer
------------------------------------
-
-A recipe that appends Metadata to another recipe is called a BitBake
-append file. A BitBake append file uses the ``.bbappend`` file type
-suffix, while the corresponding recipe to which Metadata is being
-appended uses the ``.bb`` file type suffix.
-
-You can use a ``.bbappend`` file in your layer to make additions or
-changes to the content of another layer's recipe without having to copy
-the other layer's recipe into your layer. Your ``.bbappend`` file
-resides in your layer, while the main ``.bb`` recipe file to which you
-are appending Metadata resides in a different layer.
-
-Being able to append information to an existing recipe not only avoids
-duplication, but also automatically applies recipe changes from a
-different layer into your layer. If you were copying recipes, you would
-have to manually merge changes as they occur.
-
-When you create an append file, you must use the same root name as the
-corresponding recipe file. For example, the append file
-``someapp_3.1.bbappend`` must apply to ``someapp_3.1.bb``. This
-means the original recipe and append file names are version
-number-specific. If the corresponding recipe is renamed to update to a
-newer version, you must also rename and possibly update the
-corresponding ``.bbappend`` as well. During the build process, BitBake
-displays an error on starting if it detects a ``.bbappend`` file that
-does not have a corresponding recipe with a matching name. See the
-:term:`BB_DANGLINGAPPENDS_WARNONLY`
-variable for information on how to handle this error.
-
-As an example, consider the main formfactor recipe and a corresponding
-formfactor append file both from the :term:`Source Directory`.
-Here is the main
-formfactor recipe, which is named ``formfactor_0.0.bb`` and located in
-the "meta" layer at ``meta/recipes-bsp/formfactor``:
-::
-
-   SUMMARY = "Device formfactor information"
-   DESCRIPTION = "A formfactor configuration file provides information about the \
-   target hardware for which the image is being built and information that the \
-   build system cannot obtain from other sources such as the kernel."
-   SECTION = "base"
-   LICENSE = "MIT"
-   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://${COREBASE}/meta/COPYING.MIT;md5=3da9cfbcb788c80a0384361b4de20420"
-   PR = "r45"
-
-   SRC_URI = "file://config file://machconfig"
-   S = "${WORKDIR}"
-
-   PACKAGE_ARCH = "${MACHINE_ARCH}"
-   INHIBIT_DEFAULT_DEPS = "1"
-
-   do_install() {
-           # Install file only if it has contents
-           install -d ${D}${sysconfdir}/formfactor/
-           install -m 0644 ${S}/config ${D}${sysconfdir}/formfactor/
-           if [ -s "${S}/machconfig" ]; then
-                   install -m 0644 ${S}/machconfig ${D}${sysconfdir}/formfactor/
-           fi
-   }
-
-In the main recipe, note the :term:`SRC_URI`
-variable, which tells the OpenEmbedded build system where to find files
-during the build.
-
-Following is the append file, which is named ``formfactor_0.0.bbappend``
-and is from the Raspberry Pi BSP Layer named ``meta-raspberrypi``. The
-file is in the layer at ``recipes-bsp/formfactor``:
-::
-
-   FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:"
-
-By default, the build system uses the
-:term:`FILESPATH` variable to
-locate files. This append file extends the locations by setting the
-:term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS`
-variable. Setting this variable in the ``.bbappend`` file is the most
-reliable and recommended method for adding directories to the search
-path used by the build system to find files.
-
-The statement in this example extends the directories to include
-``${``\ :term:`THISDIR`\ ``}/${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``,
-which resolves to a directory named ``formfactor`` in the same directory
-in which the append file resides (i.e.
-``meta-raspberrypi/recipes-bsp/formfactor``. This implies that you must
-have the supporting directory structure set up that will contain any
-files or patches you will be including from the layer.
-
-Using the immediate expansion assignment operator ``:=`` is important
-because of the reference to ``THISDIR``. The trailing colon character is
-important as it ensures that items in the list remain colon-separated.
-
-.. note::
-
-   BitBake automatically defines the ``THISDIR`` variable. You should
-   never set this variable yourself. Using "_prepend" as part of the
-   ``FILESEXTRAPATHS`` ensures your path will be searched prior to other
-   paths in the final list.
-
-   Also, not all append files add extra files. Many append files simply
-   exist to add build options (e.g. ``systemd``). For these cases, your
-   append file would not even use the ``FILESEXTRAPATHS`` statement.
-
-Prioritizing Your Layer
------------------------
-
-Each layer is assigned a priority value. Priority values control which
-layer takes precedence if there are recipe files with the same name in
-multiple layers. For these cases, the recipe file from the layer with a
-higher priority number takes precedence. Priority values also affect the
-order in which multiple ``.bbappend`` files for the same recipe are
-applied. You can either specify the priority manually, or allow the
-build system to calculate it based on the layer's dependencies.
-
-To specify the layer's priority manually, use the
-:term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY`
-variable and append the layer's root name:
-::
-
-   BBFILE_PRIORITY_mylayer = "1"
-
-.. note::
-
-   It is possible for a recipe with a lower version number
-   :term:`PV` in a layer that has a higher
-   priority to take precedence.
-
-   Also, the layer priority does not currently affect the precedence
-   order of ``.conf`` or ``.bbclass`` files. Future versions of BitBake
-   might address this.
-
-Managing Layers
----------------
-
-You can use the BitBake layer management tool ``bitbake-layers`` to
-provide a view into the structure of recipes across a multi-layer
-project. Being able to generate output that reports on configured layers
-with their paths and priorities and on ``.bbappend`` files and their
-applicable recipes can help to reveal potential problems.
-
-For help on the BitBake layer management tool, use the following
-command:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake-layers --help
-   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
-   usage: bitbake-layers [-d] [-q] [-F] [--color COLOR] [-h] <subcommand> ...
-
-   BitBake layers utility
-
-   optional arguments:
-     -d, --debug           Enable debug output
-     -q, --quiet           Print only errors
-     -F, --force           Force add without recipe parse verification
-     --color COLOR         Colorize output (where COLOR is auto, always, never)
-     -h, --help            show this help message and exit
-
-   subcommands:
-     <subcommand>
-       layerindex-fetch    Fetches a layer from a layer index along with its
-                           dependent layers, and adds them to conf/bblayers.conf.
-       layerindex-show-depends
-                           Find layer dependencies from layer index.
-       add-layer           Add one or more layers to bblayers.conf.
-       remove-layer        Remove one or more layers from bblayers.conf.
-       flatten             flatten layer configuration into a separate output
-                           directory.
-       show-layers         show current configured layers.
-       show-overlayed      list overlayed recipes (where the same recipe exists
-                           in another layer)
-       show-recipes        list available recipes, showing the layer they are
-                           provided by
-       show-appends        list bbappend files and recipe files they apply to
-       show-cross-depends  Show dependencies between recipes that cross layer
-                           boundaries.
-       create-layer        Create a basic layer
-
-   Use bitbake-layers <subcommand> --help to get help on a specific command
-
-The following list describes the available commands:
-
--  ``help:`` Displays general help or help on a specified command.
-
--  ``show-layers:`` Shows the current configured layers.
-
--  ``show-overlayed:`` Lists overlayed recipes. A recipe is overlayed
-   when a recipe with the same name exists in another layer that has a
-   higher layer priority.
-
--  ``show-recipes:`` Lists available recipes and the layers that
-   provide them.
-
--  ``show-appends:`` Lists ``.bbappend`` files and the recipe files to
-   which they apply.
-
--  ``show-cross-depends:`` Lists dependency relationships between
-   recipes that cross layer boundaries.
-
--  ``add-layer:`` Adds a layer to ``bblayers.conf``.
-
--  ``remove-layer:`` Removes a layer from ``bblayers.conf``
-
--  ``flatten:`` Flattens the layer configuration into a separate
-   output directory. Flattening your layer configuration builds a
-   "flattened" directory that contains the contents of all layers, with
-   any overlayed recipes removed and any ``.bbappend`` files appended to
-   the corresponding recipes. You might have to perform some manual
-   cleanup of the flattened layer as follows:
-
-   -  Non-recipe files (such as patches) are overwritten. The flatten
-      command shows a warning for these files.
-
-   -  Anything beyond the normal layer setup has been added to the
-      ``layer.conf`` file. Only the lowest priority layer's
-      ``layer.conf`` is used.
-
-   -  Overridden and appended items from ``.bbappend`` files need to be
-      cleaned up. The contents of each ``.bbappend`` end up in the
-      flattened recipe. However, if there are appended or changed
-      variable values, you need to tidy these up yourself. Consider the
-      following example. Here, the ``bitbake-layers`` command adds the
-      line ``#### bbappended ...`` so that you know where the following
-      lines originate:
-      ::
-
-         ...
-         DESCRIPTION = "A useful utility"
-         ...
-         EXTRA_OECONF = "--enable-something"
-         ...
-
-         #### bbappended from meta-anotherlayer ####
-
-         DESCRIPTION = "Customized utility"
-         EXTRA_OECONF += "--enable-somethingelse"
-
-
-      Ideally, you would tidy up these utilities as follows:
-      ::
-
-         ...
-         DESCRIPTION = "Customized utility"
-         ...
-         EXTRA_OECONF = "--enable-something --enable-somethingelse"
-         ...
-
--  ``layerindex-fetch``: Fetches a layer from a layer index, along
-   with its dependent layers, and adds the layers to the
-   ``conf/bblayers.conf`` file.
-
--  ``layerindex-show-depends``: Finds layer dependencies from the
-   layer index.
-
--  ``create-layer``: Creates a basic layer.
-
-Creating a General Layer Using the ``bitbake-layers`` Script
-------------------------------------------------------------
-
-The ``bitbake-layers`` script with the ``create-layer`` subcommand
-simplifies creating a new general layer.
-
-.. note::
-
-   -  For information on BSP layers, see the ":ref:`bsp-guide/bsp:bsp layers`"
-      section in the Yocto
-      Project Board Specific (BSP) Developer's Guide.
-
-   -  In order to use a layer with the OpenEmbedded build system, you
-      need to add the layer to your ``bblayers.conf`` configuration
-      file. See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:adding a layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script`"
-      section for more information.
-
-The default mode of the script's operation with this subcommand is to
-create a layer with the following:
-
--  A layer priority of 6.
-
--  A ``conf`` subdirectory that contains a ``layer.conf`` file.
-
--  A ``recipes-example`` subdirectory that contains a further
-   subdirectory named ``example``, which contains an ``example.bb``
-   recipe file.
-
--  A ``COPYING.MIT``, which is the license statement for the layer. The
-   script assumes you want to use the MIT license, which is typical for
-   most layers, for the contents of the layer itself.
-
--  A ``README`` file, which is a file describing the contents of your
-   new layer.
-
-In its simplest form, you can use the following command form to create a
-layer. The command creates a layer whose name corresponds to
-"your_layer_name" in the current directory:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake-layers create-layer your_layer_name
-
-As an example, the following command creates a layer named ``meta-scottrif``
-in your home directory:
-::
-
-   $ cd /usr/home
-   $ bitbake-layers create-layer meta-scottrif
-   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
-   Add your new layer with 'bitbake-layers add-layer meta-scottrif'
-
-If you want to set the priority of the layer to other than the default
-value of "6", you can either use the ``--priority`` option or you
-can edit the
-:term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY` value
-in the ``conf/layer.conf`` after the script creates it. Furthermore, if
-you want to give the example recipe file some name other than the
-default, you can use the ``--example-recipe-name`` option.
-
-The easiest way to see how the ``bitbake-layers create-layer`` command
-works is to experiment with the script. You can also read the usage
-information by entering the following:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake-layers create-layer --help
-   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
-   usage: bitbake-layers create-layer [-h] [--priority PRIORITY]
-                                      [--example-recipe-name EXAMPLERECIPE]
-                                      layerdir
-
-   Create a basic layer
-
-   positional arguments:
-     layerdir              Layer directory to create
-
-   optional arguments:
-     -h, --help            show this help message and exit
-     --priority PRIORITY, -p PRIORITY
-                           Layer directory to create
-     --example-recipe-name EXAMPLERECIPE, -e EXAMPLERECIPE
-                           Filename of the example recipe
-
-Adding a Layer Using the ``bitbake-layers`` Script
---------------------------------------------------
-
-Once you create your general layer, you must add it to your
-``bblayers.conf`` file. Adding the layer to this configuration file
-makes the OpenEmbedded build system aware of your layer so that it can
-search it for metadata.
-
-Add your layer by using the ``bitbake-layers add-layer`` command:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake-layers add-layer your_layer_name
-
-Here is an example that adds a
-layer named ``meta-scottrif`` to the configuration file. Following the
-command that adds the layer is another ``bitbake-layers`` command that
-shows the layers that are in your ``bblayers.conf`` file:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake-layers add-layer meta-scottrif
-   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
-   Parsing recipes: 100% |##########################################################| Time: 0:00:49
-   Parsing of 1441 .bb files complete (0 cached, 1441 parsed). 2055 targets, 56 skipped, 0 masked, 0 errors.
-   $ bitbake-layers show-layers
-   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
-   layer                 path                                      priority
-   ==========================================================================
-   meta                  /home/scottrif/poky/meta                  5
-   meta-poky             /home/scottrif/poky/meta-poky             5
-   meta-yocto-bsp        /home/scottrif/poky/meta-yocto-bsp        5
-   workspace             /home/scottrif/poky/build/workspace       99
-   meta-scottrif         /home/scottrif/poky/build/meta-scottrif   6
-
-
-Adding the layer to this file
-enables the build system to locate the layer during the build.
-
-.. note::
-
-   During a build, the OpenEmbedded build system looks in the layers
-   from the top of the list down to the bottom in that order.
-
-Customizing Images
-==================
-
-You can customize images to satisfy particular requirements. This
-section describes several methods and provides guidelines for each.
-
-Customizing Images Using ``local.conf``
----------------------------------------
-
-Probably the easiest way to customize an image is to add a package by
-way of the ``local.conf`` configuration file. Because it is limited to
-local use, this method generally only allows you to add packages and is
-not as flexible as creating your own customized image. When you add
-packages using local variables this way, you need to realize that these
-variable changes are in effect for every build and consequently affect
-all images, which might not be what you require.
-
-To add a package to your image using the local configuration file, use
-the ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` variable with the ``_append`` operator:
-::
-
-   IMAGE_INSTALL_append = " strace"
-
-Use of the syntax is important -
-specifically, the space between the quote and the package name, which is
-``strace`` in this example. This space is required since the ``_append``
-operator does not add the space.
-
-Furthermore, you must use ``_append`` instead of the ``+=`` operator if
-you want to avoid ordering issues. The reason for this is because doing
-so unconditionally appends to the variable and avoids ordering problems
-due to the variable being set in image recipes and ``.bbclass`` files
-with operators like ``?=``. Using ``_append`` ensures the operation
-takes effect.
-
-As shown in its simplest use, ``IMAGE_INSTALL_append`` affects all
-images. It is possible to extend the syntax so that the variable applies
-to a specific image only. Here is an example:
-::
-
-   IMAGE_INSTALL_append_pn-core-image-minimal = " strace"
-
-This example adds ``strace`` to the ``core-image-minimal`` image only.
-
-You can add packages using a similar approach through the
-``CORE_IMAGE_EXTRA_INSTALL`` variable. If you use this variable, only
-``core-image-*`` images are affected.
-
-Customizing Images Using Custom ``IMAGE_FEATURES`` and ``EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES``
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-Another method for customizing your image is to enable or disable
-high-level image features by using the
-:term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` and
-:term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES`
-variables. Although the functions for both variables are nearly
-equivalent, best practices dictate using ``IMAGE_FEATURES`` from within
-a recipe and using ``EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES`` from within your
-``local.conf`` file, which is found in the
-:term:`Build Directory`.
-
-To understand how these features work, the best reference is
-``meta/classes/core-image.bbclass``. This class lists out the available
-``IMAGE_FEATURES`` of which most map to package groups while some, such
-as ``debug-tweaks`` and ``read-only-rootfs``, resolve as general
-configuration settings.
-
-In summary, the file looks at the contents of the ``IMAGE_FEATURES``
-variable and then maps or configures the feature accordingly. Based on
-this information, the build system automatically adds the appropriate
-packages or configurations to the
-:term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable.
-Effectively, you are enabling extra features by extending the class or
-creating a custom class for use with specialized image ``.bb`` files.
-
-Use the ``EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES`` variable from within your local
-configuration file. Using a separate area from which to enable features
-with this variable helps you avoid overwriting the features in the image
-recipe that are enabled with ``IMAGE_FEATURES``. The value of
-``EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES`` is added to ``IMAGE_FEATURES`` within
-``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``.
-
-To illustrate how you can use these variables to modify your image,
-consider an example that selects the SSH server. The Yocto Project ships
-with two SSH servers you can use with your images: Dropbear and OpenSSH.
-Dropbear is a minimal SSH server appropriate for resource-constrained
-environments, while OpenSSH is a well-known standard SSH server
-implementation. By default, the ``core-image-sato`` image is configured
-to use Dropbear. The ``core-image-full-cmdline`` and ``core-image-lsb``
-images both include OpenSSH. The ``core-image-minimal`` image does not
-contain an SSH server.
-
-You can customize your image and change these defaults. Edit the
-``IMAGE_FEATURES`` variable in your recipe or use the
-``EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES`` in your ``local.conf`` file so that it
-configures the image you are working with to include
-``ssh-server-dropbear`` or ``ssh-server-openssh``.
-
-.. note::
-
-   See the ":ref:`ref-manual/features:image features`" section in the Yocto
-   Project Reference Manual for a complete list of image features that ship
-   with the Yocto Project.
-
-Customizing Images Using Custom .bb Files
------------------------------------------
-
-You can also customize an image by creating a custom recipe that defines
-additional software as part of the image. The following example shows
-the form for the two lines you need:
-::
-
-   IMAGE_INSTALL = "packagegroup-core-x11-base package1 package2"
-   inherit core-image
-
-Defining the software using a custom recipe gives you total control over
-the contents of the image. It is important to use the correct names of
-packages in the ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` variable. You must use the
-OpenEmbedded notation and not the Debian notation for the names (e.g.
-``glibc-dev`` instead of ``libc6-dev``).
-
-The other method for creating a custom image is to base it on an
-existing image. For example, if you want to create an image based on
-``core-image-sato`` but add the additional package ``strace`` to the
-image, copy the ``meta/recipes-sato/images/core-image-sato.bb`` to a new
-``.bb`` and add the following line to the end of the copy:
-::
-
-   IMAGE_INSTALL += "strace"
-
-Customizing Images Using Custom Package Groups
-----------------------------------------------
-
-For complex custom images, the best approach for customizing an image is
-to create a custom package group recipe that is used to build the image
-or images. A good example of a package group recipe is
-``meta/recipes-core/packagegroups/packagegroup-base.bb``.
-
-If you examine that recipe, you see that the ``PACKAGES`` variable lists
-the package group packages to produce. The ``inherit packagegroup``
-statement sets appropriate default values and automatically adds
-``-dev``, ``-dbg``, and ``-ptest`` complementary packages for each
-package specified in the ``PACKAGES`` statement.
-
-.. note::
-
-   The ``inherit packagegroup`` line should be located near the top of the
-   recipe, certainly before the ``PACKAGES`` statement.
-
-For each package you specify in ``PACKAGES``, you can use ``RDEPENDS``
-and ``RRECOMMENDS`` entries to provide a list of packages the parent
-task package should contain. You can see examples of these further down
-in the ``packagegroup-base.bb`` recipe.
-
-Here is a short, fabricated example showing the same basic pieces for a
-hypothetical packagegroup defined in ``packagegroup-custom.bb``, where
-the variable ``PN`` is the standard way to abbreviate the reference to
-the full packagegroup name ``packagegroup-custom``:
-::
-
-   DESCRIPTION = "My Custom Package Groups"
-
-   inherit packagegroup
-
-   PACKAGES = "\
-       ${PN}-apps \
-       ${PN}-tools \
-       "
-
-   RDEPENDS_${PN}-apps = "\
-       dropbear \
-       portmap \
-       psplash"
-
-   RDEPENDS_${PN}-tools = "\
-       oprofile \
-       oprofileui-server \
-       lttng-tools"
-
-   RRECOMMENDS_${PN}-tools = "\
-       kernel-module-oprofile"
-
-In the previous example, two package group packages are created with
-their dependencies and their recommended package dependencies listed:
-``packagegroup-custom-apps``, and ``packagegroup-custom-tools``. To
-build an image using these package group packages, you need to add
-``packagegroup-custom-apps`` and/or ``packagegroup-custom-tools`` to
-``IMAGE_INSTALL``. For other forms of image dependencies see the other
-areas of this section.
-
-Customizing an Image Hostname
------------------------------
-
-By default, the configured hostname (i.e. ``/etc/hostname``) in an image
-is the same as the machine name. For example, if
-:term:`MACHINE` equals "qemux86", the
-configured hostname written to ``/etc/hostname`` is "qemux86".
-
-You can customize this name by altering the value of the "hostname"
-variable in the ``base-files`` recipe using either an append file or a
-configuration file. Use the following in an append file:
-::
-
-   hostname = "myhostname"
-
-Use the following in a configuration file:
-::
-
-   hostname_pn-base-files = "myhostname"
-
-Changing the default value of the variable "hostname" can be useful in
-certain situations. For example, suppose you need to do extensive
-testing on an image and you would like to easily identify the image
-under test from existing images with typical default hostnames. In this
-situation, you could change the default hostname to "testme", which
-results in all the images using the name "testme". Once testing is
-complete and you do not need to rebuild the image for test any longer,
-you can easily reset the default hostname.
-
-Another point of interest is that if you unset the variable, the image
-will have no default hostname in the filesystem. Here is an example that
-unsets the variable in a configuration file:
-::
-
-  hostname_pn-base-files = ""
-
-Having no default hostname in the filesystem is suitable for
-environments that use dynamic hostnames such as virtual machines.
-
-Writing a New Recipe
-====================
-
-Recipes (``.bb`` files) are fundamental components in the Yocto Project
-environment. Each software component built by the OpenEmbedded build
-system requires a recipe to define the component. This section describes
-how to create, write, and test a new recipe.
-
-.. note::
-
-   For information on variables that are useful for recipes and for
-   information about recipe naming issues, see the
-   ":ref:`ref-manual/varlocality:recipes`" section of the Yocto Project
-   Reference Manual.
-
-Overview
---------
-
-The following figure shows the basic process for creating a new recipe.
-The remainder of the section provides details for the steps.
-
-.. image:: figures/recipe-workflow.png
-   :align: center
-
-Locate or Automatically Create a Base Recipe
---------------------------------------------
-
-You can always write a recipe from scratch. However, three choices exist
-that can help you quickly get a start on a new recipe:
-
--  ``devtool add``: A command that assists in creating a recipe and an
-   environment conducive to development.
-
--  ``recipetool create``: A command provided by the Yocto Project that
-   automates creation of a base recipe based on the source files.
-
--  *Existing Recipes:* Location and modification of an existing recipe
-   that is similar in function to the recipe you need.
-
-.. note::
-
-   For information on recipe syntax, see the
-   ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:recipe syntax`" section.
-
-Creating the Base Recipe Using ``devtool add``
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The ``devtool add`` command uses the same logic for auto-creating the
-recipe as ``recipetool create``, which is listed below. Additionally,
-however, ``devtool add`` sets up an environment that makes it easy for
-you to patch the source and to make changes to the recipe as is often
-necessary when adding a recipe to build a new piece of software to be
-included in a build.
-
-You can find a complete description of the ``devtool add`` command in
-the ":ref:`sdk-manual/extensible:a closer look at \`\`devtool add\`\``" section
-in the Yocto Project Application Development and the Extensible Software
-Development Kit (eSDK) manual.
-
-Creating the Base Recipe Using ``recipetool create``
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-``recipetool create`` automates creation of a base recipe given a set of
-source code files. As long as you can extract or point to the source
-files, the tool will construct a recipe and automatically configure all
-pre-build information into the recipe. For example, suppose you have an
-application that builds using Autotools. Creating the base recipe using
-``recipetool`` results in a recipe that has the pre-build dependencies,
-license requirements, and checksums configured.
-
-To run the tool, you just need to be in your
-:term:`Build Directory` and have sourced the
-build environment setup script (i.e.
-:ref:`structure-core-script`).
-To get help on the tool, use the following command:
-::
-
-   $ recipetool -h
-   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
-   usage: recipetool [-d] [-q] [--color COLOR] [-h] <subcommand> ...
-
-   OpenEmbedded recipe tool
-
-   options:
-     -d, --debug     Enable debug output
-     -q, --quiet     Print only errors
-     --color COLOR   Colorize output (where COLOR is auto, always, never)
-     -h, --help      show this help message and exit
-
-   subcommands:
-     create          Create a new recipe
-     newappend       Create a bbappend for the specified target in the specified
-                       layer
-     setvar          Set a variable within a recipe
-     appendfile      Create/update a bbappend to replace a target file
-     appendsrcfiles  Create/update a bbappend to add or replace source files
-     appendsrcfile   Create/update a bbappend to add or replace a source file
-   Use recipetool <subcommand> --help to get help on a specific command
-
-Running ``recipetool create -o OUTFILE`` creates the base recipe and
-locates it properly in the layer that contains your source files.
-Following are some syntax examples:
-
- - Use this syntax to generate a recipe based on source. Once generated,
-   the recipe resides in the existing source code layer:
-   ::
-
-      recipetool create -o OUTFILE source
-
- - Use this syntax to generate a recipe using code that
-   you extract from source. The extracted code is placed in its own layer
-   defined by ``EXTERNALSRC``.
-   ::
-
-      recipetool create -o OUTFILE -x EXTERNALSRC source
-
- - Use this syntax to generate a recipe based on source. The options
-   direct ``recipetool`` to generate debugging information. Once generated,
-   the recipe resides in the existing source code layer:
-   ::
-
-      recipetool create -d -o OUTFILE source
-
-Locating and Using a Similar Recipe
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Before writing a recipe from scratch, it is often useful to discover
-whether someone else has already written one that meets (or comes close
-to meeting) your needs. The Yocto Project and OpenEmbedded communities
-maintain many recipes that might be candidates for what you are doing.
-You can find a good central index of these recipes in the
-:oe_layerindex:`OpenEmbedded Layer Index <>`.
-
-Working from an existing recipe or a skeleton recipe is the best way to
-get started. Here are some points on both methods:
-
--  *Locate and modify a recipe that is close to what you want to do:*
-   This method works when you are familiar with the current recipe
-   space. The method does not work so well for those new to the Yocto
-   Project or writing recipes.
-
-   Some risks associated with this method are using a recipe that has
-   areas totally unrelated to what you are trying to accomplish with
-   your recipe, not recognizing areas of the recipe that you might have
-   to add from scratch, and so forth. All these risks stem from
-   unfamiliarity with the existing recipe space.
-
--  *Use and modify the following skeleton recipe:* If for some reason
-   you do not want to use ``recipetool`` and you cannot find an existing
-   recipe that is close to meeting your needs, you can use the following
-   structure to provide the fundamental areas of a new recipe.
-   ::
-
-      DESCRIPTION = ""
-      HOMEPAGE = ""
-      LICENSE = ""
-      SECTION = ""
-      DEPENDS = ""
-      LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = ""
-
-      SRC_URI = ""
-
-Storing and Naming the Recipe
------------------------------
-
-Once you have your base recipe, you should put it in your own layer and
-name it appropriately. Locating it correctly ensures that the
-OpenEmbedded build system can find it when you use BitBake to process
-the recipe.
-
--  *Storing Your Recipe:* The OpenEmbedded build system locates your
-   recipe through the layer's ``conf/layer.conf`` file and the
-   :term:`BBFILES` variable. This
-   variable sets up a path from which the build system can locate
-   recipes. Here is the typical use:
-   ::
-
-      BBFILES += "${LAYERDIR}/recipes-*/*/*.bb \
-                  ${LAYERDIR}/recipes-*/*/*.bbappend"
-
-   Consequently, you need to be sure you locate your new recipe inside
-   your layer such that it can be found.
-
-   You can find more information on how layers are structured in the
-   "`Understanding and Creating
-   Layers <#understanding-and-creating-layers>`__" section.
-
--  *Naming Your Recipe:* When you name your recipe, you need to follow
-   this naming convention:
-   ::
-
-      basename_version.bb
-
-   Use lower-cased characters and do not include the reserved suffixes
-   ``-native``, ``-cross``, ``-initial``, or ``-dev`` casually (i.e. do not use
-   them as part of your recipe name unless the string applies). Here are some
-   examples:
-
-   .. code-block:: none
-
-      cups_1.7.0.bb
-      gawk_4.0.2.bb
-      irssi_0.8.16-rc1.bb
-
-Running a Build on the Recipe
------------------------------
-
-Creating a new recipe is usually an iterative process that requires
-using BitBake to process the recipe multiple times in order to
-progressively discover and add information to the recipe file.
-
-Assuming you have sourced the build environment setup script (i.e.
-:ref:`structure-core-script`) and you are in
-the :term:`Build Directory`, use
-BitBake to process your recipe. All you need to provide is the
-``basename`` of the recipe as described in the previous section:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake basename
-
-During the build, the OpenEmbedded build system creates a temporary work
-directory for each recipe
-(``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}``)
-where it keeps extracted source files, log files, intermediate
-compilation and packaging files, and so forth.
-
-The path to the per-recipe temporary work directory depends on the
-context in which it is being built. The quickest way to find this path
-is to have BitBake return it by running the following:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake -e basename | grep ^WORKDIR=
-
-As an example, assume a Source Directory
-top-level folder named ``poky``, a default Build Directory at
-``poky/build``, and a ``qemux86-poky-linux`` machine target system.
-Furthermore, suppose your recipe is named ``foo_1.3.0.bb``. In this
-case, the work directory the build system uses to build the package
-would be as follows:
-::
-
-   poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/foo/1.3.0-r0
-
-Inside this directory you can find sub-directories such as ``image``,
-``packages-split``, and ``temp``. After the build, you can examine these
-to determine how well the build went.
-
-.. note::
-
-   You can find log files for each task in the recipe's ``temp``
-   directory (e.g. ``poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/foo/1.3.0-r0/temp``).
-   Log files are named ``log.taskname`` (e.g. ``log.do_configure``,
-   ``log.do_fetch``, and ``log.do_compile``).
-
-You can find more information about the build process in
-":doc:`/overview-manual/development-environment`"
-chapter of the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
-
-Fetching Code
--------------
-
-The first thing your recipe must do is specify how to fetch the source
-files. Fetching is controlled mainly through the
-:term:`SRC_URI` variable. Your recipe
-must have a ``SRC_URI`` variable that points to where the source is
-located. For a graphical representation of source locations, see the
-":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:sources`" section in
-the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
-
-The :ref:`ref-tasks-fetch` task uses
-the prefix of each entry in the ``SRC_URI`` variable value to determine
-which :ref:`fetcher <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-fetching:fetchers>` to use to get your
-source files. It is the ``SRC_URI`` variable that triggers the fetcher.
-The :ref:`ref-tasks-patch` task uses
-the variable after source is fetched to apply patches. The OpenEmbedded
-build system uses
-:term:`FILESOVERRIDES` for
-scanning directory locations for local files in ``SRC_URI``.
-
-The ``SRC_URI`` variable in your recipe must define each unique location
-for your source files. It is good practice to not hard-code version
-numbers in a URL used in ``SRC_URI``. Rather than hard-code these
-values, use ``${``\ :term:`PV`\ ``}``,
-which causes the fetch process to use the version specified in the
-recipe filename. Specifying the version in this manner means that
-upgrading the recipe to a future version is as simple as renaming the
-recipe to match the new version.
-
-Here is a simple example from the
-``meta/recipes-devtools/strace/strace_5.5.bb`` recipe where the source
-comes from a single tarball. Notice the use of the
-:term:`PV` variable:
-::
-
-   SRC_URI = "https://strace.io/files/${PV}/strace-${PV}.tar.xz \
-
-Files mentioned in ``SRC_URI`` whose names end in a typical archive
-extension (e.g. ``.tar``, ``.tar.gz``, ``.tar.bz2``, ``.zip``, and so
-forth), are automatically extracted during the
-:ref:`ref-tasks-unpack` task. For
-another example that specifies these types of files, see the
-"`Autotooled Package <#new-recipe-autotooled-package>`__" section.
-
-Another way of specifying source is from an SCM. For Git repositories,
-you must specify :term:`SRCREV` and
-you should specify :term:`PV` to include
-the revision with :term:`SRCPV`. Here
-is an example from the recipe
-``meta/recipes-kernel/blktrace/blktrace_git.bb``:
-::
-
-   SRCREV = "d6918c8832793b4205ed3bfede78c2f915c23385"
-
-   PR = "r6"
-   PV = "1.0.5+git${SRCPV}"
-
-   SRC_URI = "git://git.kernel.dk/blktrace.git \
-              file://ldflags.patch"
-
-If your ``SRC_URI`` statement includes URLs pointing to individual files
-fetched from a remote server other than a version control system,
-BitBake attempts to verify the files against checksums defined in your
-recipe to ensure they have not been tampered with or otherwise modified
-since the recipe was written. Two checksums are used:
-``SRC_URI[md5sum]`` and ``SRC_URI[sha256sum]``.
-
-If your ``SRC_URI`` variable points to more than a single URL (excluding
-SCM URLs), you need to provide the ``md5`` and ``sha256`` checksums for
-each URL. For these cases, you provide a name for each URL as part of
-the ``SRC_URI`` and then reference that name in the subsequent checksum
-statements. Here is an example combining lines from the files
-``git.inc`` and ``git_2.24.1.bb``:
-::
-
-   SRC_URI = "${KERNELORG_MIRROR}/software/scm/git/git-${PV}.tar.gz;name=tarball \
-              ${KERNELORG_MIRROR}/software/scm/git/git-manpages-${PV}.tar.gz;name=manpages"
-
-   SRC_URI[tarball.md5sum] = "166bde96adbbc11c8843d4f8f4f9811b"
-   SRC_URI[tarball.sha256sum] = "ad5334956301c86841eb1e5b1bb20884a6bad89a10a6762c958220c7cf64da02"
-   SRC_URI[manpages.md5sum] = "31c2272a8979022497ba3d4202df145d"
-   SRC_URI[manpages.sha256sum] = "9a7ae3a093bea39770eb96ca3e5b40bff7af0b9f6123f089d7821d0e5b8e1230"
-
-Proper values for ``md5`` and ``sha256`` checksums might be available
-with other signatures on the download page for the upstream source (e.g.
-``md5``, ``sha1``, ``sha256``, ``GPG``, and so forth). Because the
-OpenEmbedded build system only deals with ``sha256sum`` and ``md5sum``,
-you should verify all the signatures you find by hand.
-
-If no ``SRC_URI`` checksums are specified when you attempt to build the
-recipe, or you provide an incorrect checksum, the build will produce an
-error for each missing or incorrect checksum. As part of the error
-message, the build system provides the checksum string corresponding to
-the fetched file. Once you have the correct checksums, you can copy and
-paste them into your recipe and then run the build again to continue.
-
-.. note::
-
-   As mentioned, if the upstream source provides signatures for
-   verifying the downloaded source code, you should verify those
-   manually before setting the checksum values in the recipe and
-   continuing with the build.
-
-This final example is a bit more complicated and is from the
-``meta/recipes-sato/rxvt-unicode/rxvt-unicode_9.20.bb`` recipe. The
-example's ``SRC_URI`` statement identifies multiple files as the source
-files for the recipe: a tarball, a patch file, a desktop file, and an
-icon.
-::
-
-   SRC_URI = "http://dist.schmorp.de/rxvt-unicode/Attic/rxvt-unicode-${PV}.tar.bz2 \
-              file://xwc.patch \
-              file://rxvt.desktop \
-              file://rxvt.png"
-
-When you specify local files using the ``file://`` URI protocol, the
-build system fetches files from the local machine. The path is relative
-to the :term:`FILESPATH` variable
-and searches specific directories in a certain order:
-``${``\ :term:`BP`\ ``}``,
-``${``\ :term:`BPN`\ ``}``, and
-``files``. The directories are assumed to be subdirectories of the
-directory in which the recipe or append file resides. For another
-example that specifies these types of files, see the "`Single .c File
-Package (Hello
-World!) <#new-recipe-single-c-file-package-hello-world>`__" section.
-
-The previous example also specifies a patch file. Patch files are files
-whose names usually end in ``.patch`` or ``.diff`` but can end with
-compressed suffixes such as ``diff.gz`` and ``patch.bz2``, for example.
-The build system automatically applies patches as described in the
-"`Patching Code <#new-recipe-patching-code>`__" section.
-
-Unpacking Code
---------------
-
-During the build, the
-:ref:`ref-tasks-unpack` task unpacks
-the source with ``${``\ :term:`S`\ ``}``
-pointing to where it is unpacked.
-
-If you are fetching your source files from an upstream source archived
-tarball and the tarball's internal structure matches the common
-convention of a top-level subdirectory named
-``${``\ :term:`BPN`\ ``}-${``\ :term:`PV`\ ``}``,
-then you do not need to set ``S``. However, if ``SRC_URI`` specifies to
-fetch source from an archive that does not use this convention, or from
-an SCM like Git or Subversion, your recipe needs to define ``S``.
-
-If processing your recipe using BitBake successfully unpacks the source
-files, you need to be sure that the directory pointed to by ``${S}``
-matches the structure of the source.
-
-Patching Code
--------------
-
-Sometimes it is necessary to patch code after it has been fetched. Any
-files mentioned in ``SRC_URI`` whose names end in ``.patch`` or
-``.diff`` or compressed versions of these suffixes (e.g. ``diff.gz`` are
-treated as patches. The
-:ref:`ref-tasks-patch` task
-automatically applies these patches.
-
-The build system should be able to apply patches with the "-p1" option
-(i.e. one directory level in the path will be stripped off). If your
-patch needs to have more directory levels stripped off, specify the
-number of levels using the "striplevel" option in the ``SRC_URI`` entry
-for the patch. Alternatively, if your patch needs to be applied in a
-specific subdirectory that is not specified in the patch file, use the
-"patchdir" option in the entry.
-
-As with all local files referenced in
-:term:`SRC_URI` using ``file://``,
-you should place patch files in a directory next to the recipe either
-named the same as the base name of the recipe
-(:term:`BP` and
-:term:`BPN`) or "files".
-
-Licensing
----------
-
-Your recipe needs to have both the
-:term:`LICENSE` and
-:term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`
-variables:
-
--  ``LICENSE``: This variable specifies the license for the software.
-   If you do not know the license under which the software you are
-   building is distributed, you should go to the source code and look
-   for that information. Typical files containing this information
-   include ``COPYING``, ``LICENSE``, and ``README`` files. You could
-   also find the information near the top of a source file. For example,
-   given a piece of software licensed under the GNU General Public
-   License version 2, you would set ``LICENSE`` as follows:
-   ::
-
-      LICENSE = "GPLv2"
-
-   The licenses you specify within ``LICENSE`` can have any name as long
-   as you do not use spaces, since spaces are used as separators between
-   license names. For standard licenses, use the names of the files in
-   ``meta/files/common-licenses/`` or the ``SPDXLICENSEMAP`` flag names
-   defined in ``meta/conf/licenses.conf``.
-
--  ``LIC_FILES_CHKSUM``: The OpenEmbedded build system uses this
-   variable to make sure the license text has not changed. If it has,
-   the build produces an error and it affords you the chance to figure
-   it out and correct the problem.
-
-   You need to specify all applicable licensing files for the software.
-   At the end of the configuration step, the build process will compare
-   the checksums of the files to be sure the text has not changed. Any
-   differences result in an error with the message containing the
-   current checksum. For more explanation and examples of how to set the
-   ``LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`` variable, see the
-   ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:tracking license changes`" section.
-
-   To determine the correct checksum string, you can list the
-   appropriate files in the ``LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`` variable with incorrect
-   md5 strings, attempt to build the software, and then note the
-   resulting error messages that will report the correct md5 strings.
-   See the "`Fetching Code <#new-recipe-fetching-code>`__" section for
-   additional information.
-
-   Here is an example that assumes the software has a ``COPYING`` file:
-   ::
-
-      LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://COPYING;md5=xxx"
-
-   When you try to build the
-   software, the build system will produce an error and give you the
-   correct string that you can substitute into the recipe file for a
-   subsequent build.
-
-Dependencies
-------------
-
-Most software packages have a short list of other packages that they
-require, which are called dependencies. These dependencies fall into two
-main categories: build-time dependencies, which are required when the
-software is built; and runtime dependencies, which are required to be
-installed on the target in order for the software to run.
-
-Within a recipe, you specify build-time dependencies using the
-:term:`DEPENDS` variable. Although
-nuances exist, items specified in ``DEPENDS`` should be names of other
-recipes. It is important that you specify all build-time dependencies
-explicitly.
-
-Another consideration is that configure scripts might automatically
-check for optional dependencies and enable corresponding functionality
-if those dependencies are found. If you wish to make a recipe that is
-more generally useful (e.g. publish the recipe in a layer for others to
-use), instead of hard-disabling the functionality, you can use the
-:term:`PACKAGECONFIG` variable to allow functionality and the
-corresponding dependencies to be enabled and disabled easily by other
-users of the recipe.
-
-Similar to build-time dependencies, you specify runtime dependencies
-through a variable -
-:term:`RDEPENDS`, which is
-package-specific. All variables that are package-specific need to have
-the name of the package added to the end as an override. Since the main
-package for a recipe has the same name as the recipe, and the recipe's
-name can be found through the
-``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}`` variable, then
-you specify the dependencies for the main package by setting
-``RDEPENDS_${PN}``. If the package were named ``${PN}-tools``, then you
-would set ``RDEPENDS_${PN}-tools``, and so forth.
-
-Some runtime dependencies will be set automatically at packaging time.
-These dependencies include any shared library dependencies (i.e. if a
-package "example" contains "libexample" and another package "mypackage"
-contains a binary that links to "libexample" then the OpenEmbedded build
-system will automatically add a runtime dependency to "mypackage" on
-"example"). See the
-":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`"
-section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual for further
-details.
-
-Configuring the Recipe
-----------------------
-
-Most software provides some means of setting build-time configuration
-options before compilation. Typically, setting these options is
-accomplished by running a configure script with options, or by modifying
-a build configuration file.
-
-.. note::
-
-   As of Yocto Project Release 1.7, some of the core recipes that
-   package binary configuration scripts now disable the scripts due to
-   the scripts previously requiring error-prone path substitution. The
-   OpenEmbedded build system uses ``pkg-config`` now, which is much more
-   robust. You can find a list of the ``*-config`` scripts that are disabled
-   in the ":ref:`migration-1.7-binary-configuration-scripts-disabled`" section
-   in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
-
-A major part of build-time configuration is about checking for
-build-time dependencies and possibly enabling optional functionality as
-a result. You need to specify any build-time dependencies for the
-software you are building in your recipe's
-:term:`DEPENDS` value, in terms of
-other recipes that satisfy those dependencies. You can often find
-build-time or runtime dependencies described in the software's
-documentation.
-
-The following list provides configuration items of note based on how
-your software is built:
-
--  *Autotools:* If your source files have a ``configure.ac`` file, then
-   your software is built using Autotools. If this is the case, you just
-   need to worry about modifying the configuration.
-
-   When using Autotools, your recipe needs to inherit the
-   :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` class
-   and your recipe does not have to contain a
-   :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task.
-   However, you might still want to make some adjustments. For example,
-   you can set
-   :term:`EXTRA_OECONF` or
-   :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`
-   to pass any needed configure options that are specific to the recipe.
-
--  *CMake:* If your source files have a ``CMakeLists.txt`` file, then
-   your software is built using CMake. If this is the case, you just
-   need to worry about modifying the configuration.
-
-   When you use CMake, your recipe needs to inherit the
-   :ref:`cmake <ref-classes-cmake>` class and your
-   recipe does not have to contain a
-   :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task.
-   You can make some adjustments by setting
-   :term:`EXTRA_OECMAKE` to
-   pass any needed configure options that are specific to the recipe.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      If you need to install one or more custom CMake toolchain files
-      that are supplied by the application you are building, install the
-      files to ``${D}${datadir}/cmake/Modules`` during ``do_install``.
-
--  *Other:* If your source files do not have a ``configure.ac`` or
-   ``CMakeLists.txt`` file, then your software is built using some
-   method other than Autotools or CMake. If this is the case, you
-   normally need to provide a
-   :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task
-   in your recipe unless, of course, there is nothing to configure.
-
-   Even if your software is not being built by Autotools or CMake, you
-   still might not need to deal with any configuration issues. You need
-   to determine if configuration is even a required step. You might need
-   to modify a Makefile or some configuration file used for the build to
-   specify necessary build options. Or, perhaps you might need to run a
-   provided, custom configure script with the appropriate options.
-
-   For the case involving a custom configure script, you would run
-   ``./configure --help`` and look for the options you need to set.
-
-Once configuration succeeds, it is always good practice to look at the
-``log.do_configure`` file to ensure that the appropriate options have
-been enabled and no additional build-time dependencies need to be added
-to ``DEPENDS``. For example, if the configure script reports that it
-found something not mentioned in ``DEPENDS``, or that it did not find
-something that it needed for some desired optional functionality, then
-you would need to add those to ``DEPENDS``. Looking at the log might
-also reveal items being checked for, enabled, or both that you do not
-want, or items not being found that are in ``DEPENDS``, in which case
-you would need to look at passing extra options to the configure script
-as needed. For reference information on configure options specific to
-the software you are building, you can consult the output of the
-``./configure --help`` command within ``${S}`` or consult the software's
-upstream documentation.
-
-Using Headers to Interface with Devices
----------------------------------------
-
-If your recipe builds an application that needs to communicate with some
-device or needs an API into a custom kernel, you will need to provide
-appropriate header files. Under no circumstances should you ever modify
-the existing
-``meta/recipes-kernel/linux-libc-headers/linux-libc-headers.inc`` file.
-These headers are used to build ``libc`` and must not be compromised
-with custom or machine-specific header information. If you customize
-``libc`` through modified headers all other applications that use
-``libc`` thus become affected.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Never copy and customize the ``libc`` header file (i.e.
-   ``meta/recipes-kernel/linux-libc-headers/linux-libc-headers.inc``).
-
-The correct way to interface to a device or custom kernel is to use a
-separate package that provides the additional headers for the driver or
-other unique interfaces. When doing so, your application also becomes
-responsible for creating a dependency on that specific provider.
-
-Consider the following:
-
--  Never modify ``linux-libc-headers.inc``. Consider that file to be
-   part of the ``libc`` system, and not something you use to access the
-   kernel directly. You should access ``libc`` through specific ``libc``
-   calls.
-
--  Applications that must talk directly to devices should either provide
-   necessary headers themselves, or establish a dependency on a special
-   headers package that is specific to that driver.
-
-For example, suppose you want to modify an existing header that adds I/O
-control or network support. If the modifications are used by a small
-number programs, providing a unique version of a header is easy and has
-little impact. When doing so, bear in mind the guidelines in the
-previous list.
-
-.. note::
-
-   If for some reason your changes need to modify the behavior of the ``libc``,
-   and subsequently all other applications on the system, use a ``.bbappend``
-   to modify the ``linux-kernel-headers.inc`` file. However, take care to not
-   make the changes machine specific.
-
-Consider a case where your kernel is older and you need an older
-``libc`` ABI. The headers installed by your recipe should still be a
-standard mainline kernel, not your own custom one.
-
-When you use custom kernel headers you need to get them from
-:term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR`,
-which is the directory with kernel headers that are required to build
-out-of-tree modules. Your recipe will also need the following:
-::
-
-   do_configure[depends] += "virtual/kernel:do_shared_workdir"
-
-Compilation
------------
-
-During a build, the ``do_compile`` task happens after source is fetched,
-unpacked, and configured. If the recipe passes through ``do_compile``
-successfully, nothing needs to be done.
-
-However, if the compile step fails, you need to diagnose the failure.
-Here are some common issues that cause failures.
-
-.. note::
-
-   For cases where improper paths are detected for configuration files
-   or for when libraries/headers cannot be found, be sure you are using
-   the more robust ``pkg-config``. See the note in section
-   ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:Configuring the Recipe`" for additional information.
-
--  *Parallel build failures:* These failures manifest themselves as
-   intermittent errors, or errors reporting that a file or directory
-   that should be created by some other part of the build process could
-   not be found. This type of failure can occur even if, upon
-   inspection, the file or directory does exist after the build has
-   failed, because that part of the build process happened in the wrong
-   order.
-
-   To fix the problem, you need to either satisfy the missing dependency
-   in the Makefile or whatever script produced the Makefile, or (as a
-   workaround) set :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` to an empty string:
-   ::
-
-      PARALLEL_MAKE = ""
-
-   For information on parallel Makefile issues, see the "`Debugging
-   Parallel Make Races <#debugging-parallel-make-races>`__" section.
-
--  *Improper host path usage:* This failure applies to recipes building
-   for the target or ``nativesdk`` only. The failure occurs when the
-   compilation process uses improper headers, libraries, or other files
-   from the host system when cross-compiling for the target.
-
-   To fix the problem, examine the ``log.do_compile`` file to identify
-   the host paths being used (e.g. ``/usr/include``, ``/usr/lib``, and
-   so forth) and then either add configure options, apply a patch, or do
-   both.
-
--  *Failure to find required libraries/headers:* If a build-time
-   dependency is missing because it has not been declared in
-   :term:`DEPENDS`, or because the
-   dependency exists but the path used by the build process to find the
-   file is incorrect and the configure step did not detect it, the
-   compilation process could fail. For either of these failures, the
-   compilation process notes that files could not be found. In these
-   cases, you need to go back and add additional options to the
-   configure script as well as possibly add additional build-time
-   dependencies to ``DEPENDS``.
-
-   Occasionally, it is necessary to apply a patch to the source to
-   ensure the correct paths are used. If you need to specify paths to
-   find files staged into the sysroot from other recipes, use the
-   variables that the OpenEmbedded build system provides (e.g.
-   ``STAGING_BINDIR``, ``STAGING_INCDIR``, ``STAGING_DATADIR``, and so
-   forth).
-
-Installing
-----------
-
-During ``do_install``, the task copies the built files along with their
-hierarchy to locations that would mirror their locations on the target
-device. The installation process copies files from the
-``${``\ :term:`S`\ ``}``,
-``${``\ :term:`B`\ ``}``, and
-``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}``
-directories to the ``${``\ :term:`D`\ ``}``
-directory to create the structure as it should appear on the target
-system.
-
-How your software is built affects what you must do to be sure your
-software is installed correctly. The following list describes what you
-must do for installation depending on the type of build system used by
-the software being built:
-
--  *Autotools and CMake:* If the software your recipe is building uses
-   Autotools or CMake, the OpenEmbedded build system understands how to
-   install the software. Consequently, you do not have to have a
-   ``do_install`` task as part of your recipe. You just need to make
-   sure the install portion of the build completes with no issues.
-   However, if you wish to install additional files not already being
-   installed by ``make install``, you should do this using a
-   ``do_install_append`` function using the install command as described
-   in the "Manual" bulleted item later in this list.
-
--  *Other (using* ``make install``\ *)*: You need to define a ``do_install``
-   function in your recipe. The function should call
-   ``oe_runmake install`` and will likely need to pass in the
-   destination directory as well. How you pass that path is dependent on
-   how the ``Makefile`` being run is written (e.g. ``DESTDIR=${D}``,
-   ``PREFIX=${D}``, ``INSTALLROOT=${D}``, and so forth).
-
-   For an example recipe using ``make install``, see the
-   "`Makefile-Based Package <#new-recipe-makefile-based-package>`__"
-   section.
-
--  *Manual:* You need to define a ``do_install`` function in your
-   recipe. The function must first use ``install -d`` to create the
-   directories under
-   ``${``\ :term:`D`\ ``}``. Once the
-   directories exist, your function can use ``install`` to manually
-   install the built software into the directories.
-
-   You can find more information on ``install`` at
-   https://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/html_node/install-invocation.html.
-
-For the scenarios that do not use Autotools or CMake, you need to track
-the installation and diagnose and fix any issues until everything
-installs correctly. You need to look in the default location of
-``${D}``, which is ``${WORKDIR}/image``, to be sure your files have been
-installed correctly.
-
-.. note::
-
-   -  During the installation process, you might need to modify some of
-      the installed files to suit the target layout. For example, you
-      might need to replace hard-coded paths in an initscript with
-      values of variables provided by the build system, such as
-      replacing ``/usr/bin/`` with ``${bindir}``. If you do perform such
-      modifications during ``do_install``, be sure to modify the
-      destination file after copying rather than before copying.
-      Modifying after copying ensures that the build system can
-      re-execute ``do_install`` if needed.
-
-   -  ``oe_runmake install``, which can be run directly or can be run
-      indirectly by the
-      :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` and
-      :ref:`cmake <ref-classes-cmake>` classes,
-      runs ``make install`` in parallel. Sometimes, a Makefile can have
-      missing dependencies between targets that can result in race
-      conditions. If you experience intermittent failures during
-      ``do_install``, you might be able to work around them by disabling
-      parallel Makefile installs by adding the following to the recipe:
-      ::
-
-         PARALLEL_MAKEINST = ""
-
-      See :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST` for additional information.
-
-   -  If you need to install one or more custom CMake toolchain files
-      that are supplied by the application you are building, install the
-      files to ``${D}${datadir}/cmake/Modules`` during
-      :ref:`ref-tasks-install`.
-
-Enabling System Services
-------------------------
-
-If you want to install a service, which is a process that usually starts
-on boot and runs in the background, then you must include some
-additional definitions in your recipe.
-
-If you are adding services and the service initialization script or the
-service file itself is not installed, you must provide for that
-installation in your recipe using a ``do_install_append`` function. If
-your recipe already has a ``do_install`` function, update the function
-near its end rather than adding an additional ``do_install_append``
-function.
-
-When you create the installation for your services, you need to
-accomplish what is normally done by ``make install``. In other words,
-make sure your installation arranges the output similar to how it is
-arranged on the target system.
-
-The OpenEmbedded build system provides support for starting services two
-different ways:
-
--  *SysVinit:* SysVinit is a system and service manager that manages the
-   init system used to control the very basic functions of your system.
-   The init program is the first program started by the Linux kernel
-   when the system boots. Init then controls the startup, running and
-   shutdown of all other programs.
-
-   To enable a service using SysVinit, your recipe needs to inherit the
-   :ref:`update-rc.d <ref-classes-update-rc.d>`
-   class. The class helps facilitate safely installing the package on
-   the target.
-
-   You will need to set the
-   :term:`INITSCRIPT_PACKAGES`,
-   :term:`INITSCRIPT_NAME`,
-   and
-   :term:`INITSCRIPT_PARAMS`
-   variables within your recipe.
-
--  *systemd:* System Management Daemon (systemd) was designed to replace
-   SysVinit and to provide enhanced management of services. For more
-   information on systemd, see the systemd homepage at
-   https://freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/.
-
-   To enable a service using systemd, your recipe needs to inherit the
-   :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class. See
-   the ``systemd.bbclass`` file located in your :term:`Source Directory`
-   section for
-   more information.
-
-Packaging
----------
-
-Successful packaging is a combination of automated processes performed
-by the OpenEmbedded build system and some specific steps you need to
-take. The following list describes the process:
-
--  *Splitting Files*: The ``do_package`` task splits the files produced
-   by the recipe into logical components. Even software that produces a
-   single binary might still have debug symbols, documentation, and
-   other logical components that should be split out. The ``do_package``
-   task ensures that files are split up and packaged correctly.
-
--  *Running QA Checks*: The
-   :ref:`insane <ref-classes-insane>` class adds a
-   step to the package generation process so that output quality
-   assurance checks are generated by the OpenEmbedded build system. This
-   step performs a range of checks to be sure the build's output is free
-   of common problems that show up during runtime. For information on
-   these checks, see the
-   :ref:`insane <ref-classes-insane>` class and
-   the ":ref:`ref-manual/qa-checks:qa error and warning messages`"
-   chapter in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
-
--  *Hand-Checking Your Packages*: After you build your software, you
-   need to be sure your packages are correct. Examine the
-   ``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/packages-split``
-   directory and make sure files are where you expect them to be. If you
-   discover problems, you can set
-   :term:`PACKAGES`,
-   :term:`FILES`,
-   ``do_install(_append)``, and so forth as needed.
-
--  *Splitting an Application into Multiple Packages*: If you need to
-   split an application into several packages, see the "`Splitting an
-   Application into Multiple
-   Packages <#splitting-an-application-into-multiple-packages>`__"
-   section for an example.
-
--  *Installing a Post-Installation Script*: For an example showing how
-   to install a post-installation script, see the "`Post-Installation
-   Scripts <#new-recipe-post-installation-scripts>`__" section.
-
--  *Marking Package Architecture*: Depending on what your recipe is
-   building and how it is configured, it might be important to mark the
-   packages produced as being specific to a particular machine, or to
-   mark them as not being specific to a particular machine or
-   architecture at all.
-
-   By default, packages apply to any machine with the same architecture
-   as the target machine. When a recipe produces packages that are
-   machine-specific (e.g. the
-   :term:`MACHINE` value is passed
-   into the configure script or a patch is applied only for a particular
-   machine), you should mark them as such by adding the following to the
-   recipe:
-   ::
-
-      PACKAGE_ARCH = "${MACHINE_ARCH}"
-
-   On the other hand, if the recipe produces packages that do not
-   contain anything specific to the target machine or architecture at
-   all (e.g. recipes that simply package script files or configuration
-   files), you should use the
-   :ref:`allarch <ref-classes-allarch>` class to
-   do this for you by adding this to your recipe:
-   ::
-
-      inherit allarch
-
-   Ensuring that the package architecture is correct is not critical
-   while you are doing the first few builds of your recipe. However, it
-   is important in order to ensure that your recipe rebuilds (or does
-   not rebuild) appropriately in response to changes in configuration,
-   and to ensure that you get the appropriate packages installed on the
-   target machine, particularly if you run separate builds for more than
-   one target machine.
-
-Sharing Files Between Recipes
------------------------------
-
-Recipes often need to use files provided by other recipes on the build
-host. For example, an application linking to a common library needs
-access to the library itself and its associated headers. The way this
-access is accomplished is by populating a sysroot with files. Each
-recipe has two sysroots in its work directory, one for target files
-(``recipe-sysroot``) and one for files that are native to the build host
-(``recipe-sysroot-native``).
-
-.. note::
-
-   You could find the term "staging" used within the Yocto project
-   regarding files populating sysroots (e.g. the :term:`STAGING_DIR`
-   variable).
-
-Recipes should never populate the sysroot directly (i.e. write files
-into sysroot). Instead, files should be installed into standard
-locations during the
-:ref:`ref-tasks-install` task within
-the ``${``\ :term:`D`\ ``}`` directory. The
-reason for this limitation is that almost all files that populate the
-sysroot are cataloged in manifests in order to ensure the files can be
-removed later when a recipe is either modified or removed. Thus, the
-sysroot is able to remain free from stale files.
-
-A subset of the files installed by the
-:ref:`ref-tasks-install` task are
-used by the
-:ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot`
-task as defined by the the
-:term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` variable to
-automatically populate the sysroot. It is possible to modify the list of
-directories that populate the sysroot. The following example shows how
-you could add the ``/opt`` directory to the list of directories within a
-recipe:
-::
-
-   SYSROOT_DIRS += "/opt"
-
-.. note::
-
-   The `/sysroot-only` is to be used by recipes that generate artifacts
-   that are not included in the target filesystem, allowing them to share
-   these artifacts without needing to use the ``DEPLOY_DIR``.
-
-For a more complete description of the
-:ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot`
-task and its associated functions, see the
-:ref:`staging <ref-classes-staging>` class.
-
-Using Virtual Providers
------------------------
-
-Prior to a build, if you know that several different recipes provide the
-same functionality, you can use a virtual provider (i.e. ``virtual/*``)
-as a placeholder for the actual provider. The actual provider is
-determined at build-time.
-
-A common scenario where a virtual provider is used would be for the
-kernel recipe. Suppose you have three kernel recipes whose
-:term:`PN` values map to ``kernel-big``,
-``kernel-mid``, and ``kernel-small``. Furthermore, each of these recipes
-in some way uses a :term:`PROVIDES`
-statement that essentially identifies itself as being able to provide
-``virtual/kernel``. Here is one way through the
-:ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class:
-::
-
-   PROVIDES += "${@ "virtual/kernel" if (d.getVar("KERNEL_PACKAGE_NAME") == "kernel") else "" }"
-
-Any recipe that inherits the ``kernel`` class is
-going to utilize a ``PROVIDES`` statement that identifies that recipe as
-being able to provide the ``virtual/kernel`` item.
-
-Now comes the time to actually build an image and you need a kernel
-recipe, but which one? You can configure your build to call out the
-kernel recipe you want by using the :term:`PREFERRED_PROVIDER` variable. As
-an example, consider the :yocto_git:`x86-base.inc
-</poky/tree/meta/conf/machine/include/x86-base.inc>` include file, which is a
-machine (i.e. :term:`MACHINE`) configuration file. This include file is the
-reason all x86-based machines use the ``linux-yocto`` kernel. Here are the
-relevant lines from the include file:
-::
-
-   PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/kernel ??= "linux-yocto"
-   PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto ??= "4.15%"
-
-When you use a virtual provider, you do not have to "hard code" a recipe
-name as a build dependency. You can use the
-:term:`DEPENDS` variable to state the
-build is dependent on ``virtual/kernel`` for example:
-::
-
-   DEPENDS = "virtual/kernel"
-
-During the build, the OpenEmbedded build system picks
-the correct recipe needed for the ``virtual/kernel`` dependency based on
-the ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER`` variable. If you want to use the small kernel
-mentioned at the beginning of this section, configure your build as
-follows:
-::
-
-   PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/kernel ??= "kernel-small"
-
-.. note::
-
-   Any recipe that ``PROVIDES`` a ``virtual/*`` item that is ultimately not
-   selected through ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER`` does not get built. Preventing these
-   recipes from building is usually the desired behavior since this mechanism's
-   purpose is to select between mutually exclusive alternative providers.
-
-The following lists specific examples of virtual providers:
-
--  ``virtual/kernel``: Provides the name of the kernel recipe to use
-   when building a kernel image.
-
--  ``virtual/bootloader``: Provides the name of the bootloader to use
-   when building an image.
-
--  ``virtual/libgbm``: Provides ``gbm.pc``.
-
--  ``virtual/egl``: Provides ``egl.pc`` and possibly ``wayland-egl.pc``.
-
--  ``virtual/libgl``: Provides ``gl.pc`` (i.e. libGL).
-
--  ``virtual/libgles1``: Provides ``glesv1_cm.pc`` (i.e. libGLESv1_CM).
-
--  ``virtual/libgles2``: Provides ``glesv2.pc`` (i.e. libGLESv2).
-
-.. note::
-
-   Virtual providers only apply to build time dependencies specified with
-   :term:`PROVIDES` and :term:`DEPENDS`. They do not apply to runtime
-   dependencies specified with :term:`RPROVIDES` and :term:`RDEPENDS`.
-
-Properly Versioning Pre-Release Recipes
----------------------------------------
-
-Sometimes the name of a recipe can lead to versioning problems when the
-recipe is upgraded to a final release. For example, consider the
-``irssi_0.8.16-rc1.bb`` recipe file in the list of example recipes in
-the "`Storing and Naming the
-Recipe <#new-recipe-storing-and-naming-the-recipe>`__" section. This
-recipe is at a release candidate stage (i.e. "rc1"). When the recipe is
-released, the recipe filename becomes ``irssi_0.8.16.bb``. The version
-change from ``0.8.16-rc1`` to ``0.8.16`` is seen as a decrease by the
-build system and package managers, so the resulting packages will not
-correctly trigger an upgrade.
-
-In order to ensure the versions compare properly, the recommended
-convention is to set :term:`PV` within the
-recipe to "previous_version+current_version". You can use an additional
-variable so that you can use the current version elsewhere. Here is an
-example:
-::
-
-   REALPV = "0.8.16-rc1"
-   PV = "0.8.15+${REALPV}"
-
-Post-Installation Scripts
--------------------------
-
-Post-installation scripts run immediately after installing a package on
-the target or during image creation when a package is included in an
-image. To add a post-installation script to a package, add a
-``pkg_postinst_``\ `PACKAGENAME`\ ``()`` function to the recipe file
-(``.bb``) and replace `PACKAGENAME` with the name of the package you want
-to attach to the ``postinst`` script. To apply the post-installation
-script to the main package for the recipe, which is usually what is
-required, specify
-``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}`` in place of
-PACKAGENAME.
-
-A post-installation function has the following structure:
-::
-
-   pkg_postinst_PACKAGENAME() {
-       # Commands to carry out
-   }
-
-The script defined in the post-installation function is called when the
-root filesystem is created. If the script succeeds, the package is
-marked as installed.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Any RPM post-installation script that runs on the target should
-   return a 0 exit code. RPM does not allow non-zero exit codes for
-   these scripts, and the RPM package manager will cause the package to
-   fail installation on the target.
-
-Sometimes it is necessary for the execution of a post-installation
-script to be delayed until the first boot. For example, the script might
-need to be executed on the device itself. To delay script execution
-until boot time, you must explicitly mark post installs to defer to the
-target. You can use ``pkg_postinst_ontarget()`` or call
-``postinst_intercept delay_to_first_boot`` from ``pkg_postinst()``. Any
-failure of a ``pkg_postinst()`` script (including exit 1) triggers an
-error during the
-:ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task.
-
-If you have recipes that use ``pkg_postinst`` function and they require
-the use of non-standard native tools that have dependencies during
-rootfs construction, you need to use the
-:term:`PACKAGE_WRITE_DEPS`
-variable in your recipe to list these tools. If you do not use this
-variable, the tools might be missing and execution of the
-post-installation script is deferred until first boot. Deferring the
-script to first boot is undesirable and for read-only rootfs impossible.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Equivalent support for pre-install, pre-uninstall, and post-uninstall
-   scripts exist by way of ``pkg_preinst``, ``pkg_prerm``, and ``pkg_postrm``,
-   respectively. These scrips work in exactly the same way as does
-   ``pkg_postinst`` with the exception that they run at different times. Also,
-   because of when they run, they are not applicable to being run at image
-   creation time like ``pkg_postinst``.
-
-Testing
--------
-
-The final step for completing your recipe is to be sure that the
-software you built runs correctly. To accomplish runtime testing, add
-the build's output packages to your image and test them on the target.
-
-For information on how to customize your image by adding specific
-packages, see the "`Customizing
-Images <#usingpoky-extend-customimage>`__" section.
-
-Examples
---------
-
-To help summarize how to write a recipe, this section provides some
-examples given various scenarios:
-
--  Recipes that use local files
-
--  Using an Autotooled package
-
--  Using a Makefile-based package
-
--  Splitting an application into multiple packages
-
--  Adding binaries to an image
-
-Single .c File Package (Hello World!)
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Building an application from a single file that is stored locally (e.g.
-under ``files``) requires a recipe that has the file listed in the
-``SRC_URI`` variable. Additionally, you need to manually write the
-``do_compile`` and ``do_install`` tasks. The ``S`` variable defines the
-directory containing the source code, which is set to
-:term:`WORKDIR` in this case - the
-directory BitBake uses for the build.
-::
-
-   SUMMARY = "Simple helloworld application"
-   SECTION = "examples"
-   LICENSE = "MIT"
-   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://${COMMON_LICENSE_DIR}/MIT;md5=0835ade698e0bcf8506ecda2f7b4f302"
-
-   SRC_URI = "file://helloworld.c"
-
-   S = "${WORKDIR}"
-
-   do_compile() {
-       ${CC} ${LDFLAGS} helloworld.c -o helloworld
-   }
-
-   do_install() {
-       install -d ${D}${bindir}
-       install -m 0755 helloworld ${D}${bindir}
-   }
-
-By default, the ``helloworld``, ``helloworld-dbg``, and
-``helloworld-dev`` packages are built. For information on how to
-customize the packaging process, see the "`Splitting an Application into
-Multiple Packages <#splitting-an-application-into-multiple-packages>`__"
-section.
-
-Autotooled Package
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Applications that use Autotools such as ``autoconf`` and ``automake``
-require a recipe that has a source archive listed in ``SRC_URI`` and
-also inherit the
-:ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` class,
-which contains the definitions of all the steps needed to build an
-Autotool-based application. The result of the build is automatically
-packaged. And, if the application uses NLS for localization, packages
-with local information are generated (one package per language).
-Following is one example: (``hello_2.3.bb``)
-::
-
-   SUMMARY = "GNU Helloworld application"
-   SECTION = "examples"
-   LICENSE = "GPLv2+"
-   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://COPYING;md5=751419260aa954499f7abaabaa882bbe"
-
-   SRC_URI = "${GNU_MIRROR}/hello/hello-${PV}.tar.gz"
-
-   inherit autotools gettext
-
-The variable ``LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`` is used to track source license
-changes as described in the
-":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:tracking license changes`" section in
-the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. You can quickly create
-Autotool-based recipes in a manner similar to the previous example.
-
-Makefile-Based Package
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Applications that use GNU ``make`` also require a recipe that has the
-source archive listed in ``SRC_URI``. You do not need to add a
-``do_compile`` step since by default BitBake starts the ``make`` command
-to compile the application. If you need additional ``make`` options, you
-should store them in the
-:term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE` or
-:term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`
-variables. BitBake passes these options into the GNU ``make``
-invocation. Note that a ``do_install`` task is still required.
-Otherwise, BitBake runs an empty ``do_install`` task by default.
-
-Some applications might require extra parameters to be passed to the
-compiler. For example, the application might need an additional header
-path. You can accomplish this by adding to the ``CFLAGS`` variable. The
-following example shows this:
-::
-
-   CFLAGS_prepend = "-I ${S}/include "
-
-In the following example, ``mtd-utils`` is a makefile-based package:
-::
-
-   SUMMARY = "Tools for managing memory technology devices"
-   SECTION = "base"
-   DEPENDS = "zlib lzo e2fsprogs util-linux"
-   HOMEPAGE = "http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/"
-   LICENSE = "GPLv2+"
-   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://COPYING;md5=0636e73ff0215e8d672dc4c32c317bb3 \
-       file://include/common.h;beginline=1;endline=17;md5=ba05b07912a44ea2bf81ce409380049c"
-
-   # Use the latest version at 26 Oct, 2013
-   SRCREV = "9f107132a6a073cce37434ca9cda6917dd8d866b"
-   SRC_URI = "git://git.infradead.org/mtd-utils.git \
-       file://add-exclusion-to-mkfs-jffs2-git-2.patch \
-       "
-
-   PV = "1.5.1+git${SRCPV}"
-
-   S = "${WORKDIR}/git"
-
-   EXTRA_OEMAKE = "'CC=${CC}' 'RANLIB=${RANLIB}' 'AR=${AR}' 'CFLAGS=${CFLAGS} -I${S}/include -DWITHOUT_XATTR' 'BUILDDIR=${S}'"
-
-   do_install () {
-       oe_runmake install DESTDIR=${D} SBINDIR=${sbindir} MANDIR=${mandir} INCLUDEDIR=${includedir}
-   }
-
-   PACKAGES =+ "mtd-utils-jffs2 mtd-utils-ubifs mtd-utils-misc"
-
-   FILES_mtd-utils-jffs2 = "${sbindir}/mkfs.jffs2 ${sbindir}/jffs2dump ${sbindir}/jffs2reader ${sbindir}/sumtool"
-   FILES_mtd-utils-ubifs = "${sbindir}/mkfs.ubifs ${sbindir}/ubi*"
-   FILES_mtd-utils-misc = "${sbindir}/nftl* ${sbindir}/ftl* ${sbindir}/rfd* ${sbindir}/doc* ${sbindir}/serve_image ${sbindir}/recv_image"
-
-   PARALLEL_MAKE = ""
-
-   BBCLASSEXTEND = "native"
-
-Splitting an Application into Multiple Packages
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-You can use the variables ``PACKAGES`` and ``FILES`` to split an
-application into multiple packages.
-
-Following is an example that uses the ``libxpm`` recipe. By default,
-this recipe generates a single package that contains the library along
-with a few binaries. You can modify the recipe to split the binaries
-into separate packages:
-::
-
-   require xorg-lib-common.inc
-
-   SUMMARY = "Xpm: X Pixmap extension library"
-   LICENSE = "BSD"
-   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://COPYING;md5=51f4270b012ecd4ab1a164f5f4ed6cf7"
-   DEPENDS += "libxext libsm libxt"
-   PE = "1"
-
-   XORG_PN = "libXpm"
-
-   PACKAGES =+ "sxpm cxpm"
-   FILES_cxpm = "${bindir}/cxpm"
-   FILES_sxpm = "${bindir}/sxpm"
-
-In the previous example, we want to ship the ``sxpm`` and ``cxpm``
-binaries in separate packages. Since ``bindir`` would be packaged into
-the main ``PN`` package by default, we prepend the ``PACKAGES`` variable
-so additional package names are added to the start of list. This results
-in the extra ``FILES_*`` variables then containing information that
-define which files and directories go into which packages. Files
-included by earlier packages are skipped by latter packages. Thus, the
-main ``PN`` package does not include the above listed files.
-
-Packaging Externally Produced Binaries
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Sometimes, you need to add pre-compiled binaries to an image. For
-example, suppose that binaries for proprietary code exist, which are
-created by a particular division of a company. Your part of the company
-needs to use those binaries as part of an image that you are building
-using the OpenEmbedded build system. Since you only have the binaries
-and not the source code, you cannot use a typical recipe that expects to
-fetch the source specified in
-:term:`SRC_URI` and then compile it.
-
-One method is to package the binaries and then install them as part of
-the image. Generally, it is not a good idea to package binaries since,
-among other things, it can hinder the ability to reproduce builds and
-could lead to compatibility problems with ABI in the future. However,
-sometimes you have no choice.
-
-The easiest solution is to create a recipe that uses the
-:ref:`bin_package <ref-classes-bin-package>` class
-and to be sure that you are using default locations for build artifacts.
-In most cases, the ``bin_package`` class handles "skipping" the
-configure and compile steps as well as sets things up to grab packages
-from the appropriate area. In particular, this class sets ``noexec`` on
-both the :ref:`ref-tasks-configure`
-and :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` tasks,
-sets ``FILES_${PN}`` to "/" so that it picks up all files, and sets up a
-:ref:`ref-tasks-install` task, which
-effectively copies all files from ``${S}`` to ``${D}``. The
-``bin_package`` class works well when the files extracted into ``${S}``
-are already laid out in the way they should be laid out on the target.
-For more information on these variables, see the
-:term:`FILES`,
-:term:`PN`,
-:term:`S`, and
-:term:`D` variables in the Yocto Project
-Reference Manual's variable glossary.
-
-.. note::
-
-   -  Using :term:`DEPENDS` is a good
-      idea even for components distributed in binary form, and is often
-      necessary for shared libraries. For a shared library, listing the
-      library dependencies in ``DEPENDS`` makes sure that the libraries
-      are available in the staging sysroot when other recipes link
-      against the library, which might be necessary for successful
-      linking.
-
-   -  Using ``DEPENDS`` also allows runtime dependencies between
-      packages to be added automatically. See the
-      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`"
-      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual for more
-      information.
-
-If you cannot use the ``bin_package`` class, you need to be sure you are
-doing the following:
-
--  Create a recipe where the
-   :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` and
-   :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` tasks do
-   nothing: It is usually sufficient to just not define these tasks in
-   the recipe, because the default implementations do nothing unless a
-   Makefile is found in
-   ``${``\ :term:`S`\ ``}``.
-
-   If ``${S}`` might contain a Makefile, or if you inherit some class
-   that replaces ``do_configure`` and ``do_compile`` with custom
-   versions, then you can use the
-   ``[``\ :ref:`noexec <bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:variable flags>`\ ``]``
-   flag to turn the tasks into no-ops, as follows:
-   ::
-
-      do_configure[noexec] = "1"
-      do_compile[noexec] = "1"
-
-   Unlike
-   :ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:deleting a task`,
-   using the flag preserves the dependency chain from the
-   :ref:`ref-tasks-fetch`,
-   :ref:`ref-tasks-unpack`, and
-   :ref:`ref-tasks-patch` tasks to the
-   :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task.
-
--  Make sure your ``do_install`` task installs the binaries
-   appropriately.
-
--  Ensure that you set up :term:`FILES`
-   (usually
-   ``FILES_${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``) to
-   point to the files you have installed, which of course depends on
-   where you have installed them and whether those files are in
-   different locations than the defaults.
-
-.. note::
-
-  If image prelinking is enabled (e.g. "image-prelink" is in :term:`USER_CLASSES`
-  which it is by default), prelink will change the binaries in the generated images
-  and this often catches people out. Remove that class to ensure binaries are
-  preserved exactly if that is necessary.
-
-Following Recipe Style Guidelines
----------------------------------
-
-When writing recipes, it is good to conform to existing style
-guidelines. The :oe_wiki:`OpenEmbedded Styleguide </Styleguide>` wiki page
-provides rough guidelines for preferred recipe style.
-
-It is common for existing recipes to deviate a bit from this style.
-However, aiming for at least a consistent style is a good idea. Some
-practices, such as omitting spaces around ``=`` operators in assignments
-or ordering recipe components in an erratic way, are widely seen as poor
-style.
-
-Recipe Syntax
--------------
-
-Understanding recipe file syntax is important for writing recipes. The
-following list overviews the basic items that make up a BitBake recipe
-file. For more complete BitBake syntax descriptions, see the
-":doc:`bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata`"
-chapter of the BitBake User Manual.
-
--  *Variable Assignments and Manipulations:* Variable assignments allow
-   a value to be assigned to a variable. The assignment can be static
-   text or might include the contents of other variables. In addition to
-   the assignment, appending and prepending operations are also
-   supported.
-
-   The following example shows some of the ways you can use variables in
-   recipes:
-   ::
-
-      S = "${WORKDIR}/postfix-${PV}"
-      CFLAGS += "-DNO_ASM"
-      SRC_URI_append = " file://fixup.patch"
-
--  *Functions:* Functions provide a series of actions to be performed.
-   You usually use functions to override the default implementation of a
-   task function or to complement a default function (i.e. append or
-   prepend to an existing function). Standard functions use ``sh`` shell
-   syntax, although access to OpenEmbedded variables and internal
-   methods are also available.
-
-   The following is an example function from the ``sed`` recipe:
-   ::
-
-      do_install () {
-          autotools_do_install
-          install -d ${D}${base_bindir}
-          mv ${D}${bindir}/sed ${D}${base_bindir}/sed
-          rmdir ${D}${bindir}/
-      }
-
-   It is
-   also possible to implement new functions that are called between
-   existing tasks as long as the new functions are not replacing or
-   complementing the default functions. You can implement functions in
-   Python instead of shell. Both of these options are not seen in the
-   majority of recipes.
-
--  *Keywords:* BitBake recipes use only a few keywords. You use keywords
-   to include common functions (``inherit``), load parts of a recipe
-   from other files (``include`` and ``require``) and export variables
-   to the environment (``export``).
-
-   The following example shows the use of some of these keywords:
-   ::
-
-      export POSTCONF = "${STAGING_BINDIR}/postconf"
-      inherit autoconf
-      require otherfile.inc
-
--  *Comments (#):* Any lines that begin with the hash character (``#``)
-   are treated as comment lines and are ignored:
-   ::
-
-      # This is a comment
-
-This next list summarizes the most important and most commonly used
-parts of the recipe syntax. For more information on these parts of the
-syntax, you can reference the
-:doc:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata` chapter
-in the BitBake User Manual.
-
--  *Line Continuation (\\):* Use the backward slash (``\``) character to
-   split a statement over multiple lines. Place the slash character at
-   the end of the line that is to be continued on the next line:
-   ::
-
-       VAR = "A really long \
-              line"
-
-   .. note::
-
-      You cannot have any characters including spaces or tabs after the
-      slash character.
-
--  *Using Variables (${VARNAME}):* Use the ``${VARNAME}`` syntax to
-   access the contents of a variable:
-   ::
-
-      SRC_URI = "${SOURCEFORGE_MIRROR}/libpng/zlib-${PV}.tar.gz"
-
-   .. note::
-
-      It is important to understand that the value of a variable
-      expressed in this form does not get substituted automatically. The
-      expansion of these expressions happens on-demand later (e.g.
-      usually when a function that makes reference to the variable
-      executes). This behavior ensures that the values are most
-      appropriate for the context in which they are finally used. On the
-      rare occasion that you do need the variable expression to be
-      expanded immediately, you can use the
-      :=
-      operator instead of
-      =
-      when you make the assignment, but this is not generally needed.
-
--  *Quote All Assignments ("value"):* Use double quotes around values in
-   all variable assignments (e.g. ``"value"``). Following is an example:
-   ::
-
-      VAR1 = "${OTHERVAR}"
-      VAR2 = "The version is ${PV}"
-
--  *Conditional Assignment (?=):* Conditional assignment is used to
-   assign a value to a variable, but only when the variable is currently
-   unset. Use the question mark followed by the equal sign (``?=``) to
-   make a "soft" assignment used for conditional assignment. Typically,
-   "soft" assignments are used in the ``local.conf`` file for variables
-   that are allowed to come through from the external environment.
-
-   Here is an example where ``VAR1`` is set to "New value" if it is
-   currently empty. However, if ``VAR1`` has already been set, it
-   remains unchanged:
-   ::
-
-      VAR1 ?= "New value"
-
-   In this next example, ``VAR1`` is left with the value "Original value":
-   ::
-
-      VAR1 = "Original value"
-      VAR1 ?= "New value"
-
--  *Appending (+=):* Use the plus character followed by the equals sign
-   (``+=``) to append values to existing variables.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      This operator adds a space between the existing content of the
-      variable and the new content.
-
-   Here is an example:
-   ::
-
-      SRC_URI += "file://fix-makefile.patch"
-
--  *Prepending (=+):* Use the equals sign followed by the plus character
-   (``=+``) to prepend values to existing variables.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      This operator adds a space between the new content and the
-      existing content of the variable.
-
-   Here is an example:
-   ::
-
-      VAR =+ "Starts"
-
--  *Appending (_append):* Use the ``_append`` operator to append values
-   to existing variables. This operator does not add any additional
-   space. Also, the operator is applied after all the ``+=``, and ``=+``
-   operators have been applied and after all ``=`` assignments have
-   occurred.
-
-   The following example shows the space being explicitly added to the
-   start to ensure the appended value is not merged with the existing
-   value:
-   ::
-
-      SRC_URI_append = " file://fix-makefile.patch"
-
-   You can also use
-   the ``_append`` operator with overrides, which results in the actions
-   only being performed for the specified target or machine:
-   ::
-
-      SRC_URI_append_sh4 = " file://fix-makefile.patch"
-
--  *Prepending (_prepend):* Use the ``_prepend`` operator to prepend
-   values to existing variables. This operator does not add any
-   additional space. Also, the operator is applied after all the ``+=``,
-   and ``=+`` operators have been applied and after all ``=``
-   assignments have occurred.
-
-   The following example shows the space being explicitly added to the
-   end to ensure the prepended value is not merged with the existing
-   value:
-   ::
-
-      CFLAGS_prepend = "-I${S}/myincludes "
-
-   You can also use the
-   ``_prepend`` operator with overrides, which results in the actions
-   only being performed for the specified target or machine:
-   ::
-
-      CFLAGS_prepend_sh4 = "-I${S}/myincludes "
-
--  *Overrides:* You can use overrides to set a value conditionally,
-   typically based on how the recipe is being built. For example, to set
-   the :term:`KBRANCH` variable's
-   value to "standard/base" for any target
-   :term:`MACHINE`, except for
-   qemuarm where it should be set to "standard/arm-versatile-926ejs",
-   you would do the following:
-   ::
-
-      KBRANCH = "standard/base"
-      KBRANCH_qemuarm = "standard/arm-versatile-926ejs"
-
-   Overrides are also used to separate
-   alternate values of a variable in other situations. For example, when
-   setting variables such as
-   :term:`FILES` and
-   :term:`RDEPENDS` that are
-   specific to individual packages produced by a recipe, you should
-   always use an override that specifies the name of the package.
-
--  *Indentation:* Use spaces for indentation rather than tabs. For
-   shell functions, both currently work. However, it is a policy
-   decision of the Yocto Project to use tabs in shell functions. Realize
-   that some layers have a policy to use spaces for all indentation.
-
--  *Using Python for Complex Operations:* For more advanced processing,
-   it is possible to use Python code during variable assignments (e.g.
-   search and replacement on a variable).
-
-   You indicate Python code using the ``${@python_code}`` syntax for the
-   variable assignment:
-   ::
-
-      SRC_URI = "ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/src/zip${@d.getVar('PV',1).replace('.', '')}.tgz
-
--  *Shell Function Syntax:* Write shell functions as if you were writing
-   a shell script when you describe a list of actions to take. You
-   should ensure that your script works with a generic ``sh`` and that
-   it does not require any ``bash`` or other shell-specific
-   functionality. The same considerations apply to various system
-   utilities (e.g. ``sed``, ``grep``, ``awk``, and so forth) that you
-   might wish to use. If in doubt, you should check with multiple
-   implementations - including those from BusyBox.
-
-Adding a New Machine
-====================
-
-Adding a new machine to the Yocto Project is a straightforward process.
-This section describes how to add machines that are similar to those
-that the Yocto Project already supports.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Although well within the capabilities of the Yocto Project, adding a
-   totally new architecture might require changes to ``gcc``/``glibc``
-   and to the site information, which is beyond the scope of this
-   manual.
-
-For a complete example that shows how to add a new machine, see the
-":ref:`bsp-guide/bsp:creating a new bsp layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script`"
-section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's
-Guide.
-
-Adding the Machine Configuration File
--------------------------------------
-
-To add a new machine, you need to add a new machine configuration file
-to the layer's ``conf/machine`` directory. This configuration file
-provides details about the device you are adding.
-
-The OpenEmbedded build system uses the root name of the machine
-configuration file to reference the new machine. For example, given a
-machine configuration file named ``crownbay.conf``, the build system
-recognizes the machine as "crownbay".
-
-The most important variables you must set in your machine configuration
-file or include from a lower-level configuration file are as follows:
-
--  ``TARGET_ARCH`` (e.g. "arm")
-
--  ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/kernel``
-
--  ``MACHINE_FEATURES`` (e.g. "apm screen wifi")
-
-You might also need these variables:
-
--  ``SERIAL_CONSOLES`` (e.g. "115200;ttyS0 115200;ttyS1")
-
--  ``KERNEL_IMAGETYPE`` (e.g. "zImage")
-
--  ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` (e.g. "tar.gz jffs2")
-
-You can find full details on these variables in the reference section.
-You can leverage existing machine ``.conf`` files from
-``meta-yocto-bsp/conf/machine/``.
-
-Adding a Kernel for the Machine
--------------------------------
-
-The OpenEmbedded build system needs to be able to build a kernel for the
-machine. You need to either create a new kernel recipe for this machine,
-or extend an existing kernel recipe. You can find several kernel recipe
-examples in the Source Directory at ``meta/recipes-kernel/linux`` that
-you can use as references.
-
-If you are creating a new kernel recipe, normal recipe-writing rules
-apply for setting up a ``SRC_URI``. Thus, you need to specify any
-necessary patches and set ``S`` to point at the source code. You need to
-create a ``do_configure`` task that configures the unpacked kernel with
-a ``defconfig`` file. You can do this by using a ``make defconfig``
-command or, more commonly, by copying in a suitable ``defconfig`` file
-and then running ``make oldconfig``. By making use of ``inherit kernel``
-and potentially some of the ``linux-*.inc`` files, most other
-functionality is centralized and the defaults of the class normally work
-well.
-
-If you are extending an existing kernel recipe, it is usually a matter
-of adding a suitable ``defconfig`` file. The file needs to be added into
-a location similar to ``defconfig`` files used for other machines in a
-given kernel recipe. A possible way to do this is by listing the file in
-the ``SRC_URI`` and adding the machine to the expression in
-``COMPATIBLE_MACHINE``:
-::
-
-   COMPATIBLE_MACHINE = '(qemux86|qemumips)'
-
-For more information on ``defconfig`` files, see the
-":ref:`kernel-dev/common:changing the configuration`"
-section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual.
-
-Adding a Formfactor Configuration File
---------------------------------------
-
-A formfactor configuration file provides information about the target
-hardware for which the image is being built and information that the
-build system cannot obtain from other sources such as the kernel. Some
-examples of information contained in a formfactor configuration file
-include framebuffer orientation, whether or not the system has a
-keyboard, the positioning of the keyboard in relation to the screen, and
-the screen resolution.
-
-The build system uses reasonable defaults in most cases. However, if
-customization is necessary, you need to create a ``machconfig`` file in
-the ``meta/recipes-bsp/formfactor/files`` directory. This directory
-contains directories for specific machines such as ``qemuarm`` and
-``qemux86``. For information about the settings available and the
-defaults, see the ``meta/recipes-bsp/formfactor/files/config`` file
-found in the same area.
-
-Following is an example for "qemuarm" machine:
-::
-
-   HAVE_TOUCHSCREEN=1
-   HAVE_KEYBOARD=1
-   DISPLAY_CAN_ROTATE=0
-   DISPLAY_ORIENTATION=0
-   #DISPLAY_WIDTH_PIXELS=640
-   #DISPLAY_HEIGHT_PIXELS=480
-   #DISPLAY_BPP=16
-   DISPLAY_DPI=150
-   DISPLAY_SUBPIXEL_ORDER=vrgb
-
-Upgrading Recipes
-=================
-
-Over time, upstream developers publish new versions for software built
-by layer recipes. It is recommended to keep recipes up-to-date with
-upstream version releases.
-
-While several methods exist that allow you upgrade a recipe, you might
-consider checking on the upgrade status of a recipe first. You can do so
-using the ``devtool check-upgrade-status`` command. See the
-":ref:`devtool-checking-on-the-upgrade-status-of-a-recipe`"
-section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual for more information.
-
-The remainder of this section describes three ways you can upgrade a
-recipe. You can use the Automated Upgrade Helper (AUH) to set up
-automatic version upgrades. Alternatively, you can use
-``devtool upgrade`` to set up semi-automatic version upgrades. Finally,
-you can manually upgrade a recipe by editing the recipe itself.
-
-Using the Auto Upgrade Helper (AUH)
------------------------------------
-
-The AUH utility works in conjunction with the OpenEmbedded build system
-in order to automatically generate upgrades for recipes based on new
-versions being published upstream. Use AUH when you want to create a
-service that performs the upgrades automatically and optionally sends
-you an email with the results.
-
-AUH allows you to update several recipes with a single use. You can also
-optionally perform build and integration tests using images with the
-results saved to your hard drive and emails of results optionally sent
-to recipe maintainers. Finally, AUH creates Git commits with appropriate
-commit messages in the layer's tree for the changes made to recipes.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Conditions do exist when you should not use AUH to upgrade recipes
-   and you should instead use either ``devtool upgrade`` or upgrade your
-   recipes manually:
-
-   -  When AUH cannot complete the upgrade sequence. This situation
-      usually results because custom patches carried by the recipe
-      cannot be automatically rebased to the new version. In this case,
-      ``devtool upgrade`` allows you to manually resolve conflicts.
-
-   -  When for any reason you want fuller control over the upgrade
-      process. For example, when you want special arrangements for
-      testing.
-
-The following steps describe how to set up the AUH utility:
-
-1. *Be Sure the Development Host is Set Up:* You need to be sure that
-   your development host is set up to use the Yocto Project. For
-   information on how to set up your host, see the
-   ":ref:`dev-manual/start:Preparing the Build Host`" section.
-
-2. *Make Sure Git is Configured:* The AUH utility requires Git to be
-   configured because AUH uses Git to save upgrades. Thus, you must have
-   Git user and email configured. The following command shows your
-   configurations:
-   ::
-
-      $ git config --list
-
-   If you do not have the user and
-   email configured, you can use the following commands to do so:
-   ::
-
-      $ git config --global user.name some_name
-      $ git config --global user.email username@domain.com
-
-3. *Clone the AUH Repository:* To use AUH, you must clone the repository
-   onto your development host. The following command uses Git to create
-   a local copy of the repository on your system:
-   ::
-
-      $ git clone  git://git.yoctoproject.org/auto-upgrade-helper
-      Cloning into 'auto-upgrade-helper'... remote: Counting objects: 768, done.
-      remote: Compressing objects: 100% (300/300), done.
-      remote: Total 768 (delta 499), reused 703 (delta 434)
-      Receiving objects: 100% (768/768), 191.47 KiB | 98.00 KiB/s, done.
-      Resolving deltas: 100% (499/499), done.
-      Checking connectivity... done.
-
-   AUH is not part of the :term:`OpenEmbedded-Core (OE-Core)` or
-   :term:`Poky` repositories.
-
-4. *Create a Dedicated Build Directory:* Run the
-   :ref:`structure-core-script`
-   script to create a fresh build directory that you use exclusively for
-   running the AUH utility:
-   ::
-
-      $ cd ~/poky
-      $ source oe-init-build-env your_AUH_build_directory
-
-   Re-using an existing build directory and its configurations is not
-   recommended as existing settings could cause AUH to fail or behave
-   undesirably.
-
-5. *Make Configurations in Your Local Configuration File:* Several
-   settings need to exist in the ``local.conf`` file in the build
-   directory you just created for AUH. Make these following
-   configurations:
-
-   -  If you want to enable :ref:`Build
-      History <dev-manual/common-tasks:maintaining build output quality>`,
-      which is optional, you need the following lines in the
-      ``conf/local.conf`` file:
-      ::
-
-         INHERIT =+ "buildhistory"
-         BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT = "1"
-
-      With this configuration and a successful
-      upgrade, a build history "diff" file appears in the
-      ``upgrade-helper/work/recipe/buildhistory-diff.txt`` file found in
-      your build directory.
-
-   -  If you want to enable testing through the
-      :ref:`testimage <ref-classes-testimage*>`
-      class, which is optional, you need to have the following set in
-      your ``conf/local.conf`` file:
-      ::
-
-         INHERIT += "testimage"
-
-      .. note::
-
-         If your distro does not enable by default ptest, which Poky
-         does, you need the following in your ``local.conf`` file:
-         ::
-
-                 DISTRO_FEATURES_append = " ptest"
-
-
-6. *Optionally Start a vncserver:* If you are running in a server
-   without an X11 session, you need to start a vncserver:
-   ::
-
-      $ vncserver :1
-      $ export DISPLAY=:1
-
-7. *Create and Edit an AUH Configuration File:* You need to have the
-   ``upgrade-helper/upgrade-helper.conf`` configuration file in your
-   build directory. You can find a sample configuration file in the
-   :yocto_git:`AUH source repository </auto-upgrade-helper/tree/>`.
-
-   Read through the sample file and make configurations as needed. For
-   example, if you enabled build history in your ``local.conf`` as
-   described earlier, you must enable it in ``upgrade-helper.conf``.
-
-   Also, if you are using the default ``maintainers.inc`` file supplied
-   with Poky and located in ``meta-yocto`` and you do not set a
-   "maintainers_whitelist" or "global_maintainer_override" in the
-   ``upgrade-helper.conf`` configuration, and you specify "-e all" on
-   the AUH command-line, the utility automatically sends out emails to
-   all the default maintainers. Please avoid this.
-
-This next set of examples describes how to use the AUH:
-
--  *Upgrading a Specific Recipe:* To upgrade a specific recipe, use the
-   following form:
-   ::
-
-      $ upgrade-helper.py recipe_name
-
-   For example, this command upgrades the ``xmodmap`` recipe:
-   ::
-
-      $ upgrade-helper.py xmodmap
-
--  *Upgrading a Specific Recipe to a Particular Version:* To upgrade a
-   specific recipe to a particular version, use the following form:
-   ::
-
-      $ upgrade-helper.py recipe_name -t version
-
-   For example, this command upgrades the ``xmodmap`` recipe to version 1.2.3:
-   ::
-
-      $ upgrade-helper.py xmodmap -t 1.2.3
-
--  *Upgrading all Recipes to the Latest Versions and Suppressing Email
-   Notifications:* To upgrade all recipes to their most recent versions
-   and suppress the email notifications, use the following command:
-   ::
-
-      $ upgrade-helper.py all
-
--  *Upgrading all Recipes to the Latest Versions and Send Email
-   Notifications:* To upgrade all recipes to their most recent versions
-   and send email messages to maintainers for each attempted recipe as
-   well as a status email, use the following command:
-   ::
-
-      $ upgrade-helper.py -e all
-
-Once you have run the AUH utility, you can find the results in the AUH
-build directory:
-::
-
-   ${BUILDDIR}/upgrade-helper/timestamp
-
-The AUH utility
-also creates recipe update commits from successful upgrade attempts in
-the layer tree.
-
-You can easily set up to run the AUH utility on a regular basis by using
-a cron job. See the
-:yocto_git:`weeklyjob.sh </auto-upgrade-helper/tree/weeklyjob.sh>`
-file distributed with the utility for an example.
-
-Using ``devtool upgrade``
--------------------------
-
-As mentioned earlier, an alternative method for upgrading recipes to
-newer versions is to use
-:doc:`devtool upgrade </ref-manual/devtool-reference>`.
-You can read about ``devtool upgrade`` in general in the
-":ref:`sdk-manual/extensible:use \`\`devtool upgrade\`\` to create a version of the recipe that supports a newer version of the software`"
-section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the Extensible
-Software Development Kit (eSDK) Manual.
-
-To see all the command-line options available with ``devtool upgrade``,
-use the following help command:
-::
-
-   $ devtool upgrade -h
-
-If you want to find out what version a recipe is currently at upstream
-without any attempt to upgrade your local version of the recipe, you can
-use the following command:
-::
-
-   $ devtool latest-version recipe_name
-
-As mentioned in the previous section describing AUH, ``devtool upgrade``
-works in a less-automated manner than AUH. Specifically,
-``devtool upgrade`` only works on a single recipe that you name on the
-command line, cannot perform build and integration testing using images,
-and does not automatically generate commits for changes in the source
-tree. Despite all these "limitations", ``devtool upgrade`` updates the
-recipe file to the new upstream version and attempts to rebase custom
-patches contained by the recipe as needed.
-
-.. note::
-
-   AUH uses much of ``devtool upgrade`` behind the scenes making AUH somewhat
-   of a "wrapper" application for ``devtool upgrade``.
-
-A typical scenario involves having used Git to clone an upstream
-repository that you use during build operations. Because you have built the
-recipe in the past, the layer is likely added to your
-configuration already. If for some reason, the layer is not added, you
-could add it easily using the
-":ref:`bitbake-layers <bsp-guide/bsp:creating a new bsp layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script>`"
-script. For example, suppose you use the ``nano.bb`` recipe from the
-``meta-oe`` layer in the ``meta-openembedded`` repository. For this
-example, assume that the layer has been cloned into following area:
-::
-
-   /home/scottrif/meta-openembedded
-
-The following command from your
-:term:`Build Directory` adds the layer to
-your build configuration (i.e. ``${BUILDDIR}/conf/bblayers.conf``):
-::
-
-   $ bitbake-layers add-layer /home/scottrif/meta-openembedded/meta-oe
-   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
-   Parsing recipes: 100% |##########################################| Time: 0:00:55
-   Parsing of 1431 .bb files complete (0 cached, 1431 parsed). 2040 targets, 56 skipped, 0 masked, 0 errors.
-   Removing 12 recipes from the x86_64 sysroot: 100% |##############| Time: 0:00:00
-   Removing 1 recipes from the x86_64_i586 sysroot: 100% |##########| Time: 0:00:00
-   Removing 5 recipes from the i586 sysroot: 100% |#################| Time: 0:00:00
-   Removing 5 recipes from the qemux86 sysroot: 100% |##############| Time: 0:00:00
-
-For this example, assume that the ``nano.bb`` recipe that
-is upstream has a 2.9.3 version number. However, the version in the
-local repository is 2.7.4. The following command from your build
-directory automatically upgrades the recipe for you:
-
-.. note::
-
-   Using the ``-V`` option is not necessary. Omitting the version number causes
-   ``devtool upgrade`` to upgrade the recipe to the most recent version.
-
-::
-
-   $ devtool upgrade nano -V 2.9.3
-   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
-   NOTE: Creating workspace layer in /home/scottrif/poky/build/workspace
-   Parsing recipes: 100% |##########################################| Time: 0:00:46
-   Parsing of 1431 .bb files complete (0 cached, 1431 parsed). 2040 targets, 56 skipped, 0 masked, 0 errors.
-   NOTE: Extracting current version source...
-   NOTE: Resolving any missing task queue dependencies
-          .
-          .
-          .
-   NOTE: Executing SetScene Tasks
-   NOTE: Executing RunQueue Tasks
-   NOTE: Tasks Summary: Attempted 74 tasks of which 72 didn't need to be rerun and all succeeded.
-   Adding changed files: 100% |#####################################| Time: 0:00:00
-   NOTE: Upgraded source extracted to /home/scottrif/poky/build/workspace/sources/nano
-   NOTE: New recipe is /home/scottrif/poky/build/workspace/recipes/nano/nano_2.9.3.bb
-
-Continuing with this example, you can use ``devtool build`` to build the
-newly upgraded recipe:
-::
-
-   $ devtool build nano
-   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
-   Loading cache: 100% |################################################################################################| Time: 0:00:01
-   Loaded 2040 entries from dependency cache.
-   Parsing recipes: 100% |##############################################################################################| Time: 0:00:00
-   Parsing of 1432 .bb files complete (1431 cached, 1 parsed). 2041 targets, 56 skipped, 0 masked, 0 errors.
-   NOTE: Resolving any missing task queue dependencies
-          .
-          .
-          .
-   NOTE: Executing SetScene Tasks
-   NOTE: Executing RunQueue Tasks
-   NOTE: nano: compiling from external source tree /home/scottrif/poky/build/workspace/sources/nano
-   NOTE: Tasks Summary: Attempted 520 tasks of which 304 didn't need to be rerun and all succeeded.
-
-Within the ``devtool upgrade`` workflow, opportunity
-exists to deploy and test your rebuilt software. For this example,
-however, running ``devtool finish`` cleans up the workspace once the
-source in your workspace is clean. This usually means using Git to stage
-and submit commits for the changes generated by the upgrade process.
-
-Once the tree is clean, you can clean things up in this example with the
-following command from the ``${BUILDDIR}/workspace/sources/nano``
-directory:
-::
-
-   $ devtool finish nano meta-oe
-   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
-   Loading cache: 100% |################################################################################################| Time: 0:00:00
-   Loaded 2040 entries from dependency cache.
-   Parsing recipes: 100% |##############################################################################################| Time: 0:00:01
-   Parsing of 1432 .bb files complete (1431 cached, 1 parsed). 2041 targets, 56 skipped, 0 masked, 0 errors.
-   NOTE: Adding new patch 0001-nano.bb-Stuff-I-changed-when-upgrading-nano.bb.patch
-   NOTE: Updating recipe nano_2.9.3.bb
-   NOTE: Removing file /home/scottrif/meta-openembedded/meta-oe/recipes-support/nano/nano_2.7.4.bb
-   NOTE: Moving recipe file to /home/scottrif/meta-openembedded/meta-oe/recipes-support/nano
-   NOTE: Leaving source tree /home/scottrif/poky/build/workspace/sources/nano as-is; if you no longer need it then please delete it manually
-
-
-Using the ``devtool finish`` command cleans up the workspace and creates a patch
-file based on your commits. The tool puts all patch files back into the
-source directory in a sub-directory named ``nano`` in this case.
-
-Manually Upgrading a Recipe
----------------------------
-
-If for some reason you choose not to upgrade recipes using
-:ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:Using the Auto Upgrade Helper (AUH)` or
-by :ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:Using \`\`devtool upgrade\`\``,
-you can manually edit the recipe files to upgrade the versions.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Manually updating multiple recipes scales poorly and involves many
-   steps. The recommendation to upgrade recipe versions is through AUH
-   or ``devtool upgrade``, both of which automate some steps and provide
-   guidance for others needed for the manual process.
-
-To manually upgrade recipe versions, follow these general steps:
-
-1. *Change the Version:* Rename the recipe such that the version (i.e.
-   the :term:`PV` part of the recipe name)
-   changes appropriately. If the version is not part of the recipe name,
-   change the value as it is set for ``PV`` within the recipe itself.
-
-2. *Update* ``SRCREV`` *if Needed*: If the source code your recipe builds
-   is fetched from Git or some other version control system, update
-   :term:`SRCREV` to point to the
-   commit hash that matches the new version.
-
-3. *Build the Software:* Try to build the recipe using BitBake. Typical
-   build failures include the following:
-
-   -  License statements were updated for the new version. For this
-      case, you need to review any changes to the license and update the
-      values of :term:`LICENSE` and
-      :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`
-      as needed.
-
-      .. note::
-
-         License changes are often inconsequential. For example, the
-         license text's copyright year might have changed.
-
-   -  Custom patches carried by the older version of the recipe might
-      fail to apply to the new version. For these cases, you need to
-      review the failures. Patches might not be necessary for the new
-      version of the software if the upgraded version has fixed those
-      issues. If a patch is necessary and failing, you need to rebase it
-      into the new version.
-
-4. *Optionally Attempt to Build for Several Architectures:* Once you
-   successfully build the new software for a given architecture, you
-   could test the build for other architectures by changing the
-   :term:`MACHINE` variable and
-   rebuilding the software. This optional step is especially important
-   if the recipe is to be released publicly.
-
-5. *Check the Upstream Change Log or Release Notes:* Checking both these
-   reveals if new features exist that could break
-   backwards-compatibility. If so, you need to take steps to mitigate or
-   eliminate that situation.
-
-6. *Optionally Create a Bootable Image and Test:* If you want, you can
-   test the new software by booting it onto actual hardware.
-
-7. *Create a Commit with the Change in the Layer Repository:* After all
-   builds work and any testing is successful, you can create commits for
-   any changes in the layer holding your upgraded recipe.
-
-Finding Temporary Source Code
-=============================
-
-You might find it helpful during development to modify the temporary
-source code used by recipes to build packages. For example, suppose you
-are developing a patch and you need to experiment a bit to figure out
-your solution. After you have initially built the package, you can
-iteratively tweak the source code, which is located in the
-:term:`Build Directory`, and then you can
-force a re-compile and quickly test your altered code. Once you settle
-on a solution, you can then preserve your changes in the form of
-patches.
-
-During a build, the unpacked temporary source code used by recipes to
-build packages is available in the Build Directory as defined by the
-:term:`S` variable. Below is the default
-value for the ``S`` variable as defined in the
-``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file in the
-:term:`Source Directory`:
-::
-
-   S = "${WORKDIR}/${BP}"
-
-You should be aware that many recipes override the
-``S`` variable. For example, recipes that fetch their source from Git
-usually set ``S`` to ``${WORKDIR}/git``.
-
-.. note::
-
-   The :term:`BP` represents the base recipe name, which consists of the name
-   and version:
-   ::
-
-           BP = "${BPN}-${PV}"
-
-
-The path to the work directory for the recipe
-(:term:`WORKDIR`) is defined as
-follows:
-::
-
-   ${TMPDIR}/work/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR}
-
-The actual directory depends on several things:
-
--  :term:`TMPDIR`: The top-level build
-   output directory.
-
--  :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`:
-   The target system identifier.
-
--  :term:`PN`: The recipe name.
-
--  :term:`EXTENDPE`: The epoch - (if
-   :term:`PE` is not specified, which is
-   usually the case for most recipes, then ``EXTENDPE`` is blank).
-
--  :term:`PV`: The recipe version.
-
--  :term:`PR`: The recipe revision.
-
-As an example, assume a Source Directory top-level folder named
-``poky``, a default Build Directory at ``poky/build``, and a
-``qemux86-poky-linux`` machine target system. Furthermore, suppose your
-recipe is named ``foo_1.3.0.bb``. In this case, the work directory the
-build system uses to build the package would be as follows:
-::
-
-   poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/foo/1.3.0-r0
-
-Using Quilt in Your Workflow
-============================
-
-`Quilt <https://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt>`__ is a powerful tool
-that allows you to capture source code changes without having a clean
-source tree. This section outlines the typical workflow you can use to
-modify source code, test changes, and then preserve the changes in the
-form of a patch all using Quilt.
-
-.. note::
-
-   With regard to preserving changes to source files, if you clean a
-   recipe or have ``rm_work`` enabled, the
-   :ref:`devtool workflow <sdk-manual/extensible:using \`\`devtool\`\` in your sdk workflow>`
-   as described in the Yocto Project Application Development and the
-   Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual is a safer
-   development flow than the flow that uses Quilt.
-
-Follow these general steps:
-
-1. *Find the Source Code:* Temporary source code used by the
-   OpenEmbedded build system is kept in the
-   :term:`Build Directory`. See the
-   "`Finding Temporary Source
-   Code <#finding-the-temporary-source-code>`__" section to learn how to
-   locate the directory that has the temporary source code for a
-   particular package.
-
-2. *Change Your Working Directory:* You need to be in the directory that
-   has the temporary source code. That directory is defined by the
-   :term:`S` variable.
-
-3. *Create a New Patch:* Before modifying source code, you need to
-   create a new patch. To create a new patch file, use ``quilt new`` as
-   below:
-   ::
-
-      $ quilt new my_changes.patch
-
-4. *Notify Quilt and Add Files:* After creating the patch, you need to
-   notify Quilt about the files you plan to edit. You notify Quilt by
-   adding the files to the patch you just created:
-   ::
-
-      $ quilt add file1.c file2.c file3.c
-
-5. *Edit the Files:* Make your changes in the source code to the files
-   you added to the patch.
-
-6. *Test Your Changes:* Once you have modified the source code, the
-   easiest way to test your changes is by calling the ``do_compile``
-   task as shown in the following example:
-   ::
-
-      $ bitbake -c compile -f package
-
-   The ``-f`` or ``--force`` option forces the specified task to
-   execute. If you find problems with your code, you can just keep
-   editing and re-testing iteratively until things work as expected.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      All the modifications you make to the temporary source code disappear
-      once you run the ``do_clean`` or ``do_cleanall`` tasks using BitBake
-      (i.e. ``bitbake -c clean package`` and ``bitbake -c cleanall package``).
-      Modifications will also disappear if you use the ``rm_work`` feature as
-      described in the
-      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:conserving disk space during builds`"
-      section.
-
-7. *Generate the Patch:* Once your changes work as expected, you need to
-   use Quilt to generate the final patch that contains all your
-   modifications.
-   ::
-
-      $ quilt refresh
-
-   At this point, the
-   ``my_changes.patch`` file has all your edits made to the ``file1.c``,
-   ``file2.c``, and ``file3.c`` files.
-
-   You can find the resulting patch file in the ``patches/``
-   subdirectory of the source (``S``) directory.
-
-8. *Copy the Patch File:* For simplicity, copy the patch file into a
-   directory named ``files``, which you can create in the same directory
-   that holds the recipe (``.bb``) file or the append (``.bbappend``)
-   file. Placing the patch here guarantees that the OpenEmbedded build
-   system will find the patch. Next, add the patch into the ``SRC_URI``
-   of the recipe. Here is an example:
-   ::
-
-      SRC_URI += "file://my_changes.patch"
-
-Using a Development Shell
-=========================
-
-When debugging certain commands or even when just editing packages,
-``devshell`` can be a useful tool. When you invoke ``devshell``, all
-tasks up to and including
-:ref:`ref-tasks-patch` are run for the
-specified target. Then, a new terminal is opened and you are placed in
-``${``\ :term:`S`\ ``}``, the source
-directory. In the new terminal, all the OpenEmbedded build-related
-environment variables are still defined so you can use commands such as
-``configure`` and ``make``. The commands execute just as if the
-OpenEmbedded build system were executing them. Consequently, working
-this way can be helpful when debugging a build or preparing software to
-be used with the OpenEmbedded build system.
-
-Following is an example that uses ``devshell`` on a target named
-``matchbox-desktop``:
-::
-
-  $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -c devshell
-
-This command spawns a terminal with a shell prompt within the
-OpenEmbedded build environment. The
-:term:`OE_TERMINAL` variable
-controls what type of shell is opened.
-
-For spawned terminals, the following occurs:
-
--  The ``PATH`` variable includes the cross-toolchain.
-
--  The ``pkgconfig`` variables find the correct ``.pc`` files.
-
--  The ``configure`` command finds the Yocto Project site files as well
-   as any other necessary files.
-
-Within this environment, you can run configure or compile commands as if
-they were being run by the OpenEmbedded build system itself. As noted
-earlier, the working directory also automatically changes to the Source
-Directory (:term:`S`).
-
-To manually run a specific task using ``devshell``, run the
-corresponding ``run.*`` script in the
-``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/temp``
-directory (e.g., ``run.do_configure.``\ `pid`). If a task's script does
-not exist, which would be the case if the task was skipped by way of the
-sstate cache, you can create the task by first running it outside of the
-``devshell``:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake -c task
-
-.. note::
-
-   -  Execution of a task's ``run.*`` script and BitBake's execution of
-      a task are identical. In other words, running the script re-runs
-      the task just as it would be run using the ``bitbake -c`` command.
-
-   -  Any ``run.*`` file that does not have a ``.pid`` extension is a
-      symbolic link (symlink) to the most recent version of that file.
-
-Remember, that the ``devshell`` is a mechanism that allows you to get
-into the BitBake task execution environment. And as such, all commands
-must be called just as BitBake would call them. That means you need to
-provide the appropriate options for cross-compilation and so forth as
-applicable.
-
-When you are finished using ``devshell``, exit the shell or close the
-terminal window.
-
-.. note::
-
-   -  It is worth remembering that when using ``devshell`` you need to
-      use the full compiler name such as ``arm-poky-linux-gnueabi-gcc``
-      instead of just using ``gcc``. The same applies to other
-      applications such as ``binutils``, ``libtool`` and so forth.
-      BitBake sets up environment variables such as ``CC`` to assist
-      applications, such as ``make`` to find the correct tools.
-
-   -  It is also worth noting that ``devshell`` still works over X11
-      forwarding and similar situations.
-
-Using a Development Python Shell
-================================
-
-Similar to working within a development shell as described in the
-previous section, you can also spawn and work within an interactive
-Python development shell. When debugging certain commands or even when
-just editing packages, ``devpyshell`` can be a useful tool. When you
-invoke ``devpyshell``, all tasks up to and including
-:ref:`ref-tasks-patch` are run for the
-specified target. Then a new terminal is opened. Additionally, key
-Python objects and code are available in the same way they are to
-BitBake tasks, in particular, the data store 'd'. So, commands such as
-the following are useful when exploring the data store and running
-functions:
-::
-
-   pydevshell> d.getVar("STAGING_DIR")
-   '/media/build1/poky/build/tmp/sysroots'
-   pydevshell> d.getVar("STAGING_DIR")
-   '${TMPDIR}/sysroots'
-   pydevshell> d.setVar("FOO", "bar")
-   pydevshell> d.getVar("FOO")
-   'bar'
-   pydevshell> d.delVar("FOO")
-   pydevshell> d.getVar("FOO")
-   pydevshell> bb.build.exec_func("do_unpack", d)
-   pydevshell>
-
-The commands execute just as if the OpenEmbedded build
-system were executing them. Consequently, working this way can be
-helpful when debugging a build or preparing software to be used with the
-OpenEmbedded build system.
-
-Following is an example that uses ``devpyshell`` on a target named
-``matchbox-desktop``:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -c devpyshell
-
-This command spawns a terminal and places you in an interactive Python
-interpreter within the OpenEmbedded build environment. The
-:term:`OE_TERMINAL` variable
-controls what type of shell is opened.
-
-When you are finished using ``devpyshell``, you can exit the shell
-either by using Ctrl+d or closing the terminal window.
-
-Building
-========
-
-This section describes various build procedures. For example, the steps
-needed for a simple build, a target that uses multiple configurations,
-building an image for more than one machine, and so forth.
-
-Building a Simple Image
------------------------
-
-In the development environment, you need to build an image whenever you
-change hardware support, add or change system libraries, or add or
-change services that have dependencies. Several methods exist that allow
-you to build an image within the Yocto Project. This section presents
-the basic steps you need to build a simple image using BitBake from a
-build host running Linux.
-
-.. note::
-
-   -  For information on how to build an image using
-      :term:`Toaster`, see the
-      :doc:`/toaster-manual/index`.
-
-   -  For information on how to use ``devtool`` to build images, see the
-      ":ref:`sdk-manual/extensible:using \`\`devtool\`\` in your sdk workflow`"
-      section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the
-      Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual.
-
-   -  For a quick example on how to build an image using the
-      OpenEmbedded build system, see the
-      :doc:`/brief-yoctoprojectqs/index` document.
-
-The build process creates an entire Linux distribution from source and
-places it in your :term:`Build Directory` under
-``tmp/deploy/images``. For detailed information on the build process
-using BitBake, see the ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:images`" section in the
-Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
-
-The following figure and list overviews the build process:
-
-.. image:: figures/bitbake-build-flow.png
-   :align: center
-
-1. *Set up Your Host Development System to Support Development Using the
-   Yocto Project*: See the ":doc:`start`" section for options on how to get a
-   build host ready to use the Yocto Project.
-
-2. *Initialize the Build Environment:* Initialize the build environment
-   by sourcing the build environment script (i.e.
-   :ref:`structure-core-script`):
-   ::
-
-      $ source oe-init-build-env [build_dir]
-
-   When you use the initialization script, the OpenEmbedded build system
-   uses ``build`` as the default :term:`Build Directory` in your current work
-   directory. You can use a `build_dir` argument with the script to
-   specify a different build directory.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      A common practice is to use a different Build Directory for
-      different targets. For example, ``~/build/x86`` for a ``qemux86``
-      target, and ``~/build/arm`` for a ``qemuarm`` target.
-
-3. *Make Sure Your* ``local.conf`` *File is Correct*: Ensure the
-   ``conf/local.conf`` configuration file, which is found in the Build
-   Directory, is set up how you want it. This file defines many aspects
-   of the build environment including the target machine architecture
-   through the ``MACHINE`` variable, the packaging format used during
-   the build
-   (:term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES`),
-   and a centralized tarball download directory through the
-   :term:`DL_DIR` variable.
-
-4. *Build the Image:* Build the image using the ``bitbake`` command:
-   ::
-
-      $ bitbake target
-
-   .. note::
-
-      For information on BitBake, see the :doc:`bitbake:index`.
-
-   The target is the name of the recipe you want to build. Common
-   targets are the images in ``meta/recipes-core/images``,
-   ``meta/recipes-sato/images``, and so forth all found in the
-   :term:`Source Directory`. Or, the target
-   can be the name of a recipe for a specific piece of software such as
-   BusyBox. For more details about the images the OpenEmbedded build
-   system supports, see the
-   ":ref:`ref-manual/images:Images`" chapter in the Yocto
-   Project Reference Manual.
-
-   As an example, the following command builds the
-   ``core-image-minimal`` image:
-   ::
-
-      $ bitbake core-image-minimal
-
-   Once an
-   image has been built, it often needs to be installed. The images and
-   kernels built by the OpenEmbedded build system are placed in the
-   Build Directory in ``tmp/deploy/images``. For information on how to
-   run pre-built images such as ``qemux86`` and ``qemuarm``, see the
-   :doc:`/sdk-manual/index` manual. For
-   information about how to install these images, see the documentation
-   for your particular board or machine.
-
-Building Images for Multiple Targets Using Multiple Configurations
-------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-You can use a single ``bitbake`` command to build multiple images or
-packages for different targets where each image or package requires a
-different configuration (multiple configuration builds). The builds, in
-this scenario, are sometimes referred to as "multiconfigs", and this
-section uses that term throughout.
-
-This section describes how to set up for multiple configuration builds
-and how to account for cross-build dependencies between the
-multiconfigs.
-
-Setting Up and Running a Multiple Configuration Build
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-To accomplish a multiple configuration build, you must define each
-target's configuration separately using a parallel configuration file in
-the :term:`Build Directory`, and you
-must follow a required file hierarchy. Additionally, you must enable the
-multiple configuration builds in your ``local.conf`` file.
-
-Follow these steps to set up and execute multiple configuration builds:
-
--  *Create Separate Configuration Files*: You need to create a single
-   configuration file for each build target (each multiconfig).
-   Minimally, each configuration file must define the machine and the
-   temporary directory BitBake uses for the build. Suggested practice
-   dictates that you do not overlap the temporary directories used
-   during the builds. However, it is possible that you can share the
-   temporary directory
-   (:term:`TMPDIR`). For example,
-   consider a scenario with two different multiconfigs for the same
-   :term:`MACHINE`: "qemux86" built
-   for two distributions such as "poky" and "poky-lsb". In this case,
-   you might want to use the same ``TMPDIR``.
-
-   Here is an example showing the minimal statements needed in a
-   configuration file for a "qemux86" target whose temporary build
-   directory is ``tmpmultix86``:
-   ::
-
-      MACHINE = "qemux86"
-      TMPDIR = "${TOPDIR}/tmpmultix86"
-
-   The location for these multiconfig configuration files is specific.
-   They must reside in the current build directory in a sub-directory of
-   ``conf`` named ``multiconfig``. Following is an example that defines
-   two configuration files for the "x86" and "arm" multiconfigs:
-
-   .. image:: figures/multiconfig_files.png
-      :align: center
-
-   The reason for this required file hierarchy is because the ``BBPATH``
-   variable is not constructed until the layers are parsed.
-   Consequently, using the configuration file as a pre-configuration
-   file is not possible unless it is located in the current working
-   directory.
-
--  *Add the BitBake Multi-configuration Variable to the Local
-   Configuration File*: Use the
-   :term:`BBMULTICONFIG`
-   variable in your ``conf/local.conf`` configuration file to specify
-   each multiconfig. Continuing with the example from the previous
-   figure, the ``BBMULTICONFIG`` variable needs to enable two
-   multiconfigs: "x86" and "arm" by specifying each configuration file:
-   ::
-
-      BBMULTICONFIG = "x86 arm"
-
-   .. note::
-
-      A "default" configuration already exists by definition. This
-      configuration is named: "" (i.e. empty string) and is defined by
-      the variables coming from your ``local.conf``
-      file. Consequently, the previous example actually adds two
-      additional configurations to your build: "arm" and "x86" along
-      with "".
-
--  *Launch BitBake*: Use the following BitBake command form to launch
-   the multiple configuration build:
-   ::
-
-      $ bitbake [mc:multiconfigname:]target [[[mc:multiconfigname:]target] ... ]
-
-   For the example in this section, the following command applies:
-   ::
-
-      $ bitbake mc:x86:core-image-minimal mc:arm:core-image-sato mc::core-image-base
-
-   The previous BitBake command builds a ``core-image-minimal`` image
-   that is configured through the ``x86.conf`` configuration file, a
-   ``core-image-sato`` image that is configured through the ``arm.conf``
-   configuration file and a ``core-image-base`` that is configured
-   through your ``local.conf`` configuration file.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Support for multiple configuration builds in the Yocto Project &DISTRO;
-   (&DISTRO_NAME;) Release does not include Shared State (sstate)
-   optimizations. Consequently, if a build uses the same object twice
-   in, for example, two different ``TMPDIR``
-   directories, the build either loads from an existing sstate cache for
-   that build at the start or builds the object fresh.
-
-Enabling Multiple Configuration Build Dependencies
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Sometimes dependencies can exist between targets (multiconfigs) in a
-multiple configuration build. For example, suppose that in order to
-build a ``core-image-sato`` image for an "x86" multiconfig, the root
-filesystem of an "arm" multiconfig must exist. This dependency is
-essentially that the
-:ref:`ref-tasks-image` task in the
-``core-image-sato`` recipe depends on the completion of the
-:ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task of the
-``core-image-minimal`` recipe.
-
-To enable dependencies in a multiple configuration build, you must
-declare the dependencies in the recipe using the following statement
-form:
-::
-
-   task_or_package[mcdepends] = "mc:from_multiconfig:to_multiconfig:recipe_name:task_on_which_to_depend"
-
-To better show how to use this statement, consider the example scenario
-from the first paragraph of this section. The following statement needs
-to be added to the recipe that builds the ``core-image-sato`` image:
-::
-
-   do_image[mcdepends] = "mc:x86:arm:core-image-minimal:do_rootfs"
-
-In this example, the `from_multiconfig` is "x86". The `to_multiconfig` is "arm". The
-task on which the ``do_image`` task in the recipe depends is the
-``do_rootfs`` task from the ``core-image-minimal`` recipe associated
-with the "arm" multiconfig.
-
-Once you set up this dependency, you can build the "x86" multiconfig
-using a BitBake command as follows:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake mc:x86:core-image-sato
-
-This command executes all the tasks needed to create the
-``core-image-sato`` image for the "x86" multiconfig. Because of the
-dependency, BitBake also executes through the ``do_rootfs`` task for the
-"arm" multiconfig build.
-
-Having a recipe depend on the root filesystem of another build might not
-seem that useful. Consider this change to the statement in the
-``core-image-sato`` recipe:
-::
-
-   do_image[mcdepends] = "mc:x86:arm:core-image-minimal:do_image"
-
-In this case, BitBake must
-create the ``core-image-minimal`` image for the "arm" build since the
-"x86" build depends on it.
-
-Because "x86" and "arm" are enabled for multiple configuration builds
-and have separate configuration files, BitBake places the artifacts for
-each build in the respective temporary build directories (i.e.
-:term:`TMPDIR`).
-
-Building an Initial RAM Filesystem (initramfs) Image
-----------------------------------------------------
-
-An initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) image provides a temporary root
-filesystem used for early system initialization (e.g. loading of modules
-needed to locate and mount the "real" root filesystem).
-
-.. note::
-
-   The initramfs image is the successor of initial RAM disk (initrd). It
-   is a "copy in and out" (cpio) archive of the initial filesystem that
-   gets loaded into memory during the Linux startup process. Because
-   Linux uses the contents of the archive during initialization, the
-   initramfs image needs to contain all of the device drivers and tools
-   needed to mount the final root filesystem.
-
-Follow these steps to create an initramfs image:
-
-1. *Create the initramfs Image Recipe:* You can reference the
-   ``core-image-minimal-initramfs.bb`` recipe found in the
-   ``meta/recipes-core`` directory of the :term:`Source Directory`
-   as an example
-   from which to work.
-
-2. *Decide if You Need to Bundle the initramfs Image Into the Kernel
-   Image:* If you want the initramfs image that is built to be bundled
-   in with the kernel image, set the
-   :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE`
-   variable to "1" in your ``local.conf`` configuration file and set the
-   :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE`
-   variable in the recipe that builds the kernel image.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      It is recommended that you do bundle the initramfs image with the
-      kernel image to avoid circular dependencies between the kernel
-      recipe and the initramfs recipe should the initramfs image include
-      kernel modules.
-
-   Setting the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE`` flag causes the initramfs
-   image to be unpacked into the ``${B}/usr/`` directory. The unpacked
-   initramfs image is then passed to the kernel's ``Makefile`` using the
-   :term:`CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE`
-   variable, allowing the initramfs image to be built into the kernel
-   normally.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      If you choose to not bundle the initramfs image with the kernel
-      image, you are essentially using an
-      `Initial RAM Disk (initrd) <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Initrd>`__.
-      Creating an initrd is handled primarily through the :term:`INITRD_IMAGE`,
-      ``INITRD_LIVE``, and ``INITRD_IMAGE_LIVE`` variables. For more
-      information, see the :ref:`ref-classes-image-live` file.
-
-3. *Optionally Add Items to the initramfs Image Through the initramfs
-   Image Recipe:* If you add items to the initramfs image by way of its
-   recipe, you should use
-   :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL`
-   rather than
-   :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL`.
-   ``PACKAGE_INSTALL`` gives more direct control of what is added to the
-   image as compared to the defaults you might not necessarily want that
-   are set by the :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>`
-   or :ref:`core-image <ref-classes-core-image>`
-   classes.
-
-4. *Build the Kernel Image and the initramfs Image:* Build your kernel
-   image using BitBake. Because the initramfs image recipe is a
-   dependency of the kernel image, the initramfs image is built as well
-   and bundled with the kernel image if you used the
-   :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE`
-   variable described earlier.
-
-Building a Tiny System
-----------------------
-
-Very small distributions have some significant advantages such as
-requiring less on-die or in-package memory (cheaper), better performance
-through efficient cache usage, lower power requirements due to less
-memory, faster boot times, and reduced development overhead. Some
-real-world examples where a very small distribution gives you distinct
-advantages are digital cameras, medical devices, and small headless
-systems.
-
-This section presents information that shows you how you can trim your
-distribution to even smaller sizes than the ``poky-tiny`` distribution,
-which is around 5 Mbytes, that can be built out-of-the-box using the
-Yocto Project.
-
-Tiny System Overview
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The following list presents the overall steps you need to consider and
-perform to create distributions with smaller root filesystems, achieve
-faster boot times, maintain your critical functionality, and avoid
-initial RAM disks:
-
--  `Determine your goals and guiding
-   principles. <#goals-and-guiding-principles>`__
-
--  `Understand what contributes to your image
-   size. <#understand-what-gives-your-image-size>`__
-
--  `Reduce the size of the root
-   filesystem. <#trim-the-root-filesystem>`__
-
--  `Reduce the size of the kernel. <#trim-the-kernel>`__
-
--  `Eliminate packaging
-   requirements. <#remove-package-management-requirements>`__
-
--  `Look for other ways to minimize
-   size. <#look-for-other-ways-to-minimize-size>`__
-
--  `Iterate on the process. <#iterate-on-the-process>`__
-
-Goals and Guiding Principles
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Before you can reach your destination, you need to know where you are
-going. Here is an example list that you can use as a guide when creating
-very small distributions:
-
--  Determine how much space you need (e.g. a kernel that is 1 Mbyte or
-   less and a root filesystem that is 3 Mbytes or less).
-
--  Find the areas that are currently taking 90% of the space and
-   concentrate on reducing those areas.
-
--  Do not create any difficult "hacks" to achieve your goals.
-
--  Leverage the device-specific options.
-
--  Work in a separate layer so that you keep changes isolated. For
-   information on how to create layers, see the "`Understanding and
-   Creating Layers <#understanding-and-creating-layers>`__" section.
-
-Understand What Contributes to Your Image Size
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-It is easiest to have something to start with when creating your own
-distribution. You can use the Yocto Project out-of-the-box to create the
-``poky-tiny`` distribution. Ultimately, you will want to make changes in
-your own distribution that are likely modeled after ``poky-tiny``.
-
-.. note::
-
-   To use ``poky-tiny`` in your build, set the ``DISTRO`` variable in your
-   ``local.conf`` file to "poky-tiny" as described in the
-   ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating your own distribution`"
-   section.
-
-Understanding some memory concepts will help you reduce the system size.
-Memory consists of static, dynamic, and temporary memory. Static memory
-is the TEXT (code), DATA (initialized data in the code), and BSS
-(uninitialized data) sections. Dynamic memory represents memory that is
-allocated at runtime: stacks, hash tables, and so forth. Temporary
-memory is recovered after the boot process. This memory consists of
-memory used for decompressing the kernel and for the ``__init__``
-functions.
-
-To help you see where you currently are with kernel and root filesystem
-sizes, you can use two tools found in the :term:`Source Directory`
-in the
-``scripts/tiny/`` directory:
-
--  ``ksize.py``: Reports component sizes for the kernel build objects.
-
--  ``dirsize.py``: Reports component sizes for the root filesystem.
-
-This next tool and command help you organize configuration fragments and
-view file dependencies in a human-readable form:
-
--  ``merge_config.sh``: Helps you manage configuration files and
-   fragments within the kernel. With this tool, you can merge individual
-   configuration fragments together. The tool allows you to make
-   overrides and warns you of any missing configuration options. The
-   tool is ideal for allowing you to iterate on configurations, create
-   minimal configurations, and create configuration files for different
-   machines without having to duplicate your process.
-
-   The ``merge_config.sh`` script is part of the Linux Yocto kernel Git
-   repositories (i.e. ``linux-yocto-3.14``, ``linux-yocto-3.10``,
-   ``linux-yocto-3.8``, and so forth) in the ``scripts/kconfig``
-   directory.
-
-   For more information on configuration fragments, see the
-   ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:creating configuration fragments`"
-   section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual.
-
--  ``bitbake -u taskexp -g bitbake_target``: Using the BitBake command
-   with these options brings up a Dependency Explorer from which you can
-   view file dependencies. Understanding these dependencies allows you
-   to make informed decisions when cutting out various pieces of the
-   kernel and root filesystem.
-
-Trim the Root Filesystem
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The root filesystem is made up of packages for booting, libraries, and
-applications. To change things, you can configure how the packaging
-happens, which changes the way you build them. You can also modify the
-filesystem itself or select a different filesystem.
-
-First, find out what is hogging your root filesystem by running the
-``dirsize.py`` script from your root directory:
-::
-
-   $ cd root-directory-of-image
-   $ dirsize.py 100000 > dirsize-100k.log
-   $ cat dirsize-100k.log
-
-You can apply a filter to the script to ignore files
-under a certain size. The previous example filters out any files below
-100 Kbytes. The sizes reported by the tool are uncompressed, and thus
-will be smaller by a relatively constant factor in a compressed root
-filesystem. When you examine your log file, you can focus on areas of
-the root filesystem that take up large amounts of memory.
-
-You need to be sure that what you eliminate does not cripple the
-functionality you need. One way to see how packages relate to each other
-is by using the Dependency Explorer UI with the BitBake command:
-::
-
-   $ cd image-directory
-   $ bitbake -u taskexp -g image
-
-Use the interface to
-select potential packages you wish to eliminate and see their dependency
-relationships.
-
-When deciding how to reduce the size, get rid of packages that result in
-minimal impact on the feature set. For example, you might not need a VGA
-display. Or, you might be able to get by with ``devtmpfs`` and ``mdev``
-instead of ``udev``.
-
-Use your ``local.conf`` file to make changes. For example, to eliminate
-``udev`` and ``glib``, set the following in the local configuration
-file:
-::
-
-   VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = ""
-
-Finally, you should consider exactly the type of root filesystem you
-need to meet your needs while also reducing its size. For example,
-consider ``cramfs``, ``squashfs``, ``ubifs``, ``ext2``, or an
-``initramfs`` using ``initramfs``. Be aware that ``ext3`` requires a 1
-Mbyte journal. If you are okay with running read-only, you do not need
-this journal.
-
-.. note::
-
-   After each round of elimination, you need to rebuild your system and
-   then use the tools to see the effects of your reductions.
-
-Trim the Kernel
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The kernel is built by including policies for hardware-independent
-aspects. What subsystems do you enable? For what architecture are you
-building? Which drivers do you build by default?
-
-.. note::
-
-   You can modify the kernel source if you want to help with boot time.
-
-Run the ``ksize.py`` script from the top-level Linux build directory to
-get an idea of what is making up the kernel:
-::
-
-   $ cd top-level-linux-build-directory
-   $ ksize.py > ksize.log
-   $ cat ksize.log
-
-When you examine the log, you will see how much space is taken up with
-the built-in ``.o`` files for drivers, networking, core kernel files,
-filesystem, sound, and so forth. The sizes reported by the tool are
-uncompressed, and thus will be smaller by a relatively constant factor
-in a compressed kernel image. Look to reduce the areas that are large
-and taking up around the "90% rule."
-
-To examine, or drill down, into any particular area, use the ``-d``
-option with the script:
-::
-
-   $ ksize.py -d > ksize.log
-
-Using this option
-breaks out the individual file information for each area of the kernel
-(e.g. drivers, networking, and so forth).
-
-Use your log file to see what you can eliminate from the kernel based on
-features you can let go. For example, if you are not going to need
-sound, you do not need any drivers that support sound.
-
-After figuring out what to eliminate, you need to reconfigure the kernel
-to reflect those changes during the next build. You could run
-``menuconfig`` and make all your changes at once. However, that makes it
-difficult to see the effects of your individual eliminations and also
-makes it difficult to replicate the changes for perhaps another target
-device. A better method is to start with no configurations using
-``allnoconfig``, create configuration fragments for individual changes,
-and then manage the fragments into a single configuration file using
-``merge_config.sh``. The tool makes it easy for you to iterate using the
-configuration change and build cycle.
-
-Each time you make configuration changes, you need to rebuild the kernel
-and check to see what impact your changes had on the overall size.
-
-Remove Package Management Requirements
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Packaging requirements add size to the image. One way to reduce the size
-of the image is to remove all the packaging requirements from the image.
-This reduction includes both removing the package manager and its unique
-dependencies as well as removing the package management data itself.
-
-To eliminate all the packaging requirements for an image, be sure that
-"package-management" is not part of your
-:term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`
-statement for the image. When you remove this feature, you are removing
-the package manager as well as its dependencies from the root
-filesystem.
-
-Look for Other Ways to Minimize Size
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Depending on your particular circumstances, other areas that you can
-trim likely exist. The key to finding these areas is through tools and
-methods described here combined with experimentation and iteration. Here
-are a couple of areas to experiment with:
-
--  ``glibc``: In general, follow this process:
-
-   1. Remove ``glibc`` features from
-      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`
-      that you think you do not need.
-
-   2. Build your distribution.
-
-   3. If the build fails due to missing symbols in a package, determine
-      if you can reconfigure the package to not need those features. For
-      example, change the configuration to not support wide character
-      support as is done for ``ncurses``. Or, if support for those
-      characters is needed, determine what ``glibc`` features provide
-      the support and restore the configuration.
-
-   4. Rebuild and repeat the process.
-
--  ``busybox``: For BusyBox, use a process similar as described for
-   ``glibc``. A difference is you will need to boot the resulting system
-   to see if you are able to do everything you expect from the running
-   system. You need to be sure to integrate configuration fragments into
-   Busybox because BusyBox handles its own core features and then allows
-   you to add configuration fragments on top.
-
-Iterate on the Process
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-If you have not reached your goals on system size, you need to iterate
-on the process. The process is the same. Use the tools and see just what
-is taking up 90% of the root filesystem and the kernel. Decide what you
-can eliminate without limiting your device beyond what you need.
-
-Depending on your system, a good place to look might be Busybox, which
-provides a stripped down version of Unix tools in a single, executable
-file. You might be able to drop virtual terminal services or perhaps
-ipv6.
-
-Building Images for More than One Machine
------------------------------------------
-
-A common scenario developers face is creating images for several
-different machines that use the same software environment. In this
-situation, it is tempting to set the tunings and optimization flags for
-each build specifically for the targeted hardware (i.e. "maxing out" the
-tunings). Doing so can considerably add to build times and package feed
-maintenance collectively for the machines. For example, selecting tunes
-that are extremely specific to a CPU core used in a system might enable
-some micro optimizations in GCC for that particular system but would
-otherwise not gain you much of a performance difference across the other
-systems as compared to using a more general tuning across all the builds
-(e.g. setting :term:`DEFAULTTUNE`
-specifically for each machine's build). Rather than "max out" each
-build's tunings, you can take steps that cause the OpenEmbedded build
-system to reuse software across the various machines where it makes
-sense.
-
-If build speed and package feed maintenance are considerations, you
-should consider the points in this section that can help you optimize
-your tunings to best consider build times and package feed maintenance.
-
--  *Share the Build Directory:* If at all possible, share the
-   :term:`TMPDIR` across builds. The
-   Yocto Project supports switching between different
-   :term:`MACHINE` values in the same
-   ``TMPDIR``. This practice is well supported and regularly used by
-   developers when building for multiple machines. When you use the same
-   ``TMPDIR`` for multiple machine builds, the OpenEmbedded build system
-   can reuse the existing native and often cross-recipes for multiple
-   machines. Thus, build time decreases.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      If :term:`DISTRO` settings change or fundamental configuration settings
-      such as the filesystem layout, you need to work with a clean ``TMPDIR``.
-      Sharing ``TMPDIR`` under these circumstances might work but since it is
-      not guaranteed, you should use a clean ``TMPDIR``.
-
--  *Enable the Appropriate Package Architecture:* By default, the
-   OpenEmbedded build system enables three levels of package
-   architectures: "all", "tune" or "package", and "machine". Any given
-   recipe usually selects one of these package architectures (types) for
-   its output. Depending for what a given recipe creates packages,
-   making sure you enable the appropriate package architecture can
-   directly impact the build time.
-
-   A recipe that just generates scripts can enable "all" architecture
-   because there are no binaries to build. To specifically enable "all"
-   architecture, be sure your recipe inherits the
-   :ref:`allarch <ref-classes-allarch>` class.
-   This class is useful for "all" architectures because it configures
-   many variables so packages can be used across multiple architectures.
-
-   If your recipe needs to generate packages that are machine-specific
-   or when one of the build or runtime dependencies is already
-   machine-architecture dependent, which makes your recipe also
-   machine-architecture dependent, make sure your recipe enables the
-   "machine" package architecture through the
-   :term:`MACHINE_ARCH`
-   variable:
-   ::
-
-      PACKAGE_ARCH = "${MACHINE_ARCH}"
-
-   When you do not
-   specifically enable a package architecture through the
-   :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH`, The
-   OpenEmbedded build system defaults to the
-   :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` setting:
-   ::
-
-      PACKAGE_ARCH = "${TUNE_PKGARCH}"
-
--  *Choose a Generic Tuning File if Possible:* Some tunes are more
-   generic and can run on multiple targets (e.g. an ``armv5`` set of
-   packages could run on ``armv6`` and ``armv7`` processors in most
-   cases). Similarly, ``i486`` binaries could work on ``i586`` and
-   higher processors. You should realize, however, that advances on
-   newer processor versions would not be used.
-
-   If you select the same tune for several different machines, the
-   OpenEmbedded build system reuses software previously built, thus
-   speeding up the overall build time. Realize that even though a new
-   sysroot for each machine is generated, the software is not recompiled
-   and only one package feed exists.
-
--  *Manage Granular Level Packaging:* Sometimes cases exist where
-   injecting another level of package architecture beyond the three
-   higher levels noted earlier can be useful. For example, consider how
-   NXP (formerly Freescale) allows for the easy reuse of binary packages
-   in their layer
-   :yocto_git:`meta-freescale </meta-freescale/>`.
-   In this example, the
-   :yocto_git:`fsl-dynamic-packagearch </meta-freescale/tree/classes/fsl-dynamic-packagearch.bbclass>`
-   class shares GPU packages for i.MX53 boards because all boards share
-   the AMD GPU. The i.MX6-based boards can do the same because all
-   boards share the Vivante GPU. This class inspects the BitBake
-   datastore to identify if the package provides or depends on one of
-   the sub-architecture values. If so, the class sets the
-   :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH` value
-   based on the ``MACHINE_SUBARCH`` value. If the package does not
-   provide or depend on one of the sub-architecture values but it
-   matches a value in the machine-specific filter, it sets
-   :term:`MACHINE_ARCH`. This
-   behavior reduces the number of packages built and saves build time by
-   reusing binaries.
-
--  *Use Tools to Debug Issues:* Sometimes you can run into situations
-   where software is being rebuilt when you think it should not be. For
-   example, the OpenEmbedded build system might not be using shared
-   state between machines when you think it should be. These types of
-   situations are usually due to references to machine-specific
-   variables such as :term:`MACHINE`,
-   :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES`,
-   :term:`XSERVER`,
-   :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES`,
-   and so forth in code that is supposed to only be tune-specific or
-   when the recipe depends
-   (:term:`DEPENDS`,
-   :term:`RDEPENDS`,
-   :term:`RRECOMMENDS`,
-   :term:`RSUGGESTS`, and so forth)
-   on some other recipe that already has
-   :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH` defined
-   as "${MACHINE_ARCH}".
-
-   .. note::
-
-      Patches to fix any issues identified are most welcome as these
-      issues occasionally do occur.
-
-   For such cases, you can use some tools to help you sort out the
-   situation:
-
-   -  ``state-diff-machines.sh``*:* You can find this tool in the
-      ``scripts`` directory of the Source Repositories. See the comments
-      in the script for information on how to use the tool.
-
-   -  *BitBake's "-S printdiff" Option:* Using this option causes
-      BitBake to try to establish the closest signature match it can
-      (e.g. in the shared state cache) and then run ``bitbake-diffsigs``
-      over the matches to determine the stamps and delta where these two
-      stamp trees diverge.
-
-Building Software from an External Source
------------------------------------------
-
-By default, the OpenEmbedded build system uses the
-:term:`Build Directory` when building source
-code. The build process involves fetching the source files, unpacking
-them, and then patching them if necessary before the build takes place.
-
-Situations exist where you might want to build software from source
-files that are external to and thus outside of the OpenEmbedded build
-system. For example, suppose you have a project that includes a new BSP
-with a heavily customized kernel. And, you want to minimize exposing the
-build system to the development team so that they can focus on their
-project and maintain everyone's workflow as much as possible. In this
-case, you want a kernel source directory on the development machine
-where the development occurs. You want the recipe's
-:term:`SRC_URI` variable to point to
-the external directory and use it as is, not copy it.
-
-To build from software that comes from an external source, all you need
-to do is inherit the
-:ref:`externalsrc <ref-classes-externalsrc>` class
-and then set the
-:term:`EXTERNALSRC` variable to
-point to your external source code. Here are the statements to put in
-your ``local.conf`` file:
-::
-
-   INHERIT += "externalsrc"
-   EXTERNALSRC_pn-myrecipe = "path-to-your-source-tree"
-
-This next example shows how to accomplish the same thing by setting
-``EXTERNALSRC`` in the recipe itself or in the recipe's append file:
-::
-
-   EXTERNALSRC = "path"
-   EXTERNALSRC_BUILD = "path"
-
-.. note::
-
-   In order for these settings to take effect, you must globally or
-   locally inherit the :ref:`externalsrc <ref-classes-externalsrc>`
-   class.
-
-By default, ``externalsrc.bbclass`` builds the source code in a
-directory separate from the external source directory as specified by
-:term:`EXTERNALSRC`. If you need
-to have the source built in the same directory in which it resides, or
-some other nominated directory, you can set
-:term:`EXTERNALSRC_BUILD`
-to point to that directory:
-::
-
-   EXTERNALSRC_BUILD_pn-myrecipe = "path-to-your-source-tree"
-
-Replicating a Build Offline
----------------------------
-
-It can be useful to take a "snapshot" of upstream sources used in a
-build and then use that "snapshot" later to replicate the build offline.
-To do so, you need to first prepare and populate your downloads
-directory your "snapshot" of files. Once your downloads directory is
-ready, you can use it at any time and from any machine to replicate your
-build.
-
-Follow these steps to populate your Downloads directory:
-
-1. *Create a Clean Downloads Directory:* Start with an empty downloads
-   directory (:term:`DL_DIR`). You
-   start with an empty downloads directory by either removing the files
-   in the existing directory or by setting ``DL_DIR`` to point to either
-   an empty location or one that does not yet exist.
-
-2. *Generate Tarballs of the Source Git Repositories:* Edit your
-   ``local.conf`` configuration file as follows:
-   ::
-
-      DL_DIR = "/home/your-download-dir/"
-      BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS = "1"
-
-   During
-   the fetch process in the next step, BitBake gathers the source files
-   and creates tarballs in the directory pointed to by ``DL_DIR``. See
-   the
-   :term:`BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS`
-   variable for more information.
-
-3. *Populate Your Downloads Directory Without Building:* Use BitBake to
-   fetch your sources but inhibit the build:
-   ::
-
-      $ bitbake target --runonly=fetch
-
-   The downloads directory (i.e. ``${DL_DIR}``) now has
-   a "snapshot" of the source files in the form of tarballs, which can
-   be used for the build.
-
-4. *Optionally Remove Any Git or other SCM Subdirectories From the
-   Downloads Directory:* If you want, you can clean up your downloads
-   directory by removing any Git or other Source Control Management
-   (SCM) subdirectories such as ``${DL_DIR}/git2/*``. The tarballs
-   already contain these subdirectories.
-
-Once your downloads directory has everything it needs regarding source
-files, you can create your "own-mirror" and build your target.
-Understand that you can use the files to build the target offline from
-any machine and at any time.
-
-Follow these steps to build your target using the files in the downloads
-directory:
-
-1. *Using Local Files Only:* Inside your ``local.conf`` file, add the
-   :term:`SOURCE_MIRROR_URL`
-   variable, inherit the
-   :ref:`own-mirrors <ref-classes-own-mirrors>`
-   class, and use the
-   :term:`bitbake:BB_NO_NETWORK`
-   variable to your ``local.conf``.
-   ::
-
-      SOURCE_MIRROR_URL ?= "file:///home/your-download-dir/"
-      INHERIT += "own-mirrors"
-      BB_NO_NETWORK = "1"
-
-   The ``SOURCE_MIRROR_URL`` and ``own-mirror``
-   class set up the system to use the downloads directory as your "own
-   mirror". Using the ``BB_NO_NETWORK`` variable makes sure that
-   BitBake's fetching process in step 3 stays local, which means files
-   from your "own-mirror" are used.
-
-2. *Start With a Clean Build:* You can start with a clean build by
-   removing the
-   ``${``\ :term:`TMPDIR`\ ``}``
-   directory or using a new :term:`Build Directory`.
-
-3. *Build Your Target:* Use BitBake to build your target:
-   ::
-
-      $ bitbake target
-
-   The build completes using the known local "snapshot" of source
-   files from your mirror. The resulting tarballs for your "snapshot" of
-   source files are in the downloads directory.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      The offline build does not work if recipes attempt to find the
-      latest version of software by setting
-      :term:`SRCREV` to
-      ``${``\ :term:`AUTOREV`\ ``}``:
-      ::
-
-         SRCREV = "${AUTOREV}"
-
-      When a recipe sets ``SRCREV`` to
-      ``${AUTOREV}``, the build system accesses the network in an
-      attempt to determine the latest version of software from the SCM.
-      Typically, recipes that use ``AUTOREV`` are custom or modified
-      recipes. Recipes that reside in public repositories usually do not
-      use ``AUTOREV``.
-
-      If you do have recipes that use ``AUTOREV``, you can take steps to
-      still use the recipes in an offline build. Do the following:
-
-      1. Use a configuration generated by enabling `build
-         history <#maintaining-build-output-quality>`__.
-
-      2. Use the ``buildhistory-collect-srcrevs`` command to collect the
-         stored ``SRCREV`` values from the build's history. For more
-         information on collecting these values, see the "`Build History
-         Package Information <#build-history-package-information>`__"
-         section.
-
-      3. Once you have the correct source revisions, you can modify
-         those recipes to to set ``SRCREV`` to specific versions of the
-         software.
-
-Speeding Up a Build
-===================
-
-Build time can be an issue. By default, the build system uses simple
-controls to try and maximize build efficiency. In general, the default
-settings for all the following variables result in the most efficient
-build times when dealing with single socket systems (i.e. a single CPU).
-If you have multiple CPUs, you might try increasing the default values
-to gain more speed. See the descriptions in the glossary for each
-variable for more information:
-
--  :term:`BB_NUMBER_THREADS`:
-   The maximum number of threads BitBake simultaneously executes.
-
--  :term:`bitbake:BB_NUMBER_PARSE_THREADS`:
-   The number of threads BitBake uses during parsing.
-
--  :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE`: Extra
-   options passed to the ``make`` command during the
-   :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task in
-   order to specify parallel compilation on the local build host.
-
--  :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST`:
-   Extra options passed to the ``make`` command during the
-   :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task in
-   order to specify parallel installation on the local build host.
-
-As mentioned, these variables all scale to the number of processor cores
-available on the build system. For single socket systems, this
-auto-scaling ensures that the build system fundamentally takes advantage
-of potential parallel operations during the build based on the build
-machine's capabilities.
-
-Following are additional factors that can affect build speed:
-
--  File system type: The file system type that the build is being
-   performed on can also influence performance. Using ``ext4`` is
-   recommended as compared to ``ext2`` and ``ext3`` due to ``ext4``
-   improved features such as extents.
-
--  Disabling the updating of access time using ``noatime``: The
-   ``noatime`` mount option prevents the build system from updating file
-   and directory access times.
-
--  Setting a longer commit: Using the "commit=" mount option increases
-   the interval in seconds between disk cache writes. Changing this
-   interval from the five second default to something longer increases
-   the risk of data loss but decreases the need to write to the disk,
-   thus increasing the build performance.
-
--  Choosing the packaging backend: Of the available packaging backends,
-   IPK is the fastest. Additionally, selecting a singular packaging
-   backend also helps.
-
--  Using ``tmpfs`` for :term:`TMPDIR`
-   as a temporary file system: While this can help speed up the build,
-   the benefits are limited due to the compiler using ``-pipe``. The
-   build system goes to some lengths to avoid ``sync()`` calls into the
-   file system on the principle that if there was a significant failure,
-   the :term:`Build Directory`
-   contents could easily be rebuilt.
-
--  Inheriting the
-   :ref:`rm_work <ref-classes-rm-work>` class:
-   Inheriting this class has shown to speed up builds due to
-   significantly lower amounts of data stored in the data cache as well
-   as on disk. Inheriting this class also makes cleanup of
-   :term:`TMPDIR` faster, at the
-   expense of being easily able to dive into the source code. File
-   system maintainers have recommended that the fastest way to clean up
-   large numbers of files is to reformat partitions rather than delete
-   files due to the linear nature of partitions. This, of course,
-   assumes you structure the disk partitions and file systems in a way
-   that this is practical.
-
-Aside from the previous list, you should keep some trade offs in mind
-that can help you speed up the build:
-
--  Remove items from
-   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`
-   that you might not need.
-
--  Exclude debug symbols and other debug information: If you do not need
-   these symbols and other debug information, disabling the ``*-dbg``
-   package generation can speed up the build. You can disable this
-   generation by setting the
-   :term:`INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT`
-   variable to "1".
-
--  Disable static library generation for recipes derived from
-   ``autoconf`` or ``libtool``: Following is an example showing how to
-   disable static libraries and still provide an override to handle
-   exceptions:
-   ::
-
-      STATICLIBCONF = "--disable-static"
-      STATICLIBCONF_sqlite3-native = ""
-      EXTRA_OECONF += "${STATICLIBCONF}"
-
-   .. note::
-
-      -  Some recipes need static libraries in order to work correctly
-         (e.g. ``pseudo-native`` needs ``sqlite3-native``). Overrides,
-         as in the previous example, account for these kinds of
-         exceptions.
-
-      -  Some packages have packaging code that assumes the presence of
-         the static libraries. If so, you might need to exclude them as
-         well.
-
-Working With Libraries
-======================
-
-Libraries are an integral part of your system. This section describes
-some common practices you might find helpful when working with libraries
-to build your system:
-
--  `How to include static library
-   files <#including-static-library-files>`__
-
--  `How to use the Multilib feature to combine multiple versions of
-   library files into a single
-   image <#combining-multiple-versions-library-files-into-one-image>`__
-
--  `How to install multiple versions of the same library in parallel on
-   the same
-   system <#installing-multiple-versions-of-the-same-library>`__
-
-Including Static Library Files
-------------------------------
-
-If you are building a library and the library offers static linking, you
-can control which static library files (``*.a`` files) get included in
-the built library.
-
-The :term:`PACKAGES` and
-:term:`FILES_* <FILES>` variables in the
-``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file define how files installed
-by the ``do_install`` task are packaged. By default, the ``PACKAGES``
-variable includes ``${PN}-staticdev``, which represents all static
-library files.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Some previously released versions of the Yocto Project defined the
-   static library files through ``${PN}-dev``.
-
-Following is part of the BitBake configuration file, where you can see
-how the static library files are defined:
-::
-
-   PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN ?= ""
-   PACKAGES = "${PN}-dbg ${PN}-staticdev ${PN}-dev ${PN}-doc ${PN}-locale ${PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN} ${PN}"
-   PACKAGES_DYNAMIC = "^${PN}-locale-.*"
-   FILES = ""
-
-   FILES_${PN} = "${bindir}/* ${sbindir}/* ${libexecdir}/* ${libdir}/lib*${SOLIBS} \
-               ${sysconfdir} ${sharedstatedir} ${localstatedir} \
-               ${base_bindir}/* ${base_sbindir}/* \
-               ${base_libdir}/*${SOLIBS} \
-               ${base_prefix}/lib/udev/rules.d ${prefix}/lib/udev/rules.d \
-               ${datadir}/${BPN} ${libdir}/${BPN}/* \
-               ${datadir}/pixmaps ${datadir}/applications \
-               ${datadir}/idl ${datadir}/omf ${datadir}/sounds \
-               ${libdir}/bonobo/servers"
-
-   FILES_${PN}-bin = "${bindir}/* ${sbindir}/*"
-
-   FILES_${PN}-doc = "${docdir} ${mandir} ${infodir} ${datadir}/gtk-doc \
-               ${datadir}/gnome/help"
-   SECTION_${PN}-doc = "doc"
-
-   FILES_SOLIBSDEV ?= "${base_libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV} ${libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV}"
-   FILES_${PN}-dev = "${includedir} ${FILES_SOLIBSDEV} ${libdir}/*.la \
-                   ${libdir}/*.o ${libdir}/pkgconfig ${datadir}/pkgconfig \
-                   ${datadir}/aclocal ${base_libdir}/*.o \
-                   ${libdir}/${BPN}/*.la ${base_libdir}/*.la"
-   SECTION_${PN}-dev = "devel"
-   ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN}-dev = "1"
-   RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev = "${PN} (= ${EXTENDPKGV})"
-
-   FILES_${PN}-staticdev = "${libdir}/*.a ${base_libdir}/*.a ${libdir}/${BPN}/*.a"
-   SECTION_${PN}-staticdev = "devel"
-   RDEPENDS_${PN}-staticdev = "${PN}-dev (= ${EXTENDPKGV})"
-
-Combining Multiple Versions of Library Files into One Image
------------------------------------------------------------
-
-The build system offers the ability to build libraries with different
-target optimizations or architecture formats and combine these together
-into one system image. You can link different binaries in the image
-against the different libraries as needed for specific use cases. This
-feature is called "Multilib".
-
-An example would be where you have most of a system compiled in 32-bit
-mode using 32-bit libraries, but you have something large, like a
-database engine, that needs to be a 64-bit application and uses 64-bit
-libraries. Multilib allows you to get the best of both 32-bit and 64-bit
-libraries.
-
-While the Multilib feature is most commonly used for 32 and 64-bit
-differences, the approach the build system uses facilitates different
-target optimizations. You could compile some binaries to use one set of
-libraries and other binaries to use a different set of libraries. The
-libraries could differ in architecture, compiler options, or other
-optimizations.
-
-Several examples exist in the ``meta-skeleton`` layer found in the
-:term:`Source Directory`:
-
--  ``conf/multilib-example.conf`` configuration file
-
--  ``conf/multilib-example2.conf`` configuration file
-
--  ``recipes-multilib/images/core-image-multilib-example.bb`` recipe
-
-Preparing to Use Multilib
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-User-specific requirements drive the Multilib feature. Consequently,
-there is no one "out-of-the-box" configuration that likely exists to
-meet your needs.
-
-In order to enable Multilib, you first need to ensure your recipe is
-extended to support multiple libraries. Many standard recipes are
-already extended and support multiple libraries. You can check in the
-``meta/conf/multilib.conf`` configuration file in the
-:term:`Source Directory` to see how this is
-done using the
-:term:`BBCLASSEXTEND` variable.
-Eventually, all recipes will be covered and this list will not be
-needed.
-
-For the most part, the Multilib class extension works automatically to
-extend the package name from ``${PN}`` to ``${MLPREFIX}${PN}``, where
-``MLPREFIX`` is the particular multilib (e.g. "lib32-" or "lib64-").
-Standard variables such as
-:term:`DEPENDS`,
-:term:`RDEPENDS`,
-:term:`RPROVIDES`,
-:term:`RRECOMMENDS`,
-:term:`PACKAGES`, and
-:term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` are
-automatically extended by the system. If you are extending any manual
-code in the recipe, you can use the ``${MLPREFIX}`` variable to ensure
-those names are extended correctly. This automatic extension code
-resides in ``multilib.bbclass``.
-
-Using Multilib
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-After you have set up the recipes, you need to define the actual
-combination of multiple libraries you want to build. You accomplish this
-through your ``local.conf`` configuration file in the
-:term:`Build Directory`. An example
-configuration would be as follows:
-::
-
-   MACHINE = "qemux86-64"
-   require conf/multilib.conf
-   MULTILIBS = "multilib:lib32"
-   DEFAULTTUNE_virtclass-multilib-lib32 = "x86"
-   IMAGE_INSTALL_append = "lib32-glib-2.0"
-
-This example enables an additional library named
-``lib32`` alongside the normal target packages. When combining these
-"lib32" alternatives, the example uses "x86" for tuning. For information
-on this particular tuning, see
-``meta/conf/machine/include/ia32/arch-ia32.inc``.
-
-The example then includes ``lib32-glib-2.0`` in all the images, which
-illustrates one method of including a multiple library dependency. You
-can use a normal image build to include this dependency, for example:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake core-image-sato
-
-You can also build Multilib packages
-specifically with a command like this:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake lib32-glib-2.0
-
-Additional Implementation Details
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Generic implementation details as well as details that are specific to
-package management systems exist. Following are implementation details
-that exist regardless of the package management system:
-
--  The typical convention used for the class extension code as used by
-   Multilib assumes that all package names specified in
-   :term:`PACKAGES` that contain
-   ``${PN}`` have ``${PN}`` at the start of the name. When that
-   convention is not followed and ``${PN}`` appears at the middle or the
-   end of a name, problems occur.
-
--  The :term:`TARGET_VENDOR`
-   value under Multilib will be extended to "-vendormlmultilib" (e.g.
-   "-pokymllib32" for a "lib32" Multilib with Poky). The reason for this
-   slightly unwieldy contraction is that any "-" characters in the
-   vendor string presently break Autoconf's ``config.sub``, and other
-   separators are problematic for different reasons.
-
-For the RPM Package Management System, the following implementation
-details exist:
-
--  A unique architecture is defined for the Multilib packages, along
-   with creating a unique deploy folder under ``tmp/deploy/rpm`` in the
-   :term:`Build Directory`. For
-   example, consider ``lib32`` in a ``qemux86-64`` image. The possible
-   architectures in the system are "all", "qemux86_64",
-   "lib32_qemux86_64", and "lib32_x86".
-
--  The ``${MLPREFIX}`` variable is stripped from ``${PN}`` during RPM
-   packaging. The naming for a normal RPM package and a Multilib RPM
-   package in a ``qemux86-64`` system resolves to something similar to
-   ``bash-4.1-r2.x86_64.rpm`` and ``bash-4.1.r2.lib32_x86.rpm``,
-   respectively.
-
--  When installing a Multilib image, the RPM backend first installs the
-   base image and then installs the Multilib libraries.
-
--  The build system relies on RPM to resolve the identical files in the
-   two (or more) Multilib packages.
-
-For the IPK Package Management System, the following implementation
-details exist:
-
--  The ``${MLPREFIX}`` is not stripped from ``${PN}`` during IPK
-   packaging. The naming for a normal RPM package and a Multilib IPK
-   package in a ``qemux86-64`` system resolves to something like
-   ``bash_4.1-r2.x86_64.ipk`` and ``lib32-bash_4.1-rw_x86.ipk``,
-   respectively.
-
--  The IPK deploy folder is not modified with ``${MLPREFIX}`` because
-   packages with and without the Multilib feature can exist in the same
-   folder due to the ``${PN}`` differences.
-
--  IPK defines a sanity check for Multilib installation using certain
-   rules for file comparison, overridden, etc.
-
-Installing Multiple Versions of the Same Library
-------------------------------------------------
-
-Situations can exist where you need to install and use multiple versions
-of the same library on the same system at the same time. These
-situations almost always exist when a library API changes and you have
-multiple pieces of software that depend on the separate versions of the
-library. To accommodate these situations, you can install multiple
-versions of the same library in parallel on the same system.
-
-The process is straightforward as long as the libraries use proper
-versioning. With properly versioned libraries, all you need to do to
-individually specify the libraries is create separate, appropriately
-named recipes where the :term:`PN` part of
-the name includes a portion that differentiates each library version
-(e.g. the major part of the version number). Thus, instead of having a
-single recipe that loads one version of a library (e.g. ``clutter``),
-you provide multiple recipes that result in different versions of the
-libraries you want. As an example, the following two recipes would allow
-the two separate versions of the ``clutter`` library to co-exist on the
-same system:
-
-.. code-block:: none
-
-   clutter-1.6_1.6.20.bb
-   clutter-1.8_1.8.4.bb
-
-Additionally, if
-you have other recipes that depend on a given library, you need to use
-the :term:`DEPENDS` variable to
-create the dependency. Continuing with the same example, if you want to
-have a recipe depend on the 1.8 version of the ``clutter`` library, use
-the following in your recipe:
-::
-
-   DEPENDS = "clutter-1.8"
-
-Using x32 psABI
-===============
-
-x32 processor-specific Application Binary Interface (`x32
-psABI <https://software.intel.com/en-us/node/628948>`__) is a native
-32-bit processor-specific ABI for Intel 64 (x86-64) architectures. An
-ABI defines the calling conventions between functions in a processing
-environment. The interface determines what registers are used and what
-the sizes are for various C data types.
-
-Some processing environments prefer using 32-bit applications even when
-running on Intel 64-bit platforms. Consider the i386 psABI, which is a
-very old 32-bit ABI for Intel 64-bit platforms. The i386 psABI does not
-provide efficient use and access of the Intel 64-bit processor
-resources, leaving the system underutilized. Now consider the x86_64
-psABI. This ABI is newer and uses 64-bits for data sizes and program
-pointers. The extra bits increase the footprint size of the programs,
-libraries, and also increases the memory and file system size
-requirements. Executing under the x32 psABI enables user programs to
-utilize CPU and system resources more efficiently while keeping the
-memory footprint of the applications low. Extra bits are used for
-registers but not for addressing mechanisms.
-
-The Yocto Project supports the final specifications of x32 psABI as
-follows:
-
--  You can create packages and images in x32 psABI format on x86_64
-   architecture targets.
-
--  You can successfully build recipes with the x32 toolchain.
-
--  You can create and boot ``core-image-minimal`` and
-   ``core-image-sato`` images.
-
--  RPM Package Manager (RPM) support exists for x32 binaries.
-
--  Support for large images exists.
-
-To use the x32 psABI, you need to edit your ``conf/local.conf``
-configuration file as follows:
-::
-
-   MACHINE = "qemux86-64"
-   DEFAULTTUNE = "x86-64-x32"
-   baselib = "${@d.getVar('BASE_LIB_tune-' + (d.getVar('DEFAULTTUNE') \
-       or 'INVALID')) or 'lib'}"
-
-Once you have set
-up your configuration file, use BitBake to build an image that supports
-the x32 psABI. Here is an example:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake core-image-sato
-
-Enabling GObject Introspection Support
-======================================
-
-`GObject
-introspection <https://wiki.gnome.org/Projects/GObjectIntrospection>`__
-is the standard mechanism for accessing GObject-based software from
-runtime environments. GObject is a feature of the GLib library that
-provides an object framework for the GNOME desktop and related software.
-GObject Introspection adds information to GObject that allows objects
-created within it to be represented across different programming
-languages. If you want to construct GStreamer pipelines using Python, or
-control UPnP infrastructure using Javascript and GUPnP, GObject
-introspection is the only way to do it.
-
-This section describes the Yocto Project support for generating and
-packaging GObject introspection data. GObject introspection data is a
-description of the API provided by libraries built on top of GLib
-framework, and, in particular, that framework's GObject mechanism.
-GObject Introspection Repository (GIR) files go to ``-dev`` packages,
-``typelib`` files go to main packages as they are packaged together with
-libraries that are introspected.
-
-The data is generated when building such a library, by linking the
-library with a small executable binary that asks the library to describe
-itself, and then executing the binary and processing its output.
-
-Generating this data in a cross-compilation environment is difficult
-because the library is produced for the target architecture, but its
-code needs to be executed on the build host. This problem is solved with
-the OpenEmbedded build system by running the code through QEMU, which
-allows precisely that. Unfortunately, QEMU does not always work
-perfectly as mentioned in the "`Known Issues <#known-issues>`__"
-section.
-
-Enabling the Generation of Introspection Data
----------------------------------------------
-
-Enabling the generation of introspection data (GIR files) in your
-library package involves the following:
-
-1. Inherit the
-   :ref:`gobject-introspection <ref-classes-gobject-introspection>`
-   class.
-
-2. Make sure introspection is not disabled anywhere in the recipe or
-   from anything the recipe includes. Also, make sure that
-   "gobject-introspection-data" is not in
-   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED`
-   and that "qemu-usermode" is not in
-   :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED`.
-   If either of these conditions exist, nothing will happen.
-
-3. Try to build the recipe. If you encounter build errors that look like
-   something is unable to find ``.so`` libraries, check where these
-   libraries are located in the source tree and add the following to the
-   recipe:
-   ::
-
-      GIR_EXTRA_LIBS_PATH = "${B}/something/.libs"
-
-   .. note::
-
-      See recipes in the ``oe-core`` repository that use that
-      ``GIR_EXTRA_LIBS_PATH`` variable as an example.
-
-4. Look for any other errors, which probably mean that introspection
-   support in a package is not entirely standard, and thus breaks down
-   in a cross-compilation environment. For such cases, custom-made fixes
-   are needed. A good place to ask and receive help in these cases is
-   the :ref:`Yocto Project mailing
-   lists <resources-mailinglist>`.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Using a library that no longer builds against the latest Yocto
-   Project release and prints introspection related errors is a good
-   candidate for the previous procedure.
-
-Disabling the Generation of Introspection Data
-----------------------------------------------
-
-You might find that you do not want to generate introspection data. Or,
-perhaps QEMU does not work on your build host and target architecture
-combination. If so, you can use either of the following methods to
-disable GIR file generations:
-
--  Add the following to your distro configuration:
-   ::
-
-      DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED = "gobject-introspection-data"
-
-   Adding this statement disables generating introspection data using
-   QEMU but will still enable building introspection tools and libraries
-   (i.e. building them does not require the use of QEMU).
-
--  Add the following to your machine configuration:
-   ::
-
-      MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED = "qemu-usermode"
-
-   Adding this statement disables the use of QEMU when building packages for your
-   machine. Currently, this feature is used only by introspection
-   recipes and has the same effect as the previously described option.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      Future releases of the Yocto Project might have other features
-      affected by this option.
-
-If you disable introspection data, you can still obtain it through other
-means such as copying the data from a suitable sysroot, or by generating
-it on the target hardware. The OpenEmbedded build system does not
-currently provide specific support for these techniques.
-
-Testing that Introspection Works in an Image
---------------------------------------------
-
-Use the following procedure to test if generating introspection data is
-working in an image:
-
-1. Make sure that "gobject-introspection-data" is not in
-   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED`
-   and that "qemu-usermode" is not in
-   :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED`.
-
-2. Build ``core-image-sato``.
-
-3. Launch a Terminal and then start Python in the terminal.
-
-4. Enter the following in the terminal:
-   ::
-
-      >>> from gi.repository import GLib
-      >>> GLib.get_host_name()
-
-5. For something a little more advanced, enter the following see:
-   https://python-gtk-3-tutorial.readthedocs.io/en/latest/introduction.html
-
-Known Issues
-------------
-
-The following know issues exist for GObject Introspection Support:
-
--  ``qemu-ppc64`` immediately crashes. Consequently, you cannot build
-   introspection data on that architecture.
-
--  x32 is not supported by QEMU. Consequently, introspection data is
-   disabled.
-
--  musl causes transient GLib binaries to crash on assertion failures.
-   Consequently, generating introspection data is disabled.
-
--  Because QEMU is not able to run the binaries correctly, introspection
-   is disabled for some specific packages under specific architectures
-   (e.g. ``gcr``, ``libsecret``, and ``webkit``).
-
--  QEMU usermode might not work properly when running 64-bit binaries
-   under 32-bit host machines. In particular, "qemumips64" is known to
-   not work under i686.
-
-Optionally Using an External Toolchain
-======================================
-
-You might want to use an external toolchain as part of your development.
-If this is the case, the fundamental steps you need to accomplish are as
-follows:
-
--  Understand where the installed toolchain resides. For cases where you
-   need to build the external toolchain, you would need to take separate
-   steps to build and install the toolchain.
-
--  Make sure you add the layer that contains the toolchain to your
-   ``bblayers.conf`` file through the
-   :term:`BBLAYERS` variable.
-
--  Set the ``EXTERNAL_TOOLCHAIN`` variable in your ``local.conf`` file
-   to the location in which you installed the toolchain.
-
-A good example of an external toolchain used with the Yocto Project is
-Mentor Graphics Sourcery G++ Toolchain. You can see information on how
-to use that particular layer in the ``README`` file at
-https://github.com/MentorEmbedded/meta-sourcery/. You can find
-further information by reading about the
-:term:`TCMODE` variable in the Yocto
-Project Reference Manual's variable glossary.
-
-Creating Partitioned Images Using Wic
-=====================================
-
-Creating an image for a particular hardware target using the
-OpenEmbedded build system does not necessarily mean you can boot that
-image as is on your device. Physical devices accept and boot images in
-various ways depending on the specifics of the device. Usually,
-information about the hardware can tell you what image format the device
-requires. Should your device require multiple partitions on an SD card,
-flash, or an HDD, you can use the OpenEmbedded Image Creator, Wic, to
-create the properly partitioned image.
-
-The ``wic`` command generates partitioned images from existing
-OpenEmbedded build artifacts. Image generation is driven by partitioning
-commands contained in an Openembedded kickstart file (``.wks``)
-specified either directly on the command line or as one of a selection
-of canned kickstart files as shown with the ``wic list images`` command
-in the "`Using an Existing Kickstart
-File <#using-a-provided-kickstart-file>`__" section. When you apply the
-command to a given set of build artifacts, the result is an image or set
-of images that can be directly written onto media and used on a
-particular system.
-
-.. note::
-
-   For a kickstart file reference, see the
-   ":ref:`ref-manual/kickstart:openembedded kickstart (\`\`.wks\`\`) reference`"
-   Chapter in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
-
-The ``wic`` command and the infrastructure it is based on is by
-definition incomplete. The purpose of the command is to allow the
-generation of customized images, and as such, was designed to be
-completely extensible through a plugin interface. See the "`Using the
-Wic PlugIn Interface <#wic-using-the-wic-plugin-interface>`__" section
-for information on these plugins.
-
-This section provides some background information on Wic, describes what
-you need to have in place to run the tool, provides instruction on how
-to use the Wic utility, provides information on using the Wic plugins
-interface, and provides several examples that show how to use Wic.
-
-Background
-----------
-
-This section provides some background on the Wic utility. While none of
-this information is required to use Wic, you might find it interesting.
-
--  The name "Wic" is derived from OpenEmbedded Image Creator (oeic). The
-   "oe" diphthong in "oeic" was promoted to the letter "w", because
-   "oeic" is both difficult to remember and to pronounce.
-
--  Wic is loosely based on the Meego Image Creator (``mic``) framework.
-   The Wic implementation has been heavily modified to make direct use
-   of OpenEmbedded build artifacts instead of package installation and
-   configuration, which are already incorporated within the OpenEmbedded
-   artifacts.
-
--  Wic is a completely independent standalone utility that initially
-   provides easier-to-use and more flexible replacements for an existing
-   functionality in OE-Core's
-   :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>`
-   class. The difference between Wic and those examples is that with Wic
-   the functionality of those scripts is implemented by a
-   general-purpose partitioning language, which is based on Redhat
-   kickstart syntax.
-
-Requirements
-------------
-
-In order to use the Wic utility with the OpenEmbedded Build system, your
-system needs to meet the following requirements:
-
--  The Linux distribution on your development host must support the
-   Yocto Project. See the ":ref:`detailed-supported-distros`"
-   section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual for the list of
-   distributions that support the Yocto Project.
-
--  The standard system utilities, such as ``cp``, must be installed on
-   your development host system.
-
--  You must have sourced the build environment setup script (i.e.
-   :ref:`structure-core-script`) found in the
-   :term:`Build Directory`.
-
--  You need to have the build artifacts already available, which
-   typically means that you must have already created an image using the
-   Openembedded build system (e.g. ``core-image-minimal``). While it
-   might seem redundant to generate an image in order to create an image
-   using Wic, the current version of Wic requires the artifacts in the
-   form generated by the OpenEmbedded build system.
-
--  You must build several native tools, which are built to run on the
-   build system:
-   ::
-
-      $ bitbake parted-native dosfstools-native mtools-native
-
--  Include "wic" as part of the
-   :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`
-   variable.
-
--  Include the name of the :ref:`wic kickstart file <openembedded-kickstart-wks-reference>`
-   as part of the :term:`WKS_FILE` variable
-
-Getting Help
-------------
-
-You can get general help for the ``wic`` command by entering the ``wic``
-command by itself or by entering the command with a help argument as
-follows:
-::
-
-   $ wic -h
-   $ wic --help
-   $ wic help
-
-Currently, Wic supports seven commands: ``cp``, ``create``, ``help``,
-``list``, ``ls``, ``rm``, and ``write``. You can get help for all these
-commands except "help" by using the following form:
-::
-
-   $ wic help command
-
-For example, the following command returns help for the ``write``
-command:
-::
-
-   $ wic help write
-
-Wic supports help for three topics: ``overview``, ``plugins``, and
-``kickstart``. You can get help for any topic using the following form:
-::
-
-   $ wic help topic
-
-For example, the following returns overview help for Wic:
-::
-
-   $ wic help overview
-
-One additional level of help exists for Wic. You can get help on
-individual images through the ``list`` command. You can use the ``list``
-command to return the available Wic images as follows:
-::
-
-   $ wic list images
-     genericx86                                 Create an EFI disk image for genericx86*
-     beaglebone-yocto                           Create SD card image for Beaglebone
-     edgerouter                                 Create SD card image for Edgerouter
-     qemux86-directdisk                         Create a qemu machine 'pcbios' direct disk image
-     directdisk-gpt                             Create a 'pcbios' direct disk image
-     mkefidisk                                  Create an EFI disk image
-     directdisk                                 Create a 'pcbios' direct disk image
-     systemd-bootdisk                           Create an EFI disk image with systemd-boot
-     mkhybridiso                                Create a hybrid ISO image
-     sdimage-bootpart                           Create SD card image with a boot partition
-     directdisk-multi-rootfs                    Create multi rootfs image using rootfs plugin
-     directdisk-bootloader-config               Create a 'pcbios' direct disk image with custom bootloader config
-
-Once you know the list of available
-Wic images, you can use ``help`` with the command to get help on a
-particular image. For example, the following command returns help on the
-"beaglebone-yocto" image:
-::
-
-   $ wic list beaglebone-yocto help
-
-   Creates a partitioned SD card image for Beaglebone.
-   Boot files are located in the first vfat partition.
-
-Operational Modes
------------------
-
-You can use Wic in two different modes, depending on how much control
-you need for specifying the Openembedded build artifacts that are used
-for creating the image: Raw and Cooked:
-
--  *Raw Mode:* You explicitly specify build artifacts through Wic
-   command-line arguments.
-
--  *Cooked Mode:* The current
-   :term:`MACHINE` setting and image
-   name are used to automatically locate and provide the build
-   artifacts. You just supply a kickstart file and the name of the image
-   from which to use artifacts.
-
-Regardless of the mode you use, you need to have the build artifacts
-ready and available.
-
-Raw Mode
-~~~~~~~~
-
-Running Wic in raw mode allows you to specify all the partitions through
-the ``wic`` command line. The primary use for raw mode is if you have
-built your kernel outside of the Yocto Project
-:term:`Build Directory`. In other words, you
-can point to arbitrary kernel, root filesystem locations, and so forth.
-Contrast this behavior with cooked mode where Wic looks in the Build
-Directory (e.g. ``tmp/deploy/images/``\ machine).
-
-The general form of the ``wic`` command in raw mode is:
-::
-
-   $ wic create wks_file options ...
-
-     Where:
-
-        wks_file:
-           An OpenEmbedded kickstart file.  You can provide
-           your own custom file or use a file from a set of
-           existing files as described by further options.
-
-        optional arguments:
-          -h, --help            show this help message and exit
-          -o OUTDIR, --outdir OUTDIR
-                                name of directory to create image in
-          -e IMAGE_NAME, --image-name IMAGE_NAME
-                                name of the image to use the artifacts from e.g. core-
-                                image-sato
-          -r ROOTFS_DIR, --rootfs-dir ROOTFS_DIR
-                                path to the /rootfs dir to use as the .wks rootfs
-                                source
-          -b BOOTIMG_DIR, --bootimg-dir BOOTIMG_DIR
-                                path to the dir containing the boot artifacts (e.g.
-                                /EFI or /syslinux dirs) to use as the .wks bootimg
-                                source
-          -k KERNEL_DIR, --kernel-dir KERNEL_DIR
-                                path to the dir containing the kernel to use in the
-                                .wks bootimg
-          -n NATIVE_SYSROOT, --native-sysroot NATIVE_SYSROOT
-                                path to the native sysroot containing the tools to use
-                                to build the image
-          -s, --skip-build-check
-                                skip the build check
-          -f, --build-rootfs    build rootfs
-          -c {gzip,bzip2,xz}, --compress-with {gzip,bzip2,xz}
-                                compress image with specified compressor
-          -m, --bmap            generate .bmap
-          --no-fstab-update     Do not change fstab file.
-          -v VARS_DIR, --vars VARS_DIR
-                                directory with <image>.env files that store bitbake
-                                variables
-          -D, --debug           output debug information
-
-.. note::
-
-   You do not need root privileges to run Wic. In fact, you should not
-   run as root when using the utility.
-
-Cooked Mode
-~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Running Wic in cooked mode leverages off artifacts in the Build
-Directory. In other words, you do not have to specify kernel or root
-filesystem locations as part of the command. All you need to provide is
-a kickstart file and the name of the image from which to use artifacts
-by using the "-e" option. Wic looks in the Build Directory (e.g.
-``tmp/deploy/images/``\ machine) for artifacts.
-
-The general form of the ``wic`` command using Cooked Mode is as follows:
-::
-
-   $ wic create wks_file -e IMAGE_NAME
-
-     Where:
-
-        wks_file:
-           An OpenEmbedded kickstart file.  You can provide
-           your own custom file or use a file from a set of
-           existing files provided with the Yocto Project
-           release.
-
-        required argument:
-           -e IMAGE_NAME, --image-name IMAGE_NAME
-                                name of the image to use the artifacts from e.g. core-
-                                image-sato
-
-Using an Existing Kickstart File
---------------------------------
-
-If you do not want to create your own kickstart file, you can use an
-existing file provided by the Wic installation. As shipped, kickstart
-files can be found in the :ref:`overview-manual/development-environment:yocto project source repositories` in the
-following two locations:
-::
-
-   poky/meta-yocto-bsp/wic
-   poky/scripts/lib/wic/canned-wks
-
-Use the following command to list the available kickstart files:
-::
-
-   $ wic list images
-     genericx86                                 Create an EFI disk image for genericx86*
-     beaglebone-yocto                           Create SD card image for Beaglebone
-     edgerouter                                 Create SD card image for Edgerouter
-     qemux86-directdisk                         Create a qemu machine 'pcbios' direct disk image
-     directdisk-gpt                             Create a 'pcbios' direct disk image
-     mkefidisk                                  Create an EFI disk image
-     directdisk                                 Create a 'pcbios' direct disk image
-     systemd-bootdisk                           Create an EFI disk image with systemd-boot
-     mkhybridiso                                Create a hybrid ISO image
-     sdimage-bootpart                           Create SD card image with a boot partition
-     directdisk-multi-rootfs                    Create multi rootfs image using rootfs plugin
-     directdisk-bootloader-config               Create a 'pcbios' direct disk image with custom bootloader config
-
-When you use an existing file, you
-do not have to use the ``.wks`` extension. Here is an example in Raw
-Mode that uses the ``directdisk`` file:
-::
-
-   $ wic create directdisk -r rootfs_dir -b bootimg_dir \
-         -k kernel_dir -n native_sysroot
-
-Here are the actual partition language commands used in the
-``genericx86.wks`` file to generate an image:
-::
-
-   # short-description: Create an EFI disk image for genericx86*
-   # long-description: Creates a partitioned EFI disk image for genericx86* machines
-   part /boot --source bootimg-efi --sourceparams="loader=grub-efi" --ondisk sda --label msdos --active --align 1024
-   part / --source rootfs --ondisk sda --fstype=ext4 --label platform --align 1024 --use-uuid
-   part swap --ondisk sda --size 44 --label swap1 --fstype=swap
-
-   bootloader --ptable gpt --timeout=5 --append="rootfstype=ext4 console=ttyS0,115200 console=tty0"
-
-Using the Wic Plugin Interface
-------------------------------
-
-You can extend and specialize Wic functionality by using Wic plugins.
-This section explains the Wic plugin interface.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Wic plugins consist of "source" and "imager" plugins. Imager plugins
-   are beyond the scope of this section.
-
-Source plugins provide a mechanism to customize partition content during
-the Wic image generation process. You can use source plugins to map
-values that you specify using ``--source`` commands in kickstart files
-(i.e. ``*.wks``) to a plugin implementation used to populate a given
-partition.
-
-.. note::
-
-   If you use plugins that have build-time dependencies (e.g. native
-   tools, bootloaders, and so forth) when building a Wic image, you need
-   to specify those dependencies using the :term:`WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`
-   variable.
-
-Source plugins are subclasses defined in plugin files. As shipped, the
-Yocto Project provides several plugin files. You can see the source
-plugin files that ship with the Yocto Project
-:yocto_git:`here </poky/tree/scripts/lib/wic/plugins/source>`.
-Each of these plugin files contains source plugins that are designed to
-populate a specific Wic image partition.
-
-Source plugins are subclasses of the ``SourcePlugin`` class, which is
-defined in the ``poky/scripts/lib/wic/pluginbase.py`` file. For example,
-the ``BootimgEFIPlugin`` source plugin found in the ``bootimg-efi.py``
-file is a subclass of the ``SourcePlugin`` class, which is found in the
-``pluginbase.py`` file.
-
-You can also implement source plugins in a layer outside of the Source
-Repositories (external layer). To do so, be sure that your plugin files
-are located in a directory whose path is
-``scripts/lib/wic/plugins/source/`` within your external layer. When the
-plugin files are located there, the source plugins they contain are made
-available to Wic.
-
-When the Wic implementation needs to invoke a partition-specific
-implementation, it looks for the plugin with the same name as the
-``--source`` parameter used in the kickstart file given to that
-partition. For example, if the partition is set up using the following
-command in a kickstart file:
-::
-
-   part /boot --source bootimg-pcbios --ondisk sda --label boot --active --align 1024
-
-The methods defined as class
-members of the matching source plugin (i.e. ``bootimg-pcbios``) in the
-``bootimg-pcbios.py`` plugin file are used.
-
-To be more concrete, here is the corresponding plugin definition from
-the ``bootimg-pcbios.py`` file for the previous command along with an
-example method called by the Wic implementation when it needs to prepare
-a partition using an implementation-specific function:
-::
-
-                .
-                .
-                .
-   class BootimgPcbiosPlugin(SourcePlugin):
-       """
-       Create MBR boot partition and install syslinux on it.
-       """
-
-      name = 'bootimg-pcbios'
-                .
-                .
-                .
-       @classmethod
-       def do_prepare_partition(cls, part, source_params, creator, cr_workdir,
-                                oe_builddir, bootimg_dir, kernel_dir,
-                                rootfs_dir, native_sysroot):
-           """
-           Called to do the actual content population for a partition i.e. it
-           'prepares' the partition to be incorporated into the image.
-           In this case, prepare content for legacy bios boot partition.
-           """
-                .
-                .
-                .
-
-If a
-subclass (plugin) itself does not implement a particular function, Wic
-locates and uses the default version in the superclass. It is for this
-reason that all source plugins are derived from the ``SourcePlugin``
-class.
-
-The ``SourcePlugin`` class defined in the ``pluginbase.py`` file defines
-a set of methods that source plugins can implement or override. Any
-plugins (subclass of ``SourcePlugin``) that do not implement a
-particular method inherit the implementation of the method from the
-``SourcePlugin`` class. For more information, see the ``SourcePlugin``
-class in the ``pluginbase.py`` file for details:
-
-The following list describes the methods implemented in the
-``SourcePlugin`` class:
-
--  ``do_prepare_partition()``: Called to populate a partition with
-   actual content. In other words, the method prepares the final
-   partition image that is incorporated into the disk image.
-
--  ``do_configure_partition()``: Called before
-   ``do_prepare_partition()`` to create custom configuration files for a
-   partition (e.g. syslinux or grub configuration files).
-
--  ``do_install_disk()``: Called after all partitions have been
-   prepared and assembled into a disk image. This method provides a hook
-   to allow finalization of a disk image (e.g. writing an MBR).
-
--  ``do_stage_partition()``: Special content-staging hook called
-   before ``do_prepare_partition()``. This method is normally empty.
-
-   Typically, a partition just uses the passed-in parameters (e.g. the
-   unmodified value of ``bootimg_dir``). However, in some cases, things
-   might need to be more tailored. As an example, certain files might
-   additionally need to be taken from ``bootimg_dir + /boot``. This hook
-   allows those files to be staged in a customized fashion.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      ``get_bitbake_var()`` allows you to access non-standard variables that
-      you might want to use for this behavior.
-
-You can extend the source plugin mechanism. To add more hooks, create
-more source plugin methods within ``SourcePlugin`` and the corresponding
-derived subclasses. The code that calls the plugin methods uses the
-``plugin.get_source_plugin_methods()`` function to find the method or
-methods needed by the call. Retrieval of those methods is accomplished
-by filling up a dict with keys that contain the method names of
-interest. On success, these will be filled in with the actual methods.
-See the Wic implementation for examples and details.
-
-Wic Examples
-------------
-
-This section provides several examples that show how to use the Wic
-utility. All the examples assume the list of requirements in the
-"`Requirements <#wic-requirements>`__" section have been met. The
-examples assume the previously generated image is
-``core-image-minimal``.
-
-Generate an Image using an Existing Kickstart File
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-This example runs in Cooked Mode and uses the ``mkefidisk`` kickstart
-file:
-::
-
-   $ wic create mkefidisk -e core-image-minimal
-   INFO: Building wic-tools...
-             .
-             .
-             .
-   INFO: The new image(s) can be found here:
-     ./mkefidisk-201804191017-sda.direct
-
-   The following build artifacts were used to create the image(s):
-     ROOTFS_DIR:                   /home/stephano/build/master/build/tmp-glibc/work/qemux86-oe-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/rootfs
-     BOOTIMG_DIR:                  /home/stephano/build/master/build/tmp-glibc/work/qemux86-oe-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/recipe-sysroot/usr/share
-     KERNEL_DIR:                   /home/stephano/build/master/build/tmp-glibc/deploy/images/qemux86
-     NATIVE_SYSROOT:               /home/stephano/build/master/build/tmp-glibc/work/i586-oe-linux/wic-tools/1.0-r0/recipe-sysroot-native
-
-   INFO: The image(s) were created using OE kickstart file:
-     /home/stephano/build/master/openembedded-core/scripts/lib/wic/canned-wks/mkefidisk.wks
-
-The previous example shows the easiest way to create an image by running
-in cooked mode and supplying a kickstart file and the "-e" option to
-point to the existing build artifacts. Your ``local.conf`` file needs to
-have the :term:`MACHINE` variable set
-to the machine you are using, which is "qemux86" in this example.
-
-Once the image builds, the output provides image location, artifact use,
-and kickstart file information.
-
-.. note::
-
-   You should always verify the details provided in the output to make
-   sure that the image was indeed created exactly as expected.
-
-Continuing with the example, you can now write the image from the Build
-Directory onto a USB stick, or whatever media for which you built your
-image, and boot from the media. You can write the image by using
-``bmaptool`` or ``dd``:
-::
-
-   $ oe-run-native bmaptool copy mkefidisk-201804191017-sda.direct /dev/sdX
-
-or ::
-
-   $ sudo dd if=mkefidisk-201804191017-sda.direct of=/dev/sdX
-
-.. note::
-
-   For more information on how to use the ``bmaptool``
-   to flash a device with an image, see the
-   ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:flashing images using \`\`bmaptool\`\``"
-   section.
-
-Using a Modified Kickstart File
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Because partitioned image creation is driven by the kickstart file, it
-is easy to affect image creation by changing the parameters in the file.
-This next example demonstrates that through modification of the
-``directdisk-gpt`` kickstart file.
-
-As mentioned earlier, you can use the command ``wic list images`` to
-show the list of existing kickstart files. The directory in which the
-``directdisk-gpt.wks`` file resides is
-``scripts/lib/image/canned-wks/``, which is located in the
-:term:`Source Directory` (e.g. ``poky``).
-Because available files reside in this directory, you can create and add
-your own custom files to the directory. Subsequent use of the
-``wic list images`` command would then include your kickstart files.
-
-In this example, the existing ``directdisk-gpt`` file already does most
-of what is needed. However, for the hardware in this example, the image
-will need to boot from ``sdb`` instead of ``sda``, which is what the
-``directdisk-gpt`` kickstart file uses.
-
-The example begins by making a copy of the ``directdisk-gpt.wks`` file
-in the ``scripts/lib/image/canned-wks`` directory and then by changing
-the lines that specify the target disk from which to boot.
-::
-
-   $ cp /home/stephano/poky/scripts/lib/wic/canned-wks/directdisk-gpt.wks \
-        /home/stephano/poky/scripts/lib/wic/canned-wks/directdisksdb-gpt.wks
-
-Next, the example modifies the ``directdisksdb-gpt.wks`` file and
-changes all instances of "``--ondisk sda``" to "``--ondisk sdb``". The
-example changes the following two lines and leaves the remaining lines
-untouched:
-::
-
-   part /boot --source bootimg-pcbios --ondisk sdb --label boot --active --align 1024
-   part / --source rootfs --ondisk sdb --fstype=ext4 --label platform --align 1024 --use-uuid
-
-Once the lines are changed, the
-example generates the ``directdisksdb-gpt`` image. The command points
-the process at the ``core-image-minimal`` artifacts for the Next Unit of
-Computing (nuc) :term:`MACHINE` the
-``local.conf``.
-::
-
-   $ wic create directdisksdb-gpt -e core-image-minimal
-   INFO: Building wic-tools...
-              .
-              .
-              .
-   Initialising tasks: 100% |#######################################| Time: 0:00:01
-   NOTE: Executing SetScene Tasks
-   NOTE: Executing RunQueue Tasks
-   NOTE: Tasks Summary: Attempted 1161 tasks of which 1157 didn't need to be rerun and all succeeded.
-   INFO: Creating image(s)...
-
-   INFO: The new image(s) can be found here:
-     ./directdisksdb-gpt-201710090938-sdb.direct
-
-   The following build artifacts were used to create the image(s):
-     ROOTFS_DIR:                   /home/stephano/build/master/build/tmp-glibc/work/qemux86-oe-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/rootfs
-     BOOTIMG_DIR:                  /home/stephano/build/master/build/tmp-glibc/work/qemux86-oe-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/recipe-sysroot/usr/share
-     KERNEL_DIR:                   /home/stephano/build/master/build/tmp-glibc/deploy/images/qemux86
-     NATIVE_SYSROOT:               /home/stephano/build/master/build/tmp-glibc/work/i586-oe-linux/wic-tools/1.0-r0/recipe-sysroot-native
-
-   INFO: The image(s) were created using OE kickstart file:
-     /home/stephano/poky/scripts/lib/wic/canned-wks/directdisksdb-gpt.wks
-
-Continuing with the example, you can now directly ``dd`` the image to a
-USB stick, or whatever media for which you built your image, and boot
-the resulting media:
-::
-
-   $ sudo dd if=directdisksdb-gpt-201710090938-sdb.direct of=/dev/sdb
-   140966+0 records in
-   140966+0 records out
-   72174592 bytes (72 MB, 69 MiB) copied, 78.0282 s, 925 kB/s
-   $ sudo eject /dev/sdb
-
-Using a Modified Kickstart File and Running in Raw Mode
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-This next example manually specifies each build artifact (runs in Raw
-Mode) and uses a modified kickstart file. The example also uses the
-``-o`` option to cause Wic to create the output somewhere other than the
-default output directory, which is the current directory:
-::
-
-   $ wic create /home/stephano/my_yocto/test.wks -o /home/stephano/testwic \
-        --rootfs-dir /home/stephano/build/master/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/rootfs \
-        --bootimg-dir /home/stephano/build/master/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/recipe-sysroot/usr/share \
-        --kernel-dir /home/stephano/build/master/build/tmp/deploy/images/qemux86 \
-        --native-sysroot /home/stephano/build/master/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/wic-tools/1.0-r0/recipe-sysroot-native
-
-   INFO: Creating image(s)...
-
-   INFO: The new image(s) can be found here:
-     /home/stephano/testwic/test-201710091445-sdb.direct
-
-   The following build artifacts were used to create the image(s):
-     ROOTFS_DIR:                   /home/stephano/build/master/build/tmp-glibc/work/qemux86-oe-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/rootfs
-     BOOTIMG_DIR:                  /home/stephano/build/master/build/tmp-glibc/work/qemux86-oe-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/recipe-sysroot/usr/share
-     KERNEL_DIR:                   /home/stephano/build/master/build/tmp-glibc/deploy/images/qemux86
-     NATIVE_SYSROOT:               /home/stephano/build/master/build/tmp-glibc/work/i586-oe-linux/wic-tools/1.0-r0/recipe-sysroot-native
-
-   INFO: The image(s) were created using OE kickstart file:
-     /home/stephano/my_yocto/test.wks
-
-For this example,
-:term:`MACHINE` did not have to be
-specified in the ``local.conf`` file since the artifact is manually
-specified.
-
-Using Wic to Manipulate an Image
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Wic image manipulation allows you to shorten turnaround time during
-image development. For example, you can use Wic to delete the kernel
-partition of a Wic image and then insert a newly built kernel. This
-saves you time from having to rebuild the entire image each time you
-modify the kernel.
-
-.. note::
-
-   In order to use Wic to manipulate a Wic image as in this example,
-   your development machine must have the ``mtools`` package installed.
-
-The following example examines the contents of the Wic image, deletes
-the existing kernel, and then inserts a new kernel:
-
-1. *List the Partitions:* Use the ``wic ls`` command to list all the
-   partitions in the Wic image:
-   ::
-
-      $ wic ls tmp/deploy/images/qemux86/core-image-minimal-qemux86.wic
-      Num     Start        End          Size      Fstype
-       1       1048576     25041919     23993344  fat16
-       2      25165824     72157183     46991360  ext4
-
-   The previous output shows two partitions in the
-   ``core-image-minimal-qemux86.wic`` image.
-
-2. *Examine a Particular Partition:* Use the ``wic ls`` command again
-   but in a different form to examine a particular partition.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      You can get command usage on any Wic command using the following
-      form:
-      ::
-
-              $ wic help command
-
-
-      For example, the following command shows you the various ways to
-      use the
-      wic ls
-      command:
-      ::
-
-              $ wic help ls
-
-
-   The following command shows what is in Partition one:
-   ::
-
-        $ wic ls tmp/deploy/images/qemux86/core-image-minimal-qemux86.wic:1
-        Volume in drive : is boot
-         Volume Serial Number is E894-1809
-        Directory for ::/
-
-        libcom32 c32    186500 2017-10-09  16:06
-        libutil  c32     24148 2017-10-09  16:06
-        syslinux cfg       220 2017-10-09  16:06
-        vesamenu c32     27104 2017-10-09  16:06
-        vmlinuz        6904608 2017-10-09  16:06
-                5 files           7 142 580 bytes
-                                 16 582 656 bytes free
-
-   The previous output shows five files, with the
-   ``vmlinuz`` being the kernel.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      If you see the following error, you need to update or create a
-      ``~/.mtoolsrc`` file and be sure to have the line "mtools_skip_check=1"
-      in the file. Then, run the Wic command again:
-      ::
-
-              ERROR: _exec_cmd: /usr/bin/mdir -i /tmp/wic-parttfokuwra ::/ returned '1' instead of 0
-               output: Total number of sectors (47824) not a multiple of sectors per track (32)!
-               Add mtools_skip_check=1 to your .mtoolsrc file to skip this test
-
-
-3. *Remove the Old Kernel:* Use the ``wic rm`` command to remove the
-   ``vmlinuz`` file (kernel):
-   ::
-
-      $ wic rm tmp/deploy/images/qemux86/core-image-minimal-qemux86.wic:1/vmlinuz
-
-4. *Add In the New Kernel:* Use the ``wic cp`` command to add the
-   updated kernel to the Wic image. Depending on how you built your
-   kernel, it could be in different places. If you used ``devtool`` and
-   an SDK to build your kernel, it resides in the ``tmp/work`` directory
-   of the extensible SDK. If you used ``make`` to build the kernel, the
-   kernel will be in the ``workspace/sources`` area.
-
-   The following example assumes ``devtool`` was used to build the
-   kernel:
-   ::
-
-      cp ~/poky_sdk/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/linux-yocto/4.12.12+git999-r0/linux-yocto-4.12.12+git999/arch/x86/boot/bzImage \
-         ~/poky/build/tmp/deploy/images/qemux86/core-image-minimal-qemux86.wic:1/vmlinuz
-
-   Once the new kernel is added back into the image, you can use the
-   ``dd`` command or :ref:`bmaptool
-   <dev-manual/common-tasks:flashing images using \`\`bmaptool\`\`>`
-   to flash your wic image onto an SD card or USB stick and test your
-   target.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      Using ``bmaptool`` is generally 10 to 20 times faster than using ``dd``.
-
-Flashing Images Using ``bmaptool``
-==================================
-
-A fast and easy way to flash an image to a bootable device is to use
-Bmaptool, which is integrated into the OpenEmbedded build system.
-Bmaptool is a generic tool that creates a file's block map (bmap) and
-then uses that map to copy the file. As compared to traditional tools
-such as dd or cp, Bmaptool can copy (or flash) large files like raw
-system image files much faster.
-
-.. note::
-
-   -  If you are using Ubuntu or Debian distributions, you can install
-      the ``bmap-tools`` package using the following command and then
-      use the tool without specifying ``PATH`` even from the root
-      account:
-      ::
-
-         $ sudo apt-get install bmap-tools
-
-   -  If you are unable to install the ``bmap-tools`` package, you will
-      need to build Bmaptool before using it. Use the following command:
-      ::
-
-         $ bitbake bmap-tools-native
-
-Following, is an example that shows how to flash a Wic image. Realize
-that while this example uses a Wic image, you can use Bmaptool to flash
-any type of image. Use these steps to flash an image using Bmaptool:
-
-1. *Update your local.conf File:* You need to have the following set
-   in your ``local.conf`` file before building your image:
-   ::
-
-      IMAGE_FSTYPES += "wic wic.bmap"
-
-2. *Get Your Image:* Either have your image ready (pre-built with the
-   :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`
-   setting previously mentioned) or take the step to build the image:
-   ::
-
-      $ bitbake image
-
-3. *Flash the Device:* Flash the device with the image by using Bmaptool
-   depending on your particular setup. The following commands assume the
-   image resides in the Build Directory's ``deploy/images/`` area:
-
-   -  If you have write access to the media, use this command form:
-      ::
-
-         $ oe-run-native bmap-tools-native bmaptool copy build-directory/tmp/deploy/images/machine/image.wic /dev/sdX
-
-   -  If you do not have write access to the media, set your permissions
-      first and then use the same command form:
-      ::
-
-         $ sudo chmod 666 /dev/sdX
-         $ oe-run-native bmap-tools-native bmaptool copy build-directory/tmp/deploy/images/machine/image.wic /dev/sdX
-
-For help on the ``bmaptool`` command, use the following command:
-::
-
-   $ bmaptool --help
-
-Making Images More Secure
-=========================
-
-Security is of increasing concern for embedded devices. Consider the
-issues and problems discussed in just this sampling of work found across
-the Internet:
-
--  *"*\ `Security Risks of Embedded
-   Systems <https://www.schneier.com/blog/archives/2014/01/security_risks_9.html>`__\ *"*
-   by Bruce Schneier
-
--  *"*\ `Internet Census
-   2012 <http://census2012.sourceforge.net/paper.html>`__\ *"* by Carna
-   Botnet
-
--  *"*\ `Security Issues for Embedded
-   Devices <https://elinux.org/images/6/6f/Security-issues.pdf>`__\ *"*
-   by Jake Edge
-
-When securing your image is of concern, there are steps, tools, and
-variables that you can consider to help you reach the security goals you
-need for your particular device. Not all situations are identical when
-it comes to making an image secure. Consequently, this section provides
-some guidance and suggestions for consideration when you want to make
-your image more secure.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Because the security requirements and risks are different for every
-   type of device, this section cannot provide a complete reference on
-   securing your custom OS. It is strongly recommended that you also
-   consult other sources of information on embedded Linux system
-   hardening and on security.
-
-General Considerations
-----------------------
-
-General considerations exist that help you create more secure images.
-You should consider the following suggestions to help make your device
-more secure:
-
--  Scan additional code you are adding to the system (e.g. application
-   code) by using static analysis tools. Look for buffer overflows and
-   other potential security problems.
-
--  Pay particular attention to the security for any web-based
-   administration interface.
-
-   Web interfaces typically need to perform administrative functions and
-   tend to need to run with elevated privileges. Thus, the consequences
-   resulting from the interface's security becoming compromised can be
-   serious. Look for common web vulnerabilities such as
-   cross-site-scripting (XSS), unvalidated inputs, and so forth.
-
-   As with system passwords, the default credentials for accessing a
-   web-based interface should not be the same across all devices. This
-   is particularly true if the interface is enabled by default as it can
-   be assumed that many end-users will not change the credentials.
-
--  Ensure you can update the software on the device to mitigate
-   vulnerabilities discovered in the future. This consideration
-   especially applies when your device is network-enabled.
-
--  Ensure you remove or disable debugging functionality before producing
-   the final image. For information on how to do this, see the
-   "`Considerations Specific to the OpenEmbedded Build
-   System <#considerations-specific-to-the-openembedded-build-system>`__"
-   section.
-
--  Ensure you have no network services listening that are not needed.
-
--  Remove any software from the image that is not needed.
-
--  Enable hardware support for secure boot functionality when your
-   device supports this functionality.
-
-Security Flags
---------------
-
-The Yocto Project has security flags that you can enable that help make
-your build output more secure. The security flags are in the
-``meta/conf/distro/include/security_flags.inc`` file in your
-:term:`Source Directory` (e.g. ``poky``).
-
-.. note::
-
-   Depending on the recipe, certain security flags are enabled and
-   disabled by default.
-
-Use the following line in your ``local.conf`` file or in your custom
-distribution configuration file to enable the security compiler and
-linker flags for your build:
-::
-
-   require conf/distro/include/security_flags.inc
-
-Considerations Specific to the OpenEmbedded Build System
---------------------------------------------------------
-
-You can take some steps that are specific to the OpenEmbedded build
-system to make your images more secure:
-
--  Ensure "debug-tweaks" is not one of your selected
-   :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`.
-   When creating a new project, the default is to provide you with an
-   initial ``local.conf`` file that enables this feature using the
-   :term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES`
-   variable with the line:
-   ::
-
-      EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES = "debug-tweaks"
-
-   To disable that feature, simply comment out that line in your
-   ``local.conf`` file, or make sure ``IMAGE_FEATURES`` does not contain
-   "debug-tweaks" before producing your final image. Among other things,
-   leaving this in place sets the root password as blank, which makes
-   logging in for debugging or inspection easy during development but
-   also means anyone can easily log in during production.
-
--  It is possible to set a root password for the image and also to set
-   passwords for any extra users you might add (e.g. administrative or
-   service type users). When you set up passwords for multiple images or
-   users, you should not duplicate passwords.
-
-   To set up passwords, use the
-   :ref:`extrausers <ref-classes-extrausers>`
-   class, which is the preferred method. For an example on how to set up
-   both root and user passwords, see the
-   ":ref:`extrausers.bbclass <ref-classes-extrausers>`"
-   section.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      When adding extra user accounts or setting a root password, be
-      cautious about setting the same password on every device. If you
-      do this, and the password you have set is exposed, then every
-      device is now potentially compromised. If you need this access but
-      want to ensure security, consider setting a different, random
-      password for each device. Typically, you do this as a separate
-      step after you deploy the image onto the device.
-
--  Consider enabling a Mandatory Access Control (MAC) framework such as
-   SMACK or SELinux and tuning it appropriately for your device's usage.
-   You can find more information in the
-   :yocto_git:`meta-selinux </meta-selinux/>` layer.
-
-Tools for Hardening Your Image
-------------------------------
-
-The Yocto Project provides tools for making your image more secure. You
-can find these tools in the ``meta-security`` layer of the
-:yocto_git:`Yocto Project Source Repositories <>`.
-
-Creating Your Own Distribution
-==============================
-
-When you build an image using the Yocto Project and do not alter any
-distribution :term:`Metadata`, you are
-creating a Poky distribution. If you wish to gain more control over
-package alternative selections, compile-time options, and other
-low-level configurations, you can create your own distribution.
-
-To create your own distribution, the basic steps consist of creating
-your own distribution layer, creating your own distribution
-configuration file, and then adding any needed code and Metadata to the
-layer. The following steps provide some more detail:
-
--  *Create a layer for your new distro:* Create your distribution layer
-   so that you can keep your Metadata and code for the distribution
-   separate. It is strongly recommended that you create and use your own
-   layer for configuration and code. Using your own layer as compared to
-   just placing configurations in a ``local.conf`` configuration file
-   makes it easier to reproduce the same build configuration when using
-   multiple build machines. See the
-   ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating a general layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script`"
-   section for information on how to quickly set up a layer.
-
--  *Create the distribution configuration file:* The distribution
-   configuration file needs to be created in the ``conf/distro``
-   directory of your layer. You need to name it using your distribution
-   name (e.g. ``mydistro.conf``).
-
-   .. note::
-
-      The :term:`DISTRO` variable in your ``local.conf`` file determines the
-      name of your distribution.
-
-   You can split out parts of your configuration file into include files
-   and then "require" them from within your distribution configuration
-   file. Be sure to place the include files in the
-   ``conf/distro/include`` directory of your layer. A common example
-   usage of include files would be to separate out the selection of
-   desired version and revisions for individual recipes.
-
-   Your configuration file needs to set the following required
-   variables:
-
-   - :term:`DISTRO_NAME`
-
-   - :term:`DISTRO_VERSION`
-
-   These following variables are optional and you typically set them
-   from the distribution configuration file:
-
-   - :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`
-
-   - :term:`DISTRO_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`
-
-   - :term:`DISTRO_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`
-
-   - :term:`TCLIBC`
-
-   .. tip::
-
-      If you want to base your distribution configuration file on the
-      very basic configuration from OE-Core, you can use
-      ``conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` as a reference and just include
-      variables that differ as compared to ``defaultsetup.conf``.
-      Alternatively, you can create a distribution configuration file
-      from scratch using the ``defaultsetup.conf`` file or configuration files
-      from other distributions such as Poky or Angstrom as references.
-
--  *Provide miscellaneous variables:* Be sure to define any other
-   variables for which you want to create a default or enforce as part
-   of the distribution configuration. You can include nearly any
-   variable from the ``local.conf`` file. The variables you use are not
-   limited to the list in the previous bulleted item.
-
--  *Point to Your distribution configuration file:* In your
-   ``local.conf`` file in the :term:`Build Directory`,
-   set your
-   :term:`DISTRO` variable to point to
-   your distribution's configuration file. For example, if your
-   distribution's configuration file is named ``mydistro.conf``, then
-   you point to it as follows:
-   ::
-
-      DISTRO = "mydistro"
-
--  *Add more to the layer if necessary:* Use your layer to hold other
-   information needed for the distribution:
-
-   -  Add recipes for installing distro-specific configuration files
-      that are not already installed by another recipe. If you have
-      distro-specific configuration files that are included by an
-      existing recipe, you should add an append file (``.bbappend``) for
-      those. For general information and recommendations on how to add
-      recipes to your layer, see the "`Creating Your Own
-      Layer <#creating-your-own-layer>`__" and "`Following Best
-      Practices When Creating
-      Layers <#best-practices-to-follow-when-creating-layers>`__"
-      sections.
-
-   -  Add any image recipes that are specific to your distribution.
-
-   -  Add a ``psplash`` append file for a branded splash screen. For
-      information on append files, see the "`Using .bbappend Files in
-      Your Layer <#using-bbappend-files>`__" section.
-
-   -  Add any other append files to make custom changes that are
-      specific to individual recipes.
-
-Creating a Custom Template Configuration Directory
-==================================================
-
-If you are producing your own customized version of the build system for
-use by other users, you might want to customize the message shown by the
-setup script or you might want to change the template configuration
-files (i.e. ``local.conf`` and ``bblayers.conf``) that are created in a
-new build directory.
-
-The OpenEmbedded build system uses the environment variable
-``TEMPLATECONF`` to locate the directory from which it gathers
-configuration information that ultimately ends up in the
-:term:`Build Directory` ``conf`` directory.
-By default, ``TEMPLATECONF`` is set as follows in the ``poky``
-repository:
-::
-
-   TEMPLATECONF=${TEMPLATECONF:-meta-poky/conf}
-
-This is the
-directory used by the build system to find templates from which to build
-some key configuration files. If you look at this directory, you will
-see the ``bblayers.conf.sample``, ``local.conf.sample``, and
-``conf-notes.txt`` files. The build system uses these files to form the
-respective ``bblayers.conf`` file, ``local.conf`` file, and display the
-list of BitBake targets when running the setup script.
-
-To override these default configuration files with configurations you
-want used within every new Build Directory, simply set the
-``TEMPLATECONF`` variable to your directory. The ``TEMPLATECONF``
-variable is set in the ``.templateconf`` file, which is in the top-level
-:term:`Source Directory` folder
-(e.g. ``poky``). Edit the ``.templateconf`` so that it can locate your
-directory.
-
-Best practices dictate that you should keep your template configuration
-directory in your custom distribution layer. For example, suppose you
-have a layer named ``meta-mylayer`` located in your home directory and
-you want your template configuration directory named ``myconf``.
-Changing the ``.templateconf`` as follows causes the OpenEmbedded build
-system to look in your directory and base its configuration files on the
-``*.sample`` configuration files it finds. The final configuration files
-(i.e. ``local.conf`` and ``bblayers.conf`` ultimately still end up in
-your Build Directory, but they are based on your ``*.sample`` files.
-::
-
-   TEMPLATECONF=${TEMPLATECONF:-meta-mylayer/myconf}
-
-Aside from the ``*.sample`` configuration files, the ``conf-notes.txt``
-also resides in the default ``meta-poky/conf`` directory. The script
-that sets up the build environment (i.e.
-:ref:`structure-core-script`) uses this file to
-display BitBake targets as part of the script output. Customizing this
-``conf-notes.txt`` file is a good way to make sure your list of custom
-targets appears as part of the script's output.
-
-Here is the default list of targets displayed as a result of running
-either of the setup scripts:
-::
-
-   You can now run 'bitbake <target>'
-
-   Common targets are:
-       core-image-minimal
-       core-image-sato
-       meta-toolchain
-       meta-ide-support
-
-Changing the listed common targets is as easy as editing your version of
-``conf-notes.txt`` in your custom template configuration directory and
-making sure you have ``TEMPLATECONF`` set to your directory.
-
-Conserving Disk Space During Builds
-===================================
-
-To help conserve disk space during builds, you can add the following
-statement to your project's ``local.conf`` configuration file found in
-the :term:`Build Directory`:
-::
-
-   INHERIT += "rm_work"
-
-Adding this statement deletes the work directory used for
-building a recipe once the recipe is built. For more information on
-"rm_work", see the
-:ref:`rm_work <ref-classes-rm-work>` class in the
-Yocto Project Reference Manual.
-
-Working with Packages
-=====================
-
-This section describes a few tasks that involve packages:
-
--  `Excluding packages from an
-   image <#excluding-packages-from-an-image>`__
-
--  `Incrementing a binary package
-   version <#incrementing-a-binary-package-version>`__
-
--  `Handling optional module
-   packaging <#handling-optional-module-packaging>`__
-
--  `Using runtime package
-   management <#using-runtime-package-management>`__
-
--  `Generating and using signed
-   packages <#generating-and-using-signed-packages>`__
-
--  `Setting up and running package test
-   (ptest) <#testing-packages-with-ptest>`__
-
--  `Creating node package manager (NPM)
-   packages <#creating-node-package-manager-npm-packages>`__
-
--  `Adding custom metadata to
-   packages <#adding-custom-metadata-to-packages>`__
-
-Excluding Packages from an Image
---------------------------------
-
-You might find it necessary to prevent specific packages from being
-installed into an image. If so, you can use several variables to direct
-the build system to essentially ignore installing recommended packages
-or to not install a package at all.
-
-The following list introduces variables you can use to prevent packages
-from being installed into your image. Each of these variables only works
-with IPK and RPM package types. Support for Debian packages does not
-exist. Also, you can use these variables from your ``local.conf`` file
-or attach them to a specific image recipe by using a recipe name
-override. For more detail on the variables, see the descriptions in the
-Yocto Project Reference Manual's glossary chapter.
-
--  :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS`:
-   Use this variable to specify "recommended-only" packages that you do
-   not want installed.
-
--  :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS`:
-   Use this variable to prevent all "recommended-only" packages from
-   being installed.
-
--  :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE`:
-   Use this variable to prevent specific packages from being installed
-   regardless of whether they are "recommended-only" or not. You need to
-   realize that the build process could fail with an error when you
-   prevent the installation of a package whose presence is required by
-   an installed package.
-
-Incrementing a Package Version
-------------------------------
-
-This section provides some background on how binary package versioning
-is accomplished and presents some of the services, variables, and
-terminology involved.
-
-In order to understand binary package versioning, you need to consider
-the following:
-
--  Binary Package: The binary package that is eventually built and
-   installed into an image.
-
--  Binary Package Version: The binary package version is composed of two
-   components - a version and a revision.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      Technically, a third component, the "epoch" (i.e. :term:`PE`) is involved
-      but this discussion for the most part ignores ``PE``.
-
-   The version and revision are taken from the
-   :term:`PV` and
-   :term:`PR` variables, respectively.
-
--  ``PV``: The recipe version. ``PV`` represents the version of the
-   software being packaged. Do not confuse ``PV`` with the binary
-   package version.
-
--  ``PR``: The recipe revision.
-
--  :term:`SRCPV`: The OpenEmbedded
-   build system uses this string to help define the value of ``PV`` when
-   the source code revision needs to be included in it.
-
--  :yocto_wiki:`PR Service </PR_Service>`: A
-   network-based service that helps automate keeping package feeds
-   compatible with existing package manager applications such as RPM,
-   APT, and OPKG.
-
-Whenever the binary package content changes, the binary package version
-must change. Changing the binary package version is accomplished by
-changing or "bumping" the ``PR`` and/or ``PV`` values. Increasing these
-values occurs one of two ways:
-
--  Automatically using a Package Revision Service (PR Service).
-
--  Manually incrementing the ``PR`` and/or ``PV`` variables.
-
-Given a primary challenge of any build system and its users is how to
-maintain a package feed that is compatible with existing package manager
-applications such as RPM, APT, and OPKG, using an automated system is
-much preferred over a manual system. In either system, the main
-requirement is that binary package version numbering increases in a
-linear fashion and that a number of version components exist that
-support that linear progression. For information on how to ensure
-package revisioning remains linear, see the "`Automatically Incrementing
-a Binary Package Revision
-Number <#automatically-incrementing-a-binary-package-revision-number>`__"
-section.
-
-The following three sections provide related information on the PR
-Service, the manual method for "bumping" ``PR`` and/or ``PV``, and on
-how to ensure binary package revisioning remains linear.
-
-Working With a PR Service
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-As mentioned, attempting to maintain revision numbers in the
-:term:`Metadata` is error prone, inaccurate,
-and causes problems for people submitting recipes. Conversely, the PR
-Service automatically generates increasing numbers, particularly the
-revision field, which removes the human element.
-
-.. note::
-
-   For additional information on using a PR Service, you can see the
-   :yocto_wiki:`PR Service </PR_Service>` wiki page.
-
-The Yocto Project uses variables in order of decreasing priority to
-facilitate revision numbering (i.e.
-:term:`PE`,
-:term:`PV`, and
-:term:`PR` for epoch, version, and
-revision, respectively). The values are highly dependent on the policies
-and procedures of a given distribution and package feed.
-
-Because the OpenEmbedded build system uses
-":ref:`signatures <overview-manual/concepts:checksums (signatures)>`", which are
-unique to a given build, the build system knows when to rebuild
-packages. All the inputs into a given task are represented by a
-signature, which can trigger a rebuild when different. Thus, the build
-system itself does not rely on the ``PR``, ``PV``, and ``PE`` numbers to
-trigger a rebuild. The signatures, however, can be used to generate
-these values.
-
-The PR Service works with both ``OEBasic`` and ``OEBasicHash``
-generators. The value of ``PR`` bumps when the checksum changes and the
-different generator mechanisms change signatures under different
-circumstances.
-
-As implemented, the build system includes values from the PR Service
-into the ``PR`` field as an addition using the form "``.x``" so ``r0``
-becomes ``r0.1``, ``r0.2`` and so forth. This scheme allows existing
-``PR`` values to be used for whatever reasons, which include manual
-``PR`` bumps, should it be necessary.
-
-By default, the PR Service is not enabled or running. Thus, the packages
-generated are just "self consistent". The build system adds and removes
-packages and there are no guarantees about upgrade paths but images will
-be consistent and correct with the latest changes.
-
-The simplest form for a PR Service is for it to exist for a single host
-development system that builds the package feed (building system). For
-this scenario, you can enable a local PR Service by setting
-:term:`PRSERV_HOST` in your
-``local.conf`` file in the :term:`Build Directory`:
-::
-
-   PRSERV_HOST = "localhost:0"
-
-Once the service is started, packages will automatically
-get increasing ``PR`` values and BitBake takes care of starting and
-stopping the server.
-
-If you have a more complex setup where multiple host development systems
-work against a common, shared package feed, you have a single PR Service
-running and it is connected to each building system. For this scenario,
-you need to start the PR Service using the ``bitbake-prserv`` command:
-::
-
-   bitbake-prserv --host ip --port port --start
-
-In addition to
-hand-starting the service, you need to update the ``local.conf`` file of
-each building system as described earlier so each system points to the
-server and port.
-
-It is also recommended you use build history, which adds some sanity
-checks to binary package versions, in conjunction with the server that
-is running the PR Service. To enable build history, add the following to
-each building system's ``local.conf`` file:
-::
-
-   # It is recommended to activate "buildhistory" for testing the PR service
-   INHERIT += "buildhistory"
-   BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT = "1"
-
-For information on build
-history, see the "`Maintaining Build Output
-Quality <#maintaining-build-output-quality>`__" section.
-
-.. note::
-
-   The OpenEmbedded build system does not maintain ``PR`` information as
-   part of the shared state (sstate) packages. If you maintain an sstate
-   feed, its expected that either all your building systems that
-   contribute to the sstate feed use a shared PR Service, or you do not
-   run a PR Service on any of your building systems. Having some systems
-   use a PR Service while others do not leads to obvious problems.
-
-   For more information on shared state, see the
-   ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:shared state cache`"
-   section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
-
-Manually Bumping PR
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The alternative to setting up a PR Service is to manually "bump" the
-:term:`PR` variable.
-
-If a committed change results in changing the package output, then the
-value of the PR variable needs to be increased (or "bumped") as part of
-that commit. For new recipes you should add the ``PR`` variable and set
-its initial value equal to "r0", which is the default. Even though the
-default value is "r0", the practice of adding it to a new recipe makes
-it harder to forget to bump the variable when you make changes to the
-recipe in future.
-
-If you are sharing a common ``.inc`` file with multiple recipes, you can
-also use the ``INC_PR`` variable to ensure that the recipes sharing the
-``.inc`` file are rebuilt when the ``.inc`` file itself is changed. The
-``.inc`` file must set ``INC_PR`` (initially to "r0"), and all recipes
-referring to it should set ``PR`` to "${INC_PR}.0" initially,
-incrementing the last number when the recipe is changed. If the ``.inc``
-file is changed then its ``INC_PR`` should be incremented.
-
-When upgrading the version of a binary package, assuming the ``PV``
-changes, the ``PR`` variable should be reset to "r0" (or "${INC_PR}.0"
-if you are using ``INC_PR``).
-
-Usually, version increases occur only to binary packages. However, if
-for some reason ``PV`` changes but does not increase, you can increase
-the ``PE`` variable (Package Epoch). The ``PE`` variable defaults to
-"0".
-
-Binary package version numbering strives to follow the `Debian Version
-Field Policy
-Guidelines <https://www.debian.org/doc/debian-policy/ch-controlfields.html>`__.
-These guidelines define how versions are compared and what "increasing"
-a version means.
-
-Automatically Incrementing a Package Version Number
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-When fetching a repository, BitBake uses the
-:term:`SRCREV` variable to determine
-the specific source code revision from which to build. You set the
-``SRCREV`` variable to
-:term:`AUTOREV` to cause the
-OpenEmbedded build system to automatically use the latest revision of
-the software:
-::
-
-   SRCREV = "${AUTOREV}"
-
-Furthermore, you need to reference ``SRCPV`` in ``PV`` in order to
-automatically update the version whenever the revision of the source
-code changes. Here is an example:
-::
-
-   PV = "1.0+git${SRCPV}"
-
-The OpenEmbedded build system substitutes ``SRCPV`` with the following:
-
-.. code-block:: none
-
-   AUTOINC+source_code_revision
-
-The build system replaces the ``AUTOINC``
-with a number. The number used depends on the state of the PR Service:
-
--  If PR Service is enabled, the build system increments the number,
-   which is similar to the behavior of
-   :term:`PR`. This behavior results in
-   linearly increasing package versions, which is desirable. Here is an
-   example:
-
-   .. code-block:: none
-
-      hello-world-git_0.0+git0+b6558dd387-r0.0_armv7a-neon.ipk
-      hello-world-git_0.0+git1+dd2f5c3565-r0.0_armv7a-neon.ipk
-
--  If PR Service is not enabled, the build system replaces the
-   ``AUTOINC`` placeholder with zero (i.e. "0"). This results in
-   changing the package version since the source revision is included.
-   However, package versions are not increased linearly. Here is an
-   example:
-
-   .. code-block:: none
-
-      hello-world-git_0.0+git0+b6558dd387-r0.0_armv7a-neon.ipk
-      hello-world-git_0.0+git0+dd2f5c3565-r0.0_armv7a-neon.ipk
-
-In summary, the OpenEmbedded build system does not track the history of
-binary package versions for this purpose. ``AUTOINC``, in this case, is
-comparable to ``PR``. If PR server is not enabled, ``AUTOINC`` in the
-package version is simply replaced by "0". If PR server is enabled, the
-build system keeps track of the package versions and bumps the number
-when the package revision changes.
-
-Handling Optional Module Packaging
-----------------------------------
-
-Many pieces of software split functionality into optional modules (or
-plugins) and the plugins that are built might depend on configuration
-options. To avoid having to duplicate the logic that determines what
-modules are available in your recipe or to avoid having to package each
-module by hand, the OpenEmbedded build system provides functionality to
-handle module packaging dynamically.
-
-To handle optional module packaging, you need to do two things:
-
--  Ensure the module packaging is actually done.
-
--  Ensure that any dependencies on optional modules from other recipes
-   are satisfied by your recipe.
-
-Making Sure the Packaging is Done
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-To ensure the module packaging actually gets done, you use the
-``do_split_packages`` function within the ``populate_packages`` Python
-function in your recipe. The ``do_split_packages`` function searches for
-a pattern of files or directories under a specified path and creates a
-package for each one it finds by appending to the
-:term:`PACKAGES` variable and
-setting the appropriate values for ``FILES_packagename``,
-``RDEPENDS_packagename``, ``DESCRIPTION_packagename``, and so forth.
-Here is an example from the ``lighttpd`` recipe:
-::
-
-   python populate_packages_prepend () {
-       lighttpd_libdir = d.expand('${libdir}')
-       do_split_packages(d, lighttpd_libdir, '^mod_(.*).so$',
-                        'lighttpd-module-%s', 'Lighttpd module for %s',
-                         extra_depends='')
-   }
-
-The previous example specifies a number of things in the call to
-``do_split_packages``.
-
--  A directory within the files installed by your recipe through
-   ``do_install`` in which to search.
-
--  A regular expression used to match module files in that directory. In
-   the example, note the parentheses () that mark the part of the
-   expression from which the module name should be derived.
-
--  A pattern to use for the package names.
-
--  A description for each package.
-
--  An empty string for ``extra_depends``, which disables the default
-   dependency on the main ``lighttpd`` package. Thus, if a file in
-   ``${libdir}`` called ``mod_alias.so`` is found, a package called
-   ``lighttpd-module-alias`` is created for it and the
-   :term:`DESCRIPTION` is set to
-   "Lighttpd module for alias".
-
-Often, packaging modules is as simple as the previous example. However,
-more advanced options exist that you can use within
-``do_split_packages`` to modify its behavior. And, if you need to, you
-can add more logic by specifying a hook function that is called for each
-package. It is also perfectly acceptable to call ``do_split_packages``
-multiple times if you have more than one set of modules to package.
-
-For more examples that show how to use ``do_split_packages``, see the
-``connman.inc`` file in the ``meta/recipes-connectivity/connman/``
-directory of the ``poky`` :ref:`source repository <overview-manual/development-environment:yocto project source repositories>`. You can
-also find examples in ``meta/classes/kernel.bbclass``.
-
-Following is a reference that shows ``do_split_packages`` mandatory and
-optional arguments:
-::
-
-   Mandatory arguments
-
-   root
-      The path in which to search
-   file_regex
-      Regular expression to match searched files.
-      Use parentheses () to mark the part of this
-      expression that should be used to derive the
-      module name (to be substituted where %s is
-      used in other function arguments as noted below)
-   output_pattern
-      Pattern to use for the package names. Must
-      include %s.
-   description
-      Description to set for each package. Must
-      include %s.
-
-   Optional arguments
-
-   postinst
-      Postinstall script to use for all packages
-      (as a string)
-   recursive
-      True to perform a recursive search - default
-      False
-   hook
-      A hook function to be called for every match.
-      The function will be called with the following
-      arguments (in the order listed):
-
-      f
-         Full path to the file/directory match
-      pkg
-         The package name
-      file_regex
-         As above
-      output_pattern
-         As above
-      modulename
-         The module name derived using file_regex
-   extra_depends
-      Extra runtime dependencies (RDEPENDS) to be
-      set for all packages. The default value of None
-      causes a dependency on the main package
-      (${PN}) - if you do not want this, pass empty
-      string '' for this parameter.
-   aux_files_pattern
-      Extra item(s) to be added to FILES for each
-      package. Can be a single string item or a list
-      of strings for multiple items. Must include %s.
-   postrm
-      postrm script to use for all packages (as a
-      string)
-   allow_dirs
-      True to allow directories to be matched -
-      default False
-   prepend
-      If True, prepend created packages to PACKAGES
-      instead of the default False which appends them
-   match_path
-      match file_regex on the whole relative path to
-      the root rather than just the file name
-   aux_files_pattern_verbatim
-      Extra item(s) to be added to FILES for each
-      package, using the actual derived module name
-      rather than converting it to something legal
-      for a package name. Can be a single string item
-      or a list of strings for multiple items. Must
-      include %s.
-   allow_links
-      True to allow symlinks to be matched - default
-      False
-   summary
-      Summary to set for each package. Must include %s;
-      defaults to description if not set.
-
-
-
-Satisfying Dependencies
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The second part for handling optional module packaging is to ensure that
-any dependencies on optional modules from other recipes are satisfied by
-your recipe. You can be sure these dependencies are satisfied by using
-the :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`
-variable. Here is an example that continues with the ``lighttpd`` recipe
-shown earlier:
-::
-
-   PACKAGES_DYNAMIC = "lighttpd-module-.*"
-
-The name
-specified in the regular expression can of course be anything. In this
-example, it is ``lighttpd-module-`` and is specified as the prefix to
-ensure that any :term:`RDEPENDS` and
-:term:`RRECOMMENDS` on a package
-name starting with the prefix are satisfied during build time. If you
-are using ``do_split_packages`` as described in the previous section,
-the value you put in ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`` should correspond to the name
-pattern specified in the call to ``do_split_packages``.
-
-Using Runtime Package Management
---------------------------------
-
-During a build, BitBake always transforms a recipe into one or more
-packages. For example, BitBake takes the ``bash`` recipe and produces a
-number of packages (e.g. ``bash``, ``bash-bashbug``,
-``bash-completion``, ``bash-completion-dbg``, ``bash-completion-dev``,
-``bash-completion-extra``, ``bash-dbg``, and so forth). Not all
-generated packages are included in an image.
-
-In several situations, you might need to update, add, remove, or query
-the packages on a target device at runtime (i.e. without having to
-generate a new image). Examples of such situations include:
-
--  You want to provide in-the-field updates to deployed devices (e.g.
-   security updates).
-
--  You want to have a fast turn-around development cycle for one or more
-   applications that run on your device.
-
--  You want to temporarily install the "debug" packages of various
-   applications on your device so that debugging can be greatly improved
-   by allowing access to symbols and source debugging.
-
--  You want to deploy a more minimal package selection of your device
-   but allow in-the-field updates to add a larger selection for
-   customization.
-
-In all these situations, you have something similar to a more
-traditional Linux distribution in that in-field devices are able to
-receive pre-compiled packages from a server for installation or update.
-Being able to install these packages on a running, in-field device is
-what is termed "runtime package management".
-
-In order to use runtime package management, you need a host or server
-machine that serves up the pre-compiled packages plus the required
-metadata. You also need package manipulation tools on the target. The
-build machine is a likely candidate to act as the server. However, that
-machine does not necessarily have to be the package server. The build
-machine could push its artifacts to another machine that acts as the
-server (e.g. Internet-facing). In fact, doing so is advantageous for a
-production environment as getting the packages away from the development
-system's build directory prevents accidental overwrites.
-
-A simple build that targets just one device produces more than one
-package database. In other words, the packages produced by a build are
-separated out into a couple of different package groupings based on
-criteria such as the target's CPU architecture, the target board, or the
-C library used on the target. For example, a build targeting the
-``qemux86`` device produces the following three package databases:
-``noarch``, ``i586``, and ``qemux86``. If you wanted your ``qemux86``
-device to be aware of all the packages that were available to it, you
-would need to point it to each of these databases individually. In a
-similar way, a traditional Linux distribution usually is configured to
-be aware of a number of software repositories from which it retrieves
-packages.
-
-Using runtime package management is completely optional and not required
-for a successful build or deployment in any way. But if you want to make
-use of runtime package management, you need to do a couple things above
-and beyond the basics. The remainder of this section describes what you
-need to do.
-
-Build Considerations
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-This section describes build considerations of which you need to be
-aware in order to provide support for runtime package management.
-
-When BitBake generates packages, it needs to know what format or formats
-to use. In your configuration, you use the
-:term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES`
-variable to specify the format:
-
-1. Open the ``local.conf`` file inside your
-   :term:`Build Directory` (e.g.
-   ``~/poky/build/conf/local.conf``).
-
-2. Select the desired package format as follows:
-   ::
-
-      PACKAGE_CLASSES ?= "package_packageformat"
-
-   where packageformat can be "ipk", "rpm",
-   "deb", or "tar" which are the supported package formats.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      Because the Yocto Project supports four different package formats,
-      you can set the variable with more than one argument. However, the
-      OpenEmbedded build system only uses the first argument when
-      creating an image or Software Development Kit (SDK).
-
-If you would like your image to start off with a basic package database
-containing the packages in your current build as well as to have the
-relevant tools available on the target for runtime package management,
-you can include "package-management" in the
-:term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`
-variable. Including "package-management" in this configuration variable
-ensures that when the image is assembled for your target, the image
-includes the currently-known package databases as well as the
-target-specific tools required for runtime package management to be
-performed on the target. However, this is not strictly necessary. You
-could start your image off without any databases but only include the
-required on-target package tool(s). As an example, you could include
-"opkg" in your
-:term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable
-if you are using the IPK package format. You can then initialize your
-target's package database(s) later once your image is up and running.
-
-Whenever you perform any sort of build step that can potentially
-generate a package or modify existing package, it is always a good idea
-to re-generate the package index after the build by using the following
-command:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake package-index
-
-It might be tempting to build the
-package and the package index at the same time with a command such as
-the following:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake some-package package-index
-
-Do not do this as
-BitBake does not schedule the package index for after the completion of
-the package you are building. Consequently, you cannot be sure of the
-package index including information for the package you just built.
-Thus, be sure to run the package update step separately after building
-any packages.
-
-You can use the
-:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`,
-:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`,
-and
-:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS`
-variables to pre-configure target images to use a package feed. If you
-do not define these variables, then manual steps as described in the
-subsequent sections are necessary to configure the target. You should
-set these variables before building the image in order to produce a
-correctly configured image.
-
-When your build is complete, your packages reside in the
-``${TMPDIR}/deploy/packageformat`` directory. For example, if
-``${``\ :term:`TMPDIR`\ ``}`` is
-``tmp`` and your selected package type is RPM, then your RPM packages
-are available in ``tmp/deploy/rpm``.
-
-Host or Server Machine Setup
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Although other protocols are possible, a server using HTTP typically
-serves packages. If you want to use HTTP, then set up and configure a
-web server such as Apache 2, lighttpd, or Python web server on the
-machine serving the packages.
-
-To keep things simple, this section describes how to set up a
-Python web server to share package feeds from the developer's
-machine. Although this server might not be the best for a production
-environment, the setup is simple and straight forward. Should you want
-to use a different server more suited for production (e.g. Apache 2,
-Lighttpd, or Nginx), take the appropriate steps to do so.
-
-From within the build directory where you have built an image based on
-your packaging choice (i.e. the
-:term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES`
-setting), simply start the server. The following example assumes a build
-directory of ``~/poky/build/tmp/deploy/rpm`` and a ``PACKAGE_CLASSES``
-setting of "package_rpm":
-::
-
-   $ cd ~/poky/build/tmp/deploy/rpm
-   $ python3 -m http.server
-
-Target Setup
-~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Setting up the target differs depending on the package management
-system. This section provides information for RPM, IPK, and DEB.
-
-Using RPM
-^^^^^^^^^
-
-The `Dandified Packaging
-Tool <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/DNF_(software)>`__ (DNF) performs
-runtime package management of RPM packages. In order to use DNF for
-runtime package management, you must perform an initial setup on the
-target machine for cases where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_*`` variables were not
-set as part of the image that is running on the target. This means if
-you built your image and did not not use these variables as part of the
-build and your image is now running on the target, you need to perform
-the steps in this section if you want to use runtime package management.
-
-.. note::
-
-   For information on the ``PACKAGE_FEED_*`` variables, see
-   :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`, :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`, and
-   :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS` in the Yocto Project Reference Manual variables
-   glossary.
-
-On the target, you must inform DNF that package databases are available.
-You do this by creating a file named
-``/etc/yum.repos.d/oe-packages.repo`` and defining the ``oe-packages``.
-
-As an example, assume the target is able to use the following package
-databases: ``all``, ``i586``, and ``qemux86`` from a server named
-``my.server``. The specifics for setting up the web server are up to
-you. The critical requirement is that the URIs in the target repository
-configuration point to the correct remote location for the feeds.
-
-.. note::
-
-   For development purposes, you can point the web server to the build
-   system's ``deploy`` directory. However, for production use, it is better to
-   copy the package directories to a location outside of the build area and use
-   that location. Doing so avoids situations where the build system
-   overwrites or changes the ``deploy`` directory.
-
-When telling DNF where to look for the package databases, you must
-declare individual locations per architecture or a single location used
-for all architectures. You cannot do both:
-
--  *Create an Explicit List of Architectures:* Define individual base
-   URLs to identify where each package database is located:
-
-   .. code-block:: none
-
-      [oe-packages]
-      baseurl=http://my.server/rpm/i586  http://my.server/rpm/qemux86 http://my.server/rpm/all
-
-   This example
-   informs DNF about individual package databases for all three
-   architectures.
-
--  *Create a Single (Full) Package Index:* Define a single base URL that
-   identifies where a full package database is located:
-   ::
-
-      [oe-packages]
-      baseurl=http://my.server/rpm
-
-   This example informs DNF about a single
-   package database that contains all the package index information for
-   all supported architectures.
-
-Once you have informed DNF where to find the package databases, you need
-to fetch them:
-
-.. code-block:: none
-
-   # dnf makecache
-
-DNF is now able to find, install, and
-upgrade packages from the specified repository or repositories.
-
-.. note::
-
-   See the `DNF documentation <https://dnf.readthedocs.io/en/latest/>`__ for
-   additional information.
-
-Using IPK
-^^^^^^^^^
-
-The ``opkg`` application performs runtime package management of IPK
-packages. You must perform an initial setup for ``opkg`` on the target
-machine if the
-:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`,
-:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`,
-and
-:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS`
-variables have not been set or the target image was built before the
-variables were set.
-
-The ``opkg`` application uses configuration files to find available
-package databases. Thus, you need to create a configuration file inside
-the ``/etc/opkg/`` direction, which informs ``opkg`` of any repository
-you want to use.
-
-As an example, suppose you are serving packages from a ``ipk/``
-directory containing the ``i586``, ``all``, and ``qemux86`` databases
-through an HTTP server named ``my.server``. On the target, create a
-configuration file (e.g. ``my_repo.conf``) inside the ``/etc/opkg/``
-directory containing the following:
-
-.. code-block:: none
-
-   src/gz all http://my.server/ipk/all
-   src/gz i586 http://my.server/ipk/i586
-   src/gz qemux86 http://my.server/ipk/qemux86
-
-Next, instruct ``opkg`` to fetch the
-repository information:
-
-.. code-block:: none
-
-   # opkg update
-
-The ``opkg`` application is now able to find, install, and upgrade packages
-from the specified repository.
-
-Using DEB
-^^^^^^^^^
-
-The ``apt`` application performs runtime package management of DEB
-packages. This application uses a source list file to find available
-package databases. You must perform an initial setup for ``apt`` on the
-target machine if the
-:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`,
-:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`,
-and
-:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS`
-variables have not been set or the target image was built before the
-variables were set.
-
-To inform ``apt`` of the repository you want to use, you might create a
-list file (e.g. ``my_repo.list``) inside the
-``/etc/apt/sources.list.d/`` directory. As an example, suppose you are
-serving packages from a ``deb/`` directory containing the ``i586``,
-``all``, and ``qemux86`` databases through an HTTP server named
-``my.server``. The list file should contain:
-
-.. code-block:: none
-
-   deb http://my.server/deb/all ./
-   deb http://my.server/deb/i586 ./
-   deb http://my.server/deb/qemux86 ./
-
-Next, instruct the ``apt`` application
-to fetch the repository information:
-
-.. code-block:: none
-
-  # apt-get update
-
-After this step,
-``apt`` is able to find, install, and upgrade packages from the
-specified repository.
-
-Generating and Using Signed Packages
-------------------------------------
-
-In order to add security to RPM packages used during a build, you can
-take steps to securely sign them. Once a signature is verified, the
-OpenEmbedded build system can use the package in the build. If security
-fails for a signed package, the build system aborts the build.
-
-This section describes how to sign RPM packages during a build and how
-to use signed package feeds (repositories) when doing a build.
-
-Signing RPM Packages
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-To enable signing RPM packages, you must set up the following
-configurations in either your ``local.config`` or ``distro.config``
-file:
-::
-
-   # Inherit sign_rpm.bbclass to enable signing functionality
-   INHERIT += " sign_rpm"
-   # Define the GPG key that will be used for signing.
-   RPM_GPG_NAME = "key_name"
-   # Provide passphrase for the key
-   RPM_GPG_PASSPHRASE = "passphrase"
-
-.. note::
-
-   Be sure to supply appropriate values for both `key_name` and
-   `passphrase`.
-
-Aside from the ``RPM_GPG_NAME`` and ``RPM_GPG_PASSPHRASE`` variables in
-the previous example, two optional variables related to signing exist:
-
--  *GPG_BIN:* Specifies a ``gpg`` binary/wrapper that is executed
-   when the package is signed.
-
--  *GPG_PATH:* Specifies the ``gpg`` home directory used when the
-   package is signed.
-
-Processing Package Feeds
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-In addition to being able to sign RPM packages, you can also enable
-signed package feeds for IPK and RPM packages.
-
-The steps you need to take to enable signed package feed use are similar
-to the steps used to sign RPM packages. You must define the following in
-your ``local.config`` or ``distro.config`` file:
-::
-
-   INHERIT += "sign_package_feed"
-   PACKAGE_FEED_GPG_NAME = "key_name"
-   PACKAGE_FEED_GPG_PASSPHRASE_FILE = "path_to_file_containing_passphrase"
-
-For signed package feeds, the passphrase must exist in a separate file,
-which is pointed to by the ``PACKAGE_FEED_GPG_PASSPHRASE_FILE``
-variable. Regarding security, keeping a plain text passphrase out of the
-configuration is more secure.
-
-Aside from the ``PACKAGE_FEED_GPG_NAME`` and
-``PACKAGE_FEED_GPG_PASSPHRASE_FILE`` variables, three optional variables
-related to signed package feeds exist:
-
--  *GPG_BIN* Specifies a ``gpg`` binary/wrapper that is executed
-   when the package is signed.
-
--  *GPG_PATH:* Specifies the ``gpg`` home directory used when the
-   package is signed.
-
--  *PACKAGE_FEED_GPG_SIGNATURE_TYPE:* Specifies the type of ``gpg``
-   signature. This variable applies only to RPM and IPK package feeds.
-   Allowable values for the ``PACKAGE_FEED_GPG_SIGNATURE_TYPE`` are
-   "ASC", which is the default and specifies ascii armored, and "BIN",
-   which specifies binary.
-
-Testing Packages With ptest
----------------------------
-
-A Package Test (ptest) runs tests against packages built by the
-OpenEmbedded build system on the target machine. A ptest contains at
-least two items: the actual test, and a shell script (``run-ptest``)
-that starts the test. The shell script that starts the test must not
-contain the actual test - the script only starts the test. On the other
-hand, the test can be anything from a simple shell script that runs a
-binary and checks the output to an elaborate system of test binaries and
-data files.
-
-The test generates output in the format used by Automake:
-::
-
-   result: testname
-
-where the result can be ``PASS``, ``FAIL``, or ``SKIP``, and
-the testname can be any identifying string.
-
-For a list of Yocto Project recipes that are already enabled with ptest,
-see the :yocto_wiki:`Ptest </Ptest>` wiki page.
-
-.. note::
-
-   A recipe is "ptest-enabled" if it inherits the
-   :ref:`ptest <ref-classes-ptest>` class.
-
-Adding ptest to Your Build
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-To add package testing to your build, add the
-:term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` and
-:term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES`
-variables to your ``local.conf`` file, which is found in the
-:term:`Build Directory`:
-::
-
-   DISTRO_FEATURES_append = " ptest"
-   EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES += "ptest-pkgs"
-
-Once your build is complete, the ptest files are installed into the
-``/usr/lib/package/ptest`` directory within the image, where ``package``
-is the name of the package.
-
-Running ptest
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The ``ptest-runner`` package installs a shell script that loops through
-all installed ptest test suites and runs them in sequence. Consequently,
-you might want to add this package to your image.
-
-Getting Your Package Ready
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-In order to enable a recipe to run installed ptests on target hardware,
-you need to prepare the recipes that build the packages you want to
-test. Here is what you have to do for each recipe:
-
--  *Be sure the recipe inherits
-   the* :ref:`ptest <ref-classes-ptest>` *class:*
-   Include the following line in each recipe:
-   ::
-
-      inherit ptest
-
--  *Create run-ptest:* This script starts your test. Locate the
-   script where you will refer to it using
-   :term:`SRC_URI`. Here is an
-   example that starts a test for ``dbus``:
-   ::
-
-      #!/bin/sh
-      cd test
-      make -k runtest-TESTS
-
--  *Ensure dependencies are met:* If the test adds build or runtime
-   dependencies that normally do not exist for the package (such as
-   requiring "make" to run the test suite), use the
-   :term:`DEPENDS` and
-   :term:`RDEPENDS` variables in
-   your recipe in order for the package to meet the dependencies. Here
-   is an example where the package has a runtime dependency on "make":
-   ::
-
-      RDEPENDS_${PN}-ptest += "make"
-
--  *Add a function to build the test suite:* Not many packages support
-   cross-compilation of their test suites. Consequently, you usually
-   need to add a cross-compilation function to the package.
-
-   Many packages based on Automake compile and run the test suite by
-   using a single command such as ``make check``. However, the host
-   ``make check`` builds and runs on the same computer, while
-   cross-compiling requires that the package is built on the host but
-   executed for the target architecture (though often, as in the case
-   for ptest, the execution occurs on the host). The built version of
-   Automake that ships with the Yocto Project includes a patch that
-   separates building and execution. Consequently, packages that use the
-   unaltered, patched version of ``make check`` automatically
-   cross-compiles.
-
-   Regardless, you still must add a ``do_compile_ptest`` function to
-   build the test suite. Add a function similar to the following to your
-   recipe:
-   ::
-
-      do_compile_ptest() {
-          oe_runmake buildtest-TESTS
-      }
-
--  *Ensure special configurations are set:* If the package requires
-   special configurations prior to compiling the test code, you must
-   insert a ``do_configure_ptest`` function into the recipe.
-
--  *Install the test suite:* The ``ptest`` class automatically copies
-   the file ``run-ptest`` to the target and then runs make
-   ``install-ptest`` to run the tests. If this is not enough, you need
-   to create a ``do_install_ptest`` function and make sure it gets
-   called after the "make install-ptest" completes.
-
-Creating Node Package Manager (NPM) Packages
---------------------------------------------
-
-`NPM <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Npm_(software)>`__ is a package
-manager for the JavaScript programming language. The Yocto Project
-supports the NPM :ref:`fetcher <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-fetching:fetchers>`. You can
-use this fetcher in combination with
-:doc:`devtool </ref-manual/devtool-reference>` to create
-recipes that produce NPM packages.
-
-Two workflows exist that allow you to create NPM packages using
-``devtool``: the NPM registry modules method and the NPM project code
-method.
-
-.. note::
-
-   While it is possible to create NPM recipes manually, using
-   ``devtool`` is far simpler.
-
-Additionally, some requirements and caveats exist.
-
-Requirements and Caveats
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-You need to be aware of the following before using ``devtool`` to create
-NPM packages:
-
--  Of the two methods that you can use ``devtool`` to create NPM
-   packages, the registry approach is slightly simpler. However, you
-   might consider the project approach because you do not have to
-   publish your module in the NPM registry
-   (`npm-registry <https://docs.npmjs.com/misc/registry>`_), which
-   is NPM's public registry.
-
--  Be familiar with
-   :doc:`devtool </ref-manual/devtool-reference>`.
-
--  The NPM host tools need the native ``nodejs-npm`` package, which is
-   part of the OpenEmbedded environment. You need to get the package by
-   cloning the https://github.com/openembedded/meta-openembedded
-   repository out of GitHub. Be sure to add the path to your local copy
-   to your ``bblayers.conf`` file.
-
--  ``devtool`` cannot detect native libraries in module dependencies.
-   Consequently, you must manually add packages to your recipe.
-
--  While deploying NPM packages, ``devtool`` cannot determine which
-   dependent packages are missing on the target (e.g. the node runtime
-   ``nodejs``). Consequently, you need to find out what files are
-   missing and be sure they are on the target.
-
--  Although you might not need NPM to run your node package, it is
-   useful to have NPM on your target. The NPM package name is
-   ``nodejs-npm``.
-
-Using the Registry Modules Method
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-This section presents an example that uses the ``cute-files`` module,
-which is a file browser web application.
-
-.. note::
-
-   You must know the ``cute-files`` module version.
-
-The first thing you need to do is use ``devtool`` and the NPM fetcher to
-create the recipe:
-::
-
-   $ devtool add "npm://registry.npmjs.org;package=cute-files;version=1.0.2"
-
-The
-``devtool add`` command runs ``recipetool create`` and uses the same
-fetch URI to download each dependency and capture license details where
-possible. The result is a generated recipe.
-
-The recipe file is fairly simple and contains every license that
-``recipetool`` finds and includes the licenses in the recipe's
-:term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`
-variables. You need to examine the variables and look for those with
-"unknown" in the :term:`LICENSE`
-field. You need to track down the license information for "unknown"
-modules and manually add the information to the recipe.
-
-``recipetool`` creates a "shrinkwrap" file for your recipe. Shrinkwrap
-files capture the version of all dependent modules. Many packages do not
-provide shrinkwrap files. ``recipetool`` create a shrinkwrap file as it
-runs.
-
-.. note::
-
-   A package is created for each sub-module. This policy is the only
-   practical way to have the licenses for all of the dependencies
-   represented in the license manifest of the image.
-
-The ``devtool edit-recipe`` command lets you take a look at the recipe:
-::
-
-   $ devtool edit-recipe cute-files
-   SUMMARY = "Turn any folder on your computer into a cute file browser, available on the local network."
-   LICENSE = "MIT & ISC & Unknown"
-   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://LICENSE;md5=71d98c0a1db42956787b1909c74a86ca \
-       file://node_modules/toidentifier/LICENSE;md5=1a261071a044d02eb6f2bb47f51a3502 \
-       file://node_modules/debug/LICENSE;md5=ddd815a475e7338b0be7a14d8ee35a99 \
-       ...
-   SRC_URI = " \
-       npm://registry.npmjs.org/;package=cute-files;version=${PV} \
-       npmsw://${THISDIR}/${BPN}/npm-shrinkwrap.json \
-       "
-   S = "${WORKDIR}/npm"
-   inherit npm LICENSE_${PN} = "MIT"
-   LICENSE_${PN}-accepts = "MIT"
-   LICENSE_${PN}-array-flatten = "MIT"
-   ...
-   LICENSE_${PN}-vary = "MIT"
-
-Three key points exist in the previous example:
-
--  :term:`SRC_URI` uses the NPM
-   scheme so that the NPM fetcher is used.
-
--  ``recipetool`` collects all the license information. If a
-   sub-module's license is unavailable, the sub-module's name appears in
-   the comments.
-
--  The ``inherit npm`` statement causes the
-   :ref:`npm <ref-classes-npm>` class to package
-   up all the modules.
-
-You can run the following command to build the ``cute-files`` package:
-::
-
-   $ devtool build cute-files
-
-Remember that ``nodejs`` must be installed on
-the target before your package.
-
-Assuming 192.168.7.2 for the target's IP address, use the following
-command to deploy your package:
-::
-
-   $ devtool deploy-target -s cute-files root@192.168.7.2
-
-Once the package is installed on the target, you can
-test the application:
-
-.. note::
-
-   Because of a known issue, you cannot simply run ``cute-files`` as you would
-   if you had run ``npm install``.
-
-::
-
-  $ cd /usr/lib/node_modules/cute-files
-  $ node cute-files.js
-
-On a browser,
-go to ``http://192.168.7.2:3000`` and you see the following:
-
-.. image:: figures/cute-files-npm-example.png
-   :align: center
-
-You can find the recipe in ``workspace/recipes/cute-files``. You can use
-the recipe in any layer you choose.
-
-Using the NPM Projects Code Method
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Although it is useful to package modules already in the NPM registry,
-adding ``node.js`` projects under development is a more common developer
-use case.
-
-This section covers the NPM projects code method, which is very similar
-to the "registry" approach described in the previous section. In the NPM
-projects method, you provide ``devtool`` with an URL that points to the
-source files.
-
-Replicating the same example, (i.e. ``cute-files``) use the following
-command:
-::
-
-   $ devtool add https://github.com/martinaglv/cute-files.git
-
-The
-recipe this command generates is very similar to the recipe created in
-the previous section. However, the ``SRC_URI`` looks like the following:
-::
-
-   SRC_URI = " \
-       git://github.com/martinaglv/cute-files.git;protocol=https \
-       npmsw://${THISDIR}/${BPN}/npm-shrinkwrap.json \
-       "
-
-In this example,
-the main module is taken from the Git repository and dependencies are
-taken from the NPM registry. Other than those differences, the recipe is
-basically the same between the two methods. You can build and deploy the
-package exactly as described in the previous section that uses the
-registry modules method.
-
-Adding custom metadata to packages
-----------------------------------
-
-The variable
-:term:`PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA`
-can be used to add additional metadata to packages. This is reflected in
-the package control/spec file. To take the ipk format for example, the
-CONTROL file stored inside would contain the additional metadata as
-additional lines.
-
-The variable can be used in multiple ways, including using suffixes to
-set it for a specific package type and/or package. Note that the order
-of precedence is the same as this list:
-
--  ``PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA_<PKGTYPE>_<PN>``
-
--  ``PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA_<PKGTYPE>``
-
--  ``PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA_<PN>``
-
--  ``PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA``
-
-`<PKGTYPE>` is a parameter and expected to be a distinct name of specific
-package type:
-
--  IPK for .ipk packages
-
--  DEB for .deb packages
-
--  RPM for .rpm packages
-
-`<PN>` is a parameter and expected to be a package name.
-
-The variable can contain multiple [one-line] metadata fields separated
-by the literal sequence '\\n'. The separator can be redefined using the
-variable flag ``separator``.
-
-The following is an example that adds two custom fields for ipk
-packages:
-::
-
-   PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA_IPK = "Vendor: CustomIpk\nGroup:Applications/Spreadsheets"
-
-Efficiently Fetching Source Files During a Build
-================================================
-
-The OpenEmbedded build system works with source files located through
-the :term:`SRC_URI` variable. When
-you build something using BitBake, a big part of the operation is
-locating and downloading all the source tarballs. For images,
-downloading all the source for various packages can take a significant
-amount of time.
-
-This section shows you how you can use mirrors to speed up fetching
-source files and how you can pre-fetch files all of which leads to more
-efficient use of resources and time.
-
-Setting up Effective Mirrors
-----------------------------
-
-A good deal that goes into a Yocto Project build is simply downloading
-all of the source tarballs. Maybe you have been working with another
-build system (OpenEmbedded or Angstrom) for which you have built up a
-sizable directory of source tarballs. Or, perhaps someone else has such
-a directory for which you have read access. If so, you can save time by
-adding statements to your configuration file so that the build process
-checks local directories first for existing tarballs before checking the
-Internet.
-
-Here is an efficient way to set it up in your ``local.conf`` file:
-::
-
-   SOURCE_MIRROR_URL ?= "file:///home/you/your-download-dir/"
-   INHERIT += "own-mirrors"
-   BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS = "1"
-   # BB_NO_NETWORK = "1"
-
-In the previous example, the
-:term:`BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS`
-variable causes the OpenEmbedded build system to generate tarballs of
-the Git repositories and store them in the
-:term:`DL_DIR` directory. Due to
-performance reasons, generating and storing these tarballs is not the
-build system's default behavior.
-
-You can also use the
-:term:`PREMIRRORS` variable. For
-an example, see the variable's glossary entry in the Yocto Project
-Reference Manual.
-
-Getting Source Files and Suppressing the Build
-----------------------------------------------
-
-Another technique you can use to ready yourself for a successive string
-of build operations, is to pre-fetch all the source files without
-actually starting a build. This technique lets you work through any
-download issues and ultimately gathers all the source files into your
-download directory :ref:`structure-build-downloads`,
-which is located with :term:`DL_DIR`.
-
-Use the following BitBake command form to fetch all the necessary
-sources without starting the build:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake target --runall=fetch
-
-This
-variation of the BitBake command guarantees that you have all the
-sources for that BitBake target should you disconnect from the Internet
-and want to do the build later offline.
-
-Selecting an Initialization Manager
-===================================
-
-By default, the Yocto Project uses SysVinit as the initialization
-manager. However, support also exists for systemd, which is a full
-replacement for init with parallel starting of services, reduced shell
-overhead and other features that are used by many distributions.
-
-Within the system, SysVinit treats system components as services. These
-services are maintained as shell scripts stored in the ``/etc/init.d/``
-directory. Services organize into different run levels. This
-organization is maintained by putting links to the services in the
-``/etc/rcN.d/`` directories, where `N/` is one of the following options:
-"S", "0", "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", or "6".
-
-.. note::
-
-   Each runlevel has a dependency on the previous runlevel. This
-   dependency allows the services to work properly.
-
-In comparison, systemd treats components as units. Using units is a
-broader concept as compared to using a service. A unit includes several
-different types of entities. Service is one of the types of entities.
-The runlevel concept in SysVinit corresponds to the concept of a target
-in systemd, where target is also a type of supported unit.
-
-In a SysVinit-based system, services load sequentially (i.e. one by one)
-during init and parallelization is not supported. With systemd, services
-start in parallel. Needless to say, the method can have an impact on
-system startup performance.
-
-If you want to use SysVinit, you do not have to do anything. But, if you
-want to use systemd, you must take some steps as described in the
-following sections.
-
-Using systemd Exclusively
--------------------------
-
-Set these variables in your distribution configuration file as follows:
-::
-
-   DISTRO_FEATURES_append = " systemd"
-   VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_init_manager = "systemd"
-
-You can also prevent the SysVinit distribution feature from
-being automatically enabled as follows:
-::
-
-   DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED = "sysvinit"
-
-Doing so removes any
-redundant SysVinit scripts.
-
-To remove initscripts from your image altogether, set this variable
-also:
-::
-
-   VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_initscripts = ""
-
-For information on the backfill variable, see
-:term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED`.
-
-Using systemd for the Main Image and Using SysVinit for the Rescue Image
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-Set these variables in your distribution configuration file as follows:
-::
-
-   DISTRO_FEATURES_append = " systemd"
-   VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_init_manager = "systemd"
-
-Doing so causes your main image to use the
-``packagegroup-core-boot.bb`` recipe and systemd. The rescue/minimal
-image cannot use this package group. However, it can install SysVinit
-and the appropriate packages will have support for both systemd and
-SysVinit.
-
-Selecting a Device Manager
-==========================
-
-The Yocto Project provides multiple ways to manage the device manager
-(``/dev``):
-
--  Persistent and Pre-Populated\ ``/dev``: For this case, the ``/dev``
-   directory is persistent and the required device nodes are created
-   during the build.
-
--  Use ``devtmpfs`` with a Device Manager: For this case, the ``/dev``
-   directory is provided by the kernel as an in-memory file system and
-   is automatically populated by the kernel at runtime. Additional
-   configuration of device nodes is done in user space by a device
-   manager like ``udev`` or ``busybox-mdev``.
-
-Using Persistent and Pre-Populated\ ``/dev``
---------------------------------------------
-
-To use the static method for device population, you need to set the
-:term:`USE_DEVFS` variable to "0"
-as follows:
-::
-
-   USE_DEVFS = "0"
-
-The content of the resulting ``/dev`` directory is defined in a Device
-Table file. The
-:term:`IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES`
-variable defines the Device Table to use and should be set in the
-machine or distro configuration file. Alternatively, you can set this
-variable in your ``local.conf`` configuration file.
-
-If you do not define the ``IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES`` variable, the default
-``device_table-minimal.txt`` is used:
-::
-
-   IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES = "device_table-mymachine.txt"
-
-The population is handled by the ``makedevs`` utility during image
-creation:
-
-Using ``devtmpfs`` and a Device Manager
----------------------------------------
-
-To use the dynamic method for device population, you need to use (or be
-sure to set) the :term:`USE_DEVFS`
-variable to "1", which is the default:
-::
-
-   USE_DEVFS = "1"
-
-With this
-setting, the resulting ``/dev`` directory is populated by the kernel
-using ``devtmpfs``. Make sure the corresponding kernel configuration
-variable ``CONFIG_DEVTMPFS`` is set when building you build a Linux
-kernel.
-
-All devices created by ``devtmpfs`` will be owned by ``root`` and have
-permissions ``0600``.
-
-To have more control over the device nodes, you can use a device manager
-like ``udev`` or ``busybox-mdev``. You choose the device manager by
-defining the ``VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager`` variable in your machine or
-distro configuration file. Alternatively, you can set this variable in
-your ``local.conf`` configuration file:
-::
-
-   VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = "udev"
-
-   # Some alternative values
-   # VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = "busybox-mdev"
-   # VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = "systemd"
-
-Using an External SCM
-=====================
-
-If you're working on a recipe that pulls from an external Source Code
-Manager (SCM), it is possible to have the OpenEmbedded build system
-notice new recipe changes added to the SCM and then build the resulting
-packages that depend on the new recipes by using the latest versions.
-This only works for SCMs from which it is possible to get a sensible
-revision number for changes. Currently, you can do this with Apache
-Subversion (SVN), Git, and Bazaar (BZR) repositories.
-
-To enable this behavior, the :term:`PV` of
-the recipe needs to reference
-:term:`SRCPV`. Here is an example:
-::
-
-   PV = "1.2.3+git${SRCPV}"
-
-Then, you can add the following to your
-``local.conf``:
-::
-
-   SRCREV_pn-PN = "${AUTOREV}"
-
-:term:`PN` is the name of the recipe for
-which you want to enable automatic source revision updating.
-
-If you do not want to update your local configuration file, you can add
-the following directly to the recipe to finish enabling the feature:
-::
-
-   SRCREV = "${AUTOREV}"
-
-The Yocto Project provides a distribution named ``poky-bleeding``, whose
-configuration file contains the line:
-::
-
-   require conf/distro/include/poky-floating-revisions.inc
-
-This line pulls in the
-listed include file that contains numerous lines of exactly that form:
-::
-
-   #SRCREV_pn-opkg-native ?= "${AUTOREV}"
-   #SRCREV_pn-opkg-sdk ?= "${AUTOREV}"
-   #SRCREV_pn-opkg ?= "${AUTOREV}"
-   #SRCREV_pn-opkg-utils-native ?= "${AUTOREV}"
-   #SRCREV_pn-opkg-utils ?= "${AUTOREV}"
-   SRCREV_pn-gconf-dbus ?= "${AUTOREV}"
-   SRCREV_pn-matchbox-common ?= "${AUTOREV}"
-   SRCREV_pn-matchbox-config-gtk ?= "${AUTOREV}"
-   SRCREV_pn-matchbox-desktop ?= "${AUTOREV}"
-   SRCREV_pn-matchbox-keyboard ?= "${AUTOREV}"
-   SRCREV_pn-matchbox-panel-2 ?= "${AUTOREV}"
-   SRCREV_pn-matchbox-themes-extra ?= "${AUTOREV}"
-   SRCREV_pn-matchbox-terminal ?= "${AUTOREV}"
-   SRCREV_pn-matchbox-wm ?= "${AUTOREV}"
-   SRCREV_pn-settings-daemon ?= "${AUTOREV}"
-   SRCREV_pn-screenshot ?= "${AUTOREV}"
-   . . .
-
-These lines allow you to
-experiment with building a distribution that tracks the latest
-development source for numerous packages.
-
-.. note::
-
-   The ``poky-bleeding`` distribution is not tested on a regular basis. Keep
-   this in mind if you use it.
-
-Creating a Read-Only Root Filesystem
-====================================
-
-Suppose, for security reasons, you need to disable your target device's
-root filesystem's write permissions (i.e. you need a read-only root
-filesystem). Or, perhaps you are running the device's operating system
-from a read-only storage device. For either case, you can customize your
-image for that behavior.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Supporting a read-only root filesystem requires that the system and
-   applications do not try to write to the root filesystem. You must
-   configure all parts of the target system to write elsewhere, or to
-   gracefully fail in the event of attempting to write to the root
-   filesystem.
-
-Creating the Root Filesystem
-----------------------------
-
-To create the read-only root filesystem, simply add the
-"read-only-rootfs" feature to your image, normally in one of two ways.
-The first way is to add the "read-only-rootfs" image feature in the
-image's recipe file via the ``IMAGE_FEATURES`` variable:
-::
-
-   IMAGE_FEATURES += "read-only-rootfs"
-
-As an alternative, you can add the same feature
-from within your build directory's ``local.conf`` file with the
-associated ``EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES`` variable, as in:
-::
-
-   EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES = "read-only-rootfs"
-
-For more information on how to use these variables, see the
-":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:Customizing Images Using Custom \`\`IMAGE_FEATURES\`\` and \`\`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES\`\``"
-section. For information on the variables, see
-:term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` and
-:term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES`.
-
-Post-Installation Scripts and Read-Only Root Filesystem
--------------------------------------------------------
-
-It is very important that you make sure all post-Installation
-(``pkg_postinst``) scripts for packages that are installed into the
-image can be run at the time when the root filesystem is created during
-the build on the host system. These scripts cannot attempt to run during
-first-boot on the target device. With the "read-only-rootfs" feature
-enabled, the build system checks during root filesystem creation to make
-sure all post-installation scripts succeed. If any of these scripts
-still need to be run after the root filesystem is created, the build
-immediately fails. These build-time checks ensure that the build fails
-rather than the target device fails later during its initial boot
-operation.
-
-Most of the common post-installation scripts generated by the build
-system for the out-of-the-box Yocto Project are engineered so that they
-can run during root filesystem creation (e.g. post-installation scripts
-for caching fonts). However, if you create and add custom scripts, you
-need to be sure they can be run during this file system creation.
-
-Here are some common problems that prevent post-installation scripts
-from running during root filesystem creation:
-
--  *Not using $D in front of absolute paths:* The build system defines
-   ``$``\ :term:`D` when the root
-   filesystem is created. Furthermore, ``$D`` is blank when the script
-   is run on the target device. This implies two purposes for ``$D``:
-   ensuring paths are valid in both the host and target environments,
-   and checking to determine which environment is being used as a method
-   for taking appropriate actions.
-
--  *Attempting to run processes that are specific to or dependent on the
-   target architecture:* You can work around these attempts by using
-   native tools, which run on the host system, to accomplish the same
-   tasks, or by alternatively running the processes under QEMU, which
-   has the ``qemu_run_binary`` function. For more information, see the
-   :ref:`qemu <ref-classes-qemu>` class.
-
-Areas With Write Access
------------------------
-
-With the "read-only-rootfs" feature enabled, any attempt by the target
-to write to the root filesystem at runtime fails. Consequently, you must
-make sure that you configure processes and applications that attempt
-these types of writes do so to directories with write access (e.g.
-``/tmp`` or ``/var/run``).
-
-Maintaining Build Output Quality
-================================
-
-Many factors can influence the quality of a build. For example, if you
-upgrade a recipe to use a new version of an upstream software package or
-you experiment with some new configuration options, subtle changes can
-occur that you might not detect until later. Consider the case where
-your recipe is using a newer version of an upstream package. In this
-case, a new version of a piece of software might introduce an optional
-dependency on another library, which is auto-detected. If that library
-has already been built when the software is building, the software will
-link to the built library and that library will be pulled into your
-image along with the new software even if you did not want the library.
-
-The :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>`
-class exists to help you maintain the quality of your build output. You
-can use the class to highlight unexpected and possibly unwanted changes
-in the build output. When you enable build history, it records
-information about the contents of each package and image and then
-commits that information to a local Git repository where you can examine
-the information.
-
-The remainder of this section describes the following:
-
--  :ref:`How you can enable and disable build history <dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling and disabling build history>`
-
--  :ref:`How to understand what the build history contains <dev-manual/common-tasks:understanding what the build history contains>`
-
--  :ref:`How to limit the information used for build history <dev-manual/common-tasks:using build history to gather image information only>`
-
--  :ref:`How to examine the build history from both a command-line and web interface <dev-manual/common-tasks:examining build history information>`
-
-Enabling and Disabling Build History
-------------------------------------
-
-Build history is disabled by default. To enable it, add the following
-``INHERIT`` statement and set the
-:term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT`
-variable to "1" at the end of your ``conf/local.conf`` file found in the
-:term:`Build Directory`:
-::
-
-   INHERIT += "buildhistory"
-   BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT = "1"
-
-Enabling build history as
-previously described causes the OpenEmbedded build system to collect
-build output information and commit it as a single commit to a local
-:ref:`overview-manual/development-environment:git` repository.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Enabling build history increases your build times slightly,
-   particularly for images, and increases the amount of disk space used
-   during the build.
-
-You can disable build history by removing the previous statements from
-your ``conf/local.conf`` file.
-
-Understanding What the Build History Contains
----------------------------------------------
-
-Build history information is kept in
-``${``\ :term:`TOPDIR`\ ``}/buildhistory``
-in the Build Directory as defined by the
-:term:`BUILDHISTORY_DIR`
-variable. The following is an example abbreviated listing:
-
-.. image:: figures/buildhistory.png
-   :align: center
-
-At the top level, a ``metadata-revs`` file exists that lists the
-revisions of the repositories for the enabled layers when the build was
-produced. The rest of the data splits into separate ``packages``,
-``images`` and ``sdk`` directories, the contents of which are described
-as follows.
-
-Build History Package Information
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The history for each package contains a text file that has name-value
-pairs with information about the package. For example,
-``buildhistory/packages/i586-poky-linux/busybox/busybox/latest``
-contains the following:
-
-.. code-block:: none
-
-   PV = 1.22.1
-   PR = r32
-   RPROVIDES =
-   RDEPENDS = glibc (>= 2.20) update-alternatives-opkg
-   RRECOMMENDS = busybox-syslog busybox-udhcpc update-rc.d
-   PKGSIZE = 540168
-   FILES = /usr/bin/* /usr/sbin/* /usr/lib/busybox/* /usr/lib/lib*.so.* \
-      /etc /com /var /bin/* /sbin/* /lib/*.so.* /lib/udev/rules.d \
-      /usr/lib/udev/rules.d /usr/share/busybox /usr/lib/busybox/* \
-      /usr/share/pixmaps /usr/share/applications /usr/share/idl \
-      /usr/share/omf /usr/share/sounds /usr/lib/bonobo/servers
-   FILELIST = /bin/busybox /bin/busybox.nosuid /bin/busybox.suid /bin/sh \
-      /etc/busybox.links.nosuid /etc/busybox.links.suid
-
-Most of these
-name-value pairs correspond to variables used to produce the package.
-The exceptions are ``FILELIST``, which is the actual list of files in
-the package, and ``PKGSIZE``, which is the total size of files in the
-package in bytes.
-
-A file also exists that corresponds to the recipe from which the package
-came (e.g. ``buildhistory/packages/i586-poky-linux/busybox/latest``):
-
-.. code-block:: none
-
-   PV = 1.22.1
-   PR = r32
-   DEPENDS = initscripts kern-tools-native update-rc.d-native \
-      virtual/i586-poky-linux-compilerlibs virtual/i586-poky-linux-gcc \
-      virtual/libc virtual/update-alternatives
-   PACKAGES = busybox-ptest busybox-httpd busybox-udhcpd busybox-udhcpc \
-      busybox-syslog busybox-mdev busybox-hwclock busybox-dbg \
-      busybox-staticdev busybox-dev busybox-doc busybox-locale busybox
-
-Finally, for those recipes fetched from a version control system (e.g.,
-Git), a file exists that lists source revisions that are specified in
-the recipe and lists the actual revisions used during the build. Listed
-and actual revisions might differ when
-:term:`SRCREV` is set to
-${:term:`AUTOREV`}. Here is an
-example assuming
-``buildhistory/packages/qemux86-poky-linux/linux-yocto/latest_srcrev``):
-::
-
-   # SRCREV_machine = "38cd560d5022ed2dbd1ab0dca9642e47c98a0aa1"
-   SRCREV_machine = "38cd560d5022ed2dbd1ab0dca9642e47c98a0aa1"
-   # SRCREV_meta = "a227f20eff056e511d504b2e490f3774ab260d6f"
-   SRCREV_meta ="a227f20eff056e511d504b2e490f3774ab260d6f"
-
-You can use the
-``buildhistory-collect-srcrevs`` command with the ``-a`` option to
-collect the stored ``SRCREV`` values from build history and report them
-in a format suitable for use in global configuration (e.g.,
-``local.conf`` or a distro include file) to override floating
-``AUTOREV`` values to a fixed set of revisions. Here is some example
-output from this command:
-::
-
-   $ buildhistory-collect-srcrevs -a
-   # i586-poky-linux
-   SRCREV_pn-glibc = "b8079dd0d360648e4e8de48656c5c38972621072"
-   SRCREV_pn-glibc-initial = "b8079dd0d360648e4e8de48656c5c38972621072"
-   SRCREV_pn-opkg-utils = "53274f087565fd45d8452c5367997ba6a682a37a"
-   SRCREV_pn-kmod = "fd56638aed3fe147015bfa10ed4a5f7491303cb4"
-   # x86_64-linux
-   SRCREV_pn-gtk-doc-stub-native = "1dea266593edb766d6d898c79451ef193eb17cfa"
-   SRCREV_pn-dtc-native = "65cc4d2748a2c2e6f27f1cf39e07a5dbabd80ebf"
-   SRCREV_pn-update-rc.d-native = "eca680ddf28d024954895f59a241a622dd575c11"
-   SRCREV_glibc_pn-cross-localedef-native = "b8079dd0d360648e4e8de48656c5c38972621072"
-   SRCREV_localedef_pn-cross-localedef-native = "c833367348d39dad7ba018990bfdaffaec8e9ed3"
-   SRCREV_pn-prelink-native = "faa069deec99bf61418d0bab831c83d7c1b797ca"
-   SRCREV_pn-opkg-utils-native = "53274f087565fd45d8452c5367997ba6a682a37a"
-   SRCREV_pn-kern-tools-native = "23345b8846fe4bd167efdf1bd8a1224b2ba9a5ff"
-   SRCREV_pn-kmod-native = "fd56638aed3fe147015bfa10ed4a5f7491303cb4"
-   # qemux86-poky-linux
-   SRCREV_machine_pn-linux-yocto = "38cd560d5022ed2dbd1ab0dca9642e47c98a0aa1"
-   SRCREV_meta_pn-linux-yocto = "a227f20eff056e511d504b2e490f3774ab260d6f"
-   # all-poky-linux
-   SRCREV_pn-update-rc.d = "eca680ddf28d024954895f59a241a622dd575c11"
-
-.. note::
-
-   Here are some notes on using the ``buildhistory-collect-srcrevs`` command:
-
-   -  By default, only values where the ``SRCREV`` was not hardcoded
-      (usually when ``AUTOREV`` is used) are reported. Use the ``-a``
-      option to see all ``SRCREV`` values.
-
-   -  The output statements might not have any effect if overrides are
-      applied elsewhere in the build system configuration. Use the
-      ``-f`` option to add the ``forcevariable`` override to each output
-      line if you need to work around this restriction.
-
-   -  The script does apply special handling when building for multiple
-      machines. However, the script does place a comment before each set
-      of values that specifies which triplet to which they belong as
-      previously shown (e.g., ``i586-poky-linux``).
-
-Build History Image Information
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The files produced for each image are as follows:
-
--  ``image-files:`` A directory containing selected files from the root
-   filesystem. The files are defined by
-   :term:`BUILDHISTORY_IMAGE_FILES`.
-
--  ``build-id.txt:`` Human-readable information about the build
-   configuration and metadata source revisions. This file contains the
-   full build header as printed by BitBake.
-
--  ``*.dot:`` Dependency graphs for the image that are compatible with
-   ``graphviz``.
-
--  ``files-in-image.txt:`` A list of files in the image with
-   permissions, owner, group, size, and symlink information.
-
--  ``image-info.txt:`` A text file containing name-value pairs with
-   information about the image. See the following listing example for
-   more information.
-
--  ``installed-package-names.txt:`` A list of installed packages by name
-   only.
-
--  ``installed-package-sizes.txt:`` A list of installed packages ordered
-   by size.
-
--  ``installed-packages.txt:`` A list of installed packages with full
-   package filenames.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Installed package information is able to be gathered and produced
-   even if package management is disabled for the final image.
-
-Here is an example of ``image-info.txt``:
-
-.. code-block:: none
-
-   DISTRO = poky
-   DISTRO_VERSION = 1.7
-   USER_CLASSES = buildstats image-mklibs image-prelink
-   IMAGE_CLASSES = image_types
-   IMAGE_FEATURES = debug-tweaks
-   IMAGE_LINGUAS =
-   IMAGE_INSTALL = packagegroup-core-boot run-postinsts
-   BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS =
-   NO_RECOMMENDATIONS =
-   PACKAGE_EXCLUDE =
-   ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND = write_package_manifest; license_create_manifest; \
-      write_image_manifest ; buildhistory_list_installed_image ; \
-      buildhistory_get_image_installed ; ssh_allow_empty_password;  \
-      postinst_enable_logging; rootfs_update_timestamp ; ssh_disable_dns_lookup ;
-   IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND =   buildhistory_get_imageinfo ;
-   IMAGESIZE = 6900
-
-Other than ``IMAGESIZE``,
-which is the total size of the files in the image in Kbytes, the
-name-value pairs are variables that may have influenced the content of
-the image. This information is often useful when you are trying to
-determine why a change in the package or file listings has occurred.
-
-Using Build History to Gather Image Information Only
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-As you can see, build history produces image information, including
-dependency graphs, so you can see why something was pulled into the
-image. If you are just interested in this information and not interested
-in collecting specific package or SDK information, you can enable
-writing only image information without any history by adding the
-following to your ``conf/local.conf`` file found in the
-:term:`Build Directory`:
-::
-
-   INHERIT += "buildhistory"
-   BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT = "0"
-   BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES = "image"
-
-Here, you set the
-:term:`BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES`
-variable to use the image feature only.
-
-Build History SDK Information
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Build history collects similar information on the contents of SDKs (e.g.
-``bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename``) as compared to information it
-collects for images. Furthermore, this information differs depending on
-whether an extensible or standard SDK is being produced.
-
-The following list shows the files produced for SDKs:
-
--  ``files-in-sdk.txt:`` A list of files in the SDK with permissions,
-   owner, group, size, and symlink information. This list includes both
-   the host and target parts of the SDK.
-
--  ``sdk-info.txt:`` A text file containing name-value pairs with
-   information about the SDK. See the following listing example for more
-   information.
-
--  ``sstate-task-sizes.txt:`` A text file containing name-value pairs
-   with information about task group sizes (e.g. ``do_populate_sysroot``
-   tasks have a total size). The ``sstate-task-sizes.txt`` file exists
-   only when an extensible SDK is created.
-
--  ``sstate-package-sizes.txt:`` A text file containing name-value pairs
-   with information for the shared-state packages and sizes in the SDK.
-   The ``sstate-package-sizes.txt`` file exists only when an extensible
-   SDK is created.
-
--  ``sdk-files:`` A folder that contains copies of the files mentioned
-   in ``BUILDHISTORY_SDK_FILES`` if the files are present in the output.
-   Additionally, the default value of ``BUILDHISTORY_SDK_FILES`` is
-   specific to the extensible SDK although you can set it differently if
-   you would like to pull in specific files from the standard SDK.
-
-   The default files are ``conf/local.conf``, ``conf/bblayers.conf``,
-   ``conf/auto.conf``, ``conf/locked-sigs.inc``, and
-   ``conf/devtool.conf``. Thus, for an extensible SDK, these files get
-   copied into the ``sdk-files`` directory.
-
--  The following information appears under each of the ``host`` and
-   ``target`` directories for the portions of the SDK that run on the
-   host and on the target, respectively:
-
-   .. note::
-
-      The following files for the most part are empty when producing an
-      extensible SDK because this type of SDK is not constructed from
-      packages as is the standard SDK.
-
-   -  ``depends.dot:`` Dependency graph for the SDK that is compatible
-      with ``graphviz``.
-
-   -  ``installed-package-names.txt:`` A list of installed packages by
-      name only.
-
-   -  ``installed-package-sizes.txt:`` A list of installed packages
-      ordered by size.
-
-   -  ``installed-packages.txt:`` A list of installed packages with full
-      package filenames.
-
-Here is an example of ``sdk-info.txt``:
-
-.. code-block:: none
-
-   DISTRO = poky
-   DISTRO_VERSION = 1.3+snapshot-20130327
-   SDK_NAME = poky-glibc-i686-arm
-   SDK_VERSION = 1.3+snapshot
-   SDKMACHINE =
-   SDKIMAGE_FEATURES = dev-pkgs dbg-pkgs
-   BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS =
-   SDKSIZE = 352712
-
-Other than ``SDKSIZE``, which is
-the total size of the files in the SDK in Kbytes, the name-value pairs
-are variables that might have influenced the content of the SDK. This
-information is often useful when you are trying to determine why a
-change in the package or file listings has occurred.
-
-Examining Build History Information
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-You can examine build history output from the command line or from a web
-interface.
-
-To see any changes that have occurred (assuming you have
-:term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` = "1"),
-you can simply use any Git command that allows you to view the history
-of a repository. Here is one method:
-::
-
-   $ git log -p
-
-You need to realize,
-however, that this method does show changes that are not significant
-(e.g. a package's size changing by a few bytes).
-
-A command-line tool called ``buildhistory-diff`` does exist, though,
-that queries the Git repository and prints just the differences that
-might be significant in human-readable form. Here is an example:
-::
-
-   $ ~/poky/poky/scripts/buildhistory-diff . HEAD^
-   Changes to images/qemux86_64/glibc/core-image-minimal (files-in-image.txt):
-      /etc/anotherpkg.conf was added
-      /sbin/anotherpkg was added
-      * (installed-package-names.txt):
-      *   anotherpkg was added
-   Changes to images/qemux86_64/glibc/core-image-minimal (installed-package-names.txt):
-      anotherpkg was added
-   packages/qemux86_64-poky-linux/v86d: PACKAGES: added "v86d-extras"
-      * PR changed from "r0" to "r1"
-      * PV changed from "0.1.10" to "0.1.12"
-   packages/qemux86_64-poky-linux/v86d/v86d: PKGSIZE changed from 110579 to 144381 (+30%)
-      * PR changed from "r0" to "r1"
-      * PV changed from "0.1.10" to "0.1.12"
-
-.. note::
-
-   The ``buildhistory-diff`` tool requires the ``GitPython``
-   package. Be sure to install it using Pip3 as follows:
-   ::
-
-         $ pip3 install GitPython --user
-
-
-   Alternatively, you can install ``python3-git`` using the appropriate
-   distribution package manager (e.g. ``apt-get``, ``dnf``, or ``zipper``).
-
-To see changes to the build history using a web interface, follow the
-instruction in the ``README`` file
-:yocto_git:`here </buildhistory-web/>`.
-
-Here is a sample screenshot of the interface:
-
-.. image:: figures/buildhistory-web.png
-   :align: center
-
-Performing Automated Runtime Testing
-====================================
-
-The OpenEmbedded build system makes available a series of automated
-tests for images to verify runtime functionality. You can run these
-tests on either QEMU or actual target hardware. Tests are written in
-Python making use of the ``unittest`` module, and the majority of them
-run commands on the target system over SSH. This section describes how
-you set up the environment to use these tests, run available tests, and
-write and add your own tests.
-
-For information on the test and QA infrastructure available within the
-Yocto Project, see the ":ref:`ref-manual/release-process:testing and quality assurance`"
-section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
-
-Enabling Tests
---------------
-
-Depending on whether you are planning to run tests using QEMU or on the
-hardware, you have to take different steps to enable the tests. See the
-following subsections for information on how to enable both types of
-tests.
-
-Enabling Runtime Tests on QEMU
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-In order to run tests, you need to do the following:
-
--  *Set up to avoid interaction with sudo for networking:* To
-   accomplish this, you must do one of the following:
-
-   -  Add ``NOPASSWD`` for your user in ``/etc/sudoers`` either for all
-      commands or just for ``runqemu-ifup``. You must provide the full
-      path as that can change if you are using multiple clones of the
-      source repository.
-
-      .. note::
-
-         On some distributions, you also need to comment out "Defaults
-         requiretty" in ``/etc/sudoers``.
-
-   -  Manually configure a tap interface for your system.
-
-   -  Run as root the script in ``scripts/runqemu-gen-tapdevs``, which
-      should generate a list of tap devices. This is the option
-      typically chosen for Autobuilder-type environments.
-
-      .. note::
-
-         -  Be sure to use an absolute path when calling this script
-            with sudo.
-
-         -  The package recipe ``qemu-helper-native`` is required to run
-            this script. Build the package using the following command:
-            ::
-
-               $ bitbake qemu-helper-native
-
--  *Set the DISPLAY variable:* You need to set this variable so that
-   you have an X server available (e.g. start ``vncserver`` for a
-   headless machine).
-
--  *Be sure your host's firewall accepts incoming connections from
-   192.168.7.0/24:* Some of the tests (in particular DNF tests) start an
-   HTTP server on a random high number port, which is used to serve
-   files to the target. The DNF module serves
-   ``${WORKDIR}/oe-rootfs-repo`` so it can run DNF channel commands.
-   That means your host's firewall must accept incoming connections from
-   192.168.7.0/24, which is the default IP range used for tap devices by
-   ``runqemu``.
-
--  *Be sure your host has the correct packages installed:* Depending
-   your host's distribution, you need to have the following packages
-   installed:
-
-   -  Ubuntu and Debian: ``sysstat`` and ``iproute2``
-
-   -  OpenSUSE: ``sysstat`` and ``iproute2``
-
-   -  Fedora: ``sysstat`` and ``iproute``
-
-   -  CentOS: ``sysstat`` and ``iproute``
-
-Once you start running the tests, the following happens:
-
-1. A copy of the root filesystem is written to ``${WORKDIR}/testimage``.
-
-2. The image is booted under QEMU using the standard ``runqemu`` script.
-
-3. A default timeout of 500 seconds occurs to allow for the boot process
-   to reach the login prompt. You can change the timeout period by
-   setting
-   :term:`TEST_QEMUBOOT_TIMEOUT`
-   in the ``local.conf`` file.
-
-4. Once the boot process is reached and the login prompt appears, the
-   tests run. The full boot log is written to
-   ``${WORKDIR}/testimage/qemu_boot_log``.
-
-5. Each test module loads in the order found in ``TEST_SUITES``. You can
-   find the full output of the commands run over SSH in
-   ``${WORKDIR}/testimgage/ssh_target_log``.
-
-6. If no failures occur, the task running the tests ends successfully.
-   You can find the output from the ``unittest`` in the task log at
-   ``${WORKDIR}/temp/log.do_testimage``.
-
-Enabling Runtime Tests on Hardware
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The OpenEmbedded build system can run tests on real hardware, and for
-certain devices it can also deploy the image to be tested onto the
-device beforehand.
-
-For automated deployment, a "master image" is installed onto the
-hardware once as part of setup. Then, each time tests are to be run, the
-following occurs:
-
-1. The master image is booted into and used to write the image to be
-   tested to a second partition.
-
-2. The device is then rebooted using an external script that you need to
-   provide.
-
-3. The device boots into the image to be tested.
-
-When running tests (independent of whether the image has been deployed
-automatically or not), the device is expected to be connected to a
-network on a pre-determined IP address. You can either use static IP
-addresses written into the image, or set the image to use DHCP and have
-your DHCP server on the test network assign a known IP address based on
-the MAC address of the device.
-
-In order to run tests on hardware, you need to set ``TEST_TARGET`` to an
-appropriate value. For QEMU, you do not have to change anything, the
-default value is "qemu". For running tests on hardware, the following
-options exist:
-
--  *"simpleremote":* Choose "simpleremote" if you are going to run tests
-   on a target system that is already running the image to be tested and
-   is available on the network. You can use "simpleremote" in
-   conjunction with either real hardware or an image running within a
-   separately started QEMU or any other virtual machine manager.
-
--  *"SystemdbootTarget":* Choose "SystemdbootTarget" if your hardware is
-   an EFI-based machine with ``systemd-boot`` as bootloader and
-   ``core-image-testmaster`` (or something similar) is installed. Also,
-   your hardware under test must be in a DHCP-enabled network that gives
-   it the same IP address for each reboot.
-
-   If you choose "SystemdbootTarget", there are additional requirements
-   and considerations. See the "`Selecting
-   SystemdbootTarget <#selecting-systemdboottarget>`__" section, which
-   follows, for more information.
-
--  *"BeagleBoneTarget":* Choose "BeagleBoneTarget" if you are deploying
-   images and running tests on the BeagleBone "Black" or original
-   "White" hardware. For information on how to use these tests, see the
-   comments at the top of the BeagleBoneTarget
-   ``meta-yocto-bsp/lib/oeqa/controllers/beaglebonetarget.py`` file.
-
--  *"EdgeRouterTarget":* Choose "EdgeRouterTarget" if you are deploying
-   images and running tests on the Ubiquiti Networks EdgeRouter Lite.
-   For information on how to use these tests, see the comments at the
-   top of the EdgeRouterTarget
-   ``meta-yocto-bsp/lib/oeqa/controllers/edgeroutertarget.py`` file.
-
--  *"GrubTarget":* Choose "GrubTarget" if you are deploying images and running
-   tests on any generic PC that boots using GRUB. For information on how
-   to use these tests, see the comments at the top of the GrubTarget
-   ``meta-yocto-bsp/lib/oeqa/controllers/grubtarget.py`` file.
-
--  *"your-target":* Create your own custom target if you want to run
-   tests when you are deploying images and running tests on a custom
-   machine within your BSP layer. To do this, you need to add a Python
-   unit that defines the target class under ``lib/oeqa/controllers/``
-   within your layer. You must also provide an empty ``__init__.py``.
-   For examples, see files in ``meta-yocto-bsp/lib/oeqa/controllers/``.
-
-Selecting SystemdbootTarget
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-If you did not set ``TEST_TARGET`` to "SystemdbootTarget", then you do
-not need any information in this section. You can skip down to the
-"`Running Tests <#qemu-image-running-tests>`__" section.
-
-If you did set ``TEST_TARGET`` to "SystemdbootTarget", you also need to
-perform a one-time setup of your master image by doing the following:
-
-1. *Set EFI_PROVIDER:* Be sure that ``EFI_PROVIDER`` is as follows:
-   ::
-
-      EFI_PROVIDER = "systemd-boot"
-
-2. *Build the master image:* Build the ``core-image-testmaster`` image.
-   The ``core-image-testmaster`` recipe is provided as an example for a
-   "master" image and you can customize the image recipe as you would
-   any other recipe.
-
-   Here are the image recipe requirements:
-
-   -  Inherits ``core-image`` so that kernel modules are installed.
-
-   -  Installs normal linux utilities not busybox ones (e.g. ``bash``,
-      ``coreutils``, ``tar``, ``gzip``, and ``kmod``).
-
-   -  Uses a custom Initial RAM Disk (initramfs) image with a custom
-      installer. A normal image that you can install usually creates a
-      single rootfs partition. This image uses another installer that
-      creates a specific partition layout. Not all Board Support
-      Packages (BSPs) can use an installer. For such cases, you need to
-      manually create the following partition layout on the target:
-
-      -  First partition mounted under ``/boot``, labeled "boot".
-
-      -  The main rootfs partition where this image gets installed,
-         which is mounted under ``/``.
-
-      -  Another partition labeled "testrootfs" where test images get
-         deployed.
-
-3. *Install image:* Install the image that you just built on the target
-   system.
-
-The final thing you need to do when setting ``TEST_TARGET`` to
-"SystemdbootTarget" is to set up the test image:
-
-1. *Set up your local.conf file:* Make sure you have the following
-   statements in your ``local.conf`` file:
-   ::
-
-      IMAGE_FSTYPES += "tar.gz"
-      INHERIT += "testimage"
-      TEST_TARGET = "SystemdbootTarget"
-      TEST_TARGET_IP = "192.168.2.3"
-
-2. *Build your test image:* Use BitBake to build the image:
-   ::
-
-      $ bitbake core-image-sato
-
-Power Control
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-For most hardware targets other than "simpleremote", you can control
-power:
-
--  You can use ``TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD`` together with
-   ``TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`` as a command that runs on the host
-   and does power cycling. The test code passes one argument to that
-   command: off, on or cycle (off then on). Here is an example that
-   could appear in your ``local.conf`` file:
-   ::
-
-      TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD = "powercontrol.exp test 10.11.12.1 nuc1"
-
-   In this example, the expect
-   script does the following:
-
-   .. code-block:: shell
-
-      ssh test@10.11.12.1 "pyctl nuc1 arg"
-
-   It then runs a Python script that controls power for a label called
-   ``nuc1``.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      You need to customize ``TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD`` and
-      ``TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`` for your own setup. The one requirement
-      is that it accepts "on", "off", and "cycle" as the last argument.
-
--  When no command is defined, it connects to the device over SSH and
-   uses the classic reboot command to reboot the device. Classic reboot
-   is fine as long as the machine actually reboots (i.e. the SSH test
-   has not failed). It is useful for scenarios where you have a simple
-   setup, typically with a single board, and where some manual
-   interaction is okay from time to time.
-
-If you have no hardware to automatically perform power control but still
-wish to experiment with automated hardware testing, you can use the
-``dialog-power-control`` script that shows a dialog prompting you to perform
-the required power action. This script requires either KDialog or Zenity
-to be installed. To use this script, set the
-:term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD`
-variable as follows:
-::
-
-   TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD = "${COREBASE}/scripts/contrib/dialog-power-control"
-
-Serial Console Connection
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-For test target classes requiring a serial console to interact with the
-bootloader (e.g. BeagleBoneTarget, EdgeRouterTarget, and GrubTarget),
-you need to specify a command to use to connect to the serial console of
-the target machine by using the
-:term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD`
-variable and optionally the
-:term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`
-variable.
-
-These cases could be a serial terminal program if the machine is
-connected to a local serial port, or a ``telnet`` or ``ssh`` command
-connecting to a remote console server. Regardless of the case, the
-command simply needs to connect to the serial console and forward that
-connection to standard input and output as any normal terminal program
-does. For example, to use the picocom terminal program on serial device
-``/dev/ttyUSB0`` at 115200bps, you would set the variable as follows:
-::
-
-   TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD = "picocom /dev/ttyUSB0 -b 115200"
-
-For local
-devices where the serial port device disappears when the device reboots,
-an additional "serdevtry" wrapper script is provided. To use this
-wrapper, simply prefix the terminal command with
-``${COREBASE}/scripts/contrib/serdevtry``:
-::
-
-   TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD = "${COREBASE}/scripts/contrib/serdevtry picocom -b 115200 /dev/ttyUSB0"
-
-Running Tests
--------------
-
-You can start the tests automatically or manually:
-
--  *Automatically running tests:* To run the tests automatically after
-   the OpenEmbedded build system successfully creates an image, first
-   set the
-   :term:`TESTIMAGE_AUTO`
-   variable to "1" in your ``local.conf`` file in the
-   :term:`Build Directory`:
-   ::
-
-      TESTIMAGE_AUTO = "1"
-
-   Next, build your image. If the image successfully builds, the
-   tests run:
-   ::
-
-      bitbake core-image-sato
-
--  *Manually running tests:* To manually run the tests, first globally
-   inherit the
-   :ref:`testimage <ref-classes-testimage*>` class
-   by editing your ``local.conf`` file:
-   ::
-
-      INHERIT += "testimage"
-
-   Next, use BitBake to run the tests:
-   ::
-
-      bitbake -c testimage image
-
-All test files reside in ``meta/lib/oeqa/runtime`` in the
-:term:`Source Directory`. A test name maps
-directly to a Python module. Each test module may contain a number of
-individual tests. Tests are usually grouped together by the area tested
-(e.g tests for systemd reside in ``meta/lib/oeqa/runtime/systemd.py``).
-
-You can add tests to any layer provided you place them in the proper
-area and you extend :term:`BBPATH` in
-the ``local.conf`` file as normal. Be sure that tests reside in
-``layer/lib/oeqa/runtime``.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Be sure that module names do not collide with module names used in
-   the default set of test modules in ``meta/lib/oeqa/runtime``.
-
-You can change the set of tests run by appending or overriding
-:term:`TEST_SUITES` variable in
-``local.conf``. Each name in ``TEST_SUITES`` represents a required test
-for the image. Test modules named within ``TEST_SUITES`` cannot be
-skipped even if a test is not suitable for an image (e.g. running the
-RPM tests on an image without ``rpm``). Appending "auto" to
-``TEST_SUITES`` causes the build system to try to run all tests that are
-suitable for the image (i.e. each test module may elect to skip itself).
-
-The order you list tests in ``TEST_SUITES`` is important and influences
-test dependencies. Consequently, tests that depend on other tests should
-be added after the test on which they depend. For example, since the
-``ssh`` test depends on the ``ping`` test, "ssh" needs to come after
-"ping" in the list. The test class provides no re-ordering or dependency
-handling.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Each module can have multiple classes with multiple test methods.
-   And, Python ``unittest`` rules apply.
-
-Here are some things to keep in mind when running tests:
-
--  The default tests for the image are defined as:
-   ::
-
-      DEFAULT_TEST_SUITES_pn-image = "ping ssh df connman syslog xorg scp vnc date rpm dnf dmesg"
-
--  Add your own test to the list of the by using the following:
-   ::
-
-      TEST_SUITES_append = " mytest"
-
--  Run a specific list of tests as follows:
-   ::
-
-     TEST_SUITES = "test1 test2 test3"
-
-   Remember, order is important. Be sure to place a test that is
-   dependent on another test later in the order.
-
-Exporting Tests
----------------
-
-You can export tests so that they can run independently of the build
-system. Exporting tests is required if you want to be able to hand the
-test execution off to a scheduler. You can only export tests that are
-defined in :term:`TEST_SUITES`.
-
-If your image is already built, make sure the following are set in your
-``local.conf`` file:
-::
-
-   INHERIT += "testexport"
-   TEST_TARGET_IP = "IP-address-for-the-test-target"
-   TEST_SERVER_IP = "IP-address-for-the-test-server"
-
-You can then export the tests with the
-following BitBake command form:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake image -c testexport
-
-Exporting the tests places them in the
-:term:`Build Directory` in
-``tmp/testexport/``\ image, which is controlled by the
-``TEST_EXPORT_DIR`` variable.
-
-You can now run the tests outside of the build environment:
-::
-
-   $ cd tmp/testexport/image
-   $ ./runexported.py testdata.json
-
-Here is a complete example that shows IP addresses and uses the
-``core-image-sato`` image:
-::
-
-   INHERIT += "testexport"
-   TEST_TARGET_IP = "192.168.7.2"
-   TEST_SERVER_IP = "192.168.7.1"
-
-Use BitBake to export the tests:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake core-image-sato -c testexport
-
-Run the tests outside of
-the build environment using the following:
-::
-
-   $ cd tmp/testexport/core-image-sato
-   $ ./runexported.py testdata.json
-
-Writing New Tests
------------------
-
-As mentioned previously, all new test files need to be in the proper
-place for the build system to find them. New tests for additional
-functionality outside of the core should be added to the layer that adds
-the functionality, in ``layer/lib/oeqa/runtime`` (as long as
-:term:`BBPATH` is extended in the
-layer's ``layer.conf`` file as normal). Just remember the following:
-
--  Filenames need to map directly to test (module) names.
-
--  Do not use module names that collide with existing core tests.
-
--  Minimally, an empty ``__init__.py`` file must exist in the runtime
-   directory.
-
-To create a new test, start by copying an existing module (e.g.
-``syslog.py`` or ``gcc.py`` are good ones to use). Test modules can use
-code from ``meta/lib/oeqa/utils``, which are helper classes.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Structure shell commands such that you rely on them and they return a
-   single code for success. Be aware that sometimes you will need to
-   parse the output. See the ``df.py`` and ``date.py`` modules for examples.
-
-You will notice that all test classes inherit ``oeRuntimeTest``, which
-is found in ``meta/lib/oetest.py``. This base class offers some helper
-attributes, which are described in the following sections:
-
-Class Methods
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Class methods are as follows:
-
--  *hasPackage(pkg):* Returns "True" if ``pkg`` is in the installed
-   package list of the image, which is based on the manifest file that
-   is generated during the ``do_rootfs`` task.
-
--  *hasFeature(feature):* Returns "True" if the feature is in
-   :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` or
-   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`.
-
-Class Attributes
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Class attributes are as follows:
-
--  *pscmd:* Equals "ps -ef" if ``procps`` is installed in the image.
-   Otherwise, ``pscmd`` equals "ps" (busybox).
-
--  *tc:* The called test context, which gives access to the
-   following attributes:
-
-   -  *d:* The BitBake datastore, which allows you to use stuff such
-      as ``oeRuntimeTest.tc.d.getVar("VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_init_manager")``.
-
-   -  *testslist and testsrequired:* Used internally. The tests
-      do not need these.
-
-   -  *filesdir:* The absolute path to
-      ``meta/lib/oeqa/runtime/files``, which contains helper files for
-      tests meant for copying on the target such as small files written
-      in C for compilation.
-
-   -  *target:* The target controller object used to deploy and
-      start an image on a particular target (e.g. Qemu, SimpleRemote,
-      and SystemdbootTarget). Tests usually use the following:
-
-      -  *ip:* The target's IP address.
-
-      -  *server_ip:* The host's IP address, which is usually used
-         by the DNF test suite.
-
-      -  *run(cmd, timeout=None):* The single, most used method.
-         This command is a wrapper for: ``ssh root@host "cmd"``. The
-         command returns a tuple: (status, output), which are what their
-         names imply - the return code of "cmd" and whatever output it
-         produces. The optional timeout argument represents the number
-         of seconds the test should wait for "cmd" to return. If the
-         argument is "None", the test uses the default instance's
-         timeout period, which is 300 seconds. If the argument is "0",
-         the test runs until the command returns.
-
-      -  *copy_to(localpath, remotepath):*
-         ``scp localpath root@ip:remotepath``.
-
-      -  *copy_from(remotepath, localpath):*
-         ``scp root@host:remotepath localpath``.
-
-Instance Attributes
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-A single instance attribute exists, which is ``target``. The ``target``
-instance attribute is identical to the class attribute of the same name,
-which is described in the previous section. This attribute exists as
-both an instance and class attribute so tests can use
-``self.target.run(cmd)`` in instance methods instead of
-``oeRuntimeTest.tc.target.run(cmd)``.
-
-Installing Packages in the DUT Without the Package Manager
-----------------------------------------------------------
-
-When a test requires a package built by BitBake, it is possible to
-install that package. Installing the package does not require a package
-manager be installed in the device under test (DUT). It does, however,
-require an SSH connection and the target must be using the
-``sshcontrol`` class.
-
-.. note::
-
-   This method uses ``scp`` to copy files from the host to the target, which
-   causes permissions and special attributes to be lost.
-
-A JSON file is used to define the packages needed by a test. This file
-must be in the same path as the file used to define the tests.
-Furthermore, the filename must map directly to the test module name with
-a ``.json`` extension.
-
-The JSON file must include an object with the test name as keys of an
-object or an array. This object (or array of objects) uses the following
-data:
-
--  "pkg" - A mandatory string that is the name of the package to be
-   installed.
-
--  "rm" - An optional boolean, which defaults to "false", that specifies
-   to remove the package after the test.
-
--  "extract" - An optional boolean, which defaults to "false", that
-   specifies if the package must be extracted from the package format.
-   When set to "true", the package is not automatically installed into
-   the DUT.
-
-Following is an example JSON file that handles test "foo" installing
-package "bar" and test "foobar" installing packages "foo" and "bar".
-Once the test is complete, the packages are removed from the DUT.
-::
-
-     {
-         "foo": {
-             "pkg": "bar"
-         },
-         "foobar": [
-             {
-                 "pkg": "foo",
-                 "rm": true
-             },
-             {
-                 "pkg": "bar",
-                 "rm": true
-             }
-         ]
-     }
-
-Debugging Tools and Techniques
-==============================
-
-The exact method for debugging build failures depends on the nature of
-the problem and on the system's area from which the bug originates.
-Standard debugging practices such as comparison against the last known
-working version with examination of the changes and the re-application
-of steps to identify the one causing the problem are valid for the Yocto
-Project just as they are for any other system. Even though it is
-impossible to detail every possible potential failure, this section
-provides some general tips to aid in debugging given a variety of
-situations.
-
-.. note::
-
-   A useful feature for debugging is the error reporting tool.
-   Configuring the Yocto Project to use this tool causes the
-   OpenEmbedded build system to produce error reporting commands as part
-   of the console output. You can enter the commands after the build
-   completes to log error information into a common database, that can
-   help you figure out what might be going wrong. For information on how
-   to enable and use this feature, see the
-   ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:using the error reporting tool`"
-   section.
-
-The following list shows the debugging topics in the remainder of this
-section:
-
--  "`Viewing Logs from Failed
-   Tasks <#dev-debugging-viewing-logs-from-failed-tasks>`__" describes
-   how to find and view logs from tasks that failed during the build
-   process.
-
--  "`Viewing Variable
-   Values <#dev-debugging-viewing-variable-values>`__" describes how to
-   use the BitBake ``-e`` option to examine variable values after a
-   recipe has been parsed.
-
--  ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:viewing package information with \`\`oe-pkgdata-util\`\``"
-   describes how to use the ``oe-pkgdata-util`` utility to query
-   :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` and
-   display package-related information for built packages.
-
--  "`Viewing Dependencies Between Recipes and
-   Tasks <#dev-viewing-dependencies-between-recipes-and-tasks>`__"
-   describes how to use the BitBake ``-g`` option to display recipe
-   dependency information used during the build.
-
--  "`Viewing Task Variable
-   Dependencies <#dev-viewing-task-variable-dependencies>`__" describes
-   how to use the ``bitbake-dumpsig`` command in conjunction with key
-   subdirectories in the
-   :term:`Build Directory` to determine
-   variable dependencies.
-
--  "`Running Specific Tasks <#dev-debugging-taskrunning>`__" describes
-   how to use several BitBake options (e.g. ``-c``, ``-C``, and ``-f``)
-   to run specific tasks in the build chain. It can be useful to run
-   tasks "out-of-order" when trying isolate build issues.
-
--  "`General BitBake Problems <#dev-debugging-bitbake>`__" describes how
-   to use BitBake's ``-D`` debug output option to reveal more about what
-   BitBake is doing during the build.
-
--  "`Building with No Dependencies <#dev-debugging-buildfile>`__"
-   describes how to use the BitBake ``-b`` option to build a recipe
-   while ignoring dependencies.
-
--  "`Recipe Logging Mechanisms <#recipe-logging-mechanisms>`__"
-   describes how to use the many recipe logging functions to produce
-   debugging output and report errors and warnings.
-
--  "`Debugging Parallel Make Races <#debugging-parallel-make-races>`__"
-   describes how to debug situations where the build consists of several
-   parts that are run simultaneously and when the output or result of
-   one part is not ready for use with a different part of the build that
-   depends on that output.
-
--  "`Debugging With the GNU Project Debugger (GDB)
-   Remotely <#platdev-gdb-remotedebug>`__" describes how to use GDB to
-   allow you to examine running programs, which can help you fix
-   problems.
-
--  "`Debugging with the GNU Project Debugger (GDB) on the
-   Target <#debugging-with-the-gnu-project-debugger-gdb-on-the-target>`__"
-   describes how to use GDB directly on target hardware for debugging.
-
--  "`Other Debugging Tips <#dev-other-debugging-others>`__" describes
-   miscellaneous debugging tips that can be useful.
-
-Viewing Logs from Failed Tasks
-------------------------------
-
-You can find the log for a task in the file
-``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/temp/log.do_``\ `taskname`.
-For example, the log for the
-:ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task of the
-QEMU minimal image for the x86 machine (``qemux86``) might be in
-``tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/temp/log.do_compile``.
-To see the commands :term:`BitBake` ran
-to generate a log, look at the corresponding ``run.do_``\ `taskname` file
-in the same directory.
-
-``log.do_``\ `taskname` and ``run.do_``\ `taskname` are actually symbolic
-links to ``log.do_``\ `taskname`\ ``.``\ `pid` and
-``log.run_``\ `taskname`\ ``.``\ `pid`, where `pid` is the PID the task had
-when it ran. The symlinks always point to the files corresponding to the
-most recent run.
-
-Viewing Variable Values
------------------------
-
-Sometimes you need to know the value of a variable as a result of
-BitBake's parsing step. This could be because some unexpected behavior
-occurred in your project. Perhaps an attempt to :ref:`modify a variable
-<bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:modifying existing
-variables>` did not work out as expected.
-
-BitBake's ``-e`` option is used to display variable values after
-parsing. The following command displays the variable values after the
-configuration files (i.e. ``local.conf``, ``bblayers.conf``,
-``bitbake.conf`` and so forth) have been parsed:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake -e
-
-The following command displays variable values after a specific recipe has
-been parsed. The variables include those from the configuration as well:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake -e recipename
-
-.. note::
-
-   Each recipe has its own private set of variables (datastore).
-   Internally, after parsing the configuration, a copy of the resulting
-   datastore is made prior to parsing each recipe. This copying implies
-   that variables set in one recipe will not be visible to other
-   recipes.
-
-   Likewise, each task within a recipe gets a private datastore based on
-   the recipe datastore, which means that variables set within one task
-   will not be visible to other tasks.
-
-In the output of ``bitbake -e``, each variable is preceded by a
-description of how the variable got its value, including temporary
-values that were later overridden. This description also includes
-variable flags (varflags) set on the variable. The output can be very
-helpful during debugging.
-
-Variables that are exported to the environment are preceded by
-``export`` in the output of ``bitbake -e``. See the following example:
-::
-
-   export CC="i586-poky-linux-gcc -m32 -march=i586 --sysroot=/home/ulf/poky/build/tmp/sysroots/qemux86"
-
-In addition to variable values, the output of the ``bitbake -e`` and
-``bitbake -e`` recipe commands includes the following information:
-
--  The output starts with a tree listing all configuration files and
-   classes included globally, recursively listing the files they include
-   or inherit in turn. Much of the behavior of the OpenEmbedded build
-   system (including the behavior of the :ref:`ref-manual/tasks:normal recipe build tasks`) is
-   implemented in the
-   :ref:`base <ref-classes-base>` class and the
-   classes it inherits, rather than being built into BitBake itself.
-
--  After the variable values, all functions appear in the output. For
-   shell functions, variables referenced within the function body are
-   expanded. If a function has been modified using overrides or using
-   override-style operators like ``_append`` and ``_prepend``, then the
-   final assembled function body appears in the output.
-
-Viewing Package Information with ``oe-pkgdata-util``
-----------------------------------------------------
-
-You can use the ``oe-pkgdata-util`` command-line utility to query
-:term:`PKGDATA_DIR` and display
-various package-related information. When you use the utility, you must
-use it to view information on packages that have already been built.
-
-Following are a few of the available ``oe-pkgdata-util`` subcommands.
-
-.. note::
-
-   You can use the standard \* and ? globbing wildcards as part of
-   package names and paths.
-
--  ``oe-pkgdata-util list-pkgs [pattern]``: Lists all packages
-   that have been built, optionally limiting the match to packages that
-   match pattern.
-
--  ``oe-pkgdata-util list-pkg-files package ...``: Lists the
-   files and directories contained in the given packages.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      A different way to view the contents of a package is to look at
-      the
-      ``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/packages-split``
-      directory of the recipe that generates the package. This directory
-      is created by the
-      :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task
-      and has one subdirectory for each package the recipe generates,
-      which contains the files stored in that package.
-
-      If you want to inspect the ``${WORKDIR}/packages-split``
-      directory, make sure that
-      :ref:`rm_work <ref-classes-rm-work>` is not
-      enabled when you build the recipe.
-
--  ``oe-pkgdata-util find-path path ...``: Lists the names of
-   the packages that contain the given paths. For example, the following
-   tells us that ``/usr/share/man/man1/make.1`` is contained in the
-   ``make-doc`` package:
-   ::
-
-      $ oe-pkgdata-util find-path /usr/share/man/man1/make.1
-      make-doc: /usr/share/man/man1/make.1
-
--  ``oe-pkgdata-util lookup-recipe package ...``: Lists the name
-   of the recipes that produce the given packages.
-
-For more information on the ``oe-pkgdata-util`` command, use the help
-facility:
-::
-
-   $ oe-pkgdata-util --help
-   $ oe-pkgdata-util subcommand --help
-
-Viewing Dependencies Between Recipes and Tasks
-----------------------------------------------
-
-Sometimes it can be hard to see why BitBake wants to build other recipes
-before the one you have specified. Dependency information can help you
-understand why a recipe is built.
-
-To generate dependency information for a recipe, run the following
-command:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake -g recipename
-
-This command writes the following files in the current directory:
-
--  ``pn-buildlist``: A list of recipes/targets involved in building
-   `recipename`. "Involved" here means that at least one task from the
-   recipe needs to run when building `recipename` from scratch. Targets
-   that are in
-   :term:`ASSUME_PROVIDED`
-   are not listed.
-
--  ``task-depends.dot``: A graph showing dependencies between tasks.
-
-The graphs are in
-`DOT <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/DOT_%28graph_description_language%29>`__
-format and can be converted to images (e.g. using the ``dot`` tool from
-`Graphviz <https://www.graphviz.org/>`__).
-
-.. note::
-
-   -  DOT files use a plain text format. The graphs generated using the
-      ``bitbake -g`` command are often so large as to be difficult to
-      read without special pruning (e.g. with Bitbake's ``-I`` option)
-      and processing. Despite the form and size of the graphs, the
-      corresponding ``.dot`` files can still be possible to read and
-      provide useful information.
-
-      As an example, the ``task-depends.dot`` file contains lines such
-      as the following:
-      ::
-
-         "libxslt.do_configure" -> "libxml2.do_populate_sysroot"
-
-      The above example line reveals that the
-      :ref:`ref-tasks-configure`
-      task in ``libxslt`` depends on the
-      :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot`
-      task in ``libxml2``, which is a normal
-      :term:`DEPENDS` dependency
-      between the two recipes.
-
-   -  For an example of how ``.dot`` files can be processed, see the
-      ``scripts/contrib/graph-tool`` Python script, which finds and
-      displays paths between graph nodes.
-
-You can use a different method to view dependency information by using
-the following command:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake -g -u taskexp recipename
-
-This command
-displays a GUI window from which you can view build-time and runtime
-dependencies for the recipes involved in building recipename.
-
-Viewing Task Variable Dependencies
-----------------------------------
-
-As mentioned in the
-":ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-execution:checksums (signatures)`" section of the BitBake
-User Manual, BitBake tries to automatically determine what variables a
-task depends on so that it can rerun the task if any values of the
-variables change. This determination is usually reliable. However, if
-you do things like construct variable names at runtime, then you might
-have to manually declare dependencies on those variables using
-``vardeps`` as described in the
-":ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:variable flags`" section of the BitBake
-User Manual.
-
-If you are unsure whether a variable dependency is being picked up
-automatically for a given task, you can list the variable dependencies
-BitBake has determined by doing the following:
-
-1. Build the recipe containing the task:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake recipename
-
-2. Inside the :term:`STAMPS_DIR`
-   directory, find the signature data (``sigdata``) file that
-   corresponds to the task. The ``sigdata`` files contain a pickled
-   Python database of all the metadata that went into creating the input
-   checksum for the task. As an example, for the
-   :ref:`ref-tasks-fetch` task of the
-   ``db`` recipe, the ``sigdata`` file might be found in the following
-   location:
-   ::
-
-      ${BUILDDIR}/tmp/stamps/i586-poky-linux/db/6.0.30-r1.do_fetch.sigdata.7c048c18222b16ff0bcee2000ef648b1
-
-   For tasks that are accelerated through the shared state
-   (:ref:`sstate <overview-manual/concepts:shared state cache>`) cache, an
-   additional ``siginfo`` file is written into
-   :term:`SSTATE_DIR` along with
-   the cached task output. The ``siginfo`` files contain exactly the
-   same information as ``sigdata`` files.
-
-3. Run ``bitbake-dumpsig`` on the ``sigdata`` or ``siginfo`` file. Here
-   is an example:
-   ::
-
-      $ bitbake-dumpsig ${BUILDDIR}/tmp/stamps/i586-poky-linux/db/6.0.30-r1.do_fetch.sigdata.7c048c18222b16ff0bcee2000ef648b1
-
-   In the output of the above command, you will find a line like the
-   following, which lists all the (inferred) variable dependencies for
-   the task. This list also includes indirect dependencies from
-   variables depending on other variables, recursively.
-   ::
-
-      Task dependencies: ['PV', 'SRCREV', 'SRC_URI', 'SRC_URI[md5sum]', 'SRC_URI[sha256sum]', 'base_do_fetch']
-
-   .. note::
-
-      Functions (e.g. ``base_do_fetch``) also count as variable dependencies.
-      These functions in turn depend on the variables they reference.
-
-   The output of ``bitbake-dumpsig`` also includes the value each
-   variable had, a list of dependencies for each variable, and
-   :term:`bitbake:BB_HASHBASE_WHITELIST`
-   information.
-
-There is also a ``bitbake-diffsigs`` command for comparing two
-``siginfo`` or ``sigdata`` files. This command can be helpful when
-trying to figure out what changed between two versions of a task. If you
-call ``bitbake-diffsigs`` with just one file, the command behaves like
-``bitbake-dumpsig``.
-
-You can also use BitBake to dump out the signature construction
-information without executing tasks by using either of the following
-BitBake command-line options:
-::
-
-   ‐‐dump-signatures=SIGNATURE_HANDLER
-   -S SIGNATURE_HANDLER
-
-
-.. note::
-
-   Two common values for `SIGNATURE_HANDLER` are "none" and "printdiff", which
-   dump only the signature or compare the dumped signature with the cached one,
-   respectively.
-
-Using BitBake with either of these options causes BitBake to dump out
-``sigdata`` files in the ``stamps`` directory for every task it would
-have executed instead of building the specified target package.
-
-Viewing Metadata Used to Create the Input Signature of a Shared State Task
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-Seeing what metadata went into creating the input signature of a shared
-state (sstate) task can be a useful debugging aid. This information is
-available in signature information (``siginfo``) files in
-:term:`SSTATE_DIR`. For
-information on how to view and interpret information in ``siginfo``
-files, see the "`Viewing Task Variable
-Dependencies <#dev-viewing-task-variable-dependencies>`__" section.
-
-For conceptual information on shared state, see the
-":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:shared state`"
-section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
-
-Invalidating Shared State to Force a Task to Run
-------------------------------------------------
-
-The OpenEmbedded build system uses
-:ref:`checksums <overview-manual/concepts:checksums (signatures)>` and
-:ref:`overview-manual/concepts:shared state` cache to avoid unnecessarily
-rebuilding tasks. Collectively, this scheme is known as "shared state
-code".
-
-As with all schemes, this one has some drawbacks. It is possible that
-you could make implicit changes to your code that the checksum
-calculations do not take into account. These implicit changes affect a
-task's output but do not trigger the shared state code into rebuilding a
-recipe. Consider an example during which a tool changes its output.
-Assume that the output of ``rpmdeps`` changes. The result of the change
-should be that all the ``package`` and ``package_write_rpm`` shared
-state cache items become invalid. However, because the change to the
-output is external to the code and therefore implicit, the associated
-shared state cache items do not become invalidated. In this case, the
-build process uses the cached items rather than running the task again.
-Obviously, these types of implicit changes can cause problems.
-
-To avoid these problems during the build, you need to understand the
-effects of any changes you make. Realize that changes you make directly
-to a function are automatically factored into the checksum calculation.
-Thus, these explicit changes invalidate the associated area of shared
-state cache. However, you need to be aware of any implicit changes that
-are not obvious changes to the code and could affect the output of a
-given task.
-
-When you identify an implicit change, you can easily take steps to
-invalidate the cache and force the tasks to run. The steps you can take
-are as simple as changing a function's comments in the source code. For
-example, to invalidate package shared state files, change the comment
-statements of
-:ref:`ref-tasks-package` or the
-comments of one of the functions it calls. Even though the change is
-purely cosmetic, it causes the checksum to be recalculated and forces
-the build system to run the task again.
-
-.. note::
-
-   For an example of a commit that makes a cosmetic change to invalidate
-   shared state, see this
-   :yocto_git:`commit </poky/commit/meta/classes/package.bbclass?id=737f8bbb4f27b4837047cb9b4fbfe01dfde36d54>`.
-
-Running Specific Tasks
-----------------------
-
-Any given recipe consists of a set of tasks. The standard BitBake
-behavior in most cases is: ``do_fetch``, ``do_unpack``, ``do_patch``,
-``do_configure``, ``do_compile``, ``do_install``, ``do_package``,
-``do_package_write_*``, and ``do_build``. The default task is
-``do_build`` and any tasks on which it depends build first. Some tasks,
-such as ``do_devshell``, are not part of the default build chain. If you
-wish to run a task that is not part of the default build chain, you can
-use the ``-c`` option in BitBake. Here is an example:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -c devshell
-
-The ``-c`` option respects task dependencies, which means that all other
-tasks (including tasks from other recipes) that the specified task
-depends on will be run before the task. Even when you manually specify a
-task to run with ``-c``, BitBake will only run the task if it considers
-it "out of date". See the
-":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:stamp files and the rerunning of tasks`"
-section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual for how
-BitBake determines whether a task is "out of date".
-
-If you want to force an up-to-date task to be rerun (e.g. because you
-made manual modifications to the recipe's
-:term:`WORKDIR` that you want to try
-out), then you can use the ``-f`` option.
-
-.. note::
-
-   The reason ``-f`` is never required when running the
-   :ref:`ref-tasks-devshell` task is because the
-   [\ :ref:`nostamp <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:variable flags>`\ ]
-   variable flag is already set for the task.
-
-The following example shows one way you can use the ``-f`` option:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake matchbox-desktop
-             .
-             .
-   make some changes to the source code in the work directory
-             .
-             .
-   $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -c compile -f
-   $ bitbake matchbox-desktop
-
-This sequence first builds and then recompiles ``matchbox-desktop``. The
-last command reruns all tasks (basically the packaging tasks) after the
-compile. BitBake recognizes that the ``do_compile`` task was rerun and
-therefore understands that the other tasks also need to be run again.
-
-Another, shorter way to rerun a task and all
-:ref:`ref-manual/tasks:normal recipe build tasks`
-that depend on it is to use the ``-C`` option.
-
-.. note::
-
-   This option is upper-cased and is separate from the ``-c``
-   option, which is lower-cased.
-
-Using this option invalidates the given task and then runs the
-:ref:`ref-tasks-build` task, which is
-the default task if no task is given, and the tasks on which it depends.
-You could replace the final two commands in the previous example with
-the following single command:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -C compile
-
-Internally, the ``-f`` and ``-C`` options work by tainting (modifying)
-the input checksum of the specified task. This tainting indirectly
-causes the task and its dependent tasks to be rerun through the normal
-task dependency mechanisms.
-
-.. note::
-
-   BitBake explicitly keeps track of which tasks have been tainted in
-   this fashion, and will print warnings such as the following for
-   builds involving such tasks:
-
-   .. code-block:: none
-
-      WARNING: /home/ulf/poky/meta/recipes-sato/matchbox-desktop/matchbox-desktop_2.1.bb.do_compile is tainted from a forced run
-
-
-   The purpose of the warning is to let you know that the work directory
-   and build output might not be in the clean state they would be in for
-   a "normal" build, depending on what actions you took. To get rid of
-   such warnings, you can remove the work directory and rebuild the
-   recipe, as follows:
-   ::
-
-      $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -c clean
-      $ bitbake matchbox-desktop
-
-
-You can view a list of tasks in a given package by running the
-``do_listtasks`` task as follows:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -c listtasks
-
-The results appear as output to the console and are also in
-the file ``${WORKDIR}/temp/log.do_listtasks``.
-
-General BitBake Problems
-------------------------
-
-You can see debug output from BitBake by using the ``-D`` option. The
-debug output gives more information about what BitBake is doing and the
-reason behind it. Each ``-D`` option you use increases the logging
-level. The most common usage is ``-DDD``.
-
-The output from ``bitbake -DDD -v targetname`` can reveal why BitBake
-chose a certain version of a package or why BitBake picked a certain
-provider. This command could also help you in a situation where you
-think BitBake did something unexpected.
-
-Building with No Dependencies
------------------------------
-
-To build a specific recipe (``.bb`` file), you can use the following
-command form:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake -b somepath/somerecipe.bb
-
-This command form does
-not check for dependencies. Consequently, you should use it only when
-you know existing dependencies have been met.
-
-.. note::
-
-   You can also specify fragments of the filename. In this case, BitBake
-   checks for a unique match.
-
-Recipe Logging Mechanisms
--------------------------
-
-The Yocto Project provides several logging functions for producing
-debugging output and reporting errors and warnings. For Python
-functions, the following logging functions exist. All of these functions
-log to ``${T}/log.do_``\ `task`, and can also log to standard output
-(stdout) with the right settings:
-
--  ``bb.plain(msg)``: Writes msg as is to the log while also
-   logging to stdout.
-
--  ``bb.note(msg)``: Writes "NOTE: msg" to the log. Also logs to
-   stdout if BitBake is called with "-v".
-
--  ``bb.debug(level, msg)``: Writes "DEBUG: msg" to the
-   log. Also logs to stdout if the log level is greater than or equal to
-   level. See the ":ref:`-D <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-intro:usage and syntax>`" option
-   in the BitBake User Manual for more information.
-
--  ``bb.warn(msg)``: Writes "WARNING: msg" to the log while also
-   logging to stdout.
-
--  ``bb.error(msg)``: Writes "ERROR: msg" to the log while also
-   logging to standard out (stdout).
-
-   .. note::
-
-      Calling this function does not cause the task to fail.
-
--  ``bb.fatal(``\ msg\ ``)``: This logging function is similar to
-   ``bb.error(``\ msg\ ``)`` but also causes the calling task to fail.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      ``bb.fatal()`` raises an exception, which means you do not need to put a
-      "return" statement after the function.
-
-The same logging functions are also available in shell functions, under
-the names ``bbplain``, ``bbnote``, ``bbdebug``, ``bbwarn``, ``bberror``,
-and ``bbfatal``. The
-:ref:`logging <ref-classes-logging>` class
-implements these functions. See that class in the ``meta/classes``
-folder of the :term:`Source Directory` for information.
-
-Logging With Python
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-When creating recipes using Python and inserting code that handles build
-logs, keep in mind the goal is to have informative logs while keeping
-the console as "silent" as possible. Also, if you want status messages
-in the log, use the "debug" loglevel.
-
-Following is an example written in Python. The code handles logging for
-a function that determines the number of tasks needed to be run. See the
-":ref:`ref-tasks-listtasks`"
-section for additional information:
-::
-
-   python do_listtasks() {
-       bb.debug(2, "Starting to figure out the task list")
-       if noteworthy_condition:
-           bb.note("There are 47 tasks to run")
-       bb.debug(2, "Got to point xyz")
-       if warning_trigger:
-           bb.warn("Detected warning_trigger, this might be a problem later.")
-       if recoverable_error:
-           bb.error("Hit recoverable_error, you really need to fix this!")
-       if fatal_error:
-           bb.fatal("fatal_error detected, unable to print the task list")
-       bb.plain("The tasks present are abc")
-       bb.debug(2, "Finished figuring out the tasklist")
-   }
-
-Logging With Bash
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-When creating recipes using Bash and inserting code that handles build
-logs, you have the same goals - informative with minimal console output.
-The syntax you use for recipes written in Bash is similar to that of
-recipes written in Python described in the previous section.
-
-Following is an example written in Bash. The code logs the progress of
-the ``do_my_function`` function.
-::
-
-   do_my_function() {
-       bbdebug 2 "Running do_my_function"
-       if [ exceptional_condition ]; then
-           bbnote "Hit exceptional_condition"
-       fi
-       bbdebug 2  "Got to point xyz"
-       if [ warning_trigger ]; then
-           bbwarn "Detected warning_trigger, this might cause a problem later."
-       fi
-       if [ recoverable_error ]; then
-           bberror "Hit recoverable_error, correcting"
-       fi
-       if [ fatal_error ]; then
-           bbfatal "fatal_error detected"
-       fi
-       bbdebug 2 "Completed do_my_function"
-   }
-
-
-Debugging Parallel Make Races
------------------------------
-
-A parallel ``make`` race occurs when the build consists of several parts
-that are run simultaneously and a situation occurs when the output or
-result of one part is not ready for use with a different part of the
-build that depends on that output. Parallel make races are annoying and
-can sometimes be difficult to reproduce and fix. However, some simple
-tips and tricks exist that can help you debug and fix them. This section
-presents a real-world example of an error encountered on the Yocto
-Project autobuilder and the process used to fix it.
-
-.. note::
-
-   If you cannot properly fix a ``make`` race condition, you can work around it
-   by clearing either the :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` or :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST`
-   variables.
-
-The Failure
-~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-For this example, assume that you are building an image that depends on
-the "neard" package. And, during the build, BitBake runs into problems
-and creates the following output.
-
-.. note::
-
-   This example log file has longer lines artificially broken to make
-   the listing easier to read.
-
-If you examine the output or the log file, you see the failure during
-``make``:
-
-.. code-block:: none
-
-   | DEBUG: SITE files ['endian-little', 'bit-32', 'ix86-common', 'common-linux', 'common-glibc', 'i586-linux', 'common']
-   | DEBUG: Executing shell function do_compile
-   | NOTE: make -j 16
-   | make --no-print-directory all-am
-   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
-   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
-   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
-   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
-     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/types.h include/near/types.h
-   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
-     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/log.h include/near/log.h
-   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
-     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/plugin.h include/near/plugin.h
-   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
-   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
-   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
-   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
-     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/tag.h include/near/tag.h
-   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
-   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
-     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/adapter.h include/near/adapter.h
-   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
-   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
-     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/ndef.h include/near/ndef.h
-   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
-     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/tlv.h include/near/tlv.h
-   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
-   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
-   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
-     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/setting.h include/near/setting.h
-   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
-   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
-   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
-   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
-     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/device.h include/near/device.h
-   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
-     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/nfc_copy.h include/near/nfc_copy.h
-   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
-     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/snep.h include/near/snep.h
-   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
-     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/version.h include/near/version.h
-   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
-     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/dbus.h include/near/dbus.h
-   | ./src/genbuiltin nfctype1 nfctype2 nfctype3 nfctype4 p2p > src/builtin.h
-   | i586-poky-linux-gcc  -m32 -march=i586 --sysroot=/home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/
-     build/build/tmp/sysroots/qemux86 -DHAVE_CONFIG_H -I. -I./include -I./src -I./gdbus  -I/home/pokybuild/
-     yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/sysroots/qemux86/usr/include/glib-2.0
-     -I/home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/sysroots/qemux86/usr/
-     lib/glib-2.0/include  -I/home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/
-     tmp/sysroots/qemux86/usr/include/dbus-1.0 -I/home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/
-     nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/sysroots/qemux86/usr/lib/dbus-1.0/include  -I/home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/
-     yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/sysroots/qemux86/usr/include/libnl3
-     -DNEAR_PLUGIN_BUILTIN -DPLUGINDIR=\""/usr/lib/near/plugins"\"
-     -DCONFIGDIR=\""/etc/neard\"" -O2 -pipe -g -feliminate-unused-debug-types -c
-     -o tools/snep-send.o tools/snep-send.c
-   | In file included from tools/snep-send.c:16:0:
-   | tools/../src/near.h:41:23: fatal error: near/dbus.h: No such file or directory
-   |  #include <near/dbus.h>
-   |                        ^
-   | compilation terminated.
-   | make[1]: *** [tools/snep-send.o] Error 1
-   | make[1]: *** Waiting for unfinished jobs....
-   | make: *** [all] Error 2
-   | ERROR: oe_runmake failed
-
-Reproducing the Error
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Because race conditions are intermittent, they do not manifest
-themselves every time you do the build. In fact, most times the build
-will complete without problems even though the potential race condition
-exists. Thus, once the error surfaces, you need a way to reproduce it.
-
-In this example, compiling the "neard" package is causing the problem.
-So the first thing to do is build "neard" locally. Before you start the
-build, set the
-:term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` variable
-in your ``local.conf`` file to a high number (e.g. "-j 20"). Using a
-high value for ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` increases the chances of the race
-condition showing up:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake neard
-
-Once the local build for "neard" completes, start a ``devshell`` build:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake neard -c devshell
-
-For information on how to use a
-``devshell``, see the "`Using a Development
-Shell <#platdev-appdev-devshell>`__" section.
-
-In the ``devshell``, do the following:
-::
-
-   $ make clean
-   $ make tools/snep-send.o
-
-The ``devshell`` commands cause the failure to clearly
-be visible. In this case, a missing dependency exists for the "neard"
-Makefile target. Here is some abbreviated, sample output with the
-missing dependency clearly visible at the end:
-::
-
-   i586-poky-linux-gcc  -m32 -march=i586 --sysroot=/home/scott-lenovo/......
-      .
-      .
-      .
-   tools/snep-send.c
-   In file included from tools/snep-send.c:16:0:
-   tools/../src/near.h:41:23: fatal error: near/dbus.h: No such file or directory
-    #include <near/dbus.h>
-                     ^
-   compilation terminated.
-   make: *** [tools/snep-send.o] Error 1
-   $
-
-
-Creating a Patch for the Fix
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Because there is a missing dependency for the Makefile target, you need
-to patch the ``Makefile.am`` file, which is generated from
-``Makefile.in``. You can use Quilt to create the patch:
-::
-
-   $ quilt new parallelmake.patch
-   Patch patches/parallelmake.patch is now on top
-   $ quilt add Makefile.am
-   File Makefile.am added to patch patches/parallelmake.patch
-
-For more information on using Quilt, see the
-"`Using Quilt in Your Workflow <#using-a-quilt-workflow>`__" section.
-
-At this point you need to make the edits to ``Makefile.am`` to add the
-missing dependency. For our example, you have to add the following line
-to the file:
-::
-
-   tools/snep-send.$(OBJEXT): include/near/dbus.h
-
-Once you have edited the file, use the ``refresh`` command to create the
-patch:
-::
-
-   $ quilt refresh
-   Refreshed patch patches/parallelmake.patch
-
-Once
-the patch file exists, you need to add it back to the originating recipe
-folder. Here is an example assuming a top-level
-:term:`Source Directory` named ``poky``:
-::
-
-   $ cp patches/parallelmake.patch poky/meta/recipes-connectivity/neard/neard
-
-The final thing you need to do to implement the fix in the build is to
-update the "neard" recipe (i.e. ``neard-0.14.bb``) so that the
-:term:`SRC_URI` statement includes
-the patch file. The recipe file is in the folder above the patch. Here
-is what the edited ``SRC_URI`` statement would look like:
-::
-
-   SRC_URI = "${KERNELORG_MIRROR}/linux/network/nfc/${BPN}-${PV}.tar.xz \
-              file://neard.in \
-              file://neard.service.in \
-              file://parallelmake.patch \
-             "
-
-With the patch complete and moved to the correct folder and the
-``SRC_URI`` statement updated, you can exit the ``devshell``:
-::
-
-   $ exit
-
-Testing the Build
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-With everything in place, you can get back to trying the build again
-locally:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake neard
-
-This build should succeed.
-
-Now you can open up a ``devshell`` again and repeat the clean and make
-operations as follows:
-::
-
-   $ bitbake neard -c devshell
-   $ make clean
-   $ make tools/snep-send.o
-
-The build should work without issue.
-
-As with all solved problems, if they originated upstream, you need to
-submit the fix for the recipe in OE-Core and upstream so that the
-problem is taken care of at its source. See the "`Submitting a Change to
-the Yocto Project <#how-to-submit-a-change>`__" section for more
-information.
-
-Debugging With the GNU Project Debugger (GDB) Remotely
-------------------------------------------------------
-
-GDB allows you to examine running programs, which in turn helps you to
-understand and fix problems. It also allows you to perform post-mortem
-style analysis of program crashes. GDB is available as a package within
-the Yocto Project and is installed in SDK images by default. See the
-":ref:`ref-manual/images:Images`" chapter in the Yocto
-Project Reference Manual for a description of these images. You can find
-information on GDB at https://sourceware.org/gdb/.
-
-.. note::
-
-   For best results, install debug (``-dbg``) packages for the applications you
-   are going to debug. Doing so makes extra debug symbols available that give
-   you more meaningful output.
-
-Sometimes, due to memory or disk space constraints, it is not possible
-to use GDB directly on the remote target to debug applications. These
-constraints arise because GDB needs to load the debugging information
-and the binaries of the process being debugged. Additionally, GDB needs
-to perform many computations to locate information such as function
-names, variable names and values, stack traces and so forth - even
-before starting the debugging process. These extra computations place
-more load on the target system and can alter the characteristics of the
-program being debugged.
-
-To help get past the previously mentioned constraints, you can use
-gdbserver, which runs on the remote target and does not load any
-debugging information from the debugged process. Instead, a GDB instance
-processes the debugging information that is run on a remote computer -
-the host GDB. The host GDB then sends control commands to gdbserver to
-make it stop or start the debugged program, as well as read or write
-memory regions of that debugged program. All the debugging information
-loaded and processed as well as all the heavy debugging is done by the
-host GDB. Offloading these processes gives the gdbserver running on the
-target a chance to remain small and fast.
-
-Because the host GDB is responsible for loading the debugging
-information and for doing the necessary processing to make actual
-debugging happen, you have to make sure the host can access the
-unstripped binaries complete with their debugging information and also
-be sure the target is compiled with no optimizations. The host GDB must
-also have local access to all the libraries used by the debugged
-program. Because gdbserver does not need any local debugging
-information, the binaries on the remote target can remain stripped.
-However, the binaries must also be compiled without optimization so they
-match the host's binaries.
-
-To remain consistent with GDB documentation and terminology, the binary
-being debugged on the remote target machine is referred to as the
-"inferior" binary. For documentation on GDB see the `GDB
-site <https://sourceware.org/gdb/documentation/>`__.
-
-The following steps show you how to debug using the GNU project
-debugger.
-
-1. *Configure your build system to construct the companion debug
-   filesystem:*
-
-   In your ``local.conf`` file, set the following:
-   ::
-
-      IMAGE_GEN_DEBUGFS = "1"
-      IMAGE_FSTYPES_DEBUGFS = "tar.bz2"
-
-   These options cause the
-   OpenEmbedded build system to generate a special companion filesystem
-   fragment, which contains the matching source and debug symbols to
-   your deployable filesystem. The build system does this by looking at
-   what is in the deployed filesystem, and pulling the corresponding
-   ``-dbg`` packages.
-
-   The companion debug filesystem is not a complete filesystem, but only
-   contains the debug fragments. This filesystem must be combined with
-   the full filesystem for debugging. Subsequent steps in this procedure
-   show how to combine the partial filesystem with the full filesystem.
-
-2. *Configure the system to include gdbserver in the target filesystem:*
-
-   Make the following addition in either your ``local.conf`` file or in
-   an image recipe:
-   ::
-
-      IMAGE_INSTALL_append = " gdbserver"
-
-   The change makes
-   sure the ``gdbserver`` package is included.
-
-3. *Build the environment:*
-
-   Use the following command to construct the image and the companion
-   Debug Filesystem:
-   ::
-
-      $ bitbake image
-
-   Build the cross GDB component and
-   make it available for debugging. Build the SDK that matches the
-   image. Building the SDK is best for a production build that can be
-   used later for debugging, especially during long term maintenance:
-   ::
-
-      $ bitbake -c populate_sdk image
-
-   Alternatively, you can build the minimal toolchain components that
-   match the target. Doing so creates a smaller than typical SDK and
-   only contains a minimal set of components with which to build simple
-   test applications, as well as run the debugger:
-   ::
-
-      $ bitbake meta-toolchain
-
-   A final method is to build Gdb itself within the build system:
-   ::
-
-      $ bitbake gdb-cross-<architecture>
-
-   Doing so produces a temporary copy of
-   ``cross-gdb`` you can use for debugging during development. While
-   this is the quickest approach, the two previous methods in this step
-   are better when considering long-term maintenance strategies.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      If you run ``bitbake gdb-cross``, the OpenEmbedded build system suggests
-      the actual image (e.g. ``gdb-cross-i586``). The suggestion is usually the
-      actual name you want to use.
-
-4. *Set up the* ``debugfs``\ *:*
-
-   Run the following commands to set up the ``debugfs``:
-   ::
-
-      $ mkdir debugfs
-      $ cd debugfs
-      $ tar xvfj build-dir/tmp-glibc/deploy/images/machine/image.rootfs.tar.bz2
-      $ tar xvfj build-dir/tmp-glibc/deploy/images/machine/image-dbg.rootfs.tar.bz2
-
-5. *Set up GDB:*
-
-   Install the SDK (if you built one) and then source the correct
-   environment file. Sourcing the environment file puts the SDK in your
-   ``PATH`` environment variable.
-
-   If you are using the build system, Gdb is located in
-   `build-dir`\ ``/tmp/sysroots/``\ `host`\ ``/usr/bin/``\ `architecture`\ ``/``\ `architecture`\ ``-gdb``
-
-6. *Boot the target:*
-
-   For information on how to run QEMU, see the `QEMU
-   Documentation <https://wiki.qemu.org/Documentation/GettingStartedDevelopers>`__.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      Be sure to verify that your host can access the target via TCP.
-
-7. *Debug a program:*
-
-   Debugging a program involves running gdbserver on the target and then
-   running Gdb on the host. The example in this step debugs ``gzip``:
-
-   .. code-block:: shell
-
-      root@qemux86:~# gdbserver localhost:1234 /bin/gzip —help
-
-   For
-   additional gdbserver options, see the `GDB Server
-   Documentation <https://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/documentation/>`__.
-
-   After running gdbserver on the target, you need to run Gdb on the
-   host and configure it and connect to the target. Use these commands:
-   ::
-
-      $ cd directory-holding-the-debugfs-directory
-      $ arch-gdb
-      (gdb) set sysroot debugfs
-      (gdb) set substitute-path /usr/src/debug debugfs/usr/src/debug
-      (gdb) target remote IP-of-target:1234
-
-   At this
-   point, everything should automatically load (i.e. matching binaries,
-   symbols and headers).
-
-   .. note::
-
-      The Gdb ``set`` commands in the previous example can be placed into the
-      users ``~/.gdbinit`` file. Upon starting, Gdb automatically runs whatever
-      commands are in that file.
-
-8. *Deploying without a full image rebuild:*
-
-   In many cases, during development you want a quick method to deploy a
-   new binary to the target and debug it, without waiting for a full
-   image build.
-
-   One approach to solving this situation is to just build the component
-   you want to debug. Once you have built the component, copy the
-   executable directly to both the target and the host ``debugfs``.
-
-   If the binary is processed through the debug splitting in
-   OpenEmbedded, you should also copy the debug items (i.e. ``.debug``
-   contents and corresponding ``/usr/src/debug`` files) from the work
-   directory. Here is an example:
-   ::
-
-      $ bitbake bash
-      $ bitbake -c devshell bash
-      $ cd ..
-      $ scp packages-split/bash/bin/bash target:/bin/bash
-      $ cp -a packages-split/bash-dbg/\* path/debugfs
-
-Debugging with the GNU Project Debugger (GDB) on the Target
------------------------------------------------------------
-
-The previous section addressed using GDB remotely for debugging
-purposes, which is the most usual case due to the inherent hardware
-limitations on many embedded devices. However, debugging in the target
-hardware itself is also possible with more powerful devices. This
-section describes what you need to do in order to support using GDB to
-debug on the target hardware.
-
-To support this kind of debugging, you need do the following:
-
--  Ensure that GDB is on the target. You can do this by adding "gdb" to
-   :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL`:
-   ::
-
-      IMAGE_INSTALL_append = " gdb"
-
-   Alternatively, you can add "tools-debug" to :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`:
-   ::
-
-      IMAGE_FEATURES_append = " tools-debug"
-
--  Ensure that debug symbols are present. You can make sure these
-   symbols are present by installing ``-dbg``:
-   ::
-
-      IMAGE_INSTALL_append = "packagename-dbg"
-
-   Alternatively, you can do the following to include
-   all the debug symbols:
-   ::
-
-      IMAGE_FEATURES_append = " dbg-pkgs"
-
-.. note::
-
-   To improve the debug information accuracy, you can reduce the level
-   of optimization used by the compiler. For example, when adding the
-   following line to your ``local.conf`` file, you will reduce optimization
-   from :term:`FULL_OPTIMIZATION` of "-O2" to :term:`DEBUG_OPTIMIZATION`
-   of "-O -fno-omit-frame-pointer":
-   ::
-
-           DEBUG_BUILD = "1"
-
-   Consider that this will reduce the application's performance and is
-   recommended only for debugging purposes.
-
-Other Debugging Tips
---------------------
-
-Here are some other tips that you might find useful:
-
--  When adding new packages, it is worth watching for undesirable items
-   making their way into compiler command lines. For example, you do not
-   want references to local system files like ``/usr/lib/`` or
-   ``/usr/include/``.
-
--  If you want to remove the ``psplash`` boot splashscreen, add
-   ``psplash=false`` to the kernel command line. Doing so prevents
-   ``psplash`` from loading and thus allows you to see the console. It
-   is also possible to switch out of the splashscreen by switching the
-   virtual console (e.g. Fn+Left or Fn+Right on a Zaurus).
-
--  Removing :term:`TMPDIR` (usually
-   ``tmp/``, within the
-   :term:`Build Directory`) can often fix
-   temporary build issues. Removing ``TMPDIR`` is usually a relatively
-   cheap operation, because task output will be cached in
-   :term:`SSTATE_DIR` (usually
-   ``sstate-cache/``, which is also in the Build Directory).
-
-   .. note::
-
-      Removing ``TMPDIR`` might be a workaround rather than a fix.
-      Consequently, trying to determine the underlying cause of an issue before
-      removing the directory is a good idea.
-
--  Understanding how a feature is used in practice within existing
-   recipes can be very helpful. It is recommended that you configure
-   some method that allows you to quickly search through files.
-
-   Using GNU Grep, you can use the following shell function to
-   recursively search through common recipe-related files, skipping
-   binary files, ``.git`` directories, and the Build Directory (assuming
-   its name starts with "build"):
-   ::
-
-      g() {
-          grep -Ir \
-               --exclude-dir=.git \
-               --exclude-dir='build*' \
-               --include='*.bb*' \
-               --include='*.inc*' \
-               --include='*.conf*' \
-               --include='*.py*' \
-               "$@"
-      }
-
-   Following are some usage examples:
-   ::
-
-      $ g FOO # Search recursively for "FOO"
-      $ g -i foo # Search recursively for "foo", ignoring case
-      $ g -w FOO # Search recursively for "FOO" as a word, ignoring e.g. "FOOBAR"
-
-   If figuring
-   out how some feature works requires a lot of searching, it might
-   indicate that the documentation should be extended or improved. In
-   such cases, consider filing a documentation bug using the Yocto
-   Project implementation of
-   :yocto_bugs:`Bugzilla <>`. For information on
-   how to submit a bug against the Yocto Project, see the Yocto Project
-   Bugzilla :yocto_wiki:`wiki page </Bugzilla_Configuration_and_Bug_Tracking>`
-   and the "`Submitting a Defect Against the Yocto
-   Project <#submitting-a-defect-against-the-yocto-project>`__" section.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      The manuals might not be the right place to document variables
-      that are purely internal and have a limited scope (e.g. internal
-      variables used to implement a single ``.bbclass`` file).
-
-Making Changes to the Yocto Project
-===================================
-
-Because the Yocto Project is an open-source, community-based project,
-you can effect changes to the project. This section presents procedures
-that show you how to submit a defect against the project and how to
-submit a change.
-
-Submitting a Defect Against the Yocto Project
----------------------------------------------
-
-Use the Yocto Project implementation of
-`Bugzilla <https://www.bugzilla.org/about/>`__ to submit a defect (bug)
-against the Yocto Project. For additional information on this
-implementation of Bugzilla see the ":ref:`Yocto Project
-Bugzilla <resources-bugtracker>`" section in the
-Yocto Project Reference Manual. For more detail on any of the following
-steps, see the Yocto Project
-:yocto_wiki:`Bugzilla wiki page </Bugzilla_Configuration_and_Bug_Tracking>`.
-
-Use the following general steps to submit a bug:
-
-1.  Open the Yocto Project implementation of :yocto_bugs:`Bugzilla <>`.
-
-2.  Click "File a Bug" to enter a new bug.
-
-3.  Choose the appropriate "Classification", "Product", and "Component"
-    for which the bug was found. Bugs for the Yocto Project fall into
-    one of several classifications, which in turn break down into
-    several products and components. For example, for a bug against the
-    ``meta-intel`` layer, you would choose "Build System, Metadata &
-    Runtime", "BSPs", and "bsps-meta-intel", respectively.
-
-4.  Choose the "Version" of the Yocto Project for which you found the
-    bug (e.g. &DISTRO;).
-
-5.  Determine and select the "Severity" of the bug. The severity
-    indicates how the bug impacted your work.
-
-6.  Choose the "Hardware" that the bug impacts.
-
-7.  Choose the "Architecture" that the bug impacts.
-
-8.  Choose a "Documentation change" item for the bug. Fixing a bug might
-    or might not affect the Yocto Project documentation. If you are
-    unsure of the impact to the documentation, select "Don't Know".
-
-9.  Provide a brief "Summary" of the bug. Try to limit your summary to
-    just a line or two and be sure to capture the essence of the bug.
-
-10. Provide a detailed "Description" of the bug. You should provide as
-    much detail as you can about the context, behavior, output, and so
-    forth that surrounds the bug. You can even attach supporting files
-    for output from logs by using the "Add an attachment" button.
-
-11. Click the "Submit Bug" button submit the bug. A new Bugzilla number
-    is assigned to the bug and the defect is logged in the bug tracking
-    system.
-
-Once you file a bug, the bug is processed by the Yocto Project Bug
-Triage Team and further details concerning the bug are assigned (e.g.
-priority and owner). You are the "Submitter" of the bug and any further
-categorization, progress, or comments on the bug result in Bugzilla
-sending you an automated email concerning the particular change or
-progress to the bug.
-
-Submitting a Change to the Yocto Project
-----------------------------------------
-
-Contributions to the Yocto Project and OpenEmbedded are very welcome.
-Because the system is extremely configurable and flexible, we recognize
-that developers will want to extend, configure or optimize it for their
-specific uses.
-
-The Yocto Project uses a mailing list and a patch-based workflow that is
-similar to the Linux kernel but contains important differences. In
-general, a mailing list exists through which you can submit patches. You
-should send patches to the appropriate mailing list so that they can be
-reviewed and merged by the appropriate maintainer. The specific mailing
-list you need to use depends on the location of the code you are
-changing. Each component (e.g. layer) should have a ``README`` file that
-indicates where to send the changes and which process to follow.
-
-You can send the patch to the mailing list using whichever approach you
-feel comfortable with to generate the patch. Once sent, the patch is
-usually reviewed by the community at large. If somebody has concerns
-with the patch, they will usually voice their concern over the mailing
-list. If a patch does not receive any negative reviews, the maintainer
-of the affected layer typically takes the patch, tests it, and then
-based on successful testing, merges the patch.
-
-The "poky" repository, which is the Yocto Project's reference build
-environment, is a hybrid repository that contains several individual
-pieces (e.g. BitBake, Metadata, documentation, and so forth) built using
-the combo-layer tool. The upstream location used for submitting changes
-varies by component:
-
--  *Core Metadata:* Send your patch to the
-   :oe_lists:`openembedded-core </g/openembedded-core>`
-   mailing list. For example, a change to anything under the ``meta`` or
-   ``scripts`` directories should be sent to this mailing list.
-
--  *BitBake:* For changes to BitBake (i.e. anything under the
-   ``bitbake`` directory), send your patch to the
-   :oe_lists:`bitbake-devel </g/bitbake-devel>`
-   mailing list.
-
--  *"meta-\*" trees:* These trees contain Metadata. Use the
-   :yocto_lists:`poky </g/poky>` mailing list.
-
--  *Documentation*: For changes to the Yocto Project documentation, use the
-   :yocto_lists:`docs </g/docs>` mailing list.
-
-For changes to other layers hosted in the Yocto Project source
-repositories (i.e. ``yoctoproject.org``) and tools use the
-:yocto_lists:`Yocto Project </g/yocto/>` general mailing list.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Sometimes a layer's documentation specifies to use a particular
-   mailing list. If so, use that list.
-
-For additional recipes that do not fit into the core Metadata, you
-should determine which layer the recipe should go into and submit the
-change in the manner recommended by the documentation (e.g. the
-``README`` file) supplied with the layer. If in doubt, please ask on the
-Yocto general mailing list or on the openembedded-devel mailing list.
-
-You can also push a change upstream and request a maintainer to pull the
-change into the component's upstream repository. You do this by pushing
-to a contribution repository that is upstream. See the
-":ref:`overview-manual/development-environment:git workflows and the yocto project`"
-section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual for additional
-concepts on working in the Yocto Project development environment.
-
-Maintainers commonly use ``-next`` branches to test submissions prior to
-merging patches. Thus, you can get an idea of the status of a patch based on
-whether the patch has been merged into one of these branches. The commonly
-used testing branches for OpenEmbedded-Core are as follows:
-
--  *openembedded-core "master-next" branch:* This branch is part of the
-   :oe_git:`openembedded-core </openembedded-core/>` repository and contains
-   proposed changes to the core metadata.
-
--  *poky "master-next" branch:* This branch is part of the
-   :yocto_git:`poky </poky/>` repository and combines proposed
-   changes to bitbake, the core metadata and the poky distro.
-
-Similarly, stable branches maintained by the project may have corresponding
-``-next`` branches which collect proposed changes. For example,
-``&DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP;-next`` and ``&DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP_MINUS_ONE;-next``
-branches in both the "openembdedded-core" and "poky" repositories.
-
-Other layers may have similar testing branches but there is no formal
-requirement or standard for these so please check the documentation for the
-layers you are contributing to.
-
-The following sections provide procedures for submitting a change.
-
-Preparing Changes for Submission
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-1. *Make Your Changes Locally:* Make your changes in your local Git
-   repository. You should make small, controlled, isolated changes.
-   Keeping changes small and isolated aids review, makes
-   merging/rebasing easier and keeps the change history clean should
-   anyone need to refer to it in future.
-
-2. *Stage Your Changes:* Stage your changes by using the ``git add``
-   command on each file you changed.
-
-3. *Commit Your Changes:* Commit the change by using the ``git commit``
-   command. Make sure your commit information follows standards by
-   following these accepted conventions:
-
-   -  Be sure to include a "Signed-off-by:" line in the same style as
-      required by the Linux kernel. Adding this line signifies that you,
-      the submitter, have agreed to the Developer's Certificate of
-      Origin 1.1 as follows:
-
-      .. code-block:: none
-
-         Developer's Certificate of Origin 1.1
-
-         By making a contribution to this project, I certify that:
-
-         (a) The contribution was created in whole or in part by me and I
-             have the right to submit it under the open source license
-             indicated in the file; or
-
-         (b) The contribution is based upon previous work that, to the best
-             of my knowledge, is covered under an appropriate open source
-             license and I have the right under that license to submit that
-             work with modifications, whether created in whole or in part
-             by me, under the same open source license (unless I am
-             permitted to submit under a different license), as indicated
-             in the file; or
-
-         (c) The contribution was provided directly to me by some other
-             person who certified (a), (b) or (c) and I have not modified
-             it.
-
-         (d) I understand and agree that this project and the contribution
-             are public and that a record of the contribution (including all
-             personal information I submit with it, including my sign-off) is
-             maintained indefinitely and may be redistributed consistent with
-             this project or the open source license(s) involved.
-
-   -  Provide a single-line summary of the change and, if more
-      explanation is needed, provide more detail in the body of the
-      commit. This summary is typically viewable in the "shortlist" of
-      changes. Thus, providing something short and descriptive that
-      gives the reader a summary of the change is useful when viewing a
-      list of many commits. You should prefix this short description
-      with the recipe name (if changing a recipe), or else with the
-      short form path to the file being changed.
-
-   -  For the body of the commit message, provide detailed information
-      that describes what you changed, why you made the change, and the
-      approach you used. It might also be helpful if you mention how you
-      tested the change. Provide as much detail as you can in the body
-      of the commit message.
-
-      .. note::
-
-         You do not need to provide a more detailed explanation of a
-         change if the change is minor to the point of the single line
-         summary providing all the information.
-
-   -  If the change addresses a specific bug or issue that is associated
-      with a bug-tracking ID, include a reference to that ID in your
-      detailed description. For example, the Yocto Project uses a
-      specific convention for bug references - any commit that addresses
-      a specific bug should use the following form for the detailed
-      description. Be sure to use the actual bug-tracking ID from
-      Bugzilla for bug-id:
-      ::
-
-         Fixes [YOCTO #bug-id]
-
-         detailed description of change
-
-Using Email to Submit a Patch
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Depending on the components changed, you need to submit the email to a
-specific mailing list. For some guidance on which mailing list to use,
-see the `list <#figuring-out-the-mailing-list-to-use>`__ at the
-beginning of this section. For a description of all the available
-mailing lists, see the ":ref:`Mailing Lists <resources-mailinglist>`" section in the
-Yocto Project Reference Manual.
-
-Here is the general procedure on how to submit a patch through email
-without using the scripts once the steps in
-:ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:preparing changes for submission` have been followed:
-
-1. *Format the Commit:* Format the commit into an email message. To
-   format commits, use the ``git format-patch`` command. When you
-   provide the command, you must include a revision list or a number of
-   patches as part of the command. For example, either of these two
-   commands takes your most recent single commit and formats it as an
-   email message in the current directory:
-   ::
-
-      $ git format-patch -1
-
-   or ::
-
-      $ git format-patch HEAD~
-
-   After the command is run, the current directory contains a numbered
-   ``.patch`` file for the commit.
-
-   If you provide several commits as part of the command, the
-   ``git format-patch`` command produces a series of numbered files in
-   the current directory – one for each commit. If you have more than
-   one patch, you should also use the ``--cover`` option with the
-   command, which generates a cover letter as the first "patch" in the
-   series. You can then edit the cover letter to provide a description
-   for the series of patches. For information on the
-   ``git format-patch`` command, see ``GIT_FORMAT_PATCH(1)`` displayed
-   using the ``man git-format-patch`` command.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      If you are or will be a frequent contributor to the Yocto Project
-      or to OpenEmbedded, you might consider requesting a contrib area
-      and the necessary associated rights.
-
-2. *Send the patches via email:* Send the patches to the recipients and
-   relevant mailing lists by using the ``git send-email`` command.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      In order to use ``git send-email``, you must have the proper Git packages
-      installed on your host.
-      For Ubuntu, Debian, and Fedora the package is ``git-email``.
-
-   The ``git send-email`` command sends email by using a local or remote
-   Mail Transport Agent (MTA) such as ``msmtp``, ``sendmail``, or
-   through a direct ``smtp`` configuration in your Git ``~/.gitconfig``
-   file. If you are submitting patches through email only, it is very
-   important that you submit them without any whitespace or HTML
-   formatting that either you or your mailer introduces. The maintainer
-   that receives your patches needs to be able to save and apply them
-   directly from your emails. A good way to verify that what you are
-   sending will be applicable by the maintainer is to do a dry run and
-   send them to yourself and then save and apply them as the maintainer
-   would.
-
-   The ``git send-email`` command is the preferred method for sending
-   your patches using email since there is no risk of compromising
-   whitespace in the body of the message, which can occur when you use
-   your own mail client. The command also has several options that let
-   you specify recipients and perform further editing of the email
-   message. For information on how to use the ``git send-email``
-   command, see ``GIT-SEND-EMAIL(1)`` displayed using the
-   ``man git-send-email`` command.
-
-The Yocto Project uses a `Patchwork instance <https://patchwork.openembedded.org/>`__
-to track the status of patches submitted to the various mailing lists and to
-support automated patch testing. Each submitted patch is checked for common
-mistakes and deviations from the expected patch format and submitters are
-notified by patchtest if such mistakes are found. This process helps to
-reduce the burden of patch review on maintainers.
-
-.. note::
-
-   This system is imperfect and changes can sometimes get lost in the flow.
-   Asking about the status of a patch or change is reasonable if the change
-   has been idle for a while with no feedback.
-
-Using Scripts to Push a Change Upstream and Request a Pull
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-For larger patch series it is preferable to send a pull request which not
-only includes the patch but also a pointer to a branch that can be pulled
-from. This involves making a local branch for your changes, pushing this
-branch to an accessible repository and then using the ``create-pull-request``
-and ``send-pull-request`` scripts from openembedded-core to create and send a
-patch series with a link to the branch for review.
-
-Follow this procedure to push a change to an upstream "contrib" Git
-repository once the steps in :ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:preparing changes for submission` have
-been followed:
-
-.. note::
-
-   You can find general Git information on how to push a change upstream
-   in the
-   `Git Community Book <https://git-scm.com/book/en/v2/Distributed-Git-Distributed-Workflows>`__.
-
-1. *Push Your Commits to a "Contrib" Upstream:* If you have arranged for
-   permissions to push to an upstream contrib repository, push the
-   change to that repository:
-   ::
-
-      $ git push upstream_remote_repo local_branch_name
-
-   For example, suppose you have permissions to push
-   into the upstream ``meta-intel-contrib`` repository and you are
-   working in a local branch named `your_name`\ ``/README``. The following
-   command pushes your local commits to the ``meta-intel-contrib``
-   upstream repository and puts the commit in a branch named
-   `your_name`\ ``/README``:
-   ::
-
-      $ git push meta-intel-contrib your_name/README
-
-2. *Determine Who to Notify:* Determine the maintainer or the mailing
-   list that you need to notify for the change.
-
-   Before submitting any change, you need to be sure who the maintainer
-   is or what mailing list that you need to notify. Use either these
-   methods to find out:
-
-   -  *Maintenance File:* Examine the ``maintainers.inc`` file, which is
-      located in the :term:`Source Directory` at
-      ``meta/conf/distro/include``, to see who is responsible for code.
-
-   -  *Search by File:* Using :ref:`overview-manual/development-environment:git`, you can
-      enter the following command to bring up a short list of all
-      commits against a specific file:
-      ::
-
-         git shortlog -- filename
-
-      Just provide the name of the file for which you are interested. The
-      information returned is not ordered by history but does include a
-      list of everyone who has committed grouped by name. From the list,
-      you can see who is responsible for the bulk of the changes against
-      the file.
-
-   -  *Examine the List of Mailing Lists:* For a list of the Yocto
-      Project and related mailing lists, see the ":ref:`Mailing
-      lists <resources-mailinglist>`" section in
-      the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
-
-3. *Make a Pull Request:* Notify the maintainer or the mailing list that
-   you have pushed a change by making a pull request.
-
-   The Yocto Project provides two scripts that conveniently let you
-   generate and send pull requests to the Yocto Project. These scripts
-   are ``create-pull-request`` and ``send-pull-request``. You can find
-   these scripts in the ``scripts`` directory within the
-   :term:`Source Directory` (e.g.
-   ``~/poky/scripts``).
-
-   Using these scripts correctly formats the requests without
-   introducing any whitespace or HTML formatting. The maintainer that
-   receives your patches either directly or through the mailing list
-   needs to be able to save and apply them directly from your emails.
-   Using these scripts is the preferred method for sending patches.
-
-   First, create the pull request. For example, the following command
-   runs the script, specifies the upstream repository in the contrib
-   directory into which you pushed the change, and provides a subject
-   line in the created patch files:
-   ::
-
-      $ ~/poky/scripts/create-pull-request -u meta-intel-contrib -s "Updated Manual Section Reference in README"
-
-   Running this script forms ``*.patch`` files in a folder named
-   ``pull-``\ `PID` in the current directory. One of the patch files is a
-   cover letter.
-
-   Before running the ``send-pull-request`` script, you must edit the
-   cover letter patch to insert information about your change. After
-   editing the cover letter, send the pull request. For example, the
-   following command runs the script and specifies the patch directory
-   and email address. In this example, the email address is a mailing
-   list:
-   ::
-
-      $ ~/poky/scripts/send-pull-request -p ~/meta-intel/pull-10565 -t meta-intel@yoctoproject.org
-
-   You need to follow the prompts as the script is interactive.
-
-   .. note::
-
-      For help on using these scripts, simply provide the ``-h``
-      argument as follows:
-      ::
-
-              $ poky/scripts/create-pull-request -h
-              $ poky/scripts/send-pull-request -h
-
-Responding to Patch Review
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-You may get feedback on your submitted patches from other community members
-or from the automated patchtest service. If issues are identified in your
-patch then it is usually necessary to address these before the patch will be
-accepted into the project. In this case you should amend the patch according
-to the feedback and submit an updated version to the relevant mailing list,
-copying in the reviewers who provided feedback to the previous version of the
-patch.
-
-The patch should be amended using ``git commit --amend`` or perhaps ``git
-rebase`` for more expert git users. You should also modify the ``[PATCH]``
-tag in the email subject line when sending the revised patch to mark the new
-iteration as ``[PATCH v2]``, ``[PATCH v3]``, etc as appropriate. This can be
-done by passing the ``-v`` argument to ``git format-patch`` with a version
-number.
-
-Lastly please ensure that you also test your revised changes. In particular
-please don't just edit the patch file written out by ``git format-patch`` and
-resend it.
-
-Submitting Changes to Stable Release Branches
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The process for proposing changes to a Yocto Project stable branch differs
-from the steps described above. Changes to a stable branch must address
-identified bugs or CVEs and should be made carefully in order to avoid the
-risk of introducing new bugs or breaking backwards compatibility. Typically
-bug fixes must already be accepted into the master branch before they can be
-backported to a stable branch unless the bug in question does not affect the
-master branch or the fix on the master branch is unsuitable for backporting.
-
-The list of stable branches along with the status and maintainer for each
-branch can be obtained from the
-:yocto_wiki:`Releases wiki page </Releases>`.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Changes will not typically be accepted for branches which are marked as
-   End-Of-Life (EOL).
-
-With this in mind, the steps to submit a change for a stable branch are as
-follows:
-
-1. *Identify the bug or CVE to be fixed:* This information should be
-   collected so that it can be included in your submission.
-
-2. *Check if the fix is already present in the master branch:* This will
-   result in the most straightforward path into the stable branch for the
-   fix.
-
-   a. *If the fix is present in the master branch - Submit a backport request
-      by email:* You should send an email to the relevant stable branch
-      maintainer and the mailing list with details of the bug or CVE to be
-      fixed, the commit hash on the master branch that fixes the issue and
-      the stable branches which you would like this fix to be backported to.
-
-   b. *If the fix is not present in the master branch - Submit the fix to the
-      master branch first:* This will ensure that the fix passes through the
-      project's usual patch review and test processes before being accepted.
-      It will also ensure that bugs are not left unresolved in the master
-      branch itself. Once the fix is accepted in the master branch a backport
-      request can be submitted as above.
-
-   c. *If the fix is unsuitable for the master branch - Submit a patch
-      directly for the stable branch:* This method should be considered as a
-      last resort. It is typically necessary when the master branch is using
-      a newer version of the software which includes an upstream fix for the
-      issue or when the issue has been fixed on the master branch in a way
-      that introduces backwards incompatible changes. In this case follow the
-      steps in :ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:preparing changes for submission` and
-      :ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:using email to submit a patch` but modify the subject header of your patch
-      email to include the name of the stable branch which you are
-      targetting. This can be done using the ``--subject-prefix`` argument to
-      ``git format-patch``, for example to submit a patch to the dunfell
-      branch use
-      ``git format-patch --subject-prefix='&DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP_MINUS_ONE;][PATCH' ...``.
-
-Working With Licenses
-=====================
-
-As mentioned in the ":ref:`overview-manual/development-environment:licensing`"
-section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual, open source
-projects are open to the public and they consequently have different
-licensing structures in place. This section describes the mechanism by
-which the :term:`OpenEmbedded Build System`
-tracks changes to
-licensing text and covers how to maintain open source license compliance
-during your project's lifecycle. The section also describes how to
-enable commercially licensed recipes, which by default are disabled.
-
-Tracking License Changes
-------------------------
-
-The license of an upstream project might change in the future. In order
-to prevent these changes going unnoticed, the
-:term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`
-variable tracks changes to the license text. The checksums are validated
-at the end of the configure step, and if the checksums do not match, the
-build will fail.
-
-Specifying the ``LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`` Variable
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The ``LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`` variable contains checksums of the license text
-in the source code for the recipe. Following is an example of how to
-specify ``LIC_FILES_CHKSUM``:
-::
-
-   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://COPYING;md5=xxxx \
-                       file://licfile1.txt;beginline=5;endline=29;md5=yyyy \
-                       file://licfile2.txt;endline=50;md5=zzzz \
-                       ..."
-
-.. note::
-
-   -  When using "beginline" and "endline", realize that line numbering
-      begins with one and not zero. Also, the included lines are
-      inclusive (i.e. lines five through and including 29 in the
-      previous example for ``licfile1.txt``).
-
-   -  When a license check fails, the selected license text is included
-      as part of the QA message. Using this output, you can determine
-      the exact start and finish for the needed license text.
-
-The build system uses the :term:`S`
-variable as the default directory when searching files listed in
-``LIC_FILES_CHKSUM``. The previous example employs the default
-directory.
-
-Consider this next example:
-::
-
-   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://src/ls.c;beginline=5;endline=16;\
-                                       md5=bb14ed3c4cda583abc85401304b5cd4e"
-   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://${WORKDIR}/license.html;md5=5c94767cedb5d6987c902ac850ded2c6"
-
-The first line locates a file in ``${S}/src/ls.c`` and isolates lines
-five through 16 as license text. The second line refers to a file in
-:term:`WORKDIR`.
-
-Note that ``LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`` variable is mandatory for all recipes,
-unless the ``LICENSE`` variable is set to "CLOSED".
-
-Explanation of Syntax
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-As mentioned in the previous section, the ``LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`` variable
-lists all the important files that contain the license text for the
-source code. It is possible to specify a checksum for an entire file, or
-a specific section of a file (specified by beginning and ending line
-numbers with the "beginline" and "endline" parameters, respectively).
-The latter is useful for source files with a license notice header,
-README documents, and so forth. If you do not use the "beginline"
-parameter, then it is assumed that the text begins on the first line of
-the file. Similarly, if you do not use the "endline" parameter, it is
-assumed that the license text ends with the last line of the file.
-
-The "md5" parameter stores the md5 checksum of the license text. If the
-license text changes in any way as compared to this parameter then a
-mismatch occurs. This mismatch triggers a build failure and notifies the
-developer. Notification allows the developer to review and address the
-license text changes. Also note that if a mismatch occurs during the
-build, the correct md5 checksum is placed in the build log and can be
-easily copied to the recipe.
-
-There is no limit to how many files you can specify using the
-``LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`` variable. Generally, however, every project
-requires a few specifications for license tracking. Many projects have a
-"COPYING" file that stores the license information for all the source
-code files. This practice allows you to just track the "COPYING" file as
-long as it is kept up to date.
-
-.. note::
-
-   -  If you specify an empty or invalid "md5" parameter,
-      :term:`BitBake` returns an md5
-      mis-match error and displays the correct "md5" parameter value
-      during the build. The correct parameter is also captured in the
-      build log.
-
-   -  If the whole file contains only license text, you do not need to
-      use the "beginline" and "endline" parameters.
-
-Enabling Commercially Licensed Recipes
---------------------------------------
-
-By default, the OpenEmbedded build system disables components that have
-commercial or other special licensing requirements. Such requirements
-are defined on a recipe-by-recipe basis through the
-:term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` variable
-definition in the affected recipe. For instance, the
-``poky/meta/recipes-multimedia/gstreamer/gst-plugins-ugly`` recipe
-contains the following statement:
-::
-
-   LICENSE_FLAGS = "commercial"
-
-Here is a
-slightly more complicated example that contains both an explicit recipe
-name and version (after variable expansion):
-::
-
-   LICENSE_FLAGS = "license_${PN}_${PV}"
-
-In order for a component restricted by a
-``LICENSE_FLAGS`` definition to be enabled and included in an image, it
-needs to have a matching entry in the global
-:term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST`
-variable, which is a variable typically defined in your ``local.conf``
-file. For example, to enable the
-``poky/meta/recipes-multimedia/gstreamer/gst-plugins-ugly`` package, you
-could add either the string "commercial_gst-plugins-ugly" or the more
-general string "commercial" to ``LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST``. See the
-"`License Flag Matching <#license-flag-matching>`__" section for a full
-explanation of how ``LICENSE_FLAGS`` matching works. Here is the
-example:
-::
-
-   LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST = "commercial_gst-plugins-ugly"
-
-Likewise, to additionally enable the package built from the recipe
-containing ``LICENSE_FLAGS = "license_${PN}_${PV}"``, and assuming that
-the actual recipe name was ``emgd_1.10.bb``, the following string would
-enable that package as well as the original ``gst-plugins-ugly``
-package:
-::
-
-   LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST = "commercial_gst-plugins-ugly license_emgd_1.10"
-
-As a convenience, you do not need to specify the
-complete license string in the whitelist for every package. You can use
-an abbreviated form, which consists of just the first portion or
-portions of the license string before the initial underscore character
-or characters. A partial string will match any license that contains the
-given string as the first portion of its license. For example, the
-following whitelist string will also match both of the packages
-previously mentioned as well as any other packages that have licenses
-starting with "commercial" or "license".
-::
-
-   LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST = "commercial license"
-
-License Flag Matching
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-License flag matching allows you to control what recipes the
-OpenEmbedded build system includes in the build. Fundamentally, the
-build system attempts to match ``LICENSE_FLAGS`` strings found in
-recipes against ``LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST`` strings found in the
-whitelist. A match causes the build system to include a recipe in the
-build, while failure to find a match causes the build system to exclude
-a recipe.
-
-In general, license flag matching is simple. However, understanding some
-concepts will help you correctly and effectively use matching.
-
-Before a flag defined by a particular recipe is tested against the
-contents of the whitelist, the expanded string ``_${PN}`` is appended to
-the flag. This expansion makes each ``LICENSE_FLAGS`` value
-recipe-specific. After expansion, the string is then matched against the
-whitelist. Thus, specifying ``LICENSE_FLAGS = "commercial"`` in recipe
-"foo", for example, results in the string ``"commercial_foo"``. And, to
-create a match, that string must appear in the whitelist.
-
-Judicious use of the ``LICENSE_FLAGS`` strings and the contents of the
-``LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST`` variable allows you a lot of flexibility for
-including or excluding recipes based on licensing. For example, you can
-broaden the matching capabilities by using license flags string subsets
-in the whitelist.
-
-.. note::
-
-   When using a string subset, be sure to use the part of the expanded
-   string that precedes the appended underscore character (e.g.
-   ``usethispart_1.3``, ``usethispart_1.4``, and so forth).
-
-For example, simply specifying the string "commercial" in the whitelist
-matches any expanded ``LICENSE_FLAGS`` definition that starts with the
-string "commercial" such as "commercial_foo" and "commercial_bar", which
-are the strings the build system automatically generates for
-hypothetical recipes named "foo" and "bar" assuming those recipes simply
-specify the following:
-::
-
-   LICENSE_FLAGS = "commercial"
-
-Thus, you can choose
-to exhaustively enumerate each license flag in the whitelist and allow
-only specific recipes into the image, or you can use a string subset
-that causes a broader range of matches to allow a range of recipes into
-the image.
-
-This scheme works even if the ``LICENSE_FLAGS`` string already has
-``_${PN}`` appended. For example, the build system turns the license
-flag "commercial_1.2_foo" into "commercial_1.2_foo_foo" and would match
-both the general "commercial" and the specific "commercial_1.2_foo"
-strings found in the whitelist, as expected.
-
-Here are some other scenarios:
-
--  You can specify a versioned string in the recipe such as
-   "commercial_foo_1.2" in a "foo" recipe. The build system expands this
-   string to "commercial_foo_1.2_foo". Combine this license flag with a
-   whitelist that has the string "commercial" and you match the flag
-   along with any other flag that starts with the string "commercial".
-
--  Under the same circumstances, you can use "commercial_foo" in the
-   whitelist and the build system not only matches "commercial_foo_1.2"
-   but also matches any license flag with the string "commercial_foo",
-   regardless of the version.
-
--  You can be very specific and use both the package and version parts
-   in the whitelist (e.g. "commercial_foo_1.2") to specifically match a
-   versioned recipe.
-
-Other Variables Related to Commercial Licenses
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Other helpful variables related to commercial license handling exist and
-are defined in the
-``poky/meta/conf/distro/include/default-distrovars.inc`` file:
-::
-
-   COMMERCIAL_AUDIO_PLUGINS ?= ""
-   COMMERCIAL_VIDEO_PLUGINS ?= ""
-
-If you
-want to enable these components, you can do so by making sure you have
-statements similar to the following in your ``local.conf`` configuration
-file:
-::
-
-   COMMERCIAL_AUDIO_PLUGINS = "gst-plugins-ugly-mad \
-       gst-plugins-ugly-mpegaudioparse"
-   COMMERCIAL_VIDEO_PLUGINS = "gst-plugins-ugly-mpeg2dec \
-       gst-plugins-ugly-mpegstream gst-plugins-bad-mpegvideoparse"
-   LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST = "commercial_gst-plugins-ugly commercial_gst-plugins-bad commercial_qmmp"
-
-
-Of course, you could also create a matching whitelist for those
-components using the more general "commercial" in the whitelist, but
-that would also enable all the other packages with ``LICENSE_FLAGS``
-containing "commercial", which you may or may not want:
-::
-
-   LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST = "commercial"
-
-Specifying audio and video plugins as part of the
-``COMMERCIAL_AUDIO_PLUGINS`` and ``COMMERCIAL_VIDEO_PLUGINS`` statements
-(along with the enabling ``LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST``) includes the
-plugins or components into built images, thus adding support for media
-formats or components.
-
-Maintaining Open Source License Compliance During Your Product's Lifecycle
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-One of the concerns for a development organization using open source
-software is how to maintain compliance with various open source
-licensing during the lifecycle of the product. While this section does
-not provide legal advice or comprehensively cover all scenarios, it does
-present methods that you can use to assist you in meeting the compliance
-requirements during a software release.
-
-With hundreds of different open source licenses that the Yocto Project
-tracks, it is difficult to know the requirements of each and every
-license. However, the requirements of the major FLOSS licenses can begin
-to be covered by assuming that three main areas of concern exist:
-
--  Source code must be provided.
-
--  License text for the software must be provided.
-
--  Compilation scripts and modifications to the source code must be
-   provided.
-
--  spdx files can be provided.
-
-There are other requirements beyond the scope of these three and the
-methods described in this section (e.g. the mechanism through which
-source code is distributed).
-
-As different organizations have different methods of complying with open
-source licensing, this section is not meant to imply that there is only
-one single way to meet your compliance obligations, but rather to
-describe one method of achieving compliance. The remainder of this
-section describes methods supported to meet the previously mentioned
-three requirements. Once you take steps to meet these requirements, and
-prior to releasing images, sources, and the build system, you should
-audit all artifacts to ensure completeness.
-
-.. note::
-
-   The Yocto Project generates a license manifest during image creation
-   that is located in ``${DEPLOY_DIR}/licenses/``\ `image_name`\ ``-``\ `datestamp`
-   to assist with any audits.
-
-Providing the Source Code
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-Compliance activities should begin before you generate the final image.
-The first thing you should look at is the requirement that tops the list
-for most compliance groups - providing the source. The Yocto Project has
-a few ways of meeting this requirement.
-
-One of the easiest ways to meet this requirement is to provide the
-entire :term:`DL_DIR` used by the
-build. This method, however, has a few issues. The most obvious is the
-size of the directory since it includes all sources used in the build
-and not just the source used in the released image. It will include
-toolchain source, and other artifacts, which you would not generally
-release. However, the more serious issue for most companies is
-accidental release of proprietary software. The Yocto Project provides
-an :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class to
-help avoid some of these concerns.
-
-Before you employ ``DL_DIR`` or the ``archiver`` class, you need to
-decide how you choose to provide source. The source ``archiver`` class
-can generate tarballs and SRPMs and can create them with various levels
-of compliance in mind.
-
-One way of doing this (but certainly not the only way) is to release
-just the source as a tarball. You can do this by adding the following to
-the ``local.conf`` file found in the
-:term:`Build Directory`:
-::
-
-   INHERIT += "archiver"
-   ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "original"
-
-During the creation of your
-image, the source from all recipes that deploy packages to the image is
-placed within subdirectories of ``DEPLOY_DIR/sources`` based on the
-:term:`LICENSE` for each recipe.
-Releasing the entire directory enables you to comply with requirements
-concerning providing the unmodified source. It is important to note that
-the size of the directory can get large.
-
-A way to help mitigate the size issue is to only release tarballs for
-licenses that require the release of source. Let us assume you are only
-concerned with GPL code as identified by running the following script:
-
-.. code-block:: shell
-
-   # Script to archive a subset of packages matching specific license(s)
-   # Source and license files are copied into sub folders of package folder
-   # Must be run from build folder
-   #!/bin/bash
-   src_release_dir="source-release"
-   mkdir -p $src_release_dir
-   for a in tmp/deploy/sources/*; do
-      for d in $a/*; do
-         # Get package name from path
-         p=`basename $d`
-         p=${p%-*}
-         p=${p%-*}
-         # Only archive GPL packages (update *GPL* regex for your license check)
-         numfiles=`ls tmp/deploy/licenses/$p/*GPL* 2> /dev/null | wc -l`
-         if [ $numfiles -gt 1 ]; then
-            echo Archiving $p
-            mkdir -p $src_release_dir/$p/source
-            cp $d/* $src_release_dir/$p/source 2> /dev/null
-            mkdir -p $src_release_dir/$p/license
-            cp tmp/deploy/licenses/$p/* $src_release_dir/$p/license 2> /dev/null
-         fi
-      done
-   done
-
-At this point, you
-could create a tarball from the ``gpl_source_release`` directory and
-provide that to the end user. This method would be a step toward
-achieving compliance with section 3a of GPLv2 and with section 6 of
-GPLv3.
-
-Providing License Text
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-One requirement that is often overlooked is inclusion of license text.
-This requirement also needs to be dealt with prior to generating the
-final image. Some licenses require the license text to accompany the
-binary. You can achieve this by adding the following to your
-``local.conf`` file:
-::
-
-   COPY_LIC_MANIFEST = "1"
-   COPY_LIC_DIRS = "1"
-   LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE = "1"
-
-Adding these statements to the
-configuration file ensures that the licenses collected during package
-generation are included on your image.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Setting all three variables to "1" results in the image having two
-   copies of the same license file. One copy resides in
-   ``/usr/share/common-licenses`` and the other resides in
-   ``/usr/share/license``.
-
-   The reason for this behavior is because
-   :term:`COPY_LIC_DIRS` and
-   :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST`
-   add a copy of the license when the image is built but do not offer a
-   path for adding licenses for newly installed packages to an image.
-   :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE`
-   adds a separate package and an upgrade path for adding licenses to an
-   image.
-
-As the source ``archiver`` class has already archived the original
-unmodified source that contains the license files, you would have
-already met the requirements for inclusion of the license information
-with source as defined by the GPL and other open source licenses.
-
-Providing Compilation Scripts and Source Code Modifications
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-At this point, we have addressed all we need to prior to generating the
-image. The next two requirements are addressed during the final
-packaging of the release.
-
-By releasing the version of the OpenEmbedded build system and the layers
-used during the build, you will be providing both compilation scripts
-and the source code modifications in one step.
-
-If the deployment team has a :ref:`overview-manual/concepts:bsp layer`
-and a distro layer, and those
-those layers are used to patch, compile, package, or modify (in any way)
-any open source software included in your released images, you might be
-required to release those layers under section 3 of GPLv2 or section 1
-of GPLv3. One way of doing that is with a clean checkout of the version
-of the Yocto Project and layers used during your build. Here is an
-example:
-
-.. code-block:: shell
-
-   # We built using the dunfell branch of the poky repo
-   $ git clone -b dunfell git://git.yoctoproject.org/poky
-   $ cd poky
-   # We built using the release_branch for our layers
-   $ git clone -b release_branch git://git.mycompany.com/meta-my-bsp-layer
-   $ git clone -b release_branch git://git.mycompany.com/meta-my-software-layer
-   # clean up the .git repos
-   $ find . -name ".git" -type d -exec rm -rf {} \;
-
-One
-thing a development organization might want to consider for end-user
-convenience is to modify ``meta-poky/conf/bblayers.conf.sample`` to
-ensure that when the end user utilizes the released build system to
-build an image, the development organization's layers are included in
-the ``bblayers.conf`` file automatically:
-::
-
-   # POKY_BBLAYERS_CONF_VERSION is increased each time build/conf/bblayers.conf
-   # changes incompatibly
-   POKY_BBLAYERS_CONF_VERSION = "2"
-
-   BBPATH = "${TOPDIR}"
-   BBFILES ?= ""
-
-   BBLAYERS ?= " \
-     ##OEROOT##/meta \
-     ##OEROOT##/meta-poky \
-     ##OEROOT##/meta-yocto-bsp \
-     ##OEROOT##/meta-mylayer \
-     "
-
-Creating and
-providing an archive of the :term:`Metadata`
-layers (recipes, configuration files, and so forth) enables you to meet
-your requirements to include the scripts to control compilation as well
-as any modifications to the original source.
-
-Providing spdx files
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-The spdx module has been integrated to a layer named meta-spdxscanner.
-meta-spdxscanner provides several kinds of scanner. If you want to enable
-this function, you have to follow the following steps:
-
-1. Add meta-spdxscanner layer into ``bblayers.conf``. 
-
-2. Refer to the README in meta-spdxscanner to setup the environment (e.g, 
-   setup a fossology server) needed for the scanner.
-
-3. Meta-spdxscanner provides several methods within the bbclass to create spdx files.
-   Please choose one that you want to use and enable the spdx task. You have to
-   add some config options in ``local.conf`` file in your :term:`Build
-   Directory`. The following is an example showing how to generate spdx files
-   during bitbake using the fossology-python.bbclass::
-
-      # Select fossology-python.bbclass.
-      INHERIT += "fossology-python"
-      # For fossology-python.bbclass, TOKEN is necessary, so, after setup a
-      # Fossology server, you have to create a token.
-      TOKEN = "eyJ0eXAiO..."
-      # The fossology server is necessary for fossology-python.bbclass.
-      FOSSOLOGY_SERVER = "http://xx.xx.xx.xx:8081/repo"
-      # If you want to upload the source code to a special folder:
-      FOLDER_NAME = "xxxx" //Optional
-      # If you don't want to put spdx files in tmp/deploy/spdx, you can enable:
-      SPDX_DEPLOY_DIR = "${DEPLOY_DIR}" //Optional
-
-For more usage information refer to :yocto_git:`the meta-spdxscanner repository
-</meta-spdxscanner/>`.
-
-
-Copying Licenses that Do Not Exist
-----------------------------------
-
-Some packages, such as the linux-firmware package, have many licenses
-that are not in any way common. You can avoid adding a lot of these
-types of common license files, which are only applicable to a specific
-package, by using the
-:term:`NO_GENERIC_LICENSE`
-variable. Using this variable also avoids QA errors when you use a
-non-common, non-CLOSED license in a recipe.
-
-The following is an example that uses the ``LICENSE.Abilis.txt`` file as
-the license from the fetched source:
-::
-
-   NO_GENERIC_LICENSE[Firmware-Abilis] = "LICENSE.Abilis.txt"
-
-Using the Error Reporting Tool
-==============================
-
-The error reporting tool allows you to submit errors encountered during
-builds to a central database. Outside of the build environment, you can
-use a web interface to browse errors, view statistics, and query for
-errors. The tool works using a client-server system where the client
-portion is integrated with the installed Yocto Project
-:term:`Source Directory` (e.g. ``poky``).
-The server receives the information collected and saves it in a
-database.
-
-A live instance of the error reporting server exists at
-https://errors.yoctoproject.org. This server exists so that when
-you want to get help with build failures, you can submit all of the
-information on the failure easily and then point to the URL in your bug
-report or send an email to the mailing list.
-
-.. note::
-
-   If you send error reports to this server, the reports become publicly
-   visible.
-
-Enabling and Using the Tool
----------------------------
-
-By default, the error reporting tool is disabled. You can enable it by
-inheriting the
-:ref:`report-error <ref-classes-report-error>`
-class by adding the following statement to the end of your
-``local.conf`` file in your
-:term:`Build Directory`.
-::
-
-   INHERIT += "report-error"
-
-By default, the error reporting feature stores information in
-``${``\ :term:`LOG_DIR`\ ``}/error-report``.
-However, you can specify a directory to use by adding the following to
-your ``local.conf`` file:
-::
-
-   ERR_REPORT_DIR = "path"
-
-Enabling error
-reporting causes the build process to collect the errors and store them
-in a file as previously described. When the build system encounters an
-error, it includes a command as part of the console output. You can run
-the command to send the error file to the server. For example, the
-following command sends the errors to an upstream server:
-::
-
-   $ send-error-report /home/brandusa/project/poky/build/tmp/log/error-report/error_report_201403141617.txt
-
-In the previous example, the errors are sent to a public database
-available at https://errors.yoctoproject.org, which is used by the
-entire community. If you specify a particular server, you can send the
-errors to a different database. Use the following command for more
-information on available options:
-::
-
-   $ send-error-report --help
-
-When sending the error file, you are prompted to review the data being
-sent as well as to provide a name and optional email address. Once you
-satisfy these prompts, the command returns a link from the server that
-corresponds to your entry in the database. For example, here is a
-typical link: https://errors.yoctoproject.org/Errors/Details/9522/
-
-Following the link takes you to a web interface where you can browse,
-query the errors, and view statistics.
-
-Disabling the Tool
-------------------
-
-To disable the error reporting feature, simply remove or comment out the
-following statement from the end of your ``local.conf`` file in your
-:term:`Build Directory`.
-::
-
-   INHERIT += "report-error"
-
-Setting Up Your Own Error Reporting Server
-------------------------------------------
-
-If you want to set up your own error reporting server, you can obtain
-the code from the Git repository at :yocto_git:`/error-report-web/`.
-Instructions on how to set it up are in the README document.
-
-Using Wayland and Weston
-========================
-
-`Wayland <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wayland_(display_server_protocol)>`__
-is a computer display server protocol that provides a method for
-compositing window managers to communicate directly with applications
-and video hardware and expects them to communicate with input hardware
-using other libraries. Using Wayland with supporting targets can result
-in better control over graphics frame rendering than an application
-might otherwise achieve.
-
-The Yocto Project provides the Wayland protocol libraries and the
-reference
-`Weston <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wayland_(display_server_protocol)#Weston>`__
-compositor as part of its release. You can find the integrated packages
-in the ``meta`` layer of the :term:`Source Directory`.
-Specifically, you
-can find the recipes that build both Wayland and Weston at
-``meta/recipes-graphics/wayland``.
-
-You can build both the Wayland and Weston packages for use only with
-targets that accept the `Mesa 3D and Direct Rendering
-Infrastructure <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mesa_(computer_graphics)>`__,
-which is also known as Mesa DRI. This implies that you cannot build and
-use the packages if your target uses, for example, the Intel Embedded
-Media and Graphics Driver (Intel EMGD) that overrides Mesa DRI.
-
-.. note::
-
-   Due to lack of EGL support, Weston 1.0.3 will not run directly on the
-   emulated QEMU hardware. However, this version of Weston will run
-   under X emulation without issues.
-
-This section describes what you need to do to implement Wayland and use
-the Weston compositor when building an image for a supporting target.
-
-Enabling Wayland in an Image
-----------------------------
-
-To enable Wayland, you need to enable it to be built and enable it to be
-included (installed) in the image.
-
-Building Wayland
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-To cause Mesa to build the ``wayland-egl`` platform and Weston to build
-Wayland with Kernel Mode Setting
-(`KMS <https://wiki.archlinux.org/index.php/Kernel_Mode_Setting>`__)
-support, include the "wayland" flag in the
-:term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`
-statement in your ``local.conf`` file:
-::
-
-   DISTRO_FEATURES_append = " wayland"
-
-.. note::
-
-   If X11 has been enabled elsewhere, Weston will build Wayland with X11
-   support
-
-Installing Wayland and Weston
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-
-To install the Wayland feature into an image, you must include the
-following
-:term:`CORE_IMAGE_EXTRA_INSTALL`
-statement in your ``local.conf`` file:
-::
-
-   CORE_IMAGE_EXTRA_INSTALL += "wayland weston"
-
-Running Weston
---------------
-
-To run Weston inside X11, enabling it as described earlier and building
-a Sato image is sufficient. If you are running your image under Sato, a
-Weston Launcher appears in the "Utility" category.
-
-Alternatively, you can run Weston through the command-line interpretor
-(CLI), which is better suited for development work. To run Weston under
-the CLI, you need to do the following after your image is built:
-
-1. Run these commands to export ``XDG_RUNTIME_DIR``:
-   ::
-
-      mkdir -p /tmp/$USER-weston
-      chmod 0700 /tmp/$USER-weston
-      export XDG_RUNTIME_DIR=/tmp/$USER-weston
-
-2. Launch Weston in the shell:
-   ::
-
-      weston
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/custom-distribution.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/custom-distribution.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0bc386d606
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/custom-distribution.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Creating Your Own Distribution
+******************************
+
+When you build an image using the Yocto Project and do not alter any
+distribution :term:`Metadata`, you are using the Poky distribution.
+Poky is explicitly a *reference* distribution for testing and
+development purposes. It enables most hardware and software features
+so that they can be tested, but this also means that from a security
+point of view the attack surface is very large. Additionally, at some
+point it is likely that you will want to gain more control over package
+alternative selections, compile-time options, and other low-level
+configurations. For both of these reasons, if you are using the Yocto
+Project for production use then you are strongly encouraged to create
+your own distribution.
+
+To create your own distribution, the basic steps consist of creating
+your own distribution layer, creating your own distribution
+configuration file, and then adding any needed code and Metadata to the
+layer. The following steps provide some more detail:
+
+-  *Create a layer for your new distro:* Create your distribution layer
+   so that you can keep your Metadata and code for the distribution
+   separate. It is strongly recommended that you create and use your own
+   layer for configuration and code. Using your own layer as compared to
+   just placing configurations in a ``local.conf`` configuration file
+   makes it easier to reproduce the same build configuration when using
+   multiple build machines. See the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/layers:creating a general layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script`"
+   section for information on how to quickly set up a layer.
+
+-  *Create the distribution configuration file:* The distribution
+   configuration file needs to be created in the ``conf/distro``
+   directory of your layer. You need to name it using your distribution
+   name (e.g. ``mydistro.conf``).
+
+   .. note::
+
+      The :term:`DISTRO` variable in your ``local.conf`` file determines the
+      name of your distribution.
+
+   You can split out parts of your configuration file into include files
+   and then "require" them from within your distribution configuration
+   file. Be sure to place the include files in the
+   ``conf/distro/include`` directory of your layer. A common example
+   usage of include files would be to separate out the selection of
+   desired version and revisions for individual recipes.
+
+   Your configuration file needs to set the following required
+   variables:
+
+   - :term:`DISTRO_NAME`
+
+   - :term:`DISTRO_VERSION`
+
+   These following variables are optional and you typically set them
+   from the distribution configuration file:
+
+   - :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`
+
+   - :term:`DISTRO_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`
+
+   - :term:`DISTRO_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`
+
+   - :term:`TCLIBC`
+
+   .. tip::
+
+      If you want to base your distribution configuration file on the
+      very basic configuration from OE-Core, you can use
+      ``conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` as a reference and just include
+      variables that differ as compared to ``defaultsetup.conf``.
+      Alternatively, you can create a distribution configuration file
+      from scratch using the ``defaultsetup.conf`` file or configuration files
+      from another distribution such as Poky as a reference.
+
+-  *Provide miscellaneous variables:* Be sure to define any other
+   variables for which you want to create a default or enforce as part
+   of the distribution configuration. You can include nearly any
+   variable from the ``local.conf`` file. The variables you use are not
+   limited to the list in the previous bulleted item.
+
+-  *Point to Your distribution configuration file:* In your ``local.conf``
+   file in the :term:`Build Directory`, set your :term:`DISTRO` variable to
+   point to your distribution's configuration file. For example, if your
+   distribution's configuration file is named ``mydistro.conf``, then
+   you point to it as follows::
+
+      DISTRO = "mydistro"
+
+-  *Add more to the layer if necessary:* Use your layer to hold other
+   information needed for the distribution:
+
+   -  Add recipes for installing distro-specific configuration files
+      that are not already installed by another recipe. If you have
+      distro-specific configuration files that are included by an
+      existing recipe, you should add an append file (``.bbappend``) for
+      those. For general information and recommendations on how to add
+      recipes to your layer, see the
+      ":ref:`dev-manual/layers:creating your own layer`" and
+      ":ref:`dev-manual/layers:following best practices when creating layers`"
+      sections.
+
+   -  Add any image recipes that are specific to your distribution.
+
+   -  Add a ``psplash`` append file for a branded splash screen, using
+      the :term:`SPLASH_IMAGES` variable.
+
+   -  Add any other append files to make custom changes that are
+      specific to individual recipes.
+
+   For information on append files, see the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/layers:appending other layers metadata with your layer`"
+   section.
+
+Copying and modifying the Poky distribution
+===========================================
+
+Instead of creating a custom distribution from scratch as per above, you may
+wish to start your custom distribution configuration by copying the Poky
+distribution provided within the ``meta-poky`` layer and then modifying it.
+This is fine, however if you do this you should keep the following in mind:
+
+-  Every reference to Poky needs to be updated in your copy so that it
+   will still apply. This includes override usage within files (e.g. ``:poky``)
+   and in directory names. This is a good opportunity to evaluate each one of
+   these customizations to see if they are needed for your use case.
+
+-  Unless you also intend to use them, the ``poky-tiny``, ``poky-altcfg`` and
+   ``poky-bleeding`` variants and any references to them can be removed.
+
+-  More generally, the Poky distribution configuration enables a lot more
+   than you likely need for your production use case. You should evaluate *every*
+   configuration choice made in your copy to determine if it is needed.
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/custom-template-configuration-directory.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/custom-template-configuration-directory.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..06fcada822
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/custom-template-configuration-directory.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Creating a Custom Template Configuration Directory
+**************************************************
+
+If you are producing your own customized version of the build system for
+use by other users, you might want to provide a custom build configuration
+that includes all the necessary settings and layers (i.e. ``local.conf`` and
+``bblayers.conf`` that are created in a new :term:`Build Directory`) and a custom
+message that is shown when setting up the build. This can be done by
+creating one or more template configuration directories in your
+custom distribution layer.
+
+This can be done by using ``bitbake-layers save-build-conf``::
+
+   $ bitbake-layers save-build-conf ../../meta-alex/ test-1
+   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
+   NOTE: Configuration template placed into /srv/work/alex/meta-alex/conf/templates/test-1
+   Please review the files in there, and particularly provide a configuration description in /srv/work/alex/meta-alex/conf/templates/test-1/conf-notes.txt
+   You can try out the configuration with
+   TEMPLATECONF=/srv/work/alex/meta-alex/conf/templates/test-1 . /srv/work/alex/poky/oe-init-build-env build-try-test-1
+
+The above command takes the config files from the currently active :term:`Build Directory` under ``conf``,
+replaces site-specific paths in ``bblayers.conf`` with ``##OECORE##``-relative paths, and copies
+the config files into a specified layer under a specified template name.
+
+To use those saved templates as a starting point for a build, users should point
+to one of them with :term:`TEMPLATECONF` environment variable::
+
+   TEMPLATECONF=/srv/work/alex/meta-alex/conf/templates/test-1 . /srv/work/alex/poky/oe-init-build-env build-try-test-1
+
+The OpenEmbedded build system uses the environment variable
+:term:`TEMPLATECONF` to locate the directory from which it gathers
+configuration information that ultimately ends up in the
+:term:`Build Directory` ``conf`` directory.
+
+If :term:`TEMPLATECONF` is not set, the default value is obtained
+from ``.templateconf`` file that is read from the same directory as
+``oe-init-build-env`` script. For the Poky reference distribution this
+would be::
+
+   TEMPLATECONF=${TEMPLATECONF:-meta-poky/conf/templates/default}
+
+If you look at a configuration template directory, you will
+see the ``bblayers.conf.sample``, ``local.conf.sample``, ``conf-summary.txt`` and
+``conf-notes.txt`` files. The build system uses these files to form the
+respective ``bblayers.conf`` file, ``local.conf`` file, and show
+users usage information about the build they're setting up
+when running the ``oe-init-build-env`` setup script. These can be
+edited further if needed to improve or change the build configurations
+available to the users, and provide useful summaries and detailed usage notes.
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/customizing-images.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/customizing-images.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5b18958ade
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/customizing-images.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,223 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Customizing Images
+******************
+
+You can customize images to satisfy particular requirements. This
+section describes several methods and provides guidelines for each.
+
+Customizing Images Using ``local.conf``
+=======================================
+
+Probably the easiest way to customize an image is to add a package by
+way of the ``local.conf`` configuration file. Because it is limited to
+local use, this method generally only allows you to add packages and is
+not as flexible as creating your own customized image. When you add
+packages using local variables this way, you need to realize that these
+variable changes are in effect for every build and consequently affect
+all images, which might not be what you require.
+
+To add a package to your image using the local configuration file, use
+the :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable with the ``:append`` operator::
+
+   IMAGE_INSTALL:append = " strace"
+
+Use of the syntax is important; specifically, the leading space
+after the opening quote and before the package name, which is
+``strace`` in this example. This space is required since the ``:append``
+operator does not add the space.
+
+Furthermore, you must use ``:append`` instead of the ``+=`` operator if
+you want to avoid ordering issues. The reason for this is because doing
+so unconditionally appends to the variable and avoids ordering problems
+due to the variable being set in image recipes and ``.bbclass`` files
+with operators like ``?=``. Using ``:append`` ensures the operation
+takes effect.
+
+As shown in its simplest use, ``IMAGE_INSTALL:append`` affects all
+images. It is possible to extend the syntax so that the variable applies
+to a specific image only. Here is an example::
+
+   IMAGE_INSTALL:append:pn-core-image-minimal = " strace"
+
+This example adds ``strace`` to the ``core-image-minimal`` image only.
+
+You can add packages using a similar approach through the
+:term:`CORE_IMAGE_EXTRA_INSTALL` variable. If you use this variable, only
+``core-image-*`` images are affected.
+
+Customizing Images Using Custom ``IMAGE_FEATURES`` and ``EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES``
+===============================================================================
+
+Another method for customizing your image is to enable or disable
+high-level image features by using the
+:term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` and
+:term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES`
+variables. Although the functions for both variables are nearly
+equivalent, best practices dictate using :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` from within
+a recipe and using :term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES` from within your
+``local.conf`` file, which is found in the :term:`Build Directory`.
+
+To understand how these features work, the best reference is
+:ref:`meta/classes-recipe/image.bbclass <ref-classes-image>`.
+This class lists out the available
+:term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` of which most map to package groups while some, such
+as ``debug-tweaks`` and ``read-only-rootfs``, resolve as general
+configuration settings.
+
+In summary, the file looks at the contents of the :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`
+variable and then maps or configures the feature accordingly. Based on
+this information, the build system automatically adds the appropriate
+packages or configurations to the
+:term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable.
+Effectively, you are enabling extra features by extending the class or
+creating a custom class for use with specialized image ``.bb`` files.
+
+Use the :term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES` variable from within your local
+configuration file. Using a separate area from which to enable features
+with this variable helps you avoid overwriting the features in the image
+recipe that are enabled with :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`. The value of
+:term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES` is added to :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` within
+``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``.
+
+To illustrate how you can use these variables to modify your image,
+consider an example that selects the SSH server. The Yocto Project ships
+with two SSH servers you can use with your images: Dropbear and OpenSSH.
+Dropbear is a minimal SSH server appropriate for resource-constrained
+environments, while OpenSSH is a well-known standard SSH server
+implementation. By default, the ``core-image-sato`` image is configured
+to use Dropbear. The ``core-image-full-cmdline`` and ``core-image-lsb``
+images both include OpenSSH. The ``core-image-minimal`` image does not
+contain an SSH server.
+
+You can customize your image and change these defaults. Edit the
+:term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` variable in your recipe or use the
+:term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES` in your ``local.conf`` file so that it
+configures the image you are working with to include
+``ssh-server-dropbear`` or ``ssh-server-openssh``.
+
+.. note::
+
+   See the ":ref:`ref-manual/features:image features`" section in the Yocto
+   Project Reference Manual for a complete list of image features that ship
+   with the Yocto Project.
+
+Customizing Images Using Custom .bb Files
+=========================================
+
+You can also customize an image by creating a custom recipe that defines
+additional software as part of the image. The following example shows
+the form for the two lines you need::
+
+   IMAGE_INSTALL = "packagegroup-core-x11-base package1 package2"
+   inherit core-image
+
+Defining the software using a custom recipe gives you total control over
+the contents of the image. It is important to use the correct names of
+packages in the :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable. You must use the
+OpenEmbedded notation and not the Debian notation for the names (e.g.
+``glibc-dev`` instead of ``libc6-dev``).
+
+The other method for creating a custom image is to base it on an
+existing image. For example, if you want to create an image based on
+``core-image-sato`` but add the additional package ``strace`` to the
+image, copy the ``meta/recipes-sato/images/core-image-sato.bb`` to a new
+``.bb`` and add the following line to the end of the copy::
+
+   IMAGE_INSTALL += "strace"
+
+Customizing Images Using Custom Package Groups
+==============================================
+
+For complex custom images, the best approach for customizing an image is
+to create a custom package group recipe that is used to build the image
+or images. A good example of a package group recipe is
+``meta/recipes-core/packagegroups/packagegroup-base.bb``.
+
+If you examine that recipe, you see that the :term:`PACKAGES` variable lists
+the package group packages to produce. The ``inherit packagegroup``
+statement sets appropriate default values and automatically adds
+``-dev``, ``-dbg``, and ``-ptest`` complementary packages for each
+package specified in the :term:`PACKAGES` statement.
+
+.. note::
+
+   The ``inherit packagegroup`` line should be located near the top of the
+   recipe, certainly before the :term:`PACKAGES` statement.
+
+For each package you specify in :term:`PACKAGES`, you can use :term:`RDEPENDS`
+and :term:`RRECOMMENDS` entries to provide a list of packages the parent
+task package should contain. You can see examples of these further down
+in the ``packagegroup-base.bb`` recipe.
+
+Here is a short, fabricated example showing the same basic pieces for a
+hypothetical packagegroup defined in ``packagegroup-custom.bb``, where
+the variable :term:`PN` is the standard way to abbreviate the reference to
+the full packagegroup name ``packagegroup-custom``::
+
+   DESCRIPTION = "My Custom Package Groups"
+
+   inherit packagegroup
+
+   PACKAGES = "\
+       ${PN}-apps \
+       ${PN}-tools \
+       "
+
+   RDEPENDS:${PN}-apps = "\
+       dropbear \
+       portmap \
+       psplash"
+
+   RDEPENDS:${PN}-tools = "\
+       oprofile \
+       oprofileui-server \
+       lttng-tools"
+
+   RRECOMMENDS:${PN}-tools = "\
+       kernel-module-oprofile"
+
+In the previous example, two package group packages are created with
+their dependencies and their recommended package dependencies listed:
+``packagegroup-custom-apps``, and ``packagegroup-custom-tools``. To
+build an image using these package group packages, you need to add
+``packagegroup-custom-apps`` and/or ``packagegroup-custom-tools`` to
+:term:`IMAGE_INSTALL`. For other forms of image dependencies see the other
+areas of this section.
+
+Customizing an Image Hostname
+=============================
+
+By default, the configured hostname (i.e. ``/etc/hostname``) in an image
+is the same as the machine name. For example, if
+:term:`MACHINE` equals "qemux86", the
+configured hostname written to ``/etc/hostname`` is "qemux86".
+
+You can customize this name by altering the value of the "hostname"
+variable in the ``base-files`` recipe using either an append file or a
+configuration file. Use the following in an append file::
+
+   hostname = "myhostname"
+
+Use the following in a configuration file::
+
+   hostname:pn-base-files = "myhostname"
+
+Changing the default value of the variable "hostname" can be useful in
+certain situations. For example, suppose you need to do extensive
+testing on an image and you would like to easily identify the image
+under test from existing images with typical default hostnames. In this
+situation, you could change the default hostname to "testme", which
+results in all the images using the name "testme". Once testing is
+complete and you do not need to rebuild the image for test any longer,
+you can easily reset the default hostname.
+
+Another point of interest is that if you unset the variable, the image
+will have no default hostname in the filesystem. Here is an example that
+unsets the variable in a configuration file::
+
+  hostname:pn-base-files = ""
+
+Having no default hostname in the filesystem is suitable for
+environments that use dynamic hostnames such as virtual machines.
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/debugging.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/debugging.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..92458a0c37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/debugging.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,1271 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Debugging Tools and Techniques
+******************************
+
+The exact method for debugging build failures depends on the nature of
+the problem and on the system's area from which the bug originates.
+Standard debugging practices such as comparison against the last known
+working version with examination of the changes and the re-application
+of steps to identify the one causing the problem are valid for the Yocto
+Project just as they are for any other system. Even though it is
+impossible to detail every possible potential failure, this section
+provides some general tips to aid in debugging given a variety of
+situations.
+
+.. note::
+
+   A useful feature for debugging is the error reporting tool.
+   Configuring the Yocto Project to use this tool causes the
+   OpenEmbedded build system to produce error reporting commands as part
+   of the console output. You can enter the commands after the build
+   completes to log error information into a common database, that can
+   help you figure out what might be going wrong. For information on how
+   to enable and use this feature, see the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/error-reporting-tool:using the error reporting tool`"
+   section.
+
+The following list shows the debugging topics in the remainder of this
+section:
+
+-  ":ref:`dev-manual/debugging:viewing logs from failed tasks`" describes
+   how to find and view logs from tasks that failed during the build
+   process.
+
+-  ":ref:`dev-manual/debugging:viewing variable values`" describes how to
+   use the BitBake ``-e`` option to examine variable values after a
+   recipe has been parsed.
+
+-  ":ref:`dev-manual/debugging:viewing package information with \`\`oe-pkgdata-util\`\``"
+   describes how to use the ``oe-pkgdata-util`` utility to query
+   :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` and
+   display package-related information for built packages.
+
+-  ":ref:`dev-manual/debugging:viewing dependencies between recipes and tasks`"
+   describes how to use the BitBake ``-g`` option to display recipe
+   dependency information used during the build.
+
+-  ":ref:`dev-manual/debugging:viewing task variable dependencies`" describes
+   how to use the ``bitbake-dumpsig`` command in conjunction with key
+   subdirectories in the :term:`Build Directory` to determine variable
+   dependencies.
+
+-  ":ref:`dev-manual/debugging:running specific tasks`" describes
+   how to use several BitBake options (e.g. ``-c``, ``-C``, and ``-f``)
+   to run specific tasks in the build chain. It can be useful to run
+   tasks "out-of-order" when trying isolate build issues.
+
+-  ":ref:`dev-manual/debugging:general BitBake problems`" describes how
+   to use BitBake's ``-D`` debug output option to reveal more about what
+   BitBake is doing during the build.
+
+-  ":ref:`dev-manual/debugging:building with no dependencies`"
+   describes how to use the BitBake ``-b`` option to build a recipe
+   while ignoring dependencies.
+
+-  ":ref:`dev-manual/debugging:recipe logging mechanisms`"
+   describes how to use the many recipe logging functions to produce
+   debugging output and report errors and warnings.
+
+-  ":ref:`dev-manual/debugging:debugging parallel make races`"
+   describes how to debug situations where the build consists of several
+   parts that are run simultaneously and when the output or result of
+   one part is not ready for use with a different part of the build that
+   depends on that output.
+
+-  ":ref:`dev-manual/debugging:debugging with the gnu project debugger (gdb) remotely`"
+   describes how to use GDB to allow you to examine running programs, which can
+   help you fix problems.
+
+-  ":ref:`dev-manual/debugging:debugging with the gnu project debugger (gdb) on the target`"
+   describes how to use GDB directly on target hardware for debugging.
+
+-  ":ref:`dev-manual/debugging:other debugging tips`" describes
+   miscellaneous debugging tips that can be useful.
+
+Viewing Logs from Failed Tasks
+==============================
+
+You can find the log for a task in the file
+``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/temp/log.do_``\ `taskname`.
+For example, the log for the
+:ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task of the
+QEMU minimal image for the x86 machine (``qemux86``) might be in
+``tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/temp/log.do_compile``.
+To see the commands :term:`BitBake` ran
+to generate a log, look at the corresponding ``run.do_``\ `taskname` file
+in the same directory.
+
+``log.do_``\ `taskname` and ``run.do_``\ `taskname` are actually symbolic
+links to ``log.do_``\ `taskname`\ ``.``\ `pid` and
+``log.run_``\ `taskname`\ ``.``\ `pid`, where `pid` is the PID the task had
+when it ran. The symlinks always point to the files corresponding to the
+most recent run.
+
+Viewing Variable Values
+=======================
+
+Sometimes you need to know the value of a variable as a result of
+BitBake's parsing step. This could be because some unexpected behavior
+occurred in your project. Perhaps an attempt to :ref:`modify a variable
+<bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:modifying existing
+variables>` did not work out as expected.
+
+BitBake's ``-e`` option is used to display variable values after
+parsing. The following command displays the variable values after the
+configuration files (i.e. ``local.conf``, ``bblayers.conf``,
+``bitbake.conf`` and so forth) have been parsed::
+
+   $ bitbake -e
+
+The following command displays variable values after a specific recipe has
+been parsed. The variables include those from the configuration as well::
+
+   $ bitbake -e recipename
+
+.. note::
+
+   Each recipe has its own private set of variables (datastore).
+   Internally, after parsing the configuration, a copy of the resulting
+   datastore is made prior to parsing each recipe. This copying implies
+   that variables set in one recipe will not be visible to other
+   recipes.
+
+   Likewise, each task within a recipe gets a private datastore based on
+   the recipe datastore, which means that variables set within one task
+   will not be visible to other tasks.
+
+In the output of ``bitbake -e``, each variable is preceded by a
+description of how the variable got its value, including temporary
+values that were later overridden. This description also includes
+variable flags (varflags) set on the variable. The output can be very
+helpful during debugging.
+
+Variables that are exported to the environment are preceded by
+``export`` in the output of ``bitbake -e``. See the following example::
+
+   export CC="i586-poky-linux-gcc -m32 -march=i586 --sysroot=/home/ulf/poky/build/tmp/sysroots/qemux86"
+
+In addition to variable values, the output of the ``bitbake -e`` and
+``bitbake -e`` recipe commands includes the following information:
+
+-  The output starts with a tree listing all configuration files and
+   classes included globally, recursively listing the files they include
+   or inherit in turn. Much of the behavior of the OpenEmbedded build
+   system (including the behavior of the :ref:`ref-manual/tasks:normal recipe build tasks`) is
+   implemented in the :ref:`ref-classes-base` class and the
+   classes it inherits, rather than being built into BitBake itself.
+
+-  After the variable values, all functions appear in the output. For
+   shell functions, variables referenced within the function body are
+   expanded. If a function has been modified using overrides or using
+   override-style operators like ``:append`` and ``:prepend``, then the
+   final assembled function body appears in the output.
+
+Viewing Package Information with ``oe-pkgdata-util``
+====================================================
+
+You can use the ``oe-pkgdata-util`` command-line utility to query
+:term:`PKGDATA_DIR` and display
+various package-related information. When you use the utility, you must
+use it to view information on packages that have already been built.
+
+Here are a few of the available ``oe-pkgdata-util`` subcommands.
+
+.. note::
+
+   You can use the standard \* and ? globbing wildcards as part of
+   package names and paths.
+
+-  ``oe-pkgdata-util list-pkgs [pattern]``: Lists all packages
+   that have been built, optionally limiting the match to packages that
+   match pattern.
+
+-  ``oe-pkgdata-util list-pkg-files package ...``: Lists the
+   files and directories contained in the given packages.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      A different way to view the contents of a package is to look at
+      the
+      ``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/packages-split``
+      directory of the recipe that generates the package. This directory
+      is created by the
+      :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task
+      and has one subdirectory for each package the recipe generates,
+      which contains the files stored in that package.
+
+      If you want to inspect the ``${WORKDIR}/packages-split``
+      directory, make sure that :ref:`ref-classes-rm-work` is not
+      enabled when you build the recipe.
+
+-  ``oe-pkgdata-util find-path path ...``: Lists the names of
+   the packages that contain the given paths. For example, the following
+   tells us that ``/usr/share/man/man1/make.1`` is contained in the
+   ``make-doc`` package::
+
+      $ oe-pkgdata-util find-path /usr/share/man/man1/make.1
+      make-doc: /usr/share/man/man1/make.1
+
+-  ``oe-pkgdata-util lookup-recipe package ...``: Lists the name
+   of the recipes that produce the given packages.
+
+For more information on the ``oe-pkgdata-util`` command, use the help
+facility::
+
+   $ oe-pkgdata-util --help
+   $ oe-pkgdata-util subcommand --help
+
+Viewing Dependencies Between Recipes and Tasks
+==============================================
+
+Sometimes it can be hard to see why BitBake wants to build other recipes
+before the one you have specified. Dependency information can help you
+understand why a recipe is built.
+
+To generate dependency information for a recipe, run the following
+command::
+
+   $ bitbake -g recipename
+
+This command writes the following files in the current directory:
+
+-  ``pn-buildlist``: A list of recipes/targets involved in building
+   `recipename`. "Involved" here means that at least one task from the
+   recipe needs to run when building `recipename` from scratch. Targets
+   that are in
+   :term:`ASSUME_PROVIDED`
+   are not listed.
+
+-  ``task-depends.dot``: A graph showing dependencies between tasks.
+
+The graphs are in :wikipedia:`DOT <DOT_%28graph_description_language%29>`
+format and can be converted to images (e.g. using the ``dot`` tool from
+`Graphviz <https://www.graphviz.org/>`__).
+
+.. note::
+
+   -  DOT files use a plain text format. The graphs generated using the
+      ``bitbake -g`` command are often so large as to be difficult to
+      read without special pruning (e.g. with BitBake's ``-I`` option)
+      and processing. Despite the form and size of the graphs, the
+      corresponding ``.dot`` files can still be possible to read and
+      provide useful information.
+
+      As an example, the ``task-depends.dot`` file contains lines such
+      as the following::
+
+         "libxslt.do_configure" -> "libxml2.do_populate_sysroot"
+
+      The above example line reveals that the
+      :ref:`ref-tasks-configure`
+      task in ``libxslt`` depends on the
+      :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot`
+      task in ``libxml2``, which is a normal
+      :term:`DEPENDS` dependency
+      between the two recipes.
+
+   -  For an example of how ``.dot`` files can be processed, see the
+      ``scripts/contrib/graph-tool`` Python script, which finds and
+      displays paths between graph nodes.
+
+You can use a different method to view dependency information by using
+either::
+
+   $ bitbake -g -u taskexp recipename
+
+or::
+
+   $ bitbake -g -u taskexp_ncurses recipename
+
+The ``-u taskdep`` option GUI window from which you can view build-time and
+runtime dependencies for the recipes involved in building recipename. The
+``-u taskexp_ncurses`` option uses ncurses instead of GTK to render the UI.
+
+Viewing Task Variable Dependencies
+==================================
+
+As mentioned in the
+":ref:`bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-execution:checksums (signatures)`"
+section of the BitBake User Manual, BitBake tries to automatically determine
+what variables a task depends on so that it can rerun the task if any values of
+the variables change. This determination is usually reliable. However, if you
+do things like construct variable names at runtime, then you might have to
+manually declare dependencies on those variables using ``vardeps`` as described
+in the ":ref:`bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:variable flags`"
+section of the BitBake User Manual.
+
+If you are unsure whether a variable dependency is being picked up
+automatically for a given task, you can list the variable dependencies
+BitBake has determined by doing the following:
+
+#. Build the recipe containing the task::
+
+   $ bitbake recipename
+
+#. Inside the :term:`STAMPS_DIR`
+   directory, find the signature data (``sigdata``) file that
+   corresponds to the task. The ``sigdata`` files contain a pickled
+   Python database of all the metadata that went into creating the input
+   checksum for the task. As an example, for the
+   :ref:`ref-tasks-fetch` task of the
+   ``db`` recipe, the ``sigdata`` file might be found in the following
+   location::
+
+      ${BUILDDIR}/tmp/stamps/i586-poky-linux/db/6.0.30-r1.do_fetch.sigdata.7c048c18222b16ff0bcee2000ef648b1
+
+   For tasks that are accelerated through the shared state
+   (:ref:`sstate <overview-manual/concepts:shared state cache>`) cache, an
+   additional ``siginfo`` file is written into
+   :term:`SSTATE_DIR` along with
+   the cached task output. The ``siginfo`` files contain exactly the
+   same information as ``sigdata`` files.
+
+#. Run ``bitbake-dumpsig`` on the ``sigdata`` or ``siginfo`` file. Here
+   is an example::
+
+      $ bitbake-dumpsig ${BUILDDIR}/tmp/stamps/i586-poky-linux/db/6.0.30-r1.do_fetch.sigdata.7c048c18222b16ff0bcee2000ef648b1
+
+   In the output of the above command, you will find a line like the
+   following, which lists all the (inferred) variable dependencies for
+   the task. This list also includes indirect dependencies from
+   variables depending on other variables, recursively::
+
+      Task dependencies: ['PV', 'SRCREV', 'SRC_URI', 'SRC_URI[sha256sum]', 'base_do_fetch']
+
+   .. note::
+
+      Functions (e.g. ``base_do_fetch``) also count as variable dependencies.
+      These functions in turn depend on the variables they reference.
+
+   The output of ``bitbake-dumpsig`` also includes the value each
+   variable had, a list of dependencies for each variable, and
+   :term:`BB_BASEHASH_IGNORE_VARS`
+   information.
+
+Debugging signature construction and unexpected task executions
+===============================================================
+
+There is a ``bitbake-diffsigs`` command for comparing two
+``siginfo`` or ``sigdata`` files. This command can be helpful when
+trying to figure out what changed between two versions of a task. If you
+call ``bitbake-diffsigs`` with just one file, the command behaves like
+``bitbake-dumpsig``.
+
+You can also use BitBake to dump out the signature construction
+information without executing tasks by using either of the following
+BitBake command-line options::
+
+   ‐‐dump-signatures=SIGNATURE_HANDLER
+   -S SIGNATURE_HANDLER
+
+
+.. note::
+
+   Two common values for `SIGNATURE_HANDLER` are "none" and "printdiff", which
+   dump only the signature or compare the dumped signature with the most recent one,
+   respectively. "printdiff" will try to establish the most recent
+   signature match (e.g. in the sstate cache) and then
+   compare the matched signatures to determine the stamps and delta
+   where these two stamp trees diverge. This can be used to determine why
+   tasks need to be re-run in situations where that is not expected.
+
+Using BitBake with either of these options causes BitBake to dump out
+``sigdata`` files in the ``stamps`` directory for every task it would
+have executed instead of building the specified target package.
+
+Viewing Metadata Used to Create the Input Signature of a Shared State Task
+==========================================================================
+
+Seeing what metadata went into creating the input signature of a shared
+state (sstate) task can be a useful debugging aid. This information is
+available in signature information (``siginfo``) files in
+:term:`SSTATE_DIR`. For
+information on how to view and interpret information in ``siginfo``
+files, see the
+":ref:`dev-manual/debugging:viewing task variable dependencies`" section.
+
+For conceptual information on shared state, see the
+":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:shared state`"
+section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
+
+Invalidating Shared State to Force a Task to Run
+================================================
+
+The OpenEmbedded build system uses
+:ref:`checksums <overview-manual/concepts:checksums (signatures)>` and
+:ref:`overview-manual/concepts:shared state` cache to avoid unnecessarily
+rebuilding tasks. Collectively, this scheme is known as "shared state
+code".
+
+As with all schemes, this one has some drawbacks. It is possible that
+you could make implicit changes to your code that the checksum
+calculations do not take into account. These implicit changes affect a
+task's output but do not trigger the shared state code into rebuilding a
+recipe. Consider an example during which a tool changes its output.
+Assume that the output of ``rpmdeps`` changes. The result of the change
+should be that all the ``package`` and ``package_write_rpm`` shared
+state cache items become invalid. However, because the change to the
+output is external to the code and therefore implicit, the associated
+shared state cache items do not become invalidated. In this case, the
+build process uses the cached items rather than running the task again.
+Obviously, these types of implicit changes can cause problems.
+
+To avoid these problems during the build, you need to understand the
+effects of any changes you make. Realize that changes you make directly
+to a function are automatically factored into the checksum calculation.
+Thus, these explicit changes invalidate the associated area of shared
+state cache. However, you need to be aware of any implicit changes that
+are not obvious changes to the code and could affect the output of a
+given task.
+
+When you identify an implicit change, you can easily take steps to
+invalidate the cache and force the tasks to run. The steps you can take
+are as simple as changing a function's comments in the source code. For
+example, to invalidate package shared state files, change the comment
+statements of
+:ref:`ref-tasks-package` or the
+comments of one of the functions it calls. Even though the change is
+purely cosmetic, it causes the checksum to be recalculated and forces
+the build system to run the task again.
+
+.. note::
+
+   For an example of a commit that makes a cosmetic change to invalidate
+   shared state, see this
+   :yocto_git:`commit </poky/commit/meta/classes/package.bbclass?id=737f8bbb4f27b4837047cb9b4fbfe01dfde36d54>`.
+
+Running Specific Tasks
+======================
+
+Any given recipe consists of a set of tasks. The standard BitBake
+behavior in most cases is: :ref:`ref-tasks-fetch`, :ref:`ref-tasks-unpack`, :ref:`ref-tasks-patch`,
+:ref:`ref-tasks-configure`, :ref:`ref-tasks-compile`, :ref:`ref-tasks-install`, :ref:`ref-tasks-package`,
+:ref:`do_package_write_* <ref-tasks-package_write_deb>`, and :ref:`ref-tasks-build`. The default task is
+:ref:`ref-tasks-build` and any tasks on which it depends build first. Some tasks,
+such as :ref:`ref-tasks-devshell`, are not part of the default build chain. If you
+wish to run a task that is not part of the default build chain, you can
+use the ``-c`` option in BitBake. Here is an example::
+
+   $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -c devshell
+
+The ``-c`` option respects task dependencies, which means that all other
+tasks (including tasks from other recipes) that the specified task
+depends on will be run before the task. Even when you manually specify a
+task to run with ``-c``, BitBake will only run the task if it considers
+it "out of date". See the
+":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:stamp files and the rerunning of tasks`"
+section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual for how
+BitBake determines whether a task is "out of date".
+
+If you want to force an up-to-date task to be rerun (e.g. because you
+made manual modifications to the recipe's
+:term:`WORKDIR` that you want to try
+out), then you can use the ``-f`` option.
+
+.. note::
+
+   The reason ``-f`` is never required when running the
+   :ref:`ref-tasks-devshell` task is because the
+   [\ :ref:`nostamp <bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:variable flags>`\ ]
+   variable flag is already set for the task.
+
+The following example shows one way you can use the ``-f`` option::
+
+   $ bitbake matchbox-desktop
+             .
+             .
+   make some changes to the source code in the work directory
+             .
+             .
+   $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -c compile -f
+   $ bitbake matchbox-desktop
+
+This sequence first builds and then recompiles ``matchbox-desktop``. The
+last command reruns all tasks (basically the packaging tasks) after the
+compile. BitBake recognizes that the :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task was rerun and
+therefore understands that the other tasks also need to be run again.
+
+Another, shorter way to rerun a task and all
+:ref:`ref-manual/tasks:normal recipe build tasks`
+that depend on it is to use the ``-C`` option.
+
+.. note::
+
+   This option is upper-cased and is separate from the ``-c``
+   option, which is lower-cased.
+
+Using this option invalidates the given task and then runs the
+:ref:`ref-tasks-build` task, which is
+the default task if no task is given, and the tasks on which it depends.
+You could replace the final two commands in the previous example with
+the following single command::
+
+   $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -C compile
+
+Internally, the ``-f`` and ``-C`` options work by tainting (modifying)
+the input checksum of the specified task. This tainting indirectly
+causes the task and its dependent tasks to be rerun through the normal
+task dependency mechanisms.
+
+.. note::
+
+   BitBake explicitly keeps track of which tasks have been tainted in
+   this fashion, and will print warnings such as the following for
+   builds involving such tasks:
+
+   .. code-block:: none
+
+      WARNING: /home/ulf/poky/meta/recipes-sato/matchbox-desktop/matchbox-desktop_2.1.bb.do_compile is tainted from a forced run
+
+
+   The purpose of the warning is to let you know that the work directory
+   and build output might not be in the clean state they would be in for
+   a "normal" build, depending on what actions you took. To get rid of
+   such warnings, you can remove the work directory and rebuild the
+   recipe, as follows::
+
+      $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -c clean
+      $ bitbake matchbox-desktop
+
+
+You can view a list of tasks in a given package by running the
+:ref:`ref-tasks-listtasks` task as follows::
+
+   $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -c listtasks
+
+The results appear as output to the console and are also in
+the file ``${WORKDIR}/temp/log.do_listtasks``.
+
+General BitBake Problems
+========================
+
+You can see debug output from BitBake by using the ``-D`` option. The
+debug output gives more information about what BitBake is doing and the
+reason behind it. Each ``-D`` option you use increases the logging
+level. The most common usage is ``-DDD``.
+
+The output from ``bitbake -DDD -v targetname`` can reveal why BitBake
+chose a certain version of a package or why BitBake picked a certain
+provider. This command could also help you in a situation where you
+think BitBake did something unexpected.
+
+Building with No Dependencies
+=============================
+
+To build a specific recipe (``.bb`` file), you can use the following
+command form::
+
+   $ bitbake -b somepath/somerecipe.bb
+
+This command form does
+not check for dependencies. Consequently, you should use it only when
+you know existing dependencies have been met.
+
+.. note::
+
+   You can also specify fragments of the filename. In this case, BitBake
+   checks for a unique match.
+
+Recipe Logging Mechanisms
+=========================
+
+The Yocto Project provides several logging functions for producing
+debugging output and reporting errors and warnings. For Python
+functions, the following logging functions are available. All of these functions
+log to ``${T}/log.do_``\ `task`, and can also log to standard output
+(stdout) with the right settings:
+
+-  ``bb.plain(msg)``: Writes msg as is to the log while also
+   logging to stdout.
+
+-  ``bb.note(msg)``: Writes "NOTE: msg" to the log. Also logs to
+   stdout if BitBake is called with "-v".
+
+-  ``bb.debug(level, msg)``: Writes "DEBUG: msg" to the log. Also logs to
+   stdout if the log level is greater than or equal to level. See the
+   ":ref:`bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-intro:usage and syntax`"
+   option in the BitBake User Manual for more information.
+
+-  ``bb.warn(msg)``: Writes "WARNING: msg" to the log while also
+   logging to stdout.
+
+-  ``bb.error(msg)``: Writes "ERROR: msg" to the log while also
+   logging to standard out (stdout).
+
+   .. note::
+
+      Calling this function does not cause the task to fail.
+
+-  ``bb.fatal(msg)``: This logging function is similar to
+   ``bb.error(msg)`` but also causes the calling task to fail.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      ``bb.fatal()`` raises an exception, which means you do not need to put a
+      "return" statement after the function.
+
+The same logging functions are also available in shell functions, under
+the names ``bbplain``, ``bbnote``, ``bbdebug``, ``bbwarn``, ``bberror``,
+and ``bbfatal``. The :ref:`ref-classes-logging` class
+implements these functions. See that class in the ``meta/classes``
+folder of the :term:`Source Directory` for information.
+
+Logging With Python
+-------------------
+
+When creating recipes using Python and inserting code that handles build
+logs, keep in mind the goal is to have informative logs while keeping
+the console as "silent" as possible. Also, if you want status messages
+in the log, use the "debug" loglevel.
+
+Here is an example written in Python. The code handles logging for
+a function that determines the number of tasks needed to be run. See the
+":ref:`ref-tasks-listtasks`"
+section for additional information::
+
+   python do_listtasks() {
+       bb.debug(2, "Starting to figure out the task list")
+       if noteworthy_condition:
+           bb.note("There are 47 tasks to run")
+       bb.debug(2, "Got to point xyz")
+       if warning_trigger:
+           bb.warn("Detected warning_trigger, this might be a problem later.")
+       if recoverable_error:
+           bb.error("Hit recoverable_error, you really need to fix this!")
+       if fatal_error:
+           bb.fatal("fatal_error detected, unable to print the task list")
+       bb.plain("The tasks present are abc")
+       bb.debug(2, "Finished figuring out the tasklist")
+   }
+
+Logging With Bash
+-----------------
+
+When creating recipes using Bash and inserting code that handles build
+logs, you have the same goals --- informative with minimal console output.
+The syntax you use for recipes written in Bash is similar to that of
+recipes written in Python described in the previous section.
+
+Here is an example written in Bash. The code logs the progress of
+the ``do_my_function`` function::
+
+   do_my_function() {
+       bbdebug 2 "Running do_my_function"
+       if [ exceptional_condition ]; then
+           bbnote "Hit exceptional_condition"
+       fi
+       bbdebug 2  "Got to point xyz"
+       if [ warning_trigger ]; then
+           bbwarn "Detected warning_trigger, this might cause a problem later."
+       fi
+       if [ recoverable_error ]; then
+           bberror "Hit recoverable_error, correcting"
+       fi
+       if [ fatal_error ]; then
+           bbfatal "fatal_error detected"
+       fi
+       bbdebug 2 "Completed do_my_function"
+   }
+
+
+Debugging Parallel Make Races
+=============================
+
+A parallel ``make`` race occurs when the build consists of several parts
+that are run simultaneously and a situation occurs when the output or
+result of one part is not ready for use with a different part of the
+build that depends on that output. Parallel make races are annoying and
+can sometimes be difficult to reproduce and fix. However, there are some simple
+tips and tricks that can help you debug and fix them. This section
+presents a real-world example of an error encountered on the Yocto
+Project autobuilder and the process used to fix it.
+
+.. note::
+
+   If you cannot properly fix a ``make`` race condition, you can work around it
+   by clearing either the :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` or :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST`
+   variables.
+
+The Failure
+-----------
+
+For this example, assume that you are building an image that depends on
+the "neard" package. And, during the build, BitBake runs into problems
+and creates the following output.
+
+.. note::
+
+   This example log file has longer lines artificially broken to make
+   the listing easier to read.
+
+If you examine the output or the log file, you see the failure during
+``make``:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+   | DEBUG: SITE files ['endian-little', 'bit-32', 'ix86-common', 'common-linux', 'common-glibc', 'i586-linux', 'common']
+   | DEBUG: Executing shell function do_compile
+   | NOTE: make -j 16
+   | make --no-print-directory all-am
+   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
+   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
+   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
+   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
+     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/types.h include/near/types.h
+   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
+     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/log.h include/near/log.h
+   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
+     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/plugin.h include/near/plugin.h
+   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
+   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
+   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
+   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
+     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/tag.h include/near/tag.h
+   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
+   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
+     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/adapter.h include/near/adapter.h
+   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
+   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
+     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/ndef.h include/near/ndef.h
+   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
+     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/tlv.h include/near/tlv.h
+   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
+   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
+   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
+     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/setting.h include/near/setting.h
+   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
+   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
+   | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
+   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
+     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/device.h include/near/device.h
+   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
+     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/nfc_copy.h include/near/nfc_copy.h
+   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
+     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/snep.h include/near/snep.h
+   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
+     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/version.h include/near/version.h
+   | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
+     0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/dbus.h include/near/dbus.h
+   | ./src/genbuiltin nfctype1 nfctype2 nfctype3 nfctype4 p2p > src/builtin.h
+   | i586-poky-linux-gcc  -m32 -march=i586 --sysroot=/home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/nightly-x86/
+     build/build/tmp/sysroots/qemux86 -DHAVE_CONFIG_H -I. -I./include -I./src -I./gdbus  -I/home/pokybuild/
+     yocto-autobuilder/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/sysroots/qemux86/usr/include/glib-2.0
+     -I/home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/sysroots/qemux86/usr/
+     lib/glib-2.0/include  -I/home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/nightly-x86/build/build/
+     tmp/sysroots/qemux86/usr/include/dbus-1.0 -I/home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/
+     nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/sysroots/qemux86/usr/lib/dbus-1.0/include  -I/home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/
+     nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/sysroots/qemux86/usr/include/libnl3
+     -DNEAR_PLUGIN_BUILTIN -DPLUGINDIR=\""/usr/lib/near/plugins"\"
+     -DCONFIGDIR=\""/etc/neard\"" -O2 -pipe -g -feliminate-unused-debug-types -c
+     -o tools/snep-send.o tools/snep-send.c
+   | In file included from tools/snep-send.c:16:0:
+   | tools/../src/near.h:41:23: fatal error: near/dbus.h: No such file or directory
+   |  #include <near/dbus.h>
+   |                        ^
+   | compilation terminated.
+   | make[1]: *** [tools/snep-send.o] Error 1
+   | make[1]: *** Waiting for unfinished jobs....
+   | make: *** [all] Error 2
+   | ERROR: oe_runmake failed
+
+Reproducing the Error
+---------------------
+
+Because race conditions are intermittent, they do not manifest
+themselves every time you do the build. In fact, most times the build
+will complete without problems even though the potential race condition
+exists. Thus, once the error surfaces, you need a way to reproduce it.
+
+In this example, compiling the "neard" package is causing the problem.
+So the first thing to do is build "neard" locally. Before you start the
+build, set the
+:term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` variable
+in your ``local.conf`` file to a high number (e.g. "-j 20"). Using a
+high value for :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` increases the chances of the race
+condition showing up::
+
+   $ bitbake neard
+
+Once the local build for "neard" completes, start a ``devshell`` build::
+
+   $ bitbake neard -c devshell
+
+For information on how to use a ``devshell``, see the
+":ref:`dev-manual/development-shell:using a development shell`" section.
+
+In the ``devshell``, do the following::
+
+   $ make clean
+   $ make tools/snep-send.o
+
+The ``devshell`` commands cause the failure to clearly
+be visible. In this case, there is a missing dependency for the ``neard``
+Makefile target. Here is some abbreviated, sample output with the
+missing dependency clearly visible at the end::
+
+   i586-poky-linux-gcc  -m32 -march=i586 --sysroot=/home/scott-lenovo/......
+      .
+      .
+      .
+   tools/snep-send.c
+   In file included from tools/snep-send.c:16:0:
+   tools/../src/near.h:41:23: fatal error: near/dbus.h: No such file or directory
+    #include <near/dbus.h>
+                     ^
+   compilation terminated.
+   make: *** [tools/snep-send.o] Error 1
+   $
+
+
+Creating a Patch for the Fix
+----------------------------
+
+Because there is a missing dependency for the Makefile target, you need
+to patch the ``Makefile.am`` file, which is generated from
+``Makefile.in``. You can use Quilt to create the patch::
+
+   $ quilt new parallelmake.patch
+   Patch patches/parallelmake.patch is now on top
+   $ quilt add Makefile.am
+   File Makefile.am added to patch patches/parallelmake.patch
+
+For more information on using Quilt, see the
+":ref:`dev-manual/quilt:using quilt in your workflow`" section.
+
+At this point you need to make the edits to ``Makefile.am`` to add the
+missing dependency. For our example, you have to add the following line
+to the file::
+
+   tools/snep-send.$(OBJEXT): include/near/dbus.h
+
+Once you have edited the file, use the ``refresh`` command to create the
+patch::
+
+   $ quilt refresh
+   Refreshed patch patches/parallelmake.patch
+
+Once the patch file is created, you need to add it back to the originating
+recipe folder. Here is an example assuming a top-level
+:term:`Source Directory` named ``poky``::
+
+   $ cp patches/parallelmake.patch poky/meta/recipes-connectivity/neard/neard
+
+The final thing you need to do to implement the fix in the build is to
+update the "neard" recipe (i.e. ``neard-0.14.bb``) so that the
+:term:`SRC_URI` statement includes
+the patch file. The recipe file is in the folder above the patch. Here
+is what the edited :term:`SRC_URI` statement would look like::
+
+   SRC_URI = "${KERNELORG_MIRROR}/linux/network/nfc/${BPN}-${PV}.tar.xz \
+              file://neard.in \
+              file://neard.service.in \
+              file://parallelmake.patch \
+             "
+
+With the patch complete and moved to the correct folder and the
+:term:`SRC_URI` statement updated, you can exit the ``devshell``::
+
+   $ exit
+
+Testing the Build
+-----------------
+
+With everything in place, you can get back to trying the build again
+locally::
+
+   $ bitbake neard
+
+This build should succeed.
+
+Now you can open up a ``devshell`` again and repeat the clean and make
+operations as follows::
+
+   $ bitbake neard -c devshell
+   $ make clean
+   $ make tools/snep-send.o
+
+The build should work without issue.
+
+As with all solved problems, if they originated upstream, you need to
+submit the fix for the recipe in OE-Core and upstream so that the
+problem is taken care of at its source. See the
+":doc:`../contributor-guide/submit-changes`" section for more information.
+
+Debugging With the GNU Project Debugger (GDB) Remotely
+======================================================
+
+GDB allows you to examine running programs, which in turn helps you to
+understand and fix problems. It also allows you to perform post-mortem
+style analysis of program crashes. GDB is available as a package within
+the Yocto Project and is installed in SDK images by default. See the
+":ref:`ref-manual/images:Images`" chapter in the Yocto
+Project Reference Manual for a description of these images. You can find
+information on GDB at https://sourceware.org/gdb/.
+
+.. note::
+
+   For best results, install debug (``-dbg``) packages for the applications you
+   are going to debug. Doing so makes extra debug symbols available that give
+   you more meaningful output.
+
+Sometimes, due to memory or disk space constraints, it is not possible
+to use GDB directly on the remote target to debug applications. These
+constraints arise because GDB needs to load the debugging information
+and the binaries of the process being debugged. Additionally, GDB needs
+to perform many computations to locate information such as function
+names, variable names and values, stack traces and so forth --- even
+before starting the debugging process. These extra computations place
+more load on the target system and can alter the characteristics of the
+program being debugged.
+
+To help get past the previously mentioned constraints, there are two
+methods you can use: running a debuginfod server and using gdbserver.
+
+Using the debuginfod server method
+----------------------------------
+
+``debuginfod`` from ``elfutils`` is a way to distribute ``debuginfo`` files.
+Running a ``debuginfod`` server makes debug symbols readily available,
+which means you don't need to download debugging information
+and the binaries of the process being debugged. You can just fetch
+debug symbols from the server.
+
+To run a ``debuginfod`` server, you need to do the following:
+
+-  Ensure that ``debuginfod`` is present in :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`
+   (it already is in ``OpenEmbedded-core`` defaults and ``poky`` reference distribution).
+   If not, set in your distro config file or in ``local.conf``::
+
+      DISTRO_FEATURES:append = " debuginfod"
+
+   This distro feature enables the server and client library in ``elfutils``,
+   and enables ``debuginfod`` support in clients (at the moment, ``gdb`` and ``binutils``).
+
+-  Run the following commands to launch the ``debuginfod`` server on the host::
+
+      $ oe-debuginfod
+
+-  To use ``debuginfod`` on the target, you need to know the ip:port where
+   ``debuginfod`` is listening on the host (port defaults to 8002), and export
+   that into the shell environment, for example in ``qemu``::
+
+      root@qemux86-64:~# export DEBUGINFOD_URLS="http://192.168.7.1:8002/"
+
+-  Then debug info fetching should simply work when running the target ``gdb``,
+   ``readelf`` or ``objdump``, for example::
+
+      root@qemux86-64:~# gdb /bin/cat
+      ...
+      Reading symbols from /bin/cat...
+      Downloading separate debug info for /bin/cat...
+      Reading symbols from /home/root/.cache/debuginfod_client/923dc4780cfbc545850c616bffa884b6b5eaf322/debuginfo...
+
+-  It's also possible to use ``debuginfod-find`` to just query the server::
+
+      root@qemux86-64:~# debuginfod-find debuginfo /bin/ls
+      /home/root/.cache/debuginfod_client/356edc585f7f82d46f94fcb87a86a3fe2d2e60bd/debuginfo
+
+
+Using the gdbserver method
+--------------------------
+
+gdbserver, which runs on the remote target and does not load any
+debugging information from the debugged process. Instead, a GDB instance
+processes the debugging information that is run on a remote computer -
+the host GDB. The host GDB then sends control commands to gdbserver to
+make it stop or start the debugged program, as well as read or write
+memory regions of that debugged program. All the debugging information
+loaded and processed as well as all the heavy debugging is done by the
+host GDB. Offloading these processes gives the gdbserver running on the
+target a chance to remain small and fast.
+
+Because the host GDB is responsible for loading the debugging
+information and for doing the necessary processing to make actual
+debugging happen, you have to make sure the host can access the
+unstripped binaries complete with their debugging information and also
+be sure the target is compiled with no optimizations. The host GDB must
+also have local access to all the libraries used by the debugged
+program. Because gdbserver does not need any local debugging
+information, the binaries on the remote target can remain stripped.
+However, the binaries must also be compiled without optimization so they
+match the host's binaries.
+
+To remain consistent with GDB documentation and terminology, the binary
+being debugged on the remote target machine is referred to as the
+"inferior" binary. For documentation on GDB see the `GDB
+site <https://sourceware.org/gdb/documentation/>`__.
+
+The following steps show you how to debug using the GNU project
+debugger.
+
+#. *Configure your build system to construct the companion debug
+   filesystem:*
+
+   In your ``local.conf`` file, set the following::
+
+      IMAGE_GEN_DEBUGFS = "1"
+      IMAGE_FSTYPES_DEBUGFS = "tar.bz2"
+
+   These options cause the
+   OpenEmbedded build system to generate a special companion filesystem
+   fragment, which contains the matching source and debug symbols to
+   your deployable filesystem. The build system does this by looking at
+   what is in the deployed filesystem, and pulling the corresponding
+   ``-dbg`` packages.
+
+   The companion debug filesystem is not a complete filesystem, but only
+   contains the debug fragments. This filesystem must be combined with
+   the full filesystem for debugging. Subsequent steps in this procedure
+   show how to combine the partial filesystem with the full filesystem.
+
+#. *Configure the system to include gdbserver in the target filesystem:*
+
+   Make the following addition in your ``local.conf`` file::
+
+      EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES:append = " tools-debug"
+
+   The change makes
+   sure the ``gdbserver`` package is included.
+
+#. *Build the environment:*
+
+   Use the following command to construct the image and the companion
+   Debug Filesystem::
+
+      $ bitbake image
+
+   Build the cross GDB component and
+   make it available for debugging. Build the SDK that matches the
+   image. Building the SDK is best for a production build that can be
+   used later for debugging, especially during long term maintenance::
+
+      $ bitbake -c populate_sdk image
+
+   Alternatively, you can build the minimal toolchain components that
+   match the target. Doing so creates a smaller than typical SDK and
+   only contains a minimal set of components with which to build simple
+   test applications, as well as run the debugger::
+
+      $ bitbake meta-toolchain
+
+   A final method is to build Gdb itself within the build system::
+
+      $ bitbake gdb-cross-<architecture>
+
+   Doing so produces a temporary copy of
+   ``cross-gdb`` you can use for debugging during development. While
+   this is the quickest approach, the two previous methods in this step
+   are better when considering long-term maintenance strategies.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      If you run ``bitbake gdb-cross``, the OpenEmbedded build system suggests
+      the actual image (e.g. ``gdb-cross-i586``). The suggestion is usually the
+      actual name you want to use.
+
+#. *Set up the* ``debugfs``\ *:*
+
+   Run the following commands to set up the ``debugfs``::
+
+      $ mkdir debugfs
+      $ cd debugfs
+      $ tar xvfj build-dir/tmp/deploy/images/machine/image.rootfs.tar.bz2
+      $ tar xvfj build-dir/tmp/deploy/images/machine/image-dbg.rootfs.tar.bz2
+
+#. *Set up GDB:*
+
+   Install the SDK (if you built one) and then source the correct
+   environment file. Sourcing the environment file puts the SDK in your
+   ``PATH`` environment variable and sets ``$GDB`` to the SDK's debugger.
+
+   If you are using the build system, Gdb is located in
+   `build-dir`\ ``/tmp/sysroots/``\ `host`\ ``/usr/bin/``\ `architecture`\ ``/``\ `architecture`\ ``-gdb``
+
+#. *Boot the target:*
+
+   For information on how to run QEMU, see the `QEMU
+   Documentation <https://wiki.qemu.org/Documentation/GettingStartedDevelopers>`__.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      Be sure to verify that your host can access the target via TCP.
+
+#. *Debug a program:*
+
+   Debugging a program involves running gdbserver on the target and then
+   running Gdb on the host. The example in this step debugs ``gzip``:
+
+   .. code-block:: shell
+
+      root@qemux86:~# gdbserver localhost:1234 /bin/gzip —help
+
+   For
+   additional gdbserver options, see the `GDB Server
+   Documentation <https://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/documentation/>`__.
+
+   After running gdbserver on the target, you need to run Gdb on the
+   host and configure it and connect to the target. Use these commands::
+
+      $ cd directory-holding-the-debugfs-directory
+      $ arch-gdb
+      (gdb) set sysroot debugfs
+      (gdb) set substitute-path /usr/src/debug debugfs/usr/src/debug
+      (gdb) target remote IP-of-target:1234
+
+   At this
+   point, everything should automatically load (i.e. matching binaries,
+   symbols and headers).
+
+   .. note::
+
+      The Gdb ``set`` commands in the previous example can be placed into the
+      users ``~/.gdbinit`` file. Upon starting, Gdb automatically runs whatever
+      commands are in that file.
+
+#. *Deploying without a full image rebuild:*
+
+   In many cases, during development you want a quick method to deploy a
+   new binary to the target and debug it, without waiting for a full
+   image build.
+
+   One approach to solving this situation is to just build the component
+   you want to debug. Once you have built the component, copy the
+   executable directly to both the target and the host ``debugfs``.
+
+   If the binary is processed through the debug splitting in
+   OpenEmbedded, you should also copy the debug items (i.e. ``.debug``
+   contents and corresponding ``/usr/src/debug`` files) from the work
+   directory. Here is an example::
+
+      $ bitbake bash
+      $ bitbake -c devshell bash
+      $ cd ..
+      $ scp packages-split/bash/bin/bash target:/bin/bash
+      $ cp -a packages-split/bash-dbg/\* path/debugfs
+
+Debugging with the GNU Project Debugger (GDB) on the Target
+===========================================================
+
+The previous section addressed using GDB remotely for debugging
+purposes, which is the most usual case due to the inherent hardware
+limitations on many embedded devices. However, debugging in the target
+hardware itself is also possible with more powerful devices. This
+section describes what you need to do in order to support using GDB to
+debug on the target hardware.
+
+To support this kind of debugging, you need do the following:
+
+-  Ensure that GDB is on the target. You can do this by making
+   the following addition to your ``local.conf`` file::
+
+      EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES:append = " tools-debug"
+
+-  Ensure that debug symbols are present. You can do so by adding the
+   corresponding ``-dbg`` package to :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL`::
+
+      IMAGE_INSTALL:append = " packagename-dbg"
+
+   Alternatively, you can add the following to ``local.conf`` to include
+   all the debug symbols::
+
+      EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES:append = " dbg-pkgs"
+
+.. note::
+
+   To improve the debug information accuracy, you can reduce the level
+   of optimization used by the compiler. For example, when adding the
+   following line to your ``local.conf`` file, you will reduce optimization
+   from :term:`FULL_OPTIMIZATION` of "-O2" to :term:`DEBUG_OPTIMIZATION`
+   of "-O -fno-omit-frame-pointer"::
+
+           DEBUG_BUILD = "1"
+
+   Consider that this will reduce the application's performance and is
+   recommended only for debugging purposes.
+
+Enabling Minidebuginfo
+======================
+
+Enabling the :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` minidebuginfo adds a compressed ELF section ``.gnu_debugdata``
+to all binary files, containing only function names, and thus increasing the size of the
+binaries only by 5 to 10%. For comparison, full debug symbols can be 10 times as big as
+a stripped binary, and it is thus not always possible to deploy full debug symbols.
+Minidebuginfo data allows, on the one side, to retrieve a call-stack using
+GDB (command backtrace) without deploying full debug symbols to the target. It also
+allows to retrieve a symbolicated call-stack when using ``systemd-coredump`` to manage
+coredumps (commands ``coredumpctl list`` and ``coredumpctl info``).
+
+This feature was created by Fedora, see https://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Features/MiniDebugInfo for
+more details.
+
+Other Debugging Tips
+====================
+
+Here are some other tips that you might find useful:
+
+-  When adding new packages, it is worth watching for undesirable items
+   making their way into compiler command lines. For example, you do not
+   want references to local system files like ``/usr/lib/`` or
+   ``/usr/include/``.
+
+-  If you want to remove the ``psplash`` boot splashscreen, add
+   ``psplash=false`` to the kernel command line. Doing so prevents
+   ``psplash`` from loading and thus allows you to see the console. It
+   is also possible to switch out of the splashscreen by switching the
+   virtual console (e.g. Fn+Left or Fn+Right on a Zaurus).
+
+-  Removing :term:`TMPDIR` (usually ``tmp/``, within the
+   :term:`Build Directory`) can often fix temporary build issues. Removing
+   :term:`TMPDIR` is usually a relatively cheap operation, because task output
+   will be cached in :term:`SSTATE_DIR` (usually ``sstate-cache/``, which is
+   also in the :term:`Build Directory`).
+
+   .. note::
+
+      Removing :term:`TMPDIR` might be a workaround rather than a fix.
+      Consequently, trying to determine the underlying cause of an issue before
+      removing the directory is a good idea.
+
+-  Understanding how a feature is used in practice within existing
+   recipes can be very helpful. It is recommended that you configure
+   some method that allows you to quickly search through files.
+
+   Using GNU Grep, you can use the following shell function to
+   recursively search through common recipe-related files, skipping
+   binary files, ``.git`` directories, and the :term:`Build Directory`
+   (assuming its name starts with "build")::
+
+      g() {
+          grep -Ir \
+               --exclude-dir=.git \
+               --exclude-dir='build*' \
+               --include='*.bb*' \
+               --include='*.inc*' \
+               --include='*.conf*' \
+               --include='*.py*' \
+               "$@"
+      }
+
+   Here are some usage examples::
+
+      $ g FOO # Search recursively for "FOO"
+      $ g -i foo # Search recursively for "foo", ignoring case
+      $ g -w FOO # Search recursively for "FOO" as a word, ignoring e.g. "FOOBAR"
+
+   If figuring
+   out how some feature works requires a lot of searching, it might
+   indicate that the documentation should be extended or improved. In
+   such cases, consider filing a documentation bug using the Yocto
+   Project implementation of
+   :yocto_bugs:`Bugzilla <>`. For information on
+   how to submit a bug against the Yocto Project, see the Yocto Project
+   Bugzilla :yocto_wiki:`wiki page </Bugzilla_Configuration_and_Bug_Tracking>`
+   and the ":doc:`../contributor-guide/report-defect`" section.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      The manuals might not be the right place to document variables
+      that are purely internal and have a limited scope (e.g. internal
+      variables used to implement a single ``.bbclass`` file).
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/development-shell.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/development-shell.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..be26bcffc7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/development-shell.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Using a Development Shell
+*************************
+
+When debugging certain commands or even when just editing packages,
+``devshell`` can be a useful tool. When you invoke ``devshell``, all
+tasks up to and including
+:ref:`ref-tasks-patch` are run for the
+specified target. Then, a new terminal is opened and you are placed in
+``${``\ :term:`S`\ ``}``, the source
+directory. In the new terminal, all the OpenEmbedded build-related
+environment variables are still defined so you can use commands such as
+``configure`` and ``make``. The commands execute just as if the
+OpenEmbedded build system were executing them. Consequently, working
+this way can be helpful when debugging a build or preparing software to
+be used with the OpenEmbedded build system.
+
+Here is an example that uses ``devshell`` on a target named
+``matchbox-desktop``::
+
+  $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -c devshell
+
+This command spawns a terminal with a shell prompt within the
+OpenEmbedded build environment. The
+:term:`OE_TERMINAL` variable
+controls what type of shell is opened.
+
+For spawned terminals, the following occurs:
+
+-  The ``PATH`` variable includes the cross-toolchain.
+
+-  The ``pkgconfig`` variables find the correct ``.pc`` files.
+
+-  The ``configure`` command finds the Yocto Project site files as well
+   as any other necessary files.
+
+Within this environment, you can run configure or compile commands as if
+they were being run by the OpenEmbedded build system itself. As noted
+earlier, the working directory also automatically changes to the Source
+Directory (:term:`S`).
+
+To manually run a specific task using ``devshell``, run the
+corresponding ``run.*`` script in the
+``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/temp``
+directory (e.g., ``run.do_configure.``\ `pid`). If a task's script does
+not exist, which would be the case if the task was skipped by way of the
+sstate cache, you can create the task by first running it outside of the
+``devshell``::
+
+   $ bitbake -c task
+
+.. note::
+
+   -  Execution of a task's ``run.*`` script and BitBake's execution of
+      a task are identical. In other words, running the script re-runs
+      the task just as it would be run using the ``bitbake -c`` command.
+
+   -  Any ``run.*`` file that does not have a ``.pid`` extension is a
+      symbolic link (symlink) to the most recent version of that file.
+
+Remember, that the ``devshell`` is a mechanism that allows you to get
+into the BitBake task execution environment. And as such, all commands
+must be called just as BitBake would call them. That means you need to
+provide the appropriate options for cross-compilation and so forth as
+applicable.
+
+When you are finished using ``devshell``, exit the shell or close the
+terminal window.
+
+.. note::
+
+   -  It is worth remembering that when using ``devshell`` you need to
+      use the full compiler name such as ``arm-poky-linux-gnueabi-gcc``
+      instead of just using ``gcc``. The same applies to other
+      applications such as ``binutils``, ``libtool`` and so forth.
+      BitBake sets up environment variables such as :term:`CC` to assist
+      applications, such as ``make`` to find the correct tools.
+
+   -  It is also worth noting that ``devshell`` still works over X11
+      forwarding and similar situations.
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/device-manager.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/device-manager.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..49fc785fec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/device-manager.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+.. _device-manager:
+
+Selecting a Device Manager
+**************************
+
+The Yocto Project provides multiple ways to manage the device manager
+(``/dev``):
+
+-  Persistent and Pre-Populated ``/dev``: For this case, the ``/dev``
+   directory is persistent and the required device nodes are created
+   during the build.
+
+-  Use ``devtmpfs`` with a Device Manager: For this case, the ``/dev``
+   directory is provided by the kernel as an in-memory file system and
+   is automatically populated by the kernel at runtime. Additional
+   configuration of device nodes is done in user space by a device
+   manager like ``udev`` or ``busybox-mdev``.
+
+Using Persistent and Pre-Populated ``/dev``
+===========================================
+
+To use the static method for device population, you need to set the
+:term:`USE_DEVFS` variable to "0"
+as follows::
+
+   USE_DEVFS = "0"
+
+The content of the resulting ``/dev`` directory is defined in a Device
+Table file. The
+:term:`IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES`
+variable defines the Device Table to use and should be set in the
+machine or distro configuration file. Alternatively, you can set this
+variable in your ``local.conf`` configuration file.
+
+If you do not define the :term:`IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES` variable, the default
+``device_table-minimal.txt`` is used::
+
+   IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES = "device_table-mymachine.txt"
+
+The population is handled by the ``makedevs`` utility during image
+creation:
+
+Using ``devtmpfs`` and a Device Manager
+=======================================
+
+To use the dynamic method for device population, you need to use (or be
+sure to set) the :term:`USE_DEVFS`
+variable to "1", which is the default::
+
+   USE_DEVFS = "1"
+
+With this
+setting, the resulting ``/dev`` directory is populated by the kernel
+using ``devtmpfs``. Make sure the corresponding kernel configuration
+variable ``CONFIG_DEVTMPFS`` is set when building you build a Linux
+kernel.
+
+All devices created by ``devtmpfs`` will be owned by ``root`` and have
+permissions ``0600``.
+
+To have more control over the device nodes, you can use a device manager like
+``udev`` or ``busybox-mdev``. You choose the device manager by defining the
+:term:`VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager <VIRTUAL-RUNTIME>` variable in your machine
+or distro configuration file. Alternatively, you can set this variable in
+your ``local.conf`` configuration file::
+
+   VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = "udev"
+
+   # Some alternative values
+   # VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = "busybox-mdev"
+   # VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = "systemd"
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/disk-space.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/disk-space.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..efca82601d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/disk-space.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Conserving Disk Space
+*********************
+
+Conserving Disk Space During Builds
+===================================
+
+To help conserve disk space during builds, you can add the following
+statement to your project's ``local.conf`` configuration file found in
+the :term:`Build Directory`::
+
+   INHERIT += "rm_work"
+
+Adding this statement deletes the work directory used for
+building a recipe once the recipe is built. For more information on
+"rm_work", see the :ref:`ref-classes-rm-work` class in the
+Yocto Project Reference Manual.
+
+When you inherit this class and build a ``core-image-sato`` image for a
+``qemux86-64`` machine from an Ubuntu 22.04 x86-64 system, you end up with a
+final disk usage of 22 Gbytes instead of &MIN_DISK_SPACE; Gbytes. However,
+&MIN_DISK_SPACE_RM_WORK; Gbytes of initial free disk space are still needed to
+create temporary files before they can be deleted.
+
+Purging Obsolete Shared State Cache Files
+=========================================
+
+After multiple build iterations, the Shared State (sstate) cache can contain
+multiple cache files for a given package, consuming a substantial amount of
+disk space. However, only the most recent ones are likely to be reused.
+
+The following command is a quick way to purge all the cache files which
+haven't been used for a least a specified number of days::
+
+   find build/sstate-cache -type f -mtime +$DAYS -delete
+
+The above command relies on the fact that BitBake touches the sstate cache
+files as it accesses them, when it has write access to the cache.
+
+You could use ``-atime`` instead of ``-mtime`` if the partition isn't mounted
+with the ``noatime`` option for a read only cache.
+
+For more advanced needs, OpenEmbedded-Core also offers a more elaborate
+command. It has the ability to purge all but the newest cache files on each
+architecture, and also to remove files that it considers unreachable by
+exploring a set of build configurations. However, this command
+requires a full build environment to be available and doesn't work well
+covering multiple releases. It won't work either on limited environments
+such as BSD based NAS::
+
+   sstate-cache-management.py --remove-duplicated --cache-dir=sstate-cache
+
+This command will ask you to confirm the deletions it identifies.
+Run ``sstate-cache-management.sh`` for more details about this script.
+
+.. note::
+
+   As this command is much more cautious and selective, removing only cache files,
+   it will execute much slower than the simple ``find`` command described above.
+   Therefore, it may not be your best option to trim huge cache directories.
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/efficiently-fetching-sources.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/efficiently-fetching-sources.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a15f0a92ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/efficiently-fetching-sources.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Efficiently Fetching Source Files During a Build
+************************************************
+
+The OpenEmbedded build system works with source files located through
+the :term:`SRC_URI` variable. When
+you build something using BitBake, a big part of the operation is
+locating and downloading all the source tarballs. For images,
+downloading all the source for various packages can take a significant
+amount of time.
+
+This section shows you how you can use mirrors to speed up fetching
+source files and how you can pre-fetch files all of which leads to more
+efficient use of resources and time.
+
+Setting up Effective Mirrors
+============================
+
+A good deal that goes into a Yocto Project build is simply downloading
+all of the source tarballs. Maybe you have been working with another
+build system for which you have built up a
+sizable directory of source tarballs. Or, perhaps someone else has such
+a directory for which you have read access. If so, you can save time by
+adding statements to your configuration file so that the build process
+checks local directories first for existing tarballs before checking the
+Internet.
+
+Here is an efficient way to set it up in your ``local.conf`` file::
+
+   SOURCE_MIRROR_URL ?= "file:///home/you/your-download-dir/"
+   INHERIT += "own-mirrors"
+   BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS = "1"
+   # BB_NO_NETWORK = "1"
+
+In the previous example, the
+:term:`BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS`
+variable causes the OpenEmbedded build system to generate tarballs of
+the Git repositories and store them in the
+:term:`DL_DIR` directory. Due to
+performance reasons, generating and storing these tarballs is not the
+build system's default behavior.
+
+You can also use the
+:term:`PREMIRRORS` variable. For
+an example, see the variable's glossary entry in the Yocto Project
+Reference Manual.
+
+Getting Source Files and Suppressing the Build
+==============================================
+
+Another technique you can use to ready yourself for a successive string
+of build operations, is to pre-fetch all the source files without
+actually starting a build. This technique lets you work through any
+download issues and ultimately gathers all the source files into your
+download directory :ref:`structure-build-downloads`,
+which is located with :term:`DL_DIR`.
+
+Use the following BitBake command form to fetch all the necessary
+sources without starting the build::
+
+   $ bitbake target --runall=fetch
+
+This
+variation of the BitBake command guarantees that you have all the
+sources for that BitBake target should you disconnect from the Internet
+and want to do the build later offline.
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/error-reporting-tool.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/error-reporting-tool.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..84f3d9cd1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/error-reporting-tool.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Using the Error Reporting Tool
+******************************
+
+The error reporting tool allows you to submit errors encountered during
+builds to a central database. Outside of the build environment, you can
+use a web interface to browse errors, view statistics, and query for
+errors. The tool works using a client-server system where the client
+portion is integrated with the installed Yocto Project
+:term:`Source Directory` (e.g. ``poky``).
+The server receives the information collected and saves it in a
+database.
+
+There is a live instance of the error reporting server at
+https://errors.yoctoproject.org.
+When you want to get help with build failures, you can submit all of the
+information on the failure easily and then point to the URL in your bug
+report or send an email to the mailing list.
+
+.. note::
+
+   If you send error reports to this server, the reports become publicly
+   visible.
+
+Enabling and Using the Tool
+===========================
+
+By default, the error reporting tool is disabled. You can enable it by
+inheriting the :ref:`ref-classes-report-error` class by adding the
+following statement to the end of your ``local.conf`` file in your
+:term:`Build Directory`::
+
+   INHERIT += "report-error"
+
+By default, the error reporting feature stores information in
+``${``\ :term:`LOG_DIR`\ ``}/error-report``.
+However, you can specify a directory to use by adding the following to
+your ``local.conf`` file::
+
+   ERR_REPORT_DIR = "path"
+
+Enabling error
+reporting causes the build process to collect the errors and store them
+in a file as previously described. When the build system encounters an
+error, it includes a command as part of the console output. You can run
+the command to send the error file to the server. For example, the
+following command sends the errors to an upstream server::
+
+   $ send-error-report /home/brandusa/project/poky/build/tmp/log/error-report/error_report_201403141617.txt
+
+In the previous example, the errors are sent to a public database
+available at https://errors.yoctoproject.org, which is used by the
+entire community. If you specify a particular server, you can send the
+errors to a different database. Use the following command for more
+information on available options::
+
+   $ send-error-report --help
+
+When sending the error file, you are prompted to review the data being
+sent as well as to provide a name and optional email address. Once you
+satisfy these prompts, the command returns a link from the server that
+corresponds to your entry in the database. For example, here is a
+typical link: https://errors.yoctoproject.org/Errors/Details/9522/
+
+Following the link takes you to a web interface where you can browse,
+query the errors, and view statistics.
+
+Disabling the Tool
+==================
+
+To disable the error reporting feature, simply remove or comment out the
+following statement from the end of your ``local.conf`` file in your
+:term:`Build Directory`::
+
+   INHERIT += "report-error"
+
+Setting Up Your Own Error Reporting Server
+==========================================
+
+If you want to set up your own error reporting server, you can obtain
+the code from the Git repository at :yocto_git:`/error-report-web/`.
+Instructions on how to set it up are in the README document.
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/external-scm.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/external-scm.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..97a7e63e36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/external-scm.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Using an External SCM
+*********************
+
+If you're working on a recipe that pulls from an external Source Code
+Manager (SCM), it is possible to have the OpenEmbedded build system
+notice new recipe changes added to the SCM and then build the resulting
+packages that depend on the new recipes by using the latest versions.
+This only works for SCMs from which it is possible to get a sensible
+revision number for changes. Currently, you can do this with Apache
+Subversion (SVN), Git, and Bazaar (BZR) repositories.
+
+To enable this behavior, the :term:`PV` of
+the recipe needs to reference
+:term:`SRCPV`. Here is an example::
+
+   PV = "1.2.3+git${SRCPV}"
+
+Then, you can add the following to your
+``local.conf``::
+
+   SRCREV:pn-PN = "${AUTOREV}"
+
+:term:`PN` is the name of the recipe for
+which you want to enable automatic source revision updating.
+
+If you do not want to update your local configuration file, you can add
+the following directly to the recipe to finish enabling the feature::
+
+   SRCREV = "${AUTOREV}"
+
+The Yocto Project provides a distribution named ``poky-bleeding``, whose
+configuration file contains the line::
+
+   require conf/distro/include/poky-floating-revisions.inc
+
+This line pulls in the
+listed include file that contains numerous lines of exactly that form::
+
+   #SRCREV:pn-opkg-native ?= "${AUTOREV}"
+   #SRCREV:pn-opkg-sdk ?= "${AUTOREV}"
+   #SRCREV:pn-opkg ?= "${AUTOREV}"
+   #SRCREV:pn-opkg-utils-native ?= "${AUTOREV}"
+   #SRCREV:pn-opkg-utils ?= "${AUTOREV}"
+   SRCREV:pn-gconf-dbus ?= "${AUTOREV}"
+   SRCREV:pn-matchbox-common ?= "${AUTOREV}"
+   SRCREV:pn-matchbox-config-gtk ?= "${AUTOREV}"
+   SRCREV:pn-matchbox-desktop ?= "${AUTOREV}"
+   SRCREV:pn-matchbox-keyboard ?= "${AUTOREV}"
+   SRCREV:pn-matchbox-panel-2 ?= "${AUTOREV}"
+   SRCREV:pn-matchbox-themes-extra ?= "${AUTOREV}"
+   SRCREV:pn-matchbox-terminal ?= "${AUTOREV}"
+   SRCREV:pn-matchbox-wm ?= "${AUTOREV}"
+   SRCREV:pn-settings-daemon ?= "${AUTOREV}"
+   SRCREV:pn-screenshot ?= "${AUTOREV}"
+   . . .
+
+These lines allow you to
+experiment with building a distribution that tracks the latest
+development source for numerous packages.
+
+.. note::
+
+   The ``poky-bleeding`` distribution is not tested on a regular basis. Keep
+   this in mind if you use it.
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/external-toolchain.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/external-toolchain.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..238f8cf467
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/external-toolchain.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Optionally Using an External Toolchain
+**************************************
+
+You might want to use an external toolchain as part of your development.
+If this is the case, the fundamental steps you need to accomplish are as
+follows:
+
+-  Understand where the installed toolchain resides. For cases where you
+   need to build the external toolchain, you would need to take separate
+   steps to build and install the toolchain.
+
+-  Make sure you add the layer that contains the toolchain to your
+   ``bblayers.conf`` file through the
+   :term:`BBLAYERS` variable.
+
+-  Set the :term:`EXTERNAL_TOOLCHAIN` variable in your ``local.conf`` file
+   to the location in which you installed the toolchain.
+
+The toolchain configuration is very flexible and customizable. It
+is primarily controlled with the :term:`TCMODE` variable. This variable
+controls which ``tcmode-*.inc`` file to include from the
+``meta/conf/distro/include`` directory within the :term:`Source Directory`.
+
+The default value of :term:`TCMODE` is "default", which tells the
+OpenEmbedded build system to use its internally built toolchain (i.e.
+``tcmode-default.inc``). However, other patterns are accepted. In
+particular, "external-\*" refers to external toolchains. One example is
+the Mentor Graphics Sourcery G++ Toolchain. Support for this toolchain resides
+in the separate ``meta-sourcery`` layer at
+https://github.com/MentorEmbedded/meta-sourcery/.
+See its ``README`` file for details about how to use this layer.
+
+Another example of external toolchain layer is
+:yocto_git:`meta-arm-toolchain </meta-arm/tree/meta-arm-toolchain/>`
+supporting GNU toolchains released by ARM.
+
+You can find further information by reading about the :term:`TCMODE` variable
+in the Yocto Project Reference Manual's variable glossary.
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/figures/cute-files-npm-example.png b/documentation/dev-manual/figures/cute-files-npm-example.png
index 1ebe74f535..a02cca097f 100644
--- a/documentation/dev-manual/figures/cute-files-npm-example.png
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/figures/cute-files-npm-example.png
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/gobject-introspection.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/gobject-introspection.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f7206e6fae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/gobject-introspection.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Enabling GObject Introspection Support
+**************************************
+
+`GObject introspection <https://gi.readthedocs.io/en/latest/>`__
+is the standard mechanism for accessing GObject-based software from
+runtime environments. GObject is a feature of the GLib library that
+provides an object framework for the GNOME desktop and related software.
+GObject Introspection adds information to GObject that allows objects
+created within it to be represented across different programming
+languages. If you want to construct GStreamer pipelines using Python, or
+control UPnP infrastructure using Javascript and GUPnP, GObject
+introspection is the only way to do it.
+
+This section describes the Yocto Project support for generating and
+packaging GObject introspection data. GObject introspection data is a
+description of the API provided by libraries built on top of the GLib
+framework, and, in particular, that framework's GObject mechanism.
+GObject Introspection Repository (GIR) files go to ``-dev`` packages,
+``typelib`` files go to main packages as they are packaged together with
+libraries that are introspected.
+
+The data is generated when building such a library, by linking the
+library with a small executable binary that asks the library to describe
+itself, and then executing the binary and processing its output.
+
+Generating this data in a cross-compilation environment is difficult
+because the library is produced for the target architecture, but its
+code needs to be executed on the build host. This problem is solved with
+the OpenEmbedded build system by running the code through QEMU, which
+allows precisely that. Unfortunately, QEMU does not always work
+perfectly as mentioned in the ":ref:`dev-manual/gobject-introspection:known issues`"
+section.
+
+Enabling the Generation of Introspection Data
+=============================================
+
+Enabling the generation of introspection data (GIR files) in your
+library package involves the following:
+
+#. Inherit the :ref:`ref-classes-gobject-introspection` class.
+
+#. Make sure introspection is not disabled anywhere in the recipe or
+   from anything the recipe includes. Also, make sure that
+   "gobject-introspection-data" is not in
+   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED`
+   and that "qemu-usermode" is not in
+   :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED`.
+   In either of these conditions, nothing will happen.
+
+#. Try to build the recipe. If you encounter build errors that look like
+   something is unable to find ``.so`` libraries, check where these
+   libraries are located in the source tree and add the following to the
+   recipe::
+
+      GIR_EXTRA_LIBS_PATH = "${B}/something/.libs"
+
+   .. note::
+
+      See recipes in the ``oe-core`` repository that use that
+      :term:`GIR_EXTRA_LIBS_PATH` variable as an example.
+
+#. Look for any other errors, which probably mean that introspection
+   support in a package is not entirely standard, and thus breaks down
+   in a cross-compilation environment. For such cases, custom-made fixes
+   are needed. A good place to ask and receive help in these cases is
+   the :ref:`Yocto Project mailing
+   lists <resources-mailinglist>`.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Using a library that no longer builds against the latest Yocto
+   Project release and prints introspection related errors is a good
+   candidate for the previous procedure.
+
+Disabling the Generation of Introspection Data
+==============================================
+
+You might find that you do not want to generate introspection data. Or,
+perhaps QEMU does not work on your build host and target architecture
+combination. If so, you can use either of the following methods to
+disable GIR file generations:
+
+-  Add the following to your distro configuration::
+
+      DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED = "gobject-introspection-data"
+
+   Adding this statement disables generating introspection data using
+   QEMU but will still enable building introspection tools and libraries
+   (i.e. building them does not require the use of QEMU).
+
+-  Add the following to your machine configuration::
+
+      MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED = "qemu-usermode"
+
+   Adding this statement disables the use of QEMU when building packages for your
+   machine. Currently, this feature is used only by introspection
+   recipes and has the same effect as the previously described option.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      Future releases of the Yocto Project might have other features
+      affected by this option.
+
+If you disable introspection data, you can still obtain it through other
+means such as copying the data from a suitable sysroot, or by generating
+it on the target hardware. The OpenEmbedded build system does not
+currently provide specific support for these techniques.
+
+Testing that Introspection Works in an Image
+============================================
+
+Use the following procedure to test if generating introspection data is
+working in an image:
+
+#. Make sure that "gobject-introspection-data" is not in
+   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED`
+   and that "qemu-usermode" is not in
+   :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED`.
+
+#. Build ``core-image-sato``.
+
+#. Launch a Terminal and then start Python in the terminal.
+
+#. Enter the following in the terminal::
+
+      >>> from gi.repository import GLib
+      >>> GLib.get_host_name()
+
+#. For something a little more advanced, enter the following see:
+   https://python-gtk-3-tutorial.readthedocs.io/en/latest/introduction.html
+
+Known Issues
+============
+
+Here are know issues in GObject Introspection Support:
+
+-  ``qemu-ppc64`` immediately crashes. Consequently, you cannot build
+   introspection data on that architecture.
+
+-  x32 is not supported by QEMU. Consequently, introspection data is
+   disabled.
+
+-  musl causes transient GLib binaries to crash on assertion failures.
+   Consequently, generating introspection data is disabled.
+
+-  Because QEMU is not able to run the binaries correctly, introspection
+   is disabled for some specific packages under specific architectures
+   (e.g. ``gcr``, ``libsecret``, and ``webkit``).
+
+-  QEMU usermode might not work properly when running 64-bit binaries
+   under 32-bit host machines. In particular, "qemumips64" is known to
+   not work under i686.
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/history.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/history.rst
deleted file mode 100644
index 1ba312422c..0000000000
--- a/documentation/dev-manual/history.rst
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
-
-***********************
-Manual Revision History
-***********************
-
-.. list-table::
-   :widths: 10 15 40
-   :header-rows: 1
-
-   * - Revision
-     - Date
-     - Note
-   * - 1.1
-     - October 2011
-     - The initial document released with the Yocto Project 1.1 Release
-   * - 1.2
-     - April 2012
-     - Released with the Yocto Project 1.2 Release.
-   * - 1.3
-     - October 2012
-     - Released with the Yocto Project 1.3 Release.
-   * - 1.4
-     - April 2013
-     - Released with the Yocto Project 1.4 Release.
-   * - 1.5
-     - October 2013
-     - Released with the Yocto Project 1.5 Release.
-   * - 1.6
-     - April 2014
-     - Released with the Yocto Project 1.6 Release.
-   * - 1.7
-     - October 2014
-     - Released with the Yocto Project 1.7 Release.
-   * - 1.8
-     - April 2015
-     - Released with the Yocto Project 1.8 Release.
-   * - 2.0
-     - October 2015
-     - Released with the Yocto Project 2.0 Release.
-   * - 2.1
-     - April 2016
-     - Released with the Yocto Project 2.1 Release.
-   * - 2.2
-     - October 2016
-     - Released with the Yocto Project 2.2 Release.
-   * - 2.3
-     - May 2017
-     - Released with the Yocto Project 2.3 Release.
-   * - 2.4
-     - October 2017
-     - Released with the Yocto Project 2.4 Release.
-   * - 2.5
-     - May 2018
-     - Released with the Yocto Project 2.5 Release.
-   * - 2.6
-     - November 2018
-     - Released with the Yocto Project 2.6 Release.
-   * - 2.7
-     - May 2019
-     - Released with the Yocto Project 2.7 Release.
-   * - 3.0
-     - October 2019
-     - Released with the Yocto Project 3.0 Release.
-   * - 3.1
-     - April 2020
-     - Released with the Yocto Project 3.1 Release.
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/index.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/index.rst
index 941db2df8c..9ccf60f701 100644
--- a/documentation/dev-manual/index.rst
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/index.rst
@@ -4,16 +4,49 @@
 Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual
 ======================================
 
-|
-
 .. toctree::
    :caption: Table of Contents
    :numbered:
 
    intro
    start
-   common-tasks
+   layers
+   customizing-images
+   new-recipe
+   new-machine
+   upgrading-recipes
+   temporary-source-code
+   quilt.rst
+   development-shell
+   python-development-shell
+   building
+   speeding-up-build
+   libraries
+   prebuilt-libraries
+   x32-psabi
+   gobject-introspection
+   external-toolchain
+   wic
+   bmaptool
+   securing-images
+   custom-distribution
+   custom-template-configuration-directory
+   disk-space
+   packages
+   efficiently-fetching-sources
+   init-manager
+   device-manager
+   external-scm
+   read-only-rootfs
+   build-quality
+   runtime-testing
+   debugging
+   licenses
+   security-subjects
+   vulnerabilities
+   sbom
+   error-reporting-tool
+   wayland
    qemu
-   history
 
 .. include:: /boilerplate.rst
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/init-manager.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/init-manager.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ddce82b81f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/init-manager.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+.. _init-manager:
+
+Selecting an Initialization Manager
+***********************************
+
+By default, the Yocto Project uses :wikipedia:`SysVinit <Init#SysV-style>` as
+the initialization manager. There is also support for BusyBox init, a simpler
+implementation, as well as support for :wikipedia:`systemd <Systemd>`, which
+is a full replacement for init with parallel starting of services, reduced
+shell overhead, increased security and resource limits for services, and other
+features that are used by many distributions.
+
+Within the system, SysVinit and BusyBox init treat system components as
+services. These services are maintained as shell scripts stored in the
+``/etc/init.d/`` directory.
+
+SysVinit is more elaborate than BusyBox init and organizes services in
+different run levels. This organization is maintained by putting links
+to the services in the ``/etc/rcN.d/`` directories, where `N/` is one
+of the following options: "S", "0", "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", or "6".
+
+.. note::
+
+   Each runlevel has a dependency on the previous runlevel. This
+   dependency allows the services to work properly.
+
+Both SysVinit and BusyBox init are configured through the ``/etc/inittab``
+file, with a very similar syntax, though of course BusyBox init features
+are more limited.
+
+In comparison, systemd treats components as units. Using units is a
+broader concept as compared to using a service. A unit includes several
+different types of entities. ``Service`` is one of the types of entities.
+The runlevel concept in SysVinit corresponds to the concept of a target
+in systemd, where target is also a type of supported unit.
+
+In systems with SysVinit or BusyBox init, services load sequentially (i.e. one
+by one) during init and parallelization is not supported. With systemd, services
+start in parallel. This method can have an impact on the startup performance
+of a given service, though systemd will also provide more services by default,
+therefore increasing the total system boot time. systemd also substantially
+increases system size because of its multiple components and the extra
+dependencies it pulls.
+
+On the contrary, BusyBox init is the simplest and the lightest solution and
+also comes with BusyBox mdev as device manager, a lighter replacement to
+:wikipedia:`udev <Udev>`, which SysVinit and systemd both use.
+
+The ":ref:`device-manager`" chapter has more details about device managers.
+
+Using SysVinit with udev
+=========================
+
+SysVinit with the udev device manager corresponds to the
+default setting in Poky. This corresponds to setting::
+
+   INIT_MANAGER = "sysvinit"
+
+Using BusyBox init with BusyBox mdev
+====================================
+
+BusyBox init with BusyBox mdev is the simplest and lightest solution
+for small root filesystems. All you need is BusyBox, which most systems
+have anyway::
+
+   INIT_MANAGER = "mdev-busybox"
+
+Using systemd
+=============
+
+The last option is to use systemd together with the udev device
+manager. This is the most powerful and versatile solution, especially
+for more complex systems::
+
+   INIT_MANAGER = "systemd"
+
+This will enable systemd and remove sysvinit components from the image.
+See :yocto_git:`meta/conf/distro/include/init-manager-systemd.inc
+</poky/tree/meta/conf/distro/include/init-manager-systemd.inc>` for exact
+details on what this does.
+
+Controling systemd from the target command line
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+Here is a quick reference for controling systemd from the command line on the
+target. Instead of opening and sometimes modifying files, most interaction
+happens through the ``systemctl`` and ``journalctl`` commands:
+
+-  ``systemctl status``: show the status of all services
+-  ``systemctl status <service>``: show the status of one service
+-  ``systemctl [start|stop] <service>``: start or stop a service
+-  ``systemctl [enable|disable] <service>``: enable or disable a service at boot time
+-  ``systemctl list-units``: list all available units
+-  ``journalctl -a``: show all logs for all services
+-  ``journalctl -f``: show only the last log entries, and keep printing updates as they arrive
+-  ``journalctl -u``: show only logs from a particular service
+
+Using systemd-journald without a traditional syslog daemon
+----------------------------------------------------------
+
+Counter-intuitively, ``systemd-journald`` is not a syslog runtime or provider,
+and the proper way to use ``systemd-journald`` as your sole logging mechanism is to
+effectively disable syslog entirely by setting these variables in your distribution
+configuration file::
+
+   VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_syslog = ""
+   VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_base-utils-syslog = ""
+
+Doing so will prevent ``rsyslog`` / ``busybox-syslog`` from being pulled in by
+default, leaving only ``systemd-journald``.
+
+Summary
+-------
+
+The Yocto Project supports three different initialization managers, offering
+increasing levels of complexity and functionality:
+
+.. list-table::
+   :widths: 40 20 20 20
+   :header-rows: 1
+
+   * -
+     - BusyBox init
+     - SysVinit
+     - systemd
+   * - Size
+     - Small
+     - Small
+     - Big [#footnote-systemd-size]_
+   * - Complexity
+     - Small
+     - Medium
+     - High
+   * - Support for boot profiles
+     - No
+     - Yes ("runlevels")
+     - Yes ("targets")
+   * - Services defined as
+     - Shell scripts
+     - Shell scripts
+     - Description files
+   * - Starting services in parallel
+     - No
+     - No
+     - Yes
+   * - Setting service resource limits
+     - No
+     - No
+     - Yes
+   * - Support service isolation
+     - No
+     - No
+     - Yes
+   * - Integrated logging
+     - No
+     - No
+     - Yes
+
+.. [#footnote-systemd-size] Using systemd increases the ``core-image-minimal``
+   image size by 160\% for ``qemux86-64`` on Mickledore (4.2), compared to SysVinit.
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/intro.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/intro.rst
index 23c848e870..0f7370a96d 100644
--- a/documentation/dev-manual/intro.rst
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/intro.rst
@@ -7,16 +7,16 @@ The Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual
 Welcome
 =======
 
-Welcome to the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual! This manual
+Welcome to the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. This manual
 provides relevant procedures necessary for developing in the Yocto
 Project environment (i.e. developing embedded Linux images and
-user-space applications that run on targeted devices). The manual groups
+user-space applications that run on targeted devices). This manual groups
 related procedures into higher-level sections. Procedures can consist of
 high-level steps or low-level steps depending on the topic.
 
 This manual provides the following:
 
--  Procedures that help you get going with the Yocto Project. For
+-  Procedures that help you get going with the Yocto Project; for
    example, procedures that show you how to set up a build host and work
    with the Yocto Project source repositories.
 
@@ -24,25 +24,25 @@ This manual provides the following:
    Changes can be improvements, new features, or bug fixes.
 
 -  Procedures related to "everyday" tasks you perform while developing
-   images and applications using the Yocto Project. For example,
-   procedures to create a layer, customize an image, write a new recipe,
+   images and applications using the Yocto Project, such as
+   creating a new layer, customizing an image, writing a new recipe,
    and so forth.
 
 This manual does not provide the following:
 
--  Redundant Step-by-step Instructions: For example, the
+-  Redundant step-by-step instructions: For example, the
    :doc:`/sdk-manual/index` manual contains detailed
    instructions on how to install an SDK, which is used to develop
    applications for target hardware.
 
--  Reference or Conceptual Material: This type of material resides in an
-   appropriate reference manual. For example, system variables are
+-  Reference or conceptual material: This type of material resides in an
+   appropriate reference manual. As an example, system variables are
    documented in the :doc:`/ref-manual/index`.
 
--  Detailed Public Information Not Specific to the Yocto Project: For
-   example, exhaustive information on how to use the Source Control
-   Manager Git is better covered with Internet searches and official Git
-   Documentation than through the Yocto Project documentation.
+-  Detailed public information not specific to the Yocto Project: For
+   example, exhaustive information on how to use the Git version
+   control system is better covered with Internet searches and official Git
+   documentation than through the Yocto Project documentation.
 
 Other Information
 =================
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/layers.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/layers.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..91889bd0ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/layers.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,919 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Understanding and Creating Layers
+*********************************
+
+The OpenEmbedded build system supports organizing
+:term:`Metadata` into multiple layers.
+Layers allow you to isolate different types of customizations from each
+other. For introductory information on the Yocto Project Layer Model,
+see the
+":ref:`overview-manual/yp-intro:the yocto project layer model`"
+section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
+
+Creating Your Own Layer
+=======================
+
+.. note::
+
+   It is very easy to create your own layers to use with the OpenEmbedded
+   build system, as the Yocto Project ships with tools that speed up creating
+   layers. This section describes the steps you perform by hand to create
+   layers so that you can better understand them. For information about the
+   layer-creation tools, see the
+   ":ref:`bsp-guide/bsp:creating a new bsp layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script`"
+   section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's
+   Guide and the ":ref:`dev-manual/layers:creating a general layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script`"
+   section further down in this manual.
+
+Follow these general steps to create your layer without using tools:
+
+#. *Check Existing Layers:* Before creating a new layer, you should be
+   sure someone has not already created a layer containing the Metadata
+   you need. You can see the :oe_layerindex:`OpenEmbedded Metadata Index <>`
+   for a list of layers from the OpenEmbedded community that can be used in
+   the Yocto Project. You could find a layer that is identical or close
+   to what you need.
+
+#. *Create a Directory:* Create the directory for your layer. When you
+   create the layer, be sure to create the directory in an area not
+   associated with the Yocto Project :term:`Source Directory`
+   (e.g. the cloned ``poky`` repository).
+
+   While not strictly required, prepend the name of the directory with
+   the string "meta-". For example::
+
+      meta-mylayer
+      meta-GUI_xyz
+      meta-mymachine
+
+   With rare exceptions, a layer's name follows this form::
+
+      meta-root_name
+
+   Following this layer naming convention can save
+   you trouble later when tools, components, or variables "assume" your
+   layer name begins with "meta-". A notable example is in configuration
+   files as shown in the following step where layer names without the
+   "meta-" string are appended to several variables used in the
+   configuration.
+
+#. *Create a Layer Configuration File:* Inside your new layer folder,
+   you need to create a ``conf/layer.conf`` file. It is easiest to take
+   an existing layer configuration file and copy that to your layer's
+   ``conf`` directory and then modify the file as needed.
+
+   The ``meta-yocto-bsp/conf/layer.conf`` file in the Yocto Project
+   :yocto_git:`Source Repositories </poky/tree/meta-yocto-bsp/conf>`
+   demonstrates the required syntax. For your layer, you need to replace
+   "yoctobsp" with a unique identifier for your layer (e.g. "machinexyz"
+   for a layer named "meta-machinexyz")::
+
+      # We have a conf and classes directory, add to BBPATH
+      BBPATH .= ":${LAYERDIR}"
+
+      # We have recipes-* directories, add to BBFILES
+      BBFILES += "${LAYERDIR}/recipes-*/*/*.bb \
+                  ${LAYERDIR}/recipes-*/*/*.bbappend"
+
+      BBFILE_COLLECTIONS += "yoctobsp"
+      BBFILE_PATTERN_yoctobsp = "^${LAYERDIR}/"
+      BBFILE_PRIORITY_yoctobsp = "5"
+      LAYERVERSION_yoctobsp = "4"
+      LAYERSERIES_COMPAT_yoctobsp = "dunfell"
+
+   Here is an explanation of the layer configuration file:
+
+   -  :term:`BBPATH`: Adds the layer's
+      root directory to BitBake's search path. Through the use of the
+      :term:`BBPATH` variable, BitBake locates class files (``.bbclass``),
+      configuration files, and files that are included with ``include``
+      and ``require`` statements. For these cases, BitBake uses the
+      first file that matches the name found in :term:`BBPATH`. This is
+      similar to the way the ``PATH`` variable is used for binaries. It
+      is recommended, therefore, that you use unique class and
+      configuration filenames in your custom layer.
+
+   -  :term:`BBFILES`: Defines the
+      location for all recipes in the layer.
+
+   -  :term:`BBFILE_COLLECTIONS`:
+      Establishes the current layer through a unique identifier that is
+      used throughout the OpenEmbedded build system to refer to the
+      layer. In this example, the identifier "yoctobsp" is the
+      representation for the container layer named "meta-yocto-bsp".
+
+   -  :term:`BBFILE_PATTERN`:
+      Expands immediately during parsing to provide the directory of the
+      layer.
+
+   -  :term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY`:
+      Establishes a priority to use for recipes in the layer when the
+      OpenEmbedded build finds recipes of the same name in different
+      layers.
+
+   -  :term:`LAYERVERSION`:
+      Establishes a version number for the layer. You can use this
+      version number to specify this exact version of the layer as a
+      dependency when using the
+      :term:`LAYERDEPENDS`
+      variable.
+
+   -  :term:`LAYERDEPENDS`:
+      Lists all layers on which this layer depends (if any).
+
+   -  :term:`LAYERSERIES_COMPAT`:
+      Lists the :yocto_wiki:`Yocto Project </Releases>`
+      releases for which the current version is compatible. This
+      variable is a good way to indicate if your particular layer is
+      current.
+
+
+   .. note::
+
+      A layer does not have to contain only recipes ``.bb`` or append files
+      ``.bbappend``. Generally, developers create layers using
+      ``bitbake-layers create-layer``.
+      See ":ref:`dev-manual/layers:creating a general layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script`",
+      explaining how the ``layer.conf`` file is created from a template located in
+      ``meta/lib/bblayers/templates/layer.conf``.
+      In fact, none of the variables set in ``layer.conf`` are mandatory,
+      except when :term:`BBFILE_COLLECTIONS` is present. In this case
+      :term:`LAYERSERIES_COMPAT` and :term:`BBFILE_PATTERN` have to be
+      defined too.
+
+#. *Add Content:* Depending on the type of layer, add the content. If
+   the layer adds support for a machine, add the machine configuration
+   in a ``conf/machine/`` file within the layer. If the layer adds
+   distro policy, add the distro configuration in a ``conf/distro/``
+   file within the layer. If the layer introduces new recipes, put the
+   recipes you need in ``recipes-*`` subdirectories within the layer.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      For an explanation of layer hierarchy that is compliant with the
+      Yocto Project, see the ":ref:`bsp-guide/bsp:example filesystem layout`"
+      section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's Guide.
+
+#. *Optionally Test for Compatibility:* If you want permission to use
+   the Yocto Project Compatibility logo with your layer or application
+   that uses your layer, perform the steps to apply for compatibility.
+   See the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/layers:making sure your layer is compatible with yocto project`"
+   section for more information.
+
+Following Best Practices When Creating Layers
+=============================================
+
+To create layers that are easier to maintain and that will not impact
+builds for other machines, you should consider the information in the
+following list:
+
+-  *Avoid "Overlaying" Entire Recipes from Other Layers in Your
+   Configuration:* In other words, do not copy an entire recipe into
+   your layer and then modify it. Rather, use an append file
+   (``.bbappend``) to override only those parts of the original recipe
+   you need to modify.
+
+-  *Avoid Duplicating Include Files:* Use append files (``.bbappend``)
+   for each recipe that uses an include file. Or, if you are introducing
+   a new recipe that requires the included file, use the path relative
+   to the original layer directory to refer to the file. For example,
+   use ``require recipes-core/``\ `package`\ ``/``\ `file`\ ``.inc`` instead
+   of ``require`` `file`\ ``.inc``. If you're finding you have to overlay
+   the include file, it could indicate a deficiency in the include file
+   in the layer to which it originally belongs. If this is the case, you
+   should try to address that deficiency instead of overlaying the
+   include file. For example, you could address this by getting the
+   maintainer of the include file to add a variable or variables to make
+   it easy to override the parts needing to be overridden.
+
+-  *Structure Your Layers:* Proper use of overrides within append files
+   and placement of machine-specific files within your layer can ensure
+   that a build is not using the wrong Metadata and negatively impacting
+   a build for a different machine. Here are some examples:
+
+   -  *Modify Variables to Support a Different Machine:* Suppose you
+      have a layer named ``meta-one`` that adds support for building
+      machine "one". To do so, you use an append file named
+      ``base-files.bbappend`` and create a dependency on "foo" by
+      altering the :term:`DEPENDS`
+      variable::
+
+         DEPENDS = "foo"
+
+      The dependency is created during any
+      build that includes the layer ``meta-one``. However, you might not
+      want this dependency for all machines. For example, suppose you
+      are building for machine "two" but your ``bblayers.conf`` file has
+      the ``meta-one`` layer included. During the build, the
+      ``base-files`` for machine "two" will also have the dependency on
+      ``foo``.
+
+      To make sure your changes apply only when building machine "one",
+      use a machine override with the :term:`DEPENDS` statement::
+
+         DEPENDS:one = "foo"
+
+      You should follow the same strategy when using ``:append``
+      and ``:prepend`` operations::
+
+         DEPENDS:append:one = " foo"
+         DEPENDS:prepend:one = "foo "
+
+      As an actual example, here's a
+      snippet from the generic kernel include file ``linux-yocto.inc``,
+      wherein the kernel compile and link options are adjusted in the
+      case of a subset of the supported architectures::
+
+         DEPENDS:append:aarch64 = " libgcc"
+         KERNEL_CC:append:aarch64 = " ${TOOLCHAIN_OPTIONS}"
+         KERNEL_LD:append:aarch64 = " ${TOOLCHAIN_OPTIONS}"
+
+         DEPENDS:append:nios2 = " libgcc"
+         KERNEL_CC:append:nios2 = " ${TOOLCHAIN_OPTIONS}"
+         KERNEL_LD:append:nios2 = " ${TOOLCHAIN_OPTIONS}"
+
+         DEPENDS:append:arc = " libgcc"
+         KERNEL_CC:append:arc = " ${TOOLCHAIN_OPTIONS}"
+         KERNEL_LD:append:arc = " ${TOOLCHAIN_OPTIONS}"
+
+         KERNEL_FEATURES:append:qemuall=" features/debug/printk.scc"
+
+   -  *Place Machine-Specific Files in Machine-Specific Locations:* When
+      you have a base recipe, such as ``base-files.bb``, that contains a
+      :term:`SRC_URI` statement to a
+      file, you can use an append file to cause the build to use your
+      own version of the file. For example, an append file in your layer
+      at ``meta-one/recipes-core/base-files/base-files.bbappend`` could
+      extend :term:`FILESPATH` using :term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS` as follows::
+
+         FILESEXTRAPATHS:prepend := "${THISDIR}/${BPN}:"
+
+      The build for machine "one" will pick up your machine-specific file as
+      long as you have the file in
+      ``meta-one/recipes-core/base-files/base-files/``. However, if you
+      are building for a different machine and the ``bblayers.conf``
+      file includes the ``meta-one`` layer and the location of your
+      machine-specific file is the first location where that file is
+      found according to :term:`FILESPATH`, builds for all machines will
+      also use that machine-specific file.
+
+      You can make sure that a machine-specific file is used for a
+      particular machine by putting the file in a subdirectory specific
+      to the machine. For example, rather than placing the file in
+      ``meta-one/recipes-core/base-files/base-files/`` as shown above,
+      put it in ``meta-one/recipes-core/base-files/base-files/one/``.
+      Not only does this make sure the file is used only when building
+      for machine "one", but the build process locates the file more
+      quickly.
+
+      In summary, you need to place all files referenced from
+      :term:`SRC_URI` in a machine-specific subdirectory within the layer in
+      order to restrict those files to machine-specific builds.
+
+-  *Perform Steps to Apply for Yocto Project Compatibility:* If you want
+   permission to use the Yocto Project Compatibility logo with your
+   layer or application that uses your layer, perform the steps to apply
+   for compatibility. See the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/layers:making sure your layer is compatible with yocto project`"
+   section for more information.
+
+-  *Follow the Layer Naming Convention:* Store custom layers in a Git
+   repository that use the ``meta-layer_name`` format.
+
+-  *Group Your Layers Locally:* Clone your repository alongside other
+   cloned ``meta`` directories from the :term:`Source Directory`.
+
+Making Sure Your Layer is Compatible With Yocto Project
+=======================================================
+
+When you create a layer used with the Yocto Project, it is advantageous
+to make sure that the layer interacts well with existing Yocto Project
+layers (i.e. the layer is compatible with the Yocto Project). Ensuring
+compatibility makes the layer easy to be consumed by others in the Yocto
+Project community and could allow you permission to use the Yocto
+Project Compatible Logo.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Only Yocto Project member organizations are permitted to use the
+   Yocto Project Compatible Logo. The logo is not available for general
+   use. For information on how to become a Yocto Project member
+   organization, see the :yocto_home:`Yocto Project Website <>`.
+
+The Yocto Project Compatibility Program consists of a layer application
+process that requests permission to use the Yocto Project Compatibility
+Logo for your layer and application. The process consists of two parts:
+
+#. Successfully passing a script (``yocto-check-layer``) that when run
+   against your layer, tests it against constraints based on experiences
+   of how layers have worked in the real world and where pitfalls have
+   been found. Getting a "PASS" result from the script is required for
+   successful compatibility registration.
+
+#. Completion of an application acceptance form, which you can find at
+   :yocto_home:`/compatible-registration/`.
+
+To be granted permission to use the logo, you need to satisfy the
+following:
+
+-  Be able to check the box indicating that you got a "PASS" when
+   running the script against your layer.
+
+-  Answer "Yes" to the questions on the form or have an acceptable
+   explanation for any questions answered "No".
+
+-  Be a Yocto Project Member Organization.
+
+The remainder of this section presents information on the registration
+form and on the ``yocto-check-layer`` script.
+
+Yocto Project Compatible Program Application
+--------------------------------------------
+
+Use the form to apply for your layer's approval. Upon successful
+application, you can use the Yocto Project Compatibility Logo with your
+layer and the application that uses your layer.
+
+To access the form, use this link:
+:yocto_home:`/compatible-registration`.
+Follow the instructions on the form to complete your application.
+
+The application consists of the following sections:
+
+-  *Contact Information:* Provide your contact information as the fields
+   require. Along with your information, provide the released versions
+   of the Yocto Project for which your layer is compatible.
+
+-  *Acceptance Criteria:* Provide "Yes" or "No" answers for each of the
+   items in the checklist. There is space at the bottom of the form for
+   any explanations for items for which you answered "No".
+
+-  *Recommendations:* Provide answers for the questions regarding Linux
+   kernel use and build success.
+
+``yocto-check-layer`` Script
+----------------------------
+
+The ``yocto-check-layer`` script provides you a way to assess how
+compatible your layer is with the Yocto Project. You should run this
+script prior to using the form to apply for compatibility as described
+in the previous section. You need to achieve a "PASS" result in order to
+have your application form successfully processed.
+
+The script divides tests into three areas: COMMON, BSP, and DISTRO. For
+example, given a distribution layer (DISTRO), the layer must pass both
+the COMMON and DISTRO related tests. Furthermore, if your layer is a BSP
+layer, the layer must pass the COMMON and BSP set of tests.
+
+To execute the script, enter the following commands from your build
+directory::
+
+   $ source oe-init-build-env
+   $ yocto-check-layer your_layer_directory
+
+Be sure to provide the actual directory for your
+layer as part of the command.
+
+Entering the command causes the script to determine the type of layer
+and then to execute a set of specific tests against the layer. The
+following list overviews the test:
+
+-  ``common.test_readme``: Tests if a ``README`` file exists in the
+   layer and the file is not empty.
+
+-  ``common.test_parse``: Tests to make sure that BitBake can parse the
+   files without error (i.e. ``bitbake -p``).
+
+-  ``common.test_show_environment``: Tests that the global or per-recipe
+   environment is in order without errors (i.e. ``bitbake -e``).
+
+-  ``common.test_world``: Verifies that ``bitbake world`` works.
+
+-  ``common.test_signatures``: Tests to be sure that BSP and DISTRO
+   layers do not come with recipes that change signatures.
+
+-  ``common.test_layerseries_compat``: Verifies layer compatibility is
+   set properly.
+
+-  ``bsp.test_bsp_defines_machines``: Tests if a BSP layer has machine
+   configurations.
+
+-  ``bsp.test_bsp_no_set_machine``: Tests to ensure a BSP layer does not
+   set the machine when the layer is added.
+
+-  ``bsp.test_machine_world``: Verifies that ``bitbake world`` works
+   regardless of which machine is selected.
+
+-  ``bsp.test_machine_signatures``: Verifies that building for a
+   particular machine affects only the signature of tasks specific to
+   that machine.
+
+-  ``distro.test_distro_defines_distros``: Tests if a DISTRO layer has
+   distro configurations.
+
+-  ``distro.test_distro_no_set_distros``: Tests to ensure a DISTRO layer
+   does not set the distribution when the layer is added.
+
+Enabling Your Layer
+===================
+
+Before the OpenEmbedded build system can use your new layer, you need to
+enable it. To enable your layer, simply add your layer's path to the
+:term:`BBLAYERS` variable in your ``conf/bblayers.conf`` file, which is
+found in the :term:`Build Directory`. The following example shows how to
+enable your new ``meta-mylayer`` layer (note how your new layer exists
+outside of the official ``poky`` repository which you would have checked
+out earlier)::
+
+   # POKY_BBLAYERS_CONF_VERSION is increased each time build/conf/bblayers.conf
+   # changes incompatibly
+   POKY_BBLAYERS_CONF_VERSION = "2"
+   BBPATH = "${TOPDIR}"
+   BBFILES ?= ""
+   BBLAYERS ?= " \
+       /home/user/poky/meta \
+       /home/user/poky/meta-poky \
+       /home/user/poky/meta-yocto-bsp \
+       /home/user/mystuff/meta-mylayer \
+       "
+
+BitBake parses each ``conf/layer.conf`` file from the top down as
+specified in the :term:`BBLAYERS` variable within the ``conf/bblayers.conf``
+file. During the processing of each ``conf/layer.conf`` file, BitBake
+adds the recipes, classes and configurations contained within the
+particular layer to the source directory.
+
+Appending Other Layers Metadata With Your Layer
+===============================================
+
+A recipe that appends Metadata to another recipe is called a BitBake
+append file. A BitBake append file uses the ``.bbappend`` file type
+suffix, while the corresponding recipe to which Metadata is being
+appended uses the ``.bb`` file type suffix.
+
+You can use a ``.bbappend`` file in your layer to make additions or
+changes to the content of another layer's recipe without having to copy
+the other layer's recipe into your layer. Your ``.bbappend`` file
+resides in your layer, while the main ``.bb`` recipe file to which you
+are appending Metadata resides in a different layer.
+
+Being able to append information to an existing recipe not only avoids
+duplication, but also automatically applies recipe changes from a
+different layer into your layer. If you were copying recipes, you would
+have to manually merge changes as they occur.
+
+When you create an append file, you must use the same root name as the
+corresponding recipe file. For example, the append file
+``someapp_3.1.bbappend`` must apply to ``someapp_3.1.bb``. This
+means the original recipe and append filenames are version
+number-specific. If the corresponding recipe is renamed to update to a
+newer version, you must also rename and possibly update the
+corresponding ``.bbappend`` as well. During the build process, BitBake
+displays an error on starting if it detects a ``.bbappend`` file that
+does not have a corresponding recipe with a matching name. See the
+:term:`BB_DANGLINGAPPENDS_WARNONLY`
+variable for information on how to handle this error.
+
+Overlaying a File Using Your Layer
+----------------------------------
+
+As an example, consider the main formfactor recipe and a corresponding
+formfactor append file both from the :term:`Source Directory`.
+Here is the main
+formfactor recipe, which is named ``formfactor_0.0.bb`` and located in
+the "meta" layer at ``meta/recipes-bsp/formfactor``::
+
+   SUMMARY = "Device formfactor information"
+   DESCRIPTION = "A formfactor configuration file provides information about the \
+   target hardware for which the image is being built and information that the \
+   build system cannot obtain from other sources such as the kernel."
+   SECTION = "base"
+   LICENSE = "MIT"
+   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://${COREBASE}/meta/COPYING.MIT;md5=3da9cfbcb788c80a0384361b4de20420"
+   PR = "r45"
+
+   SRC_URI = "file://config file://machconfig"
+   S = "${WORKDIR}"
+
+   PACKAGE_ARCH = "${MACHINE_ARCH}"
+   INHIBIT_DEFAULT_DEPS = "1"
+
+   do_install() {
+           # Install file only if it has contents
+           install -d ${D}${sysconfdir}/formfactor/
+           install -m 0644 ${S}/config ${D}${sysconfdir}/formfactor/
+           if [ -s "${S}/machconfig" ]; then
+                   install -m 0644 ${S}/machconfig ${D}${sysconfdir}/formfactor/
+           fi
+   }
+
+In the main recipe, note the :term:`SRC_URI`
+variable, which tells the OpenEmbedded build system where to find files
+during the build.
+
+Here is the append file, which is named ``formfactor_0.0.bbappend``
+and is from the Raspberry Pi BSP Layer named ``meta-raspberrypi``. The
+file is in the layer at ``recipes-bsp/formfactor``::
+
+   FILESEXTRAPATHS:prepend := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:"
+
+By default, the build system uses the
+:term:`FILESPATH` variable to
+locate files. This append file extends the locations by setting the
+:term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS`
+variable. Setting this variable in the ``.bbappend`` file is the most
+reliable and recommended method for adding directories to the search
+path used by the build system to find files.
+
+The statement in this example extends the directories to include
+``${``\ :term:`THISDIR`\ ``}/${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``,
+which resolves to a directory named ``formfactor`` in the same directory
+in which the append file resides (i.e.
+``meta-raspberrypi/recipes-bsp/formfactor``. This implies that you must
+have the supporting directory structure set up that will contain any
+files or patches you will be including from the layer.
+
+Using the immediate expansion assignment operator ``:=`` is important
+because of the reference to :term:`THISDIR`. The trailing colon character is
+important as it ensures that items in the list remain colon-separated.
+
+.. note::
+
+   BitBake automatically defines the :term:`THISDIR` variable. You should
+   never set this variable yourself. Using ":prepend" as part of the
+   :term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS` ensures your path will be searched prior to other
+   paths in the final list.
+
+   Also, not all append files add extra files. Many append files simply
+   allow to add build options (e.g. ``systemd``). For these cases, your
+   append file would not even use the :term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS` statement.
+
+The end result of this ``.bbappend`` file is that on a Raspberry Pi, where
+``rpi`` will exist in the list of :term:`OVERRIDES`, the file
+``meta-raspberrypi/recipes-bsp/formfactor/formfactor/rpi/machconfig`` will be
+used during :ref:`ref-tasks-fetch` and the test for a non-zero file size in
+:ref:`ref-tasks-install` will return true, and the file will be installed.
+
+Installing Additional Files Using Your Layer
+--------------------------------------------
+
+As another example, consider the main ``xserver-xf86-config`` recipe and a
+corresponding ``xserver-xf86-config`` append file both from the :term:`Source
+Directory`.  Here is the main ``xserver-xf86-config`` recipe, which is named
+``xserver-xf86-config_0.1.bb`` and located in the "meta" layer at
+``meta/recipes-graphics/xorg-xserver``::
+
+   SUMMARY = "X.Org X server configuration file"
+   HOMEPAGE = "http://www.x.org"
+   SECTION = "x11/base"
+   LICENSE = "MIT"
+   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://${COREBASE}/meta/COPYING.MIT;md5=3da9cfbcb788c80a0384361b4de20420"
+   PR = "r33"
+
+   SRC_URI = "file://xorg.conf"
+
+   S = "${WORKDIR}"
+
+   CONFFILES:${PN} = "${sysconfdir}/X11/xorg.conf"
+
+   PACKAGE_ARCH = "${MACHINE_ARCH}"
+   ALLOW_EMPTY:${PN} = "1"
+
+   do_install () {
+        if test -s ${WORKDIR}/xorg.conf; then
+                install -d ${D}/${sysconfdir}/X11
+                install -m 0644 ${WORKDIR}/xorg.conf ${D}/${sysconfdir}/X11/
+        fi
+   }
+
+Here is the append file, which is named ``xserver-xf86-config_%.bbappend``
+and is from the Raspberry Pi BSP Layer named ``meta-raspberrypi``. The
+file is in the layer at ``recipes-graphics/xorg-xserver``::
+
+   FILESEXTRAPATHS:prepend := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:"
+
+   SRC_URI:append:rpi = " \
+       file://xorg.conf.d/98-pitft.conf \
+       file://xorg.conf.d/99-calibration.conf \
+   "
+   do_install:append:rpi () {
+       PITFT="${@bb.utils.contains("MACHINE_FEATURES", "pitft", "1", "0", d)}"
+       if [ "${PITFT}" = "1" ]; then
+           install -d ${D}/${sysconfdir}/X11/xorg.conf.d/
+           install -m 0644 ${WORKDIR}/xorg.conf.d/98-pitft.conf ${D}/${sysconfdir}/X11/xorg.conf.d/
+           install -m 0644 ${WORKDIR}/xorg.conf.d/99-calibration.conf ${D}/${sysconfdir}/X11/xorg.conf.d/
+       fi
+   }
+
+   FILES:${PN}:append:rpi = " ${sysconfdir}/X11/xorg.conf.d/*"
+
+Building off of the previous example, we once again are setting the
+:term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS` variable.  In this case we are also using
+:term:`SRC_URI` to list additional source files to use when ``rpi`` is found in
+the list of :term:`OVERRIDES`.  The :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task will then perform a
+check for an additional :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES` that if set will cause these
+additional files to be installed.  These additional files are listed in
+:term:`FILES` so that they will be packaged.
+
+Prioritizing Your Layer
+=======================
+
+Each layer is assigned a priority value. Priority values control which
+layer takes precedence if there are recipe files with the same name in
+multiple layers. For these cases, the recipe file from the layer with a
+higher priority number takes precedence. Priority values also affect the
+order in which multiple ``.bbappend`` files for the same recipe are
+applied. You can either specify the priority manually, or allow the
+build system to calculate it based on the layer's dependencies.
+
+To specify the layer's priority manually, use the
+:term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY`
+variable and append the layer's root name::
+
+   BBFILE_PRIORITY_mylayer = "1"
+
+.. note::
+
+   It is possible for a recipe with a lower version number
+   :term:`PV` in a layer that has a higher
+   priority to take precedence.
+
+   Also, the layer priority does not currently affect the precedence
+   order of ``.conf`` or ``.bbclass`` files. Future versions of BitBake
+   might address this.
+
+Managing Layers
+===============
+
+You can use the BitBake layer management tool ``bitbake-layers`` to
+provide a view into the structure of recipes across a multi-layer
+project. Being able to generate output that reports on configured layers
+with their paths and priorities and on ``.bbappend`` files and their
+applicable recipes can help to reveal potential problems.
+
+For help on the BitBake layer management tool, use the following
+command::
+
+   $ bitbake-layers --help
+
+The following list describes the available commands:
+
+-  ``help:`` Displays general help or help on a specified command.
+
+-  ``show-layers:`` Shows the current configured layers.
+
+-  ``show-overlayed:`` Lists overlayed recipes. A recipe is overlayed
+   when a recipe with the same name exists in another layer that has a
+   higher layer priority.
+
+-  ``show-recipes:`` Lists available recipes and the layers that
+   provide them.
+
+-  ``show-appends:`` Lists ``.bbappend`` files and the recipe files to
+   which they apply.
+
+-  ``show-cross-depends:`` Lists dependency relationships between
+   recipes that cross layer boundaries.
+
+-  ``add-layer:`` Adds a layer to ``bblayers.conf``.
+
+-  ``remove-layer:`` Removes a layer from ``bblayers.conf``
+
+-  ``flatten:`` Flattens the layer configuration into a separate
+   output directory. Flattening your layer configuration builds a
+   "flattened" directory that contains the contents of all layers, with
+   any overlayed recipes removed and any ``.bbappend`` files appended to
+   the corresponding recipes. You might have to perform some manual
+   cleanup of the flattened layer as follows:
+
+   -  Non-recipe files (such as patches) are overwritten. The flatten
+      command shows a warning for these files.
+
+   -  Anything beyond the normal layer setup has been added to the
+      ``layer.conf`` file. Only the lowest priority layer's
+      ``layer.conf`` is used.
+
+   -  Overridden and appended items from ``.bbappend`` files need to be
+      cleaned up. The contents of each ``.bbappend`` end up in the
+      flattened recipe. However, if there are appended or changed
+      variable values, you need to tidy these up yourself. Consider the
+      following example. Here, the ``bitbake-layers`` command adds the
+      line ``#### bbappended ...`` so that you know where the following
+      lines originate::
+
+         ...
+         DESCRIPTION = "A useful utility"
+         ...
+         EXTRA_OECONF = "--enable-something"
+         ...
+
+         #### bbappended from meta-anotherlayer ####
+
+         DESCRIPTION = "Customized utility"
+         EXTRA_OECONF += "--enable-somethingelse"
+
+
+      Ideally, you would tidy up these utilities as follows::
+
+         ...
+         DESCRIPTION = "Customized utility"
+         ...
+         EXTRA_OECONF = "--enable-something --enable-somethingelse"
+         ...
+
+-  ``layerindex-fetch``: Fetches a layer from a layer index, along
+   with its dependent layers, and adds the layers to the
+   ``conf/bblayers.conf`` file.
+
+-  ``layerindex-show-depends``: Finds layer dependencies from the
+   layer index.
+
+-  ``save-build-conf``: Saves the currently active build configuration
+   (``conf/local.conf``, ``conf/bblayers.conf``) as a template into a layer.
+   This template can later be used for setting up builds via :term:`TEMPLATECONF`.
+   For information about saving and using configuration templates, see
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/custom-template-configuration-directory:creating a custom template configuration directory`".
+
+-  ``create-layer``: Creates a basic layer.
+
+-  ``create-layers-setup``: Writes out a configuration file and/or a script that
+   can replicate the directory structure and revisions of the layers in a current build.
+   For more information, see ":ref:`dev-manual/layers:saving and restoring the layers setup`".
+
+Creating a General Layer Using the ``bitbake-layers`` Script
+============================================================
+
+The ``bitbake-layers`` script with the ``create-layer`` subcommand
+simplifies creating a new general layer.
+
+.. note::
+
+   -  For information on BSP layers, see the ":ref:`bsp-guide/bsp:bsp layers`"
+      section in the Yocto
+      Project Board Specific (BSP) Developer's Guide.
+
+   -  In order to use a layer with the OpenEmbedded build system, you
+      need to add the layer to your ``bblayers.conf`` configuration
+      file. See the ":ref:`dev-manual/layers:adding a layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script`"
+      section for more information.
+
+The default mode of the script's operation with this subcommand is to
+create a layer with the following:
+
+-  A layer priority of 6.
+
+-  A ``conf`` subdirectory that contains a ``layer.conf`` file.
+
+-  A ``recipes-example`` subdirectory that contains a further
+   subdirectory named ``example``, which contains an ``example.bb``
+   recipe file.
+
+-  A ``COPYING.MIT``, which is the license statement for the layer. The
+   script assumes you want to use the MIT license, which is typical for
+   most layers, for the contents of the layer itself.
+
+-  A ``README`` file, which is a file describing the contents of your
+   new layer.
+
+In its simplest form, you can use the following command form to create a
+layer. The command creates a layer whose name corresponds to
+"your_layer_name" in the current directory::
+
+   $ bitbake-layers create-layer your_layer_name
+
+As an example, the following command creates a layer named ``meta-scottrif``
+in your home directory::
+
+   $ cd /usr/home
+   $ bitbake-layers create-layer meta-scottrif
+   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
+   Add your new layer with 'bitbake-layers add-layer meta-scottrif'
+
+If you want to set the priority of the layer to other than the default
+value of "6", you can either use the ``--priority`` option or you
+can edit the
+:term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY` value
+in the ``conf/layer.conf`` after the script creates it. Furthermore, if
+you want to give the example recipe file some name other than the
+default, you can use the ``--example-recipe-name`` option.
+
+The easiest way to see how the ``bitbake-layers create-layer`` command
+works is to experiment with the script. You can also read the usage
+information by entering the following::
+
+   $ bitbake-layers create-layer --help
+   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
+   usage: bitbake-layers create-layer [-h] [--priority PRIORITY]
+                                      [--example-recipe-name EXAMPLERECIPE]
+                                      layerdir
+
+   Create a basic layer
+
+   positional arguments:
+     layerdir              Layer directory to create
+
+   optional arguments:
+     -h, --help            show this help message and exit
+     --priority PRIORITY, -p PRIORITY
+                           Layer directory to create
+     --example-recipe-name EXAMPLERECIPE, -e EXAMPLERECIPE
+                           Filename of the example recipe
+
+Adding a Layer Using the ``bitbake-layers`` Script
+==================================================
+
+Once you create your general layer, you must add it to your
+``bblayers.conf`` file. Adding the layer to this configuration file
+makes the OpenEmbedded build system aware of your layer so that it can
+search it for metadata.
+
+Add your layer by using the ``bitbake-layers add-layer`` command::
+
+   $ bitbake-layers add-layer your_layer_name
+
+Here is an example that adds a
+layer named ``meta-scottrif`` to the configuration file. Following the
+command that adds the layer is another ``bitbake-layers`` command that
+shows the layers that are in your ``bblayers.conf`` file::
+
+   $ bitbake-layers add-layer meta-scottrif
+   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
+   Parsing recipes: 100% |##########################################################| Time: 0:00:49
+   Parsing of 1441 .bb files complete (0 cached, 1441 parsed). 2055 targets, 56 skipped, 0 masked, 0 errors.
+   $ bitbake-layers show-layers
+   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
+   layer                 path                                      priority
+   ==========================================================================
+   meta                  /home/scottrif/poky/meta                  5
+   meta-poky             /home/scottrif/poky/meta-poky             5
+   meta-yocto-bsp        /home/scottrif/poky/meta-yocto-bsp        5
+   workspace             /home/scottrif/poky/build/workspace       99
+   meta-scottrif         /home/scottrif/poky/build/meta-scottrif   6
+
+
+Adding the layer to this file
+enables the build system to locate the layer during the build.
+
+.. note::
+
+   During a build, the OpenEmbedded build system looks in the layers
+   from the top of the list down to the bottom in that order.
+
+Saving and restoring the layers setup
+=====================================
+
+Once you have a working build with the correct set of layers, it is beneficial
+to capture the layer setup --- what they are, which repositories they come from
+and which SCM revisions they're at --- into a configuration file, so that this
+setup can be easily replicated later, perhaps on a different machine. Here's
+how to do this::
+
+   $ bitbake-layers create-layers-setup /srv/work/alex/meta-alex/
+   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
+   NOTE: Created /srv/work/alex/meta-alex/setup-layers.json
+   NOTE: Created /srv/work/alex/meta-alex/setup-layers
+
+The tool needs a single argument which tells where to place the output, consisting
+of a json formatted layer configuration, and a ``setup-layers`` script that can use that configuration
+to restore the layers in a different location, or on a different host machine. The argument
+can point to a custom layer (which is then deemed a "bootstrap" layer that needs to be
+checked out first), or into a completely independent location.
+
+The replication of the layers is performed by running the ``setup-layers`` script provided
+above:
+
+#. Clone the bootstrap layer or some other repository to obtain
+   the json config and the setup script that can use it.
+
+#. Run the script directly with no options::
+
+      alex@Zen2:/srv/work/alex/my-build$ meta-alex/setup-layers
+      Note: not checking out source meta-alex, use --force-bootstraplayer-checkout to override.
+
+      Setting up source meta-intel, revision 15.0-hardknott-3.3-310-g0a96edae, branch master
+      Running 'git init -q /srv/work/alex/my-build/meta-intel'
+      Running 'git remote remove origin > /dev/null 2>&1; git remote add origin git://git.yoctoproject.org/meta-intel' in /srv/work/alex/my-build/meta-intel
+      Running 'git fetch -q origin || true' in /srv/work/alex/my-build/meta-intel
+      Running 'git checkout -q 0a96edae609a3f48befac36af82cf1eed6786b4a' in /srv/work/alex/my-build/meta-intel
+
+      Setting up source poky, revision 4.1_M1-372-g55483d28f2, branch akanavin/setup-layers
+      Running 'git init -q /srv/work/alex/my-build/poky'
+      Running 'git remote remove origin > /dev/null 2>&1; git remote add origin git://git.yoctoproject.org/poky' in /srv/work/alex/my-build/poky
+      Running 'git fetch -q origin || true' in /srv/work/alex/my-build/poky
+      Running 'git remote remove poky-contrib > /dev/null 2>&1; git remote add poky-contrib ssh://git@push.yoctoproject.org/poky-contrib' in /srv/work/alex/my-build/poky
+      Running 'git fetch -q poky-contrib || true' in /srv/work/alex/my-build/poky
+      Running 'git checkout -q 11db0390b02acac1324e0f827beb0e2e3d0d1d63' in /srv/work/alex/my-build/poky
+
+.. note::
+   This will work to update an existing checkout as well.
+
+.. note::
+   The script is self-sufficient and requires only python3
+   and git on the build machine.
+
+.. note::
+   Both the ``create-layers-setup`` and the ``setup-layers`` provided several additional options
+   that customize their behavior - you are welcome to study them via ``--help`` command line parameter.
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/libraries.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/libraries.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..521dbb9a7c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/libraries.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,267 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Working With Libraries
+**********************
+
+Libraries are an integral part of your system. This section describes
+some common practices you might find helpful when working with libraries
+to build your system:
+
+-  :ref:`How to include static library files
+   <dev-manual/libraries:including static library files>`
+
+-  :ref:`How to use the Multilib feature to combine multiple versions of
+   library files into a single image
+   <dev-manual/libraries:combining multiple versions of library files into one image>`
+
+-  :ref:`How to install multiple versions of the same library in parallel on
+   the same system
+   <dev-manual/libraries:installing multiple versions of the same library>`
+
+Including Static Library Files
+==============================
+
+If you are building a library and the library offers static linking, you
+can control which static library files (``*.a`` files) get included in
+the built library.
+
+The :term:`PACKAGES` and
+:term:`FILES:* <FILES>` variables in the
+``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file define how files installed
+by the :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task are packaged. By default, the :term:`PACKAGES`
+variable includes ``${PN}-staticdev``, which represents all static
+library files.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Some previously released versions of the Yocto Project defined the
+   static library files through ``${PN}-dev``.
+
+Here is the part of the BitBake configuration file, where you can see
+how the static library files are defined::
+
+   PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN ?= ""
+   PACKAGES = "${PN}-src ${PN}-dbg ${PN}-staticdev ${PN}-dev ${PN}-doc ${PN}-locale ${PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN} ${PN}"
+   PACKAGES_DYNAMIC = "^${PN}-locale-.*"
+   FILES = ""
+
+   FILES:${PN} = "${bindir}/* ${sbindir}/* ${libexecdir}/* ${libdir}/lib*${SOLIBS} \
+               ${sysconfdir} ${sharedstatedir} ${localstatedir} \
+               ${base_bindir}/* ${base_sbindir}/* \
+               ${base_libdir}/*${SOLIBS} \
+               ${base_prefix}/lib/udev ${prefix}/lib/udev \
+               ${base_libdir}/udev ${libdir}/udev \
+               ${datadir}/${BPN} ${libdir}/${BPN}/* \
+               ${datadir}/pixmaps ${datadir}/applications \
+               ${datadir}/idl ${datadir}/omf ${datadir}/sounds \
+               ${libdir}/bonobo/servers"
+
+   FILES:${PN}-bin = "${bindir}/* ${sbindir}/*"
+
+   FILES:${PN}-doc = "${docdir} ${mandir} ${infodir} ${datadir}/gtk-doc \
+               ${datadir}/gnome/help"
+   SECTION:${PN}-doc = "doc"
+
+   FILES_SOLIBSDEV ?= "${base_libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV} ${libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV}"
+   FILES:${PN}-dev = "${includedir} ${FILES_SOLIBSDEV} ${libdir}/*.la \
+                   ${libdir}/*.o ${libdir}/pkgconfig ${datadir}/pkgconfig \
+                   ${datadir}/aclocal ${base_libdir}/*.o \
+                   ${libdir}/${BPN}/*.la ${base_libdir}/*.la \
+                   ${libdir}/cmake ${datadir}/cmake"
+   SECTION:${PN}-dev = "devel"
+   ALLOW_EMPTY:${PN}-dev = "1"
+   RDEPENDS:${PN}-dev = "${PN} (= ${EXTENDPKGV})"
+
+   FILES:${PN}-staticdev = "${libdir}/*.a ${base_libdir}/*.a ${libdir}/${BPN}/*.a"
+   SECTION:${PN}-staticdev = "devel"
+   RDEPENDS:${PN}-staticdev = "${PN}-dev (= ${EXTENDPKGV})"
+
+Combining Multiple Versions of Library Files into One Image
+===========================================================
+
+The build system offers the ability to build libraries with different
+target optimizations or architecture formats and combine these together
+into one system image. You can link different binaries in the image
+against the different libraries as needed for specific use cases. This
+feature is called "Multilib".
+
+An example would be where you have most of a system compiled in 32-bit
+mode using 32-bit libraries, but you have something large, like a
+database engine, that needs to be a 64-bit application and uses 64-bit
+libraries. Multilib allows you to get the best of both 32-bit and 64-bit
+libraries.
+
+While the Multilib feature is most commonly used for 32 and 64-bit
+differences, the approach the build system uses facilitates different
+target optimizations. You could compile some binaries to use one set of
+libraries and other binaries to use a different set of libraries. The
+libraries could differ in architecture, compiler options, or other
+optimizations.
+
+There are several examples in the ``meta-skeleton`` layer found in the
+:term:`Source Directory`:
+
+-  :oe_git:`conf/multilib-example.conf </openembedded-core/tree/meta-skeleton/conf/multilib-example.conf>`
+   configuration file.
+
+-  :oe_git:`conf/multilib-example2.conf </openembedded-core/tree/meta-skeleton/conf/multilib-example2.conf>`
+   configuration file.
+
+-  :oe_git:`recipes-multilib/images/core-image-multilib-example.bb </openembedded-core/tree/meta-skeleton/recipes-multilib/images/core-image-multilib-example.bb>`
+   recipe
+
+Preparing to Use Multilib
+-------------------------
+
+User-specific requirements drive the Multilib feature. Consequently,
+there is no one "out-of-the-box" configuration that would
+meet your needs.
+
+In order to enable Multilib, you first need to ensure your recipe is
+extended to support multiple libraries. Many standard recipes are
+already extended and support multiple libraries. You can check in the
+``meta/conf/multilib.conf`` configuration file in the
+:term:`Source Directory` to see how this is
+done using the
+:term:`BBCLASSEXTEND` variable.
+Eventually, all recipes will be covered and this list will not be
+needed.
+
+For the most part, the :ref:`Multilib <ref-classes-multilib*>`
+class extension works automatically to
+extend the package name from ``${PN}`` to ``${MLPREFIX}${PN}``, where
+:term:`MLPREFIX` is the particular multilib (e.g. "lib32-" or "lib64-").
+Standard variables such as
+:term:`DEPENDS`,
+:term:`RDEPENDS`,
+:term:`RPROVIDES`,
+:term:`RRECOMMENDS`,
+:term:`PACKAGES`, and
+:term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` are
+automatically extended by the system. If you are extending any manual
+code in the recipe, you can use the ``${MLPREFIX}`` variable to ensure
+those names are extended correctly.
+
+Using Multilib
+--------------
+
+After you have set up the recipes, you need to define the actual
+combination of multiple libraries you want to build. You accomplish this
+through your ``local.conf`` configuration file in the
+:term:`Build Directory`. An example configuration would be as follows::
+
+   MACHINE = "qemux86-64"
+   require conf/multilib.conf
+   MULTILIBS = "multilib:lib32"
+   DEFAULTTUNE:virtclass-multilib-lib32 = "x86"
+   IMAGE_INSTALL:append = " lib32-glib-2.0"
+
+This example enables an additional library named
+``lib32`` alongside the normal target packages. When combining these
+"lib32" alternatives, the example uses "x86" for tuning. For information
+on this particular tuning, see
+``meta/conf/machine/include/ia32/arch-ia32.inc``.
+
+The example then includes ``lib32-glib-2.0`` in all the images, which
+illustrates one method of including a multiple library dependency. You
+can use a normal image build to include this dependency, for example::
+
+   $ bitbake core-image-sato
+
+You can also build Multilib packages
+specifically with a command like this::
+
+   $ bitbake lib32-glib-2.0
+
+Additional Implementation Details
+---------------------------------
+
+There are generic implementation details as well as details that are specific to
+package management systems. Here are implementation details
+that exist regardless of the package management system:
+
+-  The typical convention used for the class extension code as used by
+   Multilib assumes that all package names specified in
+   :term:`PACKAGES` that contain
+   ``${PN}`` have ``${PN}`` at the start of the name. When that
+   convention is not followed and ``${PN}`` appears at the middle or the
+   end of a name, problems occur.
+
+-  The :term:`TARGET_VENDOR`
+   value under Multilib will be extended to "-vendormlmultilib" (e.g.
+   "-pokymllib32" for a "lib32" Multilib with Poky). The reason for this
+   slightly unwieldy contraction is that any "-" characters in the
+   vendor string presently break Autoconf's ``config.sub``, and other
+   separators are problematic for different reasons.
+
+Here are the implementation details for the RPM Package Management System:
+
+-  A unique architecture is defined for the Multilib packages, along
+   with creating a unique deploy folder under ``tmp/deploy/rpm`` in the
+   :term:`Build Directory`. For example, consider ``lib32`` in a
+   ``qemux86-64`` image. The possible architectures in the system are "all",
+   "qemux86_64", "lib32:qemux86_64", and "lib32:x86".
+
+-  The ``${MLPREFIX}`` variable is stripped from ``${PN}`` during RPM
+   packaging. The naming for a normal RPM package and a Multilib RPM
+   package in a ``qemux86-64`` system resolves to something similar to
+   ``bash-4.1-r2.x86_64.rpm`` and ``bash-4.1.r2.lib32_x86.rpm``,
+   respectively.
+
+-  When installing a Multilib image, the RPM backend first installs the
+   base image and then installs the Multilib libraries.
+
+-  The build system relies on RPM to resolve the identical files in the
+   two (or more) Multilib packages.
+
+Here are the implementation details for the IPK Package Management System:
+
+-  The ``${MLPREFIX}`` is not stripped from ``${PN}`` during IPK
+   packaging. The naming for a normal RPM package and a Multilib IPK
+   package in a ``qemux86-64`` system resolves to something like
+   ``bash_4.1-r2.x86_64.ipk`` and ``lib32-bash_4.1-rw:x86.ipk``,
+   respectively.
+
+-  The IPK deploy folder is not modified with ``${MLPREFIX}`` because
+   packages with and without the Multilib feature can exist in the same
+   folder due to the ``${PN}`` differences.
+
+-  IPK defines a sanity check for Multilib installation using certain
+   rules for file comparison, overridden, etc.
+
+Installing Multiple Versions of the Same Library
+================================================
+
+There are be situations where you need to install and use multiple versions
+of the same library on the same system at the same time. This
+almost always happens when a library API changes and you have
+multiple pieces of software that depend on the separate versions of the
+library. To accommodate these situations, you can install multiple
+versions of the same library in parallel on the same system.
+
+The process is straightforward as long as the libraries use proper
+versioning. With properly versioned libraries, all you need to do to
+individually specify the libraries is create separate, appropriately
+named recipes where the :term:`PN` part of
+the name includes a portion that differentiates each library version
+(e.g. the major part of the version number). Thus, instead of having a
+single recipe that loads one version of a library (e.g. ``clutter``),
+you provide multiple recipes that result in different versions of the
+libraries you want. As an example, the following two recipes would allow
+the two separate versions of the ``clutter`` library to co-exist on the
+same system:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+   clutter-1.6_1.6.20.bb
+   clutter-1.8_1.8.4.bb
+
+Additionally, if
+you have other recipes that depend on a given library, you need to use
+the :term:`DEPENDS` variable to
+create the dependency. Continuing with the same example, if you want to
+have a recipe depend on the 1.8 version of the ``clutter`` library, use
+the following in your recipe::
+
+   DEPENDS = "clutter-1.8"
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/licenses.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/licenses.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bffff3675f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/licenses.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,544 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Working With Licenses
+*********************
+
+As mentioned in the ":ref:`overview-manual/development-environment:licensing`"
+section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual, open source
+projects are open to the public and they consequently have different
+licensing structures in place. This section describes the mechanism by
+which the :term:`OpenEmbedded Build System`
+tracks changes to
+licensing text and covers how to maintain open source license compliance
+during your project's lifecycle. The section also describes how to
+enable commercially licensed recipes, which by default are disabled.
+
+Tracking License Changes
+========================
+
+The license of an upstream project might change in the future. In order
+to prevent these changes going unnoticed, the
+:term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`
+variable tracks changes to the license text. The checksums are validated
+at the end of the configure step, and if the checksums do not match, the
+build will fail.
+
+Specifying the ``LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`` Variable
+--------------------------------------------
+
+The :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM` variable contains checksums of the license text
+in the source code for the recipe. Here is an example of how to
+specify :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`::
+
+   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://COPYING;md5=xxxx \
+                       file://licfile1.txt;beginline=5;endline=29;md5=yyyy \
+                       file://licfile2.txt;endline=50;md5=zzzz \
+                       ..."
+
+.. note::
+
+   -  When using "beginline" and "endline", realize that line numbering
+      begins with one and not zero. Also, the included lines are
+      inclusive (i.e. lines five through and including 29 in the
+      previous example for ``licfile1.txt``).
+
+   -  When a license check fails, the selected license text is included
+      as part of the QA message. Using this output, you can determine
+      the exact start and finish for the needed license text.
+
+The build system uses the :term:`S`
+variable as the default directory when searching files listed in
+:term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`. The previous example employs the default
+directory.
+
+Consider this next example::
+
+   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://src/ls.c;beginline=5;endline=16;\
+                                       md5=bb14ed3c4cda583abc85401304b5cd4e"
+   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://${WORKDIR}/license.html;md5=5c94767cedb5d6987c902ac850ded2c6"
+
+The first line locates a file in ``${S}/src/ls.c`` and isolates lines
+five through 16 as license text. The second line refers to a file in
+:term:`WORKDIR`.
+
+Note that :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM` variable is mandatory for all recipes,
+unless the :term:`LICENSE` variable is set to "CLOSED".
+
+Explanation of Syntax
+---------------------
+
+As mentioned in the previous section, the :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM` variable
+lists all the important files that contain the license text for the
+source code. It is possible to specify a checksum for an entire file, or
+a specific section of a file (specified by beginning and ending line
+numbers with the "beginline" and "endline" parameters, respectively).
+The latter is useful for source files with a license notice header,
+README documents, and so forth. If you do not use the "beginline"
+parameter, then it is assumed that the text begins on the first line of
+the file. Similarly, if you do not use the "endline" parameter, it is
+assumed that the license text ends with the last line of the file.
+
+The "md5" parameter stores the md5 checksum of the license text. If the
+license text changes in any way as compared to this parameter then a
+mismatch occurs. This mismatch triggers a build failure and notifies the
+developer. Notification allows the developer to review and address the
+license text changes. Also note that if a mismatch occurs during the
+build, the correct md5 checksum is placed in the build log and can be
+easily copied to the recipe.
+
+There is no limit to how many files you can specify using the
+:term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM` variable. Generally, however, every project
+requires a few specifications for license tracking. Many projects have a
+"COPYING" file that stores the license information for all the source
+code files. This practice allows you to just track the "COPYING" file as
+long as it is kept up to date.
+
+.. note::
+
+   -  If you specify an empty or invalid "md5" parameter,
+      :term:`BitBake` returns an md5
+      mis-match error and displays the correct "md5" parameter value
+      during the build. The correct parameter is also captured in the
+      build log.
+
+   -  If the whole file contains only license text, you do not need to
+      use the "beginline" and "endline" parameters.
+
+Enabling Commercially Licensed Recipes
+======================================
+
+By default, the OpenEmbedded build system disables components that have
+commercial or other special licensing requirements. Such requirements
+are defined on a recipe-by-recipe basis through the
+:term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` variable
+definition in the affected recipe. For instance, the
+``poky/meta/recipes-multimedia/gstreamer/gst-plugins-ugly`` recipe
+contains the following statement::
+
+   LICENSE_FLAGS = "commercial"
+
+Here is a
+slightly more complicated example that contains both an explicit recipe
+name and version (after variable expansion)::
+
+   LICENSE_FLAGS = "license_${PN}_${PV}"
+
+It is possible to give more details about a specific license
+using flags on the :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_DETAILS` variable::
+
+   LICENSE_FLAGS_DETAILS[my-eula-license] = "For further details, see https://example.com/eula."
+
+If set, this will be displayed to the user if the license hasn't been accepted.
+
+In order for a component restricted by a
+:term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` definition to be enabled and included in an image, it
+needs to have a matching entry in the global
+:term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED`
+variable, which is a variable typically defined in your ``local.conf``
+file. For example, to enable the
+``poky/meta/recipes-multimedia/gstreamer/gst-plugins-ugly`` package, you
+could add either the string "commercial_gst-plugins-ugly" or the more
+general string "commercial" to :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED`. See the
+":ref:`dev-manual/licenses:license flag matching`" section for a full
+explanation of how :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` matching works. Here is the
+example::
+
+   LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED = "commercial_gst-plugins-ugly"
+
+Likewise, to additionally enable the package built from the recipe
+containing ``LICENSE_FLAGS = "license_${PN}_${PV}"``, and assuming that
+the actual recipe name was ``emgd_1.10.bb``, the following string would
+enable that package as well as the original ``gst-plugins-ugly``
+package::
+
+   LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED = "commercial_gst-plugins-ugly license_emgd_1.10"
+
+As a convenience, you do not need to specify the
+complete license string for every package. You can use
+an abbreviated form, which consists of just the first portion or
+portions of the license string before the initial underscore character
+or characters. A partial string will match any license that contains the
+given string as the first portion of its license. For example, the
+following value will also match both of the packages
+previously mentioned as well as any other packages that have licenses
+starting with "commercial" or "license"::
+
+   LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED = "commercial license"
+
+License Flag Matching
+---------------------
+
+License flag matching allows you to control what recipes the
+OpenEmbedded build system includes in the build. Fundamentally, the
+build system attempts to match :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` strings found in
+recipes against strings found in :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED`.
+A match causes the build system to include a recipe in the
+build, while failure to find a match causes the build system to exclude
+a recipe.
+
+In general, license flag matching is simple. However, understanding some
+concepts will help you correctly and effectively use matching.
+
+Before a flag defined by a particular recipe is tested against the
+entries of :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED`, the expanded
+string ``_${PN}`` is appended to the flag. This expansion makes each
+:term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` value recipe-specific. After expansion, the
+string is then matched against the entries. Thus, specifying
+``LICENSE_FLAGS = "commercial"`` in recipe "foo", for example, results
+in the string ``"commercial_foo"``. And, to create a match, that string
+must appear among the entries of :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED`.
+
+Judicious use of the :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` strings and the contents of the
+:term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED` variable allows you a lot of flexibility for
+including or excluding recipes based on licensing. For example, you can
+broaden the matching capabilities by using license flags string subsets
+in :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED`.
+
+.. note::
+
+   When using a string subset, be sure to use the part of the expanded
+   string that precedes the appended underscore character (e.g.
+   ``usethispart_1.3``, ``usethispart_1.4``, and so forth).
+
+For example, simply specifying the string "commercial" in the
+:term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED` variable matches any expanded
+:term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` definition that starts with the string
+"commercial" such as "commercial_foo" and "commercial_bar", which
+are the strings the build system automatically generates for
+hypothetical recipes named "foo" and "bar" assuming those recipes simply
+specify the following::
+
+   LICENSE_FLAGS = "commercial"
+
+Thus, you can choose to exhaustively enumerate each license flag in the
+list and allow only specific recipes into the image, or you can use a
+string subset that causes a broader range of matches to allow a range of
+recipes into the image.
+
+This scheme works even if the :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` string already has
+``_${PN}`` appended. For example, the build system turns the license
+flag "commercial_1.2_foo" into "commercial_1.2_foo_foo" and would match
+both the general "commercial" and the specific "commercial_1.2_foo"
+strings found in the :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED` variable, as expected.
+
+Here are some other scenarios:
+
+-  You can specify a versioned string in the recipe such as
+   "commercial_foo_1.2" in a "foo" recipe. The build system expands this
+   string to "commercial_foo_1.2_foo". Combine this license flag with a
+   :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED` variable that has the string
+   "commercial" and you match the flag along with any other flag that
+   starts with the string "commercial".
+
+-  Under the same circumstances, you can add "commercial_foo" in the
+   :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED` variable and the build system not only
+   matches "commercial_foo_1.2" but also matches any license flag with
+   the string "commercial_foo", regardless of the version.
+
+-  You can be very specific and use both the package and version parts
+   in the :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED` list (e.g.
+   "commercial_foo_1.2") to specifically match a versioned recipe.
+
+Other Variables Related to Commercial Licenses
+----------------------------------------------
+
+There are other helpful variables related to commercial license handling,
+defined in the
+``poky/meta/conf/distro/include/default-distrovars.inc`` file::
+
+   COMMERCIAL_AUDIO_PLUGINS ?= ""
+   COMMERCIAL_VIDEO_PLUGINS ?= ""
+
+If you want to enable these components, you can do so by making sure you have
+statements similar to the following in your ``local.conf`` configuration file::
+
+   COMMERCIAL_AUDIO_PLUGINS = "gst-plugins-ugly-mad \
+       gst-plugins-ugly-mpegaudioparse"
+   COMMERCIAL_VIDEO_PLUGINS = "gst-plugins-ugly-mpeg2dec \
+       gst-plugins-ugly-mpegstream gst-plugins-bad-mpegvideoparse"
+   LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED = "commercial_gst-plugins-ugly commercial_gst-plugins-bad commercial_qmmp"
+
+Of course, you could also create a matching list for those components using the
+more general "commercial" string in the :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED` variable,
+but that would also enable all the other packages with :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS`
+containing "commercial", which you may or may not want::
+
+   LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED = "commercial"
+
+Specifying audio and video plugins as part of the
+:term:`COMMERCIAL_AUDIO_PLUGINS` and :term:`COMMERCIAL_VIDEO_PLUGINS` statements
+(along with :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_ACCEPTED`) includes the plugins or
+components into built images, thus adding support for media formats or
+components.
+
+.. note::
+
+   GStreamer "ugly" and "bad" plugins are actually available through
+   open source licenses. However, the "ugly" ones can be subject to software
+   patents in some countries, making it necessary to pay licensing fees
+   to distribute them. The "bad" ones are just deemed unreliable by the
+   GStreamer community and should therefore be used with care.
+
+Maintaining Open Source License Compliance During Your Product's Lifecycle
+==========================================================================
+
+One of the concerns for a development organization using open source
+software is how to maintain compliance with various open source
+licensing during the lifecycle of the product. While this section does
+not provide legal advice or comprehensively cover all scenarios, it does
+present methods that you can use to assist you in meeting the compliance
+requirements during a software release.
+
+With hundreds of different open source licenses that the Yocto Project
+tracks, it is difficult to know the requirements of each and every
+license. However, the requirements of the major FLOSS licenses can begin
+to be covered by assuming that there are three main areas of concern:
+
+-  Source code must be provided.
+
+-  License text for the software must be provided.
+
+-  Compilation scripts and modifications to the source code must be
+   provided.
+
+There are other requirements beyond the scope of these three and the
+methods described in this section (e.g. the mechanism through which
+source code is distributed).
+
+As different organizations have different ways of releasing software,
+there can be multiple ways of meeting license obligations. At
+least, we describe here two methods for achieving compliance:
+
+-  The first method is to use OpenEmbedded's ability to provide
+   the source code, provide a list of licenses, as well as
+   compilation scripts and source code modifications.
+
+   The remainder of this section describes supported methods to meet
+   the previously mentioned three requirements.
+
+-  The second method is to generate a *Software Bill of Materials*
+   (:term:`SBoM`), as described in the ":doc:`/dev-manual/sbom`" section.
+   Not only do you generate :term:`SPDX` output which can be used meet
+   license compliance requirements (except for sharing the build system
+   and layers sources for the time being), but this output also includes
+   component version and patch information which can be used
+   for vulnerability assessment.
+
+Whatever method you choose, prior to releasing images, sources,
+and the build system, you should audit all artifacts to ensure
+completeness.
+
+.. note::
+
+   The Yocto Project generates a license manifest during image creation
+   that is located in
+   ``${DEPLOY_DIR}/licenses/${SSTATE_PKGARCH}/<image-name>-<machine>.rootfs-<datestamp>/``
+   to assist with any audits.
+
+Providing the Source Code
+-------------------------
+
+Compliance activities should begin before you generate the final image.
+The first thing you should look at is the requirement that tops the list
+for most compliance groups --- providing the source. The Yocto Project has
+a few ways of meeting this requirement.
+
+One of the easiest ways to meet this requirement is to provide the
+entire :term:`DL_DIR` used by the
+build. This method, however, has a few issues. The most obvious is the
+size of the directory since it includes all sources used in the build
+and not just the source used in the released image. It will include
+toolchain source, and other artifacts, which you would not generally
+release. However, the more serious issue for most companies is
+accidental release of proprietary software. The Yocto Project provides
+an :ref:`ref-classes-archiver` class to help avoid some of these concerns.
+
+Before you employ :term:`DL_DIR` or the :ref:`ref-classes-archiver` class, you
+need to decide how you choose to provide source. The source
+:ref:`ref-classes-archiver` class can generate tarballs and SRPMs and can
+create them with various levels of compliance in mind.
+
+One way of doing this (but certainly not the only way) is to release
+just the source as a tarball. You can do this by adding the following to
+the ``local.conf`` file found in the :term:`Build Directory`::
+
+   INHERIT += "archiver"
+   ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "original"
+
+During the creation of your
+image, the source from all recipes that deploy packages to the image is
+placed within subdirectories of ``DEPLOY_DIR/sources`` based on the
+:term:`LICENSE` for each recipe.
+Releasing the entire directory enables you to comply with requirements
+concerning providing the unmodified source. It is important to note that
+the size of the directory can get large.
+
+A way to help mitigate the size issue is to only release tarballs for
+licenses that require the release of source. Let us assume you are only
+concerned with GPL code as identified by running the following script:
+
+.. code-block:: shell
+
+   # Script to archive a subset of packages matching specific license(s)
+   # Source and license files are copied into sub folders of package folder
+   # Must be run from build folder
+   #!/bin/bash
+   src_release_dir="source-release"
+   mkdir -p $src_release_dir
+   for a in tmp/deploy/sources/*; do
+      for d in $a/*; do
+         # Get package name from path
+         p=`basename $d`
+         p=${p%-*}
+         p=${p%-*}
+         # Only archive GPL packages (update *GPL* regex for your license check)
+         numfiles=`ls tmp/deploy/licenses/$p/*GPL* 2> /dev/null | wc -l`
+         if [ $numfiles -ge 1 ]; then
+            echo Archiving $p
+            mkdir -p $src_release_dir/$p/source
+            cp $d/* $src_release_dir/$p/source 2> /dev/null
+            mkdir -p $src_release_dir/$p/license
+            cp tmp/deploy/licenses/$p/* $src_release_dir/$p/license 2> /dev/null
+         fi
+      done
+   done
+
+At this point, you
+could create a tarball from the ``gpl_source_release`` directory and
+provide that to the end user. This method would be a step toward
+achieving compliance with section 3a of GPLv2 and with section 6 of
+GPLv3.
+
+Providing License Text
+----------------------
+
+One requirement that is often overlooked is inclusion of license text.
+This requirement also needs to be dealt with prior to generating the
+final image. Some licenses require the license text to accompany the
+binary. You can achieve this by adding the following to your
+``local.conf`` file::
+
+   COPY_LIC_MANIFEST = "1"
+   COPY_LIC_DIRS = "1"
+   LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE = "1"
+
+Adding these statements to the
+configuration file ensures that the licenses collected during package
+generation are included on your image.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Setting all three variables to "1" results in the image having two
+   copies of the same license file. One copy resides in
+   ``/usr/share/common-licenses`` and the other resides in
+   ``/usr/share/license``.
+
+   The reason for this behavior is because
+   :term:`COPY_LIC_DIRS` and
+   :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST`
+   add a copy of the license when the image is built but do not offer a
+   path for adding licenses for newly installed packages to an image.
+   :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE`
+   adds a separate package and an upgrade path for adding licenses to an
+   image.
+
+As the source :ref:`ref-classes-archiver` class has already archived the
+original unmodified source that contains the license files, you would have
+already met the requirements for inclusion of the license information
+with source as defined by the GPL and other open source licenses.
+
+Providing Compilation Scripts and Source Code Modifications
+-----------------------------------------------------------
+
+At this point, we have addressed all we need prior to generating the
+image. The next two requirements are addressed during the final
+packaging of the release.
+
+By releasing the version of the OpenEmbedded build system and the layers
+used during the build, you will be providing both compilation scripts
+and the source code modifications in one step.
+
+If the deployment team has a :ref:`overview-manual/concepts:bsp layer`
+and a distro layer, and those
+those layers are used to patch, compile, package, or modify (in any way)
+any open source software included in your released images, you might be
+required to release those layers under section 3 of GPLv2 or section 1
+of GPLv3. One way of doing that is with a clean checkout of the version
+of the Yocto Project and layers used during your build. Here is an
+example:
+
+.. code-block:: shell
+
+   # We built using the dunfell branch of the poky repo
+   $ git clone -b dunfell git://git.yoctoproject.org/poky
+   $ cd poky
+   # We built using the release_branch for our layers
+   $ git clone -b release_branch git://git.mycompany.com/meta-my-bsp-layer
+   $ git clone -b release_branch git://git.mycompany.com/meta-my-software-layer
+   # clean up the .git repos
+   $ find . -name ".git" -type d -exec rm -rf {} \;
+
+One thing a development organization might want to consider for end-user
+convenience is to modify
+``meta-poky/conf/templates/default/bblayers.conf.sample`` to ensure that when
+the end user utilizes the released build system to build an image, the
+development organization's layers are included in the ``bblayers.conf`` file
+automatically::
+
+   # POKY_BBLAYERS_CONF_VERSION is increased each time build/conf/bblayers.conf
+   # changes incompatibly
+   POKY_BBLAYERS_CONF_VERSION = "2"
+
+   BBPATH = "${TOPDIR}"
+   BBFILES ?= ""
+
+   BBLAYERS ?= " \
+     ##OEROOT##/meta \
+     ##OEROOT##/meta-poky \
+     ##OEROOT##/meta-yocto-bsp \
+     ##OEROOT##/meta-mylayer \
+     "
+
+Creating and
+providing an archive of the :term:`Metadata`
+layers (recipes, configuration files, and so forth) enables you to meet
+your requirements to include the scripts to control compilation as well
+as any modifications to the original source.
+
+Compliance Limitations with Executables Built from Static Libraries
+-------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+When package A is added to an image via the :term:`RDEPENDS` or :term:`RRECOMMENDS`
+mechanisms as well as explicitly included in the image recipe with
+:term:`IMAGE_INSTALL`, and depends on a static linked library recipe B
+(``DEPENDS += "B"``), package B will neither appear in the generated license
+manifest nor in the generated source tarballs.  This occurs as the
+:ref:`ref-classes-license` and :ref:`ref-classes-archiver` classes assume that
+only packages included via :term:`RDEPENDS` or :term:`RRECOMMENDS`
+end up in the image.
+
+As a result, potential obligations regarding license compliance for package B
+may not be met.
+
+The Yocto Project doesn't enable static libraries by default, in part because
+of this issue. Before a solution to this limitation is found, you need to
+keep in mind that if your root filesystem is built from static libraries,
+you will need to manually ensure that your deliveries are compliant
+with the licenses of these libraries.
+
+Copying Non Standard Licenses
+=============================
+
+Some packages, such as the linux-firmware package, have many licenses
+that are not in any way common. You can avoid adding a lot of these
+types of common license files, which are only applicable to a specific
+package, by using the
+:term:`NO_GENERIC_LICENSE`
+variable. Using this variable also avoids QA errors when you use a
+non-common, non-CLOSED license in a recipe.
+
+Here is an example that uses the ``LICENSE.Abilis.txt`` file as
+the license from the fetched source::
+
+   NO_GENERIC_LICENSE[Firmware-Abilis] = "LICENSE.Abilis.txt"
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/new-machine.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/new-machine.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..469b2d395a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/new-machine.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Adding a New Machine
+********************
+
+Adding a new machine to the Yocto Project is a straightforward process.
+This section describes how to add machines that are similar to those
+that the Yocto Project already supports.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Although well within the capabilities of the Yocto Project, adding a
+   totally new architecture might require changes to ``gcc``/``glibc``
+   and to the site information, which is beyond the scope of this
+   manual.
+
+For a complete example that shows how to add a new machine, see the
+":ref:`bsp-guide/bsp:creating a new bsp layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script`"
+section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's
+Guide.
+
+Adding the Machine Configuration File
+=====================================
+
+To add a new machine, you need to add a new machine configuration file
+to the layer's ``conf/machine`` directory. This configuration file
+provides details about the device you are adding.
+
+The OpenEmbedded build system uses the root name of the machine
+configuration file to reference the new machine. For example, given a
+machine configuration file named ``crownbay.conf``, the build system
+recognizes the machine as "crownbay".
+
+The most important variables you must set in your machine configuration
+file or include from a lower-level configuration file are as follows:
+
+-  :term:`TARGET_ARCH` (e.g. "arm")
+
+-  ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/kernel``
+
+-  :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES` (e.g. "screen wifi")
+
+You might also need these variables:
+
+-  :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES` (e.g. "115200;ttyS0 115200;ttyS1")
+
+-  :term:`KERNEL_IMAGETYPE` (e.g. "zImage")
+
+-  :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` (e.g. "tar.gz jffs2")
+
+You can find full details on these variables in the reference section.
+You can leverage existing machine ``.conf`` files from
+``meta-yocto-bsp/conf/machine/``.
+
+Adding a Kernel for the Machine
+===============================
+
+The OpenEmbedded build system needs to be able to build a kernel for the
+machine. You need to either create a new kernel recipe for this machine,
+or extend an existing kernel recipe. You can find several kernel recipe
+examples in the Source Directory at ``meta/recipes-kernel/linux`` that
+you can use as references.
+
+If you are creating a new kernel recipe, normal recipe-writing rules
+apply for setting up a :term:`SRC_URI`. Thus, you need to specify any
+necessary patches and set :term:`S` to point at the source code. You need to
+create a :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task that configures the unpacked kernel with
+a ``defconfig`` file. You can do this by using a ``make defconfig``
+command or, more commonly, by copying in a suitable ``defconfig`` file
+and then running ``make oldconfig``. By making use of ``inherit kernel``
+and potentially some of the ``linux-*.inc`` files, most other
+functionality is centralized and the defaults of the class normally work
+well.
+
+If you are extending an existing kernel recipe, it is usually a matter
+of adding a suitable ``defconfig`` file. The file needs to be added into
+a location similar to ``defconfig`` files used for other machines in a
+given kernel recipe. A possible way to do this is by listing the file in
+the :term:`SRC_URI` and adding the machine to the expression in
+:term:`COMPATIBLE_MACHINE`::
+
+   COMPATIBLE_MACHINE = '(qemux86|qemumips)'
+
+For more information on ``defconfig`` files, see the
+":ref:`kernel-dev/common:changing the configuration`"
+section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual.
+
+Adding a Formfactor Configuration File
+======================================
+
+A formfactor configuration file provides information about the target
+hardware for which the image is being built and information that the
+build system cannot obtain from other sources such as the kernel. Some
+examples of information contained in a formfactor configuration file
+include framebuffer orientation, whether or not the system has a
+keyboard, the positioning of the keyboard in relation to the screen, and
+the screen resolution.
+
+The build system uses reasonable defaults in most cases. However, if
+customization is necessary, you need to create a ``machconfig`` file in
+the ``meta/recipes-bsp/formfactor/files`` directory. This directory
+contains directories for specific machines such as ``qemuarm`` and
+``qemux86``. For information about the settings available and the
+defaults, see the ``meta/recipes-bsp/formfactor/files/config`` file
+found in the same area.
+
+Here is an example for "qemuarm" machine::
+
+   HAVE_TOUCHSCREEN=1
+   HAVE_KEYBOARD=1
+   DISPLAY_CAN_ROTATE=0
+   DISPLAY_ORIENTATION=0
+   #DISPLAY_WIDTH_PIXELS=640
+   #DISPLAY_HEIGHT_PIXELS=480
+   #DISPLAY_BPP=16
+   DISPLAY_DPI=150
+   DISPLAY_SUBPIXEL_ORDER=vrgb
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/new-recipe.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/new-recipe.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..61fc2eb122
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/new-recipe.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,1639 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Writing a New Recipe
+********************
+
+Recipes (``.bb`` files) are fundamental components in the Yocto Project
+environment. Each software component built by the OpenEmbedded build
+system requires a recipe to define the component. This section describes
+how to create, write, and test a new recipe.
+
+.. note::
+
+   For information on variables that are useful for recipes and for
+   information about recipe naming issues, see the
+   ":ref:`ref-manual/varlocality:recipes`" section of the Yocto Project
+   Reference Manual.
+
+Overview
+========
+
+The following figure shows the basic process for creating a new recipe.
+The remainder of the section provides details for the steps.
+
+.. image:: figures/recipe-workflow.png
+   :align: center
+   :width: 50%
+
+Locate or Automatically Create a Base Recipe
+============================================
+
+You can always write a recipe from scratch. However, there are three choices
+that can help you quickly get started with a new recipe:
+
+-  ``devtool add``: A command that assists in creating a recipe and an
+   environment conducive to development.
+
+-  ``recipetool create``: A command provided by the Yocto Project that
+   automates creation of a base recipe based on the source files.
+
+-  *Existing Recipes:* Location and modification of an existing recipe
+   that is similar in function to the recipe you need.
+
+.. note::
+
+   For information on recipe syntax, see the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/new-recipe:recipe syntax`" section.
+
+Creating the Base Recipe Using ``devtool add``
+----------------------------------------------
+
+The ``devtool add`` command uses the same logic for auto-creating the
+recipe as ``recipetool create``, which is listed below. Additionally,
+however, ``devtool add`` sets up an environment that makes it easy for
+you to patch the source and to make changes to the recipe as is often
+necessary when adding a recipe to build a new piece of software to be
+included in a build.
+
+You can find a complete description of the ``devtool add`` command in
+the ":ref:`sdk-manual/extensible:a closer look at \`\`devtool add\`\``" section
+in the Yocto Project Application Development and the Extensible Software
+Development Kit (eSDK) manual.
+
+Creating the Base Recipe Using ``recipetool create``
+----------------------------------------------------
+
+``recipetool create`` automates creation of a base recipe given a set of
+source code files. As long as you can extract or point to the source
+files, the tool will construct a recipe and automatically configure all
+pre-build information into the recipe. For example, suppose you have an
+application that builds using Autotools. Creating the base recipe using
+``recipetool`` results in a recipe that has the pre-build dependencies,
+license requirements, and checksums configured.
+
+To run the tool, you just need to be in your :term:`Build Directory` and
+have sourced the build environment setup script (i.e.
+:ref:`structure-core-script`). To get help on the tool, use the following
+command::
+
+   $ recipetool -h
+   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
+   usage: recipetool [-d] [-q] [--color COLOR] [-h] <subcommand> ...
+
+   OpenEmbedded recipe tool
+
+   options:
+     -d, --debug     Enable debug output
+     -q, --quiet     Print only errors
+     --color COLOR   Colorize output (where COLOR is auto, always, never)
+     -h, --help      show this help message and exit
+
+   subcommands:
+     create          Create a new recipe
+     newappend       Create a bbappend for the specified target in the specified
+                       layer
+     setvar          Set a variable within a recipe
+     appendfile      Create/update a bbappend to replace a target file
+     appendsrcfiles  Create/update a bbappend to add or replace source files
+     appendsrcfile   Create/update a bbappend to add or replace a source file
+   Use recipetool <subcommand> --help to get help on a specific command
+
+Running ``recipetool create -o OUTFILE`` creates the base recipe and
+locates it properly in the layer that contains your source files.
+Here are some syntax examples:
+
+ - Use this syntax to generate a recipe based on source. Once generated,
+   the recipe resides in the existing source code layer::
+
+      recipetool create -o OUTFILE source
+
+ - Use this syntax to generate a recipe using code that
+   you extract from source. The extracted code is placed in its own layer
+   defined by :term:`EXTERNALSRC`::
+
+      recipetool create -o OUTFILE -x EXTERNALSRC source
+
+ - Use this syntax to generate a recipe based on source. The options
+   direct ``recipetool`` to generate debugging information. Once generated,
+   the recipe resides in the existing source code layer::
+
+      recipetool create -d -o OUTFILE source
+
+Locating and Using a Similar Recipe
+-----------------------------------
+
+Before writing a recipe from scratch, it is often useful to discover
+whether someone else has already written one that meets (or comes close
+to meeting) your needs. The Yocto Project and OpenEmbedded communities
+maintain many recipes that might be candidates for what you are doing.
+You can find a good central index of these recipes in the
+:oe_layerindex:`OpenEmbedded Layer Index <>`.
+
+Working from an existing recipe or a skeleton recipe is the best way to
+get started. Here are some points on both methods:
+
+-  *Locate and modify a recipe that is close to what you want to do:*
+   This method works when you are familiar with the current recipe
+   space. The method does not work so well for those new to the Yocto
+   Project or writing recipes.
+
+   Some risks associated with this method are using a recipe that has
+   areas totally unrelated to what you are trying to accomplish with
+   your recipe, not recognizing areas of the recipe that you might have
+   to add from scratch, and so forth. All these risks stem from
+   unfamiliarity with the existing recipe space.
+
+-  *Use and modify the following skeleton recipe:* If for some reason
+   you do not want to use ``recipetool`` and you cannot find an existing
+   recipe that is close to meeting your needs, you can use the following
+   structure to provide the fundamental areas of a new recipe::
+
+      DESCRIPTION = ""
+      HOMEPAGE = ""
+      LICENSE = ""
+      SECTION = ""
+      DEPENDS = ""
+      LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = ""
+
+      SRC_URI = ""
+
+Storing and Naming the Recipe
+=============================
+
+Once you have your base recipe, you should put it in your own layer and
+name it appropriately. Locating it correctly ensures that the
+OpenEmbedded build system can find it when you use BitBake to process
+the recipe.
+
+-  *Storing Your Recipe:* The OpenEmbedded build system locates your
+   recipe through the layer's ``conf/layer.conf`` file and the
+   :term:`BBFILES` variable. This
+   variable sets up a path from which the build system can locate
+   recipes. Here is the typical use::
+
+      BBFILES += "${LAYERDIR}/recipes-*/*/*.bb \
+                  ${LAYERDIR}/recipes-*/*/*.bbappend"
+
+   Consequently, you need to be sure you locate your new recipe inside
+   your layer such that it can be found.
+
+   You can find more information on how layers are structured in the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/layers:understanding and creating layers`" section.
+
+-  *Naming Your Recipe:* When you name your recipe, you need to follow
+   this naming convention::
+
+      basename_version.bb
+
+   Use lower-cased characters and do not include the reserved suffixes
+   ``-native``, ``-cross``, ``-initial``, or ``-dev`` casually (i.e. do not use
+   them as part of your recipe name unless the string applies). Here are some
+   examples:
+
+   .. code-block:: none
+
+      cups_1.7.0.bb
+      gawk_4.0.2.bb
+      irssi_0.8.16-rc1.bb
+
+Running a Build on the Recipe
+=============================
+
+Creating a new recipe is usually an iterative process that requires
+using BitBake to process the recipe multiple times in order to
+progressively discover and add information to the recipe file.
+
+Assuming you have sourced the build environment setup script (i.e.
+:ref:`structure-core-script`) and you are in the :term:`Build Directory`, use
+BitBake to process your recipe. All you need to provide is the
+``basename`` of the recipe as described in the previous section::
+
+   $ bitbake basename
+
+During the build, the OpenEmbedded build system creates a temporary work
+directory for each recipe
+(``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}``)
+where it keeps extracted source files, log files, intermediate
+compilation and packaging files, and so forth.
+
+The path to the per-recipe temporary work directory depends on the
+context in which it is being built. The quickest way to find this path
+is to have BitBake return it by running the following::
+
+   $ bitbake -e basename | grep ^WORKDIR=
+
+As an example, assume a Source Directory
+top-level folder named ``poky``, a default :term:`Build Directory` at
+``poky/build``, and a ``qemux86-poky-linux`` machine target system.
+Furthermore, suppose your recipe is named ``foo_1.3.0.bb``. In this
+case, the work directory the build system uses to build the package
+would be as follows::
+
+   poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/foo/1.3.0-r0
+
+Inside this directory you can find sub-directories such as ``image``,
+``packages-split``, and ``temp``. After the build, you can examine these
+to determine how well the build went.
+
+.. note::
+
+   You can find log files for each task in the recipe's ``temp``
+   directory (e.g. ``poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/foo/1.3.0-r0/temp``).
+   Log files are named ``log.taskname`` (e.g. ``log.do_configure``,
+   ``log.do_fetch``, and ``log.do_compile``).
+
+You can find more information about the build process in
+":doc:`/overview-manual/development-environment`"
+chapter of the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
+
+Fetching Code
+=============
+
+The first thing your recipe must do is specify how to fetch the source
+files. Fetching is controlled mainly through the
+:term:`SRC_URI` variable. Your recipe
+must have a :term:`SRC_URI` variable that points to where the source is
+located. For a graphical representation of source locations, see the
+":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:sources`" section in
+the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
+
+The :ref:`ref-tasks-fetch` task uses the prefix of each entry in the
+:term:`SRC_URI` variable value to determine which
+:ref:`fetcher <bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-fetching:fetchers>`
+to use to get your source files. It is the :term:`SRC_URI` variable that triggers
+the fetcher. The :ref:`ref-tasks-patch` task uses the variable after source is
+fetched to apply patches. The OpenEmbedded build system uses
+:term:`FILESOVERRIDES` for scanning directory locations for local files in
+:term:`SRC_URI`.
+
+The :term:`SRC_URI` variable in your recipe must define each unique location
+for your source files. It is good practice to not hard-code version
+numbers in a URL used in :term:`SRC_URI`. Rather than hard-code these
+values, use ``${``\ :term:`PV`\ ``}``,
+which causes the fetch process to use the version specified in the
+recipe filename. Specifying the version in this manner means that
+upgrading the recipe to a future version is as simple as renaming the
+recipe to match the new version.
+
+Here is a simple example from the
+``meta/recipes-devtools/strace/strace_5.5.bb`` recipe where the source
+comes from a single tarball. Notice the use of the
+:term:`PV` variable::
+
+   SRC_URI = "https://strace.io/files/${PV}/strace-${PV}.tar.xz \
+
+Files mentioned in :term:`SRC_URI` whose names end in a typical archive
+extension (e.g. ``.tar``, ``.tar.gz``, ``.tar.bz2``, ``.zip``, and so
+forth), are automatically extracted during the
+:ref:`ref-tasks-unpack` task. For
+another example that specifies these types of files, see the
+":ref:`dev-manual/new-recipe:building an autotooled package`" section.
+
+Another way of specifying source is from an SCM. For Git repositories,
+you must specify :term:`SRCREV` and you should specify :term:`PV` to include
+the revision with :term:`SRCPV`. Here is an example from the recipe
+``meta/recipes-core/musl/gcompat_git.bb``::
+
+   SRC_URI = "git://git.adelielinux.org/adelie/gcompat.git;protocol=https;branch=current"
+
+   PV = "1.0.0+1.1+git${SRCPV}"
+   SRCREV = "af5a49e489fdc04b9cf02547650d7aeaccd43793"
+
+If your :term:`SRC_URI` statement includes URLs pointing to individual files
+fetched from a remote server other than a version control system,
+BitBake attempts to verify the files against checksums defined in your
+recipe to ensure they have not been tampered with or otherwise modified
+since the recipe was written. Multiple checksums are supported:
+``SRC_URI[md5sum]``, ``SRC_URI[sha1sum]``, ``SRC_URI[sha256sum]``.
+``SRC_URI[sha384sum]`` and ``SRC_URI[sha512sum]``, but only
+``SRC_URI[sha256sum]`` is commonly used.
+
+.. note::
+
+   ``SRC_URI[md5sum]`` used to also be commonly used, but it is deprecated
+   and should be replaced by ``SRC_URI[sha256sum]`` when updating existing
+   recipes.
+
+If your :term:`SRC_URI` variable points to more than a single URL (excluding
+SCM URLs), you need to provide the ``sha256`` checksum for each URL. For these
+cases, you provide a name for each URL as part of the :term:`SRC_URI` and then
+reference that name in the subsequent checksum statements. Here is an example
+combining lines from the files ``git.inc`` and ``git_2.24.1.bb``::
+
+   SRC_URI = "${KERNELORG_MIRROR}/software/scm/git/git-${PV}.tar.gz;name=tarball \
+              ${KERNELORG_MIRROR}/software/scm/git/git-manpages-${PV}.tar.gz;name=manpages"
+
+   SRC_URI[tarball.sha256sum] = "ad5334956301c86841eb1e5b1bb20884a6bad89a10a6762c958220c7cf64da02"
+   SRC_URI[manpages.sha256sum] = "9a7ae3a093bea39770eb96ca3e5b40bff7af0b9f6123f089d7821d0e5b8e1230"
+
+The proper value for the ``sha256`` checksum might be available together
+with other signatures on the download page for the upstream source (e.g.
+``md5``, ``sha1``, ``sha256``, ``GPG``, and so forth). Because the
+OpenEmbedded build system typically only deals with ``sha256sum``,
+you should verify all the signatures you find by hand.
+
+If no :term:`SRC_URI` checksums are specified when you attempt to build the
+recipe, or you provide an incorrect checksum, the build will produce an
+error for each missing or incorrect checksum. As part of the error
+message, the build system provides the checksum string corresponding to
+the fetched file. Once you have the correct checksums, you can copy and
+paste them into your recipe and then run the build again to continue.
+
+.. note::
+
+   As mentioned, if the upstream source provides signatures for
+   verifying the downloaded source code, you should verify those
+   manually before setting the checksum values in the recipe and
+   continuing with the build.
+
+This final example is a bit more complicated and is from the
+``meta/recipes-sato/rxvt-unicode/rxvt-unicode_9.20.bb`` recipe. The
+example's :term:`SRC_URI` statement identifies multiple files as the source
+files for the recipe: a tarball, a patch file, a desktop file, and an icon::
+
+   SRC_URI = "http://dist.schmorp.de/rxvt-unicode/Attic/rxvt-unicode-${PV}.tar.bz2 \
+              file://xwc.patch \
+              file://rxvt.desktop \
+              file://rxvt.png"
+
+When you specify local files using the ``file://`` URI protocol, the
+build system fetches files from the local machine. The path is relative
+to the :term:`FILESPATH` variable
+and searches specific directories in a certain order:
+``${``\ :term:`BP`\ ``}``,
+``${``\ :term:`BPN`\ ``}``, and
+``files``. The directories are assumed to be subdirectories of the
+directory in which the recipe or append file resides. For another
+example that specifies these types of files, see the
+"`building a single .c file package`_" section.
+
+The previous example also specifies a patch file. Patch files are files
+whose names usually end in ``.patch`` or ``.diff`` but can end with
+compressed suffixes such as ``diff.gz`` and ``patch.bz2``, for example.
+The build system automatically applies patches as described in the
+":ref:`dev-manual/new-recipe:patching code`" section.
+
+Fetching Code Through Firewalls
+-------------------------------
+
+Some users are behind firewalls and need to fetch code through a proxy.
+See the ":doc:`/ref-manual/faq`" chapter for advice.
+
+Limiting the Number of Parallel Connections
+-------------------------------------------
+
+Some users are behind firewalls or use servers where the number of parallel
+connections is limited. In such cases, you can limit the number of fetch
+tasks being run in parallel by adding the following to your ``local.conf``
+file::
+
+   do_fetch[number_threads] = "4"
+
+Unpacking Code
+==============
+
+During the build, the
+:ref:`ref-tasks-unpack` task unpacks
+the source with ``${``\ :term:`S`\ ``}``
+pointing to where it is unpacked.
+
+If you are fetching your source files from an upstream source archived
+tarball and the tarball's internal structure matches the common
+convention of a top-level subdirectory named
+``${``\ :term:`BPN`\ ``}-${``\ :term:`PV`\ ``}``,
+then you do not need to set :term:`S`. However, if :term:`SRC_URI` specifies to
+fetch source from an archive that does not use this convention, or from
+an SCM like Git or Subversion, your recipe needs to define :term:`S`.
+
+If processing your recipe using BitBake successfully unpacks the source
+files, you need to be sure that the directory pointed to by ``${S}``
+matches the structure of the source.
+
+Patching Code
+=============
+
+Sometimes it is necessary to patch code after it has been fetched. Any
+files mentioned in :term:`SRC_URI` whose names end in ``.patch`` or
+``.diff`` or compressed versions of these suffixes (e.g. ``diff.gz``,
+``patch.bz2``, etc.) are treated as patches. The
+:ref:`ref-tasks-patch` task
+automatically applies these patches.
+
+The build system should be able to apply patches with the "-p1" option
+(i.e. one directory level in the path will be stripped off). If your
+patch needs to have more directory levels stripped off, specify the
+number of levels using the "striplevel" option in the :term:`SRC_URI` entry
+for the patch. Alternatively, if your patch needs to be applied in a
+specific subdirectory that is not specified in the patch file, use the
+"patchdir" option in the entry.
+
+As with all local files referenced in
+:term:`SRC_URI` using ``file://``,
+you should place patch files in a directory next to the recipe either
+named the same as the base name of the recipe
+(:term:`BP` and
+:term:`BPN`) or "files".
+
+Licensing
+=========
+
+Your recipe needs to define variables related to the license
+under whith the software is distributed. See the
+:ref:`contributor-guide/recipe-style-guide:recipe license fields`
+section in the Contributor Guide for details.
+
+Dependencies
+============
+
+Most software packages have a short list of other packages that they
+require, which are called dependencies. These dependencies fall into two
+main categories: build-time dependencies, which are required when the
+software is built; and runtime dependencies, which are required to be
+installed on the target in order for the software to run.
+
+Within a recipe, you specify build-time dependencies using the
+:term:`DEPENDS` variable. Although there are nuances,
+items specified in :term:`DEPENDS` should be names of other
+recipes. It is important that you specify all build-time dependencies
+explicitly.
+
+Another consideration is that configure scripts might automatically
+check for optional dependencies and enable corresponding functionality
+if those dependencies are found. If you wish to make a recipe that is
+more generally useful (e.g. publish the recipe in a layer for others to
+use), instead of hard-disabling the functionality, you can use the
+:term:`PACKAGECONFIG` variable to allow functionality and the
+corresponding dependencies to be enabled and disabled easily by other
+users of the recipe.
+
+Similar to build-time dependencies, you specify runtime dependencies
+through a variable -
+:term:`RDEPENDS`, which is
+package-specific. All variables that are package-specific need to have
+the name of the package added to the end as an override. Since the main
+package for a recipe has the same name as the recipe, and the recipe's
+name can be found through the
+``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}`` variable, then
+you specify the dependencies for the main package by setting
+``RDEPENDS:${PN}``. If the package were named ``${PN}-tools``, then you
+would set ``RDEPENDS:${PN}-tools``, and so forth.
+
+Some runtime dependencies will be set automatically at packaging time.
+These dependencies include any shared library dependencies (i.e. if a
+package "example" contains "libexample" and another package "mypackage"
+contains a binary that links to "libexample" then the OpenEmbedded build
+system will automatically add a runtime dependency to "mypackage" on
+"example"). See the
+":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`"
+section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual for further
+details.
+
+Configuring the Recipe
+======================
+
+Most software provides some means of setting build-time configuration
+options before compilation. Typically, setting these options is
+accomplished by running a configure script with options, or by modifying
+a build configuration file.
+
+.. note::
+
+   As of Yocto Project Release 1.7, some of the core recipes that
+   package binary configuration scripts now disable the scripts due to
+   the scripts previously requiring error-prone path substitution. The
+   OpenEmbedded build system uses ``pkg-config`` now, which is much more
+   robust. You can find a list of the ``*-config`` scripts that are disabled
+   in the ":ref:`migration-1.7-binary-configuration-scripts-disabled`" section
+   in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
+
+A major part of build-time configuration is about checking for
+build-time dependencies and possibly enabling optional functionality as
+a result. You need to specify any build-time dependencies for the
+software you are building in your recipe's
+:term:`DEPENDS` value, in terms of
+other recipes that satisfy those dependencies. You can often find
+build-time or runtime dependencies described in the software's
+documentation.
+
+The following list provides configuration items of note based on how
+your software is built:
+
+-  *Autotools:* If your source files have a ``configure.ac`` file, then
+   your software is built using Autotools. If this is the case, you just
+   need to modify the configuration.
+
+   When using Autotools, your recipe needs to inherit the
+   :ref:`ref-classes-autotools` class and it does not have to
+   contain a :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task. However, you might still want to
+   make some adjustments. For example, you can set :term:`EXTRA_OECONF` or
+   :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS` to pass any needed configure options that
+   are specific to the recipe.
+
+-  *CMake:* If your source files have a ``CMakeLists.txt`` file, then
+   your software is built using CMake. If this is the case, you just
+   need to modify the configuration.
+
+   When you use CMake, your recipe needs to inherit the
+   :ref:`ref-classes-cmake` class and it does not have to contain a
+   :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task. You can make some adjustments by setting
+   :term:`EXTRA_OECMAKE` to pass any needed configure options that are
+   specific to the recipe.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      If you need to install one or more custom CMake toolchain files
+      that are supplied by the application you are building, install the
+      files to ``${D}${datadir}/cmake/Modules`` during :ref:`ref-tasks-install`.
+
+-  *Other:* If your source files do not have a ``configure.ac`` or
+   ``CMakeLists.txt`` file, then your software is built using some
+   method other than Autotools or CMake. If this is the case, you
+   normally need to provide a
+   :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task
+   in your recipe unless, of course, there is nothing to configure.
+
+   Even if your software is not being built by Autotools or CMake, you
+   still might not need to deal with any configuration issues. You need
+   to determine if configuration is even a required step. You might need
+   to modify a Makefile or some configuration file used for the build to
+   specify necessary build options. Or, perhaps you might need to run a
+   provided, custom configure script with the appropriate options.
+
+   For the case involving a custom configure script, you would run
+   ``./configure --help`` and look for the options you need to set.
+
+Once configuration succeeds, it is always good practice to look at the
+``log.do_configure`` file to ensure that the appropriate options have
+been enabled and no additional build-time dependencies need to be added
+to :term:`DEPENDS`. For example, if the configure script reports that it
+found something not mentioned in :term:`DEPENDS`, or that it did not find
+something that it needed for some desired optional functionality, then
+you would need to add those to :term:`DEPENDS`. Looking at the log might
+also reveal items being checked for, enabled, or both that you do not
+want, or items not being found that are in :term:`DEPENDS`, in which case
+you would need to look at passing extra options to the configure script
+as needed. For reference information on configure options specific to
+the software you are building, you can consult the output of the
+``./configure --help`` command within ``${S}`` or consult the software's
+upstream documentation.
+
+Using Headers to Interface with Devices
+=======================================
+
+If your recipe builds an application that needs to communicate with some
+device or needs an API into a custom kernel, you will need to provide
+appropriate header files. Under no circumstances should you ever modify
+the existing
+``meta/recipes-kernel/linux-libc-headers/linux-libc-headers.inc`` file.
+These headers are used to build ``libc`` and must not be compromised
+with custom or machine-specific header information. If you customize
+``libc`` through modified headers all other applications that use
+``libc`` thus become affected.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Never copy and customize the ``libc`` header file (i.e.
+   ``meta/recipes-kernel/linux-libc-headers/linux-libc-headers.inc``).
+
+The correct way to interface to a device or custom kernel is to use a
+separate package that provides the additional headers for the driver or
+other unique interfaces. When doing so, your application also becomes
+responsible for creating a dependency on that specific provider.
+
+Consider the following:
+
+-  Never modify ``linux-libc-headers.inc``. Consider that file to be
+   part of the ``libc`` system, and not something you use to access the
+   kernel directly. You should access ``libc`` through specific ``libc``
+   calls.
+
+-  Applications that must talk directly to devices should either provide
+   necessary headers themselves, or establish a dependency on a special
+   headers package that is specific to that driver.
+
+For example, suppose you want to modify an existing header that adds I/O
+control or network support. If the modifications are used by a small
+number programs, providing a unique version of a header is easy and has
+little impact. When doing so, bear in mind the guidelines in the
+previous list.
+
+.. note::
+
+   If for some reason your changes need to modify the behavior of the ``libc``,
+   and subsequently all other applications on the system, use a ``.bbappend``
+   to modify the ``linux-kernel-headers.inc`` file. However, take care to not
+   make the changes machine specific.
+
+Consider a case where your kernel is older and you need an older
+``libc`` ABI. The headers installed by your recipe should still be a
+standard mainline kernel, not your own custom one.
+
+When you use custom kernel headers you need to get them from
+:term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR`,
+which is the directory with kernel headers that are required to build
+out-of-tree modules. Your recipe will also need the following::
+
+   do_configure[depends] += "virtual/kernel:do_shared_workdir"
+
+Compilation
+===========
+
+During a build, the :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task happens after source is fetched,
+unpacked, and configured. If the recipe passes through :ref:`ref-tasks-compile`
+successfully, nothing needs to be done.
+
+However, if the compile step fails, you need to diagnose the failure.
+Here are some common issues that cause failures.
+
+.. note::
+
+   For cases where improper paths are detected for configuration files
+   or for when libraries/headers cannot be found, be sure you are using
+   the more robust ``pkg-config``. See the note in section
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/new-recipe:Configuring the Recipe`" for additional information.
+
+-  *Parallel build failures:* These failures manifest themselves as
+   intermittent errors, or errors reporting that a file or directory
+   that should be created by some other part of the build process could
+   not be found. This type of failure can occur even if, upon
+   inspection, the file or directory does exist after the build has
+   failed, because that part of the build process happened in the wrong
+   order.
+
+   To fix the problem, you need to either satisfy the missing dependency
+   in the Makefile or whatever script produced the Makefile, or (as a
+   workaround) set :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` to an empty string::
+
+      PARALLEL_MAKE = ""
+
+   For information on parallel Makefile issues, see the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/debugging:debugging parallel make races`" section.
+
+-  *Improper host path usage:* This failure applies to recipes building
+   for the target or ":ref:`ref-classes-nativesdk`" only. The
+   failure occurs when the compilation process uses improper headers,
+   libraries, or other files from the host system when cross-compiling for
+   the target.
+
+   To fix the problem, examine the ``log.do_compile`` file to identify
+   the host paths being used (e.g. ``/usr/include``, ``/usr/lib``, and
+   so forth) and then either add configure options, apply a patch, or do
+   both.
+
+-  *Failure to find required libraries/headers:* If a build-time
+   dependency is missing because it has not been declared in
+   :term:`DEPENDS`, or because the
+   dependency exists but the path used by the build process to find the
+   file is incorrect and the configure step did not detect it, the
+   compilation process could fail. For either of these failures, the
+   compilation process notes that files could not be found. In these
+   cases, you need to go back and add additional options to the
+   configure script as well as possibly add additional build-time
+   dependencies to :term:`DEPENDS`.
+
+   Occasionally, it is necessary to apply a patch to the source to
+   ensure the correct paths are used. If you need to specify paths to
+   find files staged into the sysroot from other recipes, use the
+   variables that the OpenEmbedded build system provides (e.g.
+   :term:`STAGING_BINDIR`, :term:`STAGING_INCDIR`, :term:`STAGING_DATADIR`, and so
+   forth).
+
+Installing
+==========
+
+During :ref:`ref-tasks-install`, the task copies the built files along with their
+hierarchy to locations that would mirror their locations on the target
+device. The installation process copies files from the
+``${``\ :term:`S`\ ``}``,
+``${``\ :term:`B`\ ``}``, and
+``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}``
+directories to the ``${``\ :term:`D`\ ``}``
+directory to create the structure as it should appear on the target
+system.
+
+How your software is built affects what you must do to be sure your
+software is installed correctly. The following list describes what you
+must do for installation depending on the type of build system used by
+the software being built:
+
+-  *Autotools and CMake:* If the software your recipe is building uses
+   Autotools or CMake, the OpenEmbedded build system understands how to
+   install the software. Consequently, you do not have to have a
+   :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task as part of your recipe. You just need to make
+   sure the install portion of the build completes with no issues.
+   However, if you wish to install additional files not already being
+   installed by ``make install``, you should do this using a
+   ``do_install:append`` function using the install command as described
+   in the "Manual" bulleted item later in this list.
+
+-  *Other (using* ``make install``\ *)*: You need to define a :ref:`ref-tasks-install`
+   function in your recipe. The function should call
+   ``oe_runmake install`` and will likely need to pass in the
+   destination directory as well. How you pass that path is dependent on
+   how the ``Makefile`` being run is written (e.g. ``DESTDIR=${D}``,
+   ``PREFIX=${D}``, ``INSTALLROOT=${D}``, and so forth).
+
+   For an example recipe using ``make install``, see the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/new-recipe:building a makefile-based package`" section.
+
+-  *Manual:* You need to define a :ref:`ref-tasks-install` function in your
+   recipe. The function must first use ``install -d`` to create the
+   directories under
+   ``${``\ :term:`D`\ ``}``. Once the
+   directories exist, your function can use ``install`` to manually
+   install the built software into the directories.
+
+   You can find more information on ``install`` at
+   https://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/html_node/install-invocation.html.
+
+For the scenarios that do not use Autotools or CMake, you need to track
+the installation and diagnose and fix any issues until everything
+installs correctly. You need to look in the default location of
+``${D}``, which is ``${WORKDIR}/image``, to be sure your files have been
+installed correctly.
+
+.. note::
+
+   -  During the installation process, you might need to modify some of
+      the installed files to suit the target layout. For example, you
+      might need to replace hard-coded paths in an initscript with
+      values of variables provided by the build system, such as
+      replacing ``/usr/bin/`` with ``${bindir}``. If you do perform such
+      modifications during :ref:`ref-tasks-install`, be sure to modify the
+      destination file after copying rather than before copying.
+      Modifying after copying ensures that the build system can
+      re-execute :ref:`ref-tasks-install` if needed.
+
+   -  ``oe_runmake install``, which can be run directly or can be run
+      indirectly by the :ref:`ref-classes-autotools` and
+      :ref:`ref-classes-cmake` classes, runs ``make install`` in parallel.
+      Sometimes, a Makefile can have missing dependencies between targets that
+      can result in race conditions. If you experience intermittent failures
+      during :ref:`ref-tasks-install`, you might be able to work around them by
+      disabling parallel Makefile installs by adding the following to the
+      recipe::
+
+         PARALLEL_MAKEINST = ""
+
+      See :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST` for additional information.
+
+   -  If you need to install one or more custom CMake toolchain files
+      that are supplied by the application you are building, install the
+      files to ``${D}${datadir}/cmake/Modules`` during
+      :ref:`ref-tasks-install`.
+
+Enabling System Services
+========================
+
+If you want to install a service, which is a process that usually starts
+on boot and runs in the background, then you must include some
+additional definitions in your recipe.
+
+If you are adding services and the service initialization script or the
+service file itself is not installed, you must provide for that
+installation in your recipe using a ``do_install:append`` function. If
+your recipe already has a :ref:`ref-tasks-install` function, update the function
+near its end rather than adding an additional ``do_install:append``
+function.
+
+When you create the installation for your services, you need to
+accomplish what is normally done by ``make install``. In other words,
+make sure your installation arranges the output similar to how it is
+arranged on the target system.
+
+The OpenEmbedded build system provides support for starting services two
+different ways:
+
+-  *SysVinit:* SysVinit is a system and service manager that manages the
+   init system used to control the very basic functions of your system.
+   The init program is the first program started by the Linux kernel
+   when the system boots. Init then controls the startup, running and
+   shutdown of all other programs.
+
+   To enable a service using SysVinit, your recipe needs to inherit the
+   :ref:`ref-classes-update-rc.d` class. The class helps
+   facilitate safely installing the package on the target.
+
+   You will need to set the
+   :term:`INITSCRIPT_PACKAGES`,
+   :term:`INITSCRIPT_NAME`,
+   and
+   :term:`INITSCRIPT_PARAMS`
+   variables within your recipe.
+
+-  *systemd:* System Management Daemon (systemd) was designed to replace
+   SysVinit and to provide enhanced management of services. For more
+   information on systemd, see the systemd homepage at
+   https://freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/.
+
+   To enable a service using systemd, your recipe needs to inherit the
+   :ref:`ref-classes-systemd` class. See the ``systemd.bbclass`` file
+   located in your :term:`Source Directory` section for more information.
+
+Packaging
+=========
+
+Successful packaging is a combination of automated processes performed
+by the OpenEmbedded build system and some specific steps you need to
+take. The following list describes the process:
+
+-  *Splitting Files*: The :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task splits the files produced
+   by the recipe into logical components. Even software that produces a
+   single binary might still have debug symbols, documentation, and
+   other logical components that should be split out. The :ref:`ref-tasks-package`
+   task ensures that files are split up and packaged correctly.
+
+-  *Running QA Checks*: The :ref:`ref-classes-insane` class adds a
+   step to the package generation process so that output quality
+   assurance checks are generated by the OpenEmbedded build system. This
+   step performs a range of checks to be sure the build's output is free
+   of common problems that show up during runtime. For information on
+   these checks, see the :ref:`ref-classes-insane` class and
+   the ":ref:`ref-manual/qa-checks:qa error and warning messages`"
+   chapter in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
+
+-  *Hand-Checking Your Packages*: After you build your software, you
+   need to be sure your packages are correct. Examine the
+   ``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/packages-split``
+   directory and make sure files are where you expect them to be. If you
+   discover problems, you can set
+   :term:`PACKAGES`,
+   :term:`FILES`,
+   ``do_install(:append)``, and so forth as needed.
+
+-  *Splitting an Application into Multiple Packages*: If you need to
+   split an application into several packages, see the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/new-recipe:splitting an application into multiple packages`"
+   section for an example.
+
+-  *Installing a Post-Installation Script*: For an example showing how
+   to install a post-installation script, see the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/new-recipe:post-installation scripts`" section.
+
+-  *Marking Package Architecture*: Depending on what your recipe is
+   building and how it is configured, it might be important to mark the
+   packages produced as being specific to a particular machine, or to
+   mark them as not being specific to a particular machine or
+   architecture at all.
+
+   By default, packages apply to any machine with the same architecture
+   as the target machine. When a recipe produces packages that are
+   machine-specific (e.g. the
+   :term:`MACHINE` value is passed
+   into the configure script or a patch is applied only for a particular
+   machine), you should mark them as such by adding the following to the
+   recipe::
+
+      PACKAGE_ARCH = "${MACHINE_ARCH}"
+
+   On the other hand, if the recipe produces packages that do not
+   contain anything specific to the target machine or architecture at
+   all (e.g. recipes that simply package script files or configuration
+   files), you should use the :ref:`ref-classes-allarch` class to
+   do this for you by adding this to your recipe::
+
+      inherit allarch
+
+   Ensuring that the package architecture is correct is not critical
+   while you are doing the first few builds of your recipe. However, it
+   is important in order to ensure that your recipe rebuilds (or does
+   not rebuild) appropriately in response to changes in configuration,
+   and to ensure that you get the appropriate packages installed on the
+   target machine, particularly if you run separate builds for more than
+   one target machine.
+
+Sharing Files Between Recipes
+=============================
+
+Recipes often need to use files provided by other recipes on the build
+host. For example, an application linking to a common library needs
+access to the library itself and its associated headers. The way this
+access is accomplished is by populating a sysroot with files. Each
+recipe has two sysroots in its work directory, one for target files
+(``recipe-sysroot``) and one for files that are native to the build host
+(``recipe-sysroot-native``).
+
+.. note::
+
+   You could find the term "staging" used within the Yocto project
+   regarding files populating sysroots (e.g. the :term:`STAGING_DIR`
+   variable).
+
+Recipes should never populate the sysroot directly (i.e. write files
+into sysroot). Instead, files should be installed into standard
+locations during the
+:ref:`ref-tasks-install` task within
+the ``${``\ :term:`D`\ ``}`` directory. The
+reason for this limitation is that almost all files that populate the
+sysroot are cataloged in manifests in order to ensure the files can be
+removed later when a recipe is either modified or removed. Thus, the
+sysroot is able to remain free from stale files.
+
+A subset of the files installed by the :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task are
+used by the :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task as defined by the
+:term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` variable to automatically populate the sysroot. It
+is possible to modify the list of directories that populate the sysroot.
+The following example shows how you could add the ``/opt`` directory to
+the list of directories within a recipe::
+
+   SYSROOT_DIRS += "/opt"
+
+.. note::
+
+   The `/sysroot-only` is to be used by recipes that generate artifacts
+   that are not included in the target filesystem, allowing them to share
+   these artifacts without needing to use the :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`.
+
+For a more complete description of the :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot`
+task and its associated functions, see the
+:ref:`staging <ref-classes-staging>` class.
+
+Using Virtual Providers
+=======================
+
+Prior to a build, if you know that several different recipes provide the
+same functionality, you can use a virtual provider (i.e. ``virtual/*``)
+as a placeholder for the actual provider. The actual provider is
+determined at build-time.
+
+A common scenario where a virtual provider is used would be for the kernel
+recipe. Suppose you have three kernel recipes whose :term:`PN` values map to
+``kernel-big``, ``kernel-mid``, and ``kernel-small``. Furthermore, each of
+these recipes in some way uses a :term:`PROVIDES` statement that essentially
+identifies itself as being able to provide ``virtual/kernel``. Here is one way
+through the :ref:`ref-classes-kernel` class::
+
+   PROVIDES += "virtual/kernel"
+
+Any recipe that inherits the :ref:`ref-classes-kernel` class is
+going to utilize a :term:`PROVIDES` statement that identifies that recipe as
+being able to provide the ``virtual/kernel`` item.
+
+Now comes the time to actually build an image and you need a kernel
+recipe, but which one? You can configure your build to call out the
+kernel recipe you want by using the :term:`PREFERRED_PROVIDER` variable. As
+an example, consider the :yocto_git:`x86-base.inc
+</poky/tree/meta/conf/machine/include/x86/x86-base.inc>` include file, which is a
+machine (i.e. :term:`MACHINE`) configuration file. This include file is the
+reason all x86-based machines use the ``linux-yocto`` kernel. Here are the
+relevant lines from the include file::
+
+   PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/kernel ??= "linux-yocto"
+   PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto ??= "4.15%"
+
+When you use a virtual provider, you do not have to "hard code" a recipe
+name as a build dependency. You can use the
+:term:`DEPENDS` variable to state the
+build is dependent on ``virtual/kernel`` for example::
+
+   DEPENDS = "virtual/kernel"
+
+During the build, the OpenEmbedded build system picks
+the correct recipe needed for the ``virtual/kernel`` dependency based on
+the :term:`PREFERRED_PROVIDER` variable. If you want to use the small kernel
+mentioned at the beginning of this section, configure your build as
+follows::
+
+   PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/kernel ??= "kernel-small"
+
+.. note::
+
+   Any recipe that :term:`PROVIDES` a ``virtual/*`` item that is ultimately not
+   selected through :term:`PREFERRED_PROVIDER` does not get built. Preventing these
+   recipes from building is usually the desired behavior since this mechanism's
+   purpose is to select between mutually exclusive alternative providers.
+
+The following lists specific examples of virtual providers:
+
+-  ``virtual/kernel``: Provides the name of the kernel recipe to use
+   when building a kernel image.
+
+-  ``virtual/bootloader``: Provides the name of the bootloader to use
+   when building an image.
+
+-  ``virtual/libgbm``: Provides ``gbm.pc``.
+
+-  ``virtual/egl``: Provides ``egl.pc`` and possibly ``wayland-egl.pc``.
+
+-  ``virtual/libgl``: Provides ``gl.pc`` (i.e. libGL).
+
+-  ``virtual/libgles1``: Provides ``glesv1_cm.pc`` (i.e. libGLESv1_CM).
+
+-  ``virtual/libgles2``: Provides ``glesv2.pc`` (i.e. libGLESv2).
+
+.. note::
+
+   Virtual providers only apply to build time dependencies specified with
+   :term:`PROVIDES` and :term:`DEPENDS`. They do not apply to runtime
+   dependencies specified with :term:`RPROVIDES` and :term:`RDEPENDS`.
+
+Properly Versioning Pre-Release Recipes
+=======================================
+
+Sometimes the name of a recipe can lead to versioning problems when the
+recipe is upgraded to a final release. For example, consider the
+``irssi_0.8.16-rc1.bb`` recipe file in the list of example recipes in
+the ":ref:`dev-manual/new-recipe:storing and naming the recipe`" section.
+This recipe is at a release candidate stage (i.e. "rc1"). When the recipe is
+released, the recipe filename becomes ``irssi_0.8.16.bb``. The version
+change from ``0.8.16-rc1`` to ``0.8.16`` is seen as a decrease by the
+build system and package managers, so the resulting packages will not
+correctly trigger an upgrade.
+
+In order to ensure the versions compare properly, the recommended
+convention is to use a tilde (``~``) character as follows::
+
+  PV = 0.8.16~rc1
+
+This way ``0.8.16~rc1`` sorts before ``0.8.16``. See the
+":ref:`contributor-guide/recipe-style-guide:version policy`" section in the
+Yocto Project and OpenEmbedded Contributor Guide for more details about
+versioning code corresponding to a pre-release or to a specific Git commit.
+
+Post-Installation Scripts
+=========================
+
+Post-installation scripts run immediately after installing a package on
+the target or during image creation when a package is included in an
+image. To add a post-installation script to a package, add a
+``pkg_postinst:``\ `PACKAGENAME`\ ``()`` function to the recipe file
+(``.bb``) and replace `PACKAGENAME` with the name of the package you want
+to attach to the ``postinst`` script. To apply the post-installation
+script to the main package for the recipe, which is usually what is
+required, specify
+``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}`` in place of
+PACKAGENAME.
+
+A post-installation function has the following structure::
+
+   pkg_postinst:PACKAGENAME() {
+       # Commands to carry out
+   }
+
+The script defined in the post-installation function is called when the
+root filesystem is created. If the script succeeds, the package is
+marked as installed.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Any RPM post-installation script that runs on the target should
+   return a 0 exit code. RPM does not allow non-zero exit codes for
+   these scripts, and the RPM package manager will cause the package to
+   fail installation on the target.
+
+Sometimes it is necessary for the execution of a post-installation
+script to be delayed until the first boot. For example, the script might
+need to be executed on the device itself. To delay script execution
+until boot time, you must explicitly mark post installs to defer to the
+target. You can use ``pkg_postinst_ontarget()`` or call
+``postinst_intercept delay_to_first_boot`` from ``pkg_postinst()``. Any
+failure of a ``pkg_postinst()`` script (including exit 1) triggers an
+error during the
+:ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task.
+
+If you have recipes that use ``pkg_postinst`` function and they require
+the use of non-standard native tools that have dependencies during
+root filesystem construction, you need to use the
+:term:`PACKAGE_WRITE_DEPS`
+variable in your recipe to list these tools. If you do not use this
+variable, the tools might be missing and execution of the
+post-installation script is deferred until first boot. Deferring the
+script to the first boot is undesirable and impossible for read-only
+root filesystems.
+
+.. note::
+
+   There is equivalent support for pre-install, pre-uninstall, and post-uninstall
+   scripts by way of ``pkg_preinst``, ``pkg_prerm``, and ``pkg_postrm``,
+   respectively. These scrips work in exactly the same way as does
+   ``pkg_postinst`` with the exception that they run at different times. Also,
+   because of when they run, they are not applicable to being run at image
+   creation time like ``pkg_postinst``.
+
+Testing
+=======
+
+The final step for completing your recipe is to be sure that the
+software you built runs correctly. To accomplish runtime testing, add
+the build's output packages to your image and test them on the target.
+
+For information on how to customize your image by adding specific
+packages, see ":ref:`dev-manual/customizing-images:customizing images`" section.
+
+Examples
+========
+
+To help summarize how to write a recipe, this section provides some
+recipe examples given various scenarios:
+
+-  `Building a single .c file package`_
+
+-  `Building a Makefile-based package`_
+
+-  `Building an Autotooled package`_
+
+-  `Building a Meson package`_
+
+-  `Splitting an application into multiple packages`_
+
+-  `Packaging externally produced binaries`_
+
+Building a Single .c File Package
+---------------------------------
+
+Building an application from a single file that is stored locally (e.g. under
+``files``) requires a recipe that has the file listed in the :term:`SRC_URI`
+variable. Additionally, you need to manually write the :ref:`ref-tasks-compile`
+and :ref:`ref-tasks-install` tasks. The :term:`S` variable defines the
+directory containing the source code, which is set to :term:`WORKDIR` in this
+case --- the directory BitBake uses for the build::
+
+   SUMMARY = "Simple helloworld application"
+   SECTION = "examples"
+   LICENSE = "MIT"
+   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://${COMMON_LICENSE_DIR}/MIT;md5=0835ade698e0bcf8506ecda2f7b4f302"
+
+   SRC_URI = "file://helloworld.c"
+
+   S = "${WORKDIR}"
+
+   do_compile() {
+       ${CC} ${LDFLAGS} helloworld.c -o helloworld
+   }
+
+   do_install() {
+       install -d ${D}${bindir}
+       install -m 0755 helloworld ${D}${bindir}
+   }
+
+By default, the ``helloworld``, ``helloworld-dbg``, and ``helloworld-dev`` packages
+are built. For information on how to customize the packaging process, see the
+":ref:`dev-manual/new-recipe:splitting an application into multiple packages`"
+section.
+
+Building a Makefile-Based Package
+---------------------------------
+
+Applications built with GNU ``make`` require a recipe that has the source archive
+listed in :term:`SRC_URI`. You do not need to add a :ref:`ref-tasks-compile`
+step since by default BitBake starts the ``make`` command to compile the
+application. If you need additional ``make`` options, you should store them in
+the :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE` or :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS` variables. BitBake
+passes these options into the GNU ``make`` invocation. Note that a
+:ref:`ref-tasks-install` task is still required. Otherwise, BitBake runs an
+empty :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task by default.
+
+Some applications might require extra parameters to be passed to the
+compiler. For example, the application might need an additional header
+path. You can accomplish this by adding to the :term:`CFLAGS` variable. The
+following example shows this::
+
+   CFLAGS:prepend = "-I ${S}/include "
+
+In the following example, ``lz4`` is a makefile-based package::
+
+   SUMMARY = "Extremely Fast Compression algorithm"
+   DESCRIPTION = "LZ4 is a very fast lossless compression algorithm, providing compression speed at 400 MB/s per core, scalable with multi-cores CPU. It also features an extremely fast decoder, with speed in multiple GB/s per core, typically reaching RAM speed limits on multi-core systems."
+   HOMEPAGE = "https://github.com/lz4/lz4"
+
+   LICENSE = "BSD-2-Clause | GPL-2.0-only"
+   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://lib/LICENSE;md5=ebc2ea4814a64de7708f1571904b32cc \
+                       file://programs/COPYING;md5=b234ee4d69f5fce4486a80fdaf4a4263 \
+                       file://LICENSE;md5=d57c0d21cb917fb4e0af2454aa48b956 \
+                       "
+
+   PE = "1"
+
+   SRCREV = "d44371841a2f1728a3f36839fd4b7e872d0927d3"
+
+   SRC_URI = "git://github.com/lz4/lz4.git;branch=release;protocol=https \
+              file://CVE-2021-3520.patch \
+              "
+   UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX = "v(?P<pver>.*)"
+
+   S = "${WORKDIR}/git"
+
+   CVE_STATUS[CVE-2014-4715] = "fixed-version: Fixed in r118, which is larger than the current version"
+
+   EXTRA_OEMAKE = "PREFIX=${prefix} CC='${CC}' CFLAGS='${CFLAGS}' DESTDIR=${D} LIBDIR=${libdir} INCLUDEDIR=${includedir} BUILD_STATIC=no"
+
+   do_install() {
+           oe_runmake install
+   }
+
+   BBCLASSEXTEND = "native nativesdk"
+
+Building an Autotooled Package
+------------------------------
+
+Applications built with the Autotools such as ``autoconf`` and ``automake``
+require a recipe that has a source archive listed in :term:`SRC_URI` and also
+inherit the :ref:`ref-classes-autotools` class, which contains the definitions
+of all the steps needed to build an Autotool-based application. The result of
+the build is automatically packaged. And, if the application uses NLS for
+localization, packages with local information are generated (one package per
+language). Here is one example: (``hello_2.3.bb``)::
+
+   SUMMARY = "GNU Helloworld application"
+   SECTION = "examples"
+   LICENSE = "GPL-2.0-or-later"
+   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://COPYING;md5=751419260aa954499f7abaabaa882bbe"
+
+   SRC_URI = "${GNU_MIRROR}/hello/hello-${PV}.tar.gz"
+
+   inherit autotools gettext
+
+The variable :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM` is used to track source license changes
+as described in the ":ref:`dev-manual/licenses:tracking license changes`"
+section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. You can quickly
+create Autotool-based recipes in a manner similar to the previous example.
+
+.. _ref-building-meson-package:
+
+Building a Meson Package
+------------------------
+
+Applications built with the `Meson build system <https://mesonbuild.com/>`__
+just need a recipe that has sources described in :term:`SRC_URI` and inherits
+the :ref:`ref-classes-meson` class.
+
+The :oe_git:`ipcalc recipe </meta-openembedded/tree/meta-networking/recipes-support/ipcalc>`
+is a simple example of an application without dependencies::
+
+   SUMMARY = "Tool to assist in network address calculations for IPv4 and IPv6."
+   HOMEPAGE = "https://gitlab.com/ipcalc/ipcalc"
+
+   SECTION = "net"
+
+   LICENSE = "GPL-2.0-only"
+   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://COPYING;md5=b234ee4d69f5fce4486a80fdaf4a4263"
+
+   SRC_URI = "git://gitlab.com/ipcalc/ipcalc.git;protocol=https;branch=master"
+   SRCREV = "4c4261a47f355946ee74013d4f5d0494487cc2d6"
+
+   S = "${WORKDIR}/git"
+
+   inherit meson
+
+Applications with dependencies are likely to inherit the
+:ref:`ref-classes-pkgconfig` class, as ``pkg-config`` is the default method
+used by Meson to find dependencies and compile applications against them.
+
+Splitting an Application into Multiple Packages
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+You can use the variables :term:`PACKAGES` and :term:`FILES` to split an
+application into multiple packages.
+
+Here is an example that uses the ``libxpm`` recipe. By default,
+this recipe generates a single package that contains the library along
+with a few binaries. You can modify the recipe to split the binaries
+into separate packages::
+
+   require xorg-lib-common.inc
+
+   SUMMARY = "Xpm: X Pixmap extension library"
+   LICENSE = "MIT"
+   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://COPYING;md5=51f4270b012ecd4ab1a164f5f4ed6cf7"
+   DEPENDS += "libxext libsm libxt"
+   PE = "1"
+
+   XORG_PN = "libXpm"
+
+   PACKAGES =+ "sxpm cxpm"
+   FILES:cxpm = "${bindir}/cxpm"
+   FILES:sxpm = "${bindir}/sxpm"
+
+In the previous example, we want to ship the ``sxpm`` and ``cxpm``
+binaries in separate packages. Since ``bindir`` would be packaged into
+the main :term:`PN` package by default, we prepend the :term:`PACKAGES` variable
+so additional package names are added to the start of list. This results
+in the extra ``FILES:*`` variables then containing information that
+define which files and directories go into which packages. Files
+included by earlier packages are skipped by latter packages. Thus, the
+main :term:`PN` package does not include the above listed files.
+
+Packaging Externally Produced Binaries
+--------------------------------------
+
+Sometimes, you need to add pre-compiled binaries to an image. For
+example, suppose that there are binaries for proprietary code,
+created by a particular division of a company. Your part of the company
+needs to use those binaries as part of an image that you are building
+using the OpenEmbedded build system. Since you only have the binaries
+and not the source code, you cannot use a typical recipe that expects to
+fetch the source specified in
+:term:`SRC_URI` and then compile it.
+
+One method is to package the binaries and then install them as part of
+the image. Generally, it is not a good idea to package binaries since,
+among other things, it can hinder the ability to reproduce builds and
+could lead to compatibility problems with ABI in the future. However,
+sometimes you have no choice.
+
+The easiest solution is to create a recipe that uses the
+:ref:`ref-classes-bin-package` class and to be sure that you are using default
+locations for build artifacts.  In most cases, the
+:ref:`ref-classes-bin-package` class handles "skipping" the configure and
+compile steps as well as sets things up to grab packages from the appropriate
+area. In particular, this class sets ``noexec`` on both the
+:ref:`ref-tasks-configure` and :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` tasks, sets
+``FILES:${PN}`` to "/" so that it picks up all files, and sets up a
+:ref:`ref-tasks-install` task, which effectively copies all files from ``${S}``
+to ``${D}``. The :ref:`ref-classes-bin-package` class works well when the files
+extracted into ``${S}`` are already laid out in the way they should be laid out
+on the target. For more information on these variables, see the :term:`FILES`,
+:term:`PN`, :term:`S`, and :term:`D` variables in the Yocto Project Reference
+Manual's variable glossary.
+
+.. note::
+
+   -  Using :term:`DEPENDS` is a good
+      idea even for components distributed in binary form, and is often
+      necessary for shared libraries. For a shared library, listing the
+      library dependencies in :term:`DEPENDS` makes sure that the libraries
+      are available in the staging sysroot when other recipes link
+      against the library, which might be necessary for successful
+      linking.
+
+   -  Using :term:`DEPENDS` also allows runtime dependencies between
+      packages to be added automatically. See the
+      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`"
+      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual for more
+      information.
+
+If you cannot use the :ref:`ref-classes-bin-package` class, you need to be sure you are
+doing the following:
+
+-  Create a recipe where the
+   :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` and
+   :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` tasks do
+   nothing: It is usually sufficient to just not define these tasks in
+   the recipe, because the default implementations do nothing unless a
+   Makefile is found in
+   ``${``\ :term:`S`\ ``}``.
+
+   If ``${S}`` might contain a Makefile, or if you inherit some class
+   that replaces :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` and :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` with custom
+   versions, then you can use the
+   ``[``\ :ref:`noexec <bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:variable flags>`\ ``]``
+   flag to turn the tasks into no-ops, as follows::
+
+      do_configure[noexec] = "1"
+      do_compile[noexec] = "1"
+
+   Unlike :ref:`bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:deleting a task`,
+   using the flag preserves the dependency chain from the :ref:`ref-tasks-fetch`,
+   :ref:`ref-tasks-unpack`, and :ref:`ref-tasks-patch` tasks to the
+   :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task.
+
+-  Make sure your :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task installs the binaries
+   appropriately.
+
+-  Ensure that you set up :term:`FILES`
+   (usually
+   ``FILES:${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``) to
+   point to the files you have installed, which of course depends on
+   where you have installed them and whether those files are in
+   different locations than the defaults.
+
+Following Recipe Style Guidelines
+=================================
+
+When writing recipes, it is good to conform to existing style guidelines.
+See the ":doc:`../contributor-guide/recipe-style-guide`" in the Yocto Project
+and OpenEmbedded Contributor Guide for reference.
+
+It is common for existing recipes to deviate a bit from this style.
+However, aiming for at least a consistent style is a good idea. Some
+practices, such as omitting spaces around ``=`` operators in assignments
+or ordering recipe components in an erratic way, are widely seen as poor
+style.
+
+Recipe Syntax
+=============
+
+Understanding recipe file syntax is important for writing recipes. The
+following list overviews the basic items that make up a BitBake recipe
+file. For more complete BitBake syntax descriptions, see the
+":doc:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata`"
+chapter of the BitBake User Manual.
+
+-  *Variable Assignments and Manipulations:* Variable assignments allow
+   a value to be assigned to a variable. The assignment can be static
+   text or might include the contents of other variables. In addition to
+   the assignment, appending and prepending operations are also
+   supported.
+
+   The following example shows some of the ways you can use variables in
+   recipes::
+
+      S = "${WORKDIR}/postfix-${PV}"
+      CFLAGS += "-DNO_ASM"
+      CFLAGS:append = " --enable-important-feature"
+
+-  *Functions:* Functions provide a series of actions to be performed.
+   You usually use functions to override the default implementation of a
+   task function or to complement a default function (i.e. append or
+   prepend to an existing function). Standard functions use ``sh`` shell
+   syntax, although access to OpenEmbedded variables and internal
+   methods are also available.
+
+   Here is an example function from the ``sed`` recipe::
+
+      do_install () {
+          autotools_do_install
+          install -d ${D}${base_bindir}
+          mv ${D}${bindir}/sed ${D}${base_bindir}/sed
+          rmdir ${D}${bindir}/
+      }
+
+   It is
+   also possible to implement new functions that are called between
+   existing tasks as long as the new functions are not replacing or
+   complementing the default functions. You can implement functions in
+   Python instead of shell. Both of these options are not seen in the
+   majority of recipes.
+
+-  *Keywords:* BitBake recipes use only a few keywords. You use keywords
+   to include common functions (``inherit``), load parts of a recipe
+   from other files (``include`` and ``require``) and export variables
+   to the environment (``export``).
+
+   The following example shows the use of some of these keywords::
+
+      export POSTCONF = "${STAGING_BINDIR}/postconf"
+      inherit autoconf
+      require otherfile.inc
+
+-  *Comments (#):* Any lines that begin with the hash character (``#``)
+   are treated as comment lines and are ignored::
+
+      # This is a comment
+
+This next list summarizes the most important and most commonly used
+parts of the recipe syntax. For more information on these parts of the
+syntax, you can reference the
+":doc:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata`" chapter
+in the BitBake User Manual.
+
+-  *Line Continuation (\\):* Use the backward slash (``\``) character to
+   split a statement over multiple lines. Place the slash character at
+   the end of the line that is to be continued on the next line::
+
+       VAR = "A really long \
+              line"
+
+   .. note::
+
+      You cannot have any characters including spaces or tabs after the
+      slash character.
+
+-  *Using Variables (${VARNAME}):* Use the ``${VARNAME}`` syntax to
+   access the contents of a variable::
+
+      SRC_URI = "${SOURCEFORGE_MIRROR}/libpng/zlib-${PV}.tar.gz"
+
+   .. note::
+
+      It is important to understand that the value of a variable
+      expressed in this form does not get substituted automatically. The
+      expansion of these expressions happens on-demand later (e.g.
+      usually when a function that makes reference to the variable
+      executes). This behavior ensures that the values are most
+      appropriate for the context in which they are finally used. On the
+      rare occasion that you do need the variable expression to be
+      expanded immediately, you can use the
+      :=
+      operator instead of
+      =
+      when you make the assignment, but this is not generally needed.
+
+-  *Quote All Assignments ("value"):* Use double quotes around values in
+   all variable assignments (e.g. ``"value"``). Here is an example::
+
+      VAR1 = "${OTHERVAR}"
+      VAR2 = "The version is ${PV}"
+
+-  *Conditional Assignment (?=):* Conditional assignment is used to
+   assign a value to a variable, but only when the variable is currently
+   unset. Use the question mark followed by the equal sign (``?=``) to
+   make a "soft" assignment used for conditional assignment. Typically,
+   "soft" assignments are used in the ``local.conf`` file for variables
+   that are allowed to come through from the external environment.
+
+   Here is an example where ``VAR1`` is set to "New value" if it is
+   currently empty. However, if ``VAR1`` has already been set, it
+   remains unchanged::
+
+      VAR1 ?= "New value"
+
+   In this next example, ``VAR1`` is left with the value "Original value"::
+
+      VAR1 = "Original value"
+      VAR1 ?= "New value"
+
+-  *Appending (+=):* Use the plus character followed by the equals sign
+   (``+=``) to append values to existing variables.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      This operator adds a space between the existing content of the
+      variable and the new content.
+
+   Here is an example::
+
+      SRC_URI += "file://fix-makefile.patch"
+
+-  *Prepending (=+):* Use the equals sign followed by the plus character
+   (``=+``) to prepend values to existing variables.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      This operator adds a space between the new content and the
+      existing content of the variable.
+
+   Here is an example::
+
+      VAR =+ "Starts"
+
+-  *Appending (:append):* Use the ``:append`` operator to append values
+   to existing variables. This operator does not add any additional
+   space. Also, the operator is applied after all the ``+=``, and ``=+``
+   operators have been applied and after all ``=`` assignments have
+   occurred. This means that if ``:append`` is used in a recipe, it can
+   only be overridden by another layer using the special ``:remove``
+   operator, which in turn will prevent further layers from adding it back.
+
+   The following example shows the space being explicitly added to the
+   start to ensure the appended value is not merged with the existing
+   value::
+
+      CFLAGS:append = " --enable-important-feature"
+
+   You can also use
+   the ``:append`` operator with overrides, which results in the actions
+   only being performed for the specified target or machine::
+
+      CFLAGS:append:sh4 = " --enable-important-sh4-specific-feature"
+
+-  *Prepending (:prepend):* Use the ``:prepend`` operator to prepend
+   values to existing variables. This operator does not add any
+   additional space. Also, the operator is applied after all the ``+=``,
+   and ``=+`` operators have been applied and after all ``=``
+   assignments have occurred.
+
+   The following example shows the space being explicitly added to the
+   end to ensure the prepended value is not merged with the existing
+   value::
+
+      CFLAGS:prepend = "-I${S}/myincludes "
+
+   You can also use the
+   ``:prepend`` operator with overrides, which results in the actions
+   only being performed for the specified target or machine::
+
+      CFLAGS:prepend:sh4 = "-I${S}/myincludes "
+
+-  *Overrides:* You can use overrides to set a value conditionally,
+   typically based on how the recipe is being built. For example, to set
+   the :term:`KBRANCH` variable's
+   value to "standard/base" for any target
+   :term:`MACHINE`, except for
+   qemuarm where it should be set to "standard/arm-versatile-926ejs",
+   you would do the following::
+
+      KBRANCH = "standard/base"
+      KBRANCH:qemuarm = "standard/arm-versatile-926ejs"
+
+   Overrides are also used to separate
+   alternate values of a variable in other situations. For example, when
+   setting variables such as
+   :term:`FILES` and
+   :term:`RDEPENDS` that are
+   specific to individual packages produced by a recipe, you should
+   always use an override that specifies the name of the package.
+
+-  *Indentation:* Use spaces for indentation rather than tabs. For
+   shell functions, both currently work. However, it is a policy
+   decision of the Yocto Project to use tabs in shell functions. Realize
+   that some layers have a policy to use spaces for all indentation.
+
+-  *Using Python for Complex Operations:* For more advanced processing,
+   it is possible to use Python code during variable assignments (e.g.
+   search and replacement on a variable).
+
+   You indicate Python code using the ``${@python_code}`` syntax for the
+   variable assignment::
+
+      SRC_URI = "ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/src/zip${@d.getVar('PV',1).replace('.', '')}.tgz
+
+-  *Shell Function Syntax:* Write shell functions as if you were writing
+   a shell script when you describe a list of actions to take. You
+   should ensure that your script works with a generic ``sh`` and that
+   it does not require any ``bash`` or other shell-specific
+   functionality. The same considerations apply to various system
+   utilities (e.g. ``sed``, ``grep``, ``awk``, and so forth) that you
+   might wish to use. If in doubt, you should check with multiple
+   implementations --- including those from BusyBox.
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/packages.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/packages.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e5028fffdc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/packages.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,1250 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Working with Packages
+*********************
+
+This section describes a few tasks that involve packages:
+
+-  :ref:`dev-manual/packages:excluding packages from an image`
+
+-  :ref:`dev-manual/packages:incrementing a package version`
+
+-  :ref:`dev-manual/packages:handling optional module packaging`
+
+-  :ref:`dev-manual/packages:using runtime package management`
+
+-  :ref:`dev-manual/packages:generating and using signed packages`
+
+-  :ref:`Setting up and running package test
+   (ptest) <dev-manual/packages:testing packages with ptest>`
+
+-  :ref:`dev-manual/packages:creating node package manager (npm) packages`
+
+-  :ref:`dev-manual/packages:adding custom metadata to packages`
+
+Excluding Packages from an Image
+================================
+
+You might find it necessary to prevent specific packages from being
+installed into an image. If so, you can use several variables to direct
+the build system to essentially ignore installing recommended packages
+or to not install a package at all.
+
+The following list introduces variables you can use to prevent packages
+from being installed into your image. Each of these variables only works
+with IPK and RPM package types, not for Debian packages.
+Also, you can use these variables from your ``local.conf`` file
+or attach them to a specific image recipe by using a recipe name
+override. For more detail on the variables, see the descriptions in the
+Yocto Project Reference Manual's glossary chapter.
+
+-  :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS`:
+   Use this variable to specify "recommended-only" packages that you do
+   not want installed.
+
+-  :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS`:
+   Use this variable to prevent all "recommended-only" packages from
+   being installed.
+
+-  :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE`:
+   Use this variable to prevent specific packages from being installed
+   regardless of whether they are "recommended-only" or not. You need to
+   realize that the build process could fail with an error when you
+   prevent the installation of a package whose presence is required by
+   an installed package.
+
+Incrementing a Package Version
+==============================
+
+This section provides some background on how binary package versioning
+is accomplished and presents some of the services, variables, and
+terminology involved.
+
+In order to understand binary package versioning, you need to consider
+the following:
+
+-  Binary Package: The binary package that is eventually built and
+   installed into an image.
+
+-  Binary Package Version: The binary package version is composed of two
+   components --- a version and a revision.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      Technically, a third component, the "epoch" (i.e. :term:`PE`) is involved
+      but this discussion for the most part ignores :term:`PE`.
+
+   The version and revision are taken from the
+   :term:`PV` and
+   :term:`PR` variables, respectively.
+
+-  :term:`PV`: The recipe version. :term:`PV` represents the version of the
+   software being packaged. Do not confuse :term:`PV` with the binary
+   package version.
+
+-  :term:`PR`: The recipe revision.
+
+-  :term:`SRCPV`: The OpenEmbedded
+   build system uses this string to help define the value of :term:`PV` when
+   the source code revision needs to be included in it.
+
+-  :yocto_wiki:`PR Service </PR_Service>`: A
+   network-based service that helps automate keeping package feeds
+   compatible with existing package manager applications such as RPM,
+   APT, and OPKG.
+
+Whenever the binary package content changes, the binary package version
+must change. Changing the binary package version is accomplished by
+changing or "bumping" the :term:`PR` and/or :term:`PV` values. Increasing these
+values occurs one of two ways:
+
+-  Automatically using a Package Revision Service (PR Service).
+
+-  Manually incrementing the :term:`PR` and/or :term:`PV` variables.
+
+Given a primary challenge of any build system and its users is how to
+maintain a package feed that is compatible with existing package manager
+applications such as RPM, APT, and OPKG, using an automated system is
+much preferred over a manual system. In either system, the main
+requirement is that binary package version numbering increases in a
+linear fashion and that there is a number of version components that
+support that linear progression. For information on how to ensure
+package revisioning remains linear, see the
+":ref:`dev-manual/packages:automatically incrementing a package version number`"
+section.
+
+The following three sections provide related information on the PR
+Service, the manual method for "bumping" :term:`PR` and/or :term:`PV`, and on
+how to ensure binary package revisioning remains linear.
+
+Working With a PR Service
+-------------------------
+
+As mentioned, attempting to maintain revision numbers in the
+:term:`Metadata` is error prone, inaccurate,
+and causes problems for people submitting recipes. Conversely, the PR
+Service automatically generates increasing numbers, particularly the
+revision field, which removes the human element.
+
+.. note::
+
+   For additional information on using a PR Service, you can see the
+   :yocto_wiki:`PR Service </PR_Service>` wiki page.
+
+The Yocto Project uses variables in order of decreasing priority to
+facilitate revision numbering (i.e.
+:term:`PE`,
+:term:`PV`, and
+:term:`PR` for epoch, version, and
+revision, respectively). The values are highly dependent on the policies
+and procedures of a given distribution and package feed.
+
+Because the OpenEmbedded build system uses
+":ref:`signatures <overview-manual/concepts:checksums (signatures)>`", which are
+unique to a given build, the build system knows when to rebuild
+packages. All the inputs into a given task are represented by a
+signature, which can trigger a rebuild when different. Thus, the build
+system itself does not rely on the :term:`PR`, :term:`PV`, and :term:`PE` numbers to
+trigger a rebuild. The signatures, however, can be used to generate
+these values.
+
+The PR Service works with both ``OEBasic`` and ``OEBasicHash``
+generators. The value of :term:`PR` bumps when the checksum changes and the
+different generator mechanisms change signatures under different
+circumstances.
+
+As implemented, the build system includes values from the PR Service
+into the :term:`PR` field as an addition using the form "``.x``" so ``r0``
+becomes ``r0.1``, ``r0.2`` and so forth. This scheme allows existing
+:term:`PR` values to be used for whatever reasons, which include manual
+:term:`PR` bumps, should it be necessary.
+
+By default, the PR Service is not enabled or running. Thus, the packages
+generated are just "self consistent". The build system adds and removes
+packages and there are no guarantees about upgrade paths but images will
+be consistent and correct with the latest changes.
+
+The simplest form for a PR Service is for a single host development system
+that builds the package feed (building system). For this scenario, you can
+enable a local PR Service by setting :term:`PRSERV_HOST` in your
+``local.conf`` file in the :term:`Build Directory`::
+
+   PRSERV_HOST = "localhost:0"
+
+Once the service is started, packages will automatically
+get increasing :term:`PR` values and BitBake takes care of starting and
+stopping the server.
+
+If you have a more complex setup where multiple host development systems
+work against a common, shared package feed, you have a single PR Service
+running and it is connected to each building system. For this scenario,
+you need to start the PR Service using the ``bitbake-prserv`` command::
+
+   bitbake-prserv --host ip --port port --start
+
+In addition to
+hand-starting the service, you need to update the ``local.conf`` file of
+each building system as described earlier so each system points to the
+server and port.
+
+It is also recommended you use build history, which adds some sanity
+checks to binary package versions, in conjunction with the server that
+is running the PR Service. To enable build history, add the following to
+each building system's ``local.conf`` file::
+
+   # It is recommended to activate "buildhistory" for testing the PR service
+   INHERIT += "buildhistory"
+   BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT = "1"
+
+For information on build
+history, see the
+":ref:`dev-manual/build-quality:maintaining build output quality`" section.
+
+.. note::
+
+   The OpenEmbedded build system does not maintain :term:`PR` information as
+   part of the shared state (sstate) packages. If you maintain an sstate
+   feed, it's expected that either all your building systems that
+   contribute to the sstate feed use a shared PR service, or you do not
+   run a PR service on any of your building systems.
+
+   That's because if you had multiple machines sharing a PR service but
+   not their sstate feed, you could end up with "diverging" hashes for
+   the same output artefacts. When presented to the share PR service,
+   each would be considered as new and would increase the revision
+   number, causing many unnecessary package upgrades.
+
+   For more information on shared state, see the
+   ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:shared state cache`"
+   section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
+
+Manually Bumping PR
+-------------------
+
+The alternative to setting up a PR Service is to manually "bump" the
+:term:`PR` variable.
+
+If a committed change results in changing the package output, then the
+value of the :term:`PR` variable needs to be increased (or "bumped") as part of
+that commit. For new recipes you should add the :term:`PR` variable and set
+its initial value equal to "r0", which is the default. Even though the
+default value is "r0", the practice of adding it to a new recipe makes
+it harder to forget to bump the variable when you make changes to the
+recipe in future.
+
+Usually, version increases occur only to binary packages. However, if
+for some reason :term:`PV` changes but does not increase, you can increase
+the :term:`PE` variable (Package Epoch). The :term:`PE` variable defaults to
+"0".
+
+Binary package version numbering strives to follow the `Debian Version
+Field Policy
+Guidelines <https://www.debian.org/doc/debian-policy/ch-controlfields.html>`__.
+These guidelines define how versions are compared and what "increasing"
+a version means.
+
+Automatically Incrementing a Package Version Number
+---------------------------------------------------
+
+When fetching a repository, BitBake uses the
+:term:`SRCREV` variable to determine
+the specific source code revision from which to build. You set the
+:term:`SRCREV` variable to
+:term:`AUTOREV` to cause the
+OpenEmbedded build system to automatically use the latest revision of
+the software::
+
+   SRCREV = "${AUTOREV}"
+
+Furthermore, you need to reference :term:`SRCPV` in :term:`PV` in order to
+automatically update the version whenever the revision of the source
+code changes. Here is an example::
+
+   PV = "1.0+git${SRCPV}"
+
+The OpenEmbedded build system substitutes :term:`SRCPV` with the following:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+   AUTOINC+source_code_revision
+
+The build system replaces the ``AUTOINC``
+with a number. The number used depends on the state of the PR Service:
+
+-  If PR Service is enabled, the build system increments the number,
+   which is similar to the behavior of
+   :term:`PR`. This behavior results in
+   linearly increasing package versions, which is desirable. Here is an
+   example:
+
+   .. code-block:: none
+
+      hello-world-git_0.0+git0+b6558dd387-r0.0_armv7a-neon.ipk
+      hello-world-git_0.0+git1+dd2f5c3565-r0.0_armv7a-neon.ipk
+
+-  If PR Service is not enabled, the build system replaces the
+   ``AUTOINC`` placeholder with zero (i.e. "0"). This results in
+   changing the package version since the source revision is included.
+   However, package versions are not increased linearly. Here is an
+   example:
+
+   .. code-block:: none
+
+      hello-world-git_0.0+git0+b6558dd387-r0.0_armv7a-neon.ipk
+      hello-world-git_0.0+git0+dd2f5c3565-r0.0_armv7a-neon.ipk
+
+In summary, the OpenEmbedded build system does not track the history of
+binary package versions for this purpose. ``AUTOINC``, in this case, is
+comparable to :term:`PR`. If PR server is not enabled, ``AUTOINC`` in the
+package version is simply replaced by "0". If PR server is enabled, the
+build system keeps track of the package versions and bumps the number
+when the package revision changes.
+
+Handling Optional Module Packaging
+==================================
+
+Many pieces of software split functionality into optional modules (or
+plugins) and the plugins that are built might depend on configuration
+options. To avoid having to duplicate the logic that determines what
+modules are available in your recipe or to avoid having to package each
+module by hand, the OpenEmbedded build system provides functionality to
+handle module packaging dynamically.
+
+To handle optional module packaging, you need to do two things:
+
+-  Ensure the module packaging is actually done.
+
+-  Ensure that any dependencies on optional modules from other recipes
+   are satisfied by your recipe.
+
+Making Sure the Packaging is Done
+---------------------------------
+
+To ensure the module packaging actually gets done, you use the
+``do_split_packages`` function within the ``populate_packages`` Python
+function in your recipe. The ``do_split_packages`` function searches for
+a pattern of files or directories under a specified path and creates a
+package for each one it finds by appending to the
+:term:`PACKAGES` variable and
+setting the appropriate values for ``FILES:packagename``,
+``RDEPENDS:packagename``, ``DESCRIPTION:packagename``, and so forth.
+Here is an example from the ``lighttpd`` recipe::
+
+   python populate_packages:prepend () {
+       lighttpd_libdir = d.expand('${libdir}')
+       do_split_packages(d, lighttpd_libdir, '^mod_(.*).so$',
+                        'lighttpd-module-%s', 'Lighttpd module for %s',
+                         extra_depends='')
+   }
+
+The previous example specifies a number of things in the call to
+``do_split_packages``.
+
+-  A directory within the files installed by your recipe through
+   :ref:`ref-tasks-install` in which to search.
+
+-  A regular expression used to match module files in that directory. In
+   the example, note the parentheses () that mark the part of the
+   expression from which the module name should be derived.
+
+-  A pattern to use for the package names.
+
+-  A description for each package.
+
+-  An empty string for ``extra_depends``, which disables the default
+   dependency on the main ``lighttpd`` package. Thus, if a file in
+   ``${libdir}`` called ``mod_alias.so`` is found, a package called
+   ``lighttpd-module-alias`` is created for it and the
+   :term:`DESCRIPTION` is set to
+   "Lighttpd module for alias".
+
+Often, packaging modules is as simple as the previous example. However,
+there are more advanced options that you can use within
+``do_split_packages`` to modify its behavior. And, if you need to, you
+can add more logic by specifying a hook function that is called for each
+package. It is also perfectly acceptable to call ``do_split_packages``
+multiple times if you have more than one set of modules to package.
+
+For more examples that show how to use ``do_split_packages``, see the
+``connman.inc`` file in the ``meta/recipes-connectivity/connman/``
+directory of the ``poky`` :ref:`source repository <overview-manual/development-environment:yocto project source repositories>`. You can
+also find examples in ``meta/classes-recipe/kernel.bbclass``.
+
+Here is a reference that shows ``do_split_packages`` mandatory and
+optional arguments::
+
+   Mandatory arguments
+
+   root
+      The path in which to search
+   file_regex
+      Regular expression to match searched files.
+      Use parentheses () to mark the part of this
+      expression that should be used to derive the
+      module name (to be substituted where %s is
+      used in other function arguments as noted below)
+   output_pattern
+      Pattern to use for the package names. Must
+      include %s.
+   description
+      Description to set for each package. Must
+      include %s.
+
+   Optional arguments
+
+   postinst
+      Postinstall script to use for all packages
+      (as a string)
+   recursive
+      True to perform a recursive search --- default
+      False
+   hook
+      A hook function to be called for every match.
+      The function will be called with the following
+      arguments (in the order listed):
+
+      f
+         Full path to the file/directory match
+      pkg
+         The package name
+      file_regex
+         As above
+      output_pattern
+         As above
+      modulename
+         The module name derived using file_regex
+   extra_depends
+      Extra runtime dependencies (RDEPENDS) to be
+      set for all packages. The default value of None
+      causes a dependency on the main package
+      (${PN}) --- if you do not want this, pass empty
+      string '' for this parameter.
+   aux_files_pattern
+      Extra item(s) to be added to FILES for each
+      package. Can be a single string item or a list
+      of strings for multiple items. Must include %s.
+   postrm
+      postrm script to use for all packages (as a
+      string)
+   allow_dirs
+      True to allow directories to be matched -
+      default False
+   prepend
+      If True, prepend created packages to PACKAGES
+      instead of the default False which appends them
+   match_path
+      match file_regex on the whole relative path to
+      the root rather than just the filename
+   aux_files_pattern_verbatim
+      Extra item(s) to be added to FILES for each
+      package, using the actual derived module name
+      rather than converting it to something legal
+      for a package name. Can be a single string item
+      or a list of strings for multiple items. Must
+      include %s.
+   allow_links
+      True to allow symlinks to be matched --- default
+      False
+   summary
+      Summary to set for each package. Must include %s;
+      defaults to description if not set.
+
+
+
+Satisfying Dependencies
+-----------------------
+
+The second part for handling optional module packaging is to ensure that
+any dependencies on optional modules from other recipes are satisfied by
+your recipe. You can be sure these dependencies are satisfied by using
+the :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`
+variable. Here is an example that continues with the ``lighttpd`` recipe
+shown earlier::
+
+   PACKAGES_DYNAMIC = "lighttpd-module-.*"
+
+The name
+specified in the regular expression can of course be anything. In this
+example, it is ``lighttpd-module-`` and is specified as the prefix to
+ensure that any :term:`RDEPENDS` and
+:term:`RRECOMMENDS` on a package
+name starting with the prefix are satisfied during build time. If you
+are using ``do_split_packages`` as described in the previous section,
+the value you put in :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` should correspond to the name
+pattern specified in the call to ``do_split_packages``.
+
+Using Runtime Package Management
+================================
+
+During a build, BitBake always transforms a recipe into one or more
+packages. For example, BitBake takes the ``bash`` recipe and produces a
+number of packages (e.g. ``bash``, ``bash-bashbug``,
+``bash-completion``, ``bash-completion-dbg``, ``bash-completion-dev``,
+``bash-completion-extra``, ``bash-dbg``, and so forth). Not all
+generated packages are included in an image.
+
+In several situations, you might need to update, add, remove, or query
+the packages on a target device at runtime (i.e. without having to
+generate a new image). Examples of such situations include:
+
+-  You want to provide in-the-field updates to deployed devices (e.g.
+   security updates).
+
+-  You want to have a fast turn-around development cycle for one or more
+   applications that run on your device.
+
+-  You want to temporarily install the "debug" packages of various
+   applications on your device so that debugging can be greatly improved
+   by allowing access to symbols and source debugging.
+
+-  You want to deploy a more minimal package selection of your device
+   but allow in-the-field updates to add a larger selection for
+   customization.
+
+In all these situations, you have something similar to a more
+traditional Linux distribution in that in-field devices are able to
+receive pre-compiled packages from a server for installation or update.
+Being able to install these packages on a running, in-field device is
+what is termed "runtime package management".
+
+In order to use runtime package management, you need a host or server
+machine that serves up the pre-compiled packages plus the required
+metadata. You also need package manipulation tools on the target. The
+build machine is a likely candidate to act as the server. However, that
+machine does not necessarily have to be the package server. The build
+machine could push its artifacts to another machine that acts as the
+server (e.g. Internet-facing). In fact, doing so is advantageous for a
+production environment as getting the packages away from the development
+system's :term:`Build Directory` prevents accidental overwrites.
+
+A simple build that targets just one device produces more than one
+package database. In other words, the packages produced by a build are
+separated out into a couple of different package groupings based on
+criteria such as the target's CPU architecture, the target board, or the
+C library used on the target. For example, a build targeting the
+``qemux86`` device produces the following three package databases:
+``noarch``, ``i586``, and ``qemux86``. If you wanted your ``qemux86``
+device to be aware of all the packages that were available to it, you
+would need to point it to each of these databases individually. In a
+similar way, a traditional Linux distribution usually is configured to
+be aware of a number of software repositories from which it retrieves
+packages.
+
+Using runtime package management is completely optional and not required
+for a successful build or deployment in any way. But if you want to make
+use of runtime package management, you need to do a couple things above
+and beyond the basics. The remainder of this section describes what you
+need to do.
+
+Build Considerations
+--------------------
+
+This section describes build considerations of which you need to be
+aware in order to provide support for runtime package management.
+
+When BitBake generates packages, it needs to know what format or formats
+to use. In your configuration, you use the
+:term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES`
+variable to specify the format:
+
+#. Open the ``local.conf`` file inside your :term:`Build Directory` (e.g.
+   ``poky/build/conf/local.conf``).
+
+#. Select the desired package format as follows::
+
+      PACKAGE_CLASSES ?= "package_packageformat"
+
+   where packageformat can be "ipk", "rpm",
+   "deb", or "tar" which are the supported package formats.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      Because the Yocto Project supports four different package formats,
+      you can set the variable with more than one argument. However, the
+      OpenEmbedded build system only uses the first argument when
+      creating an image or Software Development Kit (SDK).
+
+If you would like your image to start off with a basic package database
+containing the packages in your current build as well as to have the
+relevant tools available on the target for runtime package management,
+you can include "package-management" in the
+:term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`
+variable. Including "package-management" in this configuration variable
+ensures that when the image is assembled for your target, the image
+includes the currently-known package databases as well as the
+target-specific tools required for runtime package management to be
+performed on the target. However, this is not strictly necessary. You
+could start your image off without any databases but only include the
+required on-target package tool(s). As an example, you could include
+"opkg" in your
+:term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable
+if you are using the IPK package format. You can then initialize your
+target's package database(s) later once your image is up and running.
+
+Whenever you perform any sort of build step that can potentially
+generate a package or modify existing package, it is always a good idea
+to re-generate the package index after the build by using the following
+command::
+
+   $ bitbake package-index
+
+It might be tempting to build the
+package and the package index at the same time with a command such as
+the following::
+
+   $ bitbake some-package package-index
+
+Do not do this as
+BitBake does not schedule the package index for after the completion of
+the package you are building. Consequently, you cannot be sure of the
+package index including information for the package you just built.
+Thus, be sure to run the package update step separately after building
+any packages.
+
+You can use the
+:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`,
+:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`,
+and
+:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS`
+variables to pre-configure target images to use a package feed. If you
+do not define these variables, then manual steps as described in the
+subsequent sections are necessary to configure the target. You should
+set these variables before building the image in order to produce a
+correctly configured image.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Your image will need enough free storage space to run package upgrades,
+   especially if many of them need to be downloaded at the same time.
+   You should make sure images are created with enough free space
+   by setting the :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE` variable.
+
+When your build is complete, your packages reside in the
+``${TMPDIR}/deploy/packageformat`` directory. For example, if
+``${``\ :term:`TMPDIR`\ ``}`` is
+``tmp`` and your selected package type is RPM, then your RPM packages
+are available in ``tmp/deploy/rpm``.
+
+Host or Server Machine Setup
+----------------------------
+
+Although other protocols are possible, a server using HTTP typically
+serves packages. If you want to use HTTP, then set up and configure a
+web server such as Apache 2, lighttpd, or Python web server on the
+machine serving the packages.
+
+To keep things simple, this section describes how to set up a
+Python web server to share package feeds from the developer's
+machine. Although this server might not be the best for a production
+environment, the setup is simple and straight forward. Should you want
+to use a different server more suited for production (e.g. Apache 2,
+Lighttpd, or Nginx), take the appropriate steps to do so.
+
+From within the :term:`Build Directory` where you have built an image based on
+your packaging choice (i.e. the :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` setting), simply start
+the server. The following example assumes a :term:`Build Directory` of ``poky/build``
+and a :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` setting of ":ref:`ref-classes-package_rpm`"::
+
+   $ cd poky/build/tmp/deploy/rpm
+   $ python3 -m http.server
+
+Target Setup
+------------
+
+Setting up the target differs depending on the package management
+system. This section provides information for RPM, IPK, and DEB.
+
+Using RPM
+~~~~~~~~~
+
+The :wikipedia:`Dandified Packaging <DNF_(software)>` (DNF) performs
+runtime package management of RPM packages. In order to use DNF for
+runtime package management, you must perform an initial setup on the
+target machine for cases where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_*`` variables were not
+set as part of the image that is running on the target. This means if
+you built your image and did not use these variables as part of the
+build and your image is now running on the target, you need to perform
+the steps in this section if you want to use runtime package management.
+
+.. note::
+
+   For information on the ``PACKAGE_FEED_*`` variables, see
+   :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`, :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`, and
+   :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS` in the Yocto Project Reference Manual variables
+   glossary.
+
+On the target, you must inform DNF that package databases are available.
+You do this by creating a file named
+``/etc/yum.repos.d/oe-packages.repo`` and defining the ``oe-packages``.
+
+As an example, assume the target is able to use the following package
+databases: ``all``, ``i586``, and ``qemux86`` from a server named
+``my.server``. The specifics for setting up the web server are up to
+you. The critical requirement is that the URIs in the target repository
+configuration point to the correct remote location for the feeds.
+
+.. note::
+
+   For development purposes, you can point the web server to the build
+   system's ``deploy`` directory. However, for production use, it is better to
+   copy the package directories to a location outside of the build area and use
+   that location. Doing so avoids situations where the build system
+   overwrites or changes the ``deploy`` directory.
+
+When telling DNF where to look for the package databases, you must
+declare individual locations per architecture or a single location used
+for all architectures. You cannot do both:
+
+-  *Create an Explicit List of Architectures:* Define individual base
+   URLs to identify where each package database is located:
+
+   .. code-block:: none
+
+      [oe-packages]
+      baseurl=http://my.server/rpm/i586  http://my.server/rpm/qemux86 http://my.server/rpm/all
+
+   This example
+   informs DNF about individual package databases for all three
+   architectures.
+
+-  *Create a Single (Full) Package Index:* Define a single base URL that
+   identifies where a full package database is located::
+
+      [oe-packages]
+      baseurl=http://my.server/rpm
+
+   This example informs DNF about a single
+   package database that contains all the package index information for
+   all supported architectures.
+
+Once you have informed DNF where to find the package databases, you need
+to fetch them:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+   # dnf makecache
+
+DNF is now able to find, install, and
+upgrade packages from the specified repository or repositories.
+
+.. note::
+
+   See the `DNF documentation <https://dnf.readthedocs.io/en/latest/>`__ for
+   additional information.
+
+Using IPK
+~~~~~~~~~
+
+The ``opkg`` application performs runtime package management of IPK
+packages. You must perform an initial setup for ``opkg`` on the target
+machine if the
+:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`,
+:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`,
+and
+:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS`
+variables have not been set or the target image was built before the
+variables were set.
+
+The ``opkg`` application uses configuration files to find available
+package databases. Thus, you need to create a configuration file inside
+the ``/etc/opkg/`` directory, which informs ``opkg`` of any repository
+you want to use.
+
+As an example, suppose you are serving packages from a ``ipk/``
+directory containing the ``i586``, ``all``, and ``qemux86`` databases
+through an HTTP server named ``my.server``. On the target, create a
+configuration file (e.g. ``my_repo.conf``) inside the ``/etc/opkg/``
+directory containing the following:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+   src/gz all http://my.server/ipk/all
+   src/gz i586 http://my.server/ipk/i586
+   src/gz qemux86 http://my.server/ipk/qemux86
+
+Next, instruct ``opkg`` to fetch the
+repository information:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+   # opkg update
+
+The ``opkg`` application is now able to find, install, and upgrade packages
+from the specified repository.
+
+Using DEB
+~~~~~~~~~
+
+The ``apt`` application performs runtime package management of DEB
+packages. This application uses a source list file to find available
+package databases. You must perform an initial setup for ``apt`` on the
+target machine if the
+:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`,
+:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`,
+and
+:term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS`
+variables have not been set or the target image was built before the
+variables were set.
+
+To inform ``apt`` of the repository you want to use, you might create a
+list file (e.g. ``my_repo.list``) inside the
+``/etc/apt/sources.list.d/`` directory. As an example, suppose you are
+serving packages from a ``deb/`` directory containing the ``i586``,
+``all``, and ``qemux86`` databases through an HTTP server named
+``my.server``. The list file should contain:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+   deb http://my.server/deb/all ./
+   deb http://my.server/deb/i586 ./
+   deb http://my.server/deb/qemux86 ./
+
+Next, instruct the ``apt`` application
+to fetch the repository information:
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+  $ sudo apt update
+
+After this step,
+``apt`` is able to find, install, and upgrade packages from the
+specified repository.
+
+Generating and Using Signed Packages
+====================================
+
+In order to add security to RPM packages used during a build, you can
+take steps to securely sign them. Once a signature is verified, the
+OpenEmbedded build system can use the package in the build. If security
+fails for a signed package, the build system stops the build.
+
+This section describes how to sign RPM packages during a build and how
+to use signed package feeds (repositories) when doing a build.
+
+Signing RPM Packages
+--------------------
+
+To enable signing RPM packages, you must set up the following
+configurations in either your ``local.config`` or ``distro.config``
+file::
+
+   # Inherit sign_rpm.bbclass to enable signing functionality
+   INHERIT += " sign_rpm"
+   # Define the GPG key that will be used for signing.
+   RPM_GPG_NAME = "key_name"
+   # Provide passphrase for the key
+   RPM_GPG_PASSPHRASE = "passphrase"
+
+.. note::
+
+   Be sure to supply appropriate values for both `key_name` and
+   `passphrase`.
+
+Aside from the ``RPM_GPG_NAME`` and ``RPM_GPG_PASSPHRASE`` variables in
+the previous example, two optional variables related to signing are available:
+
+-  *GPG_BIN:* Specifies a ``gpg`` binary/wrapper that is executed
+   when the package is signed.
+
+-  *GPG_PATH:* Specifies the ``gpg`` home directory used when the
+   package is signed.
+
+Processing Package Feeds
+------------------------
+
+In addition to being able to sign RPM packages, you can also enable
+signed package feeds for IPK and RPM packages.
+
+The steps you need to take to enable signed package feed use are similar
+to the steps used to sign RPM packages. You must define the following in
+your ``local.config`` or ``distro.config`` file::
+
+   INHERIT += "sign_package_feed"
+   PACKAGE_FEED_GPG_NAME = "key_name"
+   PACKAGE_FEED_GPG_PASSPHRASE_FILE = "path_to_file_containing_passphrase"
+
+For signed package feeds, the passphrase must be specified in a separate file,
+which is pointed to by the ``PACKAGE_FEED_GPG_PASSPHRASE_FILE``
+variable. Regarding security, keeping a plain text passphrase out of the
+configuration is more secure.
+
+Aside from the ``PACKAGE_FEED_GPG_NAME`` and
+``PACKAGE_FEED_GPG_PASSPHRASE_FILE`` variables, three optional variables
+related to signed package feeds are available:
+
+-  *GPG_BIN* Specifies a ``gpg`` binary/wrapper that is executed
+   when the package is signed.
+
+-  *GPG_PATH:* Specifies the ``gpg`` home directory used when the
+   package is signed.
+
+-  *PACKAGE_FEED_GPG_SIGNATURE_TYPE:* Specifies the type of ``gpg``
+   signature. This variable applies only to RPM and IPK package feeds.
+   Allowable values for the ``PACKAGE_FEED_GPG_SIGNATURE_TYPE`` are
+   "ASC", which is the default and specifies ascii armored, and "BIN",
+   which specifies binary.
+
+Testing Packages With ptest
+===========================
+
+A Package Test (ptest) runs tests against packages built by the
+OpenEmbedded build system on the target machine. A ptest contains at
+least two items: the actual test, and a shell script (``run-ptest``)
+that starts the test. The shell script that starts the test must not
+contain the actual test --- the script only starts the test. On the other
+hand, the test can be anything from a simple shell script that runs a
+binary and checks the output to an elaborate system of test binaries and
+data files.
+
+The test generates output in the format used by Automake::
+
+   result: testname
+
+where the result can be ``PASS``, ``FAIL``, or ``SKIP``, and
+the testname can be any identifying string.
+
+For a list of Yocto Project recipes that are already enabled with ptest,
+see the :yocto_wiki:`Ptest </Ptest>` wiki page.
+
+.. note::
+
+   A recipe is "ptest-enabled" if it inherits the :ref:`ref-classes-ptest`
+   class.
+
+Adding ptest to Your Build
+--------------------------
+
+To add package testing to your build, add the :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` and
+:term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES` variables to your ``local.conf`` file, which
+is found in the :term:`Build Directory`::
+
+   DISTRO_FEATURES:append = " ptest"
+   EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES += "ptest-pkgs"
+
+Once your build is complete, the ptest files are installed into the
+``/usr/lib/package/ptest`` directory within the image, where ``package``
+is the name of the package.
+
+Running ptest
+-------------
+
+The ``ptest-runner`` package installs a shell script that loops through
+all installed ptest test suites and runs them in sequence. Consequently,
+you might want to add this package to your image.
+
+Getting Your Package Ready
+--------------------------
+
+In order to enable a recipe to run installed ptests on target hardware,
+you need to prepare the recipes that build the packages you want to
+test. Here is what you have to do for each recipe:
+
+-  *Be sure the recipe inherits the* :ref:`ref-classes-ptest` *class:*
+   Include the following line in each recipe::
+
+      inherit ptest
+
+-  *Create run-ptest:* This script starts your test. Locate the
+   script where you will refer to it using
+   :term:`SRC_URI`. Here is an
+   example that starts a test for ``dbus``::
+
+      #!/bin/sh
+      cd test
+      make -k runtest-TESTS
+
+-  *Ensure dependencies are met:* If the test adds build or runtime
+   dependencies that normally do not exist for the package (such as
+   requiring "make" to run the test suite), use the
+   :term:`DEPENDS` and
+   :term:`RDEPENDS` variables in
+   your recipe in order for the package to meet the dependencies. Here
+   is an example where the package has a runtime dependency on "make"::
+
+      RDEPENDS:${PN}-ptest += "make"
+
+-  *Add a function to build the test suite:* Not many packages support
+   cross-compilation of their test suites. Consequently, you usually
+   need to add a cross-compilation function to the package.
+
+   Many packages based on Automake compile and run the test suite by
+   using a single command such as ``make check``. However, the host
+   ``make check`` builds and runs on the same computer, while
+   cross-compiling requires that the package is built on the host but
+   executed for the target architecture (though often, as in the case
+   for ptest, the execution occurs on the host). The built version of
+   Automake that ships with the Yocto Project includes a patch that
+   separates building and execution. Consequently, packages that use the
+   unaltered, patched version of ``make check`` automatically
+   cross-compiles.
+
+   Regardless, you still must add a ``do_compile_ptest`` function to
+   build the test suite. Add a function similar to the following to your
+   recipe::
+
+      do_compile_ptest() {
+          oe_runmake buildtest-TESTS
+      }
+
+-  *Ensure special configurations are set:* If the package requires
+   special configurations prior to compiling the test code, you must
+   insert a ``do_configure_ptest`` function into the recipe.
+
+-  *Install the test suite:* The :ref:`ref-classes-ptest` class
+   automatically copies the file ``run-ptest`` to the target and then runs make
+   ``install-ptest`` to run the tests. If this is not enough, you need
+   to create a ``do_install_ptest`` function and make sure it gets
+   called after the "make install-ptest" completes.
+
+Creating Node Package Manager (NPM) Packages
+============================================
+
+:wikipedia:`NPM <Npm_(software)>` is a package manager for the JavaScript
+programming language. The Yocto Project supports the NPM
+:ref:`fetcher <bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-fetching:fetchers>`.
+You can use this fetcher in combination with
+:doc:`devtool </ref-manual/devtool-reference>` to create recipes that produce
+NPM packages.
+
+There are two workflows that allow you to create NPM packages using
+``devtool``: the NPM registry modules method and the NPM project code
+method.
+
+.. note::
+
+   While it is possible to create NPM recipes manually, using
+   ``devtool`` is far simpler.
+
+Additionally, some requirements and caveats exist.
+
+Requirements and Caveats
+------------------------
+
+You need to be aware of the following before using ``devtool`` to create
+NPM packages:
+
+-  Of the two methods that you can use ``devtool`` to create NPM
+   packages, the registry approach is slightly simpler. However, you
+   might consider the project approach because you do not have to
+   publish your module in the `NPM registry <https://docs.npmjs.com/misc/registry>`__,
+   which is NPM's public registry.
+
+-  Be familiar with
+   :doc:`devtool </ref-manual/devtool-reference>`.
+
+-  The NPM host tools need the native ``nodejs-npm`` package, which is
+   part of the OpenEmbedded environment. You need to get the package by
+   cloning the :oe_git:`meta-openembedded </meta-openembedded>`
+   repository. Be sure to add the path to your local copy
+   to your ``bblayers.conf`` file.
+
+-  ``devtool`` cannot detect native libraries in module dependencies.
+   Consequently, you must manually add packages to your recipe.
+
+-  While deploying NPM packages, ``devtool`` cannot determine which
+   dependent packages are missing on the target (e.g. the node runtime
+   ``nodejs``). Consequently, you need to find out what files are
+   missing and be sure they are on the target.
+
+-  Although you might not need NPM to run your node package, it is
+   useful to have NPM on your target. The NPM package name is
+   ``nodejs-npm``.
+
+Using the Registry Modules Method
+---------------------------------
+
+This section presents an example that uses the ``cute-files`` module,
+which is a file browser web application.
+
+.. note::
+
+   You must know the ``cute-files`` module version.
+
+The first thing you need to do is use ``devtool`` and the NPM fetcher to
+create the recipe::
+
+   $ devtool add "npm://registry.npmjs.org;package=cute-files;version=1.0.2"
+
+The
+``devtool add`` command runs ``recipetool create`` and uses the same
+fetch URI to download each dependency and capture license details where
+possible. The result is a generated recipe.
+
+After running for quite a long time, in particular building the
+``nodejs-native`` package, the command should end as follows::
+
+   INFO: Recipe /home/.../build/workspace/recipes/cute-files/cute-files_1.0.2.bb has been automatically created; further editing may be required to make it fully functional
+
+The recipe file is fairly simple and contains every license that
+``recipetool`` finds and includes the licenses in the recipe's
+:term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`
+variables. You need to examine the variables and look for those with
+"unknown" in the :term:`LICENSE`
+field. You need to track down the license information for "unknown"
+modules and manually add the information to the recipe.
+
+``recipetool`` creates a "shrinkwrap" file for your recipe. Shrinkwrap
+files capture the version of all dependent modules. Many packages do not
+provide shrinkwrap files but ``recipetool`` will create a shrinkwrap file as it
+runs.
+
+.. note::
+
+   A package is created for each sub-module. This policy is the only
+   practical way to have the licenses for all of the dependencies
+   represented in the license manifest of the image.
+
+The ``devtool edit-recipe`` command lets you take a look at the recipe::
+
+   $ devtool edit-recipe cute-files
+   # Recipe created by recipetool
+   # This is the basis of a recipe and may need further editing in order to be fully functional.
+   # (Feel free to remove these comments when editing.)
+
+   SUMMARY = "Turn any folder on your computer into a cute file browser, available on the local network."
+   # WARNING: the following LICENSE and LIC_FILES_CHKSUM values are best guesses - it is
+   # your responsibility to verify that the values are complete and correct.
+   #
+   # NOTE: multiple licenses have been detected; they have been separated with &
+   # in the LICENSE value for now since it is a reasonable assumption that all
+   # of the licenses apply. If instead there is a choice between the multiple
+   # licenses then you should change the value to separate the licenses with |
+   # instead of &. If there is any doubt, check the accompanying documentation
+   # to determine which situation is applicable.
+
+   SUMMARY = "Turn any folder on your computer into a cute file browser, available on the local network."
+   LICENSE = "BSD-3-Clause & ISC & MIT"
+   LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://LICENSE;md5=71d98c0a1db42956787b1909c74a86ca \
+                       file://node_modules/accepts/LICENSE;md5=bf1f9ad1e2e1d507aef4883fff7103de \
+                       file://node_modules/array-flatten/LICENSE;md5=44088ba57cb871a58add36ce51b8de08 \
+   ...
+                       file://node_modules/cookie-signature/Readme.md;md5=57ae8b42de3dd0c1f22d5f4cf191e15a"
+
+   SRC_URI = " \
+       npm://registry.npmjs.org/;package=cute-files;version=${PV} \
+       npmsw://${THISDIR}/${BPN}/npm-shrinkwrap.json \
+       "
+
+   S = "${WORKDIR}/npm"
+
+   inherit npm
+
+   LICENSE:${PN} = "MIT"
+   LICENSE:${PN}-accepts = "MIT"
+   LICENSE:${PN}-array-flatten = "MIT"
+   ...
+   LICENSE:${PN}-vary = "MIT"
+
+Three key points in the previous example are:
+
+-  :term:`SRC_URI` uses the NPM
+   scheme so that the NPM fetcher is used.
+
+-  ``recipetool`` collects all the license information. If a
+   sub-module's license is unavailable, the sub-module's name appears in
+   the comments.
+
+-  The ``inherit npm`` statement causes the :ref:`ref-classes-npm` class to
+   package up all the modules.
+
+You can run the following command to build the ``cute-files`` package::
+
+   $ devtool build cute-files
+
+Remember that ``nodejs`` must be installed on
+the target before your package.
+
+Assuming 192.168.7.2 for the target's IP address, use the following
+command to deploy your package::
+
+   $ devtool deploy-target -s cute-files root@192.168.7.2
+
+Once the package is installed on the target, you can
+test the application to show the contents of any directory::
+
+  $ cd /usr/lib/node_modules/cute-files
+  $ cute-files
+
+On a browser,
+go to ``http://192.168.7.2:3000`` and you see the following:
+
+.. image:: figures/cute-files-npm-example.png
+   :width: 100%
+
+You can find the recipe in ``workspace/recipes/cute-files``. You can use
+the recipe in any layer you choose.
+
+Using the NPM Projects Code Method
+----------------------------------
+
+Although it is useful to package modules already in the NPM registry,
+adding ``node.js`` projects under development is a more common developer
+use case.
+
+This section covers the NPM projects code method, which is very similar
+to the "registry" approach described in the previous section. In the NPM
+projects method, you provide ``devtool`` with an URL that points to the
+source files.
+
+Replicating the same example, (i.e. ``cute-files``) use the following
+command::
+
+   $ devtool add https://github.com/martinaglv/cute-files.git
+
+The recipe this command generates is very similar to the recipe created in
+the previous section. However, the :term:`SRC_URI` looks like the following::
+
+   SRC_URI = " \
+       git://github.com/martinaglv/cute-files.git;protocol=https;branch=master \
+       npmsw://${THISDIR}/${BPN}/npm-shrinkwrap.json \
+       "
+
+In this example,
+the main module is taken from the Git repository and dependencies are
+taken from the NPM registry. Other than those differences, the recipe is
+basically the same between the two methods. You can build and deploy the
+package exactly as described in the previous section that uses the
+registry modules method.
+
+Adding custom metadata to packages
+==================================
+
+The variable
+:term:`PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA`
+can be used to add additional metadata to packages. This is reflected in
+the package control/spec file. To take the ipk format for example, the
+CONTROL file stored inside would contain the additional metadata as
+additional lines.
+
+The variable can be used in multiple ways, including using suffixes to
+set it for a specific package type and/or package. Note that the order
+of precedence is the same as this list:
+
+-  ``PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA_<PKGTYPE>:<PN>``
+
+-  ``PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA_<PKGTYPE>``
+
+-  ``PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA:<PN>``
+
+-  :term:`PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA`
+
+`<PKGTYPE>` is a parameter and expected to be a distinct name of specific
+package type:
+
+-  IPK for .ipk packages
+
+-  DEB for .deb packages
+
+-  RPM for .rpm packages
+
+`<PN>` is a parameter and expected to be a package name.
+
+The variable can contain multiple [one-line] metadata fields separated
+by the literal sequence '\\n'. The separator can be redefined using the
+variable flag ``separator``.
+
+Here is an example that adds two custom fields for ipk
+packages::
+
+   PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA_IPK = "Vendor: CustomIpk\nGroup:Applications/Spreadsheets"
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/prebuilt-libraries.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/prebuilt-libraries.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a05f39ca1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/prebuilt-libraries.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,209 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Working with Pre-Built Libraries
+********************************
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+Some library vendors do not release source code for their software but do
+release pre-built binaries. When shared libraries are built, they should
+be versioned (see `this article
+<https://tldp.org/HOWTO/Program-Library-HOWTO/shared-libraries.html>`__
+for some background), but sometimes this is not done.
+
+To summarize, a versioned library must meet two conditions:
+
+#.    The filename must have the version appended, for example: ``libfoo.so.1.2.3``.
+#.    The library must have the ELF tag ``SONAME`` set to the major version
+      of the library, for example: ``libfoo.so.1``. You can check this by
+      running ``readelf -d filename | grep SONAME``.
+
+This section shows how to deal with both versioned and unversioned
+pre-built libraries.
+
+Versioned Libraries
+===================
+
+In this example we work with pre-built libraries for the FT4222H USB I/O chip.
+Libraries are built for several target architecture variants and packaged in
+an archive as follows::
+
+   ├── build-arm-hisiv300
+   │   └── libft4222.so.1.4.4.44
+   ├── build-arm-v5-sf
+   │   └── libft4222.so.1.4.4.44
+   ├── build-arm-v6-hf
+   │   └── libft4222.so.1.4.4.44
+   ├── build-arm-v7-hf
+   │   └── libft4222.so.1.4.4.44
+   ├── build-arm-v8
+   │   └── libft4222.so.1.4.4.44
+   ├── build-i386
+   │   └── libft4222.so.1.4.4.44
+   ├── build-i486
+   │   └── libft4222.so.1.4.4.44
+   ├── build-mips-eglibc-hf
+   │   └── libft4222.so.1.4.4.44
+   ├── build-pentium
+   │   └── libft4222.so.1.4.4.44
+   ├── build-x86_64
+   │   └── libft4222.so.1.4.4.44
+   ├── examples
+   │   ├── get-version.c
+   │   ├── i2cm.c
+   │   ├── spim.c
+   │   └── spis.c
+   ├── ftd2xx.h
+   ├── install4222.sh
+   ├── libft4222.h
+   ├── ReadMe.txt
+   └── WinTypes.h
+
+To write a recipe to use such a library in your system:
+
+-  The vendor will probably have a proprietary licence, so set
+   :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` in your recipe.
+-  The vendor provides a tarball containing libraries so set :term:`SRC_URI`
+   appropriately.
+-  Set :term:`COMPATIBLE_HOST` so that the recipe cannot be used with an
+   unsupported architecture. In the following example, we only support the 32
+   and 64 bit variants of the ``x86`` architecture.
+-  As the vendor provides versioned libraries, we can use ``oe_soinstall``
+   from :ref:`ref-classes-utils` to install the shared library and create
+   symbolic links. If the vendor does not do this, we need to follow the
+   non-versioned library guidelines in the next section.
+-  As the vendor likely used :term:`LDFLAGS` different from those in your Yocto
+   Project build, disable the corresponding checks by adding ``ldflags``
+   to :term:`INSANE_SKIP`.
+-  The vendor will typically ship release builds without debugging symbols.
+   Avoid errors by preventing the packaging task from stripping out the symbols
+   and adding them to a separate debug package. This is done by setting the
+   ``INHIBIT_`` flags shown below.
+
+The complete recipe would look like this::
+
+   SUMMARY = "FTDI FT4222H Library"
+   SECTION = "libs"
+   LICENSE_FLAGS = "ftdi"
+   LICENSE = "CLOSED"
+
+   COMPATIBLE_HOST = "(i.86|x86_64).*-linux"
+
+   # Sources available in a .tgz file in .zip archive
+   # at https://ftdichip.com/wp-content/uploads/2021/01/libft4222-linux-1.4.4.44.zip
+   # Found on https://ftdichip.com/software-examples/ft4222h-software-examples/
+   # Since dealing with this particular type of archive is out of topic here,
+   # we use a local link.
+   SRC_URI = "file://libft4222-linux-${PV}.tgz"
+
+   S = "${WORKDIR}"
+
+   ARCH_DIR:x86-64 = "build-x86_64"
+   ARCH_DIR:i586 = "build-i386"
+   ARCH_DIR:i686 = "build-i386"
+
+   INSANE_SKIP:${PN} = "ldflags"
+   INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP = "1"
+   INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP = "1"
+   INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT = "1"
+
+   do_install () {
+           install -m 0755 -d ${D}${libdir}
+           oe_soinstall ${S}/${ARCH_DIR}/libft4222.so.${PV} ${D}${libdir}
+           install -d ${D}${includedir}
+           install -m 0755 ${S}/*.h ${D}${includedir}
+   }
+
+If the precompiled binaries are not statically linked and have dependencies on
+other libraries, then by adding those libraries to :term:`DEPENDS`, the linking
+can be examined and the appropriate :term:`RDEPENDS` automatically added.
+
+Non-Versioned Libraries
+=======================
+
+Some Background
+---------------
+
+Libraries in Linux systems are generally versioned so that it is possible
+to have multiple versions of the same library installed, which eases upgrades
+and support for older software. For example, suppose that in a versioned
+library, an actual library is called ``libfoo.so.1.2``, a symbolic link named
+``libfoo.so.1`` points to ``libfoo.so.1.2``, and a symbolic link named
+``libfoo.so`` points to ``libfoo.so.1.2``. Given these conditions, when you
+link a binary against a library, you typically provide the unversioned file
+name (i.e. ``-lfoo`` to the linker). However, the linker follows the symbolic
+link and actually links against the versioned filename. The unversioned symbolic
+link is only used at development time. Consequently, the library is packaged
+along with the headers in the development package ``${PN}-dev`` along with the
+actual library and versioned symbolic links in ``${PN}``. Because versioned
+libraries are far more common than unversioned libraries, the default packaging
+rules assume versioned libraries.
+
+Yocto Library Packaging Overview
+--------------------------------
+
+It follows that packaging an unversioned library requires a bit of work in the
+recipe. By default, ``libfoo.so`` gets packaged into ``${PN}-dev``, which
+triggers a QA warning that a non-symlink library is in a ``-dev`` package,
+and binaries in the same recipe link to the library in ``${PN}-dev``,
+which triggers more QA warnings. To solve this problem, you need to package the
+unversioned library into ``${PN}`` where it belongs. The abridged
+default :term:`FILES` variables in ``bitbake.conf`` are::
+
+   SOLIBS = ".so.*"
+   SOLIBSDEV = ".so"
+   FILES:${PN} = "... ${libdir}/lib*${SOLIBS} ..."
+   FILES_SOLIBSDEV ?= "... ${libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV} ..."
+   FILES:${PN}-dev = "... ${FILES_SOLIBSDEV} ..."
+
+:term:`SOLIBS` defines a pattern that matches real shared object libraries.
+:term:`SOLIBSDEV` matches the development form (unversioned symlink). These two
+variables are then used in ``FILES:${PN}`` and ``FILES:${PN}-dev``, which puts
+the real libraries into ``${PN}`` and the unversioned symbolic link into ``${PN}-dev``.
+To package unversioned libraries, you need to modify the variables in the recipe
+as follows::
+
+   SOLIBS = ".so"
+   FILES_SOLIBSDEV = ""
+
+The modifications cause the ``.so`` file to be the real library
+and unset :term:`FILES_SOLIBSDEV` so that no libraries get packaged into
+``${PN}-dev``. The changes are required because unless :term:`PACKAGES` is changed,
+``${PN}-dev`` collects files before `${PN}`. ``${PN}-dev`` must not collect any of
+the files you want in ``${PN}``.
+
+Finally, loadable modules, essentially unversioned libraries that are linked
+at runtime using ``dlopen()`` instead of at build time, should generally be
+installed in a private directory. However, if they are installed in ``${libdir}``,
+then the modules can be treated as unversioned libraries.
+
+Example
+-------
+
+The example below installs an unversioned x86-64 pre-built library named
+``libfoo.so``. The :term:`COMPATIBLE_HOST` variable limits recipes to the
+x86-64 architecture while the :term:`INSANE_SKIP`, :term:`INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP`
+and :term:`INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP` variables are all set as in the above
+versioned library example. The "magic" is setting the :term:`SOLIBS` and
+:term:`FILES_SOLIBSDEV` variables as explained above::
+
+   SUMMARY = "libfoo sample recipe"
+   SECTION = "libs"
+   LICENSE = "CLOSED"
+
+   SRC_URI = "file://libfoo.so"
+
+   COMPATIBLE_HOST = "x86_64.*-linux"
+
+   INSANE_SKIP:${PN} = "ldflags"
+   INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP = "1"
+   INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP = "1"
+   SOLIBS = ".so"
+   FILES_SOLIBSDEV = ""
+
+   do_install () {
+           install -d ${D}${libdir}
+           install -m 0755 ${WORKDIR}/libfoo.so ${D}${libdir}
+   }
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/python-development-shell.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/python-development-shell.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..81a5c43472
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/python-development-shell.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Using a Python Development Shell
+********************************
+
+Similar to working within a development shell as described in the
+previous section, you can also spawn and work within an interactive
+Python development shell. When debugging certain commands or even when
+just editing packages, ``pydevshell`` can be a useful tool. When you
+invoke the ``pydevshell`` task, all tasks up to and including
+:ref:`ref-tasks-patch` are run for the
+specified target. Then a new terminal is opened. Additionally, key
+Python objects and code are available in the same way they are to
+BitBake tasks, in particular, the data store 'd'. So, commands such as
+the following are useful when exploring the data store and running
+functions::
+
+   pydevshell> d.getVar("STAGING_DIR")
+   '/media/build1/poky/build/tmp/sysroots'
+   pydevshell> d.getVar("STAGING_DIR", False)
+   '${TMPDIR}/sysroots'
+   pydevshell> d.setVar("FOO", "bar")
+   pydevshell> d.getVar("FOO")
+   'bar'
+   pydevshell> d.delVar("FOO")
+   pydevshell> d.getVar("FOO")
+   pydevshell> bb.build.exec_func("do_unpack", d)
+   pydevshell>
+
+See the ":ref:`bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:functions you can call from within python`"
+section in the BitBake User Manual for details about available functions.
+
+The commands execute just as if the OpenEmbedded build
+system were executing them. Consequently, working this way can be
+helpful when debugging a build or preparing software to be used with the
+OpenEmbedded build system.
+
+Here is an example that uses ``pydevshell`` on a target named
+``matchbox-desktop``::
+
+   $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -c pydevshell
+
+This command spawns a terminal and places you in an interactive Python
+interpreter within the OpenEmbedded build environment. The
+:term:`OE_TERMINAL` variable
+controls what type of shell is opened.
+
+When you are finished using ``pydevshell``, you can exit the shell
+either by using Ctrl+d or closing the terminal window.
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/qemu.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/qemu.rst
index 766691b97b..19f3e40d63 100644
--- a/documentation/dev-manual/qemu.rst
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/qemu.rst
@@ -44,31 +44,29 @@ To use QEMU, you need to have QEMU installed and initialized as well as
 have the proper artifacts (i.e. image files and root filesystems)
 available. Follow these general steps to run QEMU:
 
-1. *Install QEMU:* QEMU is made available with the Yocto Project a
+#. *Install QEMU:* QEMU is made available with the Yocto Project a
    number of ways. One method is to install a Software Development Kit
    (SDK). See ":ref:`sdk-manual/intro:the qemu emulator`" section in the
    Yocto Project Application Development and the Extensible Software
    Development Kit (eSDK) manual for information on how to install QEMU.
 
-2. *Setting Up the Environment:* How you set up the QEMU environment
+#. *Setting Up the Environment:* How you set up the QEMU environment
    depends on how you installed QEMU:
 
    -  If you cloned the ``poky`` repository or you downloaded and
       unpacked a Yocto Project release tarball, you can source the build
-      environment script (i.e. :ref:`structure-core-script`):
-      ::
+      environment script (i.e. :ref:`structure-core-script`)::
 
-         $ cd ~/poky
+         $ cd poky
          $ source oe-init-build-env
 
    -  If you installed a cross-toolchain, you can run the script that
       initializes the toolchain. For example, the following commands run
-      the initialization script from the default ``poky_sdk`` directory:
-      ::
+      the initialization script from the default ``poky_sdk`` directory::
 
-         . ~/poky_sdk/environment-setup-core2-64-poky-linux
+         . poky_sdk/environment-setup-core2-64-poky-linux
 
-3. *Ensure the Artifacts are in Place:* You need to be sure you have a
+#. *Ensure the Artifacts are in Place:* You need to be sure you have a
    pre-built kernel that will boot in QEMU. You also need the target
    root filesystem for your target machine's architecture:
 
@@ -86,8 +84,7 @@ available. Follow these general steps to run QEMU:
    Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual for information on
    how to extract a root filesystem.
 
-4. *Run QEMU:* The basic ``runqemu`` command syntax is as follows:
-   ::
+#. *Run QEMU:* The basic ``runqemu`` command syntax is as follows::
 
       $ runqemu [option ] [...]
 
@@ -102,12 +99,13 @@ available. Follow these general steps to run QEMU:
    Here are some additional examples to help illustrate further QEMU:
 
    -  This example starts QEMU with MACHINE set to "qemux86-64".
-      Assuming a standard
-      :term:`Build Directory`, ``runqemu``
+      Assuming a standard :term:`Build Directory`, ``runqemu``
       automatically finds the ``bzImage-qemux86-64.bin`` image file and
       the ``core-image-minimal-qemux86-64-20200218002850.rootfs.ext4``
       (assuming the current build created a ``core-image-minimal``
-      image).
+      image)::
+
+        $ runqemu qemux86-64
 
       .. note::
 
@@ -115,38 +113,31 @@ available. Follow these general steps to run QEMU:
          and uses the most recently built image according to the
          timestamp.
 
-      ::
-
-        $ runqemu qemux86-64
-
    -  This example produces the exact same results as the previous
       example. This command, however, specifically provides the image
-      and root filesystem type.
-      ::
+      and root filesystem type::
 
          $ runqemu qemux86-64 core-image-minimal ext4
 
-   -  This example specifies to boot an initial RAM disk image and to
-      enable audio in QEMU. For this case, ``runqemu`` set the internal
-      variable ``FSTYPE`` to "cpio.gz". Also, for audio to be enabled,
-      an appropriate driver must be installed (see the previous
-      description for the ``audio`` option for more information).
-      ::
+   -  This example specifies to boot an :term:`Initramfs` image and to
+      enable audio in QEMU. For this case, ``runqemu`` sets the internal
+      variable ``FSTYPE`` to ``cpio.gz``. Also, for audio to be enabled,
+      an appropriate driver must be installed (see the ``audio`` option
+      in :ref:`dev-manual/qemu:\`\`runqemu\`\` command-line options`
+      for more information)::
 
          $ runqemu qemux86-64 ramfs audio
 
    -  This example does not provide enough information for QEMU to
       launch. While the command does provide a root filesystem type, it
-      must also minimally provide a `MACHINE`, `KERNEL`, or `VM` option.
-      ::
+      must also minimally provide a `MACHINE`, `KERNEL`, or `VM` option::
 
          $ runqemu ext4
 
    -  This example specifies to boot a virtual machine image
       (``.wic.vmdk`` file). From the ``.wic.vmdk``, ``runqemu``
       determines the QEMU architecture (`MACHINE`) to be "qemux86-64" and
-      the root filesystem type to be "vmdk".
-      ::
+      the root filesystem type to be "vmdk"::
 
          $ runqemu /home/scott-lenovo/vm/core-image-minimal-qemux86-64.wic.vmdk
 
@@ -193,7 +184,7 @@ the system does not need root privileges to run. It uses a user space
 NFS server to avoid that. Follow these steps to set up for running QEMU
 using an NFS server.
 
-1. *Extract a Root Filesystem:* Once you are able to run QEMU in your
+#. *Extract a Root Filesystem:* Once you are able to run QEMU in your
    environment, you can use the ``runqemu-extract-sdk`` script, which is
    located in the ``scripts`` directory along with the ``runqemu``
    script.
@@ -207,7 +198,7 @@ using an NFS server.
 
       runqemu-extract-sdk ./tmp/deploy/images/qemux86-64/core-image-sato-qemux86-64.tar.bz2 test-nfs
 
-2. *Start QEMU:* Once you have extracted the file system, you can run
+#. *Start QEMU:* Once you have extracted the file system, you can run
    ``runqemu`` normally with the additional location of the file system.
    You can then also make changes to the files within ``./test-nfs`` and
    see those changes appear in the image in real time. Here is an
@@ -222,18 +213,15 @@ using an NFS server.
    Should you need to start, stop, or restart the NFS share, you can use
    the following commands:
 
-   -  The following command starts the NFS share:
-      ::
+   -  To start the NFS share::
 
          runqemu-export-rootfs start file-system-location
 
-   -  The following command stops the NFS share:
-      ::
+   -  To stop the NFS share::
 
          runqemu-export-rootfs stop file-system-location
 
-   -  The following command restarts the NFS share:
-      ::
+   -  To restart the NFS share::
 
          runqemu-export-rootfs restart file-system-location
 
@@ -252,11 +240,10 @@ be a problem when QEMU is running with KVM enabled. Specifically,
 software compiled with a certain CPU feature crashes when run on a CPU
 under KVM that does not support that feature. To work around this
 problem, you can override QEMU's runtime CPU setting by changing the
-``QB_CPU_KVM`` variable in ``qemuboot.conf`` in the
-:term:`Build Directory` ``deploy/image``
-directory. This setting specifies a ``-cpu`` option passed into QEMU in
-the ``runqemu`` script. Running ``qemu -cpu help`` returns a list of
-available supported CPU types.
+``QB_CPU_KVM`` variable in ``qemuboot.conf`` in the :term:`Build Directory`
+``deploy/image`` directory. This setting specifies a ``-cpu`` option passed
+into QEMU in the ``runqemu`` script. Running ``qemu -cpu help`` returns a
+list of available supported CPU types.
 
 QEMU Performance
 ================
@@ -281,7 +268,7 @@ present, the toolchain is also automatically used.
 
 .. note::
 
-   Several mechanisms exist that let you connect to the system running
+   There are several mechanisms to connect to the system running
    on the QEMU emulator:
 
    -  QEMU provides a framebuffer interface that makes standard consoles
@@ -292,7 +279,7 @@ present, the toolchain is also automatically used.
       that port to run a console. The connection uses standard IP
       networking.
 
-   -  SSH servers exist in some QEMU images. The ``core-image-sato``
+   -  SSH servers are available in some QEMU images. The ``core-image-sato``
       QEMU image has a Dropbear secure shell (SSH) server that runs with
       the root password disabled. The ``core-image-full-cmdline`` and
       ``core-image-lsb`` QEMU images have OpenSSH instead of Dropbear.
@@ -306,15 +293,14 @@ present, the toolchain is also automatically used.
       tarball by using the ``runqemu-extract-sdk`` command. After
       running the command, you must then point the ``runqemu`` script to
       the extracted directory instead of a root filesystem image file.
-      See the "`Running Under a Network File System (NFS)
-      Server <#qemu-running-under-a-network-file-system-nfs-server>`__"
+      See the
+      ":ref:`dev-manual/qemu:running under a network file system (nfs) server`"
       section for more information.
 
 QEMU Command-Line Syntax
 ========================
 
-The basic ``runqemu`` command syntax is as follows:
-::
+The basic ``runqemu`` command syntax is as follows::
 
    $ runqemu [option ] [...]
 
@@ -325,8 +311,7 @@ timestamp when it needs to look for an image. Minimally, through the use
 of options, you must provide either a machine name, a virtual machine
 image (``*wic.vmdk``), or a kernel image (``*.bin``).
 
-Following is the command-line help output for the ``runqemu`` command:
-::
+Here is the command-line help output for the ``runqemu`` command::
 
    $ runqemu --help
 
@@ -338,7 +323,7 @@ Following is the command-line help output for the ``runqemu`` command:
      Simplified QEMU command-line options can be passed with:
        nographic - disable video console
        serial - enable a serial console on /dev/ttyS0
-       slirp - enable user networking, no root privileges is required
+       slirp - enable user networking, no root privileges required
        kvm - enable KVM when running x86/x86_64 (VT-capable CPU required)
        kvm-vhost - enable KVM with vhost when running x86/x86_64 (VT-capable CPU required)
        publicvnc - enable a VNC server open to all hosts
@@ -368,7 +353,7 @@ Following is the command-line help output for the ``runqemu`` command:
 ``runqemu`` Command-Line Options
 ================================
 
-Following is a description of ``runqemu`` options you can provide on the
+Here is a description of ``runqemu`` options you can provide on the
 command line:
 
 .. note::
@@ -402,7 +387,7 @@ command line:
    options are basically identical. If you do not provide a MACHINE
    option, ``runqemu`` tries to determine it based on other options.
 
--  ``ramfs``: Indicates you are booting an initial RAM disk (initramfs)
+-  ``ramfs``: Indicates you are booting an :term:`Initramfs`
    image, which means the ``FSTYPE`` is ``cpio.gz``.
 
 -  ``iso``: Indicates you are booting an ISO image, which means the
@@ -436,6 +421,29 @@ command line:
    networking that does not need root access but also is not as easy to
    use or comprehensive as the default.
 
+   Using ``slirp`` by default will forward the guest machine's
+   22 and 23 TCP ports to host machine's 2222 and 2323 ports
+   (or the next free ports). Specific forwarding rules can be configured
+   by setting ``QB_SLIRP_OPT`` as environment variable or in ``qemuboot.conf``
+   in the :term:`Build Directory` ``deploy/image`` directory.
+   Examples::
+
+      QB_SLIRP_OPT="-netdev user,id=net0,hostfwd=tcp::8080-:80"
+
+      QB_SLIRP_OPT="-netdev user,id=net0,hostfwd=tcp::8080-:80,hostfwd=tcp::2222-:22"
+
+   The first example forwards TCP port 80 from the emulated system to
+   port 8080 (or the next free port) on the host system,
+   allowing access to an http server running in QEMU from
+   ``http://<host ip>:8080/``.
+
+   The second example does the same, but also forwards TCP port 22 on the
+   guest system to 2222 (or the next free port) on the host system,
+   allowing ssh access to the emulated system using
+   ``ssh -P 2222 <user>@<host ip>``.
+
+   Keep in mind that proper configuration of firewall software is required.
+
 -  ``kvm``: Enables KVM when running "qemux86" or "qemux86-64" QEMU
    architectures. For KVM to work, all the following conditions must be
    met:
@@ -452,7 +460,7 @@ command line:
    or "qemux86-64" QEMU architectures. For KVM with VHOST to work, the
    following conditions must be met:
 
-   -  `kvm <#kvm-cond>`__ option conditions must be met.
+   -  ``kvm`` option conditions defined above must be met.
 
    -  Your build host has to have virtio net device, which are
       ``/dev/vhost-net``.
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/quilt.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/quilt.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..59240705ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/quilt.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Using Quilt in Your Workflow
+****************************
+
+`Quilt <https://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt>`__ is a powerful tool
+that allows you to capture source code changes without having a clean
+source tree. This section outlines the typical workflow you can use to
+modify source code, test changes, and then preserve the changes in the
+form of a patch all using Quilt.
+
+.. note::
+
+   With regard to preserving changes to source files, if you clean a
+   recipe or have :ref:`ref-classes-rm-work` enabled, the
+   :ref:`devtool workflow <sdk-manual/extensible:using \`\`devtool\`\` in your sdk workflow>`
+   as described in the Yocto Project Application Development and the
+   Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual is a safer
+   development flow than the flow that uses Quilt.
+
+Follow these general steps:
+
+#. *Find the Source Code:* Temporary source code used by the
+   OpenEmbedded build system is kept in the :term:`Build Directory`. See the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/temporary-source-code:finding temporary source code`" section to
+   learn how to locate the directory that has the temporary source code for a
+   particular package.
+
+#. *Change Your Working Directory:* You need to be in the directory that
+   has the temporary source code. That directory is defined by the
+   :term:`S` variable.
+
+#. *Create a New Patch:* Before modifying source code, you need to
+   create a new patch. To create a new patch file, use ``quilt new`` as
+   below::
+
+      $ quilt new my_changes.patch
+
+#. *Notify Quilt and Add Files:* After creating the patch, you need to
+   notify Quilt about the files you plan to edit. You notify Quilt by
+   adding the files to the patch you just created::
+
+      $ quilt add file1.c file2.c file3.c
+
+#. *Edit the Files:* Make your changes in the source code to the files
+   you added to the patch.
+
+#. *Test Your Changes:* Once you have modified the source code, the
+   easiest way to test your changes is by calling the :ref:`ref-tasks-compile`
+   task as shown in the following example::
+
+      $ bitbake -c compile -f package
+
+   The ``-f`` or ``--force`` option forces the specified task to
+   execute. If you find problems with your code, you can just keep
+   editing and re-testing iteratively until things work as expected.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      All the modifications you make to the temporary source code disappear
+      once you run the :ref:`ref-tasks-clean` or :ref:`ref-tasks-cleanall`
+      tasks using BitBake (i.e. ``bitbake -c clean package`` and
+      ``bitbake -c cleanall package``). Modifications will also disappear if
+      you use the :ref:`ref-classes-rm-work` feature as described in
+      the ":ref:`dev-manual/disk-space:conserving disk space during builds`"
+      section.
+
+#. *Generate the Patch:* Once your changes work as expected, you need to
+   use Quilt to generate the final patch that contains all your
+   modifications::
+
+      $ quilt refresh
+
+   At this point, the
+   ``my_changes.patch`` file has all your edits made to the ``file1.c``,
+   ``file2.c``, and ``file3.c`` files.
+
+   You can find the resulting patch file in the ``patches/``
+   subdirectory of the source (:term:`S`) directory.
+
+#. *Copy the Patch File:* For simplicity, copy the patch file into a
+   directory named ``files``, which you can create in the same directory
+   that holds the recipe (``.bb``) file or the append (``.bbappend``)
+   file. Placing the patch here guarantees that the OpenEmbedded build
+   system will find the patch. Next, add the patch into the :term:`SRC_URI`
+   of the recipe. Here is an example::
+
+      SRC_URI += "file://my_changes.patch"
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/read-only-rootfs.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/read-only-rootfs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..251178ed54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/read-only-rootfs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Creating a Read-Only Root Filesystem
+************************************
+
+Suppose, for security reasons, you need to disable your target device's
+root filesystem's write permissions (i.e. you need a read-only root
+filesystem). Or, perhaps you are running the device's operating system
+from a read-only storage device. For either case, you can customize your
+image for that behavior.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Supporting a read-only root filesystem requires that the system and
+   applications do not try to write to the root filesystem. You must
+   configure all parts of the target system to write elsewhere, or to
+   gracefully fail in the event of attempting to write to the root
+   filesystem.
+
+Creating the Root Filesystem
+============================
+
+To create the read-only root filesystem, simply add the
+"read-only-rootfs" feature to your image, normally in one of two ways.
+The first way is to add the "read-only-rootfs" image feature in the
+image's recipe file via the :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` variable::
+
+   IMAGE_FEATURES += "read-only-rootfs"
+
+As an alternative, you can add the same feature
+from within your :term:`Build Directory`'s ``local.conf`` file with the
+associated :term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES` variable, as in::
+
+   EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES = "read-only-rootfs"
+
+For more information on how to use these variables, see the
+":ref:`dev-manual/customizing-images:Customizing Images Using Custom \`\`IMAGE_FEATURES\`\` and \`\`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES\`\``"
+section. For information on the variables, see
+:term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` and
+:term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES`.
+
+Post-Installation Scripts and Read-Only Root Filesystem
+=======================================================
+
+It is very important that you make sure all post-Installation
+(``pkg_postinst``) scripts for packages that are installed into the
+image can be run at the time when the root filesystem is created during
+the build on the host system. These scripts cannot attempt to run during
+the first boot on the target device. With the "read-only-rootfs" feature
+enabled, the build system makes sure that all post-installation scripts
+succeed at file system creation time. If any of these scripts
+still need to be run after the root filesystem is created, the build
+immediately fails. These build-time checks ensure that the build fails
+rather than the target device fails later during its initial boot
+operation.
+
+Most of the common post-installation scripts generated by the build
+system for the out-of-the-box Yocto Project are engineered so that they
+can run during root filesystem creation (e.g. post-installation scripts
+for caching fonts). However, if you create and add custom scripts, you
+need to be sure they can be run during this file system creation.
+
+Here are some common problems that prevent post-installation scripts
+from running during root filesystem creation:
+
+-  *Not using $D in front of absolute paths:* The build system defines
+   ``$``\ :term:`D` when the root
+   filesystem is created. Furthermore, ``$D`` is blank when the script
+   is run on the target device. This implies two purposes for ``$D``:
+   ensuring paths are valid in both the host and target environments,
+   and checking to determine which environment is being used as a method
+   for taking appropriate actions.
+
+-  *Attempting to run processes that are specific to or dependent on the
+   target architecture:* You can work around these attempts by using
+   native tools, which run on the host system, to accomplish the same
+   tasks, or by alternatively running the processes under QEMU, which
+   has the ``qemu_run_binary`` function. For more information, see the
+   :ref:`ref-classes-qemu` class.
+
+Areas With Write Access
+=======================
+
+With the "read-only-rootfs" feature enabled, any attempt by the target
+to write to the root filesystem at runtime fails. Consequently, you must
+make sure that you configure processes and applications that attempt
+these types of writes do so to directories with write access (e.g.
+``/tmp`` or ``/var/run``).
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/runtime-testing.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/runtime-testing.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7a2b42f25a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/runtime-testing.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,594 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Performing Automated Runtime Testing
+************************************
+
+The OpenEmbedded build system makes available a series of automated
+tests for images to verify runtime functionality. You can run these
+tests on either QEMU or actual target hardware. Tests are written in
+Python making use of the ``unittest`` module, and the majority of them
+run commands on the target system over SSH. This section describes how
+you set up the environment to use these tests, run available tests, and
+write and add your own tests.
+
+For information on the test and QA infrastructure available within the
+Yocto Project, see the ":ref:`ref-manual/release-process:testing and quality assurance`"
+section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
+
+Enabling Tests
+==============
+
+Depending on whether you are planning to run tests using QEMU or on the
+hardware, you have to take different steps to enable the tests. See the
+following subsections for information on how to enable both types of
+tests.
+
+Enabling Runtime Tests on QEMU
+------------------------------
+
+In order to run tests, you need to do the following:
+
+-  *Set up to avoid interaction with sudo for networking:* To
+   accomplish this, you must do one of the following:
+
+   -  Add ``NOPASSWD`` for your user in ``/etc/sudoers`` either for all
+      commands or just for ``runqemu-ifup``. You must provide the full
+      path as that can change if you are using multiple clones of the
+      source repository.
+
+      .. note::
+
+         On some distributions, you also need to comment out "Defaults
+         requiretty" in ``/etc/sudoers``.
+
+   -  Manually configure a tap interface for your system.
+
+   -  Run as root the script in ``scripts/runqemu-gen-tapdevs``, which
+      should generate a list of tap devices. This is the option
+      typically chosen for Autobuilder-type environments.
+
+      .. note::
+
+         -  Be sure to use an absolute path when calling this script
+            with sudo.
+
+         -  Ensure that your host has the package ``iptables`` installed.
+
+         -  The package recipe ``qemu-helper-native`` is required to run
+            this script. Build the package using the following command::
+
+               $ bitbake qemu-helper-native
+
+-  *Set the DISPLAY variable:* You need to set this variable so that
+   you have an X server available (e.g. start ``vncserver`` for a
+   headless machine).
+
+-  *Be sure your host's firewall accepts incoming connections from
+   192.168.7.0/24:* Some of the tests (in particular DNF tests) start an
+   HTTP server on a random high number port, which is used to serve
+   files to the target. The DNF module serves
+   ``${WORKDIR}/oe-rootfs-repo`` so it can run DNF channel commands.
+   That means your host's firewall must accept incoming connections from
+   192.168.7.0/24, which is the default IP range used for tap devices by
+   ``runqemu``.
+
+-  *Be sure your host has the correct packages installed:* Depending
+   your host's distribution, you need to have the following packages
+   installed:
+
+   -  Ubuntu and Debian: ``sysstat`` and ``iproute2``
+
+   -  openSUSE: ``sysstat`` and ``iproute2``
+
+   -  Fedora: ``sysstat`` and ``iproute``
+
+   -  CentOS: ``sysstat`` and ``iproute``
+
+Once you start running the tests, the following happens:
+
+#. A copy of the root filesystem is written to ``${WORKDIR}/testimage``.
+
+#. The image is booted under QEMU using the standard ``runqemu`` script.
+
+#. A default timeout of 500 seconds occurs to allow for the boot process
+   to reach the login prompt. You can change the timeout period by
+   setting
+   :term:`TEST_QEMUBOOT_TIMEOUT`
+   in the ``local.conf`` file.
+
+#. Once the boot process is reached and the login prompt appears, the
+   tests run. The full boot log is written to
+   ``${WORKDIR}/testimage/qemu_boot_log``.
+
+#. Each test module loads in the order found in :term:`TEST_SUITES`. You can
+   find the full output of the commands run over SSH in
+   ``${WORKDIR}/testimgage/ssh_target_log``.
+
+#. If no failures occur, the task running the tests ends successfully.
+   You can find the output from the ``unittest`` in the task log at
+   ``${WORKDIR}/temp/log.do_testimage``.
+
+Enabling Runtime Tests on Hardware
+----------------------------------
+
+The OpenEmbedded build system can run tests on real hardware, and for
+certain devices it can also deploy the image to be tested onto the
+device beforehand.
+
+For automated deployment, a "controller image" is installed onto the
+hardware once as part of setup. Then, each time tests are to be run, the
+following occurs:
+
+#. The controller image is booted into and used to write the image to be
+   tested to a second partition.
+
+#. The device is then rebooted using an external script that you need to
+   provide.
+
+#. The device boots into the image to be tested.
+
+When running tests (independent of whether the image has been deployed
+automatically or not), the device is expected to be connected to a
+network on a pre-determined IP address. You can either use static IP
+addresses written into the image, or set the image to use DHCP and have
+your DHCP server on the test network assign a known IP address based on
+the MAC address of the device.
+
+In order to run tests on hardware, you need to set :term:`TEST_TARGET` to an
+appropriate value. For QEMU, you do not have to change anything, the
+default value is "qemu". For running tests on hardware, the following
+options are available:
+
+-  *"simpleremote":* Choose "simpleremote" if you are going to run tests
+   on a target system that is already running the image to be tested and
+   is available on the network. You can use "simpleremote" in
+   conjunction with either real hardware or an image running within a
+   separately started QEMU or any other virtual machine manager.
+
+-  *"SystemdbootTarget":* Choose "SystemdbootTarget" if your hardware is
+   an EFI-based machine with ``systemd-boot`` as bootloader and
+   ``core-image-testmaster`` (or something similar) is installed. Also,
+   your hardware under test must be in a DHCP-enabled network that gives
+   it the same IP address for each reboot.
+
+   If you choose "SystemdbootTarget", there are additional requirements
+   and considerations. See the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/runtime-testing:selecting systemdboottarget`" section, which
+   follows, for more information.
+
+-  *"BeagleBoneTarget":* Choose "BeagleBoneTarget" if you are deploying
+   images and running tests on the BeagleBone "Black" or original
+   "White" hardware. For information on how to use these tests, see the
+   comments at the top of the BeagleBoneTarget
+   ``meta-yocto-bsp/lib/oeqa/controllers/beaglebonetarget.py`` file.
+
+-  *"GrubTarget":* Choose "GrubTarget" if you are deploying images and running
+   tests on any generic PC that boots using GRUB. For information on how
+   to use these tests, see the comments at the top of the GrubTarget
+   ``meta-yocto-bsp/lib/oeqa/controllers/grubtarget.py`` file.
+
+-  *"your-target":* Create your own custom target if you want to run
+   tests when you are deploying images and running tests on a custom
+   machine within your BSP layer. To do this, you need to add a Python
+   unit that defines the target class under ``lib/oeqa/controllers/``
+   within your layer. You must also provide an empty ``__init__.py``.
+   For examples, see files in ``meta-yocto-bsp/lib/oeqa/controllers/``.
+
+Selecting SystemdbootTarget
+---------------------------
+
+If you did not set :term:`TEST_TARGET` to "SystemdbootTarget", then you do
+not need any information in this section. You can skip down to the
+":ref:`dev-manual/runtime-testing:running tests`" section.
+
+If you did set :term:`TEST_TARGET` to "SystemdbootTarget", you also need to
+perform a one-time setup of your controller image by doing the following:
+
+#. *Set EFI_PROVIDER:* Be sure that :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is as follows::
+
+      EFI_PROVIDER = "systemd-boot"
+
+#. *Build the controller image:* Build the ``core-image-testmaster`` image.
+   The ``core-image-testmaster`` recipe is provided as an example for a
+   "controller" image and you can customize the image recipe as you would
+   any other recipe.
+
+   Image recipe requirements are:
+
+   -  Inherits ``core-image`` so that kernel modules are installed.
+
+   -  Installs normal linux utilities not BusyBox ones (e.g. ``bash``,
+      ``coreutils``, ``tar``, ``gzip``, and ``kmod``).
+
+   -  Uses a custom :term:`Initramfs` image with a custom
+      installer. A normal image that you can install usually creates a
+      single root filesystem partition. This image uses another installer that
+      creates a specific partition layout. Not all Board Support
+      Packages (BSPs) can use an installer. For such cases, you need to
+      manually create the following partition layout on the target:
+
+      -  First partition mounted under ``/boot``, labeled "boot".
+
+      -  The main root filesystem partition where this image gets installed,
+         which is mounted under ``/``.
+
+      -  Another partition labeled "testrootfs" where test images get
+         deployed.
+
+#. *Install image:* Install the image that you just built on the target
+   system.
+
+The final thing you need to do when setting :term:`TEST_TARGET` to
+"SystemdbootTarget" is to set up the test image:
+
+#. *Set up your local.conf file:* Make sure you have the following
+   statements in your ``local.conf`` file::
+
+      IMAGE_FSTYPES += "tar.gz"
+      IMAGE_CLASSES += "testimage"
+      TEST_TARGET = "SystemdbootTarget"
+      TEST_TARGET_IP = "192.168.2.3"
+
+#. *Build your test image:* Use BitBake to build the image::
+
+      $ bitbake core-image-sato
+
+Power Control
+-------------
+
+For most hardware targets other than "simpleremote", you can control
+power:
+
+-  You can use :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD` together with
+   :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS` as a command that runs on the host
+   and does power cycling. The test code passes one argument to that
+   command: off, on or cycle (off then on). Here is an example that
+   could appear in your ``local.conf`` file::
+
+      TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD = "powercontrol.exp test 10.11.12.1 nuc1"
+
+   In this example, the expect
+   script does the following:
+
+   .. code-block:: shell
+
+      ssh test@10.11.12.1 "pyctl nuc1 arg"
+
+   It then runs a Python script that controls power for a label called
+   ``nuc1``.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      You need to customize :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD` and
+      :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS` for your own setup. The one requirement
+      is that it accepts "on", "off", and "cycle" as the last argument.
+
+-  When no command is defined, it connects to the device over SSH and
+   uses the classic reboot command to reboot the device. Classic reboot
+   is fine as long as the machine actually reboots (i.e. the SSH test
+   has not failed). It is useful for scenarios where you have a simple
+   setup, typically with a single board, and where some manual
+   interaction is okay from time to time.
+
+If you have no hardware to automatically perform power control but still
+wish to experiment with automated hardware testing, you can use the
+``dialog-power-control`` script that shows a dialog prompting you to perform
+the required power action. This script requires either KDialog or Zenity
+to be installed. To use this script, set the
+:term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD`
+variable as follows::
+
+   TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD = "${COREBASE}/scripts/contrib/dialog-power-control"
+
+Serial Console Connection
+-------------------------
+
+For test target classes requiring a serial console to interact with the
+bootloader (e.g. BeagleBoneTarget and GrubTarget),
+you need to specify a command to use to connect to the serial console of
+the target machine by using the
+:term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD`
+variable and optionally the
+:term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`
+variable.
+
+These cases could be a serial terminal program if the machine is
+connected to a local serial port, or a ``telnet`` or ``ssh`` command
+connecting to a remote console server. Regardless of the case, the
+command simply needs to connect to the serial console and forward that
+connection to standard input and output as any normal terminal program
+does. For example, to use the picocom terminal program on serial device
+``/dev/ttyUSB0`` at 115200bps, you would set the variable as follows::
+
+   TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD = "picocom /dev/ttyUSB0 -b 115200"
+
+For local
+devices where the serial port device disappears when the device reboots,
+an additional "serdevtry" wrapper script is provided. To use this
+wrapper, simply prefix the terminal command with
+``${COREBASE}/scripts/contrib/serdevtry``::
+
+   TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD = "${COREBASE}/scripts/contrib/serdevtry picocom -b 115200 /dev/ttyUSB0"
+
+Running Tests
+=============
+
+You can start the tests automatically or manually:
+
+-  *Automatically running tests:* To run the tests automatically after the
+   OpenEmbedded build system successfully creates an image, first set the
+   :term:`TESTIMAGE_AUTO` variable to "1" in your ``local.conf`` file in the
+   :term:`Build Directory`::
+
+      TESTIMAGE_AUTO = "1"
+
+   Next, build your image. If the image successfully builds, the
+   tests run::
+
+      bitbake core-image-sato
+
+-  *Manually running tests:* To manually run the tests, first globally
+   inherit the :ref:`ref-classes-testimage` class by editing your
+   ``local.conf`` file::
+
+      IMAGE_CLASSES += "testimage"
+
+   Next, use BitBake to run the tests::
+
+      bitbake -c testimage image
+
+All test files reside in ``meta/lib/oeqa/runtime/cases`` in the
+:term:`Source Directory`. A test name maps
+directly to a Python module. Each test module may contain a number of
+individual tests. Tests are usually grouped together by the area tested
+(e.g tests for systemd reside in ``meta/lib/oeqa/runtime/cases/systemd.py``).
+
+You can add tests to any layer provided you place them in the proper
+area and you extend :term:`BBPATH` in
+the ``local.conf`` file as normal. Be sure that tests reside in
+``layer/lib/oeqa/runtime/cases``.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Be sure that module names do not collide with module names used in
+   the default set of test modules in ``meta/lib/oeqa/runtime/cases``.
+
+You can change the set of tests run by appending or overriding
+:term:`TEST_SUITES` variable in
+``local.conf``. Each name in :term:`TEST_SUITES` represents a required test
+for the image. Test modules named within :term:`TEST_SUITES` cannot be
+skipped even if a test is not suitable for an image (e.g. running the
+RPM tests on an image without ``rpm``). Appending "auto" to
+:term:`TEST_SUITES` causes the build system to try to run all tests that are
+suitable for the image (i.e. each test module may elect to skip itself).
+
+The order you list tests in :term:`TEST_SUITES` is important and influences
+test dependencies. Consequently, tests that depend on other tests should
+be added after the test on which they depend. For example, since the
+``ssh`` test depends on the ``ping`` test, "ssh" needs to come after
+"ping" in the list. The test class provides no re-ordering or dependency
+handling.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Each module can have multiple classes with multiple test methods.
+   And, Python ``unittest`` rules apply.
+
+Here are some things to keep in mind when running tests:
+
+-  The default tests for the image are defined as::
+
+      DEFAULT_TEST_SUITES:pn-image = "ping ssh df connman syslog xorg scp vnc date rpm dnf dmesg"
+
+-  Add your own test to the list of the by using the following::
+
+      TEST_SUITES:append = " mytest"
+
+-  Run a specific list of tests as follows::
+
+     TEST_SUITES = "test1 test2 test3"
+
+   Remember, order is important. Be sure to place a test that is
+   dependent on another test later in the order.
+
+Exporting Tests
+===============
+
+You can export tests so that they can run independently of the build
+system. Exporting tests is required if you want to be able to hand the
+test execution off to a scheduler. You can only export tests that are
+defined in :term:`TEST_SUITES`.
+
+If your image is already built, make sure the following are set in your
+``local.conf`` file::
+
+   INHERIT += "testexport"
+   TEST_TARGET_IP = "IP-address-for-the-test-target"
+   TEST_SERVER_IP = "IP-address-for-the-test-server"
+
+You can then export the tests with the
+following BitBake command form::
+
+   $ bitbake image -c testexport
+
+Exporting the tests places them in the :term:`Build Directory` in
+``tmp/testexport/``\ image, which is controlled by the :term:`TEST_EXPORT_DIR`
+variable.
+
+You can now run the tests outside of the build environment::
+
+   $ cd tmp/testexport/image
+   $ ./runexported.py testdata.json
+
+Here is a complete example that shows IP addresses and uses the
+``core-image-sato`` image::
+
+   INHERIT += "testexport"
+   TEST_TARGET_IP = "192.168.7.2"
+   TEST_SERVER_IP = "192.168.7.1"
+
+Use BitBake to export the tests::
+
+   $ bitbake core-image-sato -c testexport
+
+Run the tests outside of
+the build environment using the following::
+
+   $ cd tmp/testexport/core-image-sato
+   $ ./runexported.py testdata.json
+
+Writing New Tests
+=================
+
+As mentioned previously, all new test files need to be in the proper
+place for the build system to find them. New tests for additional
+functionality outside of the core should be added to the layer that adds
+the functionality, in ``layer/lib/oeqa/runtime/cases`` (as long as
+:term:`BBPATH` is extended in the
+layer's ``layer.conf`` file as normal). Just remember the following:
+
+-  Filenames need to map directly to test (module) names.
+
+-  Do not use module names that collide with existing core tests.
+
+-  Minimally, an empty ``__init__.py`` file must be present in the runtime
+   directory.
+
+To create a new test, start by copying an existing module (e.g.
+``oe_syslog.py`` or ``gcc.py`` are good ones to use). Test modules can use
+code from ``meta/lib/oeqa/utils``, which are helper classes.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Structure shell commands such that you rely on them and they return a
+   single code for success. Be aware that sometimes you will need to
+   parse the output. See the ``df.py`` and ``date.py`` modules for examples.
+
+You will notice that all test classes inherit ``oeRuntimeTest``, which
+is found in ``meta/lib/oetest.py``. This base class offers some helper
+attributes, which are described in the following sections:
+
+Class Methods
+-------------
+
+Class methods are as follows:
+
+-  *hasPackage(pkg):* Returns "True" if ``pkg`` is in the installed
+   package list of the image, which is based on the manifest file that
+   is generated during the :ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task.
+
+-  *hasFeature(feature):* Returns "True" if the feature is in
+   :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` or
+   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`.
+
+Class Attributes
+----------------
+
+Class attributes are as follows:
+
+-  *pscmd:* Equals "ps -ef" if ``procps`` is installed in the image.
+   Otherwise, ``pscmd`` equals "ps" (busybox).
+
+-  *tc:* The called test context, which gives access to the
+   following attributes:
+
+   -  *d:* The BitBake datastore, which allows you to use stuff such
+      as ``oeRuntimeTest.tc.d.getVar("VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_init_manager")``.
+
+   -  *testslist and testsrequired:* Used internally. The tests
+      do not need these.
+
+   -  *filesdir:* The absolute path to
+      ``meta/lib/oeqa/runtime/files``, which contains helper files for
+      tests meant for copying on the target such as small files written
+      in C for compilation.
+
+   -  *target:* The target controller object used to deploy and
+      start an image on a particular target (e.g. Qemu, SimpleRemote,
+      and SystemdbootTarget). Tests usually use the following:
+
+      -  *ip:* The target's IP address.
+
+      -  *server_ip:* The host's IP address, which is usually used
+         by the DNF test suite.
+
+      -  *run(cmd, timeout=None):* The single, most used method.
+         This command is a wrapper for: ``ssh root@host "cmd"``. The
+         command returns a tuple: (status, output), which are what their
+         names imply - the return code of "cmd" and whatever output it
+         produces. The optional timeout argument represents the number
+         of seconds the test should wait for "cmd" to return. If the
+         argument is "None", the test uses the default instance's
+         timeout period, which is 300 seconds. If the argument is "0",
+         the test runs until the command returns.
+
+      -  *copy_to(localpath, remotepath):*
+         ``scp localpath root@ip:remotepath``.
+
+      -  *copy_from(remotepath, localpath):*
+         ``scp root@host:remotepath localpath``.
+
+Instance Attributes
+-------------------
+
+There is a single instance attribute, which is ``target``. The ``target``
+instance attribute is identical to the class attribute of the same name,
+which is described in the previous section. This attribute exists as
+both an instance and class attribute so tests can use
+``self.target.run(cmd)`` in instance methods instead of
+``oeRuntimeTest.tc.target.run(cmd)``.
+
+Installing Packages in the DUT Without the Package Manager
+==========================================================
+
+When a test requires a package built by BitBake, it is possible to
+install that package. Installing the package does not require a package
+manager be installed in the device under test (DUT). It does, however,
+require an SSH connection and the target must be using the
+``sshcontrol`` class.
+
+.. note::
+
+   This method uses ``scp`` to copy files from the host to the target, which
+   causes permissions and special attributes to be lost.
+
+A JSON file is used to define the packages needed by a test. This file
+must be in the same path as the file used to define the tests.
+Furthermore, the filename must map directly to the test module name with
+a ``.json`` extension.
+
+The JSON file must include an object with the test name as keys of an
+object or an array. This object (or array of objects) uses the following
+data:
+
+-  "pkg" --- a mandatory string that is the name of the package to be
+   installed.
+
+-  "rm" --- an optional boolean, which defaults to "false", that specifies
+   to remove the package after the test.
+
+-  "extract" --- an optional boolean, which defaults to "false", that
+   specifies if the package must be extracted from the package format.
+   When set to "true", the package is not automatically installed into
+   the DUT.
+
+Here is an example JSON file that handles test "foo" installing
+package "bar" and test "foobar" installing packages "foo" and "bar".
+Once the test is complete, the packages are removed from the DUT::
+
+     {
+         "foo": {
+             "pkg": "bar"
+         },
+         "foobar": [
+             {
+                 "pkg": "foo",
+                 "rm": true
+             },
+             {
+                 "pkg": "bar",
+                 "rm": true
+             }
+         ]
+     }
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/sbom.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/sbom.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b72bad1554
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/sbom.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Creating a Software Bill of Materials
+*************************************
+
+Once you are able to build an image for your project, once the licenses for
+each software component are all identified (see
+":ref:`dev-manual/licenses:working with licenses`") and once vulnerability
+fixes are applied (see ":ref:`dev-manual/vulnerabilities:checking
+for vulnerabilities`"), the OpenEmbedded build system can generate
+a description of all the components you used, their licenses, their dependencies,
+their sources, the changes that were applied to them and the known
+vulnerabilities that were fixed.
+
+This description is generated in the form of a *Software Bill of Materials*
+(:term:`SBOM`), using the :term:`SPDX` standard.
+
+When you release software, this is the most standard way to provide information
+about the Software Supply Chain of your software image and SDK. The
+:term:`SBOM` tooling is often used to ensure open source license compliance by
+providing the license texts used in the product which legal departments and end
+users can read in standardized format.
+
+:term:`SBOM` information is also critical to performing vulnerability exposure
+assessments, as all the components used in the Software Supply Chain are listed.
+
+The OpenEmbedded build system doesn't generate such information by default.
+To make this happen, you must inherit the
+:ref:`ref-classes-create-spdx` class from a configuration file::
+
+   INHERIT += "create-spdx"
+
+Upon building an image, you will then get:
+
+-  :term:`SPDX` output in JSON format as an ``IMAGE-MACHINE.spdx.json`` file in
+   ``tmp/deploy/images/MACHINE/`` inside the :term:`Build Directory`.
+
+-  This toplevel file is accompanied by an ``IMAGE-MACHINE.spdx.index.json``
+   containing an index of JSON :term:`SPDX` files for individual recipes.
+
+-  The compressed archive ``IMAGE-MACHINE.spdx.tar.zst`` contains the index
+   and the files for the single recipes.
+
+The :ref:`ref-classes-create-spdx` class offers options to include
+more information in the output :term:`SPDX` data:
+
+-  Make the json files more human readable by setting (:term:`SPDX_PRETTY`).
+
+-  Add compressed archives of the files in the generated target packages by
+   setting (:term:`SPDX_ARCHIVE_PACKAGED`).
+
+-  Add a description of the source files used to generate host tools and target
+   packages (:term:`SPDX_INCLUDE_SOURCES`)
+
+-  Add archives of these source files themselves (:term:`SPDX_ARCHIVE_SOURCES`).
+
+Though the toplevel :term:`SPDX` output is available in
+``tmp/deploy/images/MACHINE/`` inside the :term:`Build Directory`, ancillary
+generated files are available in ``tmp/deploy/spdx/MACHINE`` too, such as:
+
+-  The individual :term:`SPDX` JSON files in the ``IMAGE-MACHINE.spdx.tar.zst``
+   archive.
+
+-  Compressed archives of the files in the generated target packages,
+   in ``packages/packagename.tar.zst`` (when :term:`SPDX_ARCHIVE_PACKAGED`
+   is set).
+
+-  Compressed archives of the source files used to build the host tools
+   and the target packages in ``recipes/recipe-packagename.tar.zst``
+   (when :term:`SPDX_ARCHIVE_SOURCES` is set). Those are needed to fulfill
+   "source code access" license requirements.
+
+See also the :term:`SPDX_CUSTOM_ANNOTATION_VARS` variable which allows
+to associate custom notes to a recipe.
+See the `tools page <https://spdx.dev/resources/tools/>`__ on the :term:`SPDX`
+project website for a list of tools to consume and transform the :term:`SPDX`
+data generated by the OpenEmbedded build system.
+
+See also Joshua Watt's presentations
+`Automated SBoM generation with OpenEmbedded and the Yocto Project <https://youtu.be/Q5UQUM6zxVU>`__
+at FOSDEM 2023 and
+`SPDX in the Yocto Project <https://fosdem.org/2024/schedule/event/fosdem-2024-3318-spdx-in-the-yocto-project/>`__
+at FOSDEM 2024.
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/securing-images.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/securing-images.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e5791d3d6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/securing-images.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Making Images More Secure
+*************************
+
+Security is of increasing concern for embedded devices. Consider the
+issues and problems discussed in just this sampling of work found across
+the Internet:
+
+-  *"*\ `Security Risks of Embedded
+   Systems <https://www.schneier.com/blog/archives/2014/01/security_risks_9.html>`__\ *"*
+   by Bruce Schneier
+
+-  *"*\ `Internet Census
+   2012 <http://census2012.sourceforge.net/paper.html>`__\ *"* by Carna
+   Botnet
+
+-  *"*\ `Security Issues for Embedded
+   Devices <https://elinux.org/images/6/6f/Security-issues.pdf>`__\ *"*
+   by Jake Edge
+
+When securing your image is of concern, there are steps, tools, and
+variables that you can consider to help you reach the security goals you
+need for your particular device. Not all situations are identical when
+it comes to making an image secure. Consequently, this section provides
+some guidance and suggestions for consideration when you want to make
+your image more secure.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Because the security requirements and risks are different for every
+   type of device, this section cannot provide a complete reference on
+   securing your custom OS. It is strongly recommended that you also
+   consult other sources of information on embedded Linux system
+   hardening and on security.
+
+General Considerations
+======================
+
+There are general considerations that help you create more secure images.
+You should consider the following suggestions to make your device
+more secure:
+
+-  Scan additional code you are adding to the system (e.g. application
+   code) by using static analysis tools. Look for buffer overflows and
+   other potential security problems.
+
+-  Pay particular attention to the security for any web-based
+   administration interface.
+
+   Web interfaces typically need to perform administrative functions and
+   tend to need to run with elevated privileges. Thus, the consequences
+   resulting from the interface's security becoming compromised can be
+   serious. Look for common web vulnerabilities such as
+   cross-site-scripting (XSS), unvalidated inputs, and so forth.
+
+   As with system passwords, the default credentials for accessing a
+   web-based interface should not be the same across all devices. This
+   is particularly true if the interface is enabled by default as it can
+   be assumed that many end-users will not change the credentials.
+
+-  Ensure you can update the software on the device to mitigate
+   vulnerabilities discovered in the future. This consideration
+   especially applies when your device is network-enabled.
+
+-  Regularly scan and apply fixes for CVE security issues affecting
+   all software components in the product, see ":ref:`dev-manual/vulnerabilities:checking for vulnerabilities`".
+
+-  Regularly update your version of Poky and OE-Core from their upstream
+   developers, e.g. to apply updates and security fixes from stable
+   and :term:`LTS` branches.
+
+-  Ensure you remove or disable debugging functionality before producing
+   the final image. For information on how to do this, see the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/securing-images:considerations specific to the openembedded build system`"
+   section.
+
+-  Ensure you have no network services listening that are not needed.
+
+-  Remove any software from the image that is not needed.
+
+-  Enable hardware support for secure boot functionality when your
+   device supports this functionality.
+
+Security Flags
+==============
+
+The Yocto Project has security flags that you can enable that help make
+your build output more secure. The security flags are in the
+``meta/conf/distro/include/security_flags.inc`` file in your
+:term:`Source Directory` (e.g. ``poky``).
+
+.. note::
+
+   Depending on the recipe, certain security flags are enabled and
+   disabled by default.
+
+Use the following line in your ``local.conf`` file or in your custom
+distribution configuration file to enable the security compiler and
+linker flags for your build::
+
+   require conf/distro/include/security_flags.inc
+
+Considerations Specific to the OpenEmbedded Build System
+========================================================
+
+You can take some steps that are specific to the OpenEmbedded build
+system to make your images more secure:
+
+-  Ensure "debug-tweaks" is not one of your selected
+   :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`.
+   When creating a new project, the default is to provide you with an
+   initial ``local.conf`` file that enables this feature using the
+   :term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES`
+   variable with the line::
+
+      EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES = "debug-tweaks"
+
+   To disable that feature, simply comment out that line in your
+   ``local.conf`` file, or make sure :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` does not contain
+   "debug-tweaks" before producing your final image. Among other things,
+   leaving this in place sets the root password as blank, which makes
+   logging in for debugging or inspection easy during development but
+   also means anyone can easily log in during production.
+
+-  It is possible to set a root password for the image and also to set
+   passwords for any extra users you might add (e.g. administrative or
+   service type users). When you set up passwords for multiple images or
+   users, you should not duplicate passwords.
+
+   To set up passwords, use the :ref:`ref-classes-extrausers` class, which
+   is the preferred method. For an example on how to set up both root and
+   user passwords, see the ":ref:`ref-classes-extrausers`" section.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      When adding extra user accounts or setting a root password, be
+      cautious about setting the same password on every device. If you
+      do this, and the password you have set is exposed, then every
+      device is now potentially compromised. If you need this access but
+      want to ensure security, consider setting a different, random
+      password for each device. Typically, you do this as a separate
+      step after you deploy the image onto the device.
+
+-  Consider enabling a Mandatory Access Control (MAC) framework such as
+   SMACK or SELinux and tuning it appropriately for your device's usage.
+   You can find more information in the
+   :yocto_git:`meta-selinux </meta-selinux/>` layer.
+
+Tools for Hardening Your Image
+==============================
+
+The Yocto Project provides tools for making your image more secure. You
+can find these tools in the ``meta-security`` layer of the
+:yocto_git:`Yocto Project Source Repositories <>`.
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/security-subjects.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/security-subjects.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1b02b6a9e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/security-subjects.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,189 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Dealing with Vulnerability Reports
+**********************************
+
+The Yocto Project and OpenEmbedded are open-source, community-based projects
+used in numerous products. They assemble multiple other open-source projects,
+and need to handle security issues and practices both internal (in the code
+maintained by both projects), and external (maintained by other projects and
+organizations).
+
+This manual assembles security-related information concerning the whole
+ecosystem. It includes information on reporting a potential security issue,
+the operation of the YP Security team and how to contribute in the
+related code. It is written to be useful for both security researchers and
+YP developers.
+
+How to report a potential security vulnerability?
+=================================================
+
+If you would like to report a public issue (for example, one with a released
+CVE number), please report it using the
+:yocto_bugs:`Security Bugzilla </enter_bug.cgi?product=Security>`.
+
+If you are dealing with a not-yet-released issue, or an urgent one, please send
+a message to security AT yoctoproject DOT org, including as many details as
+possible: the layer or software module affected, the recipe and its version,
+and any example code, if available. This mailing list is monitored by the
+Yocto Project Security team.
+
+For each layer, you might also look for specific instructions (if any) for
+reporting potential security issues in the specific ``SECURITY.md`` file at the
+root of the repository. Instructions on how and where submit a patch are
+usually available in ``README.md``. If this is your first patch to the
+Yocto Project/OpenEmbedded, you might want to have a look into the
+Contributor's Manual section
+":ref:`contributor-guide/submit-changes:preparing changes for submission`".
+
+Branches maintained with security fixes
+---------------------------------------
+
+See the
+:ref:`Release process <ref-manual/release-process:Stable Release Process>`
+documentation for details regarding the policies and maintenance of stable
+branches.
+
+The :yocto_wiki:`Releases page </Releases>` contains a list
+of all releases of the Yocto Project. Versions in gray are no longer actively
+maintained with security patches, but well-tested patches may still be accepted
+for them for significant issues.
+
+Security-related discussions at the Yocto Project
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+We have set up two security-related mailing lists:
+
+  -  Public List: yocto [dash] security [at] yoctoproject[dot] org
+
+    This is a public mailing list for anyone to subscribe to. This list is an
+    open list to discuss public security issues/patches and security-related
+    initiatives. For more information, including subscription information,
+    please see the  :yocto_lists:`yocto-security mailing list info page </g/yocto-security>`.
+
+  - Private List: security [at] yoctoproject [dot] org
+
+    This is a private mailing list for reporting non-published potential
+    vulnerabilities. The list is monitored by the Yocto Project Security team.
+
+
+What you should do if you find a security vulnerability
+-------------------------------------------------------
+
+If you find a security flaw: a crash, an information leakage, or anything that
+can have a security impact if exploited in any Open Source software built or
+used by the Yocto Project, please report this to the Yocto Project Security
+Team. If you prefer to contact the upstream project directly, please send a
+copy to the security team at the Yocto Project as well. If you believe this is
+highly sensitive information, please report the vulnerability in a secure way,
+i.e. encrypt the email and send it to the private list. This ensures that
+the exploit is not leaked and exploited before a response/fix has been generated.
+
+Security team
+=============
+
+The Yocto Project/OpenEmbedded security team coordinates the work on security
+subjects in the project. All general discussion takes place publicly. The
+Security Team only uses confidential communication tools to deal with private
+vulnerability reports before they are released.
+
+Security team appointment
+-------------------------
+
+The Yocto Project Security Team consists of at least three members. When new
+members are needed, the Yocto Project Technical Steering Committee (YP TSC)
+asks for nominations by public channels including a nomination deadline.
+Self-nominations are possible. When the limit time is
+reached, the YP TSC posts the list of candidates for the comments of project
+participants and developers. Comments may be sent publicly or privately to the
+YP and OE TSCs. The candidates are approved by both YP TSC and OpenEmbedded
+Technical Steering Committee (OE TSC) and the final list of the team members
+is announced publicly. The aim is to have people representing technical
+leadership, security knowledge and infrastructure present with enough people
+to provide backup/coverage but keep the notification list small enough to
+minimize information risk and maintain trust.
+
+YP Security Team members may resign at any time.
+
+Security Team Operations
+------------------------
+
+The work of the Security Team might require high confidentiality. Team members
+are individuals selected by merit and do not represent the companies they work
+for. They do not share information about confidential issues outside of the team
+and do not hint about ongoing embargoes.
+
+Team members can bring in domain experts as needed. Those people should be
+added to individual issues only and adhere to the same standards as the YP
+Security Team.
+
+The YP security team organizes its meetings and communication as needed.
+
+When the YP Security team receives a report about a potential security
+vulnerability, they quickly analyze and notify the reporter of the result.
+They might also request more information.
+
+If the issue is confirmed and affects the code maintained by the YP, they
+confidentially notify maintainers of that code and work with them to prepare
+a fix.
+
+If the issue is confirmed and affects an upstream project, the YP security team
+notifies the project. Usually, the upstream project analyzes the problem again.
+If they deem it a real security problem in their software, they develop and
+release a fix following their security policy. They may want to include the
+original reporter in the loop. There is also sometimes some coordination for
+handling patches, backporting patches etc, or just understanding the problem
+or what caused it.
+
+When the fix is publicly available, the YP security team member or the
+package maintainer sends patches against the YP code base, following usual
+procedures, including public code review.
+
+What Yocto Security Team does when it receives a security vulnerability
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+The YP Security Team team performs a quick analysis and would usually report
+the flaw to the upstream project. Normally the upstream project analyzes the
+problem. If they deem it a real security problem in their software, they
+develop and release a fix following their own security policy. They may want
+to include the original reporter in the loop. There is also sometimes some
+coordination for handling patches, backporting patches etc, or just
+understanding the problem or what caused it.
+
+The security policy of the upstream project might include a notification to
+Linux distributions or other important downstream projects in advance to
+discuss coordinated disclosure. These mailing lists are normally non-public.
+
+When the upstream project releases a version with the fix, they are responsible
+for contacting `Mitre <https://www.cve.org/>`__ to get a CVE number assigned and
+the CVE record published.
+
+If an upstream project does not respond quickly
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+If an upstream project does not fix the problem in a reasonable time,
+the Yocto's Security Team will contact other interested parties (usually
+other distributions) in the community and together try to solve the
+vulnerability as quickly as possible.
+
+The Yocto Project Security team adheres to the 90 days disclosure policy
+by default. An increase of the embargo time is possible when necessary.
+
+Current Security Team members
+-----------------------------
+
+For secure communications, please send your messages encrypted using the GPG
+keys. Remember, message headers are not encrypted so do not include sensitive
+information in the subject line.
+
+  -  Ross Burton: <ross@burtonini.com> `Public key <https://keys.openpgp.org/search?q=ross%40burtonini.com>`__
+
+  -  Michael Halstead: <mhalstead [at] linuxfoundation [dot] org>
+     `Public key <https://pgp.mit.edu/pks/lookup?op=vindex&search=0x3373170601861969>`__
+     or `Public key <https://keyserver.ubuntu.com/pks/lookup?op=get&search=0xd1f2407285e571ed12a407a73373170601861969>`__
+
+  -  Richard Purdie: <richard.purdie@linuxfoundation.org> `Public key <https://keys.openpgp.org/search?q=richard.purdie%40linuxfoundation.org>`__
+
+  -  Marta Rybczynska: <marta DOT rybczynska [at] syslinbit [dot] com> `Public key <https://keys.openpgp.org/search?q=marta.rybczynska@syslinbit.com>`__
+
+  -  Steve Sakoman: <steve [at] sakoman [dot] com> `Public key <https://keys.openpgp.org/search?q=steve%40sakoman.com>`__
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/speeding-up-build.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/speeding-up-build.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6e0d7873ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/speeding-up-build.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Speeding Up a Build
+*******************
+
+Build time can be an issue. By default, the build system uses simple
+controls to try and maximize build efficiency. In general, the default
+settings for all the following variables result in the most efficient
+build times when dealing with single socket systems (i.e. a single CPU).
+If you have multiple CPUs, you might try increasing the default values
+to gain more speed. See the descriptions in the glossary for each
+variable for more information:
+
+-  :term:`BB_NUMBER_THREADS`:
+   The maximum number of threads BitBake simultaneously executes.
+
+-  :term:`BB_NUMBER_PARSE_THREADS`:
+   The number of threads BitBake uses during parsing.
+
+-  :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE`: Extra
+   options passed to the ``make`` command during the
+   :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task in
+   order to specify parallel compilation on the local build host.
+
+-  :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST`:
+   Extra options passed to the ``make`` command during the
+   :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task in
+   order to specify parallel installation on the local build host.
+
+As mentioned, these variables all scale to the number of processor cores
+available on the build system. For single socket systems, this
+auto-scaling ensures that the build system fundamentally takes advantage
+of potential parallel operations during the build based on the build
+machine's capabilities.
+
+Additional factors that can affect build speed are:
+
+-  File system type: The file system type that the build is being
+   performed on can also influence performance. Using ``ext4`` is
+   recommended as compared to ``ext2`` and ``ext3`` due to ``ext4``
+   improved features such as extents.
+
+-  Disabling the updating of access time using ``noatime``: The
+   ``noatime`` mount option prevents the build system from updating file
+   and directory access times.
+
+-  Setting a longer commit: Using the "commit=" mount option increases
+   the interval in seconds between disk cache writes. Changing this
+   interval from the five second default to something longer increases
+   the risk of data loss but decreases the need to write to the disk,
+   thus increasing the build performance.
+
+-  Choosing the packaging backend: Of the available packaging backends,
+   IPK is the fastest. Additionally, selecting a singular packaging
+   backend also helps.
+
+-  Using ``tmpfs`` for :term:`TMPDIR`
+   as a temporary file system: While this can help speed up the build,
+   the benefits are limited due to the compiler using ``-pipe``. The
+   build system goes to some lengths to avoid ``sync()`` calls into the
+   file system on the principle that if there was a significant failure,
+   the :term:`Build Directory` contents could easily be rebuilt.
+
+-  Inheriting the :ref:`ref-classes-rm-work` class:
+   Inheriting this class has shown to speed up builds due to
+   significantly lower amounts of data stored in the data cache as well
+   as on disk. Inheriting this class also makes cleanup of
+   :term:`TMPDIR` faster, at the
+   expense of being easily able to dive into the source code. File
+   system maintainers have recommended that the fastest way to clean up
+   large numbers of files is to reformat partitions rather than delete
+   files due to the linear nature of partitions. This, of course,
+   assumes you structure the disk partitions and file systems in a way
+   that this is practical.
+
+Aside from the previous list, you should keep some trade offs in mind
+that can help you speed up the build:
+
+-  Remove items from
+   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`
+   that you might not need.
+
+-  Exclude debug symbols and other debug information: If you do not need
+   these symbols and other debug information, disabling the ``*-dbg``
+   package generation can speed up the build. You can disable this
+   generation by setting the
+   :term:`INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT`
+   variable to "1".
+
+-  Disable static library generation for recipes derived from
+   ``autoconf`` or ``libtool``: Here is an example showing how to
+   disable static libraries and still provide an override to handle
+   exceptions::
+
+      STATICLIBCONF = "--disable-static"
+      STATICLIBCONF:sqlite3-native = ""
+      EXTRA_OECONF += "${STATICLIBCONF}"
+
+   .. note::
+
+      -  Some recipes need static libraries in order to work correctly
+         (e.g. ``pseudo-native`` needs ``sqlite3-native``). Overrides,
+         as in the previous example, account for these kinds of
+         exceptions.
+
+      -  Some packages have packaging code that assumes the presence of
+         the static libraries. If so, you might need to exclude them as
+         well.
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/start.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/start.rst
index 03061a79f3..386e5f5d29 100644
--- a/documentation/dev-manual/start.rst
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/start.rst
@@ -29,14 +29,14 @@ however, keep in mind, the procedure here is simply a starting point.
 You can build off these steps and customize the procedure to fit any
 particular working environment and set of practices.
 
-1.  *Determine Who is Going to be Developing:* You first need to
+#.  *Determine Who is Going to be Developing:* You first need to
     understand who is going to be doing anything related to the Yocto
     Project and determine their roles. Making this determination is
     essential to completing subsequent steps, which are to get your
     equipment together and set up your development environment's
     hardware topology.
 
-    The following roles exist:
+    Possible roles are:
 
     -  *Application Developer:* This type of developer does application
        level work on top of an existing software stack.
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ particular working environment and set of practices.
        automated tests that are used to ensure all application and core
        system development meets desired quality standards.
 
-2.  *Gather the Hardware:* Based on the size and make-up of the team,
+#.  *Gather the Hardware:* Based on the size and make-up of the team,
     get the hardware together. Ideally, any development, build, or test
     engineer uses a system that runs a supported Linux distribution.
     These systems, in general, should be high performance (e.g. dual,
@@ -66,13 +66,13 @@ particular working environment and set of practices.
        building Yocto Project development containers to be run under
        Docker, which is described later.
 
-3.  *Understand the Hardware Topology of the Environment:* Once you
+#.  *Understand the Hardware Topology of the Environment:* Once you
     understand the hardware involved and the make-up of the team, you
     can understand the hardware topology of the development environment.
     You can get a visual idea of the machines and their roles across the
     development environment.
 
-4.  *Use Git as Your Source Control Manager (SCM):* Keeping your
+#.  *Use Git as Your Source Control Manager (SCM):* Keeping your
     :term:`Metadata` (i.e. recipes,
     configuration files, classes, and so forth) and any software you are
     developing under the control of an SCM system that is compatible
@@ -88,31 +88,18 @@ particular working environment and set of practices.
        For information about BitBake, see the
        :doc:`bitbake:index`.
 
-    It is relatively easy to set up Git services and create
-    infrastructure like :yocto_git:`/`, which is based on
-    server software called ``gitolite`` with ``cgit`` being used to
-    generate the web interface that lets you view the repositories. The
-    ``gitolite`` software identifies users using SSH keys and allows
+    It is relatively easy to set up Git services and create infrastructure like
+    :yocto_git:`/`, which is based on server software called
+    `Gitolite <https://gitolite.com>`__
+    with `cgit <https://git.zx2c4.com/cgit/about/>`__ being used to
+    generate the web interface that lets you view the repositories.
+    ``gitolite`` identifies users using SSH keys and allows
     branch-based access controls to repositories that you can control as
     little or as much as necessary.
 
-    .. note::
-
-       The setup of these services is beyond the scope of this manual.
-       However, sites such as the following exist that describe how to
-       perform setup:
-
-       -  `Gitolite <https://gitolite.com>`__: Information for
-          ``gitolite``.
-
-       -  `Interfaces, frontends, and
-          tools <https://git.wiki.kernel.org/index.php/Interfaces,_frontends,_and_tools>`__:
-          Documentation on how to create interfaces and frontends for
-          Git.
-
-5.  *Set up the Application Development Machines:* As mentioned earlier,
+#.  *Set up the Application Development Machines:* As mentioned earlier,
     application developers are creating applications on top of existing
-    software stacks. Following are some best practices for setting up
+    software stacks. Here are some best practices for setting up
     machines used for application development:
 
     -  Use a pre-built toolchain that contains the software stack
@@ -129,9 +116,9 @@ particular working environment and set of practices.
     -  Use multiple toolchains installed locally into different
        locations to allow development across versions.
 
-6.  *Set up the Core Development Machines:* As mentioned earlier, core
+#.  *Set up the Core Development Machines:* As mentioned earlier, core
     developers work on the contents of the operating system itself.
-    Following are some best practices for setting up machines used for
+    Here are some best practices for setting up machines used for
     developing images:
 
     -  Have the :term:`OpenEmbedded Build System` available on
@@ -146,7 +133,7 @@ particular working environment and set of practices.
     -  Share layers amongst the developers of a particular project and
        contain the policy configuration that defines the project.
 
-7.  *Set up an Autobuilder:* Autobuilders are often the core of the
+#.  *Set up an Autobuilder:* Autobuilders are often the core of the
     development environment. It is here that changes from individual
     developers are brought together and centrally tested. Based on this
     automated build and test environment, subsequent decisions about
@@ -184,13 +171,13 @@ particular working environment and set of practices.
     -  Allows scheduling of builds so that resources can be used
        efficiently.
 
-8.  *Set up Test Machines:* Use a small number of shared, high
+#.  *Set up Test Machines:* Use a small number of shared, high
     performance systems for testing purposes. Developers can use these
     systems for wider, more extensive testing while they continue to
     develop locally using their primary development system.
 
-9.  *Document Policies and Change Flow:* The Yocto Project uses a
-    hierarchical structure and a pull model. Scripts exist to create and
+#.  *Document Policies and Change Flow:* The Yocto Project uses a
+    hierarchical structure and a pull model. There are scripts to create and
     send pull requests (i.e. ``create-pull-request`` and
     ``send-pull-request``). This model is in line with other open source
     projects where maintainers are responsible for specific areas of the
@@ -214,9 +201,9 @@ particular working environment and set of practices.
     possible. Chances are if you have discovered the need for changes,
     someone else in the community needs them also.
 
-10. *Development Environment Summary:* Aside from the previous steps,
-    some best practices exist within the Yocto Project development
-    environment. Consider the following:
+#.  *Development Environment Summary:* Aside from the previous steps,
+    here are best practices within the Yocto Project development
+    environment:
 
     -  Use :ref:`overview-manual/development-environment:git` as the source control
        system.
@@ -224,14 +211,14 @@ particular working environment and set of practices.
     -  Maintain your Metadata in layers that make sense for your
        situation. See the ":ref:`overview-manual/yp-intro:the yocto project layer model`"
        section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual and the
-       ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:understanding and creating layers`"
+       ":ref:`dev-manual/layers:understanding and creating layers`"
        section for more information on layers.
 
     -  Separate the project's Metadata and code by using separate Git
        repositories. See the ":ref:`overview-manual/development-environment:yocto project source repositories`"
        section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual for
-       information on these repositories. See the "`Locating Yocto
-       Project Source Files <#locating-yocto-project-source-files>`__"
+       information on these repositories. See the
+       ":ref:`dev-manual/start:locating yocto project source files`"
        section for information on how to set up local Git repositories
        for related upstream Yocto Project Git repositories.
 
@@ -247,14 +234,13 @@ particular working environment and set of practices.
     -  The Yocto Project community encourages you to send patches to the
        project to fix bugs or add features. If you do submit patches,
        follow the project commit guidelines for writing good commit
-       messages. See the
-       ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:submitting a change to the yocto project`"
-       section.
+       messages. See the ":doc:`../contributor-guide/submit-changes`"
+       section in the Yocto Project and OpenEmbedded Contributor Guide.
 
     -  Send changes to the core sooner than later as others are likely
        to run into the same issues. For some guidance on mailing lists
-       to use, see the list in the
-       ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:submitting a change to the yocto project`"
+       to use, see the lists in the
+       ":ref:`contributor-guide/submit-changes:finding a suitable mailing list`"
        section. For a description
        of the available mailing lists, see the ":ref:`resources-mailinglist`" section in
        the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
@@ -268,16 +254,16 @@ development using the Yocto Project. Your build host can be a native
 Linux machine (recommended), it can be a machine (Linux, Mac, or
 Windows) that uses `CROPS <https://github.com/crops/poky-container>`__,
 which leverages `Docker Containers <https://www.docker.com/>`__ or it
-can be a Windows machine capable of running Windows Subsystem For Linux
-v2 (WSL).
+can be a Windows machine capable of running version 2 of Windows Subsystem
+For Linux (WSL 2).
 
 .. note::
 
-   The Yocto Project is not compatible with
-   `Windows Subsystem for Linux v1 <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Windows_Subsystem_for_Linux>`__.
-   It is compatible but not officially supported nor validated with
-   WSLv2. If you still decide to use WSL please upgrade to
-   `WSLv2 <https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/wsl/install-win10>`__.
+   The Yocto Project is not compatible with version 1 of
+   :wikipedia:`Windows Subsystem for Linux <Windows_Subsystem_for_Linux>`.
+   It is compatible but neither officially supported nor validated with
+   WSL 2. If you still decide to use WSL please upgrade to
+   `WSL 2 <https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/wsl/install>`__.
 
 Once your build host is set up to use the Yocto Project, further steps
 are necessary depending on what you want to accomplish. See the
@@ -297,38 +283,40 @@ Setting Up a Native Linux Host
 Follow these steps to prepare a native Linux machine as your Yocto
 Project Build Host:
 
-1. *Use a Supported Linux Distribution:* You should have a reasonably
+#. *Use a Supported Linux Distribution:* You should have a reasonably
    current Linux-based host system. You will have the best results with
    a recent release of Fedora, openSUSE, Debian, Ubuntu, RHEL or CentOS
    as these releases are frequently tested against the Yocto Project and
    officially supported. For a list of the distributions under
    validation and their status, see the ":ref:`Supported Linux
-   Distributions <detailed-supported-distros>`"
+   Distributions <system-requirements-supported-distros>`"
    section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual and the wiki page at
    :yocto_wiki:`Distribution Support </Distribution_Support>`.
 
-2. *Have Enough Free Memory:* Your system should have at least 50 Gbytes
+#. *Have Enough Free Memory:* Your system should have at least 50 Gbytes
    of free disk space for building images.
 
-3. *Meet Minimal Version Requirements:* The OpenEmbedded build system
+#. *Meet Minimal Version Requirements:* The OpenEmbedded build system
    should be able to run on any modern distribution that has the
-   following versions for Git, tar, Python and gcc.
+   following versions for Git, tar, Python, gcc and make.
+
+   -  Git &MIN_GIT_VERSION; or greater
 
-   -  Git 1.8.3.1 or greater
+   -  tar &MIN_TAR_VERSION; or greater
 
-   -  tar 1.28 or greater
+   -  Python &MIN_PYTHON_VERSION; or greater.
 
-   -  Python 3.5.0 or greater.
+   -  gcc &MIN_GCC_VERSION; or greater.
 
-   -  gcc 5.0 or greater.
+   -  GNU make &MIN_MAKE_VERSION; or greater
 
-   If your build host does not meet any of these three listed version
+   If your build host does not meet any of these listed version
    requirements, you can take steps to prepare the system so that you
    can still use the Yocto Project. See the
-   ":ref:`ref-manual/system-requirements:required git, tar, python and gcc versions`"
+   ":ref:`ref-manual/system-requirements:required git, tar, python, make and gcc versions`"
    section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual for information.
 
-4. *Install Development Host Packages:* Required development host
+#. *Install Development Host Packages:* Required development host
    packages vary depending on your build host and what you want to do
    with the Yocto Project. Collectively, the number of required packages
    is large if you want to be able to cover all cases.
@@ -346,7 +334,10 @@ to use the Extensible SDK, see the ":doc:`/sdk-manual/extensible`" Chapter in th
 Project Application Development and the Extensible Software Development
 Kit (eSDK) manual. If you want to work on the kernel, see the :doc:`/kernel-dev/index`. If you are going to use
 Toaster, see the ":doc:`/toaster-manual/setup-and-use`"
-section in the Toaster User Manual.
+section in the Toaster User Manual. If you are a VSCode user, you can configure
+the `Yocto Project BitBake
+<https://marketplace.visualstudio.com/items?itemName=yocto-project.yocto-bitbake>`__
+extension accordingly.
 
 Setting Up to Use CROss PlatformS (CROPS)
 -----------------------------------------
@@ -360,7 +351,7 @@ Yocto Project on a Windows, Mac, or Linux machine.
 Follow these general steps to prepare a Windows, Mac, or Linux machine
 as your Yocto Project build host:
 
-1. *Determine What Your Build Host Needs:*
+#. *Determine What Your Build Host Needs:*
    `Docker <https://www.docker.com/what-docker>`__ is a software
    container platform that you need to install on the build host.
    Depending on your build host, you might have to install different
@@ -369,65 +360,57 @@ as your Yocto Project build host:
    Platforms <https://docs.docker.com/engine/install/#supported-platforms>`__"
    your build host needs to run containers.
 
-2. *Choose What To Install:* Depending on whether or not your build host
+#. *Choose What To Install:* Depending on whether or not your build host
    meets system requirements, you need to install "Docker CE Stable" or
    the "Docker Toolbox". Most situations call for Docker CE. However, if
    you have a build host that does not meet requirements (e.g.
    Pre-Windows 10 or Windows 10 "Home" version), you must install Docker
    Toolbox instead.
 
-3. *Go to the Install Site for Your Platform:* Click the link for the
+#. *Go to the Install Site for Your Platform:* Click the link for the
    Docker edition associated with your build host's native software. For
    example, if your build host is running Microsoft Windows Version 10
    and you want the Docker CE Stable edition, click that link under
    "Supported Platforms".
 
-4. *Install the Software:* Once you have understood all the
+#. *Install the Software:* Once you have understood all the
    pre-requisites, you can download and install the appropriate
    software. Follow the instructions for your specific machine and the
    type of the software you need to install:
 
-   -  Install `Docker CE for
+   -  Install `Docker Desktop on
       Windows <https://docs.docker.com/docker-for-windows/install/#install-docker-desktop-on-windows>`__
       for Windows build hosts that meet requirements.
 
-   -  Install `Docker CE for
+   -  Install `Docker Desktop on
       MacOs <https://docs.docker.com/docker-for-mac/install/#install-and-run-docker-desktop-on-mac>`__
       for Mac build hosts that meet requirements.
 
-   -  Install `Docker Toolbox for
-      Windows <https://docs.docker.com/toolbox/toolbox_install_windows/>`__
-      for Windows build hosts that do not meet Docker requirements.
-
-   -  Install `Docker Toolbox for
-      MacOS <https://docs.docker.com/toolbox/toolbox_install_mac/>`__
-      for Mac build hosts that do not meet Docker requirements.
-
-   -  Install `Docker CE for
-      CentOS <https://docs.docker.com/install/linux/docker-ce/centos/>`__
+   -  Install `Docker Engine on
+      CentOS <https://docs.docker.com/engine/install/centos/>`__
       for Linux build hosts running the CentOS distribution.
 
-   -  Install `Docker CE for
-      Debian <https://docs.docker.com/install/linux/docker-ce/debian/>`__
+   -  Install `Docker Engine on
+      Debian <https://docs.docker.com/engine/install/debian/>`__
       for Linux build hosts running the Debian distribution.
 
-   -  Install `Docker CE for
-      Fedora <https://docs.docker.com/install/linux/docker-ce/fedora/>`__
+   -  Install `Docker Engine for
+      Fedora <https://docs.docker.com/engine/install/fedora/>`__
       for Linux build hosts running the Fedora distribution.
 
-   -  Install `Docker CE for
-      Ubuntu <https://docs.docker.com/install/linux/docker-ce/ubuntu/>`__
+   -  Install `Docker Engine for
+      Ubuntu <https://docs.docker.com/engine/install/ubuntu/>`__
       for Linux build hosts running the Ubuntu distribution.
 
-5. *Optionally Orient Yourself With Docker:* If you are unfamiliar with
+#. *Optionally Orient Yourself With Docker:* If you are unfamiliar with
    Docker and the container concept, you can learn more here -
    https://docs.docker.com/get-started/.
 
-6. *Launch Docker or Docker Toolbox:* You should be able to launch
+#. *Launch Docker or Docker Toolbox:* You should be able to launch
    Docker or the Docker Toolbox and have a terminal shell on your
    development host.
 
-7. *Set Up the Containers to Use the Yocto Project:* Go to
+#. *Set Up the Containers to Use the Yocto Project:* Go to
    https://github.com/crops/docker-win-mac-docs/wiki and follow
    the directions for your particular build host (i.e. Linux, Mac, or
    Windows).
@@ -446,37 +429,41 @@ section. If you are going to use the Extensible SDK container, see the
 Project Application Development and the Extensible Software Development
 Kit (eSDK) manual. If you are going to use the Toaster container, see
 the ":doc:`/toaster-manual/setup-and-use`"
-section in the Toaster User Manual.
+section in the Toaster User Manual. If you are a VSCode user, you can configure
+the `Yocto Project BitBake
+<https://marketplace.visualstudio.com/items?itemName=yocto-project.yocto-bitbake>`__
+extension accordingly.
 
-Setting Up to Use Windows Subsystem For Linux (WSLv2)
+Setting Up to Use Windows Subsystem For Linux (WSL 2)
 -----------------------------------------------------
 
-With `Windows Subsystem for Linux
-(WSLv2) <https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/wsl/wsl2-about>`__,
+With `Windows Subsystem for Linux (WSL 2)
+<https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/wsl/>`__,
 you can create a Yocto Project development environment that allows you
 to build on Windows. You can set up a Linux distribution inside Windows
 in which you can develop using the Yocto Project.
 
-Follow these general steps to prepare a Windows machine using WSLv2 as
+Follow these general steps to prepare a Windows machine using WSL 2 as
 your Yocto Project build host:
 
-1. *Make sure your Windows 10 machine is capable of running WSLv2:*
-   WSLv2 is only available for Windows 10 builds > 18917. To check which
-   build version you are running, you may open a command prompt on
-   Windows and execute the command "ver".
-   ::
+#. *Make sure your Windows machine is capable of running WSL 2:*
+
+   While all Windows 11 and Windows Server 2022 builds support WSL 2,
+   the first versions of Windows 10 and Windows Server 2019 didn't.
+   Check the minimum build numbers for `Windows 10
+   <https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/wsl/install-manual#step-2---check-requirements-for-running-wsl-2>`__
+   and for `Windows Server 2019
+   <https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/wsl/install-on-server>`__.
+
+   To check which build version you are running, you may open a command
+   prompt on Windows and execute the command "ver"::
 
       C:\Users\myuser> ver
 
       Microsoft Windows [Version 10.0.19041.153]
 
-   If your build is capable of running
-   WSLv2 you may continue, for more information on this subject or
-   instructions on how to upgrade to WSLv2 visit `Windows 10
-   WSLv2 <https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/wsl/wsl2-install>`__
-
-2. *Install the Linux distribution of your choice inside Windows 10:*
-   Once you know your version of Windows 10 supports WSLv2, you can
+#. *Install the Linux distribution of your choice inside WSL 2:*
+   Once you know your version of Windows supports WSL 2, you can
    install the distribution of your choice from the Microsoft Store.
    Open the Microsoft Store and search for Linux. While there are
    several Linux distributions available, the assumption is that your
@@ -485,37 +472,33 @@ your Yocto Project build host:
    making your selection, simply click "Get" to download and install the
    distribution.
 
-3. *Check your Linux distribution is using WSLv2:* Open a Windows
-   PowerShell and run:
-   ::
+#. *Check which Linux distribution WSL 2 is using:* Open a Windows
+   PowerShell and run::
 
       C:\WINDOWS\system32> wsl -l -v
       NAME    STATE   VERSION
       *Ubuntu Running 2
 
-   Note the version column which says the WSL version
-   being used by your distribution, on compatible systems, this can be
-   changed back at any point in time.
+   Note that WSL 2 supports running as many different Linux distributions
+   as you want to install.
 
-4. *Optionally Orient Yourself on WSL:* If you are unfamiliar with WSL,
-   you can learn more here -
+#. *Optionally Get Familiar with WSL:* You can learn more on
    https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/wsl/wsl2-about.
 
-5. *Launch your WSL Distibution:* From the Windows start menu simply
+#. *Launch your WSL Distibution:* From the Windows start menu simply
    launch your WSL distribution just like any other application.
 
-6. *Optimize your WSLv2 storage often:* Due to the way storage is
-   handled on WSLv2, the storage space used by the undelying Linux
-   distribution is not reflected immedately, and since bitbake heavily
+#. *Optimize your WSL 2 storage often:* Due to the way storage is
+   handled on WSL 2, the storage space used by the underlying Linux
+   distribution is not reflected immediately, and since BitBake heavily
    uses storage, after several builds, you may be unaware you are
-   running out of space. WSLv2 uses a VHDX file for storage, this issue
-   can be easily avoided by manually optimizing this file often, this
-   can be done in the following way:
+   running out of space. As WSL 2 uses a VHDX file for storage, this issue
+   can be easily avoided by regularly optimizing this file in a manual way:
 
-   1. *Find the location of your VHDX file:* First you need to find the
-      distro app package directory, to achieve this open a Windows
-      Powershell as Administrator and run:
-      ::
+   1. *Find the location of your VHDX file:*
+
+      First you need to find the distro app package directory, to achieve this
+      open a Windows Powershell as Administrator and run::
 
          C:\WINDOWS\system32> Get-AppxPackage -Name "*Ubuntu*" | Select PackageFamilyName
          PackageFamilyName
@@ -525,43 +508,62 @@ your Yocto Project build host:
 
       You should now
       replace the PackageFamilyName and your user on the following path
-      to find your VHDX file:
-      ::
+      to find your VHDX file::
 
-          ls C:\Users\myuser\AppData\Local\Packages\CanonicalGroupLimited.UbuntuonWindows_79abcdefgh\LocalState\
-          Mode                 LastWriteTime         Length Name
-          -a----         3/14/2020   9:52 PM    57418973184 ext4.vhdx
+         ls C:\Users\myuser\AppData\Local\Packages\CanonicalGroupLimited.UbuntuonWindows_79abcdefgh\LocalState\
+         Mode                 LastWriteTime         Length Name
+         -a----         3/14/2020   9:52 PM    57418973184 ext4.vhdx
 
       Your VHDX file path is:
       ``C:\Users\myuser\AppData\Local\Packages\CanonicalGroupLimited.UbuntuonWindows_79abcdefgh\LocalState\ext4.vhdx``
 
-   2. *Optimize your VHDX file:* Open a Windows Powershell as
-      Administrator to optimize your VHDX file, shutting down WSL first:
-      ::
+   2a. *Optimize your VHDX file using Windows Powershell:*
+
+       To use the ``optimize-vhd`` cmdlet below, first install the Hyper-V
+       option on Windows. Then, open a Windows Powershell as Administrator to
+       optimize your VHDX file, shutting down WSL first::
 
          C:\WINDOWS\system32> wsl --shutdown
          C:\WINDOWS\system32> optimize-vhd -Path C:\Users\myuser\AppData\Local\Packages\CanonicalGroupLimited.UbuntuonWindows_79abcdefgh\LocalState\ext4.vhdx -Mode full
 
-      A progress bar should be shown while optimizing the
-      VHDX file, and storage should now be reflected correctly on the
-      Windows Explorer.
+       A progress bar should be shown while optimizing the
+       VHDX file, and storage should now be reflected correctly on the
+       Windows Explorer.
+
+   2b. *Optimize your VHDX file using DiskPart:*
+
+       The ``optimize-vhd`` cmdlet noted in step 2a above is provided by
+       Hyper-V. Not all SKUs of Windows can install Hyper-V. As an alternative,
+       use the DiskPart tool. To start, open a Windows command prompt as
+       Administrator to optimize your VHDX file, shutting down WSL first::
+
+         C:\WINDOWS\system32> wsl --shutdown
+         C:\WINDOWS\system32> diskpart
+
+         DISKPART> select vdisk file="<path_to_VHDX_file>"
+         DISKPART> attach vdisk readonly
+         DISKPART> compact vdisk
+         DISKPART> exit
 
 .. note::
 
-   The current implementation of WSLv2 does not have out-of-the-box
+   The current implementation of WSL 2 does not have out-of-the-box
    access to external devices such as those connected through a USB
    port, but it automatically mounts your ``C:`` drive on ``/mnt/c/``
    (and others), which you can use to share deploy artifacts to be later
-   flashed on hardware through Windows, but your build directory should
-   not reside inside this mountpoint.
+   flashed on hardware through Windows, but your :term:`Build Directory`
+   should not reside inside this mountpoint.
 
-Once you have WSLv2 set up, everything is in place to develop just as if
+Once you have WSL 2 set up, everything is in place to develop just as if
 you were running on a native Linux machine. If you are going to use the
 Extensible SDK container, see the ":doc:`/sdk-manual/extensible`" Chapter in the Yocto
 Project Application Development and the Extensible Software Development
 Kit (eSDK) manual. If you are going to use the Toaster container, see
 the ":doc:`/toaster-manual/setup-and-use`"
-section in the Toaster User Manual.
+section in the Toaster User Manual. If you are a VSCode user, you can configure
+the `Yocto Project BitBake
+<https://marketplace.visualstudio.com/items?itemName=yocto-project.yocto-bitbake>`__
+extension accordingly.
 
 Locating Yocto Project Source Files
 ===================================
@@ -591,14 +593,14 @@ repository at :yocto_git:`/poky`.
 Use the following procedure to locate the latest upstream copy of the
 ``poky`` Git repository:
 
-1. *Access Repositories:* Open a browser and go to
+#. *Access Repositories:* Open a browser and go to
    :yocto_git:`/` to access the GUI-based interface into the
    Yocto Project source repositories.
 
-2. *Select the Repository:* Click on the repository in which you are
+#. *Select the Repository:* Click on the repository in which you are
    interested (e.g. ``poky``).
 
-3. *Find the URL Used to Clone the Repository:* At the bottom of the
+#. *Find the URL Used to Clone the Repository:* At the bottom of the
    page, note the URL used to clone that repository
    (e.g. :yocto_git:`/poky`).
 
@@ -607,73 +609,43 @@ Use the following procedure to locate the latest upstream copy of the
       For information on cloning a repository, see the
       ":ref:`dev-manual/start:cloning the \`\`poky\`\` repository`" section.
 
-Accessing Index of Releases
----------------------------
+Accessing Source Archives
+-------------------------
+
+The Yocto Project also provides source archives of its releases, which
+are available on :yocto_dl:`/releases/yocto/`. Then, choose the subdirectory
+containing the release you wish to use, for example
+:yocto_dl:`yocto-&DISTRO; </releases/yocto/yocto-&DISTRO;/>`.
 
-Yocto Project maintains an Index of Releases area that contains related
-files that contribute to the Yocto Project. Rather than Git
-repositories, these files are tarballs that represent snapshots in time
-of a given component.
+You will find there source archives of individual components (if you wish
+to use them individually), and of the corresponding Poky release bundling
+a selection of these components.
 
 .. note::
 
    The recommended method for accessing Yocto Project components is to
    use Git to clone the upstream repository and work from within that
-   locally cloned repository. The procedure in this section exists
-   should you desire a tarball snapshot of any given component.
-
-Follow these steps to locate and download a particular tarball:
-
-1. *Access the Index of Releases:* Open a browser and go to
-   :yocto_dl:`Index of Releases </releases>`. The
-   list represents released components (e.g. ``bitbake``, ``sato``, and
-   so on).
-
-   .. note::
-
-      The ``yocto`` directory contains the full array of released Poky
-      tarballs. The ``poky`` directory in the Index of Releases was
-      historically used for very early releases and exists now only for
-      retroactive completeness.
-
-2. *Select a Component:* Click on any released component in which you
-   are interested (e.g. ``yocto``).
-
-3. *Find the Tarball:* Drill down to find the associated tarball. For
-   example, click on ``yocto-&DISTRO;`` to view files associated with the
-   Yocto Project &DISTRO; release (e.g.
-   ``&YOCTO_POKY;.tar.bz2``, which is the
-   released Poky tarball).
-
-4. *Download the Tarball:* Click the tarball to download and save a
-   snapshot of the given component.
+   locally cloned repository.
 
 Using the Downloads Page
 ------------------------
 
-The :yocto_home:`Yocto Project Website <>` uses a "DOWNLOADS" page
+The :yocto_home:`Yocto Project Website <>` uses a "RELEASES" page
 from which you can locate and download tarballs of any Yocto Project
 release. Rather than Git repositories, these files represent snapshot
 tarballs similar to the tarballs located in the Index of Releases
-described in the "`Accessing Index of
-Releases <#accessing-index-of-releases>`__" section.
-
-.. note::
-
-   The recommended method for accessing Yocto Project components is to
-   use Git to clone a repository and work from within that local
-   repository. The procedure in this section exists should you desire a
-   tarball snapshot of any given component.
+described in the ":ref:`dev-manual/start:accessing source archives`" section.
 
-1. *Go to the Yocto Project Website:* Open The
+#. *Go to the Yocto Project Website:* Open The
    :yocto_home:`Yocto Project Website <>` in your browser.
 
-2. *Get to the Downloads Area:* Select the "DOWNLOADS" item from the
-   pull-down "SOFTWARE" tab menu near the top of the page.
+#. *Get to the Downloads Area:* Select the "RELEASES" item from the
+   pull-down "DEVELOPMENT" tab menu near the top of the page.
 
-3. *Select a Yocto Project Release:* Use the menu next to "RELEASE" to
-   display and choose a recent or past supported Yocto Project release
-   (e.g. &DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP;, &DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP_MINUS_ONE;, and so forth).
+#. *Select a Yocto Project Release:* On the top of the "RELEASE" page currently
+   supported releases are displayed, further down past supported Yocto Project
+   releases are visible. The "Download" links in the rows of the table there
+   will lead to the download tarballs for the release.
 
    .. note::
 
@@ -683,35 +655,9 @@ Releases <#accessing-index-of-releases>`__" section.
    You can use the "RELEASE ARCHIVE" link to reveal a menu of all Yocto
    Project releases.
 
-4. *Download Tools or Board Support Packages (BSPs):* From the
-   "DOWNLOADS" page, you can download tools or BSPs as well. Just scroll
-   down the page and look for what you need.
-
-Accessing Nightly Builds
-------------------------
-
-Yocto Project maintains an area for nightly builds that contains tarball
-releases at https://autobuilder.yocto.io//pub/nightly/. These builds include Yocto
-Project releases ("poky"), toolchains, and builds for supported
-machines.
-
-Should you ever want to access a nightly build of a particular Yocto
-Project component, use the following procedure:
-
-1. *Locate the Index of Nightly Builds:* Open a browser and go to
-   https://autobuilder.yocto.io//pub/nightly/ to access the Nightly Builds.
-
-2. *Select a Date:* Click on the date in which you are interested. If
-   you want the latest builds, use "CURRENT".
-
-3. *Select a Build:* Choose the area in which you are interested. For
-   example, if you are looking for the most recent toolchains, select
-   the "toolchain" link.
-
-4. *Find the Tarball:* Drill down to find the associated tarball.
-
-5. *Download the Tarball:* Click the tarball to download and save a
-   snapshot of the given component.
+#. *Download Tools or Board Support Packages (BSPs):* Next to the tarballs you
+   will find download tools or BSPs as well. Just select a Yocto Project
+   release and look for what you need.
 
 Cloning and Checking Out Branches
 =================================
@@ -737,13 +683,12 @@ Cloning the ``poky`` Repository
 Follow these steps to create a local version of the upstream
 :term:`Poky` Git repository.
 
-1. *Set Your Directory:* Change your working directory to where you want
+#. *Set Your Directory:* Change your working directory to where you want
    to create your local copy of ``poky``.
 
-2. *Clone the Repository:* The following example command clones the
+#. *Clone the Repository:* The following example command clones the
    ``poky`` repository and uses the default name "poky" for your local
-   repository:
-   ::
+   repository::
 
       $ git clone git://git.yoctoproject.org/poky
       Cloning into 'poky'...
@@ -759,16 +704,15 @@ Follow these steps to create a local version of the upstream
    "master" branch, which results in a snapshot of the latest
    development changes for "master". For information on how to check out
    a specific development branch or on how to check out a local branch
-   based on a tag name, see the "`Checking Out By Branch in
-   Poky <#checking-out-by-branch-in-poky>`__" and `Checking Out By Tag
-   in Poky <#checkout-out-by-tag-in-poky>`__" sections, respectively.
+   based on a tag name, see the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/start:checking out by branch in poky`" and
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/start:checking out by tag in poky`" sections, respectively.
 
    Once the local repository is created, you can change to that
-   directory and check its status. Here, the single "master" branch
-   exists on your system and by default, it is checked out:
-   ::
+   directory and check its status. The ``master`` branch is checked out
+   by default::
 
-      $ cd ~/poky
+      $ cd poky
       $ git status
       On branch master
       Your branch is up-to-date with 'origin/master'.
@@ -798,13 +742,13 @@ and then specifically check out that development branch.
    Further development on top of the branch that occurs after check it
    out can occur.
 
-1. *Switch to the Poky Directory:* If you have a local poky Git
+#. *Switch to the Poky Directory:* If you have a local poky Git
    repository, switch to that directory. If you do not have the local
    copy of poky, see the
    ":ref:`dev-manual/start:cloning the \`\`poky\`\` repository`"
    section.
 
-2. *Determine Existing Branch Names:*
+#. *Determine Existing Branch Names:*
    ::
 
       $ git branch -a
@@ -825,10 +769,9 @@ and then specifically check out that development branch.
       remotes/origin/zeus-next
       ... and so on ...
 
-3. *Check out the Branch:* Check out the development branch in which you
+#. *Check out the Branch:* Check out the development branch in which you
    want to work. For example, to access the files for the Yocto Project
-   &DISTRO; Release (&DISTRO_NAME;), use the following command:
-   ::
+   &DISTRO; Release (&DISTRO_NAME;), use the following command::
 
       $ git checkout -b &DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP; origin/&DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP;
       Branch &DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP; set up to track remote branch &DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP; from origin.
@@ -840,8 +783,7 @@ and then specifically check out that development branch.
 
    The following command displays the branches that are now part of your
    local poky repository. The asterisk character indicates the branch
-   that is currently checked out for work:
-   ::
+   that is currently checked out for work::
 
       $ git branch
         master
@@ -861,21 +803,19 @@ similar to checking out by branch name except you use tag names.
    Checking out a branch based on a tag gives you a stable set of files
    not affected by development on the branch above the tag.
 
-1. *Switch to the Poky Directory:* If you have a local poky Git
+#. *Switch to the Poky Directory:* If you have a local poky Git
    repository, switch to that directory. If you do not have the local
    copy of poky, see the
    ":ref:`dev-manual/start:cloning the \`\`poky\`\` repository`"
    section.
 
-2. *Fetch the Tag Names:* To checkout the branch based on a tag name,
-   you need to fetch the upstream tags into your local repository:
-   ::
+#. *Fetch the Tag Names:* To checkout the branch based on a tag name,
+   you need to fetch the upstream tags into your local repository::
 
       $ git fetch --tags
       $
 
-3. *List the Tag Names:* You can list the tag names now:
-   ::
+#. *List the Tag Names:* You can list the tag names now::
 
       $ git tag
       1.1_M1.final
@@ -897,7 +837,7 @@ similar to checking out by branch name except you use tag names.
       yocto_1.5_M5.rc8
 
 
-4. *Check out the Branch:*
+#. *Check out the Branch:*
    ::
 
       $ git checkout tags/yocto-&DISTRO; -b my_yocto_&DISTRO;
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/temporary-source-code.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/temporary-source-code.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..08bf68d982
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/temporary-source-code.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Finding Temporary Source Code
+*****************************
+
+You might find it helpful during development to modify the temporary
+source code used by recipes to build packages. For example, suppose you
+are developing a patch and you need to experiment a bit to figure out
+your solution. After you have initially built the package, you can
+iteratively tweak the source code, which is located in the
+:term:`Build Directory`, and then you can force a re-compile and quickly
+test your altered code. Once you settle on a solution, you can then preserve
+your changes in the form of patches.
+
+During a build, the unpacked temporary source code used by recipes to
+build packages is available in the :term:`Build Directory` as defined by the
+:term:`S` variable. Below is the default value for the :term:`S` variable as
+defined in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file in the
+:term:`Source Directory`::
+
+   S = "${WORKDIR}/${BP}"
+
+You should be aware that many recipes override the
+:term:`S` variable. For example, recipes that fetch their source from Git
+usually set :term:`S` to ``${WORKDIR}/git``.
+
+.. note::
+
+   The :term:`BP` represents the base recipe name, which consists of the name
+   and version::
+
+           BP = "${BPN}-${PV}"
+
+
+The path to the work directory for the recipe
+(:term:`WORKDIR`) is defined as
+follows::
+
+   ${TMPDIR}/work/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR}
+
+The actual directory depends on several things:
+
+-  :term:`TMPDIR`: The top-level build
+   output directory.
+
+-  :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`:
+   The target system identifier.
+
+-  :term:`PN`: The recipe name.
+
+-  :term:`EXTENDPE`: The epoch --- if
+   :term:`PE` is not specified, which is
+   usually the case for most recipes, then :term:`EXTENDPE` is blank.
+
+-  :term:`PV`: The recipe version.
+
+-  :term:`PR`: The recipe revision.
+
+As an example, assume a Source Directory top-level folder named
+``poky``, a default :term:`Build Directory` at ``poky/build``, and a
+``qemux86-poky-linux`` machine target system. Furthermore, suppose your
+recipe is named ``foo_1.3.0.bb``. In this case, the work directory the
+build system uses to build the package would be as follows::
+
+   poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/foo/1.3.0-r0
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/upgrading-recipes.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/upgrading-recipes.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4fac78bdfb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/upgrading-recipes.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,397 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Upgrading Recipes
+*****************
+
+Over time, upstream developers publish new versions for software built
+by layer recipes. It is recommended to keep recipes up-to-date with
+upstream version releases.
+
+While there are several methods to upgrade a recipe, you might
+consider checking on the upgrade status of a recipe first. You can do so
+using the ``devtool check-upgrade-status`` command. See the
+":ref:`devtool-checking-on-the-upgrade-status-of-a-recipe`"
+section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual for more information.
+
+The remainder of this section describes three ways you can upgrade a
+recipe. You can use the Automated Upgrade Helper (AUH) to set up
+automatic version upgrades. Alternatively, you can use
+``devtool upgrade`` to set up semi-automatic version upgrades. Finally,
+you can manually upgrade a recipe by editing the recipe itself.
+
+Using the Auto Upgrade Helper (AUH)
+===================================
+
+The AUH utility works in conjunction with the OpenEmbedded build system
+in order to automatically generate upgrades for recipes based on new
+versions being published upstream. Use AUH when you want to create a
+service that performs the upgrades automatically and optionally sends
+you an email with the results.
+
+AUH allows you to update several recipes with a single use. You can also
+optionally perform build and integration tests using images with the
+results saved to your hard drive and emails of results optionally sent
+to recipe maintainers. Finally, AUH creates Git commits with appropriate
+commit messages in the layer's tree for the changes made to recipes.
+
+.. note::
+
+   In some conditions, you should not use AUH to upgrade recipes
+   and should instead use either ``devtool upgrade`` or upgrade your
+   recipes manually:
+
+   -  When AUH cannot complete the upgrade sequence. This situation
+      usually results because custom patches carried by the recipe
+      cannot be automatically rebased to the new version. In this case,
+      ``devtool upgrade`` allows you to manually resolve conflicts.
+
+   -  When for any reason you want fuller control over the upgrade
+      process. For example, when you want special arrangements for
+      testing.
+
+The following steps describe how to set up the AUH utility:
+
+#. *Be Sure the Development Host is Set Up:* You need to be sure that
+   your development host is set up to use the Yocto Project. For
+   information on how to set up your host, see the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/start:Preparing the Build Host`" section.
+
+#. *Make Sure Git is Configured:* The AUH utility requires Git to be
+   configured because AUH uses Git to save upgrades. Thus, you must have
+   Git user and email configured. The following command shows your
+   configurations::
+
+      $ git config --list
+
+   If you do not have the user and
+   email configured, you can use the following commands to do so::
+
+      $ git config --global user.name some_name
+      $ git config --global user.email username@domain.com
+
+#. *Clone the AUH Repository:* To use AUH, you must clone the repository
+   onto your development host. The following command uses Git to create
+   a local copy of the repository on your system::
+
+      $ git clone git://git.yoctoproject.org/auto-upgrade-helper
+      Cloning into 'auto-upgrade-helper'... remote: Counting objects: 768, done.
+      remote: Compressing objects: 100% (300/300), done.
+      remote: Total 768 (delta 499), reused 703 (delta 434)
+      Receiving objects: 100% (768/768), 191.47 KiB | 98.00 KiB/s, done.
+      Resolving deltas: 100% (499/499), done.
+      Checking connectivity... done.
+
+   AUH is not part of the :term:`OpenEmbedded-Core (OE-Core)` or
+   :term:`Poky` repositories.
+
+#. *Create a Dedicated Build Directory:* Run the :ref:`structure-core-script`
+   script to create a fresh :term:`Build Directory` that you use exclusively
+   for running the AUH utility::
+
+      $ cd poky
+      $ source oe-init-build-env your_AUH_build_directory
+
+   Re-using an existing :term:`Build Directory` and its configurations is not
+   recommended as existing settings could cause AUH to fail or behave
+   undesirably.
+
+#. *Make Configurations in Your Local Configuration File:* Several
+   settings are needed in the ``local.conf`` file in the build
+   directory you just created for AUH. Make these following
+   configurations:
+
+   -  If you want to enable :ref:`Build
+      History <dev-manual/build-quality:maintaining build output quality>`,
+      which is optional, you need the following lines in the
+      ``conf/local.conf`` file::
+
+         INHERIT =+ "buildhistory"
+         BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT = "1"
+
+      With this configuration and a successful
+      upgrade, a build history "diff" file appears in the
+      ``upgrade-helper/work/recipe/buildhistory-diff.txt`` file found in
+      your :term:`Build Directory`.
+
+   -  If you want to enable testing through the :ref:`ref-classes-testimage`
+      class, which is optional, you need to have the following set in
+      your ``conf/local.conf`` file::
+
+         IMAGE_CLASSES += "testimage"
+
+      .. note::
+
+         If your distro does not enable by default ptest, which Poky
+         does, you need the following in your ``local.conf`` file::
+
+                 DISTRO_FEATURES:append = " ptest"
+
+
+#. *Optionally Start a vncserver:* If you are running in a server
+   without an X11 session, you need to start a vncserver::
+
+      $ vncserver :1
+      $ export DISPLAY=:1
+
+#. *Create and Edit an AUH Configuration File:* You need to have the
+   ``upgrade-helper/upgrade-helper.conf`` configuration file in your
+   :term:`Build Directory`. You can find a sample configuration file in the
+   :yocto_git:`AUH source repository </auto-upgrade-helper/tree/>`.
+
+   Read through the sample file and make configurations as needed. For
+   example, if you enabled build history in your ``local.conf`` as
+   described earlier, you must enable it in ``upgrade-helper.conf``.
+
+   Also, if you are using the default ``maintainers.inc`` file supplied
+   with Poky and located in ``meta-yocto`` and you do not set a
+   "maintainers_whitelist" or "global_maintainer_override" in the
+   ``upgrade-helper.conf`` configuration, and you specify "-e all" on
+   the AUH command-line, the utility automatically sends out emails to
+   all the default maintainers. Please avoid this.
+
+This next set of examples describes how to use the AUH:
+
+-  *Upgrading a Specific Recipe:* To upgrade a specific recipe, use the
+   following form::
+
+      $ upgrade-helper.py recipe_name
+
+   For example, this command upgrades the ``xmodmap`` recipe::
+
+      $ upgrade-helper.py xmodmap
+
+-  *Upgrading a Specific Recipe to a Particular Version:* To upgrade a
+   specific recipe to a particular version, use the following form::
+
+      $ upgrade-helper.py recipe_name -t version
+
+   For example, this command upgrades the ``xmodmap`` recipe to version 1.2.3::
+
+      $ upgrade-helper.py xmodmap -t 1.2.3
+
+-  *Upgrading all Recipes to the Latest Versions and Suppressing Email
+   Notifications:* To upgrade all recipes to their most recent versions
+   and suppress the email notifications, use the following command::
+
+      $ upgrade-helper.py all
+
+-  *Upgrading all Recipes to the Latest Versions and Send Email
+   Notifications:* To upgrade all recipes to their most recent versions
+   and send email messages to maintainers for each attempted recipe as
+   well as a status email, use the following command::
+
+      $ upgrade-helper.py -e all
+
+Once you have run the AUH utility, you can find the results in the AUH
+:term:`Build Directory`::
+
+   ${BUILDDIR}/upgrade-helper/timestamp
+
+The AUH utility
+also creates recipe update commits from successful upgrade attempts in
+the layer tree.
+
+You can easily set up to run the AUH utility on a regular basis by using
+a cron job. See the
+:yocto_git:`weeklyjob.sh </auto-upgrade-helper/tree/weeklyjob.sh>`
+file distributed with the utility for an example.
+
+Using ``devtool upgrade``
+=========================
+
+As mentioned earlier, an alternative method for upgrading recipes to
+newer versions is to use
+:doc:`devtool upgrade </ref-manual/devtool-reference>`.
+You can read about ``devtool upgrade`` in general in the
+":ref:`sdk-manual/extensible:use \`\`devtool upgrade\`\` to create a version of the recipe that supports a newer version of the software`"
+section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the Extensible
+Software Development Kit (eSDK) Manual.
+
+To see all the command-line options available with ``devtool upgrade``,
+use the following help command::
+
+   $ devtool upgrade -h
+
+If you want to find out what version a recipe is currently at upstream
+without any attempt to upgrade your local version of the recipe, you can
+use the following command::
+
+   $ devtool latest-version recipe_name
+
+As mentioned in the previous section describing AUH, ``devtool upgrade``
+works in a less-automated manner than AUH. Specifically,
+``devtool upgrade`` only works on a single recipe that you name on the
+command line, cannot perform build and integration testing using images,
+and does not automatically generate commits for changes in the source
+tree. Despite all these "limitations", ``devtool upgrade`` updates the
+recipe file to the new upstream version and attempts to rebase custom
+patches contained by the recipe as needed.
+
+.. note::
+
+   AUH uses much of ``devtool upgrade`` behind the scenes making AUH somewhat
+   of a "wrapper" application for ``devtool upgrade``.
+
+A typical scenario involves having used Git to clone an upstream
+repository that you use during build operations. Because you have built the
+recipe in the past, the layer is likely added to your
+configuration already. If for some reason, the layer is not added, you
+could add it easily using the
+":ref:`bitbake-layers <bsp-guide/bsp:creating a new bsp layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script>`"
+script. For example, suppose you use the ``nano.bb`` recipe from the
+``meta-oe`` layer in the ``meta-openembedded`` repository. For this
+example, assume that the layer has been cloned into following area::
+
+   /home/scottrif/meta-openembedded
+
+The following command from your :term:`Build Directory` adds the layer to
+your build configuration (i.e. ``${BUILDDIR}/conf/bblayers.conf``)::
+
+   $ bitbake-layers add-layer /home/scottrif/meta-openembedded/meta-oe
+   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
+   Parsing recipes: 100% |##########################################| Time: 0:00:55
+   Parsing of 1431 .bb files complete (0 cached, 1431 parsed). 2040 targets, 56 skipped, 0 masked, 0 errors.
+   Removing 12 recipes from the x86_64 sysroot: 100% |##############| Time: 0:00:00
+   Removing 1 recipes from the x86_64_i586 sysroot: 100% |##########| Time: 0:00:00
+   Removing 5 recipes from the i586 sysroot: 100% |#################| Time: 0:00:00
+   Removing 5 recipes from the qemux86 sysroot: 100% |##############| Time: 0:00:00
+
+For this example, assume that the ``nano.bb`` recipe that
+is upstream has a 2.9.3 version number. However, the version in the
+local repository is 2.7.4. The following command from your build
+directory automatically upgrades the recipe for you::
+
+   $ devtool upgrade nano -V 2.9.3
+   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
+   NOTE: Creating workspace layer in /home/scottrif/poky/build/workspace
+   Parsing recipes: 100% |##########################################| Time: 0:00:46
+   Parsing of 1431 .bb files complete (0 cached, 1431 parsed). 2040 targets, 56 skipped, 0 masked, 0 errors.
+   NOTE: Extracting current version source...
+   NOTE: Resolving any missing task queue dependencies
+          .
+          .
+          .
+   NOTE: Executing SetScene Tasks
+   NOTE: Executing RunQueue Tasks
+   NOTE: Tasks Summary: Attempted 74 tasks of which 72 didn't need to be rerun and all succeeded.
+   Adding changed files: 100% |#####################################| Time: 0:00:00
+   NOTE: Upgraded source extracted to /home/scottrif/poky/build/workspace/sources/nano
+   NOTE: New recipe is /home/scottrif/poky/build/workspace/recipes/nano/nano_2.9.3.bb
+
+.. note::
+
+   Using the ``-V`` option is not necessary. Omitting the version number causes
+   ``devtool upgrade`` to upgrade the recipe to the most recent version.
+
+Continuing with this example, you can use ``devtool build`` to build the
+newly upgraded recipe::
+
+   $ devtool build nano
+   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
+   Loading cache: 100% |################################################################################################| Time: 0:00:01
+   Loaded 2040 entries from dependency cache.
+   Parsing recipes: 100% |##############################################################################################| Time: 0:00:00
+   Parsing of 1432 .bb files complete (1431 cached, 1 parsed). 2041 targets, 56 skipped, 0 masked, 0 errors.
+   NOTE: Resolving any missing task queue dependencies
+          .
+          .
+          .
+   NOTE: Executing SetScene Tasks
+   NOTE: Executing RunQueue Tasks
+   NOTE: nano: compiling from external source tree /home/scottrif/poky/build/workspace/sources/nano
+   NOTE: Tasks Summary: Attempted 520 tasks of which 304 didn't need to be rerun and all succeeded.
+
+Within the ``devtool upgrade`` workflow, you can
+deploy and test your rebuilt software. For this example,
+however, running ``devtool finish`` cleans up the workspace once the
+source in your workspace is clean. This usually means using Git to stage
+and submit commits for the changes generated by the upgrade process.
+
+Once the tree is clean, you can clean things up in this example with the
+following command from the ``${BUILDDIR}/workspace/sources/nano``
+directory::
+
+   $ devtool finish nano meta-oe
+   NOTE: Starting bitbake server...
+   Loading cache: 100% |################################################################################################| Time: 0:00:00
+   Loaded 2040 entries from dependency cache.
+   Parsing recipes: 100% |##############################################################################################| Time: 0:00:01
+   Parsing of 1432 .bb files complete (1431 cached, 1 parsed). 2041 targets, 56 skipped, 0 masked, 0 errors.
+   NOTE: Adding new patch 0001-nano.bb-Stuff-I-changed-when-upgrading-nano.bb.patch
+   NOTE: Updating recipe nano_2.9.3.bb
+   NOTE: Removing file /home/scottrif/meta-openembedded/meta-oe/recipes-support/nano/nano_2.7.4.bb
+   NOTE: Moving recipe file to /home/scottrif/meta-openembedded/meta-oe/recipes-support/nano
+   NOTE: Leaving source tree /home/scottrif/poky/build/workspace/sources/nano as-is; if you no longer need it then please delete it manually
+
+
+Using the ``devtool finish`` command cleans up the workspace and creates a patch
+file based on your commits. The tool puts all patch files back into the
+source directory in a sub-directory named ``nano`` in this case.
+
+Manually Upgrading a Recipe
+===========================
+
+If for some reason you choose not to upgrade recipes using
+:ref:`dev-manual/upgrading-recipes:Using the Auto Upgrade Helper (AUH)` or
+by :ref:`dev-manual/upgrading-recipes:Using \`\`devtool upgrade\`\``,
+you can manually edit the recipe files to upgrade the versions.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Manually updating multiple recipes scales poorly and involves many
+   steps. The recommendation to upgrade recipe versions is through AUH
+   or ``devtool upgrade``, both of which automate some steps and provide
+   guidance for others needed for the manual process.
+
+To manually upgrade recipe versions, follow these general steps:
+
+#. *Change the Version:* Rename the recipe such that the version (i.e.
+   the :term:`PV` part of the recipe name)
+   changes appropriately. If the version is not part of the recipe name,
+   change the value as it is set for :term:`PV` within the recipe itself.
+
+#. *Update* :term:`SRCREV` *if Needed*: If the source code your recipe builds
+   is fetched from Git or some other version control system, update
+   :term:`SRCREV` to point to the
+   commit hash that matches the new version.
+
+#. *Build the Software:* Try to build the recipe using BitBake. Typical
+   build failures include the following:
+
+   -  License statements were updated for the new version. For this
+      case, you need to review any changes to the license and update the
+      values of :term:`LICENSE` and
+      :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`
+      as needed.
+
+      .. note::
+
+         License changes are often inconsequential. For example, the
+         license text's copyright year might have changed.
+
+   -  Custom patches carried by the older version of the recipe might
+      fail to apply to the new version. For these cases, you need to
+      review the failures. Patches might not be necessary for the new
+      version of the software if the upgraded version has fixed those
+      issues. If a patch is necessary and failing, you need to rebase it
+      into the new version.
+
+#. *Optionally Attempt to Build for Several Architectures:* Once you
+   successfully build the new software for a given architecture, you
+   could test the build for other architectures by changing the
+   :term:`MACHINE` variable and
+   rebuilding the software. This optional step is especially important
+   if the recipe is to be released publicly.
+
+#. *Check the Upstream Change Log or Release Notes:* Checking both these
+   reveals if there are new features that could break
+   backwards-compatibility. If so, you need to take steps to mitigate or
+   eliminate that situation.
+
+#. *Optionally Create a Bootable Image and Test:* If you want, you can
+   test the new software by booting it onto actual hardware.
+
+#. *Create a Commit with the Change in the Layer Repository:* After all
+   builds work and any testing is successful, you can create commits for
+   any changes in the layer holding your upgraded recipe.
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/vulnerabilities.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/vulnerabilities.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1bc2a85929
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/vulnerabilities.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,293 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Checking for Vulnerabilities
+****************************
+
+Vulnerabilities in Poky and OE-Core
+===================================
+
+The Yocto Project has an infrastructure to track and address unfixed
+known security vulnerabilities, as tracked by the public
+:wikipedia:`Common Vulnerabilities and Exposures (CVE) <Common_Vulnerabilities_and_Exposures>`
+database.
+
+The Yocto Project maintains a `list of known vulnerabilities
+<https://autobuilder.yocto.io/pub/non-release/patchmetrics/>`__
+for packages in Poky and OE-Core, tracking the evolution of the number of
+unpatched CVEs and the status of patches. Such information is available for
+the current development version and for each supported release.
+
+Security is a process, not a product, and thus at any time, a number of security
+issues may be impacting Poky and OE-Core. It is up to the maintainers, users,
+contributors and anyone interested in the issues to investigate and possibly fix them by
+updating software components to newer versions or by applying patches to address them.
+It is recommended to work with Poky and OE-Core upstream maintainers and submit
+patches to fix them, see ":doc:`../contributor-guide/submit-changes`" for details.
+
+Vulnerability check at build time
+=================================
+
+To enable a check for CVE security vulnerabilities using
+:ref:`ref-classes-cve-check` in the specific image or target you are building,
+add the following setting to your configuration::
+
+   INHERIT += "cve-check"
+
+The CVE database contains some old incomplete entries which have been
+deemed not to impact Poky or OE-Core. These CVE entries can be excluded from the
+check using build configuration::
+
+   include conf/distro/include/cve-extra-exclusions.inc
+
+With this CVE check enabled, BitBake build will try to map each compiled software component
+recipe name and version information to the CVE database and generate recipe and
+image specific reports. These reports will contain:
+
+-  metadata about the software component like names and versions
+
+-  metadata about the CVE issue such as description and NVD link
+
+-  for each software component, a list of CVEs which are possibly impacting this version
+
+-  status of each CVE: ``Patched``, ``Unpatched`` or ``Ignored``
+
+The status ``Patched`` means that a patch file to address the security issue has been
+applied. ``Unpatched`` status means that no patches to address the issue have been
+applied and that the issue needs to be investigated. ``Ignored`` means that after
+analysis, it has been deemed to ignore the issue as it for example affects
+the software component on a different operating system platform.
+
+After a build with CVE check enabled, reports for each compiled source recipe will be
+found in ``build/tmp/deploy/cve``.
+
+For example the CVE check report for the ``flex-native`` recipe looks like::
+
+   $ cat poky/build/tmp/deploy/cve/flex-native
+   LAYER: meta
+   PACKAGE NAME: flex-native
+   PACKAGE VERSION: 2.6.4
+   CVE: CVE-2016-6354
+   CVE STATUS: Patched
+   CVE SUMMARY: Heap-based buffer overflow in the yy_get_next_buffer function in Flex before 2.6.1 might allow context-dependent attackers to cause a denial of service or possibly execute arbitrary code via vectors involving num_to_read.
+   CVSS v2 BASE SCORE: 7.5
+   CVSS v3 BASE SCORE: 9.8
+   VECTOR: NETWORK
+   MORE INFORMATION: https://nvd.nist.gov/vuln/detail/CVE-2016-6354
+
+   LAYER: meta
+   PACKAGE NAME: flex-native
+   PACKAGE VERSION: 2.6.4
+   CVE: CVE-2019-6293
+   CVE STATUS: Ignored
+   CVE SUMMARY: An issue was discovered in the function mark_beginning_as_normal in nfa.c in flex 2.6.4. There is a stack exhaustion problem caused by the mark_beginning_as_normal function making recursive calls to itself in certain scenarios involving lots of '*' characters. Remote attackers could leverage this vulnerability to cause a denial-of-service.
+   CVSS v2 BASE SCORE: 4.3
+   CVSS v3 BASE SCORE: 5.5
+   VECTOR: NETWORK
+   MORE INFORMATION: https://nvd.nist.gov/vuln/detail/CVE-2019-6293
+
+For images, a summary of all recipes included in the image and their CVEs is also
+generated in textual and JSON formats. These ``.cve`` and ``.json`` reports can be found
+in the ``tmp/deploy/images`` directory for each compiled image.
+
+At build time CVE check will also throw warnings about ``Unpatched`` CVEs::
+
+   WARNING: flex-2.6.4-r0 do_cve_check: Found unpatched CVE (CVE-2019-6293), for more information check /poky/build/tmp/work/core2-64-poky-linux/flex/2.6.4-r0/temp/cve.log
+   WARNING: libarchive-3.5.1-r0 do_cve_check: Found unpatched CVE (CVE-2021-36976), for more information check /poky/build/tmp/work/core2-64-poky-linux/libarchive/3.5.1-r0/temp/cve.log
+
+It is also possible to check the CVE status of individual packages as follows::
+
+   bitbake -c cve_check flex libarchive
+
+Fixing CVE product name and version mappings
+============================================
+
+By default, :ref:`ref-classes-cve-check` uses the recipe name :term:`BPN` as CVE
+product name when querying the CVE database. If this mapping contains false positives, e.g.
+some reported CVEs are not for the software component in question, or false negatives like
+some CVEs are not found to impact the recipe when they should, then the problems can be
+in the recipe name to CVE product mapping. These mapping issues can be fixed by setting
+the :term:`CVE_PRODUCT` variable inside the recipe. This defines the name of the software component in the
+upstream `NIST CVE database <https://nvd.nist.gov/>`__.
+
+The variable supports using vendor and product names like this::
+
+   CVE_PRODUCT = "flex_project:flex"
+
+In this example the vendor name used in the CVE database is ``flex_project`` and the
+product is ``flex``. With this setting the ``flex`` recipe only maps to this specific
+product and not products from other vendors with same name ``flex``.
+
+Similarly, when the recipe version :term:`PV` is not compatible with software versions used by
+the upstream software component releases and the CVE database, these can be fixed using
+the :term:`CVE_VERSION` variable.
+
+Note that if the CVE entries in the NVD database contain bugs or have missing or incomplete
+information, it is recommended to fix the information there directly instead of working
+around the issues possibly for a long time in Poky and OE-Core side recipes. Feedback to
+NVD about CVE entries can be provided through the `NVD contact form <https://nvd.nist.gov/info/contact-form>`__.
+
+Fixing vulnerabilities in recipes
+=================================
+
+Suppose a CVE security issue impacts a software component. In that case, it can
+be fixed by updating to a newer version, by applying a patch, or by marking it
+as patched via :term:`CVE_STATUS` variable flag. For Poky and OE-Core master
+branches, updating to a more recent software component release with fixes is
+the best option, but patches can be applied if releases are not yet available.
+
+For stable branches, we want to avoid API (Application Programming Interface)
+or ABI (Application Binary Interface) breakages. When submitting an update,
+a minor version update of a component is preferred if the version is
+backward-compatible. Many software components have backward-compatible stable
+versions, with a notable example of the Linux kernel. However, if the new
+version does or likely might introduce incompatibilities, extracting and
+backporting patches is preferred.
+
+Here is an example of fixing CVE security issues with patch files,
+an example from the :oe_layerindex:`ffmpeg recipe for dunfell </layerindex/recipe/122174>`::
+
+   SRC_URI = "https://www.ffmpeg.org/releases/${BP}.tar.xz \
+              file://mips64_cpu_detection.patch \
+              file://CVE-2020-12284.patch \
+              file://0001-libavutil-include-assembly-with-full-path-from-sourc.patch \
+              file://CVE-2021-3566.patch \
+              file://CVE-2021-38291.patch \
+              file://CVE-2022-1475.patch \
+              file://CVE-2022-3109.patch \
+              file://CVE-2022-3341.patch \
+              file://CVE-2022-48434.patch \
+          "
+
+The recipe has both generic and security-related fixes. The CVE patch files are named
+according to the CVE they fix.
+
+When preparing the patch file, take the original patch from the upstream repository.
+Do not use patches from different distributions, except if it is the only available source.
+
+Modify the patch adding OE-related metadata. We will follow the example of the
+``CVE-2022-3341.patch``.
+
+The original `commit message <https://github.com/FFmpeg/FFmpeg/commit/9cf652cef49d74afe3d454f27d49eb1a1394951e.patch/>`__
+is::
+
+   From 9cf652cef49d74afe3d454f27d49eb1a1394951e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
+   From: Jiasheng Jiang <jiasheng@iscas.ac.cn>
+   Date: Wed, 23 Feb 2022 10:31:59 +0800
+   Subject: [PATCH] avformat/nutdec: Add check for avformat_new_stream
+
+   Check for failure of avformat_new_stream() and propagate
+   the error code.
+
+   Signed-off-by: Michael Niedermayer <michael@niedermayer.cc>
+   ---
+    libavformat/nutdec.c | 16 ++++++++++++----
+    1 file changed, 12 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-)
+
+
+For the correct operations of the ``cve-check``, it requires the CVE
+identification in a ``CVE:`` tag of the patch file commit message using
+the format::
+
+   CVE: CVE-2022-3341
+
+It is also recommended to add the ``Upstream-Status:`` tag with a link
+to the original patch and sign-off by people working on the backport.
+If there are any modifications to the original patch, note them in
+the ``Comments:`` tag.
+
+With the additional information, the header of the patch file in OE-core becomes::
+
+   From 9cf652cef49d74afe3d454f27d49eb1a1394951e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
+   From: Jiasheng Jiang <jiasheng@iscas.ac.cn>
+   Date: Wed, 23 Feb 2022 10:31:59 +0800
+   Subject: [PATCH] avformat/nutdec: Add check for avformat_new_stream
+
+   Check for failure of avformat_new_stream() and propagate
+   the error code.
+
+   Signed-off-by: Michael Niedermayer <michael@niedermayer.cc>
+
+   CVE: CVE-2022-3341
+
+   Upstream-Status: Backport [https://github.com/FFmpeg/FFmpeg/commit/9cf652cef49d74afe3d454f27d49eb1a1394951e]
+
+   Comments: Refreshed Hunk
+   Signed-off-by: Narpat Mali <narpat.mali@windriver.com>
+   Signed-off-by: Bhabu Bindu <bhabu.bindu@kpit.com>
+   ---
+    libavformat/nutdec.c | 16 ++++++++++++----
+    1 file changed, 12 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-)
+
+A good practice is to include the CVE identifier in the patch file name, the patch file
+commit message and optionally in the recipe commit message.
+
+CVE checker will then capture this information and change the CVE status to ``Patched``
+in the generated reports.
+
+If analysis shows that the CVE issue does not impact the recipe due to configuration, platform,
+version or other reasons, the CVE can be marked as ``Ignored`` by using
+the :term:`CVE_STATUS` variable flag with appropriate reason which is mapped to ``Ignored``.
+The entry should have the format like::
+
+   CVE_STATUS[CVE-2016-10642] = "cpe-incorrect: This is specific to the npm package that installs cmake, so isn't relevant to OpenEmbedded"
+
+As mentioned previously, if data in the CVE database is wrong, it is recommended
+to fix those issues in the CVE database (NVD in the case of OE-core and Poky)
+directly.
+
+Note that if there are many CVEs with the same status and reason, those can be
+shared by using the :term:`CVE_STATUS_GROUPS` variable.
+
+Recipes can be completely skipped by CVE check by including the recipe name in
+the :term:`CVE_CHECK_SKIP_RECIPE` variable.
+
+Implementation details
+======================
+
+Here's what the :ref:`ref-classes-cve-check` class does to find unpatched CVE IDs.
+
+First the code goes through each patch file provided by a recipe. If a valid CVE ID
+is found in the name of the file, the corresponding CVE is considered as patched.
+Don't forget that if multiple CVE IDs are found in the filename, only the last
+one is considered. Then, the code looks for ``CVE: CVE-ID`` lines in the patch
+file. The found CVE IDs are also considered as patched.
+Additionally ``CVE_STATUS`` variable flags are parsed for reasons mapped to ``Patched``
+and these are also considered as patched.
+
+Then, the code looks up all the CVE IDs in the NIST database for all the
+products defined in :term:`CVE_PRODUCT`. Then, for each found CVE:
+
+-  If the package name (:term:`PN`) is part of
+   :term:`CVE_CHECK_SKIP_RECIPE`, it is considered as ``Patched``.
+
+-  If the CVE ID has status ``CVE_STATUS[<CVE ID>] = "ignored"`` or if it's set to
+   any reason which is mapped to status ``Ignored`` via ``CVE_CHECK_STATUSMAP``,
+   it is  set as ``Ignored``.
+
+-  If the CVE ID is part of the patched CVE for the recipe, it is
+   already considered as ``Patched``.
+
+-  Otherwise, the code checks whether the recipe version (:term:`PV`)
+   is within the range of versions impacted by the CVE. If so, the CVE
+   is considered as ``Unpatched``.
+
+The CVE database is stored in :term:`DL_DIR` and can be inspected using
+``sqlite3`` command as follows::
+
+   sqlite3 downloads/CVE_CHECK/nvdcve_1.1.db .dump | grep CVE-2021-37462
+
+When analyzing CVEs, it is recommended to:
+
+-  study the latest information in `CVE database <https://nvd.nist.gov/vuln/search>`__.
+
+-  check how upstream developers of the software component addressed the issue, e.g.
+   what patch was applied, which upstream release contains the fix.
+
+-  check what other Linux distributions like `Debian <https://security-tracker.debian.org/tracker/>`__
+   did to analyze and address the issue.
+
+-  follow security notices from other Linux distributions.
+
+-  follow public `open source security mailing lists <https://oss-security.openwall.org/wiki/mailing-lists>`__ for
+   discussions and advance notifications of CVE bugs and software releases with fixes.
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/wayland.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/wayland.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..097be9cbde
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/wayland.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Using Wayland and Weston
+************************
+
+:wikipedia:`Wayland <Wayland_(display_server_protocol)>`
+is a computer display server protocol that provides a method for
+compositing window managers to communicate directly with applications
+and video hardware and expects them to communicate with input hardware
+using other libraries. Using Wayland with supporting targets can result
+in better control over graphics frame rendering than an application
+might otherwise achieve.
+
+The Yocto Project provides the Wayland protocol libraries and the
+reference :wikipedia:`Weston <Wayland_(display_server_protocol)#Weston>`
+compositor as part of its release. You can find the integrated packages
+in the ``meta`` layer of the :term:`Source Directory`.
+Specifically, you
+can find the recipes that build both Wayland and Weston at
+``meta/recipes-graphics/wayland``.
+
+You can build both the Wayland and Weston packages for use only with targets
+that accept the :wikipedia:`Mesa 3D and Direct Rendering Infrastructure
+<Mesa_(computer_graphics)>`, which is also known as Mesa DRI. This implies that
+you cannot build and use the packages if your target uses, for example, the
+Intel Embedded Media and Graphics Driver (Intel EMGD) that overrides Mesa DRI.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Due to lack of EGL support, Weston 1.0.3 will not run directly on the
+   emulated QEMU hardware. However, this version of Weston will run
+   under X emulation without issues.
+
+This section describes what you need to do to implement Wayland and use
+the Weston compositor when building an image for a supporting target.
+
+Enabling Wayland in an Image
+============================
+
+To enable Wayland, you need to enable it to be built and enable it to be
+included (installed) in the image.
+
+Building Wayland
+----------------
+
+To cause Mesa to build the ``wayland-egl`` platform and Weston to build
+Wayland with Kernel Mode Setting
+(`KMS <https://wiki.archlinux.org/index.php/Kernel_Mode_Setting>`__)
+support, include the "wayland" flag in the
+:term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`
+statement in your ``local.conf`` file::
+
+   DISTRO_FEATURES:append = " wayland"
+
+.. note::
+
+   If X11 has been enabled elsewhere, Weston will build Wayland with X11
+   support
+
+Installing Wayland and Weston
+-----------------------------
+
+To install the Wayland feature into an image, you must include the
+following
+:term:`CORE_IMAGE_EXTRA_INSTALL`
+statement in your ``local.conf`` file::
+
+   CORE_IMAGE_EXTRA_INSTALL += "wayland weston"
+
+Running Weston
+==============
+
+To run Weston inside X11, enabling it as described earlier and building
+a Sato image is sufficient. If you are running your image under Sato, a
+Weston Launcher appears in the "Utility" category.
+
+Alternatively, you can run Weston through the command-line interpretor
+(CLI), which is better suited for development work. To run Weston under
+the CLI, you need to do the following after your image is built:
+
+#. Run these commands to export ``XDG_RUNTIME_DIR``::
+
+      mkdir -p /tmp/$USER-weston
+      chmod 0700 /tmp/$USER-weston
+      export XDG_RUNTIME_DIR=/tmp/$USER-weston
+
+#. Launch Weston in the shell::
+
+      weston
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/wic.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/wic.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a3880f3a1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/wic.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,731 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Creating Partitioned Images Using Wic
+*************************************
+
+Creating an image for a particular hardware target using the
+OpenEmbedded build system does not necessarily mean you can boot that
+image as is on your device. Physical devices accept and boot images in
+various ways depending on the specifics of the device. Usually,
+information about the hardware can tell you what image format the device
+requires. Should your device require multiple partitions on an SD card,
+flash, or an HDD, you can use the OpenEmbedded Image Creator, Wic, to
+create the properly partitioned image.
+
+The ``wic`` command generates partitioned images from existing
+OpenEmbedded build artifacts. Image generation is driven by partitioning
+commands contained in an OpenEmbedded kickstart file (``.wks``)
+specified either directly on the command line or as one of a selection
+of canned kickstart files as shown with the ``wic list images`` command
+in the
+":ref:`dev-manual/wic:generate an image using an existing kickstart file`"
+section. When you apply the command to a given set of build artifacts, the
+result is an image or set of images that can be directly written onto media and
+used on a particular system.
+
+.. note::
+
+   For a kickstart file reference, see the
+   ":ref:`ref-manual/kickstart:openembedded kickstart (\`\`.wks\`\`) reference`"
+   Chapter in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
+
+The ``wic`` command and the infrastructure it is based on is by
+definition incomplete. The purpose of the command is to allow the
+generation of customized images, and as such, was designed to be
+completely extensible through a plugin interface. See the
+":ref:`dev-manual/wic:using the wic plugin interface`" section
+for information on these plugins.
+
+This section provides some background information on Wic, describes what
+you need to have in place to run the tool, provides instruction on how
+to use the Wic utility, provides information on using the Wic plugins
+interface, and provides several examples that show how to use Wic.
+
+Background
+==========
+
+This section provides some background on the Wic utility. While none of
+this information is required to use Wic, you might find it interesting.
+
+-  The name "Wic" is derived from OpenEmbedded Image Creator (oeic). The
+   "oe" diphthong in "oeic" was promoted to the letter "w", because
+   "oeic" is both difficult to remember and to pronounce.
+
+-  Wic is loosely based on the Meego Image Creator (``mic``) framework.
+   The Wic implementation has been heavily modified to make direct use
+   of OpenEmbedded build artifacts instead of package installation and
+   configuration, which are already incorporated within the OpenEmbedded
+   artifacts.
+
+-  Wic is a completely independent standalone utility that initially
+   provides easier-to-use and more flexible replacements for an existing
+   functionality in OE-Core's :ref:`ref-classes-image-live`
+   class. The difference between Wic and those examples is that with Wic
+   the functionality of those scripts is implemented by a
+   general-purpose partitioning language, which is based on Redhat
+   kickstart syntax.
+
+Requirements
+============
+
+In order to use the Wic utility with the OpenEmbedded Build system, your
+system needs to meet the following requirements:
+
+-  The Linux distribution on your development host must support the
+   Yocto Project. See the ":ref:`system-requirements-supported-distros`"
+   section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual for the list of
+   distributions that support the Yocto Project.
+
+-  The standard system utilities, such as ``cp``, must be installed on
+   your development host system.
+
+-  You must have sourced the build environment setup script (i.e.
+   :ref:`structure-core-script`) found in the :term:`Build Directory`.
+
+-  You need to have the build artifacts already available, which
+   typically means that you must have already created an image using the
+   OpenEmbedded build system (e.g. ``core-image-minimal``). While it
+   might seem redundant to generate an image in order to create an image
+   using Wic, the current version of Wic requires the artifacts in the
+   form generated by the OpenEmbedded build system.
+
+-  You must build several native tools, which are built to run on the
+   build system::
+
+      $ bitbake wic-tools
+
+-  Include "wic" as part of the
+   :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`
+   variable.
+
+-  Include the name of the :ref:`wic kickstart file <openembedded-kickstart-wks-reference>`
+   as part of the :term:`WKS_FILE` variable. If multiple candidate files can
+   be provided by different layers, specify all the possible names through the
+   :term:`WKS_FILES` variable instead.
+
+Getting Help
+============
+
+You can get general help for the ``wic`` command by entering the ``wic``
+command by itself or by entering the command with a help argument as
+follows::
+
+   $ wic -h
+   $ wic --help
+   $ wic help
+
+Currently, Wic supports seven commands: ``cp``, ``create``, ``help``,
+``list``, ``ls``, ``rm``, and ``write``. You can get help for all these
+commands except "help" by using the following form::
+
+   $ wic help command
+
+For example, the following command returns help for the ``write``
+command::
+
+   $ wic help write
+
+Wic supports help for three topics: ``overview``, ``plugins``, and
+``kickstart``. You can get help for any topic using the following form::
+
+   $ wic help topic
+
+For example, the following returns overview help for Wic::
+
+   $ wic help overview
+
+There is one additional level of help for Wic. You can get help on
+individual images through the ``list`` command. You can use the ``list``
+command to return the available Wic images as follows::
+
+   $ wic list images
+     genericx86                                 Create an EFI disk image for genericx86*
+     beaglebone-yocto                           Create SD card image for Beaglebone
+     qemuriscv                                  Create qcow2 image for RISC-V QEMU machines
+     mkefidisk                                  Create an EFI disk image
+     qemuloongarch                              Create qcow2 image for LoongArch QEMU machines
+     directdisk-multi-rootfs                    Create multi rootfs image using rootfs plugin
+     directdisk                                 Create a 'pcbios' direct disk image
+     efi-bootdisk
+     mkhybridiso                                Create a hybrid ISO image
+     directdisk-gpt                             Create a 'pcbios' direct disk image
+     systemd-bootdisk                           Create an EFI disk image with systemd-boot
+     sdimage-bootpart                           Create SD card image with a boot partition
+     qemux86-directdisk                         Create a qemu machine 'pcbios' direct disk image
+     directdisk-bootloader-config               Create a 'pcbios' direct disk image with custom bootloader config
+
+Once you know the list of available
+Wic images, you can use ``help`` with the command to get help on a
+particular image. For example, the following command returns help on the
+"beaglebone-yocto" image::
+
+   $ wic list beaglebone-yocto help
+
+   Creates a partitioned SD card image for Beaglebone.
+   Boot files are located in the first vfat partition.
+
+Operational Modes
+=================
+
+You can use Wic in two different modes, depending on how much control
+you need for specifying the OpenEmbedded build artifacts that are used
+for creating the image: Raw and Cooked:
+
+-  *Raw Mode:* You explicitly specify build artifacts through Wic
+   command-line arguments.
+
+-  *Cooked Mode:* The current
+   :term:`MACHINE` setting and image
+   name are used to automatically locate and provide the build
+   artifacts. You just supply a kickstart file and the name of the image
+   from which to use artifacts.
+
+Regardless of the mode you use, you need to have the build artifacts
+ready and available.
+
+Raw Mode
+--------
+
+Running Wic in raw mode allows you to specify all the partitions through
+the ``wic`` command line. The primary use for raw mode is if you have
+built your kernel outside of the Yocto Project :term:`Build Directory`.
+In other words, you can point to arbitrary kernel, root filesystem locations,
+and so forth. Contrast this behavior with cooked mode where Wic looks in the
+:term:`Build Directory` (e.g. ``tmp/deploy/images/``\ machine).
+
+The general form of the ``wic`` command in raw mode is::
+
+   $ wic create wks_file options ...
+
+     Where:
+
+        wks_file:
+           An OpenEmbedded kickstart file.  You can provide
+           your own custom file or use a file from a set of
+           existing files as described by further options.
+
+        optional arguments:
+          -h, --help            show this help message and exit
+          -o OUTDIR, --outdir OUTDIR
+                                name of directory to create image in
+          -e IMAGE_NAME, --image-name IMAGE_NAME
+                                name of the image to use the artifacts from e.g. core-
+                                image-sato
+          -r ROOTFS_DIR, --rootfs-dir ROOTFS_DIR
+                                path to the /rootfs dir to use as the .wks rootfs
+                                source
+          -b BOOTIMG_DIR, --bootimg-dir BOOTIMG_DIR
+                                path to the dir containing the boot artifacts (e.g.
+                                /EFI or /syslinux dirs) to use as the .wks bootimg
+                                source
+          -k KERNEL_DIR, --kernel-dir KERNEL_DIR
+                                path to the dir containing the kernel to use in the
+                                .wks bootimg
+          -n NATIVE_SYSROOT, --native-sysroot NATIVE_SYSROOT
+                                path to the native sysroot containing the tools to use
+                                to build the image
+          -s, --skip-build-check
+                                skip the build check
+          -f, --build-rootfs    build rootfs
+          -c {gzip,bzip2,xz}, --compress-with {gzip,bzip2,xz}
+                                compress image with specified compressor
+          -m, --bmap            generate .bmap
+          --no-fstab-update     Do not change fstab file.
+          -v VARS_DIR, --vars VARS_DIR
+                                directory with <image>.env files that store bitbake
+                                variables
+          -D, --debug           output debug information
+
+.. note::
+
+   You do not need root privileges to run Wic. In fact, you should not
+   run as root when using the utility.
+
+Cooked Mode
+-----------
+
+Running Wic in cooked mode leverages off artifacts in the
+:term:`Build Directory`. In other words, you do not have to specify kernel or
+root filesystem locations as part of the command. All you need to provide is
+a kickstart file and the name of the image from which to use artifacts
+by using the "-e" option. Wic looks in the :term:`Build Directory` (e.g.
+``tmp/deploy/images/``\ machine) for artifacts.
+
+The general form of the ``wic`` command using Cooked Mode is as follows::
+
+   $ wic create wks_file -e IMAGE_NAME
+
+     Where:
+
+        wks_file:
+           An OpenEmbedded kickstart file.  You can provide
+           your own custom file or use a file from a set of
+           existing files provided with the Yocto Project
+           release.
+
+        required argument:
+           -e IMAGE_NAME, --image-name IMAGE_NAME
+                                name of the image to use the artifacts from e.g. core-
+                                image-sato
+
+Using an Existing Kickstart File
+================================
+
+If you do not want to create your own kickstart file, you can use an
+existing file provided by the Wic installation. As shipped, kickstart
+files can be found in the :ref:`overview-manual/development-environment:yocto project source repositories` in the
+following two locations::
+
+   poky/meta-yocto-bsp/wic
+   poky/scripts/lib/wic/canned-wks
+
+Use the following command to list the available kickstart files::
+
+   $ wic list images
+     genericx86                                 Create an EFI disk image for genericx86*
+     beaglebone-yocto                           Create SD card image for Beaglebone
+     qemuriscv                                  Create qcow2 image for RISC-V QEMU machines
+     mkefidisk                                  Create an EFI disk image
+     qemuloongarch                              Create qcow2 image for LoongArch QEMU machines
+     directdisk-multi-rootfs                    Create multi rootfs image using rootfs plugin
+     directdisk                                 Create a 'pcbios' direct disk image
+     efi-bootdisk
+     mkhybridiso                                Create a hybrid ISO image
+     directdisk-gpt                             Create a 'pcbios' direct disk image
+     systemd-bootdisk                           Create an EFI disk image with systemd-boot
+     sdimage-bootpart                           Create SD card image with a boot partition
+     qemux86-directdisk                         Create a qemu machine 'pcbios' direct disk image
+     directdisk-bootloader-config               Create a 'pcbios' direct disk image with custom bootloader config
+
+When you use an existing file, you
+do not have to use the ``.wks`` extension. Here is an example in Raw
+Mode that uses the ``directdisk`` file::
+
+   $ wic create directdisk -r rootfs_dir -b bootimg_dir \
+         -k kernel_dir -n native_sysroot
+
+Here are the actual partition language commands used in the
+``genericx86.wks`` file to generate an image::
+
+   # short-description: Create an EFI disk image for genericx86*
+   # long-description: Creates a partitioned EFI disk image for genericx86* machines
+   part /boot --source bootimg-efi --sourceparams="loader=grub-efi" --ondisk sda --label msdos --active --align 1024
+   part / --source rootfs --ondisk sda --fstype=ext4 --label platform --align 1024 --use-uuid
+   part swap --ondisk sda --size 44 --label swap1 --fstype=swap
+
+   bootloader --ptable gpt --timeout=5 --append="rootfstype=ext4 console=ttyS0,115200 console=tty0"
+
+Using the Wic Plugin Interface
+==============================
+
+You can extend and specialize Wic functionality by using Wic plugins.
+This section explains the Wic plugin interface.
+
+.. note::
+
+   Wic plugins consist of "source" and "imager" plugins. Imager plugins
+   are beyond the scope of this section.
+
+Source plugins provide a mechanism to customize partition content during
+the Wic image generation process. You can use source plugins to map
+values that you specify using ``--source`` commands in kickstart files
+(i.e. ``*.wks``) to a plugin implementation used to populate a given
+partition.
+
+.. note::
+
+   If you use plugins that have build-time dependencies (e.g. native
+   tools, bootloaders, and so forth) when building a Wic image, you need
+   to specify those dependencies using the :term:`WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`
+   variable.
+
+Source plugins are subclasses defined in plugin files. As shipped, the
+Yocto Project provides several plugin files. You can see the source
+plugin files that ship with the Yocto Project
+:yocto_git:`here </poky/tree/scripts/lib/wic/plugins/source>`.
+Each of these plugin files contains source plugins that are designed to
+populate a specific Wic image partition.
+
+Source plugins are subclasses of the ``SourcePlugin`` class, which is
+defined in the ``poky/scripts/lib/wic/pluginbase.py`` file. For example,
+the ``BootimgEFIPlugin`` source plugin found in the ``bootimg-efi.py``
+file is a subclass of the ``SourcePlugin`` class, which is found in the
+``pluginbase.py`` file.
+
+You can also implement source plugins in a layer outside of the Source
+Repositories (external layer). To do so, be sure that your plugin files
+are located in a directory whose path is
+``scripts/lib/wic/plugins/source/`` within your external layer. When the
+plugin files are located there, the source plugins they contain are made
+available to Wic.
+
+When the Wic implementation needs to invoke a partition-specific
+implementation, it looks for the plugin with the same name as the
+``--source`` parameter used in the kickstart file given to that
+partition. For example, if the partition is set up using the following
+command in a kickstart file::
+
+   part /boot --source bootimg-pcbios --ondisk sda --label boot --active --align 1024
+
+The methods defined as class
+members of the matching source plugin (i.e. ``bootimg-pcbios``) in the
+``bootimg-pcbios.py`` plugin file are used.
+
+To be more concrete, here is the corresponding plugin definition from
+the ``bootimg-pcbios.py`` file for the previous command along with an
+example method called by the Wic implementation when it needs to prepare
+a partition using an implementation-specific function::
+
+                .
+                .
+                .
+   class BootimgPcbiosPlugin(SourcePlugin):
+       """
+       Create MBR boot partition and install syslinux on it.
+       """
+
+      name = 'bootimg-pcbios'
+                .
+                .
+                .
+       @classmethod
+       def do_prepare_partition(cls, part, source_params, creator, cr_workdir,
+                                oe_builddir, bootimg_dir, kernel_dir,
+                                rootfs_dir, native_sysroot):
+           """
+           Called to do the actual content population for a partition i.e. it
+           'prepares' the partition to be incorporated into the image.
+           In this case, prepare content for legacy bios boot partition.
+           """
+                .
+                .
+                .
+
+If a
+subclass (plugin) itself does not implement a particular function, Wic
+locates and uses the default version in the superclass. It is for this
+reason that all source plugins are derived from the ``SourcePlugin``
+class.
+
+The ``SourcePlugin`` class defined in the ``pluginbase.py`` file defines
+a set of methods that source plugins can implement or override. Any
+plugins (subclass of ``SourcePlugin``) that do not implement a
+particular method inherit the implementation of the method from the
+``SourcePlugin`` class. For more information, see the ``SourcePlugin``
+class in the ``pluginbase.py`` file for details:
+
+The following list describes the methods implemented in the
+``SourcePlugin`` class:
+
+-  ``do_prepare_partition()``: Called to populate a partition with
+   actual content. In other words, the method prepares the final
+   partition image that is incorporated into the disk image.
+
+-  ``do_configure_partition()``: Called before
+   ``do_prepare_partition()`` to create custom configuration files for a
+   partition (e.g. syslinux or grub configuration files).
+
+-  ``do_install_disk()``: Called after all partitions have been
+   prepared and assembled into a disk image. This method provides a hook
+   to allow finalization of a disk image (e.g. writing an MBR).
+
+-  ``do_stage_partition()``: Special content-staging hook called
+   before ``do_prepare_partition()``. This method is normally empty.
+
+   Typically, a partition just uses the passed-in parameters (e.g. the
+   unmodified value of ``bootimg_dir``). However, in some cases, things
+   might need to be more tailored. As an example, certain files might
+   additionally need to be taken from ``bootimg_dir + /boot``. This hook
+   allows those files to be staged in a customized fashion.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      ``get_bitbake_var()`` allows you to access non-standard variables that
+      you might want to use for this behavior.
+
+You can extend the source plugin mechanism. To add more hooks, create
+more source plugin methods within ``SourcePlugin`` and the corresponding
+derived subclasses. The code that calls the plugin methods uses the
+``plugin.get_source_plugin_methods()`` function to find the method or
+methods needed by the call. Retrieval of those methods is accomplished
+by filling up a dict with keys that contain the method names of
+interest. On success, these will be filled in with the actual methods.
+See the Wic implementation for examples and details.
+
+Wic Examples
+============
+
+This section provides several examples that show how to use the Wic
+utility. All the examples assume the list of requirements in the
+":ref:`dev-manual/wic:requirements`" section have been met. The
+examples assume the previously generated image is
+``core-image-minimal``.
+
+Generate an Image using an Existing Kickstart File
+--------------------------------------------------
+
+This example runs in Cooked Mode and uses the ``mkefidisk`` kickstart
+file::
+
+   $ wic create mkefidisk -e core-image-minimal
+   INFO: Building wic-tools...
+             .
+             .
+             .
+   INFO: The new image(s) can be found here:
+     ./mkefidisk-201804191017-sda.direct
+
+   The following build artifacts were used to create the image(s):
+     ROOTFS_DIR:                   /home/stephano/yocto/build/tmp-glibc/work/qemux86-oe-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/rootfs
+     BOOTIMG_DIR:                  /home/stephano/yocto/build/tmp-glibc/work/qemux86-oe-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/recipe-sysroot/usr/share
+     KERNEL_DIR:                   /home/stephano/yocto/build/tmp-glibc/deploy/images/qemux86
+     NATIVE_SYSROOT:               /home/stephano/yocto/build/tmp-glibc/work/i586-oe-linux/wic-tools/1.0-r0/recipe-sysroot-native
+
+   INFO: The image(s) were created using OE kickstart file:
+     /home/stephano/yocto/openembedded-core/scripts/lib/wic/canned-wks/mkefidisk.wks
+
+The previous example shows the easiest way to create an image by running
+in cooked mode and supplying a kickstart file and the "-e" option to
+point to the existing build artifacts. Your ``local.conf`` file needs to
+have the :term:`MACHINE` variable set
+to the machine you are using, which is "qemux86" in this example.
+
+Once the image builds, the output provides image location, artifact use,
+and kickstart file information.
+
+.. note::
+
+   You should always verify the details provided in the output to make
+   sure that the image was indeed created exactly as expected.
+
+Continuing with the example, you can now write the image from the
+:term:`Build Directory` onto a USB stick, or whatever media for which you
+built your image, and boot from the media. You can write the image by using
+``bmaptool`` or ``dd``::
+
+   $ oe-run-native bmaptool-native bmaptool copy mkefidisk-201804191017-sda.direct /dev/sdX
+
+or ::
+
+   $ sudo dd if=mkefidisk-201804191017-sda.direct of=/dev/sdX
+
+.. note::
+
+   For more information on how to use the ``bmaptool``
+   to flash a device with an image, see the
+   ":ref:`dev-manual/bmaptool:flashing images using \`\`bmaptool\`\``"
+   section.
+
+Using a Modified Kickstart File
+-------------------------------
+
+Because partitioned image creation is driven by the kickstart file, it
+is easy to affect image creation by changing the parameters in the file.
+This next example demonstrates that through modification of the
+``directdisk-gpt`` kickstart file.
+
+As mentioned earlier, you can use the command ``wic list images`` to
+show the list of existing kickstart files. The directory in which the
+``directdisk-gpt.wks`` file resides is
+``scripts/lib/image/canned-wks/``, which is located in the
+:term:`Source Directory` (e.g. ``poky``).
+Because available files reside in this directory, you can create and add
+your own custom files to the directory. Subsequent use of the
+``wic list images`` command would then include your kickstart files.
+
+In this example, the existing ``directdisk-gpt`` file already does most
+of what is needed. However, for the hardware in this example, the image
+will need to boot from ``sdb`` instead of ``sda``, which is what the
+``directdisk-gpt`` kickstart file uses.
+
+The example begins by making a copy of the ``directdisk-gpt.wks`` file
+in the ``scripts/lib/image/canned-wks`` directory and then by changing
+the lines that specify the target disk from which to boot::
+
+   $ cp /home/stephano/yocto/poky/scripts/lib/wic/canned-wks/directdisk-gpt.wks \
+        /home/stephano/yocto/poky/scripts/lib/wic/canned-wks/directdisksdb-gpt.wks
+
+Next, the example modifies the ``directdisksdb-gpt.wks`` file and
+changes all instances of "``--ondisk sda``" to "``--ondisk sdb``". The
+example changes the following two lines and leaves the remaining lines
+untouched::
+
+   part /boot --source bootimg-pcbios --ondisk sdb --label boot --active --align 1024
+   part / --source rootfs --ondisk sdb --fstype=ext4 --label platform --align 1024 --use-uuid
+
+Once the lines are changed, the
+example generates the ``directdisksdb-gpt`` image. The command points
+the process at the ``core-image-minimal`` artifacts for the Next Unit of
+Computing (nuc) :term:`MACHINE` the
+``local.conf``::
+
+   $ wic create directdisksdb-gpt -e core-image-minimal
+   INFO: Building wic-tools...
+              .
+              .
+              .
+   Initialising tasks: 100% |#######################################| Time: 0:00:01
+   NOTE: Executing SetScene Tasks
+   NOTE: Executing RunQueue Tasks
+   NOTE: Tasks Summary: Attempted 1161 tasks of which 1157 didn't need to be rerun and all succeeded.
+   INFO: Creating image(s)...
+
+   INFO: The new image(s) can be found here:
+     ./directdisksdb-gpt-201710090938-sdb.direct
+
+   The following build artifacts were used to create the image(s):
+     ROOTFS_DIR:                   /home/stephano/yocto/build/tmp-glibc/work/qemux86-oe-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/rootfs
+     BOOTIMG_DIR:                  /home/stephano/yocto/build/tmp-glibc/work/qemux86-oe-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/recipe-sysroot/usr/share
+     KERNEL_DIR:                   /home/stephano/yocto/build/tmp-glibc/deploy/images/qemux86
+     NATIVE_SYSROOT:               /home/stephano/yocto/build/tmp-glibc/work/i586-oe-linux/wic-tools/1.0-r0/recipe-sysroot-native
+
+   INFO: The image(s) were created using OE kickstart file:
+     /home/stephano/yocto/poky/scripts/lib/wic/canned-wks/directdisksdb-gpt.wks
+
+Continuing with the example, you can now directly ``dd`` the image to a
+USB stick, or whatever media for which you built your image, and boot
+the resulting media::
+
+   $ sudo dd if=directdisksdb-gpt-201710090938-sdb.direct of=/dev/sdb
+   140966+0 records in
+   140966+0 records out
+   72174592 bytes (72 MB, 69 MiB) copied, 78.0282 s, 925 kB/s
+   $ sudo eject /dev/sdb
+
+Using a Modified Kickstart File and Running in Raw Mode
+-------------------------------------------------------
+
+This next example manually specifies each build artifact (runs in Raw
+Mode) and uses a modified kickstart file. The example also uses the
+``-o`` option to cause Wic to create the output somewhere other than the
+default output directory, which is the current directory::
+
+   $ wic create test.wks -o /home/stephano/testwic \
+        --rootfs-dir /home/stephano/yocto/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/rootfs \
+        --bootimg-dir /home/stephano/yocto/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/recipe-sysroot/usr/share \
+        --kernel-dir /home/stephano/yocto/build/tmp/deploy/images/qemux86 \
+        --native-sysroot /home/stephano/yocto/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/wic-tools/1.0-r0/recipe-sysroot-native
+
+   INFO: Creating image(s)...
+
+   INFO: The new image(s) can be found here:
+     /home/stephano/testwic/test-201710091445-sdb.direct
+
+   The following build artifacts were used to create the image(s):
+     ROOTFS_DIR:                   /home/stephano/yocto/build/tmp-glibc/work/qemux86-oe-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/rootfs
+     BOOTIMG_DIR:                  /home/stephano/yocto/build/tmp-glibc/work/qemux86-oe-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/recipe-sysroot/usr/share
+     KERNEL_DIR:                   /home/stephano/yocto/build/tmp-glibc/deploy/images/qemux86
+     NATIVE_SYSROOT:               /home/stephano/yocto/build/tmp-glibc/work/i586-oe-linux/wic-tools/1.0-r0/recipe-sysroot-native
+
+   INFO: The image(s) were created using OE kickstart file:
+     test.wks
+
+For this example,
+:term:`MACHINE` did not have to be
+specified in the ``local.conf`` file since the artifact is manually
+specified.
+
+Using Wic to Manipulate an Image
+--------------------------------
+
+Wic image manipulation allows you to shorten turnaround time during
+image development. For example, you can use Wic to delete the kernel
+partition of a Wic image and then insert a newly built kernel. This
+saves you time from having to rebuild the entire image each time you
+modify the kernel.
+
+.. note::
+
+   In order to use Wic to manipulate a Wic image as in this example,
+   your development machine must have the ``mtools`` package installed.
+
+The following example examines the contents of the Wic image, deletes
+the existing kernel, and then inserts a new kernel:
+
+#. *List the Partitions:* Use the ``wic ls`` command to list all the
+   partitions in the Wic image::
+
+      $ wic ls tmp/deploy/images/qemux86/core-image-minimal-qemux86.wic
+      Num     Start        End          Size      Fstype
+       1       1048576     25041919     23993344  fat16
+       2      25165824     72157183     46991360  ext4
+
+   The previous output shows two partitions in the
+   ``core-image-minimal-qemux86.wic`` image.
+
+#. *Examine a Particular Partition:* Use the ``wic ls`` command again
+   but in a different form to examine a particular partition.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      You can get command usage on any Wic command using the following
+      form::
+
+              $ wic help command
+
+
+      For example, the following command shows you the various ways to
+      use the
+      wic ls
+      command::
+
+              $ wic help ls
+
+
+   The following command shows what is in partition one::
+
+        $ wic ls tmp/deploy/images/qemux86/core-image-minimal-qemux86.wic:1
+        Volume in drive : is boot
+         Volume Serial Number is E894-1809
+        Directory for ::/
+
+        libcom32 c32    186500 2017-10-09  16:06
+        libutil  c32     24148 2017-10-09  16:06
+        syslinux cfg       220 2017-10-09  16:06
+        vesamenu c32     27104 2017-10-09  16:06
+        vmlinuz        6904608 2017-10-09  16:06
+                5 files           7 142 580 bytes
+                                 16 582 656 bytes free
+
+   The previous output shows five files, with the
+   ``vmlinuz`` being the kernel.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      If you see the following error, you need to update or create a
+      ``~/.mtoolsrc`` file and be sure to have the line "mtools_skip_check=1"
+      in the file. Then, run the Wic command again::
+
+              ERROR: _exec_cmd: /usr/bin/mdir -i /tmp/wic-parttfokuwra ::/ returned '1' instead of 0
+               output: Total number of sectors (47824) not a multiple of sectors per track (32)!
+               Add mtools_skip_check=1 to your .mtoolsrc file to skip this test
+
+
+#. *Remove the Old Kernel:* Use the ``wic rm`` command to remove the
+   ``vmlinuz`` file (kernel)::
+
+      $ wic rm tmp/deploy/images/qemux86/core-image-minimal-qemux86.wic:1/vmlinuz
+
+#. *Add In the New Kernel:* Use the ``wic cp`` command to add the
+   updated kernel to the Wic image. Depending on how you built your
+   kernel, it could be in different places. If you used ``devtool`` and
+   an SDK to build your kernel, it resides in the ``tmp/work`` directory
+   of the extensible SDK. If you used ``make`` to build the kernel, the
+   kernel will be in the ``workspace/sources`` area.
+
+   The following example assumes ``devtool`` was used to build the
+   kernel::
+
+      $ wic cp poky_sdk/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/linux-yocto/4.12.12+git999-r0/linux-yocto-4.12.12+git999/arch/x86/boot/bzImage \
+               poky/build/tmp/deploy/images/qemux86/core-image-minimal-qemux86.wic:1/vmlinuz
+
+   Once the new kernel is added back into the image, you can use the
+   ``dd`` command or :ref:`bmaptool
+   <dev-manual/bmaptool:flashing images using \`\`bmaptool\`\`>`
+   to flash your wic image onto an SD card or USB stick and test your
+   target.
+
+   .. note::
+
+      Using ``bmaptool`` is generally 10 to 20 times faster than using ``dd``.
+
diff --git a/documentation/dev-manual/x32-psabi.rst b/documentation/dev-manual/x32-psabi.rst
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..92b1f96fa4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/documentation/dev-manual/x32-psabi.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
+
+Using x32 psABI
+***************
+
+x32 processor-specific Application Binary Interface (`x32
+psABI <https://software.intel.com/en-us/node/628948>`__) is a native
+32-bit processor-specific ABI for Intel 64 (x86-64) architectures. An
+ABI defines the calling conventions between functions in a processing
+environment. The interface determines what registers are used and what
+the sizes are for various C data types.
+
+Some processing environments prefer using 32-bit applications even when
+running on Intel 64-bit platforms. Consider the i386 psABI, which is a
+very old 32-bit ABI for Intel 64-bit platforms. The i386 psABI does not
+provide efficient use and access of the Intel 64-bit processor
+resources, leaving the system underutilized. Now consider the x86_64
+psABI. This ABI is newer and uses 64-bits for data sizes and program
+pointers. The extra bits increase the footprint size of the programs,
+libraries, and also increases the memory and file system size
+requirements. Executing under the x32 psABI enables user programs to
+utilize CPU and system resources more efficiently while keeping the
+memory footprint of the applications low. Extra bits are used for
+registers but not for addressing mechanisms.
+
+The Yocto Project supports the final specifications of x32 psABI as
+follows:
+
+-  You can create packages and images in x32 psABI format on x86_64
+   architecture targets.
+
+-  You can successfully build recipes with the x32 toolchain.
+
+-  You can create and boot ``core-image-minimal`` and
+   ``core-image-sato`` images.
+
+-  There is RPM Package Manager (RPM) support for x32 binaries.
+
+-  There is support for large images.
+
+To use the x32 psABI, you need to edit your ``conf/local.conf``
+configuration file as follows::
+
+   MACHINE = "qemux86-64"
+   DEFAULTTUNE = "x86-64-x32"
+   baselib = "${@d.getVar('BASE_LIB:tune-' + (d.getVar('DEFAULTTUNE') \
+       or 'INVALID')) or 'lib'}"
+
+Once you have set
+up your configuration file, use BitBake to build an image that supports
+the x32 psABI. Here is an example::
+
+   $ bitbake core-image-sato
+